JP6723666B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a gaming machine including a front frame provided with a light emitting device has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1). The light emitting device emits light in a special mode different from the normal time when some abnormality or trouble occurs in the gaming machine, and can notify the occurrence of the abnormality or trouble to the outside.

JP, 2008-079163, A (paragraph [0024], and Drawing 1).

However, in the same manner as in the past, it was difficult to say that it is sufficient to notify the outside of the occurrence of abnormality or malfunction.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying the occurrence of an abnormality or a defect in a new manner to the outside.

The following are effective solutions for achieving the above-mentioned object. The operation and the like will be described as necessary. Further, for ease of understanding, the configurations and the like corresponding to the embodiments of the invention are also shown as appropriate, but the present invention is not limited thereto.

(Solution 1)
A gaming machine provided with a gaming board for playing a game , wherein a body frame on which the gaming board is provided, a front frame rotatably supported by the body frame, and a front frame, which are provided on the front frame and are related to the game. as well as a possible emission Te, front frame illuminating means comprising a front frame emission substrate abnormality or defect in the gaming machine plurality of light emitting elements capable of emitting light at normal time and a different manner when produced is mounted on the front mounting surface And a white coating film is formed on the front mounting surface of the front frame light emitting substrate, and a notation portion formed in yellow on the white coating film and capable of specifying each of the plurality of light emitting elements is formed. is, the front frame light emitting means, when the front frame is in the open state, can be viewed from the rear of the front frame as well as from the front of it is the front frame that emits light in the normal manner different from A gaming machine provided on the front frame as described above.
(Solution 2)
The gaming machine according to the solving means 1, wherein the gaming board partially has a white area portion.

This gaming machine is capable of playing a game and has a front frame and a front frame light emitting means. The front frame is provided so as to be openable and closable, and the front frame light emitting means is provided on the front frame and is capable of emitting light in a manner different from a normal time when an abnormality or malfunction occurs in the gaming machine. When the frame is in the open state, the front frame is provided so that it can be seen not only from the front of the front frame but also from the rear of the front frame that light is emitted in a manner different from the normal state.

In the conventional gaming machine, when the front frame is in the open state, it is possible to visually recognize the light emission from the direction (front side) facing the front side of the front frame to inform the occurrence of abnormality or trouble to the outside, while the rear side of the front frame. There is a problem in that it is difficult to visually recognize the light emission that informs the outside of the occurrence of abnormality or trouble from the direction (backward) facing the. In this regard, in the present invention, in the state where the front frame is opened, the light emission that informs the outside of the occurrence of the abnormality or the defect is visually recognized from both the front side of the front frame and the rear side of the front frame. can do. As a result, in the game hall, the aisle side facing the front side of the front frame and the aisle side facing the rear side of the front frame, both the aisle side and the staff such as the clerk in the game hall can be promptly caused to have an abnormality or trouble. It can be communicated and the work efficiency of the game hall can be improved (see paragraphs [2595] to [2599]).

In the present embodiment, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of FIG. 1 corresponds to a gaming machine, the door frame 3 of FIG. 10 corresponds to a front frame, the speaker bracket 463 of FIG. 73, the top side speaker 464, the acoustic decoration substrate 469, The speaker illumination unit composed of the transparent plate and the transparent plate corresponds to the front frame light emitting means.

(Solution 2)
The gaming machine according to the solving means 1, wherein the gaming machine is a rotating-body type gaming machine.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, since the gaming machine is a rotating type gaming machine, the action and effect of the solving means 1 can be obtained in the rotating type gaming machine. As a basic configuration of the spinning drum type gaming machine, after a variable display of a symbol information sequence consisting of a plurality of symbol information (for example, a plurality of reel sequences with a plurality of symbol information), the display result of the symbol information is stopped and displayed. Along with the variable display means, the variable display of the symbol information is started based on the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the start lever), and based on the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or the lapse of a predetermined time. Stop the variable display of the symbol information. Then, a profit-giving state generating means for generating a profit-giving state (big hit game state) is provided on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and a medal is used as a game medium to generate a profit-giving state. It is configured such that a large number of medals are sometimes paid out.

(Solution 3)
The gaming machine according to Solution 1, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a spinning drum type gaming machine are fused.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, since the gaming machine is a fusion gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a rotating drum type gaming machine are fused, in a fusion gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a spinning drum type gaming machine are fused, The action and effect of the solving means 1 can be obtained. As a basic configuration of a fusion gaming machine that fuses a pachinko gaming machine and a rotating drum type gaming machine, a symbol information string consisting of a plurality of symbol information (for example, a plurality of reel rows with a plurality of symbols) is variably displayed. After that, with the variable display means for stopping and displaying the display result of the symbol information, the variable display of the symbol information is started based on the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the starting lever), and the stop operation means (for example, stop). The variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the button) or the lapse of a predetermined time. Then, with the profit giving state generating means for generating a profit giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, a game ball is used as a game medium, and the profit giving state is It is configured such that a large amount of game balls are paid out at the time of occurrence.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to notify the outside of the occurrence of abnormality or malfunction in a new manner.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for every main member and saw it from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame that is disassembled and seen from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) seen from the lower front side. It is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of a door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with a lid member removed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate decoration unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate decoration unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in the dish unit from the advancing/retreating direction of the production operation section button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotation drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotation drive unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and was seen from the front right. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit and was seen from the front lower side. (A) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a lower position, (b) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a raised position. It is the explanation drawing which shows the relationship between the production operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a production operation ring and a production operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the production operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in a raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a dish unit when is pressed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of a door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front lower part. It is a front view of a door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing the door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. It is the rear cross-sectional view which cut|disconnected the delivery apparatus of the delivery unit in the center of the front-back direction of the delivery blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear direction center of the dispensing blade when the ball-removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the lower back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit for every main structure and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from back. It is an expanded side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. (A) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail and the like are assembled in a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101(a) disassembled and seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area|region where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank flows in the upper part of the main frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main-body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back of the hinge side. It is a front view of a game board in which a front component member, a game panel, a front unit and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the front component members, the game panel, the front unit and the like are made transparent. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front by disassembling each main member of the game board. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C in FIG. 107. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nail. (A) is a perspective view of a front constituent member and a game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front constituent member and the game panel as viewed from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the table unit in a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the table unit in the game board from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the starting opening unit and side unit of the front unit as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the starting opening unit and side unit of the front unit as seen from the rear, and (c) is It is a left side view of a starting opening unit, and (d) is a left side view of a side unit. It is explanatory drawing which compared the inclination of the front surface of a general winning a prize mouth, and the inclination of the door member of a variable winning a prize mouth in an open state. It is an enlarged front view showing portions of a starting opening unit and a side unit in a game board. (A) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 1st attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the 1st attacker unit and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the 1st special winning opening door in a 1st attacker unit from a left side surface. It is explanatory drawing which shows the passage of the game ball in a 1st attacker unit in a cross section. (A) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit viewed from the back. It is a front view of a center accessory. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in the front unit from the front, (b) is the 2nd attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in the front unit It is the perspective view which looked at from the back. It is an explanatory view showing a passage of a game ball in a second attacker unit and a side right middle unit in a cross section. It is explanatory drawing which expanded the right part in the game area in FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main composition and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main composition and was seen from the back. It is the front view of the pachinko machine which expands and shows the upper left corner of the game board in the state where the door frame is made transparent. (A) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit of the back unit as seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back rear effect unit in a back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked the back rear effect unit in a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear production unit and was seen from back. It is the explanation drawing which shows the movable constitution of the back behind production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back behind production unit. It is a front view which shows a back back movable decoration with a back back decoration board. 142A is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 142, and FIG. 142B is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 142. (A) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back back movable decoration body and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear movable decoration body and was seen from back. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of back back movable decoration. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light guide radiating plate and the back rear decoration substrate in the front view of FIG. 147 with a broken line. (A) is a front view showing a part of a decorative body in a back and rear movable decorative body, (b) is a front view showing a part of a decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body of (a), (c) [Fig. 4] is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the rear rear decorative substrate in the same portion as the decorative body in (a). It is an expanded sectional view which expands and shows the upper part of FIG. 143 (a). FIG. 160 is an exploded view showing an exploded view of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 150. It is explanatory drawing which expands a part of front surface of a back back movable decoration and shows the relationship between a decoration by a decoration and a decoration sheet, and a light guide radiation plate and a back and back decoration board. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a light guide radiation board and a back decoration board in a site|part of 1st LED in a cross section, (b) shows 2nd LED on the optical axis of 1st LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect|action of the light guide radiating plate in the site|part which exists from the front, (c) is the LED accommodating part of the light guide radiating plate with respect to the 2nd decorative part in a decorative body and a decorative sheet, and 1st LED of a back rear decorative substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement|positioning from the front. It is a front view which expands a part of back decoration board and shows with copper foil of a circuit pattern. (A) is a front view of a back-rear decoration board, (b) is a rear view of a back-rear decoration board. (A) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of a decorative body in a back-and-back movable decorative body, and (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of a decorative body having a metal decorative portion of a different form from (a). It is a figure and (c) is an expanded sectional view which shows a part of ornamental body which has a metal decorative part of a form different from (a) and (b). (A) is an explanatory view showing in cross section the configuration of a back-rear movable ornament of the second embodiment different from the back-rear movable ornament of Fig. 142, and (b) is a back-rear movable ornament of the third embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing composition of in a section, and (c) is an explanatory view showing composition of a back back movable decoration of a fourth embodiment in section. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower left production unit and back lower right production unit in the back unit from the front, and (b) is seen the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit in the back unit from behind. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit, and was seen from the back. It is the explanation drawing which shows the movable constitution of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower back middle production unit in a back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower back middle production unit in a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the inside-behind-the-under-elevation mechanism of the inside-behind-the-stage production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the inside-behind-the-under-elevation mechanism of the inside-behind-the-stage production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the lower back middle decoration body unit of the lower back middle production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back lower middle decoration body unit of the back lower middle effect unit, and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising/lowering of the lower back middle decorating body unit by the lower back middle raising/lowering mechanism in a lower back inside production unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure concerning rotation of the back lower middle rotation decoration body of the back lower middle decoration body unit in a back bottom middle effect production unit from a front, (b) is a stop position of a back lower middle rotation decoration body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between each and each detection sensor by a table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement|positioning of LED of the lower back middle decoration body unit in the lower back middle effect unit from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back effect unit in the back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back effect unit in the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back side production unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back side production unit for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up and down decoration body unit in the back up production unit and was seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up/down lifting decorative body unit in the back unit, which is disassembled and seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rotation mechanism of the back upper front rotation decoration body in a back upper production unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the raising/lowering mechanism of the back side elevation decoration body unit in a back side production unit from the front, (b) is a back side elevation decoration with the back side elevation decoration body unit moved to the appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising/lowering mechanism of a body unit and the rotation mechanism of a back upper back rotation decoration body from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows a decorative substrate from the front in the state which moved the back up and down decoration body unit in the back up production unit to the appearance position. (A) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear left production unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear left production unit for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear left decorative body unit of the back rear left effect|production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear left decoration body unit of the back rear left effect|production unit, and was seen from back. It is the explanation drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back rear left production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back rear left decorative body unit in the back rear left effect|production unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear right production unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear right production unit disassembled for each main member and seen from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear right decorative body unit of the back rear right effect|production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear right decorative body unit of the back rear right effect|production unit, and was seen from back. It is the explanation drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back rear right production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back rear right decorative body unit in the back rear right effect|production unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed one back front left decoration body unit in the back front left production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed one back front left decoration body unit in the back front left production unit, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view which shows a shutter group in a back front left production unit in a closed state, and (b) is a front view which shows a shutter group in a back front left production unit in an open state. (A) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed one back front right decoration body unit in the back front right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed one back front right ornamental unit in a back front right production unit, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view showing a shutter group in a back front right performance unit in a closed state, and (b) is a front view showing a shutter group in a back front right performance unit in an open state. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the rear rear movable decorative body of the rear rear production unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body of the lower back middle effect unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. The back-up rear rotating decorative body of the back-up rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-rear left rotating decorative body of the back-rear left effecting unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back of the back-rear right effecting unit It is a front view of the game board showing the rear right rotating decorative body moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, respectively. The state in which the back-rear left rotating decorative body of the back-rear left rendering unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position and the back-rear right rotating decorative body of the back-rear right rendering unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown by. It is the front view of the game board which shows the shutter unit of the back front left production unit and the shutter unit of the back front right production unit respectively from the closed state to the open state. The rear back movable decorative body of the rear rear effect unit from the retracted position to the emergence position, the rear rear rear rotating decorative body of the rear rear effect unit from the retracted position to the emergence position, the rear rear left rotatable decorative body of the rear rear left unit From the retracted position to the first appearance position, the back rear right rotating decorative body of the back rear right effect unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back lower middle rotating decorative body of the back lower middle effect unit lifted from the lowered position It is a front view of the game board shown in a state of being moved to each position. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine roughly. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine shown with a self-supporting auxiliary member. FIG. 6 is a front perspective view (a) and a rear perspective view (b) of a drawer connector mounted on a relay board provided in a main body frame. It is a figure (a)-(c) which prevents the solder bridge of each terminal of a main body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and is a DIP type small connector electrically connected with a main body frame side drawer connector (concave type). (D)-(f) which prevent the solder bridge of each terminal of FIG. It is a figure (a) which shows the modification of FIG.209(c), and a figure (b) which shows the modification of FIG.209(f). It is a figure which shows the modification which forms the terminal and the solder escape pattern of the last step|paragraph with a predetermined distance. It is the schematic (a) of the over resist given to each terminal of a main body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and the schematic (b) of the cross section of the XX line in (a). It is the schematic (a) of the copper foil side by the surface (mounting surface) side of the board|substrate in which a surface mounting type connector is mounted, and is the schematic (b) surface (mounting surface) of a board|substrate. 213 is a continuation of FIG. 213, is an enlarged view of the portion A of FIG. 213(b), and is a schematic view (c) of the over-resist applied to the housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector; It is the schematic (d) of the cross section of the YY line. It is the schematic (a) of the copper foil side by the surface (mounting surface) side of the board|substrate by which the surface mounting type connector in a modification is mounted, and is the schematic (b) surface of a board|substrate (mounting surface). 215 is a continuation of FIG. 215, is an enlarged view of the portion B of FIG. 215(b), and is a schematic view (c) of the over-resist applied to the housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector; It is the schematic (d) of the cross section of the ZZ line. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. It is a figure which shows the shape of the solid land in the part where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib formed on the base body was in contact with the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board, and the copper foil on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. It is a schematic diagram of the surface (a), is a schematic diagram of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (b). It is a figure which shows the shape of the resist with respect to the land in flowing a peripheral control board into a solder bath. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of the peripheral control unit concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the XX line of FIG. 224 which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is an A arrow line view of Drawing 224 concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a view on arrow A of FIG. 224 according to the third embodiment. Taking out the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board that makes good contact between the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board and the conductive elastic member according to the third embodiment. It is a figure showing a method, and is a schematic diagram of a copper foil side of a back side (solder side) of a peripheral control board (bare example (a)), a schematic diagram of a back side (solder side) of a peripheral control board (bare example (b)). , A schematic view of the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (an example in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged (c)), a schematic view of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (through surface having lands) It is an example (d) in which a plurality of holes are arranged. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the attachment procedure of a peripheral control board etc. which concern on 4th Embodiment. It is a figure (a) which shows the land formed around the through-hole of the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board etc. which concern on 4th Embodiment, and the figure (b) which shows a foil removal area. The figure which shows the land formed around the through-hole of the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board etc. which concern on 4th Embodiment (a), the figure which shows a land and a screwing designation symbol (b), foil removal area. It is a figure (c) which shows. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 5th embodiment. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 5th embodiment. The figure which shows a part of rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit which concerns on 5th Embodiment (a), the figure which shows a part of base body which comprises a peripheral control unit so that the state by which the electroconductive elastic member was inserted can be seen. It is a figure (b) which shows a part of rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit cut out by the CL line in (a). 238 is a continuation of FIG. 238 and is a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit in which a part of the peripheral control unit is cut off so that a state in which the conductive elastic member is pressed against the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 and deformed can be seen. It is a figure (c) which shows some. It is a front part enlarged view of a cover body which constitutes a peripheral control unit which has an opening which can insert a tip part of a contact probe concerning a 5th embodiment and can make it contact. Taking out the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the specific board which makes good contact between the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the specific board and the conductive elastic member according to the fifth embodiment. It is a figure showing a method, and is a schematic diagram of a copper foil side of a back surface (solder side) of a specific board (bare example (a)), a schematic view of the back side (solder side) of a specific board (bare example (b)). , A schematic view of a copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) of a specific board (an example in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged (c)), a schematic view of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific board (through having land) It is an example (d) in which a plurality of holes are arranged. It is a front perspective view of a flexible flat cable. It is a figure (a) which shows the state where the flexible flat cable was electrically connected with the connector of the back side of a production display, and is a figure which shows the state where the flexible flat cable was electrically connected with the connector of a liquid crystal output board. 2B) is a partially enlarged view of the B portion shown in FIG. 7A and the C portion shown in FIG. 7B, showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to each connector through the cutout portion. It is a figure (c). It is a figure (a) which shows the state where the flexible flat cable is not electrically normally connected with the connector on the back side of a production display device, and the flexible flat cable is electrically normally connected with the connector of a liquid crystal output substrate. It is a figure (b) which shows the state which does not exist. It is a figure (a) which shows arrangement|positioning of the connector of a relay board, and a figure (b) which shows the state which the connector of wiring or a harness was normally connected with respect to the connector of a relay board, and is a figure with respect to the connector of a relay board. It is a figure (c) showing the state where the connector of wiring and a harness is not normally connected. 245 is a modified example of FIG. 245 and is a diagram (a) showing a layout of connectors on a relay board and a component product layout line, showing a state in which wiring and harness connectors are normally connected to the connectors on the relay board. It is a figure (b), and is a figure (c) showing the state where a connector of wiring or a harness is not normally connected to a connector of a relay board. It is the partial perspective view which looked at the game board from the back which explains the field which attaches a wiring groove, and the figure which shows the state where the wiring groove concerning a 1st embodiment was attached to the back side of the game board. It is a continuation of FIG. 247 and is a diagram (c) showing a state in which the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back surface side of the game board. It is a perspective view showing a state of various wirings when the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is mounted on the back surface side of the game board and the game board is viewed from behind. It is a perspective view showing a state of various wiring when the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is mounted on the back surface side of the game board and the game board is viewed from the front. It is a perspective view showing a state of various wirings when the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back surface side of the game board and the game board is viewed from behind. It is the perspective view which shows the state of various wiring when the wiring groove which concerns on 2nd Embodiment is attached to the back surface side of the game board and the game board is seen from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the light emission production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the light emission production unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the light emission production unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the light emission production unit and was seen from back. It is a front view which shows the arrangement|positioning relationship of an LED bare chip and a light guide plate. It is a front view showing a diffusion sheet arranged on the surface of a light guide plate. It is a figure (a) showing the state where the flexible flat cable was electrically connected with the connector of the LED board, and is an enlarged view of the Z section shown in (a), and shows the difference of the flexible flat cable to the connector of the LED board. It is a figure (b) which shows the state where insertion is normal, and is an enlarged view of the Z section shown in (a), and is a figure which shows the abnormal state where insertion of the flexible flat cable into the connector of the LED substrate is insufficient. It is (c). It is a block diagram explaining electrical connection of each decoration board with which a door frame is equipped. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decorative substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits. It is a schematic diagram of an arrangement method of a LED constant current drive circuit. It is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the D section of FIG. 263. It is a configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment. It is a configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance and the like according to the third embodiment. FIG. 27 is an enlarged view of the D′ portion of FIG. 265 or the D″ portion of FIG. 266 seen from the LED non-mounting surface. It is a configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance and the like according to the fourth embodiment. It is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the D" part of FIG. 268. A method of arranging a surface display unit capable of specifying LEDs corresponding to a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of a decorative substrate, in the case of centralized arrangement (1) (a) and distributed arrangement It is the schematic which shows (the 1) (b), the case of a centralized arrangement (the 2) (c), and the case of a distributed arrangement (the 2) (d), respectively. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of main control side power supply turn-on. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control-side power-on process of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting change processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of error display processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of set value confirmation display processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply of a payout control part. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing in FIG. 277. FIG. FIG. 288 is a flowchart illustrating a continuation of the payout control unit power-on process following FIG. 278. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power failure notice signal interruption processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the special design and the special electric auditors product control processing which are executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the hit judging processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a hit determination table used in the lottery process for the big hit, (B) is a big hit symbol design determination table used in the lottery process for the type of big hit, (C) is a small hit It is a small hit symbol design determination table used in the lottery process for the type. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the 1st special design stop design setting processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the 1st special design fluctuation processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the big hit control processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a time chart showing a control state when the movable decorative body is driven, and (B) is a time chart showing a control state when the movable decorative body is driven in the modified example. It is a time chart which shows the control state at the time of driving of a movable decoration. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation which exposes a movable decoration body to the front of a production display device. It is a time chart which shows a control state at the time of player participation type production. It is a side view which shows typically the light from the light emission decoration body in a standby position seeing a pachinko machine from the side. It is a side view which shows typically the light from the light emission decoration body in the appearance position seeing a pachinko machine from the side. It is a figure which shows the back rear decoration substrate in which several holes were provided. It is a front view which shows the light emission area|region in the back side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a light emitting region on a side surface side of the game board as viewed from the front left. It is a perspective view showing a light emitting area on a side surface of the game board as viewed from the left rear. It is a figure which shows the opening provided in the back surface side of the effect display device. It is an expansion schematic diagram which shows a part of cross section cut|disconnected by CC line of FIG. 99 (a). It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 which is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the elevated position, as viewed from the front right. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is driven.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in a front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extends vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the outer frame upper member 30 are attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility of a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60, the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4 and the main body This is to rotatably support the lower frame hinge assembly 520 on the same axis, and to attach the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the lower outer frame assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is formed. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted and the sound is emitted to the front, so that the player can hear a more deep bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the performance operation unit 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, it is possible to entertain the player by operating the production operation unit 301.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Body frame upper hinge member 510 and main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and a game. A ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. The payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 having the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 are covered. A back cover 640, a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are provided.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used for the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a front component member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a periphery arranged behind the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. , A rear unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect according to a game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstruction nails N (in this embodiment, brass are used) having a gold color and are in contact with the game balls B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. , A general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate section 2003, a second starting for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B It has a mouth 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006. The obstacle nail N having a gold color is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, the player can hit the game ball B by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B becomes the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. As a result, the player can entertain the player with the operation of driving the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 in accordance with the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B in the game area 5a, the rear rear effect unit 3100, and the lower back. Left rendering unit 3200, back lower right rendering unit 3250, back lower middle rendering unit 3300, back rendering unit 3400, back rear left rendering unit 3500, back rear right rendering unit 3600, back front left rendering unit 3700, back front right rendering It is possible to entertain the player by causing the unit 3800 or the like to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, or the like.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in a front view extends vertically.

As shown, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends to each other, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper surface left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 when the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially rotatably supports the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 respectively extend vertically and are arranged laterally apart from each other. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame 4 is for opening and closing.

First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 includes a recessed portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in a rear side portion of the left side surface that is divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a right side portion that is opposite to the recessed portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b bulging toward one side and a cavity portion 11c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 11b are provided. The outer frame left member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the rear lower lateral fixing portion 12c into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11 and brings the horizontal fixing portion 12a into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is brought into contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 contacts the horizontal fixing portion 12a with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-like upper horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, the plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. And a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending in a short direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 contacts the rear surface of the contact portion 13d with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and contacts the left side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. When the screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, the lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 on the left end side, and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, screws are screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, so that the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connection member that is attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 includes a recessed portion 21a that is flatly recessed to the left at a rear side portion of the right side surface that is divided into three in the front-rear direction, and a left side portion that is opposite to the recessed portion 21a. The bulging portion 21b bulging toward one side and the cavity portion 21c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 21b are provided. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are enhanced by the recess 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 allows the rear lower lateral fixing portion 22c to be inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and causes the horizontal fixing portion 22a to abut on the upper end of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower lateral fixing portion 22c on the rear side abutting on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the right end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat horizontal lower fixing portion 23c extending downward from the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b behind the horizontal fixing portion, and the left side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. And a flat plate-shaped abutting portion 23d extending in a short direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 23d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and makes the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, the screws are screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 makes the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, so that the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with a flat plate-like mounting portion 24a, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. And a plate-like hooking piece portion 24b to which the upper frame hook 653 is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a flat plate shape, and extends from the front side of the attachment portion 25a to the left. The plate-like hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and the insertion which allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 18. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are spaced apart from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later in the left-right direction.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with notches 30a that are vertically penetrated and are respectively recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on the left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at the left and right ends, respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b in which the upper surface and the front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame that is disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and the outer frame lower member 41 that extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front panel member 42, which is arranged in front of the member 41, extends leftward and rightward along the outer frame lower member 41, and has an open rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42. A box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extends to the left and the front is open, and a ball biting prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. And a mechanism 44.

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The length of the outer frame lower member 41 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41a that are vertically penetrated and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at the left and right ends, respectively. As a result, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

The outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the position near the rear in the center of the front-rear direction to the front end side. The recess 41b maximizes the volume of the curtain plate inner space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43.

The curtain plate front member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the curtain plate front member 42 by the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 and becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The front curtain plate member 42 has an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 extends slightly shorter in the left-right direction than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape having an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface, the curtain plate rear member 43 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a which is a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends leftward and rightward and projects upward and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a at the center portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end thereof is located higher toward the rear side from the front end side which is coincident with a general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylindrical portion 43a. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and thus the speaker unit The enclosure 624 is formed by communicating with the internal space of 620a.

The ball catching prevention mechanism 44 is a game ball B between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 due to the game ball B staying at the site of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. This is to prevent the product from being caught.

The ball catching mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and has a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later, is exposed to the mounting portion 44a. A first outlet 44b that is open upward at the left end of 44a, a second outlet 44c that is open upward to the right of the first outlet 44b in the mounting portion 44a, and A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end projecting forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and inclined so that the upper surface thereof is positioned upward as it goes rearward. And a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first outlet 44b and the second outlet 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball catching prevention mechanism 44 is provided when an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. By the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placing portion 44a, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an incorrect tool comes into contact with the upright wall portion 44d and bends upward, it comes into contact with the forwardly projecting upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, and further intrusion. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped on the placing portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion. Since 44d prevents the outer frame 2 from moving rearward, the game ball B easily stays on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B is retained on the placing portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the mounting portion 44a is discharged to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first hole. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45, which are arranged on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, so as to be laterally separated from each other, and an opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-like grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending in the front-rear direction, which are attached inside the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 are for contacting the lower ends of the door frames 3 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is made of punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 uses two cylinders to connect the curtain plate internal space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46. The port member 47 has two cylinders each having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies a low sound emitted backward (in the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 according to the Helmholtz resonance principle. As a result, rich bass can be emitted to the front of the outer frame 2 (on the side of the player). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, and it is possible to make the player hear heavy bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connecting cylinder part 43 a and the lower end of the connecting part 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. In addition, the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is prevented from leaking from between the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame disassembled as seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 21B is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly as seen from the lower front side. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is mounted on the outer frame upper hinge member 51 and the outer frame upper hinge member 51 which are mounted on the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the outer frame hinge member 51.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape, and extends upward from a front side of the upper fixing portion 51a, which is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extension portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends vertically to the center of the front extension portion 51b from the middle of the right side of the front extension portion 51b toward the front, and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a and an edge extending from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. The horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided with a flat plate-shaped end wall portion 51e. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a main body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The locking member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock main body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from a rear end of the lock main body 52a, and a leftward extending from a rear end of the lock main body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely to the front left and a mounting hole 52d vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extension portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the attachment screw 53.

The lock member 52, when attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, allows the lock body 52a to block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with the portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space for accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a.

The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c. Can be in the state of being fully threaded. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a that is behind the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size that passes through the horizontal portion 60a in the vertical direction and through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed at an upper portion in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and is not illustrated. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in front of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a of the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, so that it rolls to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling rearward of the body frame 4, and thus the outer frame. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the site of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the left front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached via the main body frame 4 so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side. Has been. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a quadrangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. Of the handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door frame, the tray unit 200 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the tray unit 200 attached to the left front portion of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 mounted on the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410. And a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of.

The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose front view extends vertically and penetrates in the front and back, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view, and a speaker duct 103 mounted on the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 in the rear view, and the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 in the rear view. The rear handle relay substrate 106, the door frame main relay substrate 104, and a part of the door frame sub relay substrate 105 which cover from the rear side, the door frame relay substrate cover 107, and the handle rear relay substrate 106 which covers from the rear side. The handle rear relay substrate cover 108 and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable are provided.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The frame lower hinge member 125, the opening/closing cylinder lock 130 mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part on the right side in rear view of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4. Note that, hereinafter, the frame body including the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 may be referred to as a “front frame”.

The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 is provided with a handle 182 that can be rotated by a player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved to the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launching device 540. It is for performing a game that is driven into.

[3-1. Overall structure of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side of the front view can be hingedly rotated with respect to the main body frame 4, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is openably and closably closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, and a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right of the front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, The speaker frame 103 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 mounted near the rear end of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view, and a door frame main relay in the lower rear part of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and the handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 in the lower rear portion of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A handle rear relay substrate cover 108 which is mounted on the rear side of the rear cover 106 and covers the rear relay substrate 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 which is mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. I have it.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The frame lower hinge member 125, the opening/closing cylinder lock 130 mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part on the right side in rear view of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent crime prevention cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 has a door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a substantially rectangular inner peripheral shape in a front view that is vertically extended. The door window 101a has upper and left and right sides that form an inner circumference approaching the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and a lower side that forms an inner circumference vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. In this way, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed at a lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b, which is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes further forward than the right end side, a handle mounting seat surface 101b, and a door window 101a. And a recessed portion in the vicinity of the right end in the front view from the rear surface toward the front, and an insertion concave portion 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion concave portion 101c that penetrates in the front and rear direction of the cylinder lock 130. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated forward and backward on the left side in a front view, and the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. And a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the above.

Further, the door frame base 101 extends to the left from the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. A passage opening 101f, a top plate ball passage opening 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and faces the penetration ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h is provided, which is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i which are formed in a lower left corner (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) as viewed from the front and which penetrate through the front and rear. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located in the front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located rearward. The speaker 622 is located so that the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating forward and backward below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted into the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 penetrates the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle attaching member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from a rear end of the tubular portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a, and a tubular portion. A plurality of (three in the present embodiment) ridges 102c protruding into the portion 102a and extending over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 102a and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a. And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b to each other and that are arranged in plural in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a.

The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three protrusions 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle attachment member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c are aligned with the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be restricted.

In addition, since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 is attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, The axis of the tubular portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same inclined state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The speaker duct 103 has a rear end of a tubular portion located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, a sound (sound) emitted (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker opening 211b in the plate unit base 211, it is possible to satisfactorily guide the pachinko machine 1 to the front (player side).

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in a front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3 of the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangular shape with its outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an outer shape formed in an inverted L shape in which a rectangular shape extending left and right is combined on the right side in a front view of an upper portion of a rectangular shape extending vertically, and the door frame sub-relay board 105 extends vertically. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 is a handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. This is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration substrate 413, the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the various substrates of the body frame 4, and the main body. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are such that the door frame main relay board 104 and the portions extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the doors when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the rear part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The handle rear relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay substrate 106 connects the door frame main relay substrate 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the one-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 of the ball feeding unit 140. It is for relaying. The handle rear relay substrate 106 is in a state in which the rear side is covered with the handle rear relay substrate cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay substrate cover 107, the handle rear relay substrate cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side in front view being opened. In the assembled state of the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The handle rear relay substrate cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay substrate 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and has a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112, which are vertically spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left and right connecting the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the left end side of the left reinforcing frame 111, which is attached to the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extending rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 that connect the right reinforcing frame 112 to each other and a plurality of door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 that are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 are vertically spaced apart from each other. And a hook member 116 to be hooked.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are vertically spaced apart and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with a length substantially the same as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends in the left-right direction such that the vertical direction is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is cut out in a square shape downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The notch 114a is formed at a position that coincides with the upper dish ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is aligned with the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged at a distance from each other on the left and right, and is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It is provided with a pair of side piece portions that extend in a plate shape from the sides to the front side, and a plate-shaped front piece portion that connects the sides at the front ends of the pair of front extension portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. The hooks 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 are hooked on these hooking members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are punched from a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). In the door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. Then, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated relative to the main body frame 4. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be vertically movable, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame to move upward are provided.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a quadrangular shape in a front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. The door frame upper hinge pin 122, when assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, has a vertically extending portion penetrating from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of projecting pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is the upper side. The portion that extends above the protruding piece 121b and extends horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 of the body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is covered around the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward through the collar member 123.

The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 projects above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

When the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves a horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the entire door frame upper hinge pin 122 is removed. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 from below or pull it out. it can. Accordingly, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the body frame upper hinge member 510, the front left upper end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thereby, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 to the body frame 4 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a flat plate-like mounting piece 125a in a front view, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from a lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and has a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is, when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, located at a position coaxial with the vertically extending part of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b. Installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the hinge can be rotated by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. You can

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used to open and close the lock. The cylinder lock 130 is a columnar cylinder body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a cylinder hole attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the key hole 132 to be a regular cylinder. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear side, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end to the front at a position facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear side, and the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of cutout portions to rotate the rotation. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the dish unit body 252 of the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has the entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the ball exit 141b that is opened below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 that is opened, and a game ball that is closed from the front end of the front cover 141 and has a box shape that is opened at the front and that has entered through the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. A rear cover 142 which is a ball removing member 143 having a partition 143a for partitioning the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of 141, and the game balls B on the partition 143a of the ball removing member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. And a ball feeding solenoid 145.

In the ball feeding unit 140, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and the ball removing member 143 is arranged on the left side of the ball feeding member 144, Ball feeding solenoids 145 are respectively arranged on the right side of the feeding members 144.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 143 on the left side of the ball removing port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball removing member 143, which will be described later, extends from 141c forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide passage 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240. Also, it is formed so as to close the rearward-opened portion on the upstream end side of the ball guide passage 241c from the rear side.

The ball-removing member 143 divides the space between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b below the entrance 141a, and the upper surface of the partitioning portion 143a is lowered toward the ball-feeding member 144. Around a shaft that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in a V shape from the vicinity of the middle in the up and down direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. The pivot rod 143b rotatably supported on the rod 143b, the rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rod 143b, and the rod 143b below the rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a is provided. The operating rod 143c of the ball punching member 143 is formed so as to project forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34(a)). The operating rod 143c is an upper end ( Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking portion 144a, which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the entrance 141a and the partition 143a of the ball-removing member 143, and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a. A ball holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180° about the axis of rotation. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric from the axis of rotation in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking section 144a faces the partition section 143a and at the same time the ball holding section 144b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding section 144b covers the partition section 143a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hitting ball supply port 142a, and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The movement of the game ball B to the ball holding portion 144b (ball hitting supply port 142a) side is blocked by the blocking section 144a, and the gaming ball B remains on the partition section 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a, and the end of the ball holding part 144b on the side of the rod part 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition part 143a is held in the ball holding part 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip which swings the ball feeding operation rod 146 in the vertical direction. And a ball feeding crank 147 for rotating the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the up-down direction.

The ball feeding operation rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146 a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that an end (right end) on the opposite side of the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending in the front and rear direction. Has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 pulls the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the magnetic force generated, and feeds the ball around the right end. It rotates so that the left end side near the crank 147 moves upward. Then, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the self-weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward centering on the right end. It rotates like this and returns to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding solenoid 145 causes the ball feeding solenoid 145 to swing the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding crank 147 is engaged with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operation rod 146 and engages with the ball feeding operation rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a, which is engaged with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the side opposite to the side and is rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, so that the ball feeding crank 147 is moved through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operation rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held at the holding position. Turn to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 206) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to receive a moment such that it is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by a ball pulling member 143 pivotally supported or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding toward the front of the ball removing member 143 should come into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation thereof is restricted, in a normal state, the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition the ball. The game ball B never enters.

Then, when the player presses down the upper bowl ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the operation transmitting portion 242b moves downward. Along with this, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball removing member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partitioning portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. The partition is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a drops to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guide passage 241c of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 of the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 in which the operation transmitting portion 242b with which the working rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 contacts is formed upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the force is supplied with vigor, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 through the operating rod 143c, the ball-removing member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is partitioned. It can be prevented from bouncing back at 143a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35(b) and the like) which is recessed forward rightward in a rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and A fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in a front view extends to the left and right, and an upper piece portion 148a which is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center between a right side and a left side for a predetermined distance. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c each formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (the right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. .. The upper piece portion 148a of the tamperproof member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the tamperproof member 148 so that the right end in a front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. Thus, in plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the illegal gaming ball B attached with a string is driven from the upper plate through the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540, and is attached to the illegal gaming ball B. When a fraudulent act is performed in which the illegal game ball B is put in and out of the first starting opening 2002 or the like by operating the provided string, the illegal game ball B is launched (struck) by the ball launching device 540. The string attached to the illegal game ball B by force is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball B with a string attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. The foul cover unit 150 is, as shown in the figure, a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and has an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. And 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates the lower normal dispensing passage 610a of the lower tank ball passage unit 610 of the body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 211a of the dish unit 200. The ball passage 150a and a full tank receiving passage 610b that is open rearward on the lower right side of the through-ball passage 150a in a front view and is capable of communicating with the lower full tank delivery passage 610b of the main body frame 4 of the main body frame 4. And a mouth 150b.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 does not reach the inside of the game area 5a despite being launched by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 on the right side of the full-ball receiving port 150b when viewed from the front side. Foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving the game ball B (foul ball), and the game ball B received in the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c opening forward near the lower right corner of the front view. And a ball discharge port 150d communicating with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving port 150c, and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. A storage passage 150e having a possible width is provided.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and the lower end thereof is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The movable piece 153 is a flat plate, and the movable piece 153. A full tank detection sensor 154 for detecting the rotation in the direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 for urging the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In the foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is stored in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates as described above, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it is possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls B, and when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects a full tank, further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player or a person in charge of the game hall to that effect and urge the lower plate 202 to be completely filled.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through-ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening/closing door of the lower full tank ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 of the main body frame 4 described later. A door opening/closing contact portion 150f with which the operating protrusion 613a of 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface thereof moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening/closing abutting portion 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is removably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. The glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front side) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game is played. The front of the region 5a is closed.

The glass unit 160 is a frame-shaped glass frame 161 larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and attachable to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the inside of the glass frame 161 is closed so that the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. And a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the upper left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protrusion 163b of the glass unit attachment member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 97 ).

The glass unit mounting member 163 is a disk-shaped base portion 163a that is mounted rotatably around an axis line extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes in a rod shape from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis line. And a projecting portion 163b which is formed. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attaching member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is detached from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be detached in the reverse order of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotating position below the base portion 163a, the projecting portion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to the position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally separated from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat plate-shaped main body 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 that shortly projects rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171, and is separated left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward of the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front component member 1000, an out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to project into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 171 and the rear protruding piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to follow a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear protruding piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 is elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

The security cover 170, in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1, has a front surface of the main body 171 contacting a rear surface of the glass unit 160 (a rear end of the glass frame 161) and a portion protruding rearward from a lower side of the main body 171. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component member 1000. .. As a result, the gap between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attaching member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be driven by the player to drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle attaching member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the cover pedestal 183, which is attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183. And a transparent handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration substrate 184. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the handle decoration board 184 is a surface mounting type and is a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, a handle 182 attached to the front end, and a rotatably attached inner base 186 and handle base 181 to provide an outer periphery. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner member. A handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). The urging handle return spring 190 and one end side of which is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side of which is attached to the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biased in the direction.

In addition, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip end side that protrudes outward from the left side in a front view of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 and the base. A one-shot button 193 whose end side is behind the inner base 186 and is attached to the handle base 181 rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a one-shot button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting a pressing operation of the one-shot button 193. And an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding in the radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, the base 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in a state where the three grooves 181c are aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively formed in the three grooves 181c. When the handle base 181 is inserted, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

The handle 182 has four rotating shafts (shaft members 187), which are four protrusions 182a, 182b, third protrusions 182c, and 182d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction. Two slits 182e extending in an arcuate shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the other end of the handle return spring 190 are locked so as to project rearward from a position inside the slit 182e with respect to the rotation center. The locking projection 182f is provided.

The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a has a side surface in the clockwise direction in front view of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182, and bulges outward so as to bulge outward. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curved) so that it curves inward. The second protrusion 182b is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. It projects slightly lower. The second protrusion 182b has a side surface in the clockwise direction in front view that bulges outward so as to bulge outward, and a side surface in the counterclockwise direction that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

The third protrusion 182c is located such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and It projects at about half the height. The side surfaces on both sides of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction, which is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and It projects slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed into a substantially isosceles triangle with the side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three attachment bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this embodiment, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle range of about 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward and is transparent. Inside the handle cover 185, which is the back surface of the handle cover 185, an inner lens 185a formed three-dimensionally with a transparent member is attached. The surface of the inner lens 185a is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffused and refracted, and the surface of the handle decoration substrate 184 disposed behind the inner lens 185a ( It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the mounting surface). The inner lens 185a as well as the front surface may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the inner lens 185a may be replaced with a lens cut on the rear surface. It may be formed (may be formed in a polyhedron). The handle cover 185 is illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184 to emit light. The surface of the handle cover 185 may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the surface of the handle cover 185 and the back surface may be lens-cut. Alternatively, the handle cover 185 may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron) on the back surface of the handle cover 185.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in a plan view and faces the outer side (open side). The handle unit 180 mounted via the above also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, the tip end thereof inclines toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). And fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity that acts on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, static electricity that acts on the handle 182 or the like by the player is detected, and the handle 182 or the like of the player is detected. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original one and playing the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the one-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the one-shot button 193, and the firing control unit 633 b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 182, and the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193 is released, so that before the one-shot button 193 is operated. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 is provided with four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is rotated most clockwise in a front view. Then, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hitting"), the fourth protrusion 182d is the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the fourth protrusion 182d is used as the first protrusion 182a and the handle 182 is replaced, so that the player can easily maintain the handle 182 at the "right-handed" position, It is possible to reduce the player's fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit seen from the rear. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, which is below the door window 101a. The dish unit 200 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and the upper plate 201 for storing the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 is mounted on the front surface of the plate base unit 210. The dish decoration unit 250 having the above, and the effect operation unit 300 mounted on the front surfaces of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending in the left-right direction, an upper plate body 212 having an upper plate 201 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit base 211, and a right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base 213 that is mounted on the mounting base 213 and protrudes to the front; An upper plate bowl removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and an upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front surface of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. Plate unit main body 252, a lower plate ball punching unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and a plate upper left decoration unit 270 which is attached to the upper front part of the plate unit main body 252 with left and right spaces, respectively. It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, and a plate lower left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

The production operation unit 300 includes, as a production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotationally operated by the player and a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. ing. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the production operation unit cover unit 310, the operation unit base 320 housed in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation section 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation section 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation section 302. The transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 that decorates the production operation ring 330 with light, a decoration substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the production operation ring decoration substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibrating speaker 354, the production operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the production operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And are equipped with.

The entire dish unit 200 is bulged forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged such that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 is directed obliquely upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 has the ball lending operation unit 220 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side of the center of the left and right when viewed from the front largely bulges forward and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges to the frontmost. The upper plate 201 has a front end that is retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in a front view, and the depth of the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 46). ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lower, and the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a in front view goes under the ball lending operation unit 220.

The upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface of the plate unit base 211 is lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a from the position lower than the upper plate ball feed port 211e. It is inclined so that it becomes slightly lower than the outer diameter of B toward the position. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish ball feeding port 211e.

In addition, the guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal grounding member 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact (rolls) with the game ball. The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball hole 202a through which the game ball B can be discharged by vertically penetrating the bottom wall. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removal unit 260.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction projects further forward than the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball-draining hole 202a penetrating vertically, and is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is located below the effect operation unit 300 in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c when assembled in the dish unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c while the lower plate ball hole 202a is closed, and the lower plate ball hole 202a can be opened. The game ball B stored in can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in a state where the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is opened, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore, from the lower plate ball supply port 211c to the front side. The released game ball B can be promptly discharged downward from the lower dish ball removal hole 202a by the shortest distance movement.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The plate base unit 210 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. 43 is a perspective view of the dish base unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the dish base unit of the dish unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there. The dish base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The plate base unit 210 has a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 that is attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100 and extends to the left and right, and an upper plate that has an upper plate 201 that is attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit base 211. The main body 212, a mounting base 213 attached to the right side of the upper dish main body 212 at the upper front portion of the dish unit base 211, and protruding forward, and attached to the right side of the attachment base 213 on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. And a dish unit relay board 214.

The dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the attachment base 213, and an upper dish removal unit 230 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the attachment base 213. The upper plate bowl removal unit 240 is attached to the rear of the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and on the rear side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (a shallow rear opening). It is formed in a box shape.

The dish unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front and also has an upper dish ball supply port 211a that extends cylindrically rearward, and penetrates back and forth below the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower part to the left with respect to the left-right center in a front view and extending rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate A notch portion 211d that is cut to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through on the right side wall of the portion that extends rearward of the ball supply port 211c in a tubular shape, and front and rear on the upper right side in front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. And an upper dish ball feed port 211e located at the right end of the upper dish body 212.

In addition, the dish unit base 211 projects forward to the right of the upper dish ball feed port 211e and has a mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is placed, and an upper portion on the left side of the upper dish ball feed port 211e. A slider insertion port 211g, which penetrates through the lower part of the plate body in the front and rear direction and through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 in the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is inserted, and penetrates in the front and rear direction at the lower right corner of the front view. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, which penetrates the front and rear in the vicinity of the right corner in front view. And a mouth 211i.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end of the upper plate ball supply port 211a, which is assembled to the door frame 3, passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower dish ball supply port 211c, when assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end from the lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. In addition, a downstream end of the ball removal guide passage 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is connected to the cutout portion 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 are operated by the upper plate ball removing button 222, and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, the upper It is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the plate ball and the cutout portion 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving opening 241a of the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side of the upper plate main body 212 bulges to the front rather than the center of the left and right as viewed from the front. The upper plate main body 212 is formed such that the front end recedes rearward as it goes to the right in front view from the most bulged portion, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the plate unit 200 so that the closed upper part near the right end of the upper plate body 212 goes under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate main body 212 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction in the upper part, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attaching portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting projection 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open top. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion opening 213a that vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the left end, and a through hole 213b that vertically penetrates in the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper bowl removal unit 230 is inserted through the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. A wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decoration board 273, the dish upper right decoration board 278, the plate lower left decoration board 283, and the plate lower right decoration board 288. , And relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the front side of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 (not shown). (Omitted) after inserting cash or a prepaid card, rent a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, and display the remaining amount of the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. It is for the purpose of, for example, subtracting the amount of the game ball B that has been lent out of cash or a prepaid card that has been put into a ball lending machine and returning it, and adjusting the volume related to the effect to a large or small amount.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the upper side of the attachment base 213, an upper dish ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper dish ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 which is arranged to the right of the pull-out button 222 and has a light-transmitting property, and a ball lending operation base 223 on the upper surface of the base portion 221 which is located on the lower right of the upper bowl ball-pulling button 222. Volume up button 226 arranged on the lower left side of the base, a volume down button 227 arranged below the volume up button 226 on the upper surface of the base 221, and a ball arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223. A lending button 224, a return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223. ing.

The upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 projects upward from the upper surface of the base portion 221 in a cylindrical shape, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and moves slightly downward when the player presses it (a distance dimension in which the upper bowl ball-pulling button 222 moves downward when the player presses it). The tactile switch for ball lending button 224a (lead type) is pushed slightly downward so that the tactile switch for ball lending button 224a can be turned on, while the player releases the pushing operation. By doing so, the ball lending button 224 is moved to the upper original position, the pressing operation portion of the ball lending button tactile switch 224a is returned upward, and the ball lending button tactile switch 224a can be turned off. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape and moves slightly downward when the player presses it (a distance dimension in which the upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 moves downward when the player presses it). By comparison, the tactile switch for return button 225a (lead type) is pushed slightly downward to turn on the tactile switch for return button 225a, while the player releases the pushing operation. The return button 225 moves to the original position above, and the pressing operation portion of the return button tactile switch 225a returns upward and the return button tactile switch 225a can be turned off. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs (lead type), and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card with cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the rented gaming ball B is subtracted from the cash or the prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and the card is returned. The ball lending display section displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. Further, the ball lending display section displays an error code when the ball lending machine fails.

The volume up button 226 is formed in a triangular shape and is arranged so that one of the three vertices faces upward, and the player pushes it to move it slightly downward (the player presses it). It is smaller than the distance dimension that the upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 moves downwards by operating.) Volume up button tactile switch 226a (surface mount type) push operation part is pushed down slightly for volume up button While the tactile switch 226a can be turned on, when the player releases the pressing operation, the volume up button 226 moves to the original upper position and the pressing operation portion of the volume up button tactile switch 226a returns to the upper side. The volume up button tactile switch 226a can be turned off. The volume down button 227 is formed in a triangular shape and is arranged so that one of the three vertices faces downward, and the player pushes down the button to move it slightly downward (the player presses it). It is smaller than the distance dimension that the upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 moves downward by operation.) Volume down button tactile switch 227a (surface mount type) push operation part is pushed down slightly and for volume down button While the tactile switch 227a can be turned on, when the player releases the pressing operation, the volume down button 227 moves to the upper original position, and the pressing operation portion of the volume down button tactile switch 227a returns upward. The volume down button tactile switch 227a can be turned off.

The ball lending button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted on the top surface (front surface or surface) of the ball lending substrate 228 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220. Through the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the body frame 4 side, electrically connected to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are mounted on the upper surface (front surface or front surface) of the volume adjustment board 229 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220. , The drive frame unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 described later, without interposing the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. Peripheral control unit 1500 (controlling the progress of production) on the game board 5 side via a decorative substrate provided in the unit 2000 or the back unit 3000, a production drive substrate 1720 described later that drives a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like. It is electrically connected to a peripheral control board 1510) which will be described later. The ball lending board 228 and the volume adjusting board 229 are accommodated in the ball lending operation unit 220 while being adjacent to each other in the ball lending operation unit 220.

In this manner, the ball lending button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the ball lending board 228 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220 on which the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted are electrically connected. A door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side, a volume adjusting board 229 housed in a ball lending operation unit 220 in which a volume up button tactile switch 226a and a volume down button tactile switch 227a are mounted, and an electrical circuit. The door frame sub-relay board 105 on the side of the door frame 3 that is connected to is a completely different relay board. In various relay boards on the side of the door frame 3, the tactile switch 224a for the ball lending button and the tactile for the return button The switch 225a and the signal transmission paths for the three 7-segment LEDs and the signal transmission paths for the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are not mixed in the same relay board. .. This is because the signal transmission paths for the ball lending button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs are paths through which so-called main side signals are transmitted. While the frame main relay board 104 is provided, the signal transmission path to the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a is a path through which a so-called main side signal is transmitted. Therefore, the door frame sub relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side is used.

On the upper surface (front surface or front surface) of the ball lending board 228, a tactile switch 224a for ball lending button, a tactile switch 225a for return button, and pads, through holes, lands to which three 7-segment LEDs are soldered are removed. A green resist layer is formed in the entire area by a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated green resist”). On the lower surface (rear surface or rear surface) of the ball lending board 228, a solid green area is formed on the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a connector (lead type) (not shown) is soldered. The resist forms a green resist layer. Further, although not shown, on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the ball lending board 228, the surface of the ball lending button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs, which are not shown, is mounted. The attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the part number of the front-side electronic component near the side-side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, etc. The front side notation part indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component and the model of the front side electronic component may be solidly coated with a white paint that is easily noticeable with respect to green. It is printed by silk printing on the green resist. Although illustration is omitted, on the lower surface (rear surface or rear surface) of the ball lending board 228, the part number of the rear surface side electronic component and the rear surface side electronic component are arranged in the vicinity of the rear surface side electronic component such as a connector (surface mounting type). Specify the attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area that indicates the position (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the model of the back side electronic component). May be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist with a white paint that is easily noticeable with respect to green.

On the other hand, on the upper surface (front surface or front surface) of the volume control board 229, pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are soldered are removed. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”) over the entire region. On the lower surface (rear surface or rear surface) of the volume control board 229, a region where a connector (not shown) is mounted is soldered to the entire region except pads, through holes, lands, etc. A resist layer is formed. Further, although not shown, on the upper surface (front surface or front surface) of the volume control board 229, the vicinity of front side electronic components such as the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button which are mounted. , The part number of the front-side electronic component, the attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged (in addition, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component, The front side notation that indicates the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the component, and the model of the front side electronic component may be included. The white paint is a solid yellow color that is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. It is printed on the resist by silk printing. Although not shown, on the lower surface (rear surface or rear surface) of the volume control board 229, a region indicating the part number of the rear surface electronic component and the position where the rear surface electronic component is arranged near the rear surface electronic component such as a connector. The attribute of the back side electronic component such as (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. ) Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a light yellow paint which is inconspicuous with respect to white.

As described above, the color of the resist liquid applied to the ball lending substrate 228 and the volume adjusting substrate 229 accommodated in the ball lending operation unit 220 adjacent to each other is different. To explain this, the signal transmission paths for the ball lending button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs are so-called main signal transmission paths, as described above. Therefore, the ball lending button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the ball lending substrate 228 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220. And electrically via a door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and an interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side with a ball rental machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. In contrast to the connection, the signal transmission paths for the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are not the paths through which so-called main side signals are transmitted, as described above. The volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are mounted on the upper surface (front surface or front surface) of the volume adjustment board 229 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220, and are located on the door frame 3 side. The drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 according to a command from a peripheral control board 1510, which will be described later) does not require the door frame sub-relay board 105 and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. Peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (periphery which will be described later that can control the progress of production) via a decorative board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc., which will be described later, and which will be described later. It is electrically connected to the control board 1510).

That is, in the present embodiment, the volume electrically connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 (a peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of the effect) on the game board 5 side, which is the control device in the pachinko machine 1. The adjustment board 229 and a ball lending board 228 electrically connected to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1 are adjacent to each other in the ball lending operation unit 220 of the pachinko machine 1. Although the volume control board 229 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film, the ball rental board 228 is coated with a green resist solution different from white. Since the green coating film is formed, the operator who performs the wiring connection is electrically connected to the volume control board 229 by using the color of the coating film thus formed (that is, the color of the resist) as a mark. It is possible to contribute to prevention of erroneous connection between the wiring that is connected to the ball lending board 228 and the wiring that is electrically connected to the ball rental board 228. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the prevention of erroneous connection of wiring.

Further, on the volume control board 229, a tactile switch 226a for a volume up button that allows the player to greatly adjust the volume related to the effect, and a tactile switch for a volume down button that allows the player to adjust the volume related to the effect small. 227a and are mounted, and the detection result (ON signal by ON, OFF signal by OFF) by the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button is the control device in the pachinko machine 1, that is, the game board 5. It is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1500 on the side (a peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of the effect), and the player can request the ball lending board 228 to pay out the game ball B by ball lending. The ball lending button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a that can request a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) to return cash or a prepaid card, and the cash lending to the ball lending machine. Three 7-segment LEDs that can display the remaining amount of the prepaid card are mounted, and the detection results (ON signal by ON, OFF signal by OFF) by the ball lending button tactile switch 224a and the return button tactile switch 225a. ) Is transmitted to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1. A driving signal from a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) is transmitted to the ball lending board 228, so that the ball lending display section configured by three 7-segment LEDs mounted on the ball lending board 228 can display the ball lending. While the amount of cash or the amount of prepaid card inserted into the machine is displayed, the volume is adjusted from the peripheral control unit 1500 (the peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of the effect) on the game board 5 side. The drive signal is not output to the board 229, and the volume control board 229 is based on the drive signal from the peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (a peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of the effect). No electronic component constituting the displayed display part is mounted. In this way, the position where the player's operation is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1500 (the peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of the effect) on the game board 5 side, which is the control device in the pachinko machine 1. And a path to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1, and therefore is electrically connected to the volume adjusting board 229. If the wiring and the wiring electrically connected to the ball rental board 228 are erroneously connected, an unintended disadvantage to the player may occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a white resist solution is applied to the ball lending substrate 228 to form a white coating film, and a green resist solution different from white is applied to the ball lending substrate 228. The green coating is formed to prevent erroneous connection.

Further, while surface mount type electronic components are adopted as the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a mounted on the volume control board 229, they are mounted on the ball rental board 228. Since the lead type electronic components are adopted for the ball lending button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs, the type of electronic component mounted on the board (lead type or surface mount Based on one of the types), the wiring electrically connected to the volume control board 229 and the wiring electrically connected to the ball lending board 228 can be discriminated. This can contribute to the prevention of incorrect connection.

By the way, although the reflectance of light is highest in white and lower in dark color, as described above, the volume control substrate 229 not provided with the display section is coated with the white resist solution to form the white coating film. On the other hand, the ball lending substrate 228 provided with the ball lending display section is coated with a dark green resist liquid to form a green coating film. This reduces the efficiency with which the light emitted by the ball lending display unit is reflected on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the ball lending substrate 228 so that it does not interfere with the performance by the rendering device excluding the ball lending display unit. You can In this embodiment, green is used as the dark color, but purple or black may be used instead of green.

In the present embodiment, the ball lending board 228 is provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 via the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the body frame 4 side. While the volume control board 229 is electrically connected to (for example, a CR unit), the volume control board 229 does not require the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. , A drive board unit 1700 on the body frame 4 side (decorative board to be described later that drives a decoration board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc. provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 according to a command from a peripheral control board 1510 described later. Via the drive board 1720), via the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side, electrically with the peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of the effect) It is connected. That is, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are present on the door frame 3 side. Therefore, for the front surface (front surface) of the door frame main relay substrate 104 on the door frame 3 side, the same color as the resist liquid applied to the ball lending substrate 228 is adopted, and the green resist liquid is applied. A green coating film is formed, and the same color as the resist liquid applied to the volume control board 229 is adopted for the front surface (front surface) of the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side. The white resist solution is preferably applied to form a white coating film. The white coating film formed by applying the white resist solution is more fragile than the green coating film formed by applying the green resist solution. When a plurality of substrates are arranged and cut out from a material) to be manufactured, they may be cracked or split.

By the way, when a substrate is manufactured, as described above, since a plurality of substrates are arranged and cut out from one standard-sized copper clad laminate (base material), the color of the silk paint or the resist solution is used. Will be the same color, and a plurality of substrates having the same color will be manufactured. Therefore, for example, it may be possible to determine whether or not it is manufactured from the same standard copper clad laminate (base material) by examining a white-colored substrate. When the defect is found, it is only necessary to trace (find out) the other white substrates one by one to confirm the defect, which is advantageous in that it can contribute to the early detection of the defect.

In addition, the volume control operation of adjusting the volume related to the effect based on the volume up button 226 to a large amount or adjusting the volume related to the effect based on the volume down button 227 to a low level is performed for a certain period (for example, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. After the start of the peripheral control MPU (hereinafter, a peripheral control MPU having a function also may be referred to as a "peripheral control IC" instead of the peripheral control MPU) is activated for a fixed period of time. It is possible that the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) can always be executed except for a certain period before and after the stop of the special symbol, or both) It becomes possible to execute by the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) only when a specific condition such as a period during which the demonstration display device 1600 is performing a demonstration by the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) is satisfied. It may be one. In addition, the volume control result based on the volume control operation of greatly adjusting the volume related to the effect based on the volume up button 226 or adjusting the volume related to the effect based on the volume down button 227 to the peripheral control MPU (or the periphery) is immediately performed. Control IC) may be reflected, or the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) may be delayed from the timing of the volume control operation depending on the situation (whether or not the variable display is being performed, the progress of the production, etc.). May be reflected.

Incidentally, a game machine having a plurality of substrates has been conventionally proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0047] and FIG. 5). However, among the plurality of substrates, they are adjacent to each other. If the wiring connection work is performed, the person performing the wiring connection work may erroneously connect the wiring electrically connected to one substrate and the wiring electrically connected to the other substrate.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing bowl and bowl after removing bowl]
The unit 230 before removing the upper bowl and the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate pre-ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate post-ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper plate 201 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging the game balls B stored inside to the lower plate 202.

The upper dish ball removal unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The unit 240 after removing the upper bowl is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 which is behind the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl.

The upper dish removal unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and has a vertically extending cylindrical front base 231 and a front base 231 that is vertically movably inserted into the cylinder. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the vicinity of the front of the upper dish ball feed port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, the upper end thereof is in contact with the lower end of the upper bowl ball removal button 222, and the lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 of the upper bowl removal unit 242. It is in contact with the upper surface.

The upper bowl removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to close the upper bowl feed port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear side, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper dish ball removal slider 242 slidably attached to the spring, a spring 243 biasing the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. Equipped with.

The rear base 241 has a ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving port 241a, which protrudes upward from a site where the upper dish ball removing slider 242 is slidably attached and which is opened forward. A ball feed guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a position on the rear surface of the rear base 241 that is lower than the ball feed guide path 241b. And a ball pull-out guide path 241c for guiding the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at the opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The part extending to the left and right of the ball guide passage 241c projects to the right in rear view as compared with the part to which the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is slidably mounted, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view becomes lower. It has an opening on the right side when viewed from the rear. The part of the ball guide passage 241c extending to the left and right is closed by the rear cover 244 on the rear side. In the state in which the ball guiding path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion that extends vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end in the rear view of the portion extending to the left and right is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in the dish unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball discharge guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is formed in a quadrangle shape in a front view, and projects rearward from an operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from an upper left corner and a rear surface which is a rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. And an operation transmission section 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface thereof is located downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the dish unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper bowl removing unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the. Further, the upper tray ball pulling slider 242 has the operation transmitting portion 242b projecting to the rear of the rear base 241 and the operation of the ball pulling member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. The rod 143c is in contact.

The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end of the spring 243 is attached to the upper bowl removing slider 242, and urges the upper bowl removing slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is located at the moving end upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

In the unit 230 for removing the upper bowl and the unit 240 for removing the upper bowl, the upper bowl ball removing slider 242 is located at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper bowl ball removing slider 242 moves. Through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a, the upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 is located at the upper end of the movement. Further, since the upper bowl ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition part 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, in a state where the upper dish ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the space between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b in the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned, and the ball is fed from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side through the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball-punching member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b, can be moved downward, and the ball-punching member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball-punching member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Moves backward from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a through the ball receiving opening 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b from the upper plate 201 is discharged forward from the ball exit 141b opening below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball removal port 141b is guided from the cutout portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball removal guide path 241c, and then down from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the plate 202 and is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressing of the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is released, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is released via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball-removing button 222 moves up, the ball-removing member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the partition 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b. It will be restored to the original state.

In this way, by the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the plate decoration unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the plate decoration unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire dish unit 200.

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and forms a lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base that covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the 211, the lower plate ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and the plates attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit main body 252 separately from each other in the left and right direction. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, and the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 280 mounted on the entire surface of the plate unit body 252 below the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate plate decoration unit 275, respectively. 285 and.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower dish main body 251 extends in the left-right direction and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a lower left portion of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 at the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the opened rear part is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than on the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball removal hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The bottom plate body 251 is inclined such that its bottom surface is lowered toward the bottom plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removing hole 202a is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removing lid 265 of the lower dish ball removing unit 260.

The lower plate body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit body 252. Further, the lower dish body 251 has a bottom surface located below the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211 in the state where it is assembled to the dish unit 200, and the lower dish ball discharge hole 202a supplies the lower dish ball. It is located in front of the mouth 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Plate unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The dish unit body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction projects forward on the lower side. Further, the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the upper surface thereof has the lowest center in the left-right direction. The dish unit body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulge portion 252a that bulges forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is spaced apart from the left and right in the upper portion, and the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the lower portion. Includes a lower front decoration portion 252b which bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower tray main body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c which extends rearward in a flat plate shape from the lower end of the lower front decoration portion 252b. ..

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in the shape of a box whose rear is opened, and the plate upper left decoration unit 270, the lower plate left decoration unit 280, the upper right plate decoration unit 275, and the lower right plate decoration unit are formed on the front of each of them. 285 is attached. The right side of the lower surface of the left side upper bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decoration portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front surface decoration portion 252b.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging portion 252a and the lower front decoration portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size such that a player's finger can be inserted therein, and is formed such that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

Further, the dish unit body 252 has a front notch 252e that is notched upward from a lower end of the front surface of a portion of the lower front decoration portion 252b that covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251, and a lower plate body 251 of the bottom plate portion 252c. And a bottom face cutout portion 252f that is cut out in a region that is below. The lower dish removal unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the dish unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g which penetrates the front and rear at the lower right corner of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b and through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and above the handle insertion opening 252g, the lower front surface. It is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are at the center in the left-right direction. The production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached is provided. The effect operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about ⅓ of the width of the plate unit body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled to the dish unit 200, and the speaker opening 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. .. Further, in a state where the dish decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower dish ball pulling button 263 of the lower dish ball punching unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower dish ball punching base 261 of the lower dish ball punching unit 260 is placed. The bottom surface cutout 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are flush with each other.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower dish removal unit 260 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251 and opens and closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower dish 202 or discharge the game ball B from the lower dish 202. It is for making things happen.

The lower dish ball punching unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and has a flat plate-shaped lower dish ball punching base 261 having a through hole that vertically penetrates the right front corner in plan view, and a lower dish ball punching unit. A slider 262 that is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the base 261 in the front-rear direction; a lower dish ball removal button 263 that is mounted on the front end of the slider 262; and a spring 264 that biases the slider 262 forward. A lower dish ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower dish ball removing lid 265 in an open state via the slider 262 are provided.

The lower dish ball punching base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom cutout 252f of the dish unit body 252, and is vertically positioned at a position corresponding to the lower dish ball punching hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (lower dish body 251). A through hole that penetrates is formed. The through hole of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the lower dish ball punching base 261 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction at a portion to the left of the center in the left-right direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape.

The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 261 on the left end side to the left of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and on the right end side, the slider 262. The right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower dish ball withdrawing lid 265 is formed with a slit extending leftward and rightward in which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

When the lower dish ball punching unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball punching base 261 closes the bottom cutout portion 252f of the dish unit body 252, and the lower surface of the lower dish ball punching base 261 is It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit body 252. In a normal state of the lower dish ball removing unit 260, the slider 262 is located at the front moving end by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower dish ball removing lid 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball removal hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 is substantially coincident with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pushed rearward and moved rearward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower dish ball removal button 263. Becomes When this slider 262 moves rearward, the projecting pin of the slider 262 presses the lower dish ball removing lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower dish ball removing lid 265 centers the left end side and the right end side moves backward. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, by moving the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 located directly above the through hole to the rear from the position of the through hole, the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball removal hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, so that the lower plate bowl removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 remains rotated rearward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open state, so that the game balls B in the lower dish 202 are continuously connected. It can be discharged downward.

In order to close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b is pressed backward, and the holding mechanism 266 releases the holding of the slider 262. It Then, when the lower plate ball removing button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removing button 263 returns to the state in which it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal lid 265. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the plate unit 200.

The plate upper left decoration unit 270 is a semi-cylindrical transparent plate upper left decoration 271, which extends left and right, a transparent plate upper left inner lens 272 attached to the rear side of the plate left upper decoration 271, and a plate upper left inner. A plate upper left decorative substrate 273 mounted on the rear side of the lens 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, also referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) is provided.

The plate upper left decoration 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging part 252a. The plate left upper decorative body 271 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally upper left at the left end and a central axis extending left and right at the right end, and the semi-cylindrical is twisted. Has been formed. The dish upper left decoration 271 is formed transparent. The surface of the plate upper left decoration 271 may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the surface of the plate upper left decoration 271 and the back surface may be lens-cut. The plate may be formed (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the back surface of the dish upper left decoration 271 may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron).

The plate upper left inner lens 272 is inserted into the plate upper left decoration 271 from the rear side. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 is a surface mounting type and is a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors. By emitting light, the plate upper left decoration 271 can be illuminated. .. The plate upper left inner lens 272 is formed transparent. The surface of the plate upper left inner lens 272 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the plate upper left decoration placed behind the plate upper left inner lens 272 is decorated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 273 is difficult to be clearly seen from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be applied to the front surface of the dish upper left inner lens 272 (may be formed in a polyhedron), or instead of the surface of the dish upper left inner lens 272, the back surface may be It may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron).

In the state where the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with. Since the plate upper left decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the plate upper left decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs on the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate upper left decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light emission, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish upper right decoration unit 275 is a semi-cylindrical transparent plate upper right ornament 276 extending left and right, a transparent plate upper right inner lens 277 attached to the rear side of the plate upper right ornament 276, and a plate upper right inner. The dish upper right decoration board 278 is mounted on the rear side of the lens 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, also referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”).

The plate upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The plate upper right decorative body 276 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally upper right at the right end and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the semi-cylindrical is twisted. Has been formed. The dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed transparent. The surface of the dish upper right decoration 276 may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the surface of the plate upper right decoration 276 and the back may be lens-cut. The plate may be formed (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the back surface of the dish upper right decoration body 276 may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron).

The dish upper right inner lens 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decoration body 276 from the rear side. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 are surface-mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. By emitting light, the dish upper right decoration body 276 can be illuminated. .. The dish upper right inner lens 277 is formed transparent. The surface of the dish upper right inner lens 277 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the dish upper right decoration placed behind the dish upper right inner lens 277 is decorated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 278 is difficult to be clearly seen from the player side. It should be noted that a lens cut may be provided on the front surface of the dish upper right inner lens 277 (may be formed into a polyhedron), or instead of the surface of the dish upper right inner lens 277, the back surface may be It may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron).

The plate upper right decoration unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with. Since the dish upper right decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the dish upper right decoration body 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decoration body 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light emission, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 partially project upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 when assembled to the door frame 3. A raised step can be formed between the upper side bulging portion 252a and the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 side. As a result, the player can use his/her step between the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a to catch his/her finger, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be leveled. It can be used as a finger hook when performing or operating the effect operation unit 301 described later. Further, due to the step between the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a can be prevented from flowing forward.

[3-5d-5. Plate lower left decoration unit and plate lower right decoration unit]
The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. To be The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. ..

The dish lower left decoration unit 280 is a semi-cylindrical transparent dish lower left ornamental body 281, a transparent dish lower left inner lens 282 attached to the rear side of the dish lower left ornamental body 281, and a dish lower inner. The dish lower left decorative substrate 283 is mounted on the rear side of the lens 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”).

The plate lower left decoration 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view. Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulge portion 252a. The plate lower left decoration 281 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276. The central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper left rear at the left end, and the center at the right end. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a half cylinder is bent. The lower left end of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The plate lower left decorative body 281 has a semi-circular curvature that becomes thinner toward the left end side. The plate lower left decorative body 281 is formed transparent. The surface of the lower left dish 281 may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the surface of the lower left dish 281 may be lens-cut on the back side. It may be formed (may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be applied to the back surface of the plate lower left decorative body 281 (may be formed in a polyhedron).

The dish lower left inner lens 282 is inserted into the dish lower left decorative body 281 from the rear side. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 are surface mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. By emitting light, the plate lower left decoration body 281 can be decorated with light emission. .. The dish lower left inner lens 282 is formed to be transparent. The surface of the lower left dish inner lens 282 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffused and refracted, and the lower left dish inner decoration 282 is placed behind the lower inner lens 282 of the dish. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 283 are difficult to be clearly seen from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the front surface of the lower left dish inner lens 282 as well as on the back surface (or may be formed in a polyhedron), or instead of the surface of the lower left inner lens 282 of the dish, the rear surface may be It may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron).

The plate lower left decoration unit 280 is, when assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end is the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left edge. In the plate lower left decoration unit 280, since the left end of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, it seems that the left end goes into the door frame 3. Since the plate lower left decoration unit 280 does not have ribs in the longitudinal direction of the plate lower left decoration body 281, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light emission, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish lower right decoration unit 285 includes a transparent dish lower right ornamental body 286 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right, and a transparent dish lower right inner lens 287 attached to the rear side of the dish lower right ornamental body 286. , A plate lower right decoration board 288 mounted on the rear side of the plate lower right inner lens 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”). , Are provided.

The dish lower right decoration body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a rear center in a plan view, It is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side. The plate lower right decoration 286 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276. At the right end, the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right rear, and at the left end. The central axis extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a half cylinder is bent. The dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape at the right end. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a curvature of a semi-circular arc that becomes thinner toward the right end side. The dish lower right decoration body 286 is formed transparent. It should be noted that the surface of the lower right dish 286 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the surface of the lower right dish 286 may be cut with a lens. May be provided (may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be provided on the back surface of the dish lower right decoration body 286 (may be formed in a polyhedron). ..

The dish lower right inner lens 287 is inserted from the back into the dish lower right decoration body 286. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decoration board 288 are surface-mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. By making them emit light, the dish lower right decoration body 286 can be illuminated. You can The dish lower right inner lens 287 is formed transparent. The surface of the lower right inner lens 287 of the plate is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decoration board 288 is difficult to be clearly seen from the player side. It may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron), or may be lens-cut on the back surface together with the front surface of the lower right inner lens 287 of the dish (in the polyhedron). It may be formed), and instead of the surface of the lower right inner lens 287 of the dish, the back surface may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron).

The plate lower right decoration unit 285 is, when assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. Since the lower right side of the dish lower right decoration unit 285 is formed in a spherical shape, the lower right side of the dish lower right decoration unit 285 looks like the right end of the dish lower side is embedded in the door frame 3. Since the plate lower right decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the plate lower right decoration body 286, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 emit light, the plate lower right decoration body 286 is illuminated. The entire front surface of the can be illuminated and decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as seen from the advancing/retreating direction of the effect operation button. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates to participate in the effect. Is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 includes a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 with respect to the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a transparent central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and an outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a and a rotation operation unit. It is configured with a transparent annular outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b arranged between the inner periphery of 302 and the inner periphery.

The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation section base 320 housed in the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation section base 320. A ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation section 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the portion 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation portion base 320.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352. Of the decorative substrate cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330. An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Performance operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape having an open upper portion and a rear portion.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 which is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 which is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and a unit front. A transparent plate center upper inner lens 313 mounted from the rear in the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312, and a plate mounted on the rear side of the plate center upper inner lens 313 so that light can be emitted forward. A dish central upper decoration substrate 314 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a transparent dish central lower inner lens 315 mounted from the rear inside a dish central lower decorative body 312b of a unit front cover 312, and a dish central lower inner lens And a plate 316 below the plate center mounted on the rear side of the plate 315 and mounting a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the center rear side in the front-rear direction to the front side, and the rear side from this is the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state such that an axis line perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed on an upper end edge extending in a semicircular arc shape of the front portion is located forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a formed at the lowest position when assembled to the dish unit 200.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward so that the shape of the unit front cover 312 in plan view is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a transparent dish central upper decorative body 312a in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semi-circular arc shape, and below the dish central upper decorative body 312a. A transparent dish central lower decorative body 312b in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semi-circular arc shape is provided. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by dividing a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) in half and extending in a semi-arcuate shape with the split surface toward the center side. It is formed in a bent shape. The plate center lower decoration 312b extends in a semi-circular shape with a large curvature with respect to the plate center upper decoration 312a, and the plate center lower decoration 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the plate center upper decoration 312a. Is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. The unit front cover 312, when assembled to the dish unit 200, has a front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a that projects further forward than a front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in a state where the dish unit 200 is assembled, the left and right ends of the dish center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275, respectively, and at the same time, the plate center lower decorative body is The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the left end of the plate lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is transparent.

Further, the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and its front end is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about ½ of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

The dish center upper inner lens 313 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear side. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in a semi-circular shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and is forward (outer side) to the upper surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”). ), a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are surface-mounting type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, and the plate center upper decorative body 312a can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light. It should be noted that the surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the back surface thereof may be lens-cut. May be provided (may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be provided on the back surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a (may be formed in a polyhedron). ..

The inner lens 313 on the plate center is formed transparent. The surface of the dish center upper inner lens 313 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffused and refracted. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 to be arranged is difficult to be clearly seen from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be applied to the front surface and the back surface of the dish center upper inner lens 313 (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the back surface may be replaced with the back surface of the dish center upper inner lens 313. May be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The dish center lower inner lens 315 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted into the dish center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear side. The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semi-circular shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and is forward (outer side) to the upper surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”). ), a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center lower decoration substrate 316 are surface-mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. By emitting light, the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be illuminated and decorated. A lens cut may be applied to the surface of the dish center lower decoration 312b (may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be applied to the back surface of the dish center lower decoration 312b. May be provided (may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be provided on the back surface of the dish center lower decorative body 312b (may be formed in a polyhedron). ..

The inner lens 315 at the lower center of the plate is formed transparent. The surface of the plate lower inner lens 315 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 to be arranged. It should be noted that a lens cut may be provided on the front surface of the dish central lower inner lens 315 (may be formed in a polyhedron), or on the back surface instead of the surface of the dish central lower inner lens 315. May be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

Since the effect operation section cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312, which extends in a semi-circular arc shape, When the LEDs of the central upper decorative substrate 314 and the plate of the plate lower central decorative substrate 316 are made to emit light, it is possible to make the whole of them substantially uniformly light-emitting decorated, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310, when assembled to the dish unit 200, has a front end that projects far more forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. In addition, in the rendering operation unit cover unit 310, the plate center upper decoration 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate center lower decoration 312b is the plate lower left decoration 281 and the plate right. It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation base]
The operation section base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation section base 320 is inserted into the effect operation section cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape having an open upper portion, and is formed to be translucent (for example, milky white).

The operation unit base 320 is formed into a box-like shape having a substantially cubic outer shape, and has a main body 321 whose upper side is open, and an outer periphery which extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality of (here, four) leg portions 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper mounting portion formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and is opened upward to rotatably support the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

The main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 is formed in a size capable of accommodating the effect operation button unit 360 therein. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from the lower side, and a portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body 321 has a through hole formed in the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321. In the main body 321, the rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter such that the outer circumference thereof substantially matches the inner circumference of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. On the upper surface of the flange portion 322, the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the decoration substrate cover 353 are attached, and the ring attachment base 331 of the production operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

In the gear bearing portion 325, the operation ring transmission gear can be mounted rotatably around the axis extending in the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 projects upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has the flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

In the state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly lower than the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in the state in which the production operation unit 300 is assembled, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in contact therewith.

[3-5e-3. Stage operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55(a) is a perspective view of the production operation ring of the production operation unit as seen from above and FIG. 55(b) is a perspective view of the production operation ring as seen from below. FIG. 56(a) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the upper front, and FIG. 56(b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and has a transparent rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation portion 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the ring 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring mounting base 331 about the vertically extending axis and a plurality of bushes 333 that are attached to the ring mounting base 331 and move the rotation base 332 upward. And a ring retaining member 334 that regulates the ring. The ring attachment base 331, the rotation base 332, the bush 333, and the ring retaining member 334 are transparent.

In addition, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332, and is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335 forming a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and the ring outer upper cover 335. The ring outer lower cover 336 forming a part of the rotation operating portion 302 and the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, and form a part of the rotation operating portion 302. And a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a transparent annular shape.

The ring attachment base 331 has an outer diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring attachment base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is slidably mounted in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is circumferentially spaced outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a boss portion 331b for protrudingly mounting the bush 333 rotatably upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions, and a circumferentially spaced outer side from the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a through hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of portions. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state of being assembled to the performance operation unit 300.

The outer ring upper cover 335 is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface portion 335a in which a circular arc forming an outer portion and an upper portion in a circle extends annularly, and a plurality of them are arranged in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of outer top cover mounting portions 335c that extend downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extend toward the center side and that are arranged in the circumferential direction. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of ¼ of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The outer ring lower cover 336 has a plurality of outer lower surface portions 336a in which circular arcs forming an outer portion and a lower portion of a circle extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer lower surface portions 336a protruding upward from the inner side of the outer lower surface portion 336a toward the center. And an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b arranged. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The inner ring cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc forming an inner portion and an upper portion in a circle extends annularly, and a tube extending downward from an inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel with the central axis. The cylindrical surface portion 337b and the inner cover attachment portions 337c that are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and are arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the inner ring cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner surface of the cylindrical surface portion 337b has the same size as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are continuous with the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a in a state in which they are assembled to the effect operation ring 330. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion within a range of ½ or more of a circle, and the whole is in a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotary drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. 57A is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as disassembled and seen from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled rotary drive unit as seen from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The rotary drive unit 340 includes a rotary drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotary drive base 341 so that the rotary shaft projects leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. The gear cover 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably attached in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and are covered from the left side of the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345. 346 and.

Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that is integrally formed with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) than the speed change gear 344, and protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at a constant interval. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the distance between them in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integer multiple with respect to the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Accordingly, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, but one detects the detection piece 345b first. It is like this. Accordingly, it is possible to detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 via the transmission detection gear member 345.

In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Mesh with. In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 is located inside the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The rotary drive unit 340 drives the operation ring drive motor 342 to freely rotate the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotary drive unit 340 can reciprocally rotate and vibrate the rotary operation unit 302 by repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation of the drive gear 343 by the operation ring drive motor 342 within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

Further, in the rotary drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. Therefore, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation direction in which the rotation operation is performed. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotational operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling or a click feeling according to the content of the player participation type effect.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operating ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is for transmitting rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 integrally rotates with the bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the transmission detection of the rotation drive unit 340. And a drive-side gear portion 350b in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring side gear portion 350a and the drive side gear portion 350b are formed so that the pitch circles have the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 from above and the gear attachment member 351 being attached to the operation portion base 320. To be

In the operation ring transmission gear 350, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the production operation ring 330 in a state where it is assembled to the production operation unit 300, and the drive side gear portion 350b is formed. It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotary drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotational operation of the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotary drive unit 340 side, and also rotationally drive the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is formed in a form in which a ring is divided into front and rear, and is composed of a front decoration substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decoration substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row along the outer periphery of each of the upper surfaces (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs on the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 are surface-mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

The production operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the production operation ring 330 in a state where it is assembled to the production operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 has its upper side covered with a transparent decoration substrate cover 353. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed into a front and rear divided form, like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

Since the decoration board cover 353 and the ring mounting base 331 are transparently formed by causing the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 to emit light, the decoration board cover 353 and the ring mounting base 331. Through or through the decorative substrate cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring mounting base 331, the transparent ring outer upper cover 335, the transparent ring outer lower cover 336, and the transparent ring inner lower cover 336 forming the transparent rotation operation unit 302. The cover 337 can be illuminated and decorated from the inside. Therefore, the player can see the light-emitting decoration such as the LED provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and is capable of outputting vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sound such as voice and music. Is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sound such as voice and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present a variety of effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit of the production operation unit that is disassembled and seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit that is disassembled and seen from the front lower side. FIG. 62A is a sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62B is a sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation section base 320 so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330, and has a transparent pressing operation section 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a transparent cylindrical central pressing operation section 303a and a transparent cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the central pressing operation section 303a. ,,.

The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery and is arranged in a target with a button unit base 361 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and a central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a cylindrical shape and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is mounted between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer circumference thereof is formed into a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of elevating springs 365 through which the pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted and urge the elevating base 364 upward are provided.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends in a column shape upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lifting drive motor 367 mounted so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 mounted on the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the lifting drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and a lift cam drive gear member rotatably mounted by being rotated by the driven gear 369 and having the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, an elevating cam driving gear member 370, a lower end of which is connected, and a central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached to the elevating cam member 371 for elevating and lowering the elevating base 364; 368, a driven gear 369, and a disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted above the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. A transparent central button body 373, a pair of button springs 374 arranged between the central button body 373 and the elevating base 364 to urge the central button body 373 upward, and a central button body 373. The transparent central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper base 363 so as to cover the upper portion of the upper base 363. A central button decoration substrate 376 mounted on the upper surface and mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button body 373 and the central button cover 375 configure a central pressing operation portion 303a.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to an outer surface of the central button body 373 on the upper surface of the elevating base 364, and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and an outer circumference. The transparent outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration substrate 377 and the outer periphery of the central button main body 373, and the outer periphery of the central button main body 373 in the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 are covered. A transparent cylindrical outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379, which is arranged above the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side of the part and is three-dimensionally decorated, and covers the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379. A transparent outer peripheral button cover 380 attached to the elevating base 364 and having a central button cover 375 facing upward in the center thereof is provided. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 form an outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is mounted on the button unit base 361 and detects a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and a pressing cam drive gear member 370 mounted on the button unit base 361. An elevation detection sensor 382 for detecting the elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disc shape, and a plurality of leg portions 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320. The base main body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 mounted on the upper surface, and a lower surface of the pressing detection sensor 381 and the lifting detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is installed. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 at positions that are half the diameter of the base main body 361a from the center to the front and the rear. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of a metal rod. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and their lower ends are in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and their upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrating at a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. A standing wall portion 364c protruding upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d protruding in the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the vicinity of the lower end of the standing wall portion 364c are provided. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided to be vertically movable by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward due to the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c contacting the upper base 363, and a space in which the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 is movable is provided between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The lift cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that projects upward from the gear portion 370a, and is connected to the lower end of the lift cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. And a vertical movement detection piece 370c that is protruded downward from the vertical direction and is cut out at two locations facing each other and that is detected by the vertical movement detection sensor 382. The lift cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the column and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the shaft center near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end portion in parallel with the axis, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from an end portion of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371a are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f that is connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The lift cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d in the cam portion 371a rotates the lift cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view. Is formed. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the cam portion 371a can guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 to elevate the elevating base 364.

The central button body 373 has a cylindrical tubular portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tubular portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts penetrating the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at a center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. A pressure detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom portion 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 are provided.

The central button body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the tubular portion 373a and the bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects above the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends shortly downward, and its lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364, so that the downward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 abuts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button body 373.

The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that the lower ends thereof penetrate the elevating base 364 and extend downward, and the screws into which the washers are inserted are attached to the lower ends. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, whereby the upward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted.

The pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is a lifting base when the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 (the lower end of the central opening 373d) abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The central button body 373 is opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker biasing force than the elevating spring 365.

The central button cover 375 includes a disc-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tubular portion 373a of the central button body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is transparent. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. In the center button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373.

The center button decoration substrate 376 is a full-color LED that is a surface-mounting type in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) is multi-colored. ing. The central button decoration substrate 376 can cause the central button cover 375 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. The outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 is a full-color LED that is a surface-mounting type in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) is multi-colored. ing. The outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 can cause the outer periphery decoration inner lens 379 and the outer periphery button cover 380 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and has an annular base plate portion 378a attached to the elevating base 364, and a cylindrical shape extending upward from the inner circumference of the base plate portion 378a so that the central button main body 373 has a cylindrical shape. And a cylindrical portion 378b covering the outer circumference. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparent.

In the outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as it goes upward are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a in the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. .. The lower end of the tubular portion 380 a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380b is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62(a), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in a state in which the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365. The lift cam member 371 is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position in which the elevating base 364 is moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 is compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the moving end toward the upper side by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Has become.

Therefore, when assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 exceeds the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

In this state (state of FIG. 62(a)), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward to move downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button body 373 is pressed. The pressure detection piece 373e is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has a height substantially matching the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65(c)).

Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367 rotates the up-and-down drive gear 368 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the up-and-down cam drive is performed via the driven gear 369 meshed with the up-and-down drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the lifting cam member 371 connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the first position. The cam 371b rolls to the left of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d that relatively rolls to the left along the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the state of the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of the one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lift drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevating base 364 is restricted. Further, in the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the time of the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. Further, the entire pressing operation portion 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is projected higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

When the production operation unit 300 is assembled and moved to the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of being largely protruded from the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65(b) and the like). reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 attach the button spring 374. The central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364 by moving downward against the force. In the state where the central button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is in a state of protruding downward from the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. Since the pressure detection piece 373e is apart from the pressure detection sensor 381, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward by a force stronger than the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, The center button body 373 contacts the elevating base 364, and then the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 abuts the button unit base 361. Become. By contacting the elevating base 364 with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

Thus, when the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361 in a state where the central button body 373 abuts on the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and pressing of the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward by a force greater than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the elevating base 364 moves the elevating spring 368 through the outer peripheral button cover 380. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of the 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is projected upward by the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button body is The pressing detection piece 373e of 373 does not project downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

To return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. Then, in FIG. 62B, the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side as the lift cam member 371 rotates, the lift base 364 stops moving and the guide pin 364d moves the first cam. Roll along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c that is recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 mounted on the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation section base 320, and an operation section relay board 392 mounted in the board box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled in the production operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a plate center upper decoration board 314, a plate center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button lift drive motor 367, the center button decoration board 376, the outer circumference button decoration board 377, the press detection sensor 381, and the lift detection sensor 382 are relayed to the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210. There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration board in the plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the dish unit in a normal state, FIG. 65(b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing force of the pressing operation portion. It is a front view of a dish unit when an operation part is pressed.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303 a located at the center of the rotation operating unit 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit arranged between the central pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotating operation unit 302. And 303b.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation portion 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation section 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). ..

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302. More specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340 in the left side view, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in a clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. ..

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward/reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in a left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350 to rotate. When the operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in a left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction, is smaller than the spacing between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction at equal intervals. , The interval is not an integral multiple. Accordingly, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation part 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation part 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring drive motor 342 drives the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened to assist. .. Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation section 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, it is possible to make the rotation operation heavy or to give a click feeling.

The rotation operating portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of half or more of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation part 302 is formed in a donut shape. Then, as shown in the figure, the rotation operating portion 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operating portion 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. ..

As a result, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, it is possible to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 in a manner that is easy for the player to do and operate the rotation operation unit 302. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operating section 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation section 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be grasped like a steering wheel of a car.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decoration board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring below the effect operation ring 330. Accordingly, by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated. Further, in the production operation ring decoration substrate 352, since the plurality of LEDs are annularly arranged along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs that are lined up are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific portion of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating can be illuminated and decorated. As a result, the player can be illusion that the LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

In the normal state, in the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 65( a ), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface that is higher than that of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a lowered position in which it slightly protrudes upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated and the central pressing operation unit 303a of the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) to detect the pressing. The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and press detection is performed. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367 rotates the up-and-down cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the guide pin 364d of the up-and-down base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, the pressing operation portion 303 together with the elevating base 364 vigorously projects upward due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 to be in the raised position (see FIG. 65(b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above and above the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project upward more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward with the pressing operation portion 303 in the raised position, first, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are in substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are the rotating operation portion 302. The height is approximately the same as the upper surface (see FIG. 65(c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects the pressure.

In addition, when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a remains protruding above the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operating portion 302 (see FIG. 65(a)). .. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, so that attention can be paid to the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in the player participation type effect. , It is possible to make the player participation type production more enjoyable.

It should be noted that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, some players can use the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue to facilitate the rotation operation, or the pressing operation unit 303 interferes with the rotation operation. The operability of the rotary operation unit 302 can be changed due to the change, and a variety of operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200 and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in a front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 includes a door frame left side base 401 that is attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame left side base 401. The front side of the door frame left side decoration board 402 and the front side of the door frame left side decoration board 402 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”). The transparent left side inner lens 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401, and the transparent door frame left side decoration attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side inner lens 403. And a body 404.

The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened to the front. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 is a surface mounting type and is a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors. The door frame left side decoration board 402 can make the door frame left side decoration body 404 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The left side inner lens 403 is formed transparent. The surface of the left side inner lens 403 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the door frame left arranged behind the left side inner lens 403 is left. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the side decoration substrate 402 are difficult to be clearly seen from the player side. A lens cut may be applied to the front surface of the left side inner lens 403 as well as to the back surface thereof (may be formed into a polyhedron), or instead of the front surface of the left side inner lens 403, It may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron). The door frame left side decoration 404 is formed transparent. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward is vertically extended. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward. It should be noted that the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the front surface and the back surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 may be The lens may be cut (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the back surface of the door frame left side decoration body 404 may be lens-cut (formed in a polyhedron. Good).

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the plate upper left decoration 271 of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top unit 450 Door frame top decoration 453. Is formed so as to be continuous with the left lower end.

In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state where it is assembled to the door frame 3, and it looks as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outside of the game area 5a in a front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right side of the door frame 3 to a position substantially the same as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction. And a plurality of light emitting side window interior decorations 410b arranged inside the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in the game hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or the player who is playing on the right pachinko machine. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 can be made difficult to see, and the player's personal space can be formed so as to protect the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 which is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A transparent side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of transparent side window interior decoration parts 410b which are attached to the front surface, extend in a cylindrical shape forward, and are arranged in rows vertically, and a side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the portions corresponding to the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b, and the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 is attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and the side window interior decoration member. The transparent inner inner lens 414 is inserted into each of the plurality of side window interior decorations 410b of 412.

The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the door frame right side base 411 and the transparent right side inner lens 415 which is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends vertically. A through-hole 416a that extends in the vertical direction and the front-back direction in a flat plate shape and covers the right side surfaces of the cage door frame right side base 411 and the right side inner lens 415 and penetrates in the left-right direction to form the side window 410a is formed. The door frame right side outer panel 416 and the door frame right side base 411 and the right side inner lens 415 are attached to the door frame right side base 411 and the right side inner lens 415 so as to cover the left side and the right side, respectively. And a door frame right side inner panel 417 that extends in the flat direction in the front and rear direction and penetrates in the left and right direction to form a through hole 417a that constitutes the side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side inner lens 415, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, also referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”). A door frame right side decoration substrate 418 and a transparent door frame right side decoration body 419 attached to the right side inner lens 415 so as to cover the front side of the right side inner lens 415 are provided.

The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (in this case, three) side window interior decoration parts 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-like cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller on the front end side than on the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window decoration member 412, the front end of the side window decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 at a position above the center in the up-down direction and above the center. The side window decoration member 412 is formed transparent. The surface of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the side window interior decoration member 412. A lens cut may be applied to the front surface and the back surface of the plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 inside A lens cut may be applied to the back surface of the decorative portion 410b (may be formed in a polyhedron).

The decoration part decoration board 413 in the side window is attached to the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 at a position behind the connection base 412a of the decoration member 412 in the side window. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, also referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)” in some cases) of the decorative portion decoration substrate 413 in the side window is a surface mounting type and is a full-color capable of emitting multiple colors. It is used as an LED. In the side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape in the up, down, left, and right directions around the axis of the side window decoration portion 410b at a position behind each of the plurality of side window decoration portions 410b. Has been done.

The inner inner lens 414 is formed in an X shape in a front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window inner decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The inner inner lens 414 divides the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left and right. The inner inner lens 414 is formed transparent. The surface of the inner inner lens 414 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the decoration portion inside the side window arranged behind the inner inner lens 414 is arranged. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 413. It should be noted that a lens cut may be applied to the front surface and the back surface of the inner inner lens 414 (may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be applied to the back surface instead of the front surface of the inner inner lens 414. May be applied (may be formed in a polyhedron).

The right side inner lens 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is a wave shape that moves forward and then rearward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been formed. The right side inner lens 415 is transparently formed. The surface of the right side inner lens 415 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the side decoration substrate 418 are difficult to be clearly seen from the player side. The right side inner lens 415 and the back surface may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the right side inner lens 415 may be replaced with the back surface on the back surface. It may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron).

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and longitudinally, and has a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending in a wave shape along the right side inner lens 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending elliptical shape, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The right side decoration substrate 418 (right side inner lens 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed so as not to transmit light.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and longitudinally, and has a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending in a wave shape along the right side inner lens 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed with a through-hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction in a vertically extending elliptical shape, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The right side decoration substrate 418 (right side inner lens 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed so as not to transmit light.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape, and includes a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decoration substrate 418 are surface mounting type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. The door frame right side decoration substrate 418 can cause the door frame right side decoration body 419 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed transparent. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends vertically in a wave shape along the right side inner lens 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward. The front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the front surface and the back surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 may be The lens may be cut (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the back surface of the door frame right side decoration body 419 may be lens-cut (formed in a polyhedron. Good).

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decoration body 276 of the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end thereof is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right side of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the portion of the door frame right side decoration body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy manner so that a 1/4 portion thereof projects from the top to the front, and is formed in a partition shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front and rear direction inside the side window 410a, and allows the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Thus, the decorative portion 410b in the side window can be decorated with light emission. By illuminating the side window interior decoration portion 410b, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that light-embellish the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off. Through the space between the three side window interior decorations 410b in 410a, the inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility). Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (main game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing does not have to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily operated. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for a game on the pachinko machine 1 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, it is possible to block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity by other portions including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible for the player to make the whole of the game area 5a hard to see, and by making it difficult for the player to feel as if being seen by another player, it is possible to cause the other player to play the game without hesitation. ..

Furthermore, when the three LEDs on the side window interior decoration part 410b are caused to emit light by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a dazzle, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let At this time, since the three side window interior decorations 410b have a cylindrical shape, light is radiated in a band shape and a radial shape. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as the neighbor to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, attention is paid to other players. It is possible to prevent discomfort from being unable to concentrate on playing games and to prevent feeling lost due to mistakes being triggered, and to make the game more enjoyable by dedicating players to playing games. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as seen from the front, FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. FIG. 6 is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in a closed state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the lower front side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 has a translucent (for example, milky white) door frame top base 451 that is mounted above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame. A translucent (for example, milky white) top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both the left and right sides of the top base 451 and the front upper portion, and is attached to the front end of the top top cover 452. A transparent door frame top decoration 453, and a translucent (for example, milky white) door frame top bottom plate that connects the lower end of the door frame top decoration 453 and the lower end of the door frame top base 451. 454 and. In the present embodiment, the door frame top base 451, the top top cover 452, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are configured to have translucency (for example, have a milky white color). A top top cover 452 is attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover the left and right sides of the base 451 and the front upper part, and the lower end of the transparent door frame top decoration 453 and the lower end of the door frame top base 451 are doors. Since the frame top bottom plate 454 is connected, the door frame top base 451 may be configured as a transparent one instead of a translucent one (for example, having a milky white color).

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration body 453, and a door frame top central decoration board 455 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door. A door frame top left decoration board 456, which is attached to the left of the door frame top center decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a door A door frame top right decoration board 457, which is attached to the right of the door frame top center decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, I have it.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is arranged between the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top center decoration board 455 (that is, arranged behind the door frame top decoration body 453 and at the same time as the door frame top center decoration body 453). It is arranged between the transparent top center inner lens 458 attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, which is arranged in front of the board 455, and the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top left decoration board 456 (that is, , A transparent top left inner lens 459 mounted on the front surface of the top top cover 452, which is disposed behind the door frame top decoration body 453 and in front of the door frame top left decoration substrate 456. A top top cover 452 arranged between the decoration body 453 and the door frame top right decoration board 457 (that is, arranged behind the door frame top decoration body 453 and in front of the door frame top right decoration board 457). And a transparent top right inner lens 460 attached to the front surface of the.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached to the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 and a light-transmitting property attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the bottom bottom cover 465 from below (for example, milky white A lower cover frame 466, a door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the door frame top base 451, and an upper top cover 452 so as to cover the upper side of the door frame top base 451. And a door frame top top plate 468 having a light-transmitting property (for example, having a milky white color).

The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending left and right with the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left-right direction, and from the left and right ends near the front surface of the main body portion 451a. And a front protrusion 451b protruding forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is located upward. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so that the front ends thereof move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

The top top cover 452 is formed to have a front view shape that is substantially the same as the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed in such a shape as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect between the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 has the center in the left-right direction most protruding forward, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. In addition, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the top surface, which is largely cut away from the rear end toward the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed transparent. The door frame top decoration 453 has a shape in which the semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a curvature that decreases from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top top cover 452. Has been formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively. The front surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the front surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the back surface thereof may be lens-cut. May be provided (may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be provided on the back surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 (may be formed in a polyhedron). ..

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower ends of the door frame top decorations 453 and the lower ends of the main body portions 451a of the door frame top bases 451 and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. So that it extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction projects downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape. It has a pair of center speaker openings 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating vertically on the outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-right direction and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top central decoration substrate 455 is formed in a strip plate shape extending left and right. The door frame top central decoration substrate 455 is a full-color type in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) are surface mounting type and capable of emitting multiple colors. It is used as an LED. This door frame top central decoration substrate 455 can cause the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decoration substrate 456 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is a full-color type in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) is a surface mounting type and is capable of emitting multiple colors. It is used as an LED. The door frame top left decoration substrate 456 can cause the left portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is a full-color type in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) are surface mounting type and can emit multiple colors. It is used as an LED. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can cause the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 each extend in the left-right direction and are transparent. The surfaces of the top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 are each lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the door frame top center decoration board 455 arranged behind the top center inner lens 458 and a door frame top left decoration board arranged behind the top left inner lens 459. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of 456, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 arranged behind the top right inner lens 460. It is difficult for the player to see clearly. The top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460, as well as the front surface and the back surface, may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron), respectively. Instead of the surfaces of the top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460, the back surfaces may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron).

The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full range speaker and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs the high range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. The sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decoration board 455, a door frame top left decoration board 456, a door frame top right decoration board 457, a top center speaker 462, and a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration body 404 and the door frame right side decoration body 419, respectively, to form an integral decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice or music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[Illumination by topside speaker]
Next, the structure of the pair of top side speakers 464 respectively attached to the front surfaces of the pair of speaker brackets 463 in the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIGS. 72 to 74 will be briefly described. The topside speaker 464 has a vibrating plate and a vibrating portion such as a center cap made of a light-transmitting resin (for example, polypropylene having milky white) and a magnetic circuit portion such as a magnet and a yoke. It is formed in a columnar shape having a through hole penetrating therethrough, and the vibrating portion and the magnetic circuit portion are held by the housing portion. A plurality of openings are formed in the casing in the circumferential direction. The through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in a cylindrical shape is covered with a center cap arranged in the front, whereas the rear is open.

A top side speaker 464 is attached to an attachment portion (not shown) on the front surface of the speaker bracket 463, and a rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 has a predetermined distance from the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 toward the rear (in this embodiment, about a predetermined distance). The acoustic decoration substrate 469 is attached to the attachment portions formed on the four not-shown four substrate attachment bending plates (18 mm). Further, a transparent plate (not shown) is attached together with the acoustic decoration substrate 469 so as to cover the rear surface (rear surface) side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, to an attachment portion formed on the above-described four board attachment bending plates (not shown). This transparent plate protects the rear surface (rear surface) side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 so that other members do not come into contact with each other to cause an electrical trouble. In this way, the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463, and the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the transparent plate are attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, so that the speaker illumination unit is assembled. In other words, the speaker illumination unit is composed of the speaker bracket 463, the top side speaker 464, the acoustic decoration substrate 469, and the transparent plate.

When the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464. The acoustic decoration substrate 469 is arranged so as to face the rear surface thereof, and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 covers the rear of the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464.

On the front surface (front surface) and rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). .) forms a white resist layer. A plurality of LEDs (in the present embodiment, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor) 469a are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. A connector (not shown) is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469. A plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 are adapted to allow a constant current controlled by an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay substrate 467 to flow. The LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 receives the light emission data and the clock signal serially output from the peripheral control board 1510, and based on this, the acoustic decoration board 469. By controlling the constant current flowing to the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the LED, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 are turned on, turned off, blinking, and turned on and off. Various light emission modes are realized.

The peripheral control board 1510 detects abnormalities in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, occurrence of ball clogging in the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the dispensing device 580, etc., detection of fraudulent activity, opening of the door frame 3, and body). Opening of the frame 4, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or malfunction (defective operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), detection of original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (standby position), etc.) has occurred. When there is no light, the light emission data which is the light emission mode of the normal mode is output to the LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 detects abnormalities in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, occurrence of ball clogging in the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the dispensing device 580, etc., detection of fraudulent activity, door frame). 3, opening of the main body frame 4, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or malfunction (defective operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), detection of original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (movable body), etc.) )) occurs, the light emission data which is a notification mode as a mode different from the above-mentioned normal mode is output to an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal.

It should be noted that the light emitting mode (normal time) of the effect mode is a variety of light emitting modes in which lighting, extinction, blinking, gradation lighting, and the like are combined, and the main control board 1310 sends a control signal to the function display unit 1400. The pattern is variably displayed using a plurality of LEDs that are output based on this control signal, and the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a command corresponding to the variation pattern set when variably displaying the symbol, Based on this command, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the light emission state of the effect mode as a predetermined effect light emission (normal time). On the other hand, the notification mode (a mode different from the normal time) is a light emission mode in which a predetermined color (in the present embodiment, red) is turned on with the maximum brightness, and the payout control MPU is a door frame. When the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 is detected based on the detection signal from the opening switch, a door frame opening command to that effect is transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control board which has received this door frame opening command The peripheral 1310 adds predetermined information (information for adjusting the format for transmitting the command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510) to the door frame opening command that informs the main frame 4 that the door frame 3 is to be opened. The peripheral control board 1510 which has transmitted such a command to the control board 1510 and has received such a command controls to a predetermined notification mode (a mode different from the normal time).

Although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, the part number of the front surface side electronic component and the front surface side electronic component are arranged in the vicinity of the front surface side electronic components such as the mounted LEDs 769a. Includes the attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the area indicating the position (in addition, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component) In some cases, the surface-side notation part indicating () may be printed with silk paint on a solid white resist with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. Although illustration is omitted, on the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, a part number of the rear surface side electronic component, an area indicating a position where the rear surface side electronic component is arranged, and the like are provided in the vicinity of the rear surface side electronic component such as a connector. The attributes of the back side electronic component (further, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included). The back side notation shown is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous to white.

Here, the reason why white color is used as the resist liquid and yellow color is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is noticeable when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (rear side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. While the notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface is When the side notation part (reverse side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow backside notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, since a light emitting effect is brilliantly produced by the light emission of the light emitting parts such as the LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are As described above, the LED is a full-color LED capable of multicolor light emission, and the light emission mode changes variously by being turned on (light emission) or being turned off. For this reason, on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, a white coating film is formed by applying a white resist solution on the entire area except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. (Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”.) A white resist layer is formed, and a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is formed on the solid-coated white resist. By making the front side notation part that can be identified by silk printing with yellow paint, when the full color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the yellow front side notation part is not conspicuous to the white resist In addition to that, in addition, when a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned on (when emitting light), a solid white resist with high reflectance and a yellow paint very close to white reflectance are provided. It is possible to maintain a high reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 by a combination of the front-side notation portion printed by silk printing with.

If yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow color printed by silk printing may become pale yellow or dark yellow due to variations in the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a wide range of yellow (yellow on the bright side and yellow on the dark side). Even if you specify yellow, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

In a state where the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 corresponds to the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464. Since the rear cover is arranged, when a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, the top side speaker 464 passes through the through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the columnar shape, and is transmitted. The light is emitted from the center cap having a light-transmitting property, and the light is emitted from the diaphragm having a light-transmitting property through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing portion. You can decorate. As described above, the top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Therefore, the top lower cover 465 extends through the through holes of the top lower cover 465 to cover the front surface of the top side speaker 464 and its surroundings. In addition to being visible, the electrical decoration of the top side speaker 464 can also be viewed.

Further, when a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, the LEDs are reflected on the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke forming the magnetic circuit section formed in a cylindrical shape) and reflected from the top. The space between the back surface of the side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is repeatedly reversed, and the light is emitted rearward from the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 toward the rear. In other words, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. In addition, the plurality of LEDs 469a leaks from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (through) a transparent plate (not shown) that covers the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 which is the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469.

As described above, the speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protruding portions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The door frame top base 451 is larger than the outer circumference of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 so that the acoustic decoration substrate 469 attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 at a position corresponding to the position where the left and right speaker brackets 463 are attached is exposed. Through holes 451ba each having a shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed. When a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, the LEDs are emitted to the rear of the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 to the rear (in other words, the sound decoration When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 469 emits light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leaks from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469). Through a transparent plate (not shown) covering the rear surface (back surface), a plurality of LEDs 469a leaks from at least part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469), and to the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the door frame top base 451. The light is emitted to the rear of the door frame top base 451 through a gap defined by the inner circumference of the through hole 451ba formed.

As described above, the door frame top base 451 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a. The door frame base 101 has a shape larger than or the same as the outer circumference of the through hole 451ba at a position corresponding to the left and right through holes 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451, and a through hole 101k penetrating back and forth. Are formed respectively. As a result, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, the LEDs are emitted rearward of the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 toward the rear (in other words, the rear surface). When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leaks from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (acoustic decoration that becomes the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. Through a transparent plate (not shown) that covers the rear surface (back surface) of the substrate 469 (through a plurality of LEDs 469a leaks from at least part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469)), the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the door frame top base The light is emitted to the rear of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 through a gap formed by the inner periphery of the through hole 451ba formed in 451 and the through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101.

In the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the left and right through holes 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a to be mounted divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a provided in the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 and has an outer shape of a substantially square shape in front view and an upper left side area of the front component member 1000. The light will be reflected in each of the upper right regions. In the present embodiment, the front component 1000 is made of transparent resin, but it may be made of black resin. In addition, hereinafter, when the door frame 3 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the opening/closing axis side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is referred to as “the pivotal support side of the door frame 3” or “the pivotal support side of the main body frame 4”. And the side opposite to the opening/closing axis side may be referred to as the “open side of the door frame 3” or the “open side of the main body frame 4”.

[Upper left area of the previous component]
On the front surface (front surface) of the upper left area of the front component member 1000, a function display unit 1400 that displays a game situation (in the present embodiment, a black color is provided excluding each transparent area for confirming the lighting mode of a plurality of LEDs) Is provided, a reflective sheet 1000a, which is a white printed portion having a white color having a high reflectance or a color close to white, is attached except the region where the functional display unit 1400 is arranged.

The front surface (front surface) area of the upper left side area of the front component member 1000 to which the reflection sheet 1000a is attached is an area outside the game area 5a formed on the game board 5, and the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. In the closed state, the functional display unit 1400 is covered by the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 except the region where the function display unit 1400 is arranged, and the reflection sheet 1000a passes through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. It becomes difficult to see. That is, the presence of the reflection sheet 1000a, which has nothing to do with the content of the game effect, can be hidden, so that it does not obstruct the game.

Further, in the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the reflection sheet 1000a is arranged at the position corresponding to the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 in the upper left side region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5, and the pachinko machine is used. When the machine 1 is viewed from the front side, on the pivotal support side of the door frame 3 (the pivotal support side of the main body frame 4), the front surface of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. Light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the (front surface) was provided on the game board 5 side provided separately from the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side) It is reflected by the reflection sheet 1000a and emitted toward the front, and the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101, the outer periphery of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the left through hole formed in the door frame top base 451. Light is emitted from the light-transmitting diaphragm of the left topside speaker 464 through a gap formed by the inner circumference of the hole 451ba and a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing portion of the left topside speaker 464. Is emitted, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 can be efficiently used as a game effect or a notification mode. In the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of components mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the LED 469a is reflected by the reflection sheet 1000a provided on the game board 5 side provided separately from the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side), Since the light is emitted forward, light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 is within the game area 5a. It does not emit toward, and also does not emit toward the rear of the game board 5. That is, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 is mounted. The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

In this way, the reflection sheet 1000a has the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on the left side when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 (the door frame 3 is closed). It is provided on the front surface of the upper left side region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to, and the light emitted by the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 can be reflected toward the front of the reflection sheet 1000a. Therefore, light (leakage light) that leaks backward from the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 can be emitted toward the front of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 by reflecting toward the front of the reflection sheet 1000a. It is capable of functioning as a reflection member. As a result, it is possible to prevent light leakage of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 from proceeding toward the rear of the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to suppress light traveling rearward of the game board 5.

Although not shown, on the reflection sheet 1000a, a QR code (registered trademark) in which a number (management number) that identifies the model of the game board 5 and attribute information of the game board 5 such as the manufacturing date of the game board 5 is stored. And are printed at predetermined positions with dark black paint. Identification related to the pachinko machine 1 by the reflection sheet 1000a, the number (management number) for identifying the model of the game board 5, and the QR code (registered trademark) in which the attribute information of the game board 5 such as the manufacturing date of the game board 5 is stored. A specific information display unit configured to display information (that is, a QR code (registered trademark) in which attribute information of the game board 5 such as a number identifying the model of the game board 5 and a manufacturing date of the game board 5 is stored) is configured. ing. In the state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, since the front component member 1000 is made of transparent resin (when the front component member 1000 is made of black resin, the background is black), Since the white reflection sheet 1000a is conspicuous, it is possible to naturally direct the line of sight of an attendant such as a clerk in the game hall to the reflection sheet 1000a by the attractiveness.

Further, the front surface (front surface) area of the upper left side area of the front component member 1000 to which the reflection sheet 1000a is attached is an area outside the game area 5a formed on the game board 5 as described above, and is a door frame. In a state in which 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, it is adapted to be covered by the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 except the region where the function display unit 1400 is arranged, and the reflection sheet 1000a is a door. Since it becomes difficult to see through the door window 101a of the frame 3, the control number and the QR code (registered trademark) printed on the reflection sheet 1000a become difficult to see through the door window 101a of the door frame 3.

Further, in the reflection sheet 1000a, since the reflection sheet 1000a is white, when the background is white, the dark black color is conspicuous, and the management number and the QR code (registered trademark) are easily visible. Further, the QR code (registered trademark) is a device separate from the pachinko machine 1, and when the QR code (registered trademark) is read by a code reading device carried by a clerk such as a clerk in a game hall, the reflective sheet 1000a has a white background. Is white, and a QR code (registered trademark) having a dark black color can be easily read. That is, the white color of the reflective sheet 1000a can improve the readability of the QR code (registered trademark). The surface area of the reflection sheet 1000a is larger than the area of the front surface (front surface) or rear surface (back surface) of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469. Further, instead of the QR code (registered trademark), it may be a one-dimensional barcode, letters, numbers, figures, symbols, etc., or letters, numbers, figures, symbols, etc. may be combined appropriately.

Although not shown, a plurality of pseudo nails are arranged on the front surface (front surface) of the upper left region of the front component 1000. Through holes are formed in the reflection sheet 1000a at the portions corresponding to the regions where the pseudo nails having a gold color are arranged. On the front surface (front surface) of the game area 5a of the game board 5, as described above, a plurality of obstacle nails N having a gold color are planted. Since the pseudo nail is also made of a metal having a gold color, it can be used as a reflecting member in the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, like the reflecting sheet 1000a.

[Upper right area of the previous component]
On the open side of the main body frame 3 and on the front surface (front surface) side of the upper right side region and the lower right side region of the front component member 1000, a metal for maintaining the mounting state of the game board 5 and the main body frame 4 Each stop FT (see FIG. 10) is provided. That is, on the open side of the door frame 3, the metal stoppers FT are arranged on the front (front surface) side of the upper right side region and the lower right side region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5, respectively. In particular, on the front surface side of the upper right side region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5, a metal stopper FT is arranged at a position corresponding to the sound decoration board 469 on the right side. The metal stopper FT is designed so that its end portion is inserted into and engaged with a disc stopper insertion hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame 4.

Further, the door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 is made of metal, and as described above, is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101, Rigidity is given to the door frame base unit 100, and the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 that are vertically spaced apart from each other and extend vertically are connected to the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The left and right upper reinforcing frames 113 extend left and right, the left end side of the left reinforcing frame 111 is attached to the left end at an upper position, and the right end of the right reinforcing frame 112 extends to the right. A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right end of 114 and the right reinforcing frame 112, and a plurality of vertically-separatedly mounted rearwardly of the right reinforcing frame 112, which are hooks for door frames of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4. A hooking member 116 to which 652 is hooked. That is, the metal right reinforcing frame 112 is arranged on the rear side of the door frame 3 and on the open side of the door frame 3.

As described above, in the present embodiment, on the open side of the main body frame 4, the metal stoppers FT are provided on the front (front surface) side of the upper right side region and the lower right side region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5, respectively. The metal right reinforcing frame 112 is arranged on the rear surface side of the door frame 3 on the open side of the door frame 3. The metal stopper FT and the metal right reinforcing frame 112 are both made of metal and have gloss. Therefore, in the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the right acoustic decoration substrate 469 that passes through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 ( Light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface) is provided by a metal stopper FT arranged on the front side of the upper right side region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 and a metal right reinforcing frame 112. Can be reflected. Further, even when the door frame 3 is slightly opened to the main body frame 4, the light emission on the back side of the door frame 3 can be easily visually recognized. In the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of components mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. Although the light from the LED 469a is reflected by the metal stopper FT arranged on the front side of the upper right side region of the front constituent member 1000 of the game board 5 and the metal right reinforcing frame 112, the door frame base Light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the right through hole 101k formed in 101 does not go out toward the game area 5a, and the rear of the game board 5 Also does not emit. That is, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 is mounted. The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

Since the front component member 1000 is made of transparent resin, the front component member 1000 may be made of black resin instead of this. Even with such a configuration, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the right side acoustic decoration passing through the right side through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. Light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the board 469 is provided with a metal stopper FT arranged on the front surface side of the upper right side region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5, and a metal right reinforcement. Since the light can be reflected by the frame 112, light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 can be emitted. It does not emit toward the game area 5a, nor does it emit toward the rear of the game board 5. That is, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 is mounted. The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

In addition, a white reflective sheet in which the shape of the above-mentioned white reflective sheet 1000a is appropriately modified is attached to the peripheral area on the upper right side of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 where the metal stopper FT is arranged. You may comprise. In this way, in the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the right acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. Light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the (front surface), a metal stopper FT arranged on the front side of the upper right region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5, a metal right reinforcing frame 112, Since the light can be reflected by the white reflection sheet, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 can be used. Light is not emitted toward the game area 5a, and is not emitted toward the rear of the game board 5. That is, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 is mounted. The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

By the way, a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall is provided on, for example, the door frame 3 after inserting the regular key into the cylinder lock 130 and rotating the same when opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. By grasping a decorative member such as the transparent door frame right side decoration body 419 of the door frame right side unit 410 with a hand, the door frame 3 is opened from the closed state to the main body frame 4. Since the decorative member is continuously pulled, as the work of opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 increases, the load may be repeatedly applied to the joint portion between the decorative member and the door frame 3, and the door frame may be damaged. There is.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on the right side on the open side of the door frame 3 is as described above. In addition, since the light is emitted rearward through the through hole 101k on the right side formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 are It is possible to emit light toward the rear of 3. On the open side of the door frame 3, a metal right reinforcement frame 112 is arranged on the rear surface side of the door frame 3, and on the open side of the main body frame 4, the front surface of the upper right side region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5. Metal stoppers FT are arranged on the (front) side, both of which are members made of metal. Therefore, when an attendant such as a clerk in the game hall opens the door frame 3 to the main frame 3, The light reflected by the metallic right reinforcing frame 112 and the metallic reflecting portion such as the metallic stopper FT leaks through the gap formed between the open side of the door frame 3 and the open side of the main body frame 4, and the gap is formed. Can be made to emit light. As a result, when a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall performs the work of opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, for example, the transparent door frame right side of the door frame right side unit 410 provided in the door frame 3 When the decorative member such as the side decorative body 419 is grasped by hand and the decorative member is pulled to such an extent that the light emission in the gap can be visually observed, the pulling of the decorative member is stopped, and then a finger is put in the gap to insert the door frame. 3 can be opened. Since it is possible to shorten the time for grasping and pulling the decorative member by hand, it is possible to shorten the time for which a load is applied to the joint between the decorative member (door frame right side unit 410) and the door frame 3. Therefore, damage to the door frame 3 can be suppressed.

[When opening the door frame]
By the way, the pachinko machine 1 accidentally becomes an obstacle nail with another game ball when the game ball shot toward the game area 5a of the game board 5 flows down while the player is playing the game. It may become clogged. When the player successively hits the game balls toward the game area 5a in this state, the game balls are further stacked on the jammed game balls, and the game balls are gathered in a grape shape. In order to eliminate the state where the game balls are gathered in a grape shape, the player calls an attendant such as a clerk in the game hall to remove the game balls gathered in the grape shape. A clerk such as a clerk of the game hall called by the player opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. At this time, when the pachinko machine 1 detects the opening, each of the decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is opened. In addition to controlling all the mounted LEDs to be turned off, each movable body provided in the game board 5 is controlled to be maintained in the position at the time of opening regardless of whether it is operating or not. Control of the game board at time. With or instead of controlling the game board at the time of opening, a specific LED (for example, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469) among a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board provided in the door frame 3 is used. When the door frame 3 is provided with a movable body, the movable body is maintained at the open position regardless of whether it is operating or not. "Control of the door frame at the time of opening" is performed so that the control is performed as follows.

When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when controlling the door frame at the time of opening, a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board included in the game board 5 are all turned off, and/or A specific LED (for example, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469) among a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board included in the door frame 3 is lit in a notification mode for notifying the door opening. Ready to go. When a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, as described above, the translucency is passed through the through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the columnar shape of the top side speaker 464. Light is emitted from the center cap, and light is emitted from the light-transmitting diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing. Furthermore, the light is reflected by the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke forming the magnetic circuit portion formed in a cylindrical shape), and repeated between the back surface of the top side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. On the contrary, in order to emit light from the rear side (back surface) of the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (in other words, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light). Then, the plurality of LEDs 469a leaks from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (through a transparent plate (not shown) that covers the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, which is the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (transparent). ) Because a plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part around the acoustic decoration substrate 469)), a gap between the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the inner periphery of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451 and the door. The light is emitted to the rear of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 through the through hole 101k formed in the frame base 101.

That is, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 can emit light toward the front of the door frame 3 and can emit light toward the rear of the door frame 3, and thus the door frame. In a state in which 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 (that is, when the door frame 3 is opened), the acoustic decoration board 469 of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is viewed from the direction facing the front surface side of the door frame 3 and the direction facing the rear surface side of the door frame 3. It is possible to visually recognize the notification mode by the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface). In other words, not only from the front of the door frame 3 but also from the rear of the door frame 3, it can be visually recognized that the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 are emitting light in the notification mode. The plurality of LEDs 469a is arranged to leak light from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. Thereby, in the game hall, the front side (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is provided to the staff such as a clerk in the game hall passing through the passage side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the passage side facing the rear side of the door frame 3. It is possible to notify the notification mode by the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened, the notification mode can be visually recognized from the front surface side and the rear surface side of the door frame 3. Further, in the gaming hall, an abnormality or a problem occurs in a clerk such as a clerk in the gaming hall from both aisle side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the aisle side facing the rear side of the door frame 3 (pachinko). Abnormality in the machine 1 (for example, occurrence of ball clogging of the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the dispensing device 580, etc., detection of fraudulent activity, opening of the door frame 3, opening of the body frame 4, wiring (Disconnection, etc.) or defects (defective operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), detection of original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (standby position), etc.))) can be quickly reported. The work efficiency of the hall can be improved.

By the way, if the speaker's diaphragm is broken with an unauthorized tool, the sound will not flow, but it is easy to see that the speaker's diaphragm is broken, while the speaker's diaphragm is opened with an unauthorized tool. The sound changes even if it is opened, but the sound flows. Therefore, if you make a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an unauthorized tool to remove the wire connected to the speaker's connection terminal or break the wire, you can prevent the sound from flowing from the speaker. Even if the gaming machine can detect the act of illegally acquiring the game ball by performing the above, the warning sound cannot be heard from the speaker in the first place. When a person who performs such an illegal act leaves the gaming machine, the gaming machine waits for the player, and a silent demonstration (a plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame and the gaming board is in a waiting light emitting mode) The player waiting image is displayed on the effect display device that emits light and is capable of displaying the effect image.). Then, an employee such as a clerk in the game hall, in such a waiting state for the player, opens a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an unauthorized tool and disconnects or disconnects the wiring connected to the speaker connection terminal. As a result, it becomes difficult to determine whether or not sound is output from the speaker.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464 is perforated with a wire, the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is arranged behind the topside speaker 464, and therefore the front surface (surface of the acoustic decoration substrate 469) When a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted in (4) emit light, light is emitted from the translucent center cap through the through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the columnar shape of the top side speaker 464, and the housing portion is Light is emitted from the translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction. Since the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464 and the center cap are made of a resin having a light-transmitting property (for example, polypropylene having milky white), the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464 passes through the hole. The light that is emitted as a spotlight shines as a spotlight with higher brightness than the light that is emitted from the diaphragm and the center cap. As a result, as described above, the top lower cover 465 is formed by the punching metal made of the metal plate having the innumerable through holes, so that the top lower cover 465 can be penetrated during the silent demonstration. Through the holes, the existence of the holes formed in the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464 can be found as the existence shining with high brightness like a spotlight. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the determination of whether or not sound is being output from the top side speaker 464.

Further, when the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464 is perforated with a wire to perform a silent demonstration, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 are turned off (which happens to be off. Or a state in which a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 are turned off within a period from the end of the silent demonstration to the start of the silent demonstration again. In addition, since the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on which the white coating film with the white resist solution is formed is disposed behind the topside speaker 464, the background becomes white due to the white coating film. The white color of the white coating film can be visually recognized through the holes formed in the diaphragm 464 and the innumerable through holes formed in the top lower cover 465, and the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 was illegally opened. The holes are easy to see. This makes it possible to find out whether the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464 is illegally perforated. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the determination of whether or not sound is being output from the top side speaker 464.

In addition, a silent demonstration that a plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 emit light in a player waiting light emitting mode, and a player waiting image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image. As a result, the plurality of LEDs emit light in the player waiting light emitting mode. Therefore, even if the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is pierced by a wire, it is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. Light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 469a leaks through a hole formed in the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464, and thus it seems that part of the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464 is emitting light. Thereby, it can be found that the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 has a hole.

A translucent speaker net may be provided on the front surface of the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464. By providing the speaker net, it is possible to prevent illegal intrusion of the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464 with a wire, and it takes time to make a hole in the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464. , Can contribute to the early detection of such misconduct. Further, since the speaker net has a light-transmitting property, it is difficult for the light emitted through the light-transmitting diaphragm of the topside speaker 464 to be obstructed.

Further, in the topside speaker 464, the vibrating plate and the vibrating portion such as the center cap are made of a translucent resin such as polypropylene having a milky white color, but are made of a translucent resin and have a gray color ( Polypropylene having a color close to black), red, pink, sky blue, blue, green, yellow, or the like may be used, and a transparent resin may be used instead of the translucent resin.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine including a front frame provided with a light emitting device has been proposed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). The light emitting device provides effects and error notifications that occur during the game. However, when the front frame is opened, the notification mode of the light emitting device can be visually recognized from the direction facing the front side of the front frame, while it is difficult to visually recognize the notification mode of the light emitting device from the direction facing the rear side of the front frame. There was a problem.

In addition, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine that detachably holds a game board in a middle frame and that includes a front frame configured to cover the front side of the game board (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-079163). (Paragraph [0019], and FIG. 1)). By the way, in order to open the front frame, a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall inserts the key into the cylinder lock and performs a turning operation, and then grasps and pulls the decorative member provided on the front frame by hand, As the number of opening operations increases, the front frame may be damaged due to repeated load on the joint between the decorative member and the front frame.

Further, conventionally, a gaming machine including a front frame provided with a light emitting device has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0019] and FIG. 1)). The light emitting device emits light in a special mode different from the normal time when some abnormality or trouble occurs in the gaming machine, and can notify the occurrence of the abnormality or trouble to the outside. However, when the amount of light traveling toward the rear of the game board increases, the amount of light traveling toward the front of the gaming machine decreases, so it was difficult to say that it is sufficient to notify the outside of an abnormality or a defect.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine in which specific information regarding the game machine is provided on the game board (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-080279 (paragraph [0035] and FIG. 14)). As a result, it is possible to confirm from the outside whether or not the game machine is a legitimate game board, and it is possible to suppress an unauthorized change act or the like for the game machine. However, in the same manner as in the conventional case, the specific information can be visually recognized from the player side, so that the decorativeness is deteriorated, which may cause deterioration in the entertainment of the game.

Further, conventionally, a game machine including a speaker in a front frame has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). Along with the effect sound generated during the game being played through a speaker provided in the gaming machine, an error notification sound and the like are also played. By the way, if the vibrating plate of the speaker is broken by an unauthorized tool, sound does not flow, but it is easy to visually recognize that the vibrating plate of the speaker is broken. The sound changes even if the hole is made in the diaphragm of the speaker with an unauthorized tool, but the sound changes. Therefore, if you make a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an unauthorized tool to remove the wire connected to the speaker's connection terminal or disconnect it, you can prevent the sound from flowing from the speaker. Even if the gaming machine can detect the act of illegally acquiring the game ball by performing the above, the warning sound does not play from the speaker. When a person who performs such an illegal act leaves the game machine, the game machine waits for the player, and a silent demonstration (the light-emitting device emits light in the player-waiting light emission mode and the image display device is displayed). The player waiting image is displayed.) is repeated. However, in such a waiting state for a player, a staff member such as a game hall clerk punches a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an unauthorized tool to disconnect or disconnect the wiring connected to the speaker connection terminal. As a result, it is difficult to determine whether or not sound is output from the speaker.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the drawing, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration 276, a plate center upper decoration 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, a door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is entirely surrounded by the door frame right side decoration 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

A plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration 276, a plate upper center decoration 312a, a door frame left side decoration 404, a door frame right side decoration 419, and a door frame top decoration that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, the player can see a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, the plate upper center decoration 312a, the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, which surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a, and Behind the door frame top decoration body 453, a plate upper left decoration substrate 273, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314, a door frame left side decoration substrate 402, a door frame right side decoration substrate 418, a door frame top central decoration Since the board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 are arranged, the LEDs of these decoration boards are appropriately made to emit light, and the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a is decorated with light. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a, or to make it.

In the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, a circular donut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 having a diameter larger than the distance of the upper tray 201 in the front-rear direction, and coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotation operating portion 302. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semi-circular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is provided below the rotation operation unit 302. Two doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tubular) large-diameter upper decoration body 312a and lower-plate middle decoration body 312b are mounted vertically separated from each other and Door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 and door frame right side decorative body of the door frame right side unit 410 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. The door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged in the rotation operation part 302 and the two plate center upper decorations 312a and the plate center lower decorations 312b, and the rotation operation part 302 and the outer periphery are arranged. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be conspicuous.

In addition, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate lower left decoration 281, the plate lower right decoration 286, and the plate lower center decoration 312b, which are arranged below the plate center upper decoration 312a, are The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, in the effect operation unit 300, it becomes larger from the lower end to the upper part, so that it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the up-and-down direction, and the rotation operation section 302 arranged on the upper side and operable by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

Further, a doughnut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to make the entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 easy to see, and to make the rotation operating unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 look large. Further, as described above, the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, so that the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operating unit 302 is to be rotationally operated, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player immediately rotates. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation-type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation part 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotation operation part 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are projected far more forward than the upper plate 201, and the plate center top Since the decorative body 312a and the dish central lower decorative body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operating unit 302, the dish central upper decorative body 312a, and the dish central lower decorative body 312b should be made to stand out greatly. At the same time, the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest and to appeal to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the present pachinko machine 1 easy to select as a pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used for the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

The body frame 4 has a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. Main frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end of the main frame and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached, A bottom hinge frame assembly for a main body frame that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. And a solid 520.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and the main body frame reinforcing unit 530 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500. The ball launching device 540 for driving the ball B, the reverse L-shaped dispensing base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and the dispensing base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 that is attached to the main body frame base 501 and that covers the rear side of the game board 5, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. And a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 that is formed in a rectangular frame shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank that is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box shape that extends left and right and is opened upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending to the left in the shape of a groove opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, The second rail cover 555, which is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, is spaced apart from the one rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. The ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and the ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering downward direction, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 for the door frame 3 side Alternatively, a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3, and projecting rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked to the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hooks 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that urges the outer frame hook 653 upward and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward are provided.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. 84A to 84C are explanatory views showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear part inserted from the front into the frame of the outer frame 2 and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to a main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a base main body 501a that is formed in a vertically extending rectangular shape in a front view, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. The game board insertion port 501b, which penetrates the front and rear in the range of the height of the game board 5, is inserted from the front side, and the game board 5 is placed on the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b. It is provided with a placing portion 501c, and a game board regulating portion 501d which protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the left-right direction and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side in front view of the game board placement portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and has a launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540, and a launcher mounting portion. The cylinder insertion opening 501f that penetrates the front and rear on the right side in front view of the portion 501e and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and the front and rear penetrates on the lower left side in front view of the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501g that faces the body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620 and the body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. A cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating in the front and rear direction at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base main body 501a in a front view, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j rotatably attached to the rear main body 501a is formed near the upper and lower end portions of the rear end of the base body 501a at the left end in front view. The upper hinge mounting portion 501k and the lower hinge mounting portion 501l are provided.

On the body frame base 501, a game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction at a position below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion opening 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right of the speaker opening 501g to a position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. .. The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat plate-shaped guide main body 502a extending leftward and rightward, protrudes forward on both upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a, and extends rightward from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are projecting, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the front and rear ends of the guide main body 502a that penetrate through the front and rear and And a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Has been formed. The attachment shaft 502c of the connection cable guide member 502 is attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically in the vicinity of the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. This allows the connection cable guide member 502 to rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is made up of a plurality of wiring cords, and one end of the connection cable 503 is the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 or the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (the table unit 2000 in response to a command from a peripheral control board 1510 described later). And a decorative substrate provided in the back unit 3000, a production drive substrate 1720 described later that drives a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like, and the opposite end is the door frame main relay substrate 104 of the door frame 3. And the door frame sub relay board 105.

Next, the function and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) to which the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

Then, a connection cable that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and a production drive board 1720 described later of the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3. A guide 503 guides the side of the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side, which is connected to a later-described production drive board 1720, so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide main body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502. With the binding band 504 inserted into a set of through holes 502d in the same horizontal direction among a plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower end sides of the guide main body 502a while being brought into contact with the front surface of the main body 502a. , Is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and in the state where the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 are rearward. (See FIG. 84(a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l and passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 to cover the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (desirably α/3≧β). (See FIG. 84(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but stops increasing when the opening angle α exceeds a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). To change. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at the opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. Can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 is not provided. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the.

Further, since the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can add a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened, when the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back by 180 degrees changes to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 acts due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the crease, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is prevented. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is located closer to the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the leading end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to move toward the door frame hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axial center) side of the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and is centered on the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, rather than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. An angle at which a tangent line to a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts the connection cable 503, thereby closing the front end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be surely closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main frame]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L-shape, and a cylindrical protrusion upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 511. The main frame upper frame hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the up-down direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in the front view in a horizontally extending portion and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the upper door frame hinge assembly 120. I have it.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 such that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Body frame under hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 arranged at an upper distance from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and also has a lower portion. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3 extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion. , Are provided. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. To be The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 can be attached to the main body frame 4. Can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in a plan view whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded mold material.

In the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end, the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 is restricted from moving forward and downward. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side, which is formed in a U shape with the right side open in plan view. The groove portion 530a is for inserting the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes a meandering state in a plan view, and an illegal tool is left from the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 85(b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for driving into the game area 5a. The ball launching device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength according to the turning angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 540 is mounted on the launching device mounting portion 501e of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 and a flat plate-shaped launching base 541, and is attached to the rear surface of the right side of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front. From the vicinity of the tip of the hitting mallet 543, the hitting solenoid 542 which is a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends through the shooting base 541 and which extends forward, the hitting hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotating shaft of the hitting solenoid 542, It is equipped with a launch rail 544 attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in the state where the handle 182 is operated, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength according to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided into the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is hit into the game area 5a.

Note that, due to the hitting strength of the game ball B and the like, if the hit game ball B does not reach within the game area 5a, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From the space between them, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 86(b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with a width in the front-rear direction being substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in front view that is substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a and extending downward downward, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. From above to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a back plate upper part 551d, and from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right side and extending to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width. The back plate left part 551e, the inner plate part 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left part 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate part 551b, and the front part to the right side of the lower side of the left plate part 551b. The bottom plate portion 551g extends to a position substantially the same as the right side of the left back plate 551e, and the connecting plate portion 551h connects the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open inward of the front and the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same width as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left side plate portion 551b is located above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the dispensing base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the dispensing base 551 is provided with a shallow recessed portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and the dispensing base portion 551 A unit 560 is attached. Further, the dispensing base 551 has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached, which projects rightward at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 and extending in the left-right direction and having a box shape that is open upward, and a portion extending in the left-right direction of the dispensing base 551. A tank rail 553, which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in the shape of a groove opened upward, is provided.

In addition, the payout base unit 550 is installed on the upper end of the tank rail 553 while being spaced apart from the first rail cover 554, which is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and leftward from the first rail cover 554 in a front view. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate 551a. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The ball tank 552 has a left end communicating with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is diagonal from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 to the left and rearward, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one from the depth that is several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and extend straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height on the left end side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side becomes low at various angles. The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and has an end portion on the first rail cover 554 side around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. It is rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By rectifying the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B which is circulating in two stages by this rectifying piece 556a and rectifying it so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side, the inside of the tank rail 553 Even if the height becomes low, it does not block the ball.

The ball stopper member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and by sliding leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side on the downstream side.

Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in front view on the upper surface of the part of the payout base 551 extending to the left and right. The external terminal board 558 is for making electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall structure of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87(a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 87(b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 88(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 88(b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570, which guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 for paying out one by one, an upper tank ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper tank ball path unit. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and in a normal state. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated to the upper full ball path unit. The game ball B is discharged to the 600 side.

The upper tank ball path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side through the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Sphere guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guiding unit 570 has a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 which has a guiding path 570a extending in a meandering shape in which the game ball B can flow, and which is open to the front, and closes the front side of the guiding unit base 571. The flat-shaped guide passage front lid 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball cutting detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of the flag (see FIG. 92).

In the ball guiding unit 570, the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front lid 572 are formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide the guide path. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering shape while repeatedly being folded back and forth between the widths of the unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guiding unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the flow direction in which the game ball B flows. It can be guided in a line.

The movable piece member 573 is attached near the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570 such that the movable piece member 573 can advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. More specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an upper portion of the movable piece member 573 around an axis extending in the front and rear direction at a right outer side portion of the guide passage 570a, and a part of a lower end thereof projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. Is formed. The movable piece member 573 is in a state where the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is retracted from the inside of the guide passage 570a by the game ball B coming into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a, and is not protruding. Becomes

The ball cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 projects into the guide passage 570a, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a is the discharging passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the entire height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are provided in the guide passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken along the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90(a) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear center of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA of (a). Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear side.

The payout device 580 is a box-shaped open to the rear and has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow, and a payout device main body 581 having a ball removal passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and payout. A flat-plate-shaped dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device body 581 and is open rearward. ing.

Further, the dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and a rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshed with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device front cover 583; , A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and meshes with the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front cover 583. A payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that integrally rotate with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582, and project into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear side. A ball-removing movable piece 592, which is attached to the ball-removing path 580b so as to be openable and closable at a portion branched from the dispensing path 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-removing movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-removing path 580b closes the ball-removing path 580b. The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 are provided with a ball removing lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically in a plan view. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 89, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position closer to the left from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction in rear view. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward by about 1/3 of the total height from the top so that it gradually moves to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly rightward and downward from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width, and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after being bent to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B with the outer periphery of the payout blade 589. Is formed in a circular arc shape that is concentric with the payout blade 589, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side in rear view with respect to the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

The ball drop passage 580b branches at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and is bent rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view, and in the rear view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the payout passage movable piece 592 is attached in the part where the payout passage 580a and the discharge passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B. A main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each other so as to form a narrower gap and to be continuous with the left side wall of the payout passage 580a and the ball passage passage 580b in rear view. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball-removing passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend rearward at a position at a height of about 1/3 from the top in a rear view. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly form the side wall of the ball passage 580b. The ball-moving movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side in rear view of a portion of the dispensing device main body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front cover 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-like detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at three intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the side wall of the payout passage and the side wall of the payout passage in the portion extending from the upper side in the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis and then extending to the right in rear view. In addition, it projects into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 is provided with a ball accommodating portion 589b which is recessed toward the center side with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B between the three vane pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be stored in the ball storage portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the gaming ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. This allows the game ball B stored in the ball storage portion 589b to be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout vane 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by a payout device rear cover 582 and a payout device front cover 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged to the left of the rotation axis of the payout gear member 588 when viewed from the rear when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball-removable movable piece 592 has an upper end rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a V shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The hollow movable piece 592 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball removal passage 580b or to retreat to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the up and down direction in the rear view left side near the upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592. A part of the ball pull-out lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and projects rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding part. When the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the lower end, the lower part of the ball pulling lever 593 can contact the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear can be restricted. The ball removing passage 580b can be closed by the ball removing movable piece 592. Further, when the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 90).

When the ball-removing lever 593 is raised to make the ball-removing movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state of connecting beads on the upstream side of the ball-removing movable piece 592, has a ball-removing movable piece 592. It will flow down to the side of the ball passage 580b. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a in a straight line, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout vane 589 that restricts the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is closer to the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down sooner.

In this way, in the state in which the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, so the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. Although the game ball B will come into contact with the lower end side of the device vigorously, the ball-moving movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since the ball-removing passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the contact force causes the ball-removing movable piece 592 to move to the outside of the ball-removing passage 580b. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the withdrawal passage 580b and the game ball B, and it is possible to prevent a strong force from acting on the ball removal movable piece 592 by the game ball B, and the ball removal movement due to the collision of the game ball B is possible. It is possible to suppress deterioration of the durability and damage of the piece 592.

From this, since it is possible to make it difficult to damage the ball-removing movable piece 592, it is possible to discharge more game balls B to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball-removing passage 580b more quickly, so that the pachinko machine It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer to each other than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B abuts on the ball-removing movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-removing passage 580b, the ball-removing movable piece 592 connects the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. When moving to the outside through the space, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball-removing movable piece 592, the gap is larger than that of the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

Then, by blocking the outward movement of the game ball B between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball removing movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the ball-moving movable piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball-ball moving movable piece 592, so that the ball-ball moving movable piece 592 can be less likely to be damaged and the main body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball removal passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably flowed to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper tank bulb path unit 600 is attached from below to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550. The upper tank ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower tank ball path unit 610. The upper tank bulb path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601. The upper full tank base 601 is attached to the rear side and has a front open box. The upper full tank cover 602, and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 projects rightward from the right side in front view, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting a back cover.

Further, the upper tank ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end in front view on the upper surface and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of its overall width and extends downward from below to a height of about 1/6 of its overall height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal delivery passage 600c that extends downward from the left side in a front view from the center in the left-right direction of the upper sphere storage passage 600b, and opens downward on the lower surface, adjacent to the upper ordinary delivery passage 600c and an upper portion. An upper tank discharge passage 600d that extends downward from the right side in the front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and opens upwards near the right end in front view on the upper surface and is substantially vertical downward. And an upper ball-removing passage 600e that opens downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper tank full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are arranged side by side and open downward. In the upper full-ball path unit 600, which is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600e is open immediately below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B discharged (dispensed) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. Is released downward from either of the above. In addition, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball removing passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower portion of the upper full tank ball path unit 600. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper tank ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side becomes lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower tank full ball path unit 610 includes a lower normal dispensing passage 610a, a lower tank dispensing passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 which can open and close a downstream end opening of the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b, and a dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 in a direction of closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are attached. And a biasing closing spring 614.

In the lower tank full ball path unit 610, a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower tank full payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c are lined up in order from the left as viewed from the front, on the upper surface of the portion extending above the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state where they are arranged side by side, and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank dispensing passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball drop passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b when viewed from the front, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening/closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (the downstream end) of each of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. (Opening) is closed. The payout passage opening/closing door 613 includes an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape whose center view is the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 as the front view, and the front end face approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction as it approaches. It is inclined so as to project forward. The operating protrusion 613 a is formed so as to contact the door opening/closing contact part 150 f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

In the state where the lower full tank ball passage unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear part, are respectively installed in the upper full ball. It is located immediately below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d is the lower full tank payout passage 610b. And the game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball-removing passage 600e flows through the lower ball-removing passage 610c.

Further, the lower full tank ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b penetrate the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full-ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 that is opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the lower full ball path unit 610, in a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is brought into contact with the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are in an open state, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing abutting portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613. Rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill out from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the dispensing passage 580a is closed at the branching portion. Further, in the lower tank ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 which is opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of a ball cut by the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. In a state where the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot be moved (flowed down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B are retained upstream of the payout blade 589. Becomes

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thereby, it is understood that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated clockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball storage portion 589b is moved in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a is moved. It is released downstream from 589. Then, the game ball B discharged from the payout vane 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full-ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball delivery path unit 600 passes through the upper ball storing passage 600b and is arranged immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in FIG.

When a lot of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 comes to stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It will also be retained in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full-ball path unit 600 that is in communication. When the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the inside of the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. While the game ball B starts to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side which is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. After that, the game ball B received in the full tank receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper bowl 201 is filled with the game balls B and further game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower bowl 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, when the game balls B are further dispensed, the lower plates are discharged. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 becomes a non-detected state.

When the gaming ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide it to the ascending end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removing movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the part of the ball-moving movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down abuts against the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball-moving movable piece 592, and therefore the ball-moving movable piece 592. Is less likely to be damaged.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 has an upper ball removing passage 600e of the upper tank full ball passage unit 600 and a lower ball removing passage 610c of the lower tank full ball passage unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall). (Island equipment side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 93(b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the bottom rear side. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each major configuration and seen from the back. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower portion of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board placing portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear side. The base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, the payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and the payout control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear side.

The speaker unit 620a is directed forward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621, which is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c. And a container-shaped speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened to the front. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a that is formed by a plurality of slits that extend in the front-rear direction and extend vertically near the left end in front view, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b that is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, and extends diagonally downward and rearward. And an open connection portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass sound.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion that is the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes the most to the rear. Are formed so that the protrusion of the is small. As a result, a space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 viewed from the front can be sufficiently secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses a sound output rearward from the body frame speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has a space front concave portion 621b bulging forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front in the speaker cover 621. Therefore, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as the speaker box 623 moves to the right. Even if it is formed in a step-like manner so that the amount becomes small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connecting cylinder part 43a so that the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is provided. The space and the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, on the rear side of the body frame speaker 622, the enclosure 624 having a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound output to the front through the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side in front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connecting portion 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 side through the connection cylinder portion 43a, in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622, the lower outer frame assembly 40 is not particularly damped in the low frequency range. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, the sound is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is transmitted to the dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the speaker 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and it is possible to output a large sound with a deep bass sound even if the body frame speaker 622 has a small diameter.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, and it is possible to make the player hear heavy bass. As a result, a sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and emitted from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200 and a sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and emitted from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are provided. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 has a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b, and a speaker box 623. Further, a through cylinder 623a that communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. When assembled in the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. A rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B emitted from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower tank ball passage unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball guide part 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving part that receives a game ball B that is discharged downward from the game board 5 and that opens to the right in front view on the downstream side of the ball guide part 627. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 through which the game ball B that has passed through the ball drop guide 627 and the discharge ball receiver 628 is discharged downward.

An upstream end of the ball drop guiding part 627 is opened to the left at the upper part of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end is opened to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving part 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball drop guiding portion 627 faces the lower end of the lower full tank ball passage unit 610 so that the opening at the upstream end thereof coincides with the downstream end opening. The game ball B discharged from the ball removing passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends long in the left and right directions. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball removal guiding portion 627 at the left end when viewed from the front, and is inclined so as to decrease toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B removed from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in front view by the ball removal guide section 627 and the discharge ball receiving section 628, and then the ball. Since the discharge is performed downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a lower bass richer than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a rear side of the power supply board 630 (hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1, the power A transparent power supply board attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover a surface of the board 630, which is the rear side, of the "power supply board 630 (mounting surface)" on which electronic components are mounted. And a cover 631. The surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630 is covered with the transparent power supply board cover 631 so that the power supply board 630 is accommodated in the transparent power supply board cover 631. The front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the power supply board 630 are formed by applying a green resist solution to the green coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid green resist”). .), a green resist layer is formed, and a power switch 630a having an operation unit for turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the power board 630. On the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630, in addition to the power switch 630a, attributes of the front surface side electronic component such as a part number of the front surface side electronic component and a region indicating a position where the front surface electronic component is arranged (in addition, the surface side). The front side notation part indicating the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component may be included. It is a white paint that stands out and is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist. The power switch 630a is exposed from the transparent power board cover 631. Further, since the power switch 630a is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, it is arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it.

The payout control unit 620d is a box-shaped transparent payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the transparent power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and payout control accommodated in the payout control board box 632. A substrate 633 (see FIG. 97). The payout control board 633 operates the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200, a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, and the like. This is for controlling and paying out the instructed number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that a trace of opening and closing remains. As a result, it is possible to detect an unauthorized modification to the payout control board 633 and enhance the deterrence against an illegal act.

The interface unit 620e covers the rear side of the interface board 635 and the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 of the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634. An interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The substrate base 634 is attached to a rear surface of the speaker box 623, which is located behind the main body frame speaker 622 and is most protruded rearward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (on the body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 has a right side in a front view attached to a rear end of the main body frame base 501 extending in the vertical direction at a rear end thereof so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction, and a left side of the back cover 640 has a dispensing base 551. And the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back cover 551d of the payout base 551 is assembled to the body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 98(b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rearward extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of locking units 650 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. Door frame hooks 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 protruding rearward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for vertically moving the work hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653.

Further, the locking unit 650 is more effective than the lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 is provided which protrudes forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

In the locking unit 650 assembled in the main body frame 4, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the cylinder lock 130 of the front end of the door frame 3 rotates. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality of (two) outer hooks 652 are provided. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, whereby a plurality of lock units 650 are transmitted through the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in the front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward, and the outer frame 2 is disengaged from the main body frame 4. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 or the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 cause the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the lock state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 106. FIG. 99(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99(b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 99(a). FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 101(a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail or the like is assembled to a ball tank, and FIG. 101(b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101(a) which is disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing a region where game balls overflowing from a ball tank flow in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the bypass passage in the upper portion of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear side on the hinge side.

As described above, the body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is detachable from and hinged to the outer frame 2 by the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main body frame base 501 rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shape attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and opened upward in a box shape (container shape) extending to the left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank 553; a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream side end, and a payout device 580 attached to the rear side of the payout base 551 and downstream of the tank rail 553 for paying out the game ball B to the player side. Equipped with.

The ball tank 552 is formed in a quadrangular shape in a plan view extending in the left-right direction, and has a bottom wall 552a inclined so that the left side thereof becomes lower in a front view, and a front side and a rear side of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape with the upper side opened. Has been done. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut out from above the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side) of about 3/4 of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction. Is formed over the entire length.

The right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, and the downstream side thereof extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. .. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream side to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the game ball B. Have The main guide portion 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left side in front view. In addition, the main guiding portion 553a extends from the right end to the position of about 1/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end in the plan view, and then to the left. It is formed in a crank shape that extends obliquely from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extends from there to the left end in parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction. .. In the tank guide rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a that extends from the left end to the right in the left-right direction in parallel to the axis extends to the upper end with the same width. The cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are attached to close the upper side. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the site where the upper side is closed, and at the downstream end the game ball B is formed. Is formed at a height at which only one can flow (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main game balls B are arranged in a row in the width direction orthogonal to the circulation direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and that narrows in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side and changes so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. By the bulging portion 553b, the plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. From this, the tank rail 553 can arrange the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction becomes a line as it goes toward the downstream side and the lower side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature disposed on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is arranged above the main guiding portion 553a, the bulging portion 553b is slightly separated at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b in the tank rail 553. Beveled corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed such that the curved curvature is larger on the downstream side than on the upstream side. Therefore, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the abutting bulging portion 553b. Since it changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spherical burrs in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B flowing in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is less likely to disperse, the game ball B inside is constantly pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and causing ball clogging (ball clogging). On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b is different depending on the position of the game ball B, and therefore flows through the inside. Since the pressing directions of the plurality of game balls B to be dispersed are dispersed, the pressed game balls B can be easily escaped, and it is possible to prevent ball clogging (ball clogging) from occurring.

Further, the tank rail 553 is formed of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clogging (ball clogging) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be increased. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553, so that the game board 5 When a malfunction occurs in the movable performance unit, etc., the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be confirmed with the game board 5 still attached to the main body frame 4, as described above. It is possible to achieve the effect of.

The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. Extending toward the left (to the left), in order to return the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. The overflow surface portion 501m and the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m extend rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to above the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. A part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface part 501m while being inclined so that the side (left side) farther from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower. And a detour passage 552g for guiding.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on the outer sides of the bypass passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. It is provided at a position lower than the overflow portion 551j on the side opposite to the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is open. And an outer terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connecting terminals 558a capable of connecting electric wiring from the rear side and an upper side of the plurality of electric wire connecting terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), and an upper surface thereof is an overflow surface portion. The terminal cover 551k extends horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m has a flat plate shape from a position lower by 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base main body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape with a vertically extending front view, to a rear side. Has been extended to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of one-third of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. This overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap having a distance about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B with the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ..

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The left upper portion is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both outer sides in the left and right direction of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o, respectively, and extends in the front-rear direction in the shape of a strip plate. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in a row at a narrower interval than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane such that the rear end left corner is slightly lower in front view.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between and is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, in a front view, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface portion 501m is The left end of the right-hand side of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right-side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. Note that, hereinafter, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and has a front end inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and a rear end lowering 552h. And a weir portion that extends upward from the end side of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. As for the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g, the left end side (the weir 552i side) of the rear end side in the front view extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552, and the left end side thereof. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the horizontal direction.

When the bypass passage 552g is assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is along the front end side of a portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and extending obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. It is extended. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided to the rear by the bypass passage 552g changes from the slanted rear end so that the flow direction is perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is formed at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction (perpendicular direction) substantially perpendicular to the circulation direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g. Ball clogging within 553 can be made less likely to occur.

The detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so that the rear end thereof moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, so that the game ball B is moved from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When discharged, the obliquely extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side which is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball gam inside the tank rail 553 by discharging the sphere into a wide area.

In addition, the part that guides the game ball B by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left part of the rear wall 552c in front view in the tank rail 553. In this portion, the game ball B that lurks under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flows from inside the ball tank 552. For this reason, at a position behind the bypass passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) is never exceeded. Therefore, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked on the upper side on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, and thus the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received at the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending from the position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f in the left side wall 552d to the right inside the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. Further, in the front surface view, the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j extends from the left end of the front wall 552b to about 1/3 of the entire length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. Approximately 1/9 of the total length of the front wall 552b extends obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to a position of about ½ of the total length of the left side wall 552d in the front-rear direction, and then extends in the vicinity of the rear wall 552c in parallel with the left side wall 552d. It is formed in a shape extending in parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about 1/3 of the entire length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction.

The ball tank 552 has a straight line connecting the right end of the guide surface 552j formed in the above-described shape and the end of the right end of the front wall 552b and the end of the rear wall 552c in plan view. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate vertically. Further, the ball tank 552 has a flat plate-shaped flange that extends laterally outward and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the dam portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the heights of the upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper edges of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the main body frame base 501). Are formed higher than the upper surfaces of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o.

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and a portion that extends obliquely on the left side thereof and a portion that extends straight in the left-right direction on the left side thereof are located behind the ball tank 552 (projection). )doing. The rear end side of the bypass passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharging portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The discharge portion 551j in the ball tank 552 is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that the height becomes lower stepwise toward the rear from a height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. A position that extends rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in the front view to the tank rail 553 and then becomes leftward along the tank rail 553 to be higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). It extends to the rear after being extended to a nearby position).

The external terminal plate 558 is attached to the rear surface in a state where a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction. The electric wire connecting terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion is opened by operating the lever and the tip of the electric wiring can be gripped. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are arranged so that the overflow end surface 501m and the bypass passage 552g become lower on the rear end side, as indicated by white arrows in FIG. The left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are inclined so that the rear end right corner is lower and the rear end left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guiding portion 553a) are inclined such that the left end side thereof becomes lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a becomes lower.

Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, the overflow portion 552f having the lowest height of the outer peripheral upper edge is crossed. Can be flown to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface 501m, and at the same time it can be flowed from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent a further increase in the game ball B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from strongly pressing each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). In the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball debris) due to the engagement between the game balls B.

Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and clogging of the game balls B in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m is spilled to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem in which the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and along the left side that is away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from pressing each other strongly in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

Further, at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is made higher than that of the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface portion 501m and flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g is on the left side on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to make a ball. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). Since it is also high, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) with respect to the bypass passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is changed from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the rear side. The flow can be made to flow in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be made to be a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pressing each other and being bitten by the directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B becoming uneven, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B occurs. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom portion of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, so that they are lined up in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are lined up, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, in the region where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, since a wide bulging portion 553b capable of arranging a plurality of game balls B is provided, the game discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably exhibited.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since the game balls B are changed so as to match with each other, the plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a line in the width direction as they go toward the downstream side in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end, so the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) The plurality of gaming balls B that are stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction are circulated to the downstream side through a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, so that the number of stages in the height direction is reduced to form one row. Can be aligned. Therefore, by the tank rail 553, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) while being aligned in a line.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with the bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be located far from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied at the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it is possible to make it difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. However, there is no possibility that a short-circuit or disconnection of electric wiring will occur due to the contact of the game ball B.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. It is possible to make it difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces on the overflow surface section 501m, or to make it difficult to fall from the rear side even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Furthermore, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 104) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. Thereby, the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j can be prevented from being pressed in the downstream direction with respect to the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. It can be prevented.

Further, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and gets on the left step 501n and the right step 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g by the inclination thereof, and a problem occurs when the game ball B spills out of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B is configured to pass below the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game ball that is stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, in the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. The game ball B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the site where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107 to 115. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in which a front component member, a game panel, a front unit and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the front right, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear. .. FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board in which the front components, the game panel, the front unit and the like are made transparent. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. 114 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 107. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board in a state in which the table unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nail.

In the following, when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative board, when the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative board is square, the LED emits light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative board. When the shape of the LED mounted on the decoration board is rectangular, it means that the LED emits light in the direction parallel to the surface of the decoration board (side view LED). The detailed description is omitted.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a gate portion which give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. A 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening in the game area 5a. In 2006 or the like, the game is to entertain or pass through the handle 182, and to entertain the game ball B in the game area 5a.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, which defines the outer periphery of the game region 5a and whose outer shape is a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and defines the rear end of the game region 5a. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstruction nails N (see FIG. 115, etc.) having a gold color that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. Further, the game board 5 is mounted on the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and a game ball B mounted on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, in which a game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 114 and 206, etc.) for controlling the contents.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a drive board unit 1700 that is formed, a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. A drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the rear unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a by the inner circumference of the inner shape.

The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and the front component member 1000. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 116 and the like) that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the game panel 1100 has the transparent panel plate 1110, the game panel 1100 is arranged behind the game panel 1100 from the front of the game panel 1100 (that is, the front of the game board 5) through the game panel 1100. It is possible to easily visually recognize the existence of various members (hereinafter, may be referred to as "transparent game panel 1100").

The drive board unit 1700 includes various boards electrically connected to the above-described door frame sub-relay board 105 (for example, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400). , The side window decoration part decoration board 413 and the door frame right side decoration board 418 of the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc.), and the main control board 1310 and peripheral control. A panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection with the board 1510, and a decoration board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like included in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are driven in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510. The production drive board 1720, and a drive board box 1730 accommodating the panel relay board 1710 and the production drive board 1720 are provided. The rear side of the drive board box 1730 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 so that the left side thereof can be hinge-rotatably attached, and the right side of the drive substrate box 1730 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so as to accept the game balls B that have been driven into the playing area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the playing areas. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in 5a, and a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B, The second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in which the game ball B can be received according to the result of the normal lottery that is selected by the game ball B passing through the gate section 2003. The first special winning opening 2005 and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening that allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball B. It is provided with a second special winning opening 2006 which allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by accepting the game ball B in 2004.

Further, the table unit 2000 is provided at the lower end of the game area 5a and has an outlet 2010 for discharging the game ball B from the inside of the game area 5a, and a game ball B provided in the middle of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is provided with a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012 for discharging from the game area 5a.

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted on the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002, and the front of the starting opening unit 2100. The side unit 2200, which is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and the side upper left unit, which is provided slightly on the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front side. 2300 and a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 are provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a. The first attacker unit 2400 that is present, the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is provided above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a, and the center role. A second attacker unit 2600 provided on the right side of the object 2500 above the first attacker unit 2400 and having a second special winning opening 2006, and one provided above the second attacker unit 2600. A side right middle unit 2700 having a general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012, and a gate member 2800 provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and having a gate portion 2003 are provided. There is.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall that is open to the front. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided at the lower front end inside the back box 3010 and the flat front left front decoration 3030 and back right decoration 3040 which are respectively provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010. The rear guide unit 3050, the rear rear effect unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, and the rear guide unit 3050 in the lower part of the back box 3010, which are separated from each other left and right. The lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250, and the lower back middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the lower left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have it.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 in front of the back rear effect unit 3100, and in the back box 3010, behind the back front left decoration 3030. Rear rear left effect unit 3500, rear rear right effect unit 3600 provided behind the rear front right decoration 3040 in the rear box 3010, rear front left decoration 3030 and rear rear left in the back box 3010. Front front left production unit 3700 provided between production unit 3500, and front front right production unit provided between front front right decorative body 3040 and back rear right production unit 3600 in back box 3010. 3800.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 116(a) is a perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 116(b) is a perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel as seen from the rear.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front constituent member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side in the front view in the clockwise direction along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction in a front view, and an outer rail 1001 that passes through an upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extends to an upper right portion. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear (out port 2010).

Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper part is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stopper 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts is provided.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the inner rail 1002 and the front rail. The backflow preventing member is rotated only in the open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and is rotated and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front constituent member 1000 is provided with an out port 2010 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in front view in the frame. The out opening 2010 is penetrated by a width in which the two game balls B are sufficiently aligned in the left-right direction. The game ball B guided to the rear by the out guiding unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 2010 and the out ball detection member 3080 of the back unit 3000 described later.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes the outer side of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower ends, the outer side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each of the parts has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the gap between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch portion 1010 coincides with the notch portion 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion penetrate the lower full tank path. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and includes a functional display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the functional display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp sticking portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component member 1000 is formed substantially transparent as a whole, and the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, and the like arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front. Since this front component 1000 is formed transparent together with the game panel 1100 attached to the rear side, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5. , It is possible to give the player a feeling of openness, and although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change, it is possible to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player.

Further, since the front component member 1000 is transparent together with the game panel 1100, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (to the player's side). By doing so, it can be made to appear to be emitting light, and the decorativeness of the entire game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 116 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface. On the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N having a gold color are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 115 and the like).

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 2010 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes formed in a round hole and a short elongated hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and is separated from each other in the left-right direction at the upper edge and the lower edge. And a plurality of engaging stepped portions having a thin plate thickness. The positioning hole is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step portion is to be detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is there.

As shown in FIG. 116, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 offset to the upper right from the center in a front view. Thereby, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width orthogonal to the flow direction of the game ball B (circumferential direction of the frame shape) has a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. It has a wide width in which the balls B can be arranged, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) which is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and the holding step portion is approximately the same size as the game area 5a. It has a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The panel holder 1120 also includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1122 is formed so as to match the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch to penetrate the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 2010 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper part of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 2010. The cylindrical portion 3081 of the out-ball detecting member 3080 in the back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later, is inserted into the out recess 1123.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is arranged outside the holding step and a plurality of projecting pins that project forward from the holding step and are respectively inserted into the plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110. The three engaging claws that elastically engage the engaging step portions of the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 protruding upward from the lower outer side of the holding step portion. And a pair of engaging pieces that engage with the two engaging step portions on the lower side. The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging step on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above, and moves the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward to incline the upper side and the lower left side. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion of the portion where it is engaged with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached in the state of being housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since this game panel 1100 is formed transparent together with the front component member 1000 attached to the front side, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5, It is possible to give the player a sense of openness, and it is possible to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the size of the actual game area 5a does not change.

Further, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component member 1000, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (to the player side). By doing so, it can be made to appear to be emitting light, and the decorativeness of the entire game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box whose upper side and front side are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This substrate holder 1200 covers the lower portion of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the state of being assembled to the game board 5, and has the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A transparent main control board box 1320 is attached.

In the substrate holder 1200 assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge portion 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the rear unit 3000 is out. It is located directly below the ball detection member 3080. The substrate holder 1200 can receive all the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and discharges them from the discharge part 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving part 628 below. You can

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 206) that controls the game contents and the payout of the game balls B, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And are equipped with.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, the unauthorized opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening/closing, and the deterrent to the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the gate sensor 2801, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the general winning opening sensor 3051, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, the second big winning opening. The sensor 2601, the outlet sensor 3053, the first sub-out sensor 2403, the second sub-out sensor 3054, the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, etc. are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 107 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400, a detailed illustration of which is omitted in the figure, displays a status indicator made up of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and a normal lottery result selected by the passage of the game ball B at the gate 2003. It is provided with a normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs, and a normal reservation display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the passage of the game ball B in the gate portion 2003.

In addition, the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result lottery by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002 The second special lottery result which is drawn by the first special reserve number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting slot 2004 and the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. It is provided with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying, and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings for receiving the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. ing.

Furthermore, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “win” or the like, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening/closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 (the number of rounds). It has a round display consisting of five LEDs for displaying.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on/off, blinking, and the like of the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110, 113, 114, and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 is a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 206) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 substantially in the center thereof. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The effect display device 1600 is covered with a protective cover body 1601 formed of a non-conductive transparent resin except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. On the back surface side of the protective cover body 1601, a plurality of L-shaped wiring processing pieces 1601a for locking various wirings are formed along the vertical direction of the protective cover body 1601 and the ventilation length is long in the vertical direction. A plurality of holes are formed in a state of being aligned vertically and horizontally.

The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and has substantially the same width as the width of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601b protruding upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixing piece 1601c protruding downward from the lower end surface. This effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixing grooves 3010c opened in the upper inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601b obliquely from the rear side of 3010, the lower fixing piece 1601c side is moved forward to insert the lower fixing piece 1601c into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding to the right at.

[5-8. Overall structure of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117(a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 117(b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. The table unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects further forward than the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. Through, and projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a, and a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B. , To the second starting port 2004 or the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003. Different from the first big winning opening 2005 and the first big winning opening 2005 in which it is possible to receive the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B It is possible to accept the game ball B in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is provided at the position and is selected by accepting the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. The second big prize hole 2006 is provided.

Of the plurality (here, four) of the general winning openings 2001, three are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is the vertical direction in the right part of the game area 5a. It is located above the center. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 2010 at the bottom end at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged at a height of about 3/4 from below in the vertical direction near the right end in front view in the game area 5a. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged at a height slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end in the lower right corner of the game area 5a. The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. The second special winning opening 2006 is arranged above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the right general winning opening 2001.

The first sub-out opening 2011 is arranged below the second starting opening 2004, and the second sub-out opening 2012 is arranged on the right side of the right general winning opening 2001.

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted on the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002, and the front of the starting opening unit 2100. The side unit 2200, which is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and the side upper left unit, which is provided slightly on the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front side. 2300 and a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 are provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a. A first attacker unit 2400, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a. ing.

Further, the table unit 2000 is provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, above the first attacker unit 2400, and has a second special winning opening 2006, and a second attacker unit 2600 and a second attacker unit 2600. Of the side right middle unit 2700 which is provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and which has one general winning opening 2001 and the second sub-out mouth 2012, and a gate portion 2003 which is provided above the side right middle unit 2700. And a gate member 2800 that is installed.

[5-8a. Starter unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. FIG. 118(a) is a perspective view of the starting opening unit and the side unit of the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 118(b) is a perspective view of the starting opening unit and the side unit of the front unit as seen from the rear, (c) 8D is a left side view of the starting opening unit, and FIG. 8D is a left side view of the side unit. FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram comparing the inclination of the front surface of the general winning opening with the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening in the open state. FIG. 120 is an enlarged front view showing parts of the starting opening unit and the side unit in the game board. The starting opening unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged immediately above the out opening 2010 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

The starting opening unit 2100 includes a front wall portion 2101 extending parallel to the surface of the game area 5a (game panel 1100), a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from a peripheral edge of the front wall portion 2101, and a peripheral wall portion 2102. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2103 extending from the middle in the front-rear direction to the outer side in the left-right direction, and is entirely formed of a transparent member. The front wall portion 2101 is formed in a shape such that the front view shape is a combination of a rectangular portion that is long in the left and right and a semicircular portion whose lower side is a chord. The peripheral wall portion 2102 extends rearward from a peripheral edge excluding the upper side of the front wall portion 2101 and is formed in a gutter shape with an open upper portion. The bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is inclined so that the rear end side becomes lower, and the game ball B can be guided backward.

The starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where the flange portion 2103 extending from the middle of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the left-right direction is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 capable of receiving the game ball B by the front wall portion 2101 and the peripheral wall portion 2102 protruding forward from the panel plate 1110 in a state of being attached to the panel plate 1110. Is forming.

By attaching the starting opening unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting opening 2002 projects forward from the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 and then opens upward, and the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is shown. Located just below the center of the. Therefore, when the game ball B is discharged downward from the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513, it is received in the first starting opening 2002 with an extremely high probability.

The starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100, and guides the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 toward the rear of the gaming panel 1100 by the inclination of the gutter-shaped peripheral wall portion 2102, and the back unit 3000. Can be delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050. The game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3052, and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

Although illustration is omitted, a decorative sticker is attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2101 so as to stand out from the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. As a result, the player's interest can be directed to the first starting opening 2002 rather than the general winning opening 2001, and the player can be prompted to drive the game ball B aiming at the first starting opening 2002. A lottery of special lottery results (first special lottery result) in which an advantageous game state in which a player, such as a "big hit" game, is advantageous, can be performed by allowing the game ball B to be received in the first starting opening 2002 Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation for the special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player.

In this starting opening unit 2100, the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 that guides the game ball B to the rear is inclined at a gentler angle (angle near horizontal) than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. Therefore, the moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B toward the rear is relatively slow. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002, the received game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, so that the player can see the game ball B. It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the first starting opening 2002, and at the same time, the pleasure (sense of superiority) that the game ball B has been accepted into the first starting opening 2002 is given to the general winning opening 2001. It can be enjoyed for a longer period of time than it was accepted by.

In addition, in the state where the starting opening unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 120, the under-rear center effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is located on the rear side, and is provided in the under-rear center effect unit 3300. Light is emitted and decorated by the light from the LEDs of the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322, the back lower middle second decorative substrate 3329, and the like of the back lower middle decorative unit 3320.

Further, although not shown in detail, the starting opening unit 2100 may be provided with a rib that extends over the front wall portion 2101 of the first starting opening 2002 and the bottom portion of the peripheral wall portion 2102. The rib is formed in a triangular shape (a part may be rounded) in a side view, and the upper surface is inclined from the right side of the side unit 2200 to the first front wall portion 2203 of the two general winning openings 2001. And the distance to the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203 is longer than the distance from the upper end to the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. (The position of the rib is lower than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203). As a result, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 comes into contact with the rib and is guided rearward. The game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 is in the first front wall 2203. It is possible to make it later than the timing of being guided to the rear by contacting the inclined portion, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be always received. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning openings 2001 on the right side are open upward, and the general winning openings 2001 on the left side are open upward.

The side unit 2200 includes a flat base plate and a second base plate that extends in a gutter-like shape from the base plate in the front-rear direction and is inclined so that the front end thereof moves backward as it goes downward. One guide gutter, a first front wall part that closes the front end side of each of the two first guide gutters, and a gutter-like extension from the base plate to the front and back on the left side of the two first guide gutters. And a second front wall portion closing the front end side of the second guide trough. The side unit 2200 is entirely formed of a transparent member.

The first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 have a U-shaped cross section. The first guide trough 2202 has a U-shaped open portion facing upward, and the second guide trough 2204 has a U-shaped open portion facing upper left. The front end of the first guide trough 2202 extends vertically with the upper part extending vertically from the bottom at a position of about 3/4 height, and near the base plate 2201 so that the lower part moves backward as it goes downward. It extends diagonally up to. Therefore, the first front wall 2203 that closes the front end side of the first guide trough 2202 has a shape in which the lower side is bent rearward at a position at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom.

The front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 is vertical. Therefore, the second front wall portion 2205 that closes the front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 extends vertically in parallel with the base plate 2201.

The side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where the base plate 2201 is in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. And, the game ball B can be received by the first front gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 which are projected forward from the panel plate 1110, and the first front wall 2203 and the second front wall 2205. A general winning opening 2001 is formed. Further, in the side unit 2200, in a state where the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the portions of the first guide trough 2202 and the second guide trough 2204 that project rearward of the base plate 2201 penetrate the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. Then, it projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The first guide trough 2202 and the second guide trough 2204 are inclined so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the rear, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 can be guided to the rear.

The side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001 projecting forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 when assembled on the game board 5. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the second transfer opening 3062, the third transfer opening 3063, and the back transfer unit 3050 of the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to any of the fourth delivery ports 3064. The game ball B transferred to any of the second transfer opening 3062, the third transfer opening 3063, and the fourth transfer opening 3064 of the back guiding unit 3050 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, and then the game ball B is located below. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200.

Unlike the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200 does not have a decorative sticker attached to the first front wall 2203 or the second front wall 2205 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001, It is less visible than the first starting port 2002. Since the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200 are inclined, the three-dimensional effect of the general winning openings 2001 can be emphasized, and a decorative sticker is not attached to the front surface. , Doesn't look bad.

In the state where the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 120, the back lower left effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is located at the rear, and the back lower left decoration in the back lower left effect unit 3200. The light emitted from the LED of the substrate 3203 can be used for light emission decoration, and the back lower left rotation decoration body 3201 can be visually recognized in a good state. In addition, since the side unit 2200 has a portion that is inclined to the first front wall portion 2203 that forms the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001, the rear lower left portion of the back unit 3000 due to the portion. Light radiated forward from the lower left decorative substrate 3203 of the rendering unit 3200 can be reflected (or refracted) near the head of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the light of the pachinko machine 1 can be reflected. You can improve the appearance.

In the side unit 2200, the bent and obliquely extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100. The moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B is fast. The bottom surfaces of the first guide trough 2202 and the second guide trough 2204 are inclined at substantially the same angle as the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the received game ball B becomes invisible in a shorter time than the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being unnecessarily attracted to the general winning opening 2001 for a long time while surely letting the player recognize the acceptance of the game ball B into the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, the player's interest can be easily directed to the next game ball B, other first winning openings 2002, first winning openings 2005, second winning openings 2006, and other winning openings. It is possible to entertain the game in the game area 5a and suppress a decrease in interest.

In other words, since the bent and obliquely extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 The rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 can be made slower than the rolling speed of the game ball B received in. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002, the received game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, so that the player can see the game ball B. It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the first starting opening 2002, and at the same time, the pleasure (sense of superiority) that the game ball B has been accepted into the first starting opening 2002 is given to the general winning opening 2001. It can be enjoyed for a longer period of time than it was accepted by.

By the way, in the side unit 2200, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 is inclined, the first front wall portion 2203 is seen from the side of the first guide trough 2202. It becomes possible for the game ball B to pass in front of the inclined portion of. When the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203, the game ball B appears to overlap the general winning opening 2001 when viewed from the front, so that the game ball B is accepted by the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. There is a risk that the player will feel distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side because the gaming ball B is not paid out, and the interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, in the side unit 2200 of the present embodiment, as described above, the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 and the first guide gutter 2202 are received in the general winning opening 2001 and moved backward. Since the player can visually recognize the guided game ball B for a short time, it is possible to recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, even if the player has the illusion that the game ball B that has passed in front of the first front wall portion 2203 is accepted by the general winning opening 2001, it can be immediately recognized as an illusion.

Further, in this side unit 2200, a part of the game ball B is allowed to pass in front of the first front wall part 2203, so that the front of the first front wall part 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is in front of the game ball. When most of the game ball B (at least more than half of the game ball B) overlaps with the general winning opening 2001 when B passes, the game ball B becomes the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. It is possible to create an illusion as if it was accepted, and entertain the player. At this time, since part of the game ball B does not overlap the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001, and it may be thought that it was an illusion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 and the gaming hall from feeling distrustful even if no benefits (payout of the game ball B or lottery of the first special lottery result) are given thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player entertained and continue to enjoy the game, and to prevent a decrease in interest.

Moreover, the side unit 2200 extends the front end of the leftmost (leftmost) general winning opening 2001 among the three general winning openings 2001 in parallel with the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) by the second front wall portion 2205. And has the same shape as the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 at the left end, some players can make an illusion that it is received in the starting opening. Then, even if the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, which is an illusion that it is a starting opening, the special lottery result is not drawn, and the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side feel distrust. There is a fear. However, the general winning opening 2001 is provided at the left end of the side unit 2200 (a position that cannot be accepted by “right hitting”) away from the first starting opening 2002 in the center in the left-right direction, and the second Since a decorative sticker for indicating the starting opening is not attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2205, it can be reconfirmed that the opening is not the starting opening, and the player feels distrust and enjoys the game. It is possible to avoid lowering.

Also, since the side unit 2200 has the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 inclined, the amount of material required for the side unit 2200 as compared with the case where the front ends are parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. It is possible to reduce the cost and the cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced because the decoration sticker is not attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2001.

The inclination angle of the first front wall 2203 of the side unit 2200 (general winning hole 2001) from the horizontal is not shown, but the variable winning holes such as the big winning hole and the prize winning hole are closed so that they can be opened and closed. The winning opening door is larger than the angle of inclination from the horizontal when the gaming ball B is guided to the winning opening side and is rotated around the lower side so that the upper side moves forward so as to move forward. It has an angle. More specifically, depending on the player, when the number of game balls B paid out by receiving the game balls B into the variable winning a prize is larger than that of the general winning a prize 2001, most of the game balls B to the variable winning a prize will be given. Will come to wish for a prize. Alternatively, even if the player has a variable winning opening (large winning opening) for which the specified winning number is set, he or she will desire to win more than the specified number. Therefore, the inclination of the winning opening door of the variable winning opening is set to be gentler than the general winning opening 2001 (first front wall 2203), so that the speed of the game ball B rolling on the winning opening door is slow. As described above, when the game ball B is accepted in the variable winning port, the accepted game ball B is visible for a longer time than the game ball B accepted in the general winning port 2001. In contrast, it is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the variable winning port, and at the same time, to the general winning port 2001, the pleasure (sense of superiority) for the game ball B being accepted into the variable winning port can be recognized. It can be tasted for a longer period of time than when it was accepted. Further, since the angle of the winning opening door in the open state is gentle, it takes a long time until the winning opening door in the open state is closed. Therefore, more than the specified number of game balls B are won for the player. Can make you feel like doing.

In addition, in the two right general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200, a portion that extends obliquely downward from the lower end of the portion of the first front wall 2203 than the distance of the portion that vertically extends downward from the upper end. Is formed longer. As a result, since the prize hole is the general prize hole 2001, the game ball B is paid out, but the lottery such as the ordinary lottery and the special lottery is not performed. Therefore, the game ball B accepted in the general prize hole 2001 is given. Can be hidden from the player's view early.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the side unit 2200 shows the one in which the front surface of the specific general winning opening 2001 is tilted out of the plurality of general winning openings 2001, but the present invention is not limited to this, and all the general winning openings 2001 can be used. You may make it the front surface of the winning opening 2001 incline. Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2001 whose front surface is not inclined is allowed to enter the game ball B which is launched to the launch position (so-called "left hit") in the normal gaming state. Although the one provided at the position is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 2001 whose front face is not tilted is set in an advantageous gaming state (during "time saving", "probability variation" or "big hit"). The game ball B fired at the firing position (so-called “right hit”) may be provided at a position where it can enter the ball, or may be provided at both positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119, the inclination angle of the general winning opening 2001 having an inclined front surface is greater than the opening angle when the variable winning opening (for example, a special winning opening) is opened and then opened. The angle is narrow. When the number of payouts of the game balls B at the time of winning in the special winning opening is larger than that of the general winning opening 2001, even if the special winning opening is defined, the player can win more than the specified number. I wish. Therefore, it is said that the speed at which the game ball B that has won the big winning opening rolls to the back side is slower than the speed when the game ball B that has won the general winning opening 2001 with its front surface tilted to the back side. There is. In other words, when the number of payouts to the general prize hole 2001, which is smaller than the number of payouts when the prize is paid to the big prize hole, is won, it is considered to be faster than the speed when the game ball B, which has won the big prize hole, rolls to the back side. ing. That is, it can be said that the more the payout holes are paid out, the later it takes to disappear from the player's view. As a result, the more prizes are paid out, the longer the joy of winning can be provided.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
The side upper left unit 2300 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to be lower rightward. The upper left side unit 2300 is formed entirely transparent.

The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role object 2500 to the right side below the center role object 2500 by the shelf part 2301.

[5-8d. First attacker unit]
The first attacker unit 2400 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 125 and the like. FIG. 121(a) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit seen from the front, and FIG. 121(b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit seen from the back. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the first special winning opening door in the first attacker unit from the left side. FIG. 125 is an explanatory view showing a passage of a game ball in the first attacker unit in a cross section.

The first attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side in the front view of the starting opening unit 2100 which is the lower right corner in the front view, and from the front of the front face of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Installed. The first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting opening 2004, a first special winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 (see FIG. 130 and the like). In the first attacker unit 2400, when viewed from the front, the second starting opening 2004 is provided in the upper part to the right of the center in the left-right direction, and the first special winning opening 2005 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and more than the second starting opening 2004. It is provided at a lower position, and the first sub-out opening 2011 is provided below the second starting opening 2004 and at a position lower than the first special winning opening 2005.

In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 and the second start port sensor 2401, and detects the game ball B received in the first special winning port 2005. The special winning opening sensor 2402, the first sub-out opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the first sub-out opening 2011, and the magnetic sensor 2404 for detecting an illegal magnetism are provided. The first special winning opening sensor 2402 and the magnetic sensor 2404 are provided in pairs of two, respectively.

The first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the unit base 2411 attached to the panel plate 1110, a front cover 2412 attached to the front side of the unit base 2411 and forming the flow path of the game ball B, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 2411. A rear cover 2413, a second start opening door 2414 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the second start opening 2004, and a second start opening door 2414 movable to open and close the second start opening 2004. A starting opening solenoid 2415 for operating the starting opening solenoid 2415, a solenoid cover 2416 covering the starting opening solenoid 2415, a first big winning opening door 2417 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the first big winning opening 2005, A first attacker solenoid 2418 for moving the one big winning opening door 2417 to open and close the first big winning opening 2005, and a transmission for moving the first big winning opening door 2417 by transmitting the advance/retreat of the first attacker solenoid 2418. And a member 2419.

The first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the rear cover 2413, and is attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 2413 and the first special winning opening decoration substrate 2420 for illuminating the first special winning opening 2005. A second starting opening sensor 2401, a first winning opening sensor 2402, a first sub-out opening sensor 2403, a magnetic sensor 2404, a starting opening solenoid 2415, a first attacker solenoid 2418, a first winning opening decoration board 2420, and a panel relay board. A first attacker relay board 2421 for relaying the connection with the 1710.

The unit base 2411 is formed of a transparent member. The unit base 2411 includes a first opening portion 2411a penetrating in the front-rear direction near the upper end on the right side from the center in the left-right direction, a first guide hole 2411b penetrating in the front-rear direction below the first opening portion 2411a, and a left-right direction. A second opening 2411c that extends longitudinally left and right in the upper part on the left side of the center, and two second guide holes 2411d that extend side by side under the second opening 2411c so as to line up left and right. The first sub-out port 2011 is formed below the one guide hole 2411b and penetrates back and forth.

The first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411 is formed such that the left and right widths thereof are slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 is inserted therethrough. The first guide hole 2411b is provided at a position lower than the center in the vertical direction. The first guide hole 2411b projects rearward in a tubular shape and is inclined so that the rear end side becomes lower. The second opening 2411c extends to the left and right with a length 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 is inserted therethrough. Each of the second guide holes 2411d projects rearward in a cylindrical shape and is inclined so that the rear end side becomes lower.

Further, the unit base 2411 is arranged side by side along the upper side of the second opening 2411c and has two contact portions 2411e protruding forward in a triangular shape. These contact portions 2411e are the contact portions of the front cover 2412, and the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 when the first big winning opening 2005 is closed. Together, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction.

The second starting port sensor 2401 is attached to the unit base 2411 directly above the first guide hole 2411b with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, directly above each of the two second guide holes 2411d, the first special winning opening sensor 2402 is attached in a state where the detection hole is projected forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, at the rear end of the first sub-out port 2011, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 is attached to the unit base 2411 so that the detection holes coincide with each other. Magnetic sensors 2404 are attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2411 to the left of the first guide hole 2411b and to the right of the two second guide holes 2411d.

The front cover 2412 is formed in the shape of a box that is opened rearward and is transparent. The front cover 2412 is for forming a passage of the game ball B on the front surface of the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. 125, the front cover 2412 has a first shelf portion 2412a extending downward from the vicinity of the upper right corner to the left and a game ball from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a to the left in the front view. It is slightly longer than the diameter of B and extends shorter than the first shelf portion 2412a so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. The second shelf 2412b forming the second starting port 2004, and the second shelf 2412b on the left side of the left end of the second shelf 2412b so that the position lower than the diameter of the game ball B lowers to the left. A third shelf 2412c extending shorter than the part 2412b and a third shelf 2412c with a distance of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B leftward from the left end of the third shelf 2412c. It has a fourth shelf portion 2412d that extends downward from the lower position to the left and that forms a first special winning opening 2005 with the third shelf portion 2412c.

The right end of the first shelf portion 2412a is separated from the right side of the front cover 2412 to the left slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The first shelf portion 2412a, the second shelf portion 2412b, and the third shelf portion 2412c are inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf portion 2412d is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf portion 2412a. ing.

Further, the front cover 2412 is the same as the first standing wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a and the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. A second standing wall portion 2412f extending to the height, a third standing wall portion 2412g extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2412b to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e, and a third shelf portion 2412c. From the right end of the fourth vertical wall 2412h vertically extending to the lower side of the front cover 2412, the fifth vertical wall 2412i extending downward from the left end of the third shelf 2412c, and the right end of the fourth shelf 2412d. From the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d to a seventh standing wall portion 2412k extending downward from the sixth standing wall portion 2412j.

The fifth standing wall portion 2412i extends from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c downward to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lowered to the left. Further, it extends downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. Further, the sixth standing wall portion 2412j extends from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d downward to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lowered to the right. At the top, it extends further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. The distance between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j in the left-right direction is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

Further, the front cover 2412 includes a first horizontal wall portion 2412l connecting the lower ends of the first standing wall portion 2412e, the second standing wall portion 2412f, and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and a first standing wall portion on the right side of the front cover 2412. From a position lower than the lower end of 2412e to the middle of the fourth standing wall portion 2412h on the left side after inclining so that the game ball B is allowed to flow between the first horizontal wall portion 2412l and the game ball B is lowered to the left side. And a second lateral wall portion 2412m that is inclined so as to become higher toward the side. The first lateral wall portion 2412l is provided at the same height as the lower end of the first guide hole 2411b in the unit base 2411. The second lateral wall portion 2412m is formed so that the position of the first sub-out port 2011 below the second starting port 2004 is the lowest.

In addition, the front cover 2412 extends from the vicinity of the lower portion of each of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j to the direction of approaching each other to the vicinity of the center between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j. It has an extending third lateral wall portion 2412n and a partitioning portion 2412o which connects the opposing ends of the two third lateral wall portions 2412n and extends upward. The third lateral wall portion 2412n is provided at the same height as the lower end of the second guide hole 2411d in the unit base 2411.

Further, the front cover 2412 extends stepwise along the upper side of the front cover so as to be lowered to the left, and a space in which the game ball B can flow between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c. It is provided to open. It has an upper shelf portion 2412p. The upper shelf portion 2412p has its right end located directly above the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a, and its left end located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d. Further, the upper shelf portion 2412p is inclined such that the vicinity of the right end is lowered to the right.

Further, although not shown, the front cover 2412 is located in front of the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and in a portion that is staggered in the left-right direction with respect to the two contact portions 2411e of the unit base 2411. It has two abutting portions projecting rearward in shape. These abutting portions are the game balls B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 when the first big winning opening 2005 is in a closed state, and the abutting portion 2411e of the unit base 2411. Together, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction.

The rear cover 2413 is formed in a box shape that is open to the front and is formed of a transparent member. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the unit base 2411 to hold the second starting opening door 2414, the solenoid cover 2416, the first special winning opening door 2417, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the like. Further, the rear cover 2413 cooperates with the front cover 2412 to hold the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first special winning opening sensor 2402, and the first sub-out opening sensor 2403 so as to sandwich them.

The second starting opening door 2414 extends in the left-right direction from the lower end of the plate portion 2414a, the arm portion 2414b extending downwardly from the door portion 2414a, and the arm portion 2414b, and the unit base 2411. A rotary shaft 2414c that is rotatably attached, and a connecting portion 2414d that is provided in a lower portion of the arm portion 2414b and that is separated from the rotary shaft 2414c and that is connected to the tip of the plunger of the starting opening solenoid 2415. ..

The door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The arm portion 2414b of the second starting opening door 2414 extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2414a and then bends forward to approximately the same position as the front end of the door portion 2414a. The connecting portion 2414d is provided closer to the door portion 2414a than the rotating shaft 2414c of the arm portion 2414b.

The second starting opening door 2414 can close the second starting opening 2004 by the door portion 2414a. The second starting opening door 2414 rotates (rotates) around the rotation shaft 2414c as the plunger of the starting opening solenoid 2415 moves forward and backward, whereby the door portion 2414a moves in the forward and backward directions. The starting port 2004 can be opened and closed.

The starting opening solenoid 2415 is attached so that the direction in which the plunger projects is directed forward. In this starting opening solenoid 2415, the plunger is projected forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown) when not energized, and the plunger retracts when energized.

The first special winning opening door 2417 includes a flat plate-shaped door portion 2417a that is long in the left and right, a pair of arm portions 2417b extending downward from both ends of the door portion 2417a in the left-right direction, and a pair of arm portions 2417b. It has a rotating shaft 2417c extending from the lower end in the left-right direction coaxially with each other, and a columnar link pin 2417d protruding rightward from the lower part of the right arm portion 2417b.

The door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The pair of arm portions 2417b extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2417a, and then bends forward to approximately the same position as the front end of the door portion 2417a. The link pin 2417d is provided on the lower side of the arm portion 2417b closer to the door portion 2417a than the rotating shaft 2417c. The link pin 2417d is slidably inserted into a vertically extending slit 2419c of a transmission member 2419, which will be described later.

The first special winning opening door 2417 can close the first special winning opening 2005 by the door portion 2417a. The first special winning opening door 2417 rotates (rotates) around the rotation shaft 2417c as the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 moves forward and backward, whereby the door portion 2417a moves forward and backward. The first big winning opening 2005 can be opened and closed.

The first attacker solenoid 2418 is attached so that the direction in which the plunger projects is directed forward. In the first attacker solenoid 2418, the plunger is projected forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown) in a non-energized state, and the plunger retracts when energized.

The transmission member 2419 passes through the base portion 2419a attached to the tip of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, the extension portion 2419b extending forward from the base portion 2419a, and the left and right direction near the front end of the extension portion 2419b. And a slit 2419c extending vertically. The link pin 2417d of the first special winning opening door 2417 is slidably inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419.

A plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light to the front are mounted on the front surface of the first special winning opening decoration substrate 2420. The plurality of LEDs of the first special winning opening decoration substrate 2420 are surface mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. The first special winning opening decoration substrate 2420 can lighten and decorate the first special winning opening 2005 by causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

In a normal state of the first attacker unit 2400, the starting opening solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418 are in a non-energized (OFF) state. In this normal state, the plunger of the starting opening solenoid 2415 projects forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 passes through the first opening portion 2411a of the unit base 2411. Projecting forward. In this state, the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 is located above the second starting opening 2004, and the state in which the gaming ball B cannot be received in the second starting opening 2004 by the door portion 2414a. Has become. That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2414 (door portion 2414a) (see FIG. 125).

Further, in a normal state, the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 is projected forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 is the second opening portion of the unit base 2411. It protrudes forward through 2411c. In this state, the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is located above the first big winning opening 2005, and it is impossible to receive the game ball B into the first big winning opening 2005 by the door portion 2417a. It is in a state of. That is, the first big winning opening 2005 is closed by the first big winning opening door 2417 (door portion 2417a) (see FIGS. 124 and 125).

In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down onto the first shelf portion 2412a, the game ball B rolls to the left due to the inclination of the first shelf portion 2412a, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414. After rolling on the upper surface and the second shelf 2412b, the second shelf 2412b is discharged leftward from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B discharged from the second shelf portion 2412b to the left falls to the third shelf portion 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 depending on its momentum, and is left by the inclination thereof. Roll towards you. In addition, when the game ball B discharged from the second shelf portion 2412b to the left comes in contact with the lower surface of the upper shelf portion 2412p and bounces back to the right, a gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c. May enter.

At this time, the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a that closes the first special winning opening 2005, with respect to the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and the contact portion of the front cover 2412, They come into contact with each other alternately and roll to the left while zigzag in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has rolled to the left on the door portion 2417a is discharged to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400 from the left end thereof after rolling on the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf portion 2412a, it passes through the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e and falls near the right end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, and the second horizontal wall Due to the inclination of the portion 2412m, it rolls to the left and enters the first sub-out port 2011. Further, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c, the second horizontal wall portion 2412m passes between the third standing wall portion 2412g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412h. It falls near the left end, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, and enters the first sub-out port 2011.

The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and is then returned to the fifth transfer port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a. It is delivered and discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In this first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B that circulates on the right side of the first shelf 2412a and the game ball B that passes through the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c are both It is formed so as to enter one sub-out port 2011, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2011 are provided.

In this normal state, when the starting opening solenoid 2415 is energized (ON) in accordance with the result of the ordinary lottery selected by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, the plunger is resisted against the biasing force of the spring. Is retracted, and the connecting portion 2414d of the arm portion 2414b of the second starting opening door 2414 above the rotating shaft 2414c (on the door portion 2414a side) is pulled rearward by the tip of the plunger. As a result, the second starting opening door 2414 rotates about the rotation shaft 2414c in the direction in which the door portion 2414a moves rearward. Then, by rotating the door portion 2414a so as to retract from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the upper side of the second starting opening 2004 is opened, and the game ball B can be received in the second starting opening 2004. Becomes That is, the second starting port 2004 is opened.

When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004 while the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, it flows down between the second standing wall part 2412f and the third standing wall part 2412g, and the second starting port sensor 2401. After being detected, it falls on the first lateral wall portion 2412l. The portion between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g in the first lateral wall portion 2412l is inclined so as to be lowered rearward, and the game ball B rolls backward due to the inclination, and the unit It enters the first guide hole 2411b of the base 2411 and is discharged rearward from its rear end. The game ball B released rearward from the rear end of the first guide hole 2411b is transferred to the fifth transfer port 3065 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is transferred from the back guide unit 3050 to the lower substrate holder 1200. Is discharged.

On the other hand, in a normal state, according to the special lottery result (the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result) drawn by the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is energized (ON), the plunger retracts together with the transmission member 2419 attached to the tip thereof against the biasing force of the spring. When this transmission member 2419 retracts, the link pin 2417d of the first special winning opening door 2417 inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419 is pushed rearward by the inner wall of the slit 2419c while sliding in the slit 2419c. It will be.

As a result, the first special winning opening door 2417 rotates about the rotation shaft 2417c so that the door portion 2417a moves rearward, and the front end of the door portion 2417a moves rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. It will be moved. The door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 moves rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411, so that the first big winning opening 2005 is opened upward, and the first big winning opening 2005 is opened. The game ball B is ready to be received (see FIG. 124). That is, the first special winning opening 2005 is opened.

When the game ball B is received in the first special winning opening 2005 while the first special winning opening 2005 is in an open state, the gaming ball B passes between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j and then the fifth standing wall portion. After being detected by one of the two first special winning opening sensors 2402 through the part 2412i and the partition part 2412o or between the sixth standing wall part 2412j and the partition part 2412o, It falls on the three lateral wall portions 2412n. The third lateral wall portion 2412n is inclined so as to become lower rearward from the upper surface, and the game ball B dropped on the third lateral wall portion 2412n rolls rearward due to the inclination, so that the unit base 2411 It is discharged rearward through the second guide hole 2411d. The game ball B released rearward from the second guide hole 2411d is delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the lower substrate holder 1200. ..

As described above, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, in the first special winning opening door 2417 that opens and closes the first special winning opening 2005, near the front end of the door portion 2417a that closes the first special winning opening 2005. Since the first prize hole 2005 is opened and closed by rotating the door portion 2417a around the rotary shaft 2417c extending left and right at the same position in the front-rear direction, the first prize hole 2005 (first The depth of the attacker unit 2400) in the front-rear direction can be made as short as possible. This effect is the same in the second starting port 2004 opened and closed by the second starting port door 2414. Thereby, the space behind the first attacker unit 2400 can be relatively widened.

In addition, in the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received from the first special winning opening 2005 is divided into two by the partition portion 2412o, and each is detected by the different first special winning opening sensor 2402 to detect the unit base 2411. Since it is designed to be released to the rear, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from being stagnant between the first big winning hole 2005 and the first big winning hole sensor 2402, and many game balls in a short time. B can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center goods]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. 126A is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 126B is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 127 is a front view of the center accessory. The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the starting opening unit 2100, slightly above the center in the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and various effect units and the like provided in the effect display device 1600 provided in the rear of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the front. ..

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a portion projecting forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is in the frame. It cannot be entered.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-like shape protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abutting on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 protruding from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is aligned with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in the assembled state on the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 in which the center accessory 2500 is inserted in the panel plate 1110. The peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering from the outside of the center accessory 2500 to the inside of the frame in a state of being assembled to the game board 5.

The thicknesses of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 are formed to be thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 project from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

A plurality of support parts 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not project, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 has an end side protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 formed in a shape following the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a straight line shape so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within a range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), and the player can exert the effect of reinforcement while exhibiting the effect. I try not to stand out.

More specifically, a plurality of support parts 2503 of the center accessory 2500 are provided. For example, in a support portion 2503 provided at a portion where the peripheral wall portion 2501 protrudes to the leftmost side above a warp inlet 2511 described later, the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the portion is the middle of the vertically extending portion. Has a shape that bulges to the left. The tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on both upper and lower sides of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 that bulges to the left, and at the portion that bulges leftward of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The shape is different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is linearly formed so as to connect the upper and lower portions (see FIG. 135 ). The support part 2503 of this part is a state where the support part 2503 is assembled to the game board 5, and the part of the support part 2503 which extends linearly up and down on the tip side is a front left decorative body in the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. It is substantially along a part of the right side of 3030. Therefore, since the front end side of the support portion 2503 matches the edge of the back front left decoration body 3030, it becomes difficult for the support portion 2503 to discriminate, and the back front left decoration provided relatively rearward. The decoration of the body 3030 can be made to stand out.

Further, among the plurality of support parts 2503, the support part 2503 below the warp inlet 2511 has a rectangular wall extending rightward while the peripheral wall part 2501 extends obliquely. The support part 2503 of this part is located in front of the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C in the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 in the state assembled to the game board 5 (see FIG. 107 and the like). ). The tip side extending to the left and right of the support part 2503 extends in parallel with the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C, and thus the shape of the shutter 3732 seems to be a part. , And the support part 2503 is difficult to discriminate (see FIG. 111).

The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is opened so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter at a portion of the front wall of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in front view from the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). 2511, the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 and is openable in the frame behind the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B discharged from the warp exit 2512. It is provided with a stage 2513 which can be released into the game area 5a after rolling in the left-right direction, and a stage cover 2515 which is provided so as to cover the upper side of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 127 and the like). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from bouncing from the outside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 into the frame by bouncing the game ball B on the stage 2513 back toward the stage 2513.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed, and the position corresponding to immediately above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is a panel plate of the game panel 1100. It is formed in a wavy shape (W shape) such that the position of the center in the left-right direction when mounted on the 1110 is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. In this stage 2513, a portion (central emission portion 2513a) slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left-right direction and a lowest portion (side emission portion 2513b) on both left and right sides thereof are directed forward. It is inclined so as to be low, and the game ball B can be released from those parts into the game area 5a.

In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the center of the stage 2513 in the left-right direction, which is higher than the center emission part 2513a, is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is discharged from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is received in the first starting opening 2002 with an extremely high probability.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 includes a guide passage group 2520 that is provided in the upper right corner and includes two passages through which the game ball B can flow. This center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, and the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the stop of the front component member 1000). The game ball B, which is almost in contact with the right rail 1005) near the portion 1006 and is driven to the upper right of the center accessory 2500, is formed so as to always pass through the guide passage group 2520.

The length of the guide passage group 2520 in the up-down direction is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in a groove shape that is open to the front, and the game ball B flowing inside can be visually recognized from the front in a good state.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided on the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and the first guide passage 2521 separated from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the right side of the first guide passage 2521 along the peripheral wall portion 2501. And a second guide passage 2522 extending in a vertical direction. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated left and right. Further, the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and are opened obliquely downward to the right along the arc of the upper portion of the right rail 1005.

The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate portion 2003 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. In addition, the first guide passage 2521 has the right end of its entrance located immediately below the lower end of the stopper 1006 of the front component member 1000, and most of the game balls B contacting the stopper 1006 are the first guide. It is formed so as to enter the passage 2521.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided with a lower right guide passage 2530 which projects rightward from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and guides the game ball B from above to the right and then releases it downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an inlet opening upward over the front width in the left-right direction, and an outlet opening diagonally downward left with a width of one game ball B.

The lower right guide passage 2530, when assembled to the game board 5, has its right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 and is located between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600. Therefore, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are arranged between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530.

According to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, since the support portion 2503 that protrudes inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is located at the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided. Since it is the outer edge, the inside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (inside the frame of the center accessory 2500) can be made relatively wide, and the effect image of the rear effect display device 1600 and the rear unit can be passed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to make 3000 decorations and the like more visible.

Further, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward is provided at the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. Thereby, even if the game ball B contacts the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be released from the injection molding die without being deformed.

Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is shortly projected from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is partially provided on the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided on the rear side. It is possible to reduce the obstruction of the visibility of the decorative object of the unit 3000 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600. Further, the center accessory 2500 such as the support part 2503 is made transparent, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 are located at positions as close to the rear surface of the center accessory 2500 as possible. Since the transparent center accessory 2500 is arranged, it is possible to prevent the decoration of the rear front left decoration 3030 and the rear left production unit 3700 on the rear side from being blurred. From this, according to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the visibility of the decorative body and the like provided at the rear can be improved, and the decorative effect by them can be surely exhibited.

Further, since the support portion 2503 and the like are transparent and the support portion 2503 is provided in front of the decorative body or the effect display device 1600 that can be light-emitted, light emitted from them can be used for light emission decoration and a good appearance. can do. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 and the like, the back front left effect unit 3700, the effect display device 1600, and the like in the back unit 3000 are provided behind the support portion 2503 (the cross hatching portion in FIG. 135). , The light emitted forward from the LED on the front left decoration board 3714 in the front left front production unit 3700, the effect display device 1600, etc. is transmitted, reflected, refracted, or diffused to give a gorgeous luminous decoration. It can be shown to the player. Note that steps or cutouts may be provided in the support portion 2503, and light from the rear can be diffused due to the steps or the like, and the image can appear more glittering.

Further, by providing the support portion 2503, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is provided because the flange portion 2502 projecting outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided. In the near portion, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. As a result, the area of the game with the plurality of obstacle nails N can be made as large as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed in the original game.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503. Are provided on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the support portion 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center role object 2500, the inside of the frame of the center role object 2500 is better compared to the case where the support portion 2503 is provided over the entire circumference. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided behind can be made more visible. In other words, when it is desired to make the non-circulation area (inside of the frame) defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 look large, the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You can Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear when viewed from the front.

The edge of the support part 2503 may have the same shape as the shape of the front cover 3711 of the back front left effect unit 3700 (the shape of the ornament) provided on the rear side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the support part 2503 from being conspicuously deteriorating the decorative property of the rear decorative body due to the support part 2503 being different from the rear decorative property, and at the same time, the support part 2503 can also be decorative Can be increased.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the support portion 2503 is provided at a position close to the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear, and those decorations are provided by the lens effect. Although the thing which suppresses that it looks blurry is shown, the invention is not limited to this, and the support part 2503 is provided near the front end of the peripheral wall part 2501 distant from the rear unit 3000 at the rear. Alternatively, the back-front left decorative body 3030 and the back-front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided rearward may be made to appear blurry.

Further, in the above embodiment, the opening 1112 that penetrates the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided, and the rear side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is inserted into the opening 1112. However, the rear wall portion 2501 may not have a rear portion to be inserted into the opening 1112, and in this case, it may be attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening 1112. .. When the center role object 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening 1112, the support part 2503 may be attached to the game panel 1100. In this case, the center role object 2500 does not have the flange part 2502. You may do it.

[5-8f. Second attacker unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. FIG. 128A is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, the right side center unit, and the gate member in the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 128B is the second attacker unit, the side right center unit, and the front unit in the front unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the gate member from the back. FIG. 129 is an explanatory view showing a passage of the game ball in the second attacker unit and the side right middle unit in a cross section.

The second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is arranged on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the center of the game area 5a in the up-down direction. It is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the panel 1100. The second attacker unit 2600 is equipped with a second special winning opening 2006 that opens and closes to the left (see FIG. 129).

The second attacker unit 2600 includes a second special winning opening sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006, and a magnetic sensor that detects an illegal time acting near the second special winning opening 2006. 2602 and. In addition, the second attacker unit 2600 moves the second special winning opening door 2611 by closing the second special winning opening 2006 so that the second special winning opening 2006 can be opened and closed. A second attacker solenoid 2612 for opening and closing, a transmission member (not shown) for transmitting the advance/retreat of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 to move the second special winning opening door 2611, and the second large winning opening 2006. It has a guide passage 2613 for guiding the received game ball B and discharging it backward.

In the second attacker unit 2600, the second special winning opening 2006 opens to the left from the center in the left-right direction to the right, and the second big winning opening 2006 is closed from the left. A winning opening door 2611 is provided.

The second big winning opening door 2611 bulges downward from a semicircular bottom side, a right side that is in contact with the right end of the bottom side and linearly extends upward, and a left side from the upper end of the right side. It is formed in a so-called blade shape, which is composed of an arc-shaped left side that is in contact with the left side of the lower side. The second big winning opening door 2611 has a cylindrical rotation shaft 2611a extending in the front-rear direction with the center of the lower side of the semi-circular shape as an axis, and a link protruding rearward from a position distant from the rotation shaft. And a pin (not shown). The second big winning opening door 2611 has a lower rotation shaft rotatably attached so that the upper end moves leftward.

Although not shown in detail, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is attached so that the plunger projects downward. The transmission member (not shown) penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction with the base portion attached to the tip of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612, so that the link pin of the second special winning opening door 2611 can slide. It has a slit to be inserted and is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The second attacker unit 2600 is positioned so that the right side of the second attacker unit 2600 is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000 when assembled on the game board 5, and the second big winning hole 2006 and the peripheral wall portion of the center role object 2500. A space where the game ball B can flow is formed between the right side of 2501. Further, the second attacker unit 2600 has a rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5.

In this second attacker unit 2600, in a normal state, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger projects downward due to its own weight and the own weight of the transmission member. In this state, the second special winning opening door 2611 is upright, and the second special winning opening 2006 is closed by the second special winning opening door 2611. That is, in the normal state, the game ball B cannot be received in the second special winning opening 2006.

In this normal state, in accordance with the special lottery result (the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result) that is drawn by the game ball B being received in the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, When the second attacker solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the second special winning opening door 2611 inserted in the slit of the transmission member is pulled upward. The second big winning opening door 2611 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction about the rotation shaft 2611a by sliding in the slit while being slid.

Thereby, the upper end of the second special winning opening door 2611 is moved to the left, the second special winning opening 2006 is opened to the left, and the right end side of the second special winning opening door 2611 is lowered. It will be in a tilted state. That is, the second special winning opening 2006 is opened. In this state, when the game ball B flowing down comes into contact with the second special winning opening door 2611, the game ball B rolls to the right due to its inclination and is received in the second special winning opening 2006. The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006 is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601, then guided by the guide passage 2613 and discharged rearward. The game ball B discharged backward from the guide passage 2613 is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8 g. Side right middle unit]
Next, the side right middle unit 2700 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. The side right middle unit 2700 of the table unit 2000 is arranged immediately above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The side right middle unit 2700 includes one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012.

The side right middle unit 2700 has a general winning opening 2001 that is always open upward with a width of one game ball B in the left-right direction, and is adjacent to the right side of the general winning opening 2001 in the left-right direction. The second sub-out port 2012 is always open upward with a width of two balls B.

In addition, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear, and the first guide passage 2701 guiding the game ball B received in the second sub-out opening 2012 to the rear. And two induction passages 2702. The first guide passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape that extends rearward from the general winning opening 2001, then bends rightward and then further rearward. The second guide passage 2702 extends downward from the second sub-out port 2012 below the first guide passage 2701 and then bends backward. The outlet of the first guide passage 2701 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2702 are vertically aligned.

This side right middle unit 2700, in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 project rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. There is.

In addition, the side right middle unit 2700, in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, has a right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and a lower end in contact with an upper end of the second attacker unit 2600. A space through which the game ball B can flow is formed between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. In this side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 is opened upward at a position slightly left of the second big winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2012 is formed between the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It opens upwards over almost the entire space (see FIG. 130 and the like).

The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear side with respect to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first guide passage 2701, and is provided behind the back side. It can be delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the unit 3000. The game ball B transferred to the eighth transfer port 3068 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In addition, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 by the second guide passage 2702, and is a rear unit provided in the rear side. It can be delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guiding unit 3050 in 3000. The game ball B transferred to the ninth transfer port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 128. The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is arranged between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the side right middle unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Has been. The gate member 2800 is a gate unit 2003 for performing a lottery of the ordinary lottery result of opening and closing the second starting port 2004 by passing the game ball B, and a gate sensor for detecting that the game cow B has passed through the gate unit 2003. 2801 and. A detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is a gate portion 2003.

The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 that projects obliquely to the lower left from the vicinity of the right end of the lower surface. The guide piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003 to the lower left. The guide piece 2802 is, when assembled on the game board 5, an extension line thereof is inclined so as to pass near the left end of the general winning opening 2001 in the side right middle unit 2700.

The gate member 2800 is located in the approximate center between the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 in the state of being assembled to the game board 5, and the game is performed on both left and right outer sides. The sphere B forms a clearance through which the ball can flow. The gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and to the right of the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 is an explanatory diagram in which the right part in the game area in FIG. 115 is enlarged. When assembled on the game board 5, a center accessory 2500 is provided substantially at the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on both the left and right outer portions and the lower portion of the center accessory 2500. Further, on the left side of the center accessory 2500, above the side upper left unit 2300, there is provided a wind turbine W that rotates by abutting the game ball B.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center character 2500 mainly enter the game ball B driven on the left side of the center character 2500 into a part on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W. Is adjusted so that the windmill W enters the region on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability. Thus, the game ball B can be driven into the warp entrance 2511 of the center character 2500 with a certain probability by hitting the left side of the center character 2500 to flow down.

The plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 of the center accessory 2500 are more than the game balls B that have flowed through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. The game ball B flowing through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 is adjusted so as to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability. Further, the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are mainly adjusted so that the game ball B flows on the left side of the right side portion of the gate member 2800. ing.

The plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are adjusted so that the game ball B flows mainly on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700.

In the game area 5a, the game ball B is driven by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and is driven upward from the left side along the periphery of the game area 5a. When the game ball B is struck so as to circulate on the left side of the center role object 2500 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 115, a plurality of obstacle nails planted on the left side of the center role object 2500. N is guided to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 or a part on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W, and with a lower probability than that, a part on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W. Be guided to enter.

The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is guided to the right by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility of being accepted into the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It is transferred to any of 3064, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is hardly received in the first starting opening 2002. Then, the game ball B not received in the general winning opening 2001 is discharged from the out opening 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B guided to the right of the center of the wind turbine W is centered in the left-right direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N obliquely arranged along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It may be guided to the side and received in the first starting port 2002. In addition, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the wind turbine W may flow down onto the side unit 2200, passing between the plurality of obstacle nails N that are diagonally arranged, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility of being accepted in the general winning opening 2001.

The game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, and thus the first probability is high. Accepted in the start port 2002. When the game ball B is discharged from the side discharge portions 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central discharge portion 2513a, it is received by the first starting opening 2002 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then passed to the first passing port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and the first starting port sensor. The sheet is detected by 3052 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first starting opening sensor 3052, a lottery of the first special lottery result is performed, and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out. The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2002 is discharged from the out port 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

In addition, the game ball B flowing on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a passes through the gate portion 2003 or is received in the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. There is no possibility of being caught.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B hit to the right side of the center character 2500 is received by the second starting opening 2004, whereas the game ball B hit to the left side of the center character 2500 is. The probability of acceptance in the first starting port 2002 is set higher. Thereby, when the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are not in the open state, it is possible to prompt the driving operation (“left hitting”) of the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is inserted at a strength such that the game ball B enters above the portion that becomes lower rightward from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. When hit, the game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

More specifically, the game ball B is driven with such strength that it comes into contact with the stop portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 forming a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right-hand striking). Then, the game ball B abutting on the stopper 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is discharged downward at a position slightly to the right of the gate portion 2003.

The game ball B discharged downward from the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 is a left side of the gate member 2800, a gate portion by a plurality of obstacle nails N which are planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800. 2003, the right side of the gate member 2800 is guided in order of decreasing probability and flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the second guide passage 2522, the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521. Is released downward from. The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is guided so that the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 have substantially the same probability, and the right side of the gate member 2800 has a lower probability than them. Then, it flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received in the second sub-out port 2012. The game ball B received in the second sub-out opening 2012 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and passed to the ninth transfer opening 3069 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and then the second sub-out opening sensor. After being detected by 3054, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. Further, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged to the side right middle unit 2700 side after being detected by the gate sensor 2801. By detecting the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery of the ordinary lottery result in which the second starting opening 2004 is opened and closed is performed.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the gate portion 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability of being highly likely due to the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700. Of the side right middle unit 2700, and sometimes it is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the right side unit 2700, or rarely in the second sub-out opening 2012. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then transferred to the eighth transfer opening 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, It is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. At this time, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. To the left of.

At this time, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and "small hit" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted at the second big winning opening 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006 is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601, and after being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a, in the back unit 3000. It is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guiding unit 3050 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. The detection of the game balls B by the second special winning opening sensor 2601 gives a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of the game balls B.

The game ball B that has not been accepted into the second prize hole 2006 and has flowed to the left of the second prize hole 2006 enters the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, and exits from the lower right guide passage 2530. From the first attacker unit 2400 side.

The game ball B discharged downward (obliquely leftward) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 flows down onto the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B is directly in the first attacker unit 2400 from the lower right guide passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf portion 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls to the left due to its inclination, and the upper surface of the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 and the second shelf portion 2412b. After rolling, it is discharged from the left end of the second shelf 2412b to the left. Then, the game ball B released from the second shelf portion 2412b to the left falls on the third shelf portion 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 in accordance with its momentum, and their inclinations. Thus, after being rolled to the left and rolling from the door portion 2417a to the fourth shelf portion 2412d, it is discharged from the fourth shelf portion 2412d to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400.

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, it may contact the plurality of obstacle nails N, so that the upper shelf portion 2412p does not flow down to the first shelf portion 2412a. May flow down. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper shelf portion 2412p rolls to the left due to its inclination and is discharged to the left from the left end of the upper shelf portion 2412p, and then to the obstacle nail N planted to the left. After coming into contact with each other, turning downward, and flowing down to the vicinity of the left end of the upper surface of the door portion 2417a in the first special winning opening door 2417, the door portion 2417a and the fourth shelf portion 2412d are rolled to the left to first It is discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, even when the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf portion 2412p, depending on the timing when the game ball B is discharged from the upper shelf portion 2412p and the timing when the first winning opening 2005 is opened, It may be accepted in the winning opening 2005.

Further, depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the first shelf portion 2412a bounces back to the right due to contact with the obstacle N or the right end of the upper shelf portion 2412p. By flowing down, the first shelf portion 2412a may roll rightward against the inclination thereof and may be discharged rightward (downward) from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a. The game ball B discharged from the right end of the first shelf 2412a to the right passes between the first standing wall 2412e and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and flows down to the vicinity of the right end of the second lateral wall 2412m. Then, due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, it rolls to the left and is received in the first sub-out port 2011. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and then is not returned into the game area 5a, but is not returned into the game area 5a, and the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. And is discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

When the game ball B is discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, and the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, if the "normal win" is selected as the normal lottery result, the second start is performed. Since the mouth door 2414 moves and the second starting opening 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling the first shelf portion 2412a to the left is received in the second starting opening 2004. there is a possibility. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2401, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed, and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out.

In addition, when the game ball B is discharged from the second shelf 2412b to the left, the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery are obtained. As a result, when the “big hit” is selected by lottery, the first special winning opening door 2417 moves and the first special winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that it is released from the second shelf portion 2412b to the left. The game ball B will be accepted into the first special winning opening 2005 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first special winning opening 2005 is detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2402, and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game balls B are detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2402, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged from the second shelf portion 2412b to the left, it comes into contact with the step on the lower surface of the upper shelf portion 2412p, and flows down diagonally to the lower right, and the second shelf portion 2412b and the third. The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelves 2412c. The game ball B that has entered the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c passes between the third standing wall portion 2412g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412h and is near the left end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m. It falls, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, and is received in the first sub-out port 2011.

The game ball B discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is received in any of the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out opening 2011. If not, it is discharged from the out port 2010 at the lower end of the game area 5a to the lower rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

From this, in order to open and close the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and “small hit” is performed. It is necessary to make a lottery of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result such as "big hit". While the first starting port 2002 is always open, the second starting port 2004 is required to allow the gate portion 2003 to pass the game ball B to draw (push) the "normal win" as the normal lottery result. Therefore, the chance of accepting the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 is lower than that of the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, in a normal state, the player hits the game ball B so that the game ball B can be received in the first starting opening 2002 and the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500. An operation can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 It is possible to raise the expectation for acceptance of the.

Then, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and “small hit” or “big hit” is drawn as the first special lottery result, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 Since the opening and closing, the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to "right hit" so that the game ball B can be received in the first prize hole 2005 or the second prize hole 2006, and the first prize hole. It is possible to increase the expectation for accepting the game ball B to the 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006.

At this time, a guide passage group 2520 including a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided in the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and the guide passages to be circulated allow passage of the gate portion 2003 easily. , The second sub-out port 2012 may be easily received, so that the striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B flows through a desired guide passage, and the player can play the game ball. It is possible to entertain the typing operation of B.

In addition, there is a possibility that the "normal hit" in which the second starting opening 2004 is in the open state can be drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003 by performing the "right hit", Since there is a possibility that the game ball B will be received in the second starting opening 2004 and "small hit" and "big hit" may be drawn, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest. You can

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. 131 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the back. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall that is open to the front. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided at the lower front end inside the back box 3010 and the flat front left front decoration 3030 and back right decoration 3040 which are respectively provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010. The rear guide unit 3050, the rear rear effect unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, and the rear guide unit 3050 in the lower part of the back box 3010, which are separated from each other left and right. The lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250, and the lower back middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the lower left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have it.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 in front of the back rear effect unit 3100, and in the back box 3010, behind the back front left decoration 3030. Rear rear left effect unit 3500, rear rear right effect unit 3600 provided behind the rear front right decoration 3040 in the rear box 3010, rear front left decoration 3030 and rear rear left in the back box 3010. Front front left production unit 3700 provided between production unit 3500, and front front right production unit provided between front front right decorative body 3040 and back rear right production unit 3600 in back box 3010. 3800.

[5-9a. Back box]
The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Inside the back box 3010, a back front left decoration 3030, a back front right decoration 3040, and various effect units are attached, and an effect display device 1600 and a drive board unit 1700 are attached on the rear side. This back box 3010 is transparently made of synthetic resin.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape having an open front, a square opening penetrating the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-like shape projecting backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame in the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the upper fixing piece 1601b of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. A cutout portion 3010d cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 near the center of the lower side in the left-right direction and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached is provided.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size such that the effect display device 1600 can be fitted in the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear so that the lock mechanism 3020 can slide left and right.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface abutting the rear surface of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting a decorative body, a rendering unit, etc. are formed at appropriate positions.

The back box 3010 has a strip plate-shaped reinforcing plate 3011 made of a metal plate that is attached along the lower side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is reinforced by the reinforcing plate 3011.

[5-9b. Back front left decoration and back front right decoration]
Next, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135 and the like. FIG. 135 is a front view of the pachinko machine in which the upper left corner of the game board is enlarged and shown with the door frame being transparent. The back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the front end of the back box 3010 while being separated from each other in the left and right directions.

The back front left decoration 3030 includes a vertically extending flat plate-shaped base 3031 and a decoration seal 3032 attached to the front surface of the base 3031. The base 3031 extends vertically at the same height as the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and the left end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decoration seal 3032 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The front left decoration 3030 is opaque, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

The back front right decoration 3040 includes a vertically extending flat plate-shaped base 3041 and a decoration seal 3042 attached to the front surface of the base 3041. The base 3041 extends from the upper end of the back box 3010 to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and the right end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decoration sticker 3042 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). This back front right decorative body 3040 is formed opaque, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

The back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are extended in a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge, which is the outer side in the state assembled to the game board 5, is located outside the game area 5a in a front view. (See FIG. 111, FIG. 135, etc.). Further, the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040 are flat plate-shaped so that the outer peripheral edge, which is the outer side, is located outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. Has been extended to.

More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, when viewed from the front, the back front left decoration 3030 is halved from the bottom of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 provided in the upper left corner of the back rear left effect unit 3500. Has been extended to the position. In other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to the outside of the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 in the front view. Furthermore, in other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to the outside of the door window 101a in the door frame 3.

As a result, when assembled on the game board 5, the lower half of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 can be covered by the back front left decorative body 3030 (hatched portion in FIG. 135), and the back rear left from the player side. The elevation drive motor 3554 can be made invisible. Further, in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the back front left decorative body 3030 covering the lower half of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 is located outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 (hatched portion in FIG. 135). Since it extends to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the door frame 3, the back rear left up/down drive motor 3554 can be made invisible (invisible) from the player side. Therefore, the functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided on the rear side of the front left decoration 3030 can be made invisible to the player, and the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be improved. can do.

Further, in the back front left decorative body 3030, it is extended so as to cover a part (lower half) of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554, and in the state assembled to the game board 5, the back rear left lift drive motor 3554. A part (upper half) can be seen from the front, but by assembling it to the pachinko machine 1, the upper half of the rear left/right lifting drive motor 3554 can be covered and hidden by the door frame 3. Therefore, it is not necessary to extend the back front left decoration 3030 so as to cover the entire back rear left lift drive motor 3554, and it is possible to prevent the back front left decoration 3030 from becoming unnecessarily large. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to the outside of the function display unit 1400, even if the function display unit 1400 is not attached to the front configuration upper left corner of the front component member 1000, the function display unit 1400 is not attached. Instead of 1400, the back-front left decoration body 3030 can hide the back-rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 (functional component) provided behind.

On the other hand, in the back front right decoration 3040, when viewed from the front, it extends to the upper right corner of the back box 3010 so as to cover the entire back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 in the back rear right effect unit 3600, and a transparent front. Even through the component member 1000 and the transparent game panel 1100, the rear rear right up-and-down drive motor 3654 is invisible from the front (player side). Therefore, by making functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided behind the back front right decoration 3040 invisible to the player, the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. Therefore, it is possible to exhibit the same function and effect as the front left decorative body 3030.

As described above, according to the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040 of the present embodiment, at least a part of the functional components such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided at the rear is covered. Therefore, it is possible to make the functional parts hard to see from the player side, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

Further, as described above, since the front of the functional component provided on the rear side can be covered by the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are made transparent. Also, the functional component can be made invisible to the player. That is, the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Therefore, by the transparent front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundaries of the game area 5a, and to give the player a sense of openness and the actual game area 5a. Although the size does not change, the game area 5a can be made larger (wider) to the player. At this time, the portions outside the game area 5a in the decoration seal 3032 of the back front left decoration 3030 and the decoration seal 3042 of the back front right decoration 3040, which are provided with a predetermined decoration, are the front constituent member 1000 and the game panel 1100. Since it can be seen from the front through them, it is possible to decorate the outside of the game area 5a with them, and it is possible to make the game area 5a look larger than it actually is, which can strongly attract the interest of the player. The board 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be used.

Further, as described above, the front front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can make the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 transparent, so that the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, and the rear unit. Light from 3000, etc. can be reflected or refracted forward (on the side of the player) by the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100, so that the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 emit light. It can be shown, and the decorativeness of the entire game board 5 can be further enhanced.

The functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided in the rear are provided from the player side by the parts of the front left decoration 3030 and the front right decoration 3040 which are extended to the outside of the game area 5a. Since it can be made invisible, all the functional components may be provided outside the game area 5a in a front view. At this time, since the size of the game board 5 is limited, if an attempt is made to secure a space for providing all the functional parts outside the game area 5a, the size of the game area 5a is relatively reduced. Since there is a possibility that a problem that must be done may occur, a part of the functional parts is placed outside the game area 5a in such a balance that the game area 5a can be made large relative to the size of the game board 5 as in the present embodiment. It is desirable to provide it.

Further, it is desirable that the decorations of the front left decoration 3030 and the front right decoration 3040 are related to the decoration (design) in the game area 5a in a front view. As a result, the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a can extend the design in the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. 5a can be made larger than it actually is, and the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's attention.

[5-9c. Back guiding unit]
Next, the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 136 and the like. FIG. 136(a) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 136(b) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit of the back unit as seen from the back. The back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010, and is formed in a shape in which both ends extending to the left and right are bent upward. The back guiding unit 3050 is formed substantially transparent.

The back guiding unit 3050 includes a general winning opening sensor 3051 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and a first starting opening sensor 3052 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. Out port sensor 3053 for detecting the game ball B received in the out port 2010, a second sub-out port sensor 3054 for detecting the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012, and the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500. And a magnetic sensor 3055 for detecting illegal magnetism, the magnetic sensor 3055 being provided in the rear part of the.

Further, the back guiding unit 3050 is received in the first transfer opening 3061 through which the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100 is transferred, and the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200. A second delivery port 3062 to which the game ball B is delivered, a third delivery port 3063 to which the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 on the inside of the side unit 2200 is delivered, and a general left side of the side unit 2200. The fourth delivery port 3064 to which the game ball B received in the winning port 2001 is delivered, and the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 and the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400. 5th delivery port 3065, the 6th delivery port 3066 to which the game ball B received in the 1st big winning port 2005 of the 1st attacker unit 2400 is delivered, and the 2nd big winning port 2006 of the 2nd attacker unit 2600 The seventh transfer opening 3067 to which the game ball B thus received is transferred, the eighth transfer opening 3068 to which the game ball B received from the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is transferred, and the side right middle unit 2700. It is provided with a ninth delivery port 3069 to which the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is delivered.

Further, although not shown in detail, the back guiding unit 3050 guides the game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 to the right and then ejects it downward, and a second delivery path. The game ball B transferred to the transfer port 3062 and the game ball B transferred to the third transfer port 3063 are merged, and then discharged to the second discharge path, and transferred to the fourth transfer port 3064. A third discharge path for guiding the game ball B downward and discharging it obliquely to the lower right, and a position where the game ball B transferred to the eighth transfer port 3068 is below the sixth transfer port 3066. And a fourth discharge path that discharges diagonally to the lower left after guiding to the left to a position on the left side of the sixth delivery port 3066. A fifth delivery port 3065, a sixth delivery port 3066, a seventh delivery port 3067, and a ninth delivery port 3069 communicate with the fourth discharge path.

The game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 and delivered to the first delivery opening 3061 is discharged downward after being detected by the first starting opening sensor 3052 in the middle of the first discharge path. To be done. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200 and transferred to the second receiving opening 3062, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the inner side and transferred to the third receiving opening 3063 The ball B is merged in the second discharge path, then detected by the general winning opening 2001, and then discharged downward. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the left side of the side unit 2200 and transferred to the fourth receiving opening 3064 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning opening 2001 in the middle of the third discharging path. ..

It is accepted by the second starting port 2004 or the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400, is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065, and is received by the game ball B and the first big winning port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B transferred to the sixth transfer port 3066 and the game ball B transferred to the second winning port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and transferred to the seventh transfer port 3067 are the fourth It is discharged through the discharge passage.

The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and transferred to the eighth transfer opening 3068 is on the upstream side of the portion communicating with the ninth transfer opening 3069 in the fourth discharge path. It is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and discharged through the fourth discharge path. The game ball B received in the second sub-out opening 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 and transferred to the ninth transfer-out opening 3069 merges with the fourth discharge passage after being detected by the second sub-out opening sensor 3054, It is discharged through the four discharge channels.

The back guiding unit 3050 includes an out ball detecting member 3080 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010. The out-ball detecting member 3080 is driven into the game area 5a and received in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006. To detect the game ball B that has been received in the out opening 2010 that is open at the lower end of the game area 5a among the game balls B that were not present (the game ball B that has not been granted a privilege, also referred to as “out ball”) belongs to.

The out-ball detecting member 3080 is inserted into the out-recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 from the rear, and the game ball B is a cylindrical portion 3081 extending in the front-rear direction in a cylindrical shape so that the game ball B can flow, and a cylindrical portion 3081. A partition portion 3082 that divides the inside into left and right, a flange portion 3083 that projects in a horizontal direction from the outer periphery of the rear end of the tubular portion 3081, and a rear end of the tubular portion 3081 that is continuous with the game ball B downward. And a rear cover 3084 which can be guided to and discharged (see FIG. 114). The out-ball detecting member 3080 is provided with an out-port sensor 3053 between the tubular portion 3081 and the rear cover 3084.

The tubular portion 3081 is substantially the same size as the outlet 2010, and has a width in the left-right direction in which the two game balls B are sufficiently aligned (a width in which the three game balls B are not aligned), and the lower inner surface is It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the rear side. The partition portion 3082 is provided near the rear end of the tubular portion 3081, and is partitioned into a size through which one game ball B can pass on the left and right sides. The partition portion 3082 is curved such that the front end side thereof protrudes forward as it goes downward, and protrudes forward shorter than the diameter of the game ball B.

The out-ball detecting member 3080 is provided with two out-out sensors 3053 arranged side by side. The left outlet sensor 3053 detects the game ball B flowing through the left side of the partition portion 3082 in the cylindrical portion 3081, and the right outlet sensor 3053 detects the right side of the partition portion 3082 in the cylindrical portion 3081. The game ball B that has circulated is detected. The outlet sensor 3053 is a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

The two outlet sensors 3053 are provided so that the detection direction of the game ball B (the axial direction of the detection hole through which the game ball B passes) is parallel to the inner surface of the lower side of the tubular portion 3081. As a result, the circulation direction of the game ball B circulating in the tubular portion 3081 does not change at the portion of the outlet sensor 3053, so that the outlet sensor 3053 can smoothly detect the gaming ball B and the gaming ball B. Can be promptly discharged, and can be suppressed from being stagnated on the front side of the outlet sensor 3053.

The out-ball detecting member 3080 has the tubular portion 3081 inserted into the out recessed portion 1123 of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5 (see FIG. 114).

The out-ball detecting member 3080 is assembled to the game board 5, and the upper end of the front end of the tubular portion 3081 projects further forward than the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 (see FIG. 114 ). That is, the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 is inserted into the tubular portion 3081. Further, the lower end of the rear cover 3084 passes through the discharging portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and projects below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200.

The out-ball detecting member 3080 flows down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the game area 5a, and then is guided rearward by the out guiding portion 1003 to be received in the out opening 2010. The gaming ball B is passed through the tubular portion 3081 and detected by either of the two outlet sensors 3053, and then guided downward by the rear cover 3084 and discharged. The out-ball detecting member 3080 discharges the game ball B to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the main body frame 4 without contacting the board holder 1200.

According to the out ball detection member 3080 of the present embodiment, the partition portion 3082 partitions the space between the two out port sensors 3053 provided on the left and right, so that the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 is It is possible to guide to the left side outlet sensor 3053 side, and it is possible to guide the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side outlet sensor 3053 side. Therefore, in each of the left and right outlet sensors 3053, it is possible to determine whether the player tends to "left hit" or "right hit" depending on the number of gaming balls B detected per hour. Based on the determination, it is possible to promote the driving operation most suitable for the game situation and entertain the intended game.

Further, in the out-ball detecting member 3080, the projection of the partitioning portion 3082 is shortened to make it easy for the game ball B to get over, so when many game balls B enter the out port 2010 per hour, The game ball B can be escaped to the left side or the right side where the circulation amount of the game ball B of the portion 3082 is relatively small, and the game ball B can be discharged at the outlet 2010 without being stagnant.

Further, since the lower end of the rear cover 3084 is projected below the discharging portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, The game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2006, the first sub-out opening 2011, and the second sub-out opening 2012 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 flows backward in the out-ball detecting member 3080 and is out-out sensor 3053. It is possible to prevent it from being detected, and it is possible to accurately detect only the “out ball” received in the out port 2010.

In the present embodiment, the out-ball detecting member 3080 is provided on the back unit 3000, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the out-ball detecting member 3080 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has the out recessed portion 1123, the out ball detection member 3080 can be attached, so that it can correspond to the existing game panel 1100 having the out recessed portion 1123. In addition to being possible, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

Further, according to this embodiment, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006 are driven into the game area 5a. Since the game ball B (“out ball”) that is not accepted by any of them can be detected by the out mouth sensor 3053, the first sub-out mouth sensor 2403, and the second sub-out mouth sensor 3054, for example, a specific winning a prize. If the "out ball" is not detected even though the acceptance of the game ball B in the mouth is continuously detected, it means that a fraudulent act has been performed on a specific winning opening, It is possible to inform that fraudulent acts are being performed.

Moreover, since the number can be counted by detecting the “out ball”, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening. The number of “winning balls” and the number of “out balls” counted by detecting the game ball B received in 2006, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the first large From the number of “safe balls” paid out by receiving the game ball B into the winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, the “ball-out rate” in the pachinko machine 1 can be known. Although illustration is omitted, on the rear side of the game board 5, there is provided a display section for displaying the “ball payout rate”.

In addition, in the game board 5, all the game balls B (“all balls”) driven into the game area 5a are detected, and all the game balls B (“all balls”) discharged from the game area 5a are detected. ) Is detected, only the “out ball” is detected by the out-port sensor 3053, the first sub-out-port sensor 2403, and the second sub-out-port sensor 3054. It is possible to detect the occurrence of ball clogging in the game board 5 by comparing the respective numbers of “” and “all balls”.

[5-9d. Back production unit]
Next, the back rear effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 141 and the like. FIG. 137(a) is a perspective view of the back rear effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 137(b) is a perspective view of the back rear effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the rear-rear effect unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the rear-rear effect unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable configuration of the rear-end effect unit from the front. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the rear-end effect unit.

The back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost side (front surface of the rear wall) in the back box 3010. The back rear effect unit 3100 has a U-shape whose front view is opened downward, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back-rear effect unit 3100 includes a back-rear movable decoration body 3110 extending in the left-right direction and a back-rear movable mechanism 3120 for moving the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 in the up-down direction.

The back-back movable decorative body 3110 is a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 that extends in the left-right direction and has a relief-shaped decoration on the front surface, and a plurality of first decorative bodies 311 provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111. A rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 on which the LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b are mounted, and a decorative-member base 3115 attached to the decorative member 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-rear decorative substrate 3114 are provided. Each of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is a surface mounting type and is a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors. The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 can make the decorative body 3111 (back rear movable decorative body 3110) emit light.

The back-back movable decorative body 3110 includes a left slider 3116 vertically extending on the left side of the decorative body 3111 and a right slider 3117 vertically extending on the right side of the decorative body 3111. The left slider 3116 includes a movable protrusion 3116a protruding leftward from near the lower end, a locking protrusion 3116b protruding leftward from near the upper end, and a detection piece 3116c provided at the upper end. Have

The rear rear movable mechanism 3120 is formed in a U shape whose front view is open downward, and is attached to the inside of the back box 3010. The unit base 3121 and the left side of the unit base 3121 extend vertically in a columnar shape. And a slide shaft 3122 that supports the left slider 3116 of the back-end movable decorative body 3110 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a slide shaft 3122 that extends to the left side of the slide shaft 3122 in parallel with the slide shaft 3122, and has a spiral on the outer periphery. Spiral shaft 3123 in which a groove is formed.

In addition, the rear rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3124 attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123, a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3125 meshing with the transmission gear 3124, and a motor gear 3125 serving as a rotation shaft. The rear rear drive motor 3126 that is attached, the motor base 3127 that attaches the rear rear drive motor 3126 to the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3121, and the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3121. A bearing member 3128 and a lower bearing member 3129 rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123 are provided.

In addition, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 is screwed to the spiral shaft 3123, and a slide guide 3130 that can come into contact with the movable protrusion 3116a of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 from below, and on the left side of the spiral shaft 3123. A transmission slider 3131 that extends vertically and can be moved up and down, and a lower end side of which can contact the slide guide 3130 from above, a spring 3132 that urges the transmission slider 3131 upward, and a transmission slider 3131. A link member 3133 that rotates about an axis in the front-rear direction by moving up and down, and a lock member 3134 that slides in the left-right direction by the rotation of the link member 3133 and that can abut the locking protrusion 3116b of the back-back movable decoration 3110. Equipped with.

Further, the back-rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a back-rear upper detection sensor 3135 that detects the detection piece 3116c of the back-rear movable decoration 3110, a back-rear lower detection sensor 3136 that detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, and a back-rear detection sensor 3136. The front left cover 3137 attached to the left side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the left end side of the movable decorative body 3110 from the front, and the right side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the right end side of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 from the front. Connection between the front right cover 3138 and the rear rear drive motor 3126, the rear rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rear rear lower detection sensor 3136, which are mounted on the lower front surface of the front left cover 3137, and the production drive board 1720. The rear rear left relay board 3139 that relays the rear rear decorative board 3114 of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110, which is mounted between the unit base 3121 and the front right cover 3138, and the production drive board 1720. A rear rear right relay board 3140 that relays.

The unit base 3121 has a shock absorbing member 3121a that comes into contact with the lower surface of the left slider 3116 and the lower surface of the right slider 3117 of the rear rear movable ornament 3110 that have moved downward to absorb the shock. An upper end and a lower end of the slide shaft 3122 are sandwiched between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137.

The slide guide 3130 projects from the vicinity of the lower end to the right and has a detection piece 3130a detected by the back lower back detection sensor 3136. The slide guide 3130 is provided so as to be vertically slidable between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137, and is incapable of rotating about the axis of the spiral shaft 3123 by contacting them. The slide guide 3130 can be brought into contact with the upper surface of the lower surface of the movable projection 3116a of the rear rear movable decoration 3110. Further, the slide guide 3130 is configured such that an upper end surface of a lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 can abut on a lower surface thereof.

The transmission slider 3131 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 so as to be vertically movable. The transmission slider 3131 is vertically movable only within a predetermined range by the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 has a lower protrusion 3131a protruding rightward on the lower end side, an upper protrusion 3131b protruding rightward on the upper end side, and a cylindrical protrusion rearward from near the upper end of the upper protrusion 3131b. And a protruding pin 3131c. In the transmission slider 3131, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 can contact the upper surface of the lower protrusion 3131a. Further, in the transmission slider 3131, the projection pin 3131c is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133.

The upper end of the spring 3132 is attached to the unit base 3121 and the lower end of the spring 3132 is attached to the upper protrusion 3131b of the transmission slider 3131, and urges the transmission slider 3131 upward.

The link member 3133 is formed in a triangular shape in which the vertices are chamfered in a front view. The link member 3133 is attached to the unit base 3121 near one apex so as to be rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction. The link member 3133 has a slot-shaped first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the left apex from the rotation axis, and a slot-shaped first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the top apex above the rotation axis. And a second slit 3133b. In the link member 3133, the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b.

The lock member 3134 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction by the front left cover 3137.
The lock member 3134 projects rearward in a columnar shape, forms a transmission pin 3134a slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, and a flat upper end surface, and also extends in the left-right direction. An abutting surface 3134b that extends and is capable of abutting the lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of the rear rear movable ornament 3110, and is inclined so as to move leftward as it goes downward from the right end of the abutting surface 3134b, And a guide surface 3134c with which the locking projection 3116b can abut.

The front right cover 3138 cooperates with the unit base 3121 to support the right slider 3117 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 slidably in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the rear-rear effect unit 3100 will be described. In the normal state, the rear-rear effect unit 3100 is in the retracted position in which the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward as shown in FIG. 140 (FIG. 141(a)), and the slide guide 3130. Is located near the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123, and the lock member 3134 is moved to the right and located at the lock position. In this state, the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the left slider 3116 of the rear rear movable ornament 3110 is in contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130, and the rear rear movable ornament is in contact with the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134. The lower surface of the locking protrusion 3116b of the 3110 abuts.

In a normal state, the transmission slider 3131 is located at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 3132. The protrusion pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133. The urging force of 3132 causes the link member 3133 to act in the clockwise direction around the rotation axis, and the lock member 3134 to urge in the direction of sliding to the right. Therefore, the lock member 3134 is maintained in the locked position by the biasing force of the spring 3132.

In this state, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is restricted from moving downward by the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134. Therefore, even if one of the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134 moves from the position due to some reason (defective), the remaining movement of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be prevented from falling (falling). it can.

In a normal state, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 is located above the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and the second slit 3133b in which the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted rotates. It is located to the right of the axis. Further, the back rear upper detection sensor 3135 detects the detection piece 3116c of the back rear movable ornament 3110, and the back rear lower detection sensor 3136 does not detect the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130.

The rear-rear effect unit 3100 is located behind the rear-rear effect unit 3400 in the normal state of the retracted position, and is invisible from the front (player side).

In this normal state, when the rear shaft drive motor 3126 rotates the spiral shaft 3123 in a predetermined direction (here, a counterclockwise direction in plan view), the slide guide 3130 screwed to the spiral shaft 3123 is moved downward. Move to. Even if the slide guide 3130 moves downward, the locking projection 3116b of the back rear movable decoration 3110 is in contact with the lock member 3134, so that the back rear movable decoration 3110 does not move downward from the retracted position. Instead, only the slide guide 3130 moves downward, away from the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear rear movable decoration body 3110.

Then, when the slide guide 3130 moves downward due to the rotation of the spiral shaft 3123 and the detection piece 3130a is detected by the back rear lower detection sensor 3136, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 causes the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 to move. It contacts the upper end surface (see FIG. 141(b)). When the back rear lower detection sensor 3136 detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 and the slide guide 3130 further moves downward, the slide guide 3130 presses the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 downward, The transmission slider 3131 moves downward together with the slide guide 3130 against the biasing force of the spring 3132.

When the transmission slider 3131 moves downward, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 in which the protrusion pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted is pressed downward, and the link member 3133 is rotated counterclockwise about its rotation axis. It will rotate in the direction of rotation. When the link member 3133 rotates counterclockwise, the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left, and the transmission pin 3134a inserted in the second slit 3133b is used. The locking member 3134 will move to the left (see FIG. 141(c)).

When the lock member 3134 moves to the left of the locking projection 3116b of the back-rear movable decoration 3110, the lock (downward restriction) by the lock member 3134 is released, and the back-rear movable decoration 3110 falls. At this time, the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 moving downward is in a non-detection state with respect to the back rear lower detection sensor 3136, and the rotation of the back rear drive motor 3126 is stopped.

Then, the fallen back rear movable decoration body 3110 comes into contact with the shock absorbing member 3121a of the unit base 3121, whereby the fall is stopped and the state becomes the appearance position (see FIG. 141(c)). In this state of the appearance position, the slide guide 3130 is located below the lower end of the left slider 3116 of the rear back movable ornament 3110, and the rear rear movable ornament 3110 does not contact.

In the rear-rear effect unit 3100, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) in the state of the appearance position where the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 has dropped. In this state, by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-rear decoration substrate 3114, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (decoration body 3111) can be illuminated and decorated. The luminous decoration can entertain the player.

When the back rear movable decoration 3110 is returned from the appearance position of the lower moving end to the retracted position in the normal state, the back rear drive motor 3126 causes the spiral shaft 3123 to move in the reverse direction (here, in the clockwise direction in plan view). Direction) to move the slide guide 3130 upward. When this slide guide 3130 moves upward, the transmission slider 3131 slides upward together with the slide guide 3130 by the biasing force of the spring 3132. As the transmission slider 3131 moves upward, the link member 3133 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the lock member 3134 moves rightward and stops at the lock position, contrary to the above. Become.

Further, when the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a comes into contact with the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110, and the slide guide 3130 moves the movable protrusion 3116a upward. By pressing to, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 moves upward (see FIG. 141(d)).

Then, when the rear movable movable ornament 3110 is moved upward by the slide guide 3130 to the vicinity of the retracted position, the locking projection 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 from below. When the locking projection 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c from below and the locking projection 3116b pushes the guide surface 3134c upward, the inclination of the guide surface 3134c causes a force to move the lock member 3134 to the left. As a result, the lock member 3134 slides to the right against the biasing force of the spring 3132 that tries to move to the right via the transmission slider 3131 and the link member 3133.

When the locking projection 3116b is located above the upper end of the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 due to the upward movement of the back rear movable decoration body 3110, the upward pressing by the locking projection 3116b against the guide surface 3134c disappears. The lock member 3134 slides to the right due to the urging force of the spring 3132 to be in the locked position. As a result, the right end side of the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134 is located below the locking protrusion 3116b of the back-rear movable decoration 3110, and the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is moved downward by the lock member 3134. Can be regulated.

At this time, the detection piece 3116c of the back rear movable decoration 3110 is detected by the back rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rotation of the back rear drive motor 3126 is stopped. In this way, the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 can be returned from the appearance position to the normal state of the retracted position.

According to the rear-rear production unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 extending to the left and right is dropped from the retracted position invisible to the player side to the appearance position invisible. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

In addition, since the lock member 3134 that locks (restricts) the back-end movable decorative body 3110 in the retracted position is released to the left, the lock member 3134 is rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. Compared with the case where the lock is released by moving it, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be dropped without moving upward when releasing the lock.

[5-9d-1. Movable decoration behind the back]
Next, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 in the back-rear effect unit 3100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. FIG. 142 is a front view showing the back-and-back movable decorative body together with the back-and-back decorative substrate. 143(a) is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 142, and FIG. 143(b) is a sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 142. FIG. 144(a) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body seen from the front, and FIG. 144(b) is a perspective view of the back-removable decoration body seen from the back. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body disassembled and seen from the back. FIG. 147 is a front view showing a part of the back-rear movable decoration body in an enlarged manner, and FIG. 148 is an explanatory view showing the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decoration substrate by broken lines in the front view of FIG. 149(a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-back movable decorative body, and FIG. 149(b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same portion as the decorative body of (a), (C) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back rear decorative substrate in the same portion as the decorative body of (a).

Further, FIG. 150 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing an enlarged upper portion of FIG. 143(a). FIG. 151 is an exploded view showing the cross-sectional view of FIG. 150 in an exploded manner. FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between the decoration by the ornament and the decorative sheet and the light guide radiation plate and the rear-rear decorative substrate by enlarging a part of the front surface of the back-rear movable ornament. FIG. 153(a) is an explanatory view showing a cross-section of the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the back rear decorative substrate at the portion of the first LED, and FIG. 153(b) is a view showing the position of the second LED on the optical axis of the first LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect|action of the light guide radiating plate in the part which is doing from the front, (c) is the LED accommodating part of the light guide radiating plate with respect to the 2nd decorative part in a decorative body, and a decorative sheet, and the back rear decorative substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement|positioning of 1 LED from the front. FIG. 154 is a front view showing a part of the rear rear decorative substrate in an enlarged manner and showing it together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. 155(a) is a front view of the back-rear decoration substrate, and FIG. 155(b) is a rear view of the back-rear decoration substrate. FIG. 156(a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the rear back movable decorative body, and FIG. 156(b) shows a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative portion having a different form from that of (a). It is an expanded sectional view, (c) is an expanded sectional view which shows a part of ornamental body which has a metal decorative part of a form different from (a) and (b).

As shown in FIG. 142 and the like, the back-back movable decorative body 3110 extends in the left-right direction and is provided with a decorative portion 3150 having a predetermined decoration when viewed from the front. More specifically, the decorative portion 3150 of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 has two first decorative portions 3151 respectively provided near the left and right ends and a left-right direction between the two first decorative portions 3151 in a front view. And a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 that are arranged in a line. Each first decoration part 3151 imitates one cherry blossom. Although not shown in the drawings, the second decorative portion 3152 has a concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, pachinko machine) because each of them imitates a predetermined character and is lined up on the left and right. A predetermined logo is formed according to the world view of the machine 1 (game board 5). As described above, the back rear movable decoration 3110 is decorated with the logo between the two cherry blossoms.

As shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 146, the rear rear movable decoration body 3110 in the rear rear effect unit 3100 extends in the left-right direction and forms a part of the decorative portion 3150 by the relief-shaped unevenness. A transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 having a light-transmissive portion, and a translucent portion (area) provided behind the decorative body 3111 and provided with decoration (pattern) that constitutes the rest of the decorative portion 3150. A sheet-shaped decoration sheet 3112 having a transparent portion (region), a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the decoration sheet 3112, and a light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113. A back rear decorative substrate 3114 having a plurality of first LEDs and a plurality of second LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) and a back rear decorative substrate 3114 A flat plate-shaped ornament base 3115 attached to the ornament 3111 so as to cover it, a left slider 3116 extending vertically to the left of the ornament 3111, and a right slider vertically extending to the right of the ornament 3111. And a slider 3117.

It should be noted that the surface number such as a part number of the front side electronic components such as the plurality of first LEDs and the second LEDs mounted on the front side (mounting surface) of the rear decorative board 3114, the surface indicating the position where the front side electronic components are arranged, etc. The attribute of the side electronic component (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component may be included). The front side notation part is printed on the front surface (mounting surface) of the backside decorative substrate 3114 by silk printing with a predetermined paint color, and a transparent portion is provided behind the transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 ( The sheet-shaped decoration sheet 3112 having a region and a transparent portion (region), the transparent flat plate-shaped light guide radiation plate 3113, and the rear rear decoration substrate 3114 are arranged in order, so that the decoration sheet 3112 transmits light. Although there is a region (region) having a property, a predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear back decorative substrate 3114 has a light guide radiation plate 3113, a sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and It is visible through the decorative body 3111, and in the state where the first LED and the second LED are off, it is a region corresponding to a region (region) having a light-transmitting property and has a predetermined paint color. If it is visible, it is possible to confirm the presence of the color of the predetermined paint, and it is impossible to determine whether the color of the predetermined paint shows characters or symbols or shows the shape. On the other hand, when the color of the predetermined paint can be visually recognized in the area corresponding to the transparent portion (area), the characters, symbols, shapes (that is, the surface indicated by the front side notation part) are determined by the color of the predetermined paint. It is possible to determine the attribute of the side electronic component).

[5-9d-2. Backside movable ornaments]
The ornamental body 3111 is formed such that the front surface side and the rear surface side are generally flat. The decorative body 3111 includes a first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward from a general surface on the front side, a second decorative protrusion 3111b protruding forward and shorter than the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and a second decorative protrusion. The third decorative protrusion 3111c, which is shorter than the portion 3111b and protrudes forward, is provided. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided in a portion that is the contour of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The first decorative protrusion 3111a in the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is formed on the outer circumference of the petals of the first decorative portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom, and the portion that imitates the central stamen and pistil, respectively. .. The first decorative protrusion 3111a in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 is formed so as to surround the outer periphery of each of the second decorative portions 3152 in a double (two) manner. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is curved so that the front surface bulges forward.

The second decorative protrusion 3111b is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom or petal smaller than the first decorative portion 3151. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is curved so that the front surface bulges forward.

The third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided in the frame of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. The front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 is curved. The front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 is flat.

The first decorative protrusion 3111 a and the third decorative protrusion 3111 c of the decorative body 3111 form a part of each of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 in the decorative portion 3150.

Further, the decorative body 3111 has a metallic luster in a portion (first foil stamping area (see FIG. 156(a))) projecting forward of the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It has a metal decoration portion 3111d (in FIG. 147 to 149, a shaded portion having a dark and light shade). The decorative body 3111 is entirely colorless and transparent except for the metal decorative portion 3111d. As shown in FIG. 150, FIG. 156(a), etc., the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment is provided in a curved front surface portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Is not provided on the side surface of the. Thereby, the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is made longer than in the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is also provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It is possible to improve the insulation property against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

Since the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d along the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, a high-grade feeling can be imparted by the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d. In addition, the three-dimensional effect of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be further emphasized by the curved metal decorative portion 3111d. As shown in FIG. 148 and the like, the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided in a portion in front of the first LED 3114a of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 in the second decoration portion 3152, and the first LED 3114a and the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided. The first LED accommodating portion 3113c is made difficult to see from the front.

In addition, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, light from the first LED 3114a or the like of the rear back rear decoration substrate 3114 is reflected by the back surface (rear surface) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. It is possible to reflect the light to the rear side and illuminate the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the rear side, so that the decoration (first contour portion 3112a) of the decorative sheet 3112 can be made more visible.

The metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by pressing a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment) by hot stamping. More specifically, first, an intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 is molded by injection molding of synthetic resin. The intermediate product of the formed decorative body 3111 is attached to a predetermined position of the hot stamping device with the front surface side from which the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the like are projected facing upward. At this time, above the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111, a transfer sheet having a desired metal foil and a flat plate-shaped hot plate whose lower surface has elasticity and which is heated to a predetermined temperature are arranged. .. Then, the hot plate is lowered from the upper end of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111 to a position at a predetermined distance (position higher than the upper end of the second decorative protrusion 3111b), and The metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred (foil pressed) to the first decorative protrusion 3111a by heat. As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed in the portion of the first foil stamping region FS1 above (in front of) the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111 (see FIG. 156(a)). ..

In the hot plate of the hot stamping device used for forming the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment, since the portion of the hot sheet that contacts the decorative body 3111 that is the transfer destination of the metal foil of the transfer sheet has elasticity, the transfer destination ( Even if the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a is not flat but curved, it can be elastically deformed along the surface, and the metal foil can be in a good state even in a three-dimensionally shaped portion such as a curved surface. Can be transferred (foil stamped). As a result, as compared with the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by plating or vapor deposition, the metal decorative portion 3111d can be easily formed without requiring large-scale equipment and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metallic decorative portion 3111d only at the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by the hot stamping device, by lowering the hot plate to a position lower than the second decoration protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decoration protrusion 3111c, the first decoration protrusion 3111d is formed. It is possible to form a decorative body 3111 by providing a metal decorative portion 3111d at the tip portions of the portion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b.

Alternatively, in a state in which the intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 is mounted on the hot stamping device, first, a hot plate is first formed using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (first metal foil) of a predetermined color. It is lowered to a position (second foil stamping region FS2) lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the first tip ends of the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b Transfer the metal foil. Then, using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (second metal foil) of a color different from the first metal foil, the hot plate is lower than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and higher than the second decorative protrusion 3111b. The second metal foil is transferred to the position (first foil pressing area FS1) and transferred to the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (see FIG. 156(b)). As a result, the decorative body 3111 including the metal decorative portion 3111d of a different color is formed between the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b without performing the masking process on the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 is formed by hot stamping (foil pressing), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a metal film is formed on the surface of an intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 by plating or vapor deposition, and then the metal film in a portion excluding the first decorative protrusion 3111a is peeled off (laser peeled) by laser light. The decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d may be formed on the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, as shown in FIG. 156(c), the metal decoration portion 3111d may be provided not only on the tip portion of the first decoration protrusion 3111a but also on the side surface portion.

The ornamental body 3111 of the back rear movable ornamental body 3110 has a rear recessed portion 3111e which is recessed forward from the general surface on the rear side. The rear recess 3111e is provided so as to correspond to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. After this, the recess 3111e makes it possible to equalize the plate thickness of the decorative body 3111 and suppress the deformation of the resin due to sink marks during injection molding.

The rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is provided so as to be recessed forward in a portion corresponding to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c on the flat rear surface. Therefore, the flat portion of the rear surface excluding the rear concave portion 3111e comes into contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112, which will be described later. As a result, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 come into close contact with each other, so that light is not irregularly reflected between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. Through the transparent decorative body 3111, the pattern or the like of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly visible.

Further, since the rear concave portion 3111e is provided in a portion corresponding to the third decorative protrusion 3111c, it is located in front of the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112, which will be described later. It is provided in the part. As a result, a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the front recessed portion 3111e in the rear concave portion 3111e. As a result, diffuse reflection occurs between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear concave portion 3111e, and the light from the front brightens the portion of the rear concave portion 3111e. Thereby, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 are not made to emit light, the portions of the first light diffusing section 3112c and the second light diffusing section 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112, that is, the portions from the front, that is, The first decorative portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 that form the logo become brighter, and are easily visible from the front.

Further, the decorative body 3111 has a plurality of mounting bosses 3111f protruding rearward from the rear surface in a cylindrical shape. The mounting boss 3111f is for mounting the decorative body base 3115 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111. The mounting boss 3111f is provided directly behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c. This makes it difficult for the mounting boss 3111f to be seen from the front (player side) due to the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c. In other words, the third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided in a portion in front of the mounting boss 3111f, and the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting boss 3111f from the front.

[5-9d-3. Back decorative sheet of movable decorative body]
The decorative sheet 3112 is a thin sheet and has an outer shape that is substantially the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The decorative sheet 3112 is a transparent resin sheet having a pattern on its rear surface. The decorative sheet 3112 is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152, in a portion of the decorative body 3111 excluding the rear of the second decorative protrusion 3111b and in the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151. A first contour portion 3112a that is present, and a second contour portion 3112b that is provided between the second ornamental portion 3152 and the first ornamental protrusion portion 3111a that is double formed in the ornamental body 3111, A first light diffusing portion 3112c provided in a portion corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 and inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 (a portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c); The second light provided on the inside of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (the portion on the rear side of the third decorative protrusion 3111c) which is provided in the double of the decorative body 3111 corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152. And a diffusion portion 3112d.

In addition, the decorative sheet 3112 further includes a transparent transmissive portion 3112e provided at a position behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c in the decorative body 3111. Have

As shown in FIG. 149(b) and the like, the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a portion having a pattern simulating a cherry blossom smaller than the first decorative portion 3151, and the remaining portion is The hologram is used to display the interference fringes of light. The first contour portion 3112a is formed opaque. In the present embodiment, the hologram portion of the first contour portion 3112a has the same gold color as the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111. Further, the portion of the first contour portion 3112a that imitates a cherry blossom is white or pink (the pink in the present embodiment is the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). It is colored in accordance with (view). It should be noted that the ink (paint) used for the pattern or the like may be one having a glitter that is glittering in the form of particles.

The first contour portion 3112a is located outside and rearward of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front, and the metal is Since the decorative portion 3111d has a portion having the same color (gold in the present embodiment) as the decorative portion 3111d, it is possible to impart continuity to the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a and the metallic decorative portion 3111d. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the perspective between the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decoration portion 3111d, and it is possible to make it difficult to feel the thinness of the rear back movable decoration body 3110.

The first contour portion 3112a is formed in a light gray or white color on the rear surface side. This improves the coloring of the front pattern and hologram. Further, the light emitted from the light guide radiation plate 3113 to the front can be reflected backward and returned to the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light gray or white rear surface of the first contour portion 3112a. Since the plate 3113 can be made to emit light more brightly, it is possible to increase the amount of light radiated forward from the translucent portion of the decorative sheet 3112, and to make the back-back movable decorative body 3110 emit brighter light. In addition to the above, the decorative portion 3150 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 can be illuminated more uniformly.

Furthermore, since the first contour portion 3112a is provided outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the ornamental body 3111, it is flat on the rear surface of the ornamental body 3111 except for the rear concave portion 3111e. It is provided behind the site. As a result, the flat rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 comes into close contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a by the surface, so that light is emitted between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. The pattern or hologram of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen from the front through the transparent decorative body 3111 without being diffusely reflected.

The 2nd outline part 3112b of the decoration sheet 3112 is formed in the black linear shape of predetermined width, as shown in figure. The second contour portion 3112b is located behind the portion between the doubled first decorative protrusions 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 in the second decorative portion 3152. That is, since the black second contour portion 3112b is provided between the double-formed gold metal decoration portions 3111d, the black of the second contour portion 3112b enhances the double metal decoration portion 3111d. It is possible to further enhance the decorative effect of the metal decorative portion 3111d.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 has a light-transmitting property and is formed of a plurality of minute irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the first light diffusion portion 3112c is formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of ridges extending linearly in a short direction in a random direction. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 149(b), etc., in one petal of the cherry blossoms that is pruned by the first decorative portion 3151, the portion of the first light diffusing portion 3112c is from the center to the periphery of the petal. A predetermined color (this embodiment) according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the view of the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) so that the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) as it goes. Then, multiple dots of pink) are applied by printing. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 for emitting light from the rear to the first light diffusing section 3112c is caused to emit light, the pear skin pattern of the first light diffusing section 3112c causes a slight Since different shades appear, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the luminous decoration of the first decoration portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom.

The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 has a light-transmitting property and is formed of a plurality of minute irregularities capable of disturbing light. The second light diffusing section 3112d is provided on the entire inner side of the first decorative projection 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the second decorative sections 3152, as shown by the shaded areas in FIGS. 147 to 149. Has been. The second light diffusing unit 3112d has a light-transmitting property and is formed by a plurality of minute irregularities capable of disturbing light. The plurality of fine irregularities forming the second light diffusion portion 3112d are formed in a dot pattern at regular intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. The second light diffusing unit 3112d of the present embodiment is formed in a semitransparent milky white. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 for emitting light from the rear to the second light diffusing section 3112d is caused to emit light, a predetermined pattern is formed by the dot-like pattern of the second light diffusing section 3112d. It is possible to make the second decoration portion 3152 composed of the characters “E” emit light with a uniform brightness.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are provided behind the portion inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the decorative body 3111, and the rear surface of the portion of the decorative body 3111. Is provided with a rear recess 3111e which is recessed forward. Therefore, when the decorative sheet 3112 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, a gap is formed in the front surface at the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d due to the existence of the rear recessed portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111. It will be in the state of being. Due to the gap, the light irradiated from the front to the rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is diffusely reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear concave portion 3111e, and the light from the front causes the first light. The diffusion unit 3112c and the second light diffusion unit 3112d become bright. Thereby, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 are not made to emit light, the portions of the first light diffusing section 3112c and the second light diffusing section 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112, that is, the portions from the front, that is, The first decorative portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 that form the logo become brighter, and are easily visible from the front.

The decorative sheet 3112 has a predetermined pattern formed by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusing portion 3112c, and the second light diffusing portion 3112d. The rest of the portion 3150 excluding the decoration by the decorative body 3111 is configured. In the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment, the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusing portion 3112c, and the second light diffusing portion 3112d are provided on the rear surface side of the transparent sheet serving as the base. There is. The first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by printing. The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by attaching a predetermined light diffusing film (diffuser film). The first light diffusing section 3112c and the second light diffusing section 3112d may be lens films or prism films.

The transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed transparent. Since the transmissive portion 3112e is provided behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111, the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 emits light so that the light-transmitting radiation plate 3113 emits light. A part of the light emitted forward can be transmitted and applied to the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, in the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface side and the side surface remains transparent. Therefore, the first decorative protrusion 3111a is passed from the rear through the transparent portion 3112e. The light radiated to leaks to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Therefore, the light transmitted through the transmissive portion 3112e allows the player to see a luminescent decoration such that the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) is lit by the afterglow. Moreover, the first contour portion 3112a located outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be illuminated from the front by the light that has been transmitted through the transparent portion 3112e and emitted from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a to the outside. Therefore, the pattern or hologram provided on the first contour portion 3112a can be made more visible, and the decorative effect by the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily exhibited.

Since the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated by the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or hologram. It is possible to make the decoration of the rear rear movable decoration 3110 look large. Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 is not framed, and therefore the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 is moved to the appearance position. By displaying an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 on the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear, it is possible to show the player a feeling of unity, and the game can be played. It is possible to give the player a visual impact and draw attention to the player, to enjoy a large decoration, and to prevent a decrease in the player's interest.

Although the decorative sheet 3112 of the above-described embodiment shows the decorative body 3111 provided with the transparent transparent portion 3112e behind the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a), the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, the first contour portion 3112a may be provided also at a portion behind the metal decoration portion 3111d. Thus, when the back-back movable decorative body 3110 is viewed obliquely from the front, the rear can be seen through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 and the transparent transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decorative portion 3150 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 from being unattractive. In addition, by providing the first contour portion 3112a up to the rear portion of the metal decoration portion 3111d, the first decoration protrusion 3112a in the first contour portion 3112a passes through the transparent side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a in the decoration body 3111. Since the portion located behind the portion 3111a can be seen, the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be decorated by the portion of the first contour portion 3112a, and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be used. Even if it is provided only on the front surface of the portion 3111a, the decorative portion 3150 can be made to look good.

[5-9d-4. Light guide radiating plate with movable decoration behind the back]
As shown in FIG. 145, FIG. 146, etc., the light guide radiation plate 3113 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped main body part 3113a extending left and right, a flange part 3113b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body part 3113a, and a main body. The plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c that penetrate the portion 3113a in the front-rear direction and into which the first LEDs 3114a of the rear-rear decoration board 3114 are inserted, and the main body portion 3113a that penetrates in the front-rear direction A plurality of second LED accommodating portions 3113d into which the second LEDs 3114b are inserted, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided over substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, and a first LED accommodating portion on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. It has a leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the peripheral edge of 3113c, and an auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g provided along the rear end side of the leg portion 3113f on the side opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c. ..

The light guide radiation plate 3113 has a right slider front portion 3113h extending downward from the right end of the main body portion 3113a when viewed from the front.

The main body 3113a of the light guide/radiation plate 3113 has a flat front surface with which the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3112 abuts. The flange portion 3113b projects rearward about 1.5 times the thickness of the main body portion 3113a. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3113b has a rear end protruding rearward from the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 in a state of being assembled to the back-rear movable decoration body 3110.

The first LED accommodating portion 3113c has a rectangular inner peripheral shape. As shown in FIG. 148, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided behind the low transparency portion of the decorative portion 3150 when the back-back movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. More specifically, in the portion of the first decoration portion 3151, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided behind the portion of the first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decoration sheet 3112 in which the shade of pink color is dark. ing. More specifically, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c provided in the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is closer to the center side than the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the ornamental body 3111 in each of the five petals of the cherry blossoms. The center of the long side of the rectangular inner circumference is provided on the center line of the petal.

On the other hand, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c provided in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 are provided so as to be located behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112. Has been. For this reason, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c (first LEDs 3114a) are difficult to visually recognize from the front.

Further, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided in the portion of the second decoration portion 3152 so as to surround the outer periphery of the second decoration portion 3152. Further, when the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are close to each other to some extent, the first LED accommodating portions 3113c are connected to each other as shown in FIGS. 149(c) and 153(c). It is formed in the open state. By connecting the first LED accommodating portions 3113c that are close to each other, it is possible to prevent a portion of the main body portion 3113a that is thinner than its thickness from being formed, and damage the light guide radiation plate 3113. It can be difficult.

By the way, the first LED housing portion 3113c has a rectangular inner circumference and penetrates the body portion 3113a. Accordingly, when the light guided inside the body portion 3113a (within the plate thickness) in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the body portion 3113a reaches the first LED housing portion 3113c, Part of the light is reflected straight toward the inside of the main body portion 3113a by the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, and the rest passes through the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. It will be radiated|emitted inside 3113c. Then, when the light internally emitted from one of the four inner peripheral surfaces of the first LED housing portion 3113c reaches another surface of the inner peripheral surface, a part of the light is emitted from the first LED housing portion 3113c. The light is reflected inward and the rest is incident on the inside of the main body 3113a. That is, inside the main body part 3113a, when the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body part 3113a tries to pass through the first LED housing part 3113c, it is radiated to the inside of the first LED housing part 3113c. The light passing through the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is partially reflected by the inner peripheral surface portion and the inner peripheral surface portion of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that is incident on the main body portion 3113a side. The amount of light will be greatly reduced compared to before passing.

Therefore, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can block the light guided inside the main body portion 3113a in the direction along the surface of the main body portion 3113a. In addition, since the first LED 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 is housed inside the first LED housing portion 3113c, the light passing through the first LED housing portion 3113c may be blocked by the first LED 3114a. Therefore, in the portion where the first LED 3114a is stored, light does not pass to the side opposite to the first LED storage portion 3113c. Thus, by providing the first LED housing portion 3113c at the optimum position with respect to the outer peripheral shape of the second decorative portion 3152, the light from the first LED 3114a housed in the first LED housing portion 3113c is It is possible to prevent light emission decoration by being guided to another second decoration portion 3152, and it is possible to surely make only the desired second decoration portion 3152 of the plurality of second decoration portions 3152 emit light. ..

The operation of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c as described above will be described in more detail. For example, as shown in FIG. 153(c), a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 of “I”, “RO”, “HA”, and “☆” are provided. In order to perform light emission decoration, a first LED housing portion 3113c is provided on the outer circumference of each second decoration portion 3152, and light is emitted toward the inside of the second decoration portion 3152 in each first LED housing portion 3113c. As described above, the first LED 3114a is provided. In this embodiment, since the first LED accommodating portions 3113c provided between “I” and “RO” and between “RO” and “HA” are close to each other, they are connected to each other. It is one hole. As a result, in the body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, a thin portion that is easily damaged is not formed. Further, in this embodiment, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the first LED 3114a for illuminating and decorating the "☆" arranged below the "I" are provided below the "☆". Therefore, if the first LED 3114a for illuminating the "☆" is illuminated, the "i" provided above the "☆" may be illuminated, but it is provided at the upper left of the "☆". The first LED housing portion 3113c that houses the first LED 3114a for illuminating and decorating a part of the "i" is provided with the extending portion 3113j that extends so as to cover the upper part of "☆". ing. By this extending portion 3113j, it is possible to reduce (block) the light from the first LED 3114a for light emitting decoration of "☆" being guided to the "i" side. As a result, even if "☆" is illuminated, "I" is not illuminated. Further, it is possible to reduce (block) the light for illuminating and decorating the “i” guided to the “☆” side by the extending portion 3113j. Only the desired second decorative portion 3152 such as “I” or “☆” can be surely light-emitted and decorated, and the desired effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the second LED housing portion 3113d has a circular inner circumference. The plurality of second LED accommodating portions 3113d are provided behind the five circular portions simulating stamens provided around the center in the first decoration portion 3151 simulating a cherry blossom. More specifically, the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is provided behind each of the five petals that imitate a cherry blossom, behind a circular portion that imitates a stamen located on the center line of the petal. Thereby, in each of the five petals, one first LED housing portion 3113c and one second LED housing portion 3113d are provided on the center line of the petal.

The second LED accommodating portion 3113d has a circular inner circumference and penetrates the main body portion 3113a. Accordingly, when the light guided inside the main body portion 3113a (within the plate thickness) in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the main body portion 3113a reaches the second LED housing portion 3113d, A part of the light is reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the second LED accommodating portion 3113d so as to be fan-shaped diffused toward the inside of the main body portion 3113a. In this embodiment, in each of the five petals in the first decoration portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom, the second LED housing portion 3113d is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a, so that FIG. As shown, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the inside of the main body portion 3113a is reflected in a fan shape toward the first LED 3114a side by the circular inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing portion 3113d, and the reflection thereof. The light allows the petals to be illuminated and decorated brighter.

One of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e is formed in a quadrangular pyramid, and the reflecting portions 3113e are arranged in a row so as to be continuous vertically and horizontally. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e excludes a portion of the flange portion 3113b on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, a portion around the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, and a portion of the right slider front portion 3113h. It is formed on almost the entire surface. Within the plate thickness of the main body part 3113a, the plurality of reflecting parts 3113e can mainly reflect the light emitted in the direction along the plate surface to the front side and emit the light from the front surface of the main body part 3113a to the front side. The light guide radiation plate 3113 according to the present embodiment is formed so that it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side when viewed from the front side due to the presence of the plurality of reflection sections 3113e.

Further, since the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, it is possible to radiate light from substantially the entire front surface, so that the model is changed or the design is changed. Even if the design of the decorative portion 3150 by the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 is changed due to the change or the like, the light guide radiation plate 3113 does not need to be changed, and the design change or the like can be easily dealt with, and the cost can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

The leg portion 3113f projects rearward from the rear end side of the portion of the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c that faces the light emitting surface of the inserted first LED 3114a. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the leg portion 3113f has a surface on the first LED housing portion 3113c side provided on the same surface as the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. Thereby, the area of the light receiving portion 3113i for receiving the light emitted from the first LED 3114a into the main body portion 3113a can be increased, and more light from the first LED 3114a can be emitted into the main body portion 3113a. You can Further, the leg portion 3113f has a rear surface abutting the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 when assembled to the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, and a gap is formed between the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a and the back-rear decoration substrate 3114. Can be formed.

The auxiliary reflection portion 3113g is provided in a C-chamfered shape along the side of the rear end of the leg portion 3113f opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c. The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is for reflecting the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the leg portion 3113f to the front.

The right slider front portion 3113h cooperates with a later-described right slider rear portion 3115d of the ornament base 3115 to form a right slider 3117.

Since the light guide radiation plate 3113 of this embodiment covers the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 with the flange portion 3113b when assembled to the rear rear movable decorative body 3110, the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is covered with the flange portion 3113b. It is possible to make the surface difficult to see and prevent the appearance from being deteriorated. In addition, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has the flange portion 3113b that projects rearward from the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114, the light-guide and radiation plate 3113 can be removed from the back-and-back decorative substrate 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111. The creepage distance EL up to 3114 (copper foil 3114d or electronic component 3114e) can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the back rear decoration substrate 3114, and the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is damaged. It is possible to prevent that.

In the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are holes that penetrate the main body portion 3113a, so that the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. Heat from the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b housed in the second LED housing portion 3113d can be released to the front of the main body portion 3113a, and the heat effect on the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

Further, since the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are through holes, the front sides of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are closed by the decorative sheet 3112, the decorative body 3111, and the like. Even if it is formed, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are compared with the case where the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are formed in a bottomed concave shape (groove shape). The volume (heat capacity) of the 3113d can be increased. As a result, a rapid temperature rise due to heat from the housed first LED 3114a or second LED 3114b can be mitigated, and the thermal influence on the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 and the like can be suppressed. Further, in the first LED housing portion 3113c that is close to and connected to each other and the first LED housing portion 3113c that has the extending portion 3113j, the volume of the first LED housing portion 3113c is large, For the same reason as above, more heat from the first LED 3114a can be dissipated, and abrupt temperature rise can be further alleviated.

In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a first LED accommodating portion 3113c and a second LED accommodating portion 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a approaches the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 as much as possible. It is possible to reduce the thickness of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction.

Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f is brought into contact with the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114. A gap can be formed between the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a and the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114. This allows heat to escape from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration board 3114 through the gap, and suppresses the temperature rise in the back-rear decoration board 3114 to affect the heat. Can be reduced. The gap between the body portion 3113a and the substrate body 3114c of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is defined as "half the distance from the front surface of the substrate body 3114c to the light emitting portion of the first LED 3114a" to "the front surface of the substrate body 3114c. It is desirable to be within the range of "distance to the front surface of one LED 3114a". This is because if the gap is smaller than this, there is a possibility that heat cannot be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the back rear decorative substrate 3114. Further, if the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident from the first LED 3114a into the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 decreases, so that the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because it may not be possible to decorate them.

In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 guides light from the first LEDs 3114a mounted at a plurality of predetermined positions of the rear back decoration substrate 3114, and the front of the main body portion 3113a is substantially entirely covered by the reflection portion 3113e. Therefore, the light from the first LED 3114a can be radiated forward even in a portion of the main body portion 3113a where the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 is not provided. In other words, even if the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 is smaller than the size of the main body part 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface of the main body part 3113a. Therefore, the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 can be made smaller than the main body portion 3113a, so that the distance between the outer periphery of the main body portion 3113a and the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 can be made longer, and the decoration body 3111 can be made longer. The creepage distance EL from the front metal decoration portion 3111d can be made longer to facilitate the above-described effects.

[5-9d-5. Back decorative board of movable back decoration]
On the surface (front surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114, a plurality of surface-mounting side-view type first LEDs 3114a, a plurality of surface-mounting type top-view type second LEDs 3114b, and a surface-mounting type 3114g (in FIG. 155(a), one surface-mounting type connector 3114g is arranged on the right side of the front surface (front surface) of the back rear decorative substrate 3114). Each of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the plurality of second LEDs 3114b is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white), and the connector 3114g has a white housing (natural color). It is also said that it is made of resin that is recognized as the same color as white (natural color). An electronic component 3114e (see FIG. 155(b)) such as an LED driver IC or a resistor is mounted on the back surface (rear surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114. Further, the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 has a plate-shaped substrate body 3114c, and a copper foil 3114d (FIG. 154 etc.) respectively.

In addition, on the surface (front surface) of the rear back decoration substrate 3114, the first LED 3114a (surface mounting type), the second LED 3114b (surface mounting type), and the connector 3114g (surface mounting) are the surfaces (front surface) of the substrate body 3114c. Type) A white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to be soldered (hereinafter simply referred to as "solid white resist"). In some cases, a white resist layer is formed. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back-and-rear decoration substrate 3114, pads, through holes, lands, etc. to be soldered are formed on the back surface (rear surface) of the substrate main body 3114c and where the electronic component 3114e (surface mounting type) is mounted. A white resist layer is formed of the solid white resist in the entire area except the above. Further, although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114, the front-side electronic components are mounted in the vicinity of the front-side electronic components such as the mounted first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the connector 3114g. Of the front side electronic parts such as the part number of the front side electronic parts, the area indicating the position where the front side electronic parts are arranged (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic parts, the size of the front side electronic parts, the mounting direction of the front side electronic parts (mounting) Direction), and may include the type of electronic component on the front side.) is printed on the white resist that is solid-painted with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. It is printed by. Although illustration is omitted, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114, the part number of the back-side electronic component and the position where the back-side electronic component is arranged are shown in the vicinity of the back-side electronic component such as the electronic component 3114e. The attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. .) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous to white.

Here, the reason why white color is used as the resist liquid and yellow color is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is noticeable when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (rear side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. While the notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface is When the side notation part (reverse side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow backside notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 produces a glittering light emission by the illumination by the light emitting units such as the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are as described above. In addition, it is a full-color LED capable of multicolor light emission, and its light emission mode is variously changed by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, on the surface (front surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114, as described above, the pad (the front surface) of the substrate body 3114c to which the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the connector 3114g are soldered, A white resist formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area except for through holes, lands, etc. (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid-coated white resist"). A layer is formed, and further, the surface side notation portion that enables identification of a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is printed on this solid white resist by silk-printing with a yellow paint, thereby providing a multicolor emission. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side notation part inconspicuous with the white resist when the possible full-color LED is turned off, further, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned on (when emitting light). , A solid white resist having a high reflectance and a front side notation printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to the white reflectance are combined to form the surface of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 (front surface). It is possible to maintain a high reflectance.

If yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow color printed by silk printing may become pale yellow or dark yellow due to variations in the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a wide range of yellow (yellow on the bright side and yellow on the dark side). Even if you specify yellow, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

The back rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape that is substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a gap between the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 and the flange portion 3113b that is slightly larger than the thickness of the flange portion 3113b, The size is formed so as to be substantially constant. Further, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape that is substantially along the inner circumference of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 described later, and a slight gap is substantially formed between the outer circumference and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3115b. It is formed to have a uniform size. That is, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is formed to have a size to be housed inside the flange portion 3115b of the ornament base 3115.

In the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, as shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 is located on the center line of each of the five petals that imitate a cherry blossom. The light is provided toward the center of the flower near the tip inside the (metal decoration 3111d). As a result, the first LED 3114a in the portion of the first decoration portion 3151 can light-emit each of the five petals that imitate a cherry blossom.

In addition, at the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, the first decorative protrusions that are doubled in the decorative body 3111 are provided in each of the second decorative portions 3152 that are arranged in the left and right. It is provided so that light is irradiated toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152 near the rear of 3111a. Accordingly, the first LEDs 3114a in the portion of the second decoration portion 3152 can cause the plurality of second decoration portions 3152 arranged in the left and right to emit light one by one.

As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the plurality of second LEDs 3114b is a circular portion simulating a stamen located on the center line of the five petals in the central portion simulating a cherry blossom in the first decoration portion 3151. It is provided at the rear. That is, the second LED 3114b is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a corresponding to one petal of the first ornamental portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom. Thus, the second LED 3114b can light-embellish each of the five parts of the first decoration portion 3151 that imitate a stamen in the central portion.

Since the second LED 3114b is a top-view type capable of irradiating light toward the front, when the second LED 3114b is caused to emit light, a portion imitating a stamen in the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is made to be closer than other portions. Can also emit light with high brightness, which can attract the player's attention. Therefore, in the light-emission decoration of the decoration portion 3150, a portion where the first LED 3114a emits light in a plane shape and a portion where the second LED 3114b emits light in a dot shape can be provided. A variety of light emitting effects can be performed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired.

The substrate body 3114c is a rigid substrate having a thickness slightly smaller than that of the body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The substrate main body 3114c of this embodiment uses a glass composite base material.

The copper foil 3114d is provided on substantially the entire front and rear surfaces of the substrate body 3114c. The copper foil 3114d is formed to have a predetermined thickness (18 μm to 70 μm), and forms a circuit pattern by etching (hatched portion in FIG. 154). As shown in FIG. 154, the copper foil 3114d is provided at a position where the outer peripheral edge is inwardly separated from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL (0.5 mm to 3 mm) (SL=1 mm in the present embodiment). ing. By this predetermined distance SL, a creeping distance EL or a space distance from a conductive member (for example, a metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111) outside the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 to the copper foil 3114d is gained, and discharge of static electricity or the like occurs. The insulating property against short circuit can be enhanced, and the damage to the rear back decoration substrate 3114 due to discharge or the like can be suppressed.

In addition, the outer peripheral edge of the copper foil 3114d is provided up to a portion within a predetermined distance from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate body 3114c regardless of the presence or absence of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, and the area of the copper foil 3114d. Is as wide as possible. Thereby, by transmitting a part of the heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e to the copper foil 3114d, the copper foil 3114d can radiate heat, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. , And the electronic component 3114e can be enhanced in cooling effect to prevent damage due to heat.

In addition, the rear decorative board 3114 has a predetermined area on the light emitting surface side of the side-view type first LED 3114a on the front side so that light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the board body 3114c side can be easily reflected forward. The light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is provided (region surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 154). As shown in FIGS. 151 and 153(a), the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of this embodiment is not provided with the copper foil 3114d. As a result, the front surface of the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f becomes lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted, and therefore, compared with the case where the copper foil 3114d is provided in the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f. The angle of the light emitted from one LED 3114a into the light reflection assisting region 3114f approaches an angle perpendicular to the vertical line on the front surface of the substrate body 3114c, and makes it easier to reflect the light emitted to the substrate body 3114c side forward. You can

Further, as shown in FIG. 153(a) and the like, after the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is fixed. Since they are in contact with each other, the leg portion 3113f can be lengthened rearward by the thickness of the copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the light receiving portion 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a can be enlarged, and the light (the amount of light) emitted forward from the light guide emission plate 3113 is increased to allow the back and rear movable ornament 3110 (the ornament 3111). And the decorative sheet 3112) can be made to be brighter and lighter.

In addition, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is brought into contact with the inside of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f (see FIG. 153(a) and the like). As a result, even if the white coating film (white resist) applied to the surface due to the contact of the leg portions 3113f is worn or rolled up, the front surface of the substrate body 3114c is only exposed and the copper foil 3114d is exposed. There is nothing to do. Therefore, the insulation of the copper foil 3114d is lowered due to the exposure, and damage due to a short circuit such as static electricity can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 150, etc., the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 of this embodiment is assembled into a back-and-back movable decorative body 3110, so that a flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, which will be described later, and a flange portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113 will be described. Since 3113b and the outer periphery are doubly surrounded, it is difficult to see the outer peripheral surface from the outside, and deterioration of appearance is prevented. Further, in the state where the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is assembled to the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the outer periphery of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 with a certain gap. Further, the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 is inserted from the rear into the gap between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and is also surrounded by the flange portion 3115b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 is the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Since it meanders so as to wrap around, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the rear back decoration substrate 3114, and the rear back decoration substrate 3114 is damaged. It can be prevented. In the present embodiment, the creepage distance EL is set to a distance that can cope with a discharge voltage of 10 mm or more, or 10 kV.

Further, since the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the member provided behind the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 by the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 (in the present embodiment, The light from the effect display device 1600) can be blocked. This can prevent the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 from being irradiated with light from the effect display device 1600 and the like provided in the rear, so that the decorative portion 3150 can be illuminated and decorated in an unintended state. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of light emission, and it is possible to surely cause the rear-back movable decoration body 3110 to perform a desired light emission effect. Further, since the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 can prevent the rear from being seen through the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the back-rear movable decoration can be seen. It is possible to suppress deterioration of the appearance of the body 3110.

In addition, the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided with only the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, which are housed from the rear side with respect to the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d of the light guide radiation plate 3113, on the front surface. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 approaches the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a as much as possible. It is possible to reduce the thickness of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction.

Further, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 has an electronic component 3114e such as an LED driver IC and a resistor mounted on the rear surface. Since the LED driver IC, the resistor, and the like as the electronic component 3114e are generally black components, by providing the electronic component 3114e on the rear surface of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114, the black electronic component 3114e cannot be seen from the front. It is possible to improve the appearance of the back and rear movable ornament 3110. Further, since the black electronic component 3114e is provided on the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 which cannot be seen from the front side, it is not necessary to apply a paint of a color such as white for making the electronic component 3114e difficult to see, It is possible to reduce the cost of the rear back decoration substrate 3114.

[5-9d-6. Back base of movable decorative body]
The ornament base 3115 is entirely transparent. The decorative body base 3115 penetrates the flat cover plate 3115a that covers the rear side of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114, the flange 3115b protruding forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover plate 3115a, and the cover plate 3115a. A plurality of opening portions 3115c, and a right slider rear portion 3115d extending downward from the right end of the cover plate portion 3115a in front view.

The cover plate portion 3115a has an outer peripheral shape that is substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a slight gap is formed substantially constant between the outer peripheral shape and the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b. It is formed into a size. That is, the cover plate portion 3115a (decoration body base 3115) is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the back side of the back decoration board 3114 is covered by the covering plate portion 3115a, it is possible to protect the back decoration board 3114 by preventing other members from coming into contact with the back decoration board 3114 from behind. Therefore, it is possible to prevent breakage of the rear back decoration substrate 3114.

As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3115b enters the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114, and is located in front of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 at the front end. Is protruding so that it is located. The flange portion 3115b is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114, and makes the outer peripheral surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 difficult to see from the outside to improve the appearance. Further, since the flange portion 3115b is inserted in the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 when assembled to the back and rear movable decoration body 3110, The shortest route from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 can be meandered around the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Out. Therefore, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from flowing to the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 and damaging the back-rear decoration substrate 3114.

The plurality of openings 3115c have a slit-shaped portion that is long in the left and right and a portion that is open larger than the slit-shaped portion. With the plurality of openings 3115c, heat from the electronic component 3114e mounted on the rear surface of the back-rear decoration board 3114 can be released to the outside of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, and the heat effect on the back-rear decoration board 3114 can be affected. Can be reduced.

The right slider rear portion 3115d cooperates with the right slider front portion 3113h of the light guide radiation plate 3113 to configure the right slider 3117.

Further, the decorative body base 3115 has a plurality of protrusions 3115e slightly protruding from the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a. The plurality of protrusions 3115e are arranged so as to abut on a portion of the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 near the outer peripheral edge where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. The plurality of protrusions 3115e can form a gap between the rear surface of the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a by bringing the rear surface of the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 into contact with the front surface thereof. .. This makes it easier to dissipate heat from the electronic component 3114e through the gap between the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a.

[5-9d-7. Main functions and effects of the back-back movable decoration]
Subsequently, main operation effects of the back rear movable decoration body 3110 in the present embodiment will be described. The back-back movable decorative body 3110 of this embodiment has the decorative sheet 3112 sandwiched between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the front surface of the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decorative body 3113. It is assembled by attaching the attachment boss 3111f of the ornamental body 3111 to the ornamental body base 3115 while sandwiching the back rear decorative substrate 3114 with the base 3115 (see FIG. 143 and the like). As a result, the thickness of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction is relatively thin.

The back rear movable decoration body 3110 has a transparent plate-shaped decoration body 3111, a first decoration protrusion 3111a, a second decoration protrusion 3111b, and a third decoration protrusion 3111c protruding forward, and Since the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first contour portion 3112a provided with the hologram on which the picture pattern and the interference fringes of light are displayed, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear back movable decorative body 3110 is different from the decorative portion 3150. The three-dimensional effect can be imparted by the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the lens effect by the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. With the hologram, a sense of depth can be added. As a result, even if the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 is thin in the front-rear direction, the player does not feel the thinness, and the decorative effect of the decorative portion 3150 of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 is sufficient. It can be shown to entertain the player.

Further, as described above, the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the second decoration protrusion 3111b, the third decoration protrusion 3111c, the first contour portion 3112a, and the like can give a stereoscopic effect and a sense of depth. The back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 can be made thinner in the front-rear direction. As a result, the space required for installing the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom in arranging the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 can be increased, and a more effective portion inside the game board 5 can be provided. It is possible to provide the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back to facilitate the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player. Further, since the back and rear movable decoration body 3110 can be thinned, it is possible to relatively easily secure a space for arranging another decoration body. Therefore, by providing another decoration body, It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that looks good, and a pachinko machine 1 that can enjoy a variety of effects, and to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players and can be further differentiated. can do.

The rear back movable ornament 3110 has a metal ornament 3111d made of metal foil on the front of the first ornament protrusion 3111a of the ornament 3111 forming the outer periphery of the first ornament 3151 and the second ornament 3152. Therefore, the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 can be made conspicuous due to the metallic luster of the metallic decorative portion 3111d, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Further, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, it is possible to give a stereoscopic effect to the metal decoration portion 3111d and a high-class feeling. As a result, when the back and rear movable decoration body 3110 moves from the retracted position, which is invisible to the player, to the visible position, the high-quality decorative portion 3150 can be seen, which gives the player a premium feeling. Since it is possible to give the player, it is possible to strongly inspire the player to think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 flat and the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the outer circumference of the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or hologram is used. It is possible to decorate the outer peripheral edge of the ornamental body 3111 and to make the ornament of the back rear movable ornamental body 3110 look large. In addition, since the back-back movable decoration 3110 has the decoration sheet 3112 having substantially the same size as that of the decoration 3111, the decoration of the back-back movable decoration 3110 is in a state in which the decoration is not framed. When the body 3110 is moved to the appearance position, the effect display device 1600 provided on the rear side displays an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back-back movable decoration object 3110, thereby creating an effect with a sense of unity. It is possible to show the game to a player and give the player a visual impact, thereby making it possible to entertain a large decoration and suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

Further, since the back-back movable decorative body 3110 is provided with the first LED 3114a at a position behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112, the metal decorative portion 3111d and the first decorative LED 3114a are provided. The two contour portions 3112b can make the first LED 3114a difficult to see from the front, and can suppress the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 from being deteriorated and sufficiently exert the decorative effect.

Furthermore, since the back rear movable decoration 3110 is provided with the plurality of first LEDs 3114a so as to surround the outer circumference of each of the first decoration 3151 and the plurality of second decorations 3152, the first decoration 3151 is provided. Alternatively, the second decorative portion 3152 can be individually light-emittered. Accordingly, it is possible to sequentially light-emit a plurality of second decoration portions 3152 arranged in a row on the left and right, or to light-emit only a specific first decoration portion 3151 or second decoration portion 3152. By appropriately decorating the first decoration portion 3151 and the plurality of second decoration portions 3152 with light emission, a variety of light emission effects can be shown to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

In addition, the back-back movable decorative body 3110 is lit by the first LED 3114a of the side-view type within the thickness of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and then radiated in a direction along the surface thereof. Since the light is emitted forward by the reflecting portion 3113e of the above so that the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 are illuminated and decorated, the light from the first LED is emitted forward from the front surface of the light guide emission plate 3113. The distance to can be increased. Accordingly, the light from the first LED can be sufficiently diffused and emitted forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113. Therefore, even if the back-back movable decorative body 3110 has a small thickness in the front-rear direction, the decorative body 3111. Also, the decorative sheet 3112 can be uniformly light-emitting decorated, and the player can be entertained with a good-looking light-emitting decoration. Further, since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be uniformly illuminated and decorated by the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the first LED 3114a of the side view type, the thickness of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further increased. The pachinko machine 1 that can be made thin and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Further, since the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is configured to use the first LED 3114a as the side-view type for planar light emission and the second LED 3114b is the top-view type, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (the decoration portion 3150). In the light emission decoration (light emission effect) of (1), it is possible to add a portion that emits light in a dot shape with high brightness by the second LED 3114b to a portion that is light-emitting decorated in a planar shape by the first LED 3114a. As a result, the light emission effect can be sharpened by the light emission of the second LED 3114b, so that it is possible to easily present the optimum light emission effect according to the game state, and it is possible to entertain the player more and to play the game. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player.

In addition, the back and rear movable decoration body 3110 is provided with a first LED housing portion 3113c into which the side-view type first LED 3114a is inserted in the light guide radiation plate 3113, and light reception on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. The portion 3113i is irradiated with the light from the first LED 3114a so that the light is incident on the inside of the main body portion 3113a. Thus, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at a position close to a desired portion that is desired to be illuminated and decorated by the first LED 3114a, it is possible to brightly decorate the desired portion with brighter light, and a more dramatic effect. It is possible to entertain high-luminous decorations to the player.

Further, the back rear movable decoration body 3110 includes a first LED housing portion 3113c and a second LED housing 3113c in which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the back rear decoration substrate 3114 are inserted into the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the rear side. Since the housing portion 3113d is included, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a can be changed to the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d. Can be made as close as possible to the back rear movable decorative body 3110, and the thickness in the front-back direction can be made thinner.

In addition, in the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 abuts on the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 so that the main body portion 3113a and the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 are separated from each other. Since a gap is formed in the back side, the heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 can be released through the gap, and It is possible to suppress the temperature rise and reduce the influence of heat. In addition, the gap between the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the substrate main body 3114c of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is defined as "half the distance from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the light emitting portion of the first LED 3114a" to the "substrate". The distance from the front surface of the main body 3114c to the front surface of the first LED 3114a" is desirable. This is because if the gap is smaller than this, there is a possibility that heat cannot be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the back rear decorative substrate 3114. Further, if the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident from the first LED 3114a into the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 decreases, so that the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because it may not be possible to decorate them.

In addition, the back rear movable decoration body 3110 can form a gap between the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the back rear decoration substrate 3114 by the leg portions 3113f, and a plurality of openings are formed in the decoration base 3115. Since it has the portion 3115c, by raising and lowering the back rear movable decoration body 3110, the surface of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 can be ventilated through the gap and the opening 3115c, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, Also, heat from the electronic component 3114e and the like can be released to suppress the temperature rise of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114.

It should be noted that a temperature sensor is provided in the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, and when the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (back-rear decoration substrate 3114) becomes higher than a predetermined temperature, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 moves up and down. The frequency (probability) at which is executed may be increased. As a result, the rear back movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down, so that the surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be ventilated, and the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be cooled and the occurrence of defects due to heat can be suppressed.

Further, in the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the outer periphery of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is surrounded from the rear side by the flange portion 3115b of the decoration body base 3115, and the outer periphery of the flange portion 3115b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is formed. It is surrounded by a flange portion 3113b. Accordingly, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the metal foil provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is guided and radiated by the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Since it meanders so as to wrap around the flange portion 3113b of the plate 3113, a long creepage distance EL can be obtained, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the back rear decoration substrate 3114, and the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is formed. It is possible to prevent the 3114 from being damaged.

Further, since the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 is configured such that the copper foil 3114d forming the circuit is provided in the back-and-back decoration substrate 3114 at a position separated from the outer periphery of the substrate body 3114c by the predetermined distance SL inside. The predetermined distance SL can also increase the creepage distance EL and the spatial distance, enhance the insulating property against discharge of static electricity and the like, and prevent damage to the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 due to discharge or the like.

In addition, in the back-back movable decoration body 3110, the metal decoration portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decoration body 3111 is provided only on the front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, and is provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a. Not not. As a result, the creepage distance EL to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be increased by the length of the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the same operational effect as described above can be achieved. Further, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the area of the metal decoration portion 3111d is smaller than that when the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a. The size can be reduced, and the amount of static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be reduced. Therefore, since the discharge voltage can be lowered, even if a discharge occurs on the back-back decorative substrate 3114, its influence can be reduced.

By the way, as described above, the back rear movable decoration body 3110 is moved up and down (moved) between the retracted position moved upward and the appearance position moved downward by the driving of the back rear drive motor 3126. Therefore, friction is generated in the left slider 3116, the right slider 3117, and the like each time the body is moved up and down, and static electricity generated by the friction is likely to be accumulated on the surface of the back rear movable decoration body 3110. Since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative body base 3115 forming the surface of the movable back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 are formed of synthetic resin having low conductivity, even if a large amount of static electricity is accumulated, the surface of the movable body 3110 and the decorative body base 3115 is reduced. Static electricity accumulated in the whole is difficult to be discharged at once. On the other hand, since the metal decoration part 3111d made of the metal foil of the decoration body 3111 has high conductivity, static electricity accumulated on the entire surface of the metal decoration part 3111d is easily discharged at once. For this reason, in the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 of this embodiment, static electricity is easily accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111. Since the creepage distance EL to the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is sufficiently long, the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is not damaged by electrostatic discharge, and the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 moves up and down. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which both the light emitting effect in which the 3110 is light-emitted and decorated is entertained.

In addition, when the area of the metal decoration part 3111d where static electricity is accumulated is a predetermined value or more (for example, 100 cm2 or more), it is desirable to connect the metal decoration part 3111d to GND (ground). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from being discharged to the back decoration board 3114.

[5-9d-8. Another Embodiment of Back-Movable Decorative Body]
Next, mainly with reference to FIG. 157, regarding the back-rear movable decoration body 3160, the back-rear movable decoration body 3170, the back-rear movable decoration body 3180, and the like of an embodiment different from the above-mentioned back-rear movable decoration body 3110. The details will be described. FIG. 157(a) is an explanatory view showing in cross section the configuration of a rear-rear movable ornament different from the rear-rear movable ornament of FIG. 142, and FIG. 157(b) is a rear-rear movable ornament of the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a decorative body by a cross section, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the back back movable decoration body of 4th embodiment in a cross section.

As shown schematically in FIG. 157(a), the back-and-back movable decorative body 3160 of the second embodiment is provided on the front side with the decorative body 3161 and the rear side of the decorative body 3161. A sheet-shaped decoration sheet 3162 on which a predetermined decoration is applied, a light guide radiation plate 3163 provided on the rear side of the decoration sheet 3162 for radiating light in a direction along the front surface inside, and a light guide radiation plate. A rear-rear decoration substrate 3164 having a plurality of LEDs 3164a for irradiating light inside the 3163 in a direction along the front surface is mounted on the front surface.

The decorative body 3161 of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3160 includes a transparent plate-shaped main body portion 3161a, a flange portion 3161b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3161a, and a metal provided on the front surface of the main body portion 3161a. And a decorative portion 3161c. The main body portion 3161a may be flat or may be provided with relief-like decoration having irregularities. The metal decoration part 3161c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body part 3161a and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decoration portion 3161c may be formed by foil stamping, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

The decoration sheet 3162 is a transparent sheet on which a predetermined decoration (design) is printed. In this decorative sheet 3162, a low transparency portion of the decoration is located in front of the LED 3164a of the back rear decorative substrate 3164 (not shown). This makes it difficult to see the LED 3164a from the front. The decorative sheet 3162 is formed in a size smaller than the inner peripheral shape of the flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161.

The light guide radiation plate 3163 is formed in a flat plate shape having the same size as the decorative sheet 3162, and has an LED housing portion 3163a into which the LED 3164a of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3164 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of LEDs provided on the rear surface. And a reflecting portion 3163b. The LED housing portion 3163a is a hole that penetrates the light guide radiation plate 3163 in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference thereof is formed in a quadrangle along the outer circumference of the LED 3164a. Each of the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b is recessed forward in a triangular cross section, and is provided only in a predetermined portion. Each of the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b is provided so as to reflect the light from the determined LED housing portion 3163a forward, and is arranged in a concentric fan shape centered on the determined LED housing portion 3163a. .. That is, the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. It should be noted that the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b may be configured to be able to reflect light from an unspecified direction to the front, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 described above. It may be provided, or may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

The back rear decorative substrate 3164 is formed in the same size as the decorative sheet 3162 and the light guide radiation plate 3163. The rear rear decoration substrate 3164 has a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3164a, which are inserted from the rear in the LED housing portion 3163a of the light guide radiation plate 3163, mounted on the front surface. Although not shown, the rear back decorative substrate 3164 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front surface and the rear surface thereof at a position inside the outer periphery of the rear rear decorative substrate 3164 by a predetermined distance SL. In addition, a white coating film made of a white resist is formed on the front surface (both sides) of the back rear decorative substrate 3164.

In the assembled state, the back-back movable decorative body 3160 of this embodiment has the decorative sheet 3162 abutting on the rear surface of the main body portion 3161a of the decorative body 3161 and the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163 on the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3162. And the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3164 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163. As a result, the back-and-back movable decorative body 3160 is thin in the front-rear direction. The flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3164. As a result, in the back-and-back movable decoration body 3160, the outer peripheries of the decorative sheet 3162, the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the back-and-back decoration substrate 3164 are covered with the flange portion 3161b, which makes them difficult to see from the outside. And it looks good.

Since the rear back movable decoration body 3160 has a flange portion 3161b extending rearward from the body portion 3161a of the decoration body 3161 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back rear decoration substrate 3164, a metal decoration portion on the front surface of the body portion 3161a. The creepage distance EL from the 3161c to the back rear decoration substrate 3164 (copper foil thereof) can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3161c flows to the back rear decoration substrate 3164 to allow the back decoration. It is possible to prevent the substrate 3164 from being damaged.

As described above, according to the back-and-back movable decoration body 3160 of the present embodiment, the same operational effect as the above-mentioned back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 can be obtained. In addition, in the back rear movable decoration body 3160, a decoration base that covers the rear side of the back rear decoration substrate 3164 may be provided.

Subsequently, the back rear movable decoration body 3170 of the third embodiment, as schematically shown in FIG. 157(b), is an outer decoration body 3171 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decoration body 3171 (frame A light-transmissive flat plate-shaped inner decorative body 3172 that closes the inside), and a light guide radiating plate 3173 that is provided behind the inner decorative body 3172 and radiates light in a direction along the entire surface inside in the forward direction. A rear-rear decoration substrate 3174 having a plurality of LEDs 3174a for irradiating the inside of the light guide radiation plate 3173 with light in a direction along the front surface mounted on the front surface.

The outer decorative body 3171 of the back-back movable decorative body 3170 includes a frame-shaped main body portion 3171a extending in the front-rear direction, a support portion 3171b protruding inward from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 3171a, and a main body portion 3171a. And a metal decoration portion 3171c provided on the front surface of the. The distance from the front end of the main body portion 3171a to the front surface of the support portion 3171b is the same as the thickness of the inner decorative body 3172 in the front-rear direction. The metal decoration part 3171c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body part 3171a and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3171c may be formed by foil stamping, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

Although not shown, the inner decoration body 3172 is provided with a relief-like decoration having unevenness. The inner decoration 3172 is attached so as to close the front opening of the frame-shaped outer decoration 3171.

The light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner decorative body 3172. The light guide radiation plate 3173 is inserted into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171, and the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The light guide radiating plate 3173 has an LED housing portion 3173a into which the LED 3174a of the back rear decorative substrate 3174 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of reflecting portions 3173b provided on the rear surface. The LED housing portion 3173a is a hole that penetrates the light guide radiation plate 3173 in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference is formed in a quadrangle along the outer circumference of the LED 3174a. The reflecting portion 3173b extends in an arc shape around the determined LED housing portion 3173a, and is provided in a plurality of concentric circles. The reflecting portion 3173b has a triangular cross section. The plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are provided so as to reflect the light from the respective LED housing portions 3173a, which are individually determined, to the front. That is, the plurality of reflectors 3173b are formed so as to strongly reflect the light from a specific direction forward. Note that the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b may be configured to be able to reflect light from an unspecified direction to the front, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 described above. It may be provided, or may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

The back rear decorative substrate 3174 is formed in the same size as the light guide radiation plate 3173. The back rear decorative substrate 3174 has a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3174a, which are inserted from the rear in the LED housing portion 3173a of the light guide radiation plate 3173, mounted on the front surface. Although not shown in the figure, the back rear decorative substrate 3174 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front surface and the rear surface thereof at a portion inside the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3174 by a predetermined distance SL. In addition, a white coating film made of a white resist is formed on the front surface (both sides) of the back rear decorative substrate 3174.

In the assembled state of the back-back movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment, the inner decorative body 3172 is fitted in the frame of the outer decorative body 3171 from the front side, and the front surface of the outer decorative body 3171 and the front surface of the inner decorative body 3172. And the outer periphery of the rear surface of the inner decoration body 3172 are in contact with the front surface of the support portion 3171b. Further, in the back-rear movable decoration body 3170, the light guide radiation plate 3173 and the back-rear decoration board 3174 are inserted from the rear in the frame of the outer decoration body 3171, and the light guide radiation plate 3173 of the light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed on the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. Around the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact, and the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3174 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173. As a result, the back-and-back movable decorative body 3170 is thin in the front-rear direction. In the back-back movable decorative body 3170, a gap having the thickness of the supporting portion 3171b is formed between the inner decorative body 3172 and the light guide radiation plate 3173.

The main body portion 3171a of the outer decorative body 3171 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3174. In this back-and-back movable decoration body 3160, the outer peripheries of the inner decoration body 3172, the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the back-and-back decoration board 3174 are covered by the main body portion 3171a of the outer decoration body 3171, and their outer peripheral surfaces are externally exposed. To make it hard to see and to make it look good.

The back-and-back movable decoration body 3170 covers the outer periphery of the back-and-back decoration substrate 3174 by the main body portion 3171a extending rearward of the outer decoration body 3171. Therefore, from the metal decoration portion 3171c on the front surface of the main body portion 3171a. The creepage distance EL to (the copper foil of) the back rear decoration substrate 3174 can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3171c flows to the back rear decoration substrate 3174, and the back rear decoration substrate 3174. Can be prevented from being damaged.

As described above, according to the back-and-back movable decoration body 3170 of the present embodiment, the same operational effect as the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 can be obtained. Note that a metal decoration portion may be provided on the front surface of the inner decoration body 3172. Further, in the back-rear movable decoration body 3170, a decoration base that covers the rear side of the back-rear decoration substrate 3174 may be provided.

Subsequently, the back and rear movable decorative body 3180 of the fourth embodiment, as schematically shown in FIG. 157(c), has an outer decorative body 3181 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decorative body 3181 (frame A rear decorative board 3183 having a light-transmitting inner decoration body 3182 that closes the inside) and a plurality of LEDs 3183a that are provided behind the inner decoration body 3182 and can emit light to the front side are mounted on the front surface. And are equipped with.

The outer decorative body 3181 of the back-back movable decorative body 3180 includes a flat plate frame-shaped main body portion 3181a, a flange portion 3181b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the main body portion 3181a, and the entire surface of the main body portion 3181a and the flange portion 3181b. And a metal decoration portion 3181c which covers. The metal decoration portion 3181c is provided on the entire surface of the outer decoration body 3181. The metal decoration portion 3181c may be formed by plating or may be formed by vapor deposition.

The inner decoration body 3182 is formed of a transparent member. The inner decorative body 3182 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 3182a whose outer shape is larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped main body portion 3181a of the outer decoration body 3181 and smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3181b, and rearward from the outer circumference of the main body portion 3182a. And a flange portion 3182b extending to the. Although not shown, the main body 3182a is provided with a relief-like decoration having irregularities on substantially the entire surface.

The back rear decorative substrate 3183 is formed such that the outer shape is smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182. That is, the back rear decorative substrate 3183 is formed in such a size that a gap having a predetermined distance or more is formed between the outer circumference and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182. A plurality of top-view type LEDs 3183a are mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3183. Although not shown in the figure, the back rear decorative substrate 3183 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front surface and the rear surface at a position inside the back rear decorative substrate 3183 by a predetermined distance SL. Further, a white coating film made of a white resist is formed on the front surface (both sides) of the back rear decorative substrate 3183.

In the assembled state of the back rear movable decoration body 3180 of this embodiment, the inner decoration body 3182 and the back rear decoration substrate 3183 are inserted from the rear into the frame of the frame-shaped outer decoration body 3181. In the back-back movable decoration body 3180, the front surface near the outer periphery of the inner decoration body 3182 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body 3181a of the outer decoration body 3181, and the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182 is connected to the outer decoration body 3181. It extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the flange portion 3181b. That is, the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration body 3181 is covered with the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182. In other words, the outer periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182 is covered with the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration body 3181. Therefore, the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 prevents the outer peripheries of the inner decorative body 3182 and the back rear decorative substrate 3183 from being seen from the outside.

In this rear-back movable decorative body 3180, the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 is provided inside the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 provided with the metal decorative portion 3181c, and Since the outer periphery of the rear rear decorative substrate 3183 provided on the rear side of the main body portion 3182a is separated from the inner periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative member 3182, the rear rear decorative substrate 3183 (from the metal rear portion 3181c The creepage distance EL to the foil can be set to a sufficient distance, and static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3181c is prevented from flowing to the back-rear decoration substrate 3183 and damaging the back-rear decoration substrate 3183. can do.

As described above, according to the back-and-back movable decoration body 3180 of the present embodiment, the same operational effect as the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 can be obtained. Note that a metal decoration portion may be provided on the front surface of the main body portion 3182a of the inner decoration body 3182. Further, in the back-and-back movable decoration body 3180, a decoration body base that covers the rear side of the back-and-back decoration substrate 3183 may be provided.

[5-9e. Back lower left production unit and lower back right production unit]
Next, the back lower left effect unit 3200 and the back lower right effect unit 3250 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 158 to 161 and the like. FIG. 158(a) is a perspective view of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 158(b) is the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit behind. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 159 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back left production unit and the lower right production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 160 is the rear left production unit and the lower right production unit as seen from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram showing a movable configuration of the lower back left effect unit and the lower lower right effect unit from the front.

The lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250 of the rear unit 3000 are attached to the lower end of the rear rear effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250 are positioned on the left and right sides of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 of the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 in the state of being assembled to the game board 5. It is visible through the transparent game panel 1100, the front unit 2000, and the like.

First, the lower back left effect unit 3200 will be described. The lower back left production unit 3200 includes a transparent lower back left ornamental body 3201 having a shaft shaft 3201a protruding rearward, and a transparent lower back left ornamental body provided behind the lower left rear ornamental structure 3201. 3202 and a lower back left decorative substrate provided behind the lower back left decorative body 3202 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, also referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”). 3203 and the back lower left decoration substrate 3203, the back lower left rotating decoration 3201 is rotatably attached, and the back lower left decoration 3202 is attached, and the back rear production unit 3100. And a unit base 3204 attached to the lower end of the left side of the.

Also, the lower back left production unit 3200 is attached to the lower back left drive motor 3205 which is mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3204 so that the rotary shaft projects rearward, and the rotary shaft of the lower back left drive motor 3205. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3206, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3207 meshing with the drive gear 3206 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and meshed with the first transmission gear 3207. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3208 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3201a of the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3208. It includes a third transmission gear 3209 having a spur gear shape and a front cover 3210 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 below the lower back left decorative body 3202.

The lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3201a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back left decorative member 3201 is formed to have a length penetrating the lower left decorative member 3202, the lower left decorative substrate 3203, and the unit base 3204. .. The lower back left decoration 3202 is made by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower left rotation decoration 3201 on top of each other and rotating so that the rear petals are located between the front petals. It is formed in a shape that allows it.

The lower back left decoration 3201 and the lower left back decoration 3202 are formed transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the lower back left decorative body 3201 and the lower left decorative body 3202 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of ridges extending linearly in a short random direction. In one petal of the cherry blossoms that is struck by the ornament 3201 and the lower left back ornament 3202, the pachinko machine 1( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) along with the concept of the game board 5 (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but the bottom left rotation Through the decoration 3201 and the lower back left decoration 3202 (even at the peripheral portion of the petals), the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decoration substrate 3203 arranged behind the lower left back decoration 3202 can be visually recognized. It is like this.

The lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is a full-color LED in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are of a surface mounting type and capable of emitting multiple colors. The lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is provided with a lower back left detection sensor 3203a (lead type) for detecting the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 on the rear surface. The lower back left detection sensor 3203a penetrates the unit base 3204 and projects rearward. The third transmission gear 3209 has a detection piece 3209a that protrudes forward and is detected by the lower back left detection sensor 3203a of the lower back left decoration substrate 3203. In the state where the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 is detected by the lower back left detection sensor 3203a, the lower back left rotation decorative body 3201 is in a state in which one petal faces upward (see FIG. 161). ).

When the driving gear 3206 is rotated by the lower back left drive motor 3205, the lower back left production unit 3200 of the present embodiment moves back through the first transmission gear 3207, the second transmission gear 3208, and the third transmission gear 3209. The lower left rotating decoration 3201 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. Further, the lower back left rendering unit 3200 causes the lower back left rotating decoration 3201 and the lower back left decoration 3202 to operate by causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decoration substrate 3203 to emit light. Can be decorated with luminous.

It should be noted that the front side electronic component such as a part number of the front side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs or connectors mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203, a region indicating a position where the front side electronic component is arranged, and the like. The front side notation indicating the attributes (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component may be included). Is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 with a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and a transparent lower back left decorative body 3201 is provided behind the transparent lower back left decorative body 3201. Since the 3202 and the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 are arranged in order, the predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower lower left decorative substrate 3203 is the lower lower decorative body 3202. Then, when the color of the predetermined paint can be visually recognized through the lower left counter rotating decorative body 3201 and a plurality of LEDs are turned off, characters and symbols are displayed according to the color of the predetermined paint. , The shape (that is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be determined.

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white), and the connector is The housing is made of white resin (also known as natural color, which is recognized as the same color as white (natural color)).

Next, the lower back right effect unit 3250 will be described. The lower back right effect unit 3250 includes a transparent lower back right rotating decoration body 3251 having a shaft shaft 3251a protruding rearward and a transparent lower back right decoration body provided behind the lower back right rotating decoration body 3251. 3252 and a lower back right decorative substrate provided behind the lower right decorative body 3252 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”). 3253 and the back lower right decoration board 3253 are provided, the back lower right rotation decoration 3251 is rotatably attached, and the back lower right decoration 3252 is attached. And a unit base 3254 attached to the lower end of the right side of the.

The lower back right effect unit 3250 is attached to the lower back right drive motor 3255 which is mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3254 such that the rotating shaft projects rearward, and the rotating shaft of the lower back right drive motor 3255. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3256, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3257 that meshes with the drive gear 3256 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3254, and a first transmission gear 3257 that mesh with each other. The second transmission gear 3258 in the form of a spur gear that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3254, and the second transmission gear 3258 meshes with it and is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3251a of the lower back right rotation decorative body 3251. The third transmission gear 3259 has a spur gear shape, and a front cover 3260 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 below the back lower right decorative body 3252.

The lower back right rotation decorative body 3251 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3251a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 is formed to have a length penetrating the lower lower right decorative body 3252, the lower lower right decorative substrate 3253, and the unit base 3254. .. The lower back right ornamental body 3252 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower back right ornamental member 3251 stacked on top of each other and rotated so that the rear petals are located between the front petals. It is formed in a shape that allows it.

The lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 and the lower back right decorative body 3252 are formed transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the back lower right rotation decorative body 3251 and the back lower right decorative body 3252 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of ridges extending linearly in a short direction in random directions. In the petals of one of the cherry blossoms that are struck by the ornament 3251 and the lower right ornament 3252, the pachinko machine 1 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) along with the concept of the game board 5 (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but the lower back right rotation Through the decoration body 3251 and the lower back right decoration body 3252 (even at the peripheral portion of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back right decoration substrate 3253 arranged behind the lower back right decoration body 3252 can be visually recognized. It is like this.

The lower back right decorative substrate 3253 is a full-color LED in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are of a surface mounting type and are capable of emitting multiple colors. The lower back right decorative substrate 3253 is provided with a lower back right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) for detecting the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 on the rear surface. The lower back right detection sensor 3253a penetrates the unit base 3254 and projects rearward. The third transmission gear 3259 has a detection piece 3259a that protrudes forward and is detected by the back lower right detection sensor 3253a of the back lower right decorative substrate 3253. When the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 is detected by the back lower right detection sensor 3253a, the back lower right rotation decorative body 3251 is in a state in which one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 161). ).

When the drive gear 3256 is rotated by the back lower right drive motor 3255, the back lower right effect unit 3250 of the present embodiment moves back through the first transmission gear 3257, the second transmission gear 3258, and the third transmission gear 3259. The lower right rotating decorative body 3251 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In addition, the lower back right effect unit 3250 can cause the lower back right rotating decoration body 3251 and the lower right back decoration body 3252 to emit light by making a plurality of LEDs of the lower right back decoration substrate 3253 emit light.

It should be noted that the front side electronic component such as a part number of the front side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253, a region indicating a position where the front side electronic component is arranged, and the like. The front side notation indicating the attributes (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component may be included). Part is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 by silk printing with a predetermined paint color, and a transparent lower back right decorative body 3251 is provided behind the transparent lower back right decorative body 3251. Since 3252 and the lower back right decorative board 3253 are arranged in order, the predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back right decorative board 3253 is the lower back right decorative body 3252. Then, when the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized through the lower back right rotation decorative body 3251 and a plurality of LEDs are turned off, characters and symbols are displayed according to the predetermined paint color. , The shape (that is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be determined.

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative substrate 3253 has a package made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white), and the connector is The housing is made of white resin (also known as natural color, which is recognized as the same color as white (natural color)).

A plurality of LEDs (surface mount type), a connector (surface mount type), a lower back left detection sensor 3203a (lead type), and a lower back are provided on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative board 3203 and the lower right decorative board 3253. A white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution on the entire area except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) is soldered (hereinafter, simply referred to as "solid white"). Sometimes referred to as “resist”)), a white resist layer is formed. On the back surface (rear surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower back right decorative substrate 3253, a pad through which a lower lower left detection sensor 3203a (lead type) and a lower right lower detection sensor 3253a (lead type) are soldered, A white resist layer is formed of a solid white resist over the entire area except for holes and lands. Further, although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the back lower left decorative substrate 3203 and the back lower right decorative substrate 3253, the front surface side is provided in the vicinity of the front electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs and connectors. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the part number of the electronic component, the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged (in addition, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction of the front-side electronic component) (Mounting direction), which may include the model of the electronic component on the front side.) is printed on the solid white resist with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. It is printed by silk printing. Although not shown in the drawings on the back surfaces (rear surfaces) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower right decorative substrate 3253, near the rear electronic components such as the lower back left detection sensor 3203a and the lower right back detection sensor 3253a, Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the part number of the back side electronic component, the area indicating the position where the back side electronic component is arranged (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the back side electronic component The backside notation that indicates the mounting orientation (mounting direction), and the backside electronic component model may be included.) is a white resist that is solid-painted with a light yellow paint that is inconspicuous to white. It is printed by silk printing on the top.

Here, the reason why white color is used as the resist liquid and yellow color is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is noticeable when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (rear side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. While the notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface is When the side notation part (reverse side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow backside notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 produces a glittering light emission by the illumination by the light emitting portions such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors. Thus, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower back right decorative substrate 3253, as described above, the entire area excluding the pads to which the plurality of LEDs, the connectors are soldered, the through holes, the lands, etc. In the above, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). On the painted white resist, the notation on the front side that enables the identification of the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is printed by silk printing with a yellow paint, so that white light is emitted when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side notation part inconspicuous with respect to the resist of No. 1, in addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (when emitting light), it is painted solid with high reflectance. The surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower right decorative substrate 3253 is combined by a combination of a white resist and a front surface notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint having a reflectance very close to white. The reflectance of can be maintained high.

If yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow color printed by silk printing may become pale yellow or dark yellow due to variations in the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a wide range of yellow (yellow on the bright side and yellow on the dark side). Even if you specify yellow, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

[5-9f. Underside production unit]
Next, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 162 to 169. FIG. 162(a) is a perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 162(b) is a perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle raising/lowering mechanism of the back lower middle producing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle decoration unit of the back lower middle effect unit seen from the front, and FIG. 166 is a rear lower middle decoration unit of the back lower middle effect unit disassembled from the back. It is the exploded perspective view seen. FIG. 167 is an explanatory view showing the raising and lowering of the lower back inner decoration unit by the lower back middle elevating mechanism in the lower back middle effect unit. FIG. 168(a) is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the configuration related to the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body of the lower back middle rotating decorative body unit in the lower back middle rotating effect unit, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a stop position and each detection sensor by a table. FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing, from the front, the arrangement of LEDs of the lower back middle decoration unit in the lower back middle effect unit.

The lower back middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back middle effect unit 3300 is attached to the rear side of the lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower back right effect unit 3250. The under-rear middle production unit 3300 includes a back-rear middle decoration unit 3320 having a transparent back-rear middle rotation decoration body 3310 rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back-rear middle section for raising and lowering the back-rear middle decoration body unit 3320. And an elevating mechanism 3350.

The shape of the inside-under-the-back decoration 3310 of the inside-under-the-back production unit 3300 is a regular hexagon when viewed from the front. This back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 has six numeral decorations formed in a relief shape of "1" to "6" on the entire surface, and circles at an angle of 60 degrees clockwise around the center. It is arranged on the circumference. The back inner middle rotating decoration body 3310 has a transparent inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 in the back inner middle decoration unit 3320, a back inner middle first decorative substrate 3322, and a front end side of the substrate fixing member 3323 on the rear surface. Has a concave portion 3311 capable of accommodating therein.

The lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is formed transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of each of the six numeral decorations protrudes forward, and further, the rib portion that connects the six numeral decorations arranged on the circumference in a ring state. It is formed so as to project forward. A metal decoration portion 3310a having a metallic luster is formed on the protruding outer peripheral portion and the rib portion. In other words, the metallic decorative portion 3310a having metallic luster is arranged in the vicinity of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. In the present embodiment, the outer peripheral portion where the metallic decorative portion 3310a having metallic luster is formed and the rib portion are integrally formed with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, but the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion are May be molded separately from the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the molded outer peripheral portion and ribs and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be assembled. In this case, the metal decoration portion 3310a having metallic luster is formed on the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion, respectively.

The metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3310a can give a high-class feeling, and can make the under-center rotating decorative body 3310 stand out, thereby further enhancing the presence of the under-center rotating decorative body 3310. It has become. The metal decoration portion 3310a is formed by stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold color in this embodiment) by the hot stamping described above. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a metal decoration portion 3310a formed only on the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion protruding to the front surface, and the back middle rotating decoration body 3310 has no metal decoration portion 3310a formed on its side surface. Absent. Thereby, the creepage distance from the metal decorative portion 3310a of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 to the back lower middle rotating decorative substrate 3322 is increased by at least the length of the side surface of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3310a from flowing to the first lower back decorative board 3322 and damaging the first lower back decorative board 3322. Therefore, it is possible to improve the insulation property against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

In addition, as described above, the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is formed with the rib portion that connects the six numeral decorations arranged on the circumference in a ring state to project forward. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a rib portion protruding from the front side of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 to a front edge of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the back lower middle. The rotating decorative body 3310 is transparently formed up to the rear edge of the side surface, and also has a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a rib portion protruding from the peripheral side portion (peripheral side root portion) protruding from the front side of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 to the front edge of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. The ribs are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of ridges extending linearly in a short direction in a random direction over the side rear edge of the underside middle rotating ornament 3310. From the peripheral side portion (peripheral side root portion) protruding on the front surface of the body 3310 to the front side peripheral edge of the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310 and to the side surface rear edge of the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310, the lightness and darkness increase ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) so that the transparency becomes low. Is printed.

As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 includes a transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 provided behind the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 and an inner lens (diffusion lens). ) It is provided at the rear of 3321 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, also referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”). A substrate fixing member 3323 having a shaft portion 3323a that is attached to an inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 so as to sandwich the middle first decorative substrate 3322 from the rear side, and has a shaft portion 3323a protruding rearward, and a shaft of the substrate fixing member 3323. The portion 3323a has a shaft hole 3324a into which the portion 3323a is relatively rotatably inserted, and a rotation base 3324 attached to the rear side of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310.

The surface of the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and is disposed behind the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322. Note that the inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 and the back surface may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron) or may be replaced with the inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 surface. The back surface may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron).

In addition, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 includes a region detection piece 3325 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 and extending in a semi-circular arc coaxial with the shaft hole 3324a, and a circumference coaxial with the region detection piece 3325. A plurality of position detection pieces 3326 projecting from the rotation base 3324 and a spur gear-shaped rotation gear 3327 provided on the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 are provided.

Further, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 has a circular opening 3328a which is provided at the rear of the rotation base 3324 and through which the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can pass. A transparent back lower middle decoration 3328 in which a plurality of linear grooves are radially formed from the opening 3328a toward the outer periphery with the center of the circular opening 3328a as a center point, and the rear of the back lower middle decoration 3328 And a lower back middle decoration board 3329 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”). A plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 (lead type) that are attached to the front surface of the 3329 and are capable of detecting the area detecting piece 3325, and are attached to the front surface of the back lower middle second decorative substrate 3329, and the position detecting piece 3326 is attached. And a position specifying sensor 3331 (lead type) capable of detection.

In addition, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is provided behind the second lower back middle decoration board 3329, and the rear end of the shaft portion 3323a of the board fixing member 3323 is attached and the lower back middle decoration body 3328 is attached. A movable base 3332, a back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3332 such that the rotation shaft projects forward, and a rotation shaft of the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3334 that meshes with the rotating gear 3327, a rear cover 3335 that is attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332, and a back-bottom middle lifting mechanism 3350 that is attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332. And a slide slider 3336 that is vertically slidably guided by a slide rail 3360.

The front end sides of the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321, the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322, and the substrate fixing member 3323 are positioned between the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the rotation base 3324 in an assembled state. It is in a state of being accommodated in the concave portion 3311 of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and does not contact with either the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 or the rotation base 3324. By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs of the lower back middle decorative substrate 3322, the portion of the numbered decoration (relief) in the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be illuminated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322 are surface-mounting type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329 are surface-mounting type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

The area detection piece 3325 has a diameter larger than that of the rotation gear 3327 and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324. As shown in FIG. 168( a ), the area detection piece 3325 displays “3”, “4”, and “5” from between the number decorations “2” and “3” in the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310. Through the numeral decoration, a circular arc is formed within a range of 180 degrees about the rotation axis between the numeral decorations of "5" and "6".

Each of the plurality (here, six) of the position detection pieces 3326 projects rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 on the circumference having a diameter larger than that of the area detection piece 3325. Each of the position detection pieces 3326 is provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an angle of θ degrees (here, 60 degrees) so that each of the position detection pieces 3326 is located at the center of the numeral decoration of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310. .. In the present embodiment, one position detection piece 3326 is formed in an arc shape within a range of a predetermined angle α degrees (20 degrees to 25 degrees, here, 23.34 degrees) about the rotation axis, and the adjacent A distance of 2×β degrees (θ degrees−α degrees (here, 36.66 degrees)) is provided between the position detection piece 3326 and the rotation axis as a center (see FIG. 168(a)). ..

A plurality (here, three) of the area specifying sensors 3330 are provided so as to be arranged at intervals of an angle of θ degrees (60 degrees) around the rotation axis of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. The three area specifying sensors 3330 are provided in the order of clockwise, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c. In the present embodiment, the three area specifying sensors 3330 are arranged to display the decorations “1” of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 immediately above the center of rotation in the areas “3”, “4”, and “5”. It is provided at a position corresponding to the numeral decoration (see FIG. 168(a)).

The position specifying sensor 3331 is provided at a position of an angle of γ degrees (here, 30 degrees) from the first area specifying sensor 3330a in a counterclockwise direction about the rotation axis of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. ing.

The movable base 3332 has an elevating pin 3332a protruding rearward from the lower part of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape. The elevating pin 3332a is slidably inserted into the second slit 3357b of the elevating arm 3357 in the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350. The lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is a stepping motor capable of detecting a rotation position.

This under-rear middle decoration unit 3320 rotates the under-rear middle rotating decoration body 3310 via the rotation gear 3327 by rotating the drive gear 3334 by the under-rear middle rotating drive motor 3333. You can In addition, the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back lower middle first decoration substrate 3322 and the back lower middle second decoration substrate 3329, respectively, thereby causing the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 to emit light. Also, the underbody decoration 3328 can be illuminated.

It should be noted that the front side electronic component such as a part number of the front side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322, a region indicating a position where the front side electronic component is arranged, and the like. The front side notation indicating the attributes (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component may be included). The portion is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the first lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 by silk printing with a predetermined paint color, and the inner lens (diffusion lens) is provided behind the transparent lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. ) 3321 and the lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 are arranged in order, the predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back first decorative substrate 3322 is the inner lens. (Diffusion lens) 3321 and the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 are visible, and when a plurality of LEDs are turned off, a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized. Characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be discriminated by the color of.

In addition, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white).

On the surface (front surface) of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322, a white resist solution is applied over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by the formed white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). On the back surface (rear surface) of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322, a white resist is applied with a solid white resist over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a connector (surface mount type) is soldered. A resist layer is formed. Further, although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322, the part number and the surface of the front surface side electronic component are provided near the front surface side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. The attributes of the front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are arranged (in addition, the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, the front side) The electronic part type may be included.) is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. .. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322, the part number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is arranged are provided in the vicinity of the back side electronic component such as a connector. The attributes of the back side electronic component such as the indicated area (In addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. Is printed on the white resist which is solid-painted by silk printing with a yellow paint which is a light color which is inconspicuous to white.

In addition, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329, a part number of the surface side electronic parts such as the area specifying sensor 3330 and the position specifying sensor 3331, and the surface side electronic parts are arranged. Specify the attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position to be set (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component). May be included) is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the second underside middle second decorative substrate 3329 by silk printing with a predetermined paint color, and a transparent underside middle decorative body 3328 is shown. Since the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329 is arranged behind the back underside, the predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the underneath second decorative substrate 3329 When the color of the predetermined paint can be visually recognized through the decoration body 3328 and the plurality of LEDs are turned off, characters, symbols, shapes (that is, It is possible to determine the attribute of the front side electronic component indicated by the front side notation portion.

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the surface (mounting surface) of the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329 is made of a resin whose package is white (a color recognized to be the same as white). Has become.

A pad to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type), a region specifying sensor 3330 (lead type), and a position specifying sensor 3331 (lead type) are soldered on the surface (front surface) of the second lower middle decorative substrate 3329, A white resist formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area except for through holes, lands, etc. (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid-painted white resist"). Layers have been formed. On the back surface (rear surface) of the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329, a region specification sensor 3330 (lead type), a position specification sensor 3331 (lead type), and a pad to which a plurality of connectors (surface mount type) are soldered, A white resist layer is formed of a solid white resist over the entire area except for the through holes and lands. Further, although not shown, on the surface (front surface) of the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329, a part number and a surface of the front surface electronic component are provided near the front surface electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged (in addition, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front side) The part on the front side that indicates the type of electronic component is included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. .. Although illustration is omitted, on the back surface (rear surface) of the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329, the part number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is arranged are provided in the vicinity of the back side electronic component such as a connector. The attributes of the back side electronic component such as the indicated area (In addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. Is printed on the white resist which is solid-painted by silk printing with a yellow paint which is a light color which is inconspicuous to white.

Here, the reason why white color is used as the resist liquid and yellow color is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is noticeable when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (rear side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. While the notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface is When the side notation part (reverse side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow backside notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 produces a glittering light emission by the illumination by the light emitting portions such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors. Thus, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the pads (through holes, lands, etc.) to which a plurality of LEDs or the like are soldered are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”) on the entire area except the above. , The surface-side notation part that enables the specification of the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors on this solid white resist is printed by silk printing with a yellow paint to turn off the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface-side notation part inconspicuous with the white resist at some times, in addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (when emitting light), it has a high reflectance. A combination of a painted white resist and a front side notation printed by silk printing with a yellow paint that is very close to the reflectance of white is a back-under-first decoration substrate 3322 and a back-under-mid second decoration. The reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the substrate 3329 can be kept high.

If yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow color printed by silk printing may become pale yellow or dark yellow due to variations in the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a wide range of yellow (yellow on the bright side and yellow on the dark side). Even if you specify yellow, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

As shown in FIG. 163, FIG. 164, etc., the under-bottom middle elevating mechanism 3350 has a unit base 3351 that extends to the left and right and both ends are attached to the under-bottom left effect unit 3200 and the under-bottom right effect unit 3250, and a unit base 3351. The lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 is mounted on the front surface of the unit so that the rotary shaft projects rearward, and the flat bottom part of the unit base 3351 which is mounted on the rotary shaft of the lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 faces the front side of the unit base 3351. A gear-shaped drive gear 3353 is meshed with the drive gear 3353, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3354 that is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 is meshed with the first transmission gear 3354. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3355 that is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3356a that meshes with the second transmission gear 3355, and an outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3356a. It has a drive pin 3356b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity, and is provided with an elevating cam gear 3356 that is rotatably attached at the upper center of the front surface of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction.

Further, the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 at the base end side extending in the left-right direction, and the driving pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is slidably inserted in the longitudinal direction. To the first slit 3357a and the second slit 3357b, which extends in the longitudinal direction on the tip side of the first slit 3357a and into which the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is slidably inserted. , And a detection piece 3357c provided at the tip of the unit base 3351. And a lower back intermediate relay board 3358 attached to the front surface.

Further, the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, the elevating cam gear 3356, and the elevating arm 3357 from the front side. A front cover 3359 having a vertically extending elevator slit 3359a through which an elevator pin 3332a of a movable base 3332 of the ornamental body unit 3320 is inserted, and a front cover 3359 attached to the front surface of the ornamental body unit 3320, and is moved up and down in the lower middle ornamental body unit 3320. A slide rail 3360 that guides the slider 3336 in the vertical direction, a gear cover 3361 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the drive gear 3353 from the rear, and a tip end side of the elevating arm 3357 move upward (front direction). And a spring 3362 that urges the elevating arm 3357 to rotate in a clockwise direction with respect to the view.

The lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 is attached to a lower part on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The elevating arm 3357 is rotatably attached such that the base end is to the right of the elevating cam gear 3356 and is at the same height as the center of the elevating cam gear 3356. The elevating arm 3357 has its tip end side extending to the left of the elevating cam gear 3356.

The lower back middle relay board 3358 includes a lower back middle decoration board 3322, a lower back middle decoration board 3329, a region specifying sensor 3330, a position specifying sensor 3331, a lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333, and a lower back middle lift drive motor. 3352 relays the connection between the lower back middle up-and-down detection sensor 3358a and the production drive board 1720.

The front cover 3359 is attached to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction, and an elevating slit 3359a is provided on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3359a of the front cover 3359. The slide rail 3360 is provided on the right side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the front cover 3359 in the left-right direction. The elevating slit 3359a and the slide rail 3360 can support the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 so as to slide straight in the vertical direction.

When the drive gear 3353 is rotated by the back-and-lower-in-and-under-elevation drive motor 3352, the back-and-bottom-under-elevation mechanism 3350 moves through the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a of the up-and-down cam gear 3356. The 3356 can be rotated. Then, the drive pin 3356b, which revolves by the rotation of the lift cam gear 3356, can rotate the lift arm 3357 through the first slit 3357a in which the drive pin 3356b is slidably inserted. The lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 can be moved up and down together with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 through the elevating pins 3332a of the movable base 3332 that are slidably inserted in the two slits 3357b.

Next, the movements of the under-rear middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the under-rear middle decorative body unit 3320 in the under-rear inside effect unit 3300 will be described in detail. In the normal state, the under-rear middle production unit 3300 is in a lowered position in which the in-under-rear middle decoration unit 3320 is moved to the lowest position. In this normal state, the elevating arm 3357 of the lower-bottom-under-elevation mechanism 3350 is positioned such that the tip side is below the base end side, and the detection piece 3357c at the tip is under-under-the-back relay substrate 3358. It is detected by the detection sensor 3358a (see FIG. 167(a)).

In this normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is located below the center of its revolution, and is located near the proximal end of the elevating arm 3357 in the first slit 3357a. .. More specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point between the drive pin 3356b and the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if the spring 3362 exerts an urging force for rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the clockwise direction, the force line of the urging force causes the drive pin 3356b that is in contact with the first slit 3357a. Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356 via the, the elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 does not move from the lowered position by the urging force of the spring 3362, and the spring. The urging force of 3362 does not act on the lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 via the lift arms 3357 and the like.

Note that, in a normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 may be brought into contact with the end portion of the first slit 3357a on the base end side. As a result, when the lifting arm 3357 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction by the biasing force of the spring 3362, the lifting cam gear 3356 moves in the counterclockwise direction by the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b. Try to rotate. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move to the base end side of the elevating arm 3357, but since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end side end of the first slit 3357a. Since the drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked and the upward movement of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 can be prevented.

In the normal state, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 has the uppermost numeral decoration among the plurality of numeral decorations in the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 located inside the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is located and can be viewed well from the front (player side) (see FIG. 111 and the like). Further, in a normal state, the numerical decoration located at the lowermost side is located behind the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the back lower middle first decorative board 3322 and the back lower middle first. By making the LED of the second decoration substrate 3329 emit light, in addition to the light emission decoration of the lower back middle rotating decoration body, the first starting port 2002 formed of a transparent member can also be light emission decoration (see FIG. 120 and the like). ).

In this normal state, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view by the lower back middle lift drive motor 3352, the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a are passed. As a result, the elevating cam gear 3356 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3356b revolves, the inner surface of the first slit 3357a that is in contact with the drive pin 3356b is pressed upward, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the tip side, and the elevating arm moves. The tip end side of 3357 is rotated clockwise around the base end side so that the tip end side moves upward.

By rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the clockwise direction, the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 inserted into the second slit 3357b on the tip side of the elevating arm 3357 is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3357b. Then, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved upward through the elevating pin 3332a. When the drive pin 3356b moves above the center of revolution, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the base end side. At this time, in the up-and-down arm 3357, since the spring 3362 exerts a biasing force in the clockwise direction, the biasing force assists the upward movement of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, and The load on the lifting drive motor 3352 is reduced.

When the drive pin 3356b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the end portion on the base end side of the first slit 3357a, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 by the back-and-lower center up-and-down drive motor 3352 is stopped, and at the same time, the drive is performed. The revolution of the pin 3356b stops. As a result, the movement of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 by the elevating arm 3357 is stopped, and the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 moves to the uppermost position.

When the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is in the raised position, the normal line passing through the contact point between the drive pin 3356b and the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if the force of rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the counterclockwise direction is applied by the weight of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, the force line of the force is applied to the first slit 3357a. The elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate because it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356 via the drive pin 3356b that is in contact therewith. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the lift cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the lift arm 3357 does not rotate, the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 does not move downward from the raised position, and the back lower middle decoration does not move. The own weight of the unit 3320 does not act on the lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 via the lift arm 3357 and the like.

It should be noted that in the state where the lower back interior decoration unit 3320 is in the raised position, the elevating cam gear 3356 may be further revolved to bring the drive pin 3356b into contact with the end of the first slit 3357a on the base end side. Accordingly, when the elevating arm 3357 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b causes the elevating cam gear 3356 to rotate. Try to rotate in the direction of the surroundings. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move to the base end side of the elevating arm 3357, but since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end side end of the first slit 3357a. The drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked, and the downward movement of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 can be prevented.

In a state in which the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, most of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (further, a game ball rolling in the game area 5a). B is located above the rebound preventing member (stage cover 2515) provided on the center accessory 2500 that prevents the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501) from rebounding from the outside to the front (player). All the number decorations can be seen well from the side) (see FIG. 201).

To return the lower-under-the-back celestial body unit 3320 to the lowered position from the raised position, when the driving gear 3353 is rotated in the opposite direction by the under-the-bottom-under-elevation drive motor 3352, the elevating arm 3357 is moved. Rotates counterclockwise to move the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 from the raised position to the lower side. Then, when the detection piece 3357c at the tip of the elevating arm 3357 is detected by the back lower middle lift detection sensor 3358a of the back lower middle relay substrate 3358, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 is stopped by the back lower middle lift drive motor 3352. , The lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the normal lowered position (further, the center of the game ball B rolling in the game area 5a is prevented from bouncing from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501)). The bounce preventing member (stage cover 2515) provided on the accessory 2500 can be returned to the position where the pachinko machine 1 overlaps when viewed from the front.

In the back under-center production unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the drive gear 3334 is rotated by the under-under-medium rotary drive motor 3333 in the under-under-medium ornamental body unit 3320, so that the under-medium middle rotating ornament 3310 is rotated via the rotation gear 3327. Can be rotated around a longitudinal axis. By rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the six numeral decorations provided on the front surface rotate like a roulette wheel. The lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 can be rotated by the lower back middle rotating drive motor 3333 in any position such as the lowered position or the raised position of the lower back middle rotating body unit 3320.

In the normal state, in the under-rear middle production unit 3300, one of a plurality (here, 6) of numerical decorations in the under-rear middle rotating decorative body 3310 is located immediately above the rotation center (stop position). doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 168( a ), in the state where the numeral decoration “1” of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is located on the upper side, the area detection piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324 is set to the first area specifying portion. The position detection sensor 3331 detects a plurality of (six in this case) position detection pieces 3326 while detecting by the three region specification sensors 3330 of the sensor 3330a, the second region specification sensor 3330b, and the third region specification sensor 3330c. Is not detecting.

Here, first, the relationship between the three area specifying sensors 3330 and the six stop positions of the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be described. In the state where the numeral decoration of “1” is the stop position, as described above, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c cause the area detecting piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324 to move. Is being detected. That is, as shown in FIG. 168(b), when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c detect, the numeral decoration of "1" is centered around the stop position. It is located within the range of ±30 degrees.

Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect and the third area specifying sensor 3330c does not detect, the numeral decoration of "2" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c do not detect, the numeral decoration of "3" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are not detected, the numeral decoration of "4" is the range of the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. It is located inside.

Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b do not detect and the third area specifying sensor 3330c detects, the numeral decoration of "5" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a does not detect, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c detect, the numeral decoration of "6" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

In this way, by the combination of the detection/non-detection of the three area specifying sensors 3330 of the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c, any of the numeral decorations has a stop position. It is possible to know (detect) whether or not the vehicle is located in the stop area including the area.

Since the back-under-center rotation drive motor 3333 of the present embodiment is a stepping motor, when the area specifying sensor 3330 detects the area detection piece 3325 and then rotates 30 degrees, the back-under-center rotation drive is performed. By stopping the rotation of the motor 3333, it becomes possible to stop the desired numeral decoration of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 at the stop position. However, in the case of performing such control, it is necessary to identify the origin for stopping at the stop position while specifying the area of the stop position by the three area specifying sensors 3330. There is a problem that the control for stopping the rotation of the 3310 becomes complicated and the load becomes high. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of position detecting pieces 3326 for specifying the stop position and a position specifying sensor 3331 for detecting the position detecting pieces 3326 are provided, and the origin is recognized by the position specifying sensor 3331. Thus, it is possible to reduce the load by suppressing the complexity of the control for stopping the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

More specifically, when it is desired to stop the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 at a stop position of a desired numeral decoration, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates and the three area specifying sensors 3330 stop at desired positions. In the case of the combination satisfying the positions, the position specifying sensor 3331 is displaced from the first area specifying sensor 3330a in the rotation direction by an angle of 30 degrees, and therefore the position specifying sensor 3331 detects the center of the position detection piece 3326. ing. In this state, the desired number is separated from the stop position by a rotation angle of 30 degrees.

In this state, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is further rotated by α/2 degrees (here, 11.67 degrees) which is the length of the position detecting piece 3326, the position detecting piece 3326 is separated from the position specifying sensor 3331. Then, the position identification sensor 3331 becomes non-detection. The angle at which the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected is the origin. Then, from there (from the origin), when it rotates by β degrees (here, 18.33 degrees), the rotation of the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped, and a desired number is obtained. The decoration can be stopped exactly at the stop position.

In the above description, the rotation stop of the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 is described by the angle, but the rotation may be stopped by the rotation step of the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 including a stepping motor. For example, when one rotation is 396 steps, when the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310 is further rotated by 13 steps in a state where the three area specifying sensors 3330 are in a combination satisfying a desired stop position, the position detection piece 3326 is The position specifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detecting away from the position specifying sensor 3331. By stopping the rotation of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 when the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected as an origin and is rotated 20 steps, a desired numeral decoration is stopped. Can be stopped exactly in position.

Next, the light emitting decoration in the lower back middle effect unit 3300 will be described. As shown in FIG. 169, the under-rear middle production unit 3300 includes a plurality of LEDs for allowing the under-rear middle decoration unit 3320 to emit light to decorate the under-rear rotation decoration member 3310. It is provided with a decorative substrate 3322 and a second lower middle decorative substrate 3329. The plurality of LEDs on the lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 are located behind the six numeral decorations on the lower middle rotating decoration 3310, and each numeral decoration can be independently illuminated.

On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3329 are located behind a portion of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 that is outside the plurality of numeral decorations. The periphery can be decorated with light emission.

As described above, the inside-under-representation unit 3300 can detect the rotational position of the inside-under-revolving decorative body 3310 by the three area specifying sensors 3330 to some extent, and therefore, based on the detection by the area specifying sensor 3330. By rotating a plurality of LEDs of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322 to emit light, only a specific number decoration is illuminated, or each number decoration is illuminated in a different color to rotate. Therefore, it is possible to show the player an effect that strongly attracts the player's interest.

Further, in the state in which the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the lowered position, the numerical decoration on the lower side of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is located behind the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. The first starting port 2002 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LED of the relevant portion of the lower back first decorative substrate 3322 to emit light. Thereby, the player's interest can be directed to the first starting opening 2002. In addition, when the game ball B is won in the first starting opening 2002, the LED of the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 is caused to emit light (or one emission mode is selected from a plurality of emission modes to emit light). ).

As described above, according to the inside-under-the-back production unit 3300 of the present embodiment, this enables the region detection of the length across the three stop positions in the rotating inside-the-back-under-the-back decorative body 3310 having the six stop positions. A piece 3325 and six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions are provided, and three area identification sensors 3330 that detect the area detection piece 3325 and one position identification that detects the position detection piece 3326 are provided. Since the sensor 3331 is provided, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, the three area specifying sensors 3330 that detect the area detecting piece 3325 increase in order from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease. By repeating the process, all the area specifying sensors 3330 are not undetected until the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position, and the area detecting piece 3325 is detected. With the combination of the area specifying sensors 3330 that are present, it is possible to roughly grasp the current rotational position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

Then, since the back-under-center rotation decorative body 3310 is provided with the six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the three-side area specifying sensors 3330 detect the area detection pieces 3325 to rotate the back-side middle rotation. After roughly detecting the rotation of the decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, the stop position can be accurately detected by the detection of the position detection piece 3326 by the one position specifying sensor 3331, and the shift of the stop position can be detected. The stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions can be accurately grasped by reducing the number as much as possible.

In addition, since the stop position of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the stop position shifts to play. It is possible to prevent the person from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to entertain the effect (movable effect) by the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the shift of the stop position can be suppressed, and By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotational speed) of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be further increased as compared with the case where the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. Can be fast. Therefore, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can give a strong impact to the player by strongly rotating, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be rotated. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In addition, since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is supposed to rotate about the axis in the front-rear direction and a plurality of numeral decorations are provided on the front surface, a roulette wheel that stops rotating at an arbitrary stop position after rotating around. Since such an effect can be shown to the player, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the desired numeral decoration stops rotating at the stop position. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, the number of stop positions that can be supported by the minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 necessary for detecting movement to any stop position is , The number of stop positions of the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 is the same, and the ability (the grasp of stop positions) by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 can be maximized, and more stop positions are provided. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotation base 3324 that rotates together with the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310, the radius (diameter) of the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can be changed. It can be made as large as possible, and the positioning accuracy of the stop position can be made higher.

In the above embodiment, the rotation base 3324 that rotates integrally with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326. The present invention is not limited to this, and the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 may be provided on a member that rotates with the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 such as the drive gear 3334.

[5-9 g. Back production unit]
Next, the back production unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 170 to 177 and the like. FIG. 170(a) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 170(b) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the main production unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the main production unit disassembled for each main member and seen from behind. is there. FIG. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the back elevation decorative body unit in the back production unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 174 is an exploded perspective view of the back elevation decorative body unit in the back unit disassembled and seen from behind. It is a figure.

FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the rotation mechanism of the back-up front rotating decorative body in the back-up production unit. FIG. 176(a) is an explanatory view showing the lifting mechanism of the back-up/down lifting/decorating body unit in the back-up effect unit from the front, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising/lowering mechanism of a raising/lowering decorative body unit and the rotation mechanism of a back upper back rotation ornamental body from a front. FIG. 177 is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative substrate from the front in a state in which the back up/down lifting decorative body unit in the back up production unit is moved to the appearance position.

The back production unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back production unit 3100 above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. As shown in FIG. 171 and FIG. 172, the back production unit 3400 includes a transparent front front rotating decoration 3410 having a shaft shaft 3410a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface and a front front rotating decoration. A transparent back front decorative body 3421 extending in the left and right direction in which the shaft shaft 3410a of the 3410 penetrates in the center of the left and right direction, and a front surface (hereinafter, referred to as “surface (mounting Surface).)), and a rear upper front decorative substrate 3422 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a rear upper front decorative body 3421 provided behind the rear upper front decorative substrate 3422 and on the front surface. And a unit base 3423 that rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3410a of the front upper rotating decorative body 3410.

In addition, the back production unit 3400 is provided between a rear cover 3424 attached so as to form a space with the rear surface of the unit base 3423 and a unit base 3423 having a rotation axis on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424. Back front rotation drive motor 3425 mounted so as to project into the space of the above, spur gear-shaped drive gear 3426 mounted on the rotation shaft of the back front rotation drive motor 3425, and meshing with the drive gear 3426. A rotary gear 3427 that is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3410a of the back-side front rotating decorative body 3410 and has a detection piece 3427a protruding forward, and a back-side front decorative substrate 3422. And a back rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type) which is attached to the rear surface of the rotation gear 3427 and can detect the detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427.

In addition, the back production unit 3400 includes a back elevation drive motor 3429 mounted on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so that the rotation shaft projects into the space between the front unit base 3423 and the back elevation drive. The spur gear-shaped motor gear 3430 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 3429, the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430, and the portion protruding outward from the circumference of the gear portion 3431a penetrate the rear cover 3424. An elevating cam gear 3431 rotatably attached to the rear cover 3424, which has a drive pin 3431b protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape and a detection piece 3431c protruding forward from the outer periphery of the gear portion 3431a. , A back side up/down detection sensor 3432 (lead type) attached to the rear surface of the back side front decoration substrate 3422 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3431c of the up/down cam gear 3431, and a tip provided with a back side rear rotation decoration body 3440 The up and down decorative body unit 3450 whose rear end is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 about the axis in the front-rear direction so that the side moves up and down by the revolution of the drive pin 3431b of the up and down cam gear 3431. A spring 3433 that urges the elevating/decorating body unit 3450 to rotate in a direction in which the tip end side moves upward, and a rear cover 3424 are attached to the rear side, so that the elevating/decorating body unit 3450 is moved upward. And a rod-shaped restricting member 3434 that restricts the movement of the.

As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 includes a transparent rear back rotating decorative body 3440 in which a shaft shaft 3440a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface penetrates in the center. A rear back decorative body 3451 and a back provided behind the rear rear decorative body 3451 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”). The upper rear decorative substrate 3452 and the rear upper decorative member 3451 are attached to the front surface from the rear of the rear upper decorative substrate 3452 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3423. And a lifting unit base 3453 that rotatably supports the shaft 3440a.

Also, the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 includes a back up rear rotation drive motor 3454 attached to the front surface of the up/down unit base 3453 such that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and a rotation shaft of the back up rear rotation drive motor 3454. Drive gear 3455 attached to the drive gear 3455, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3456 engaged with the drive gear 3455 and rotatably attached to the lifting unit base 3453, and a first transmission gear 3456. And a second transmission gear 3457 in the form of a spur gear that is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453, and a shaft shaft 3440a of the rear rear rotating decorative body 3440 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3457. And a rotary gear 3458 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rear end.

Further, the back-and-up elevator decoration unit 3450 is a gear cover attached to the rear surface of the elevator unit base 3453 so as to cover the drive gear 3455, the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotating gear 3458 from the rear side. 3459, and a motor cover 3460 attached to the front surface of the lifting unit base 3453 so as to cover the rear upper rear rotation drive motor 3454 from the front.

The back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 of the back-up production unit 3400 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3410a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back front rotating decorative body 3410 penetrates the back front decorative body 3421, the back front decorative substrate 3422, and the unit base 3423, and the unit base 3423 and the rear side. It extends to the space between the cover 3424 and the cover. The back front decoration 3421 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back front rotation decoration 3410 stacked in front and back at the center in the left-right direction, and the rear petals are between the front petals. It has a decoration that looks like it was rotated to be located at.

The back upper front decorative substrate 3422 extends left and right over substantially the entire length in the left and right direction of the back upper front decorative body 3421. By illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, the back-up front rotating decoration 3410 and the back-up front decoration 3421 can be illuminated and decorated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back front decorative substrate 3422 are surface mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

The back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421 are formed transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 is formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of ridges extending linearly in a short direction in random directions. The concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) is such that, in one petal of the cherry blossoms that is embellished by the ornamental body 3421, the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center of the petal toward the periphery ( That is, a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) along the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5 world view) are applied by printing, and the back side front of the back side front decoration body 3421 The pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) should have a certain shade in the region other than the region corresponding to the rotary ornament 3410 (so that the shade is lighter and more transparent than the shade in the peripheral portion of the petal). ) (That is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)), a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are applied by printing. The front surface (mounting surface) of the back front decorative substrate 3422 disposed behind the back front decoration 3421 can be visually recognized through the back front decoration 3421 (even at the peripheral portion of the petal). ing.

The attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the part number of the front-side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back-side front decorative substrate 3422 and the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged. (Furthermore, the front-side electronic component may include the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component.) A back side front decorative body 3421 is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back side front decorative substrate 3422 by silk printing with a predetermined paint color, and a transparent back side front decorative body 3421 is provided behind the transparent back side front decorative body 3410. Then, since the back front decorative board 3422 is arranged in order, the predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front decorative board 3422 is transferred via the back front decorative body 3421. , Or through the front back decoration 3421 and the front front rotation decoration 3410, and when a predetermined color of the paint can be visually recognized when a plurality of LEDs are off. Characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be discriminated by the predetermined paint color.

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the surface (mounting surface) of the back-side front decorative substrate 3422 is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white) resin. ing.

A plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type), a backside rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type), and a backside up/down detection sensor 3432 (lead type) are soldered to the surface (front surface) of the backside front decorative substrate 3422. White on all areas except pads, through holes, lands, etc., with a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid-coated white resist"). Resist layer is formed. A plurality of connectors (surface mount type), a backside rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type), and a backside up/down detection sensor 3432 (lead type) are soldered to the backside (rearside) of the backside front decorative substrate 3422. A white resist layer is formed of a solid white resist over the entire area except the pads, through holes, lands, and the like. Further, although not shown, on the surface (front surface) of the back-side front decorative substrate 3422, the part number of the front-side electronic component and the front-side electronic component are provided near the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the component is arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component) The surface-side notation part indicating () may be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back-side front decorative substrate 3422, a region showing the part number of the back-side electronic component and the position where the back-side electronic component is arranged in the vicinity of the back-side electronic component such as a connector. The attribute of the back side electronic component such as (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. ) Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a light yellow paint which is inconspicuous to white.

The unit base 3423 has through holes 3423a through which the back upper rotation detection sensor 3428 and the back upper lift detection sensor 3432 attached to the rear surface of the back front decorative substrate 3422 are inserted. The rear cover 3424 is formed in an arc shape in which the cylindrical support shaft 3424a protruding rearward from the rear surface and the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 are coaxial with the shaft shaft 3410a of the back front rotating decorative body 3410. And an extended slit 3424b. The support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is for rotatably supporting the upper and lower lifting decorative body unit 3450, and is inserted into the shaft hole 3453a of the lifting unit base 3453.

The detection piece 3427a of the rotary gear 3427 is detected by the back-side rotation detection sensor 3428 which penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and projects rearward. The elevating cam gear 3431 has a gear portion 3431a formed in a semi-circular shape, and a drive pin 3431b protruding rearward is provided at a portion bulging outward from the opposite side of the gear portion 3431a. The drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 penetrates the slit 3424b of the rear cover 3424 and is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 in the rear upper/lower elevating decorative body unit 3450. Further, the detection piece 3431c of the lifting cam gear 3431 is detected by the back-up lifting detection sensor 3432 which penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and projects rearward.

The back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3440a that projects rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back rear rotating decorative body 3440 passes through the back rear decorative body 3451, the back rear decorative substrate 3452, and the lifting unit base 3453, and then the lifting unit base 3453. Extends to the rear side. The rear back decoration 3451 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the rear back rotation decoration 3440 stacked one on top of the other and then rotated so that the rear petals are located between the front petals. It has a decoration that looks like it was made.

The back-up rear decorative board 3452 can cause the LEDs mounted on the front surface to emit light so that the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 can be illuminated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 are surface-mounting type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

The back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are formed transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3451 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of ridges extending linearly in a short direction in random directions. In the petals of one of the cherry blossoms, which are struck by the decorative body 3440 and the rear decorative body 3451, the pachinko machine 1 (so that the density becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center of the petal toward the peripheral edge) A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) according to the concept of the game board 5 (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but the back and back are rotated. Through the decorative body 3440 and the rear back decorative body 3451 (even at the peripheral portion of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the rear rear decorative substrate 3452 arranged behind the rear rear decorative body 3451 can be visually recognized. It is like this.

It should be noted that the front side electronic component such as a part number of the front side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs or connectors mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear decorative board 3452 and a region indicating a position where the front side electronic component is arranged. The front side notation indicating the attributes (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component may be included). A portion is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-up rear decoration substrate 3452 by silk printing with a predetermined paint color, and a transparent back-up rear decoration body 3440 is provided behind the transparent back-up rear decoration body 3440. Since 3451 and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 are arranged in order, the predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 causes the back-up rear decorative body 3451 to be printed. In the case where the color of the predetermined paint can be visually recognized through the rear decorative body 3451 and the rear rotating decorative body 3440, and a plurality of LEDs are turned off. Characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be discriminated by the color of a predetermined paint.

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear back decorative substrate 3452 is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white) resin, and the connector is The housing is made of white resin (also known as natural color, which is recognized as the same color as white (natural color)).

On the surface (front surface) of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452, a white resist solution is applied to the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). On the back surface (rear surface) of the rear decorative board 3452, a white resist layer is formed by a solid white resist on the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a connector (surface mounting type) is soldered. Are formed. Further, although not shown, on the surface (front surface) of the back-and-back rear decorative substrate 3452, the part number of the front-side electronic component and the front-side electronic component are provided near the front-side electronic components of the plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position to arrange (in addition, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component The surface-side notation part indicating the type may be printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452, although not shown, a part number of the back-side electronic component near the back-side electronic component of the connector, a region indicating the position where the back-side electronic component is arranged, etc. The attributes of the back side electronic component (In addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included.) Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a light yellow paint which is inconspicuous with respect to white.

The elevating unit base 3453 is provided on the right side of the shaft hole 3453a and the shaft hole 3453a through which the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is inserted so as to be rotatable relative to the base end side (right end side in front view). And an elongated hole-shaped slit 3453b extending along a line passing through the center of the shaft hole 3453a. The drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the lift unit base 3453. On the front surface of the motor cover 3460, decoration imitating a cherry blossom is formed.

Here, the reason why white color is used as the resist liquid and yellow color is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is noticeable when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (rear side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. While the notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface is When the side notation part (reverse side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow backside notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 produces a glittering light emission by the illumination by the light emitting portions such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors. Thus, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the front surface (front surface) of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 are in the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). The surface-side notation that enables the specification of the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors on the white resist is printed by silk printing with yellow paint, so that the white color when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface notation part inconspicuous to the resist, in addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (during light emission), it is a solid white color with high reflectance. Of the surface of the back and front decorative substrate 3422 and the back and rear decorative substrate 3452 by the combination of the resist and the surface side notation printed by silk printing with yellow paint that is very close to the reflectance of white. The reflectance can be kept high.

If yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow color printed by silk printing may become pale yellow or dark yellow due to variations in the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a wide range of yellow (yellow on the bright side and yellow on the dark side). Even if you specify yellow, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

Next, the movement of the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410, the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440, and the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 in the back-up production unit 3400 will be described. In the normal state, the back production unit 3400 detects the detection piece 3427a of the rotary gear 3427 attached to the shaft shaft 3410a of the back front rotation decorative body 3410 by the back rotation detection sensor 3428. The upper front rotary ornament 3410 is in a state in which one petal faces upward (see FIG. 175). In this state, when the drive gear 3426 is rotated by the front back rotation drive motor 3425, the back front rotation ornamental body 3410 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3427.

Further, in a normal state, the back up and down decorative body unit 3450 in which the back rear rotating decorative body 3440 is provided on the front end side is in a state of extending in the left-right direction, and the entire body excluding the front end side is It is located behind the back-up front decorative body 3421 and is in a retracted position invisible from the front (see FIG. 176(a)). In addition, the portion of the back up and down decorative body unit 3450 that projects to the left of the back front decorative body 3421 is located in the rear of the back front left effect unit 3700 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, It is invisible from the front.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3431c of the elevation cam gear 3431 is detected by the back up/down detection sensor 3432. Further, the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 is located below the center of its revolution, and near the end far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b of the lifting unit base 3453 of the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450. positioned.

More specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point between the drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 and the slit 3453b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the lift cam gear 3431. As a result, even if a force is exerted to rotate the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction so that the tip end side moves downward due to the own weight of the back up/down elevating body unit 3450, that force Since the force line passes through the rotation center of the lifting cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b that is in contact with the slit 3453b, the lifting cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the lift unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back upper lift decorative body unit 3450 rotates so that the tip side moves downward from the retracted position. There is no. Therefore, the own weight of the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back up/down lifting drive motor 3429 via the lifting unit base 3453 and the lifting cam gear 3431.

Note that, in a normal state, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 may be brought into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting unit base 3453 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back-and-forth lifting decoration unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 is moved counterclockwise by the force acting from the slit 3453b via the drive pin 3431b. Try to rotate in the direction of the surroundings. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b comes into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, and the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450 can be prevented from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. ..

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3430 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back up/down drive motor 3429, the elevator cam gear 3431 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the gear portion 3431a meshed with the motor gear 3430. Thus, the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3431b revolves clockwise, the drive pin 3431b moves leftward and upward, and the drive pin 3431b slides in the slit 3453b toward the shaft hole 3453a. The lifting/lowering unit base 3453 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction about the shaft hole 3453a so that the front end side of the lifting/lowering unit base 3453 is moved downward by its own weight.

When the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves clockwise and moves above a straight line connecting the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 and the center of the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, the drive pin 3431b moves. The slit 3453b slides in the direction away from the shaft hole 3453a. When the drive pin 3431b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 is stopped by the back up/down drive motor 3429, and at the same time, the drive pin 3431b. The revolution of the is stopped.

This stops the counterclockwise rotation of the back up/down decorative body unit 3450 via the lifting/lowering unit base 3453, so that the front end side of the back up/down decorative body unit 3450 including the back/up rear rotating decorative body 3440 is fixed. , And the appearance position is moved to a position lower than the back-up front decorative body 3421 (see FIG. 176(b)). In this appearance position, since the front end side is located below the center vicinity of the back up/down decorative body unit 3450 and below the back front decorative body 3421, the back rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the like are visually recognized from the front. It becomes possible.

In the state where the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 is at the appearance position, the normal line passing through the contact point with the slit 3453b in the drive pin 3431b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the lifting cam gear 3431. As a result, even if the force of further rotating the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction is exerted by the weight of the rear upper elevating decorative body unit 3450, the force line of the force is applied to the slit 3453b. The elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate because it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b in contact therewith. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the lifting unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450 rotates counterclockwise from the appearance position so that the tip side moves further downward. In addition, the weight of the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back up/down lifting drive motor 3429 via the lifting cam gear 3431.

It should be noted that in the state in which the back-and-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is at the appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3431 may be further revolved so that the drive pin 3431b is brought into contact with the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting/lowering unit base 3453 is attempted to rotate further in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back-and-front lifting/decorating body unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 is driven by the force acting from the slit 3453b via the drive pin 3431b. Try to rotate in the direction of the surroundings. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b comes into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, and the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450 can be prevented from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. ..

In a state where the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the back up rear rotating decorative body 3440 provided on the front end side can be visually recognized from the front. In the back-up/down lifting decoration unit 3450, when the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454, the back-up rear rotation decoration is performed via the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotation gear 3458. The body 3440 can be rotated about the longitudinal axis (see FIG. 176(b)). Therefore, when the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 is visible from the front, by rotating the driving gear 3455 by the back-up rear rotating drive motor 3454, the rotating back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 can be made visible. ..

When the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 is returned from the appearance position to the retracted position, the back up/down driving motor 3429 rotates the motor gear 3430 in the opposite direction to the above, so that the drive pin 3431b of the up/down cam gear 3431 moves up and down. The inner surface of the slit 3453b of the unit base 3453 is pressed downward, the lifting unit base 3453 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the tip end side of the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450 moves upward. Then, when the detection piece 3431c of the lift cam gear 3431 is detected by the back up/down detection sensor 3432, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 by the back up/down drive motor 3429 is stopped to move the back up/down decoration unit 3450 to the retracted position. Can be restored.

At this time, the spring 3433 urges the back up/down decorative body unit 3450 in the clockwise direction, assists the rotation of the back up/down decorative body unit 3450 to the retracted position side, and lifts the back up/down. The load on the drive motor 3429 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 177, the back production unit 3400 of the present embodiment is provided with the back front decorative substrate 3422 behind the back front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back front decorative body 3421. By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front decorative substrate 3422, the rear upper front rotating decoration 3410 and the rear upper front decoration 3421 can be illuminated and decorated. Further, since the back-up rear decorative board 3452 is provided behind the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-up rear decoration board 3452 appropriately emit light. By doing so, the back-up rear decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 can be illuminated and decorated.

At this time, the LED on the back rear decorative board 3452 is caused to emit light in a state where the back up and down decorative body unit 3450 is rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position side, so that the back up rear rotating decoration that is light-emitting decorated. The body 3440 and the rear back decorative body 3451 can be shown to the player.

[5-9h. Left rear production unit]
Next, the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main FIGS. 178 to 184 and the like. 178(a) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 178(b) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 179 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left effect unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left effect unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. It is a figure. FIG. 181 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decoration unit of the back rear left rendering unit seen from the front, and FIG. 182 is a rear rear left decoration unit of the back rear left rendering unit disassembled from the back. It is the exploded perspective view seen. FIG. 183 is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the rear left effect unit from the front. FIG. 184 is an explanatory diagram showing movement of the back-rear left decorative body unit in the back-rear left effect unit.

The rear rear left effect unit 3500 of the rear unit 3000 is provided near the left end in the rear box 3010 and in front of the left side of the rear rear effect unit 3100. The rear-rear-left production unit 3500 includes a transparent rear-rear-left rotation decoration 3510 that is rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction and a rear-rear-left decoration that rotatably supports the rear-rear-rotation decoration 3510 on the lower end side. A body unit 3520 and a back rear left drive unit 3550 mounted in the back box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the back rear left decoration body unit 3520 around an axis in the front-rear direction are provided.

The rear back left rotation decorative body 3510 of the rear rear left production unit 3500 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom. The back-rear left-handed rotating decorative body 3510 has a shaft shaft 3510a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape (see FIG. 182).

As shown in FIGS. 181 and 182, the rear back left decoration unit 3520 includes a transparent rear rear left decoration 3521 through which a shaft shaft 3510a of the transparent rear left rotation decoration 3510 penetrates at the center. A rear rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the rear left decorative body 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”), and the rear rear A front cover 3523 attached from the rear of the left decorative substrate 3522 to the rear side of the rear rear left decorative body 3521 and rotatably supporting the shaft 3510a of the rear rear left rotating decorative body 3510, and a front cover 3523. The movable base 3524 is attached to the rear side and has an upper end side rotatably attached to the back rear left drive unit 3550.

In addition, the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 includes a rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3524 such that the rotation shaft projects between the movable base 3524 and the front cover 3523, and a rear rear A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3526 attached to the rotation shaft of the left rotation drive motor 3525, and a flat gear attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3510a of the back rear left rotation decoration 3510 that meshes with the drive gear 3526. And a gear-shaped rotary gear 3527.

The back-rear left decoration body 3521 of the back-rear left decoration body unit 3520 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back-rear left rotation decoration body 3510 stacked one on top of the other, and the rear petals have front petals. It is formed in such a shape that it is rotated so as to be located between the two. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 are surface mounting type, and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

The rear back left rotation decoration 3510 and the rear rear left decoration 3521 are formed transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the back-rear left rotation decoration 3510 and the back-rear left decoration 3521 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of linearly extending ridges extending in a random direction. In the petals of one of the cherry blossoms, which is struck by the decorative body 3510 and the rear left decorative body 3521, the pachinko machine 1 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) along with the concept of the game board 5 (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but the back left rotation Through the decoration body 3510 and the back rear left decoration body 3521 (even at the peripheral portion of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear left decoration substrate 3522 arranged behind the back rear left decoration body 3521 can be visually recognized. It is like this.

The attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the part number of the front-side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear rear left decorative substrate 3522 and the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged. (Furthermore, the front surface notation part indicating the shape of the front surface electronic component, the size of the front surface electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front surface electronic component, and the model of the front surface electronic component may be included.) The rear back left decorative substrate 3522 is printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522, and a transparent rear rear left decorative body 3521 is provided behind the transparent rear rear left rotating decorative body 3510. Since the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 is arranged in order, the predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 is the back rear left decorative body 3521, and If the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized through the rear left rotating decorative body 3510 and a plurality of LEDs are turned off, characters, symbols, and shapes are determined by the predetermined paint color. (That is, the attribute of the front side electronic component indicated by the front side notation portion) can be determined.

In addition, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 has a package made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same as white).

On the surface (front surface) of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522, a white resist solution is applied to the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). On the rear surface (rear surface) of the left rear decorative substrate 3522, a white resist layer is formed by a solid white resist on the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a connector (surface mounting type) is soldered. Are formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the rear rear left decorative substrate 3522, although not shown, a part number of the front side electronic component and a front side electronic component are provided near the front side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the component is arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component) The surface-side notation part indicating () may be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back-rear left decorative substrate 3522, a region showing the part number of the back-side electronic component and the position where the back-side electronic component is arranged near the back-side electronic component such as a connector, although not shown. The attribute of the back side electronic component such as (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. ) Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a light yellow paint which is inconspicuous to white.

Here, the reason why white color is used as the resist liquid and yellow color is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is noticeable when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (rear side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. While the notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface is When the side notation part (reverse side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow backside notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 produces a glittering light emission by the illumination by the light emitting portions such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors. Thus, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. For this reason, as described above, the white resist liquid is applied to the front surface (front surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522, excluding the pads to which the plurality of LEDs are soldered, the through holes, the lands, and the like. A white coating layer (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”) formed to form a white resist layer, and a white coating layer is further formed on the solid-coated white resist. The front surface side that makes it possible to specify a full-color LED that can emit color is printed by silk printing with yellow paint, so that the yellow surface side against the white resist when the full-color LED that can emit multiple colors is turned off. In addition to making the notation inconspicuous, a solid white resist with a high reflectance and a white reflectance with a high reflectance when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (when emitting light) With the combination of the front side notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to the above, the reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back rear left decoration substrate 3522 can be kept high.

If yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow color printed by silk printing may become pale yellow or dark yellow due to variations in the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a wide range of yellow (yellow on the bright side and yellow on the dark side). Even if you specify yellow, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

The front cover 3523 is formed in a shape in which a front view has the same shape as the outer shape of the back rear left decorative body 3521 and a portion that extends in a quadrangle from the upper left of the portion to the upper side. .. The front cover 3523 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending in a rectangular shape upward. The front cover 3523 is formed in a shallow container shape that is opened rearward.

The movable base 3524 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3523, and the upper end side thereof extends above the upper end of the front cover 3523. The movable base 3524 has a shaft hole 3524a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the upper end side, and an operation pin 3524b protruding forward in a cylindrical shape at a position apart from the shaft hole 3524a. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear rear left drive unit 3550 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 so as to be relatively rotatable. The operating pin 3524b projects forward at a position below and to the right of the shaft hole 3524a.

This rear-rear-left decorative body unit 3520 rotates the drive gear 3526 by the rear-rear left-hand rotation drive motor 3525 to move the rear-rear left-hand rotating decorative body 3510 through the rotary gear 3527 meshing with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the back rear left drive unit 3550 includes a vertically extending flat plate-shaped reinforcing plate 3551 having a support shaft 3551a that rotatably supports the back rear left decoration unit 3520. , A vertically extending unit base 3552 mounted on the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3551 and mounted in the back box 3010, a unit cover 3553 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3552, and a rotation on the upper front surface of the unit cover 3553. A rear rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 mounted such that its shaft projects between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped motor gear mounted on the rotation shaft of the rear rear-rear left up-down drive motor 3554 3555 and.

The rear rear left drive unit 3550 is also a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3556 that meshes with the motor gear 3555 and is rotatably attached to the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3557a that meshes with the transmission gear 3556. An elevating cam gear 3557 having a drive pin 3557b protruding rearward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a, and a detection piece 3557c protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3557a, and an elevating cam gear A drive pin 3557b of 3557 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a extending left and right, and a left and right lower portion of the first slit 3558a. The operation pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 in the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520. Has a second slit 3558b slidably inserted therein, and a link member 3558 slidably attached in the vertical direction between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553.

Further, the back rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spring 3559 that urges the link member 3558 upward, a flat partition plate 3560 provided between the link member 3558 and the elevating cam gear 3557, and a unit cover. The back rear left relay board 3561 attached to the front surface of the back side 3553, and the back rear left up/down detection sensor 3562 (lead back up/down detection sensor 3562 mounted on the back surface of the back rear left relay board 3561 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3557c of the up/down cam gear 3557). Type), and.

It should be noted that a white resist solution is applied to the front and rear surfaces of the back-rear left relay board 3561 over the entire area excluding various connectors and pads to which the back-rear left up/down detection sensor 3562 is soldered, through holes, lands, and the like. White resist layers are respectively formed by the white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-painted white resist”) formed as described above. Although not shown in the drawing, on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear left relay board 3561, the part number of the front-side electronic component and the front-side electronic component are provided near the front-side electronic component such as a plurality of mounted connectors. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the component is arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component) The surface-side notation part indicating () may be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. Although illustration is omitted, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back rear left relay board 3561, the part number of the back electronic component, the back electronic Attributes of the back side electronic component such as an area indicating the position where the part is arranged (further, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the back side electronic component) The back side notation part indicating () may be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color which is inconspicuous to white. The back-rear left relay board 3561 is not a decorative board and has no LEDs mounted, but is a board provided inside the game board 5, so the front and rear surfaces of the back-rear left relay board 3561 are provided with reflectors (reflectors). By functioning as a board, when the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is refracted inside the game board 5, this light is emitted toward the front of the game board 5. It is possible to contribute to the production.

The reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear rear left drive unit 3550 is a metal plate that extends vertically, and a support shaft 3551a projects forward at the upper part. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is relatively rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 of the rear rear left decoration unit 3520.

The unit base 3552 extends vertically longer than the reinforcing plate 3551 so that the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is located near the center in the vertical direction. The unit cover 3553 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the unit base 3552, and is formed in a shallow container shape that is opened rearward.

In the elevating cam gear 3557, the drive pin 3557b penetrates the slit 3560a of the partition plate 3560 and is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558. The detection piece 3557c is detected by a back rear left up/down detection sensor 3562 which penetrates the unit cover 3553 and projects rearward. The link member 3558 extends vertically and has a first slit 3558a provided near the upper end and a second slit 3558b provided at the lower end. The spring 3559 has a lower end attached to the link member 3558 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3560.

The partition plate 3560 has a slit 3560a extending in a semi-circular shape into which the drive pin 3557b of the lifting cam gear 3557 is inserted. The rear back left relay substrate 3561 relays the connection between the rear rear left decoration substrate 3522, the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the rear rear left up/down drive motor 3554, the rear rear left up/down detection sensor 3562, and the performance drive substrate 1720. It is for doing.

Next, the operation of the back rear left effect unit 3500 will be described. In a normal state, the back-rear left effect unit 3500 has a back-rear left decorative body 3510 provided with a back-rear left rotating decorative body 3510 on the lower end side (tip side) as shown in FIGS. 183 and 184(a). The unit 3520 is in a state of a retracted position in which the unit 3520 hangs down. In this normal state, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back rear left rotating decorative body 3510) is located behind the back front left effect unit 3700 and is invisible from the front (player side). Has become.

Further, in a normal state assembled in the game board 5, most of the back rear left effect unit 3500 is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700. Only part of 3554 faces forward (see FIG. 131 and the like). It should be noted that the portion of the rear-side left-left-elevation drive motor 3554 that faces the front is covered with a portion outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and thus the player It is invisible from the side (see FIG. 135).

In this normal state, the detection piece 3557c of the lift cam gear 3557 is detected by the rear rear left lift detection sensor 3562. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is located immediately below the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3557, and is located near the left end in the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558. Further, in a normal state, the link member 3558 is located at the lower moving end, and the operating pin 3524b located on the right side of the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 is It is located near the left end in the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558.

In this normal state, the link member 3558 is biased by the spring 3559 in the direction of moving upward, but the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 with the first slit 3558a is Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3557b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3557b via the first slit 3558a by the biasing force of the spring 3559, the drive pin 3557b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3558 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3558 does not move upward, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back rear left rotating decorative body 3510) is centered on the shaft hole 3524a (support shaft 3551a) of the movable base 3524 from the retracted position. In addition to rotating, the biasing force of the spring 3559 does not act on the rear rear left up/down drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the up/down cam gear 3557 and the like.

Note that, in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the lifting cam gear 3557 may be brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. As a result, when the link member 3558 moves upward due to the biasing force of the spring 3559, the force acting from the first slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b causes the lifting cam gear 3557 to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 tries to revolve in the direction of moving to the left. However, since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b. Cannot be revolved, and the upward movement of the link member 3558 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3557 to prevent the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 from rotating from the retracted position.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3555 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the rear rear left lift drive motor 3554, the lift cam gear 3557 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction via the transmission gear 3556 and the gear portion 3557a. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b of the lifting cam gear 3557 revolves in the counterclockwise direction. When the drive pin 3557b revolves in the counterclockwise direction, the inner surface of the first slit 3558a is pressed upward and the inside of the first slit 3558a is slid rightward, and the link member 3558 moves upward. It will be.

When the link member 3558 moves upward, the operation pin 3524b of the movable rear base 3524 of the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520, which protrudes below and to the right of the support shaft 3551a, moves upward due to the inner surface of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558. The movable base 3524 rotates in a counterclockwise direction around the support shaft 3551a while the operation pin 3524b slides rightward in the second slit 3558b, and the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 is pressed. It rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the retracted position (see FIGS. 184(a) and 184(b)). At this time, the urging force of the spring 3559 assists the upward movement of the link member 3558 to reduce the load on the rear rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554.

In this way, the rear-rear-left decorative body unit 3520 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 3551a, whereby the rear-rear-left rotating decorative body 3510 provided at the lower end moves to the right. While moving upward while the back-rear left rotation decorative body 3510 moves to the right of the back-rear left effect unit 3700, it becomes visible from the front (player side).

In the rear rear left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment, the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates when the elevating cam gear 3557 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state (the retracted position). The position is the first appearance position (see FIG. 184(b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated about 44 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

Then, when the elevating cam gear 3557 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3557b slides leftward in the first slit 3558a. Then, when the drive pin 3557b moves to a position right above the center of revolution (revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the rear-rear left-right lifting drive motor 3554 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3557b stops. ..

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is stopped, the counterclockwise rotation of the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 is stopped, and the second appearance position is reached (FIG. 184(c). See)). In the state of the second appearance position, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated about 74 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

When the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3557b is located directly above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557. In this state, the weight of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 causes a force to rotate the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 in a clockwise direction around the support shaft 3551a, and the force acts on the movable base. The link member 3558 tries to move downward via the actuating pin 3524b of the 3524 and the second slit 3558b, but the drive pin 3557b inserted in the first slit 3558a is located immediately above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3557b does not revolve and the lifting cam gear 3557 does not rotate, the link member 3558 does not move downward, and the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 rotates from the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the own weight of the rear back left decorative body unit 3520 does not act on the rear rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the elevating cam gear 3557, and the like.

In the state where the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3557 is further rotated counterclockwise so that the drive pin 3557b abuts on the left end of the first slit 3558a. Is also good. As a result, when the back rear left decoration unit 3520 tries to rotate clockwise around the support shaft 3551a due to its own weight and the link member 3558 tries to move downward via the operating pin 3524b, The force acting from the one slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b causes the elevating cam gear 3557 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3557b tries to revolve so as to move to the left, but since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b can revolve. Therefore, the link member 3558 is prevented from moving downward, and the back rear left decoration unit 3520 can be locked so as not to rotate in the second appearance position.

In the state in which the rear back left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the rear rear left rotating decoration body 3510 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). Can be seen from.

In this rear-rear-left decorative body unit 3520, by rotating the drive gear 3526 by the rear-rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the rear-rear left rotating decorative body 3510 is moved through the rotary gear 3527 meshing with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated around a longitudinal axis (see Figure 183). Therefore, when the back rear left rotation decoration 3510 is visible from the front side (player side), when the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the rotating back rear left rotation decoration 3510 is displayed. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is returned from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the back rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 is used to set the motor gear 3555 to the reverse of the above. By rotating the drive pin 3557b of the ascending/descending cam gear 3557, the link member 3558 can be moved downward, and as the link member 3558 moves downward, the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 is moved. It rotates in the direction of the retracted position (clockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3557c of the lift cam gear 3557 is detected by the back rear left lift detection sensor 3562, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 is retracted by stopping the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the back rear left lift drive motor 3554. The position can be restored.

Since the back rear left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment is provided with the back rear left decoration substrate 3522 behind the back rear left rotation decoration body 3510 and the back rear left decoration body 3521 as shown in FIG. 183. By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear back left decoration substrate 3522, the rear rear left rotation decoration 3510 and the rear rear left decoration 3521 can be illuminated. At this time, the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position side, and the LEDs of the rear rear left decorative substrate 3522 are caused to emit light, whereby the light emission decoration is performed. The back rear left rotation decoration 3510 and the back rear left decoration 3521 which are displayed can be shown to the player.

[5-9i. Right rear production unit]
Next, the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main FIGS. 185 to 191 and the like. 185(a) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 185(b) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 186 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right effect unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 187 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right effect unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. It is a figure. FIG. 188 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right decorative body unit of the back rear right rendering unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 189 is a rear rear right decorative body unit of the back rear right rendering unit disassembled from the back. It is the exploded perspective view seen. FIG. 190 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the rear rear right effect unit from the front. FIG. 191 is an explanatory diagram showing movement of the back-rear right decorative body unit in the back-rear right effect unit.

The back rear right effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the right end in the back box 3010 and in front of the right side of the back rear effect unit 3100. The back-rear right rendering unit 3600 includes a transparent back-rear right rotating decoration body 3610 that is rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction and a back-rear right decoration that rotatably supports the back-rear rotating decoration body 3610 at the lower end side. A body unit 3620 and a back rear right drive unit 3650 mounted in the back box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the back rear right decoration unit 3620 around an axis in the front-rear direction are provided.

The back rear right rotation decorative body 3610 of the back rear right effect unit 3600 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom. The back rear right rotation decorative body 3610 has a shaft shaft 3610a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface (see FIG. 188).

As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 includes a transparent rear rear right decorative body 3621 through which the shaft shaft 3610a of the transparent rear rear right rotating decorative body 3610 penetrates at the center. A rear rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the rear right decorative body 3621 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, also referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”), and the rear rear A front cover 3623 mounted from the rear of the right decorative substrate 3622 to the rear side of the rear rear right decorative body 3621 and rotatably supporting the shaft shaft 3610a of the rear rear right rotating decorative body 3610, and a front cover 3623. The movable base 3624 is attached to the rear side and has an upper end side rotatably attached to the rear rear right drive unit 3650.

In addition, the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 includes a rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3624 so that the rotation shaft projects between the movable base 3624 and the front cover 3623, and a rear rear A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3626 attached to the rotation shaft of the right rotation drive motor 3625, and a flat gear attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3610a of the rear rear right rotation decoration body 3610 that meshes with the drive gear 3626. And a gear-shaped rotating gear 3627.

The back rear right decoration body 3621 of the back rear right decoration body unit 3620 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610, which are stacked in front and back, and the rear petals are front petals. It is formed in such a shape that it is rotated so as to be located between the two. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 are surface mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

The back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 and the back rear right decoration body 3621 are formed transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the back-and-back right rotating decorative body 3610 and the back-and-right rotating decorative body 3621 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of ridges extending linearly in a short direction in random directions. In the petals of one of the cherry blossoms, which are struck by the decorative body 3610 and the right rear decorative body 3621, the pachinko machine 1 (so that the density becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center of the petal toward the peripheral edge) A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) along with the concept of the game board 5 (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but the back right rotation Through the decoration body 3610 and the back rear right decoration body 3621 (even in the peripheral part of the petals), the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear right decoration substrate 3622 arranged behind the back rear right decoration body 3621 can be visually recognized. It is like this.

The attributes of the front side electronic component such as the part number of the front side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622, the area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is arranged, and the like. (Furthermore, the front-side electronic component may include the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component.) The rear back right decorative board 3622 is printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear right decorative board 3622, and behind the transparent back right rotating decoration 3610, a transparent back right decoration 3621, Since the back rear right decorative board 3622 is arranged in order, the predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear right decorative board 3622 is the back rear right decorative body 3621, and When the color of the predetermined paint can be visually recognized through the rear right rotating decorative body 3610 and a plurality of LEDs are turned off, characters, symbols, and shapes are determined by the color of the predetermined paint. (That is, the attribute of the front side electronic component indicated by the front side notation portion) can be determined.

In addition, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622 is made of a white resin (a color recognized to be the same as white) resin.

On the surface (front surface) of the rear right decorative board 3622, a white resist solution is applied to the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). On the rear surface (rear surface) of the right rear decorative board 3622, a white resist layer is formed by a solid white resist on the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a connector (surface mounting type) is soldered. Are formed. Further, although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622, the part number of the front side electronic component and the front side electronic component are provided near the front side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the component is arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component) The surface-side notation part indicating () may be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back rear right decorative substrate 3622, an area showing the part number of the back electronic component and the position where the back electronic component is placed near the back electronic component such as a connector. The attribute of the back side electronic component such as (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. ) Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a light yellow paint which is inconspicuous to white.

Here, the reason why white color is used as the resist liquid and yellow color is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is noticeable when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (rear side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. While the notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface is When the side notation part (reverse side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow backside notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 produces a glittering light emission by the illumination by the light emitting portions such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors. Thus, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. For this reason, as described above, the white resist liquid is applied to the front surface (front surface) of the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622, except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white coating layer (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”) formed to form a white resist layer, and a white coating layer is further formed on the solid-coated white resist. The front surface side that makes it possible to specify a full-color LED that can emit color is printed by silk printing with yellow paint, so that the yellow surface side against the white resist when the full-color LED that can emit multiple colors is turned off. In addition to making the notation inconspicuous, a solid white resist with a high reflectance and a white reflectance with a high reflectance when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (when emitting light) By combining with the front side notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to the above, the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) of the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 can be kept high.

If yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow color printed by silk printing may become pale yellow or dark yellow due to variations in the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a wide range of yellow (yellow on the bright side and yellow on the dark side). Even if you specify yellow, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

The front cover 3623 is formed in a shape in which a front view has the same shape as the outer shape of the back rear right decoration body 3621 and a portion that extends in a quadrangle from the upper right of the portion to the upper side. .. The front cover 3623 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending upward in a quadrangle. The front cover 3623 is formed in a shallow container shape that is opened rearward.

The movable base 3624 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3623, and the upper end side extends above the upper end of the front cover 3623. The movable base 3624 has a shaft hole 3624a penetrating forward and backward on the upper end side, and an operation pin 3624b protruding forward in a cylindrical shape at a position apart from the shaft hole 3624a. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear rear right drive unit 3650 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 so as to be relatively rotatable. Further, the operation pin 3624b projects forward at a position below and to the left of the shaft hole 3624a.

When the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the rear rear right ornamental unit 3620 moves the rear rear right revolution ornament 3610 through the rotary gear 3627 meshing with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

As shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the rear rear right drive unit 3650 includes a vertically extending flat plate-shaped reinforcing plate 3651 having a support shaft 3651a that rotatably supports the rear rear right decoration unit 3620. A vertically extending unit base 3652 which is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 and is installed in the back box 3010; a vertically extending unit cover 3653 whose upper portion is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3652; A rear rear right up-and-down drive motor 3654 is attached to the upper portion of the front surface of 3653 so as to project between the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653. And a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3655.

The rear rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3657a meshing with the motor gear 3655, a drive pin 3657b protruding rearward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3657a, and a front surface of the gear portion 3657a. A lift cam gear 3657 having a detection piece 3657c protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery, a first slit 3658a extending left and right in which a drive pin 3657b of the lift cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted, and a first slit. It has a second slit 3658b which extends left and right below 3658a and into which the operation pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 in the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is slidably inserted, and has a unit base 3652 and a unit cover 3653. And a link member 3658 mounted slidably in the up and down direction.

Further, the back rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spring 3659 that urges the link member 3658 upward, a flat partition plate 3660 provided between the link member 3658 and the elevating cam gear 3657, and a unit cover. A rear rear right relay board 3661 attached to the front surface of the front side 3653 and a rear rear right up/down detection sensor 3662 (lead Type) and a lower base 3663 which is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 below the unit base 3652 and to which the lower portion of the unit cover 3653 is attached.

A white resist solution is applied to the front surface and the rear surface of the back rear right relay substrate 3661 over the entire area excluding various connectors and pads to which the back rear right up/down detection sensor 3662 is soldered, through holes, lands, and the like. White resist layers are each formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”) formed by the above method. Although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the rear rear right relay board 3661, the part number of the front side electronic component and the front side electronic component are provided near the front side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted connectors. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the component is arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component) The surface-side notation part indicating () may be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back rear right relay board 3661, although not shown, in the vicinity of the back surface electronic components such as the plurality of connectors and the back rear right up/down detection sensor 3662, the part number of the back surface electronic component, the back surface Attributes of the back side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the side electronic component is arranged (further, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the back side) (The electronic part type may be included.) is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with white. .. The back rear right relay board 3661 is not a decorative board, but the LED is not mounted, but since it is a board provided in the game board 5, the front and rear surfaces of the back rear right relay board 3661 are reflective plates (reflectors). By functioning as a board, when the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is refracted inside the game board 5, this light is emitted toward the front of the game board 5. It is possible to contribute to the production.

The reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear rear right drive unit 3650 is a metal plate that extends vertically, and a support shaft 3651a projects forward in the upper part. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is relatively rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 of the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620.

The unit base 3652 extends above the reinforcing plate 3651 so that the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is located near the lower end. The unit cover 3653 extends vertically with substantially the same length from the upper end of the unit base 3652 to the lower end of the reinforcing plate 3651 (lower base 3663), and is formed in the shape of a shallow container opened rearward.

The elevating cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658 by the drive pin 3657b penetrating the slit 3660a of the partition plate 3660. The detection piece 3657c is detected by a rear rear right up/down detection sensor 3662 that penetrates the unit cover 3653 and projects rearward. The link member 3658 extends vertically and has a first slit 3658a provided near the upper end and a second slit 3658b provided at the lower end. The spring 3659 has a lower end attached to the link member 3658 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3660.

The partition plate 3660 has a slit 3660a extending in a semi-circular shape into which the drive pin 3657b of the lifting cam gear 3657 is inserted. The back rear right relay board 3661 relays the connection between the back rear right decoration board 3622, the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back rear right up/down drive motor 3654, and the back rear right up/down detection sensor 3662, and the performance drive board 1720. It is for doing.

Next, the operation of the back rear right effect unit 3600 will be described. In a normal state, the rear-rear right effect unit 3600 has a rear-rear right decorative body 3610 provided with a rear-rear right rotating decorative body 3610 on the lower end side (tip side) as shown in FIGS. 190 and 191(a). The unit 3620 is in a retracted position in which it hangs down. In this normal state, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (back rear right rotating decorative body 3610) is located behind the back front right performance unit 3800 and is invisible from the front (player side). Has become.

Further, in a normal state assembled on the game board 5, the back rear right effect unit 3600 is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back front right effect unit 3800, and the entire front (player side). Since it is invisible.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3657c of the lift cam gear 3657 is detected by the back rear right lift detection sensor 3662. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is located immediately below the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3657 and is located near the right end of the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658. Further, in a normal state, the link member 3658 is located at the lower moving end, and the operation pin 3624b located on the left side of the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the rear rear right decoration unit 3620 is The link member 3658 is located near the right end in the second slit 3658b.

In this normal state, the link member 3658 is urged by the spring 3659 in a direction in which the link member 3658 moves upward. Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3657b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3657b via the first slit 3658a by the biasing force of the spring 3659, the drive pin 3657b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3658 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3658 does not move upward, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (back rear right rotating decorative body 3610) is centered on the shaft hole 3624a (support shaft 3651a) of the movable base 3624 from the retracted position. It does not rotate, and the biasing force of the spring 3659 does not act on the rear rear right lifting drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the lifting cam gear 3657, and the like.

Note that, in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 may be brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. As a result, when the link member 3658 moves upward due to the biasing force of the spring 3659, the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b causes the lifting cam gear 3657 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction. .. At this time, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 tries to revolve in the direction of moving to the right. However, since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b. Cannot be revolved, and the upward movement of the link member 3658 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3657, and the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 can be prevented from rotating from the retracted position.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3655 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the rear right lifting drive motor 3654, the lifting cam gear 3657 is rotated in the clockwise direction via the gear portion 3657a, and the lifting cam gear 3657 is rotated. The drive pin 3657b revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3657b revolves in the clockwise direction, the inner surface of the first slit 3658a is pressed upward while sliding leftward in the first slit 3658a, and the link member 3658 moves upward. Becomes

When the link member 3658 moves upward, the operation pin 3624b of the movable rear base 3624 of the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 protruding below the support shaft 3651a and leftward is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658. The movable base 3624 rotates in the clockwise direction around the support shaft 3651a while the operation pin 3624b slides leftward in the second slit 3658b, and the rear rear right decoration unit 3620 retracts. It rotates in the clockwise direction from the position (see FIGS. 191(a) and 191(b)). At this time, the urging force of the spring 3659 assists the upward movement of the link member 3658, thereby reducing the load on the rear rear right up/down drive motor 3654.

In this way, the rear-rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a, so that the rear-rear right rotating decorative body 3610 provided on the lower end side moves to the left. By moving to the upper side, the back rear right rotation decorative body 3610 moves to the left of the back front right effect unit 3800 and becomes visible from the front (player side).

In the rear-rear right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment, the rear-rear right decorative body unit 3620 is at the turning position when the elevating cam gear 3657 is rotated about 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the normal state (the retracted position). Is the first appearance position (see FIG. 191(b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated about 44 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

Then, when the elevating cam gear 3657 further rotates in the clockwise direction from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3657b comes to slide to the right in the first slit 3658a. Then, when the drive pin 3657b moves to a position right above the center of revolution (revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the rear rear right up/down drive motor 3654 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3657b stops. ..

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is stopped, the clockwise rotation of the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is stopped, and the second appearance position is reached (FIG. 191(c)). See). In the state of the second appearance position, the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated about 74 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

In the state where the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3657b is located immediately above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657. In this state, due to the own weight of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620, a force that causes the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction about the support shaft 3651a acts, and the force moves. The link member 3658 tries to move downward via the operation pin 3624b of the base 3624 and the second slit 3658b, but the drive pin 3657b inserted in the first slit 3658a is located directly above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3657b does not revolve and the lifting cam gear 3657 does not rotate, the link member 3658 does not move downward, and the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates from the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the own weight of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 does not act on the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the lifting cam gear 3657 and the like.

In addition, even when the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3657 may be further rotated in the clockwise direction to bring the drive pin 3657b into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. good. Accordingly, when the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction about the support shaft 3651a by its own weight and the link member 3658 tries to move downward via the operation pin 3624b, The force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b causes the lifting cam gear 3657 to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3657b tries to revolve so as to move to the right, but since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b can revolve. Therefore, the link member 3658 is prevented from moving downward, and the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 can be locked so as not to be rotatable in the state of the second appearance position.

In the state where the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). Can be seen from.

In this rear rear right decorative body unit 3620, by rotating the drive gear 3626 by the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the rear rear right rotating decorative body 3610 is moved through the rotary gear 3627 meshing with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated around a longitudinal axis (see FIG. 190). Therefore, when the back rear right rotation decoration 3610 is visible from the front side (player side), when the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the rotating back rear right rotation decoration 3610 is displayed. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is returned from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 sets the motor gear 3655 to the reverse of the above. By rotating the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657, the link member 3658 can be moved downward, and with the movement of the link member 3658 downward, the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is moved. It rotates in the direction of the retracted position (counterclockwise direction). When the detection piece 3657c of the lift cam gear 3657 is detected by the back rear right lift detection sensor 3662, the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back rear right lift drive motor 3654 is stopped to retract the back rear right decoration unit 3620. The position can be restored.

Since the back rear right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment is provided with the back rear right decoration substrate 3622 behind the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 and the back rear right decoration body 3621 as shown in FIG. 190, By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear right decoration substrate 3622, the back rear right rotating decoration body 3610 and the back rear right decoration body 3621 can be illuminated and decorated. At this time, the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position side, and the LED of the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622 is caused to emit light, whereby the light emission decoration is performed. The back right rotation decorative body 3610 and the back right decoration 3621 that are displayed can be shown to the player.

[5-9j. Front left production unit]
Next, the back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 192 to 195 and the like. FIG. 192(a) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 192(b) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 193 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left rendering unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 194 is one rear front left decorative body unit in the back front left rendering unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. 195(a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the closed state, and FIG. 195(b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the open state.

The back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear left effect unit 3500 such that the vicinity of the left end is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back front left production unit 3700 is, in order from the top, three back front left decorations of a first back front left decoration body unit 3710A, a second back front left decoration body unit 3710B, and a third back front left decoration body unit 3710C. It is composed of a body unit 3710.

In the back front left effect unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 195, the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is compared with the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. It is slanted so that the upper end moves to the right. The shape of the rear cover 3715 of the first back front left decoration unit 3710A is slightly different from that of the second back front left decoration unit 3710B and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C.

As shown in FIGS. 193 and 194, the back-front left decorative body unit 3710 of the back-front left effect unit 3700 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3711 penetrating in the front-rear direction and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3711. -Shaped shutter support member 3712 and the shutter support member 3712 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction on the front surface of the shutter support member 3712, and each is rotatably supported about an axis in the horizontal direction so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 can be opened and closed. And a shutter unit 3730.

The back front left decoration unit 3710 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3712 from the rear, and is provided behind the back front left decoration 3713 and the back front left decoration 3713 in the shape of a transparent plate. The front front left decorative board 3714 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) and the back front left decorative board 3714 from behind. And a rear cover 3715 attached to the front cover 3711 and attached to the front of the back rear left effect unit 3500.

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3710 includes a support plate 3716 made of a metal plate attached to the left side of the shutter support member 3712, a back front left drive solenoid 3717 attached to the support plate 3716, and a back front The transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger of the left drive solenoid 3717 and the support plate 3716 are attached to the support plate 3716 so as to be rotatable around an axis in the left-right direction. A rotating link member 3719 and an opening/closing slider 3720 that slides in the vertical direction to open/close the shutter unit 3730 by rotating the link member 3719 are provided.

The front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 is formed in a shape such that the “convex” shape is tilted to the right and the corners are rounded (a shape in which “pine” is designed). On the front surface of the front cover 3711, a portion in which a metallic decorative portion 3711a having metallic luster is formed is arranged. In other words, a portion having the metallic decorative portion 3711a having metallic luster is arranged near the front cover 3711. In the present embodiment, the portion having the metallic decorative portion 3711a having a metallic luster is integrally molded with the front cover 3711. However, the molded portion and the front cover are molded separately from the front cover 3711. 3711 may be assembled.

The metallic luster of the metal decoration portion 3711a can give a high-grade feeling, can make the front cover 3711 stand out, and further enhance the presence of the front cover 3711. The metal decoration portion 3711a is formed by stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold color in this embodiment) by the hot stamping described above. The front cover 3711 has a metal decoration portion 3711a formed only on the front surface thereof, and no metal decoration portion 3711a is formed on the side surface of the front cover 3711. Accordingly, the creepage distance from the metal decorative portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 to the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be made longer by at least the length of the side surface of the front cover 3711. Therefore, in the metal decorative portion 3711a. It is possible to prevent the accumulated static electricity from flowing to the back front left decoration substrate 3714 and damaging the back front left decoration substrate 3714. Therefore, it is possible to improve the insulation property against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

The shutter support member 3712 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3712a on the front surface for rotatably supporting the shaft portions 3733 of the respective shutter members 3731 of the shutter unit 3730. Further, the shutter support member 3712 has a boss portion 3712b which projects cylindrically forward from the vicinity of the left end of the front surface. The boss portion 3712b is slidably inserted into the slit 3720b of the opening/closing slider 3720, and a support plate 3716 is attached to the tip thereof.

The shutter unit 3730 is composed of a plurality (here, eight) of shutter members 3731. The shutter member 3731 includes a plate-shaped shutter 3732 extending in the left-right direction, a shaft portion 3733 extending in a cylindrical shape from both ends of the shutter 3732 in the left-right direction, and a left-hand side after protruding in the axis-perpendicular direction from the tip of the left-side shaft portion 3733. And a crank shaft 3734 that extends in a cylindrical shape toward one side.

The shutter 3732 is formed to have a length and a shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3731 is arranged with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3711. The shaft portion 3733 projects from the vicinity of the upper end of the shutter 3732 with the surface of the shutter 3732 facing forward. The crank shaft 3734 is located rearward of the shaft portion 3733.

Since the shaft portion 3733 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3712a of the shutter support member 3712, the shutter member 3731 can rotate around the shaft portion 3733 in the left-right direction. The crank shaft 3734 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3720a of the opening/closing slider 3720.

Although not shown in the figure, the back front left decorative body 3713 includes characters, items, logos, etc. in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The design is applied. The back-front left decorative body 3713 functions as an inner lens that can diffuse the light from the LEDs of the back-front left decorative substrate 3714. The surface of the back front left decoration 3713, which is an inner lens, is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffused and refracted. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear front left decorative substrate 3714 to be arranged. Note that a lens cut may be provided on the front surface and the back surface of the front left decoration body 3713 (may be formed in a polyhedron), or on the back surface instead of the front surface of the back front left decoration body 3713. May be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 are surface mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is open, the back-front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is visible from the front, as will be described later. In this open state, the back front left decorative body 3713 is transparently formed, and therefore the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 disposed behind the back front left decorative body 3713 (mounted) The surface) is visible.

The attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the part number of the front-side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the front left front decorative substrate 3714 and the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged. (Furthermore, the front-side electronic component may include the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component.) The back front left decorative board 3714 is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 with a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and the back front left decorative board 3714 is arranged behind the transparent back front left decorative body 3713. Therefore, in the open state where the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened, the predetermined paint color printed by silk-screen printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 passes through the back front left decoration body 3713. When a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where the LEDs are turned off, characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the front side notation portion is changed depending on the predetermined paint color). The attribute of the front side electronic component shown) can be determined.

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the front left left decorative substrate 3714 has a package made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same as white).

On the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714, a white resist solution is applied to the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). On the back surface (rear surface) of the left front decorative substrate 3714, a white resist is applied with a solid white resist over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors (surface mounting type) are soldered. Layers have been formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714, although not shown, a part number of the front side electronic component and a front side electronic component are provided near the front side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the component is arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component) The surface-side notation part indicating () may be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. Although illustration is omitted, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back-front left decorative substrate 3714, the part number of the back-side electronic component and the position where the back-side electronic component is arranged are provided in the vicinity of the back-side electronic component such as a plurality of connectors. The attributes of the back side electronic component such as the indicated area (In addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a light yellow paint which is inconspicuous to white.

Here, the reason why white color is used as the resist liquid and yellow color is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is noticeable when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (rear side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. While the notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface is When the side notation part (reverse side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow backside notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 produces a glittering light emission by the illumination by the light emitting portions such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors. Thus, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the white resist solution is applied to the front surface (front surface) of the back-front left decorative substrate 3714 over the entire area except the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white coating layer (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”) forms a white resist layer, and a white coating is further formed on the solid-coated white resist. The front surface side that makes it possible to specify a full-color LED capable of emitting color light is printed by silk printing with a yellow paint, so that the surface side of a yellow surface against the white resist when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off. In addition to making the notation inconspicuous, a solid white resist with a high reflectance and a white reflectance with high reflectance when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned on (when emitting light) With the combination of the front side notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to, the reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be kept high.

If yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow color printed by silk printing may become pale yellow or dark yellow due to variations in the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a wide range of yellow (yellow on the bright side and yellow on the dark side). Even if you specify yellow, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

The support plate 3716 extends vertically with the plate surface facing left and right, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent rightward. A portion of the support plate 3716, which is bent to the right on the front end side, is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712, and the remaining portion is protruded rearward through the left side of the shutter support member 3712. There is. In addition, the support plate 3716 has a support pin 3716a that projects from the vicinity of the lower end to the right in a cylindrical shape. The support pin 3716a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3719.

The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is attached to the support plate 3716 in a direction in which the plunger moves forward and backward. The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger projects downward. By inserting the support pin 3716a of the support plate 3716, the link member 3719 can be rotated around the axis in the left-right direction about the support pin 3716a. The link member 3719 is provided with a first connection portion 3719a connected to the transmission member 3718 on the rear side and a second connection portion connected to the opening/closing slider 3720 with a portion into which the support pin 3716a is inserted. The connection portion 3719b is provided on the front side.

The open/close slider 3720 extends vertically with a height substantially the same as the height of a shutter unit 3730 including a plurality of shutter members 3731, and a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3734 of the shutter unit 3730 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3720a and a slit 3720b into which the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the front left production unit 3700 will be described. In a normal state, the back front left effect unit 3700 is in a state in which the shutter 3732 of the shutter member 3731 of the shutter unit 3730 has its plate surface facing forward as shown in FIG. The shutter 3732 closes the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711. In this normal state, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is invisible from the front (player side). Although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern provided on the rear left front decorative body 3713 is provided on the front surface of the shutter unit 3730 (a plurality of shutters 3732). Has been done.

In a normal state, the front left drive solenoid 3717 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger is projected downward by the urging force of the spring. Further, in the normal state, the open/close slider 3720 is located at the upper moving end, and the crank shaft 3734 of each shutter member 3731 is located above the shaft portion 3733.

When the front left drive solenoid 3717 is energized (ON) in this normal state, the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3718 moves upward, the first connecting portion 3719a of the link member 3719 connected to the transmission member 3718 moves upward, and the link member 3719 rotates about the support pin 3716a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3719b on the side opposite to the first connecting portion 3719a moves downward. Then, by the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3719b of the link member 3719, the opening/closing slider 3720 connected to the second connecting portion 3719b moves downward.

By moving the opening/closing slider 3720 downward, the crank shaft 3734 of the shutter member 3731 inserted in the transmission groove 3720a is pressed downward, and the shutter shaft 3734 is positioned below the shaft portion 3733. The member 3731 rotates about the shaft portion 3733. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3732 is oriented in the up-down direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3732 and the front side of the rear of the shutter unit 3730 is provided. The left decorative body 3713 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 195(b)).

After that, the back left drive solenoid 3717 is de-energized (OFF), so that the plunger that has moved upward moves downward due to the urging force of the spring, and by moving in the opposite direction, The shutter unit 3730 in the open state can be returned to the closed state which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front left production unit 3700 of the present embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3730 by the back front left drive solenoid 3717, the back front left decoration body 3713 is changed from the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3730. It is possible to switch to the decoration (pattern) of, and it is possible to entertain the change of the decoration to the player.

Further, since the back front left decoration substrate 3714 is provided behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front left decoration body 3713, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a plurality of LEDs of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 are made to emit light. In this way, the player can see the shutter unit 3730 that is decorated with light emission, and when the shutter unit 3730 is in the open state, by causing a plurality of LEDs of the front left front decoration substrate 3714 to emit light, the front left front that is decorated with light emission is displayed. The ornamental body 3713 can be shown to the player.

Further, in the back front left effect unit 3700, there are three back front left decoration unit units: a first back front left decoration body unit 3710A, a second back front left decoration body unit 3710B, and a third back front left decoration body unit 3710C. Since the shutter units 3730 can be independently opened and closed, and the lights of the 3710 can be decorated, a variety of effects can be provided to the player by appropriately combining the effects of the three back front left decorative body units 3710. I can show you.

[5-9k. Front right production unit]
Next, the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 196 to 199 and the like. FIG. 196(a) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 196(b) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 197 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right rendering unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 198 is one rear front right decorative body unit in the back front right rendering unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. 199(a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in a closed state, and FIG. 199 is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in an open state.

The back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear right effect unit 3600 such that the upper part near the right end is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back box 3010. .. The back front right effect unit 3800 has three back front right decorations, a first back front right decoration body unit 3810A, a second back front right decoration body unit 3810B, and a third back front right decoration body unit 3810C, in order from the top. It is composed of a body unit 3810.

In the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 199, the first back front right decoration unit 3810A is compared with the second back front right decoration unit 3810B and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C. It is slanted so that the upper end moves to the left. The shape of the rear cover 3815 of the first back front right decoration unit 3810A is slightly different from that of the second back front right decoration unit 3810B and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C.

As shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, the back-front right decorative body unit 3810 of the back-front right effect unit 3800 has a frame-shaped front cover 3811 penetrating forward and backward, and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3811. -Shaped shutter support member 3812, and the shutter support member 3812 is vertically arranged in a row on the front surface of the shutter support member 3812 and is rotatably supported around a horizontal axis so that the frame of the front cover 3811 can be opened and closed. And a shutter unit 3830.

Further, the back front right decoration unit 3810 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3812 from the rear, and is provided behind the back front right decoration 3813 and the back front right decoration 3813 in a transparent flat plate shape. The front front right decorative board 3814 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) and the back front right decorative board 3814 from behind. And a rear cover 3815 attached to the front cover 3811 and attached to the front of the rear rear right effect unit 3600.

Further, the back front right decoration unit 3810 includes a support plate 3816 made of a metal plate attached to the right side of the shutter support member 3812, a back front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816, and a back front. A transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger of the right drive solenoid 3817 and a transmission member 3818 attached to the support plate 3816 so as to be rotatable around an axis in the left-right direction. A rotating link member 3819 and an opening/closing slider 3820 that slides in the vertical direction by the rotation of the link member 3819 to open/close the shutter unit 3830 are provided.

The front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 is formed such that the outer shape is a shape in which a “convex” character is tilted to the left and the corners are rounded (a shape in which “pine” is designed). On the front surface of the front cover 3811, a portion in which a metallic decorative portion 3811a having metallic luster is formed is arranged. In other words, a portion having the metallic decorative portion 3811a having metallic luster is arranged near the front cover 3811. In the present embodiment, the portion having the metallic decorative portion 3811a having metallic luster is molded integrally with the front cover 3811, but is molded separately from the front cover 3811, and the molded portion and the front cover 3811 may be assembled.

The metallic luster of the metal decoration portion 3811a can give a high-class feeling, can make the front cover 3811 stand out, and further enhance the presence of the front cover 3811. The metal decoration portion 3811a is formed by pressing a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment) by the hot stamping described above. The front cover 3811 has a metal decoration portion 3811a formed only on its front surface, and no metal decoration portion 3811a is formed on the side surface of the front cover 3811. Accordingly, the creepage distance from the metal decorative portion 3811a of the front cover 3811 to the back front right decorative substrate 3814 can be made longer by at least the length of the side surface of the front cover 3811. It is possible to prevent the accumulated static electricity from flowing to the back front right decoration substrate 3814 and damaging the back front right decoration substrate 3814. Therefore, it is possible to improve the insulation property against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

The shutter support member 3812 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3812a on the front surface thereof, which rotatably supports the shaft portions 3833 of the shutter members 3831 of the shutter unit 3830. Further, the shutter support member 3812 has a boss portion 3812b which projects cylindrically forward from the vicinity of the right end of the front surface. The boss portion 3812b is slidably inserted into the slit 3820b of the opening/closing slider 3820, and the support plate 3816 is attached to the tip thereof.

The shutter unit 3830 is composed of a plurality (here, eight) of shutter members 3831. The shutter member 3831 includes a plate-shaped shutter 3832 that extends in the left-right direction, a shaft portion 3833 that extends in a cylindrical shape from both ends in the left-right direction of the shutter 3832, and a right-hand side after protruding from the tip of the right-side shaft portion 3833 in the axis-perpendicular direction. And a crank shaft 3834 that extends in a cylindrical shape toward one side.

The shutter 3832 is formed to have a length and a shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3831 is arranged with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3811. The shaft portion 3833 projects from near the upper end of the shutter 3832 with the surface of the shutter 3832 facing forward. The crank shaft 3834 is located rearward of the shaft portion 3833.

The shaft portion 3833 of the shutter member 3831 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3812a of the shutter support member 3812, so that the shutter member 3831 can rotate around the shaft portion 3833 in the left-right direction. The crank shaft 3834 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3820a of the opening/closing slider 3820.

The back front right decorative body 3813, although not shown, includes characters, items, logos, etc. in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The design is applied. The back-front right decorative body 3813 functions as an inner lens that can diffuse the light from the LEDs of the back-front right decorative substrate 3814. The surface of the back front right decoration 3813, which is an inner lens, is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffused and refracted. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear right decorative board 3814 to be arranged. Note that a lens cut may be applied to the front surface of the back-front right decorative body 3813 (may be formed in a polyhedron), or on the back surface instead of the surface of the back-front right decorative body 3813. May be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back-front right decorative substrate 3814 are surface-mounting-type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened, the back-front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is visible from the front, as will be described later. In this open state, since the back front right decoration 3813 is transparently formed, the surface of the back front right decoration substrate 3814 (mounting) which is arranged behind the back front right decoration 3813 through the back front right decoration 3813 The surface) is visible.

The attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the part number of the front-side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the front-right decorative board 3814, the region indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged, and the like. (Furthermore, the front-side electronic component may include the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component.) The back front right decoration board 3814 is printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decoration board 3814, and the back front right decoration board 3814 is arranged behind the transparent back front right decoration body 3813. Therefore, in the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened, the predetermined paint color printed by silk-screen printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decoration substrate 3814 is transferred through the back front right decoration body 3813. When a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where the LEDs are turned off, characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the front side notation portion is changed depending on the predetermined paint color). The attribute of the front side electronic component shown) can be determined.

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the right front decorative board 3814 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white).

On the front surface (front surface) of the back-front right decorative substrate 3814, a white resist solution is applied to the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). On the back surface (rear surface) of the right front decorative board 3814, a white resist is applied by a solid white resist on the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. Layers have been formed. Further, although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the back-front right decorative substrate 3814, the part number of the front-side electronic component and the front-side electronic component are provided near the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the component is arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component) The surface-side notation part indicating () may be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. Although illustration is omitted, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back-front right decorative substrate 3814, the part number of the back-side electronic component and the position where the back-side electronic component is arranged are provided in the vicinity of the back-side electronic component such as a plurality of connectors. The attributes of the back side electronic component such as the indicated area (In addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a light yellow paint which is inconspicuous to white.

Here, the reason why white color is used as the resist liquid and yellow color is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is noticeable when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (rear side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. While the notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface is When the side notation part (reverse side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow backside notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 produces a glittering light emission by the illumination by the light emitting portions such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors. Thus, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the white resist solution is applied to the surface (front surface) of the front right decorative substrate 3814 over the entire area except the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white coating layer (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”) formed to form a white resist layer, and a white coating layer is further formed on the solid-coated white resist. The front surface side that makes it possible to specify a full-color LED that can emit color is printed by silk printing with yellow paint, so that the yellow surface side against the white resist when the full-color LED that can emit multiple colors is turned off. In addition to making the notation inconspicuous, a solid white resist with a high reflectance and a white reflectance with a high reflectance when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (when emitting light) With the combination of the surface side notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to the above, the reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 can be kept high.

If yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow color printed by silk printing may become pale yellow or dark yellow due to variations in the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a wide range of yellow (yellow on the bright side and yellow on the dark side). Even if you specify yellow, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

The support plate 3816 extends vertically with the plate surface facing leftward and rightward, and has a shape in which the front end side is bent leftward. A portion of the support plate 3816 that is bent to the left on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812, and the remaining portion passes through the right side of the shutter support member 3812 and projects rearward. There is. In addition, the support plate 3816 has a support pin 3816a that protrudes from the vicinity of the lower end to the left in a cylindrical shape. The support pin 3816a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3819.

The back-front right drive solenoid 3817 is attached to the support plate 3816 in a direction in which the plunger moves forward and backward. The back-front right drive solenoid 3817 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger projects downward. By inserting the support pin 3816a of the support plate 3816, the link member 3819 can rotate about the support pin 3816a about the axis in the left-right direction. The link member 3819 is provided with a first connecting portion 3819a connected to the transmission member 3818 on the rear side with a portion into which the support pin 3816a is inserted, and a second connecting portion 3820 connected to the opening/closing slider 3820. The connecting portion 3819b is provided on the front side.

The open/close slider 3820 extends vertically with a length substantially the same as the height of a shutter unit 3830 including a plurality of shutter members 3831. 3820a and a slit 3820b into which the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the back front right effect unit 3800 will be described. In the normal state of the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 199(a), the shutter 3832 of the shutter member 3831 of the shutter unit 3830 is in a state in which its plate surface faces forward, The shutter 3832 is in a closed state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is closed. In this normal state, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is invisible from the front side (player side). Although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern provided on the rear front right decoration 3813 is provided on the front surface of the shutter unit 3830 (the plurality of shutters 3832). Has been done.

In a normal state, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger is projected downward by the biasing force of the spring. Further, in the normal state, the open/close slider 3820 is located at the upper moving end, and the crank shaft 3834 of each shutter member 3831 is located above the shaft portion 3833.

In this normal state, when the front right drive solenoid 3817 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3818 moves upward, the first connecting portion 3819a of the link member 3819 connected to the transmission member 3818 moves upward, and the link member 3819 rotates about the support pin 3816a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3819b on the side opposite to the first connecting portion 3819a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3819b of the link member 3819 causes the opening/closing slider 3820 connected to the second connecting portion 3819b to move downward.

When the open/close slider 3820 moves downward, the crank shaft 3834 of the shutter member 3831 inserted in the transmission groove 3820a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crank shaft 3834 is positioned lower than the shaft portion 3833. The member 3831 rotates about the shaft portion 3833. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3832 is oriented in the up-down direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3832, and the front side of the rear of the shutter unit 3830 is provided. The right decorative body 3813 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 199(b)).

After that, by turning off the back right drive solenoid 3817 (OFF), the plunger that has moved upward moves downward due to the urging force of the spring, and by moving in the opposite direction, The shutter unit 3830 in the open state can be returned to the closed state which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front right effect unit 3800 of the present embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3830 by the back front right drive solenoid 3817, from the decoration (picture) of the shutter unit 3830 to the back front right decoration 3813. It is possible to switch to the decoration (pattern) of, and it is possible to entertain the change of the decoration to the player.

Further, since the back-front right decorative board 3814 is provided behind the shutter unit 3830 and the back-front right decorative body 3813, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a plurality of LEDs of the back-front right decorative board 3814 are made to emit light. The player can see the shutter unit 3830 which is light-emitted and decorated, and when the shutter unit 3830 is in an open state, by making a plurality of LEDs of the right front back decoration substrate 3814 emit light, the right-embodied back front is decorated. The ornamental body 3813 can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, in the back front right production unit 3800, three back front right decoration units, a first back front right decoration unit 3810A, a second back front right decoration unit 3810B, and a third back front right decoration unit 3810C. Since the shutter units 3830 can be independently opened/closed and the 3810 can be decorated with light emission, various effects can be provided to the player by appropriately combining the effects by the three back front right decoration units 3810. I can show you.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects (movable effects) on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 200 to 205 and the like. FIG. 200 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back-rear movable decorative body of the back-rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. FIG. 201 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the under-rear-center rotating decorative body of the under-rear-center production unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. FIG. 202 shows that the back-up rear rotating decorative body of the back-up rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-rear left rotating decorative body of the rear-rear left effecting unit is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back-rear right. It is the front view of the game board which shows the state where the rear right rotation ornamental body of the production unit is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, respectively. FIG. 203 shows that the back-rear left rotating decorative body of the back-rear left effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back-rear right rotating decorative member of the rear-rear right effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a moved state. FIG. 204 is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left effect unit and the shutter unit of the back front right effect unit from the closed state to the open state.

FIG. 205 shows the rear rear movable decorative body of the rear rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the rear rear rear rotating decorative body of the rear rear rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, and the rear rear of the rear rear left effect unit. Move the left rotating decorative body from the retracted position to the first appearance position, the back rear right rotating decorative body of the back rear right rendering unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back lower middle rotating decoration body of the back lower middle rendering unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where it is moved from the lowered position to the raised position.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting opening unit 2100, a side unit 2200, a side. Since the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed substantially transparent, in a normal state. As shown in FIG. 111, through them, the back front left decoration body 3030, the back front right decoration body 3040, and the back bottom left rotation of the back front left decoration unit 3020 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 are passed. Decorative body 3201, back lower right rotation decorative body 3251 of back lower right rendering unit 3250, back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 of back lower middle rendering unit 3300, back top front rotating decorative body 3410 and back top of back rendering unit 3400 The front decorative body 3421, the front cover 3711 and the shutter unit 3730 of the back front left effect unit 3700, the front cover 3811 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right effect unit 3800, and the like can be visually recognized well, and the center role object 2500. Through the inside of the frame, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well.

More specifically, the back front left decorative body 3030 is located on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the back front right decorative body 3040 is connected to the right rail 1005 from the stop portion 1006 of the front component 1000. It is located along the right middle unit 2700. Further, the rear-rear movable decoration body 3110 of the rear-rear effect unit 3100 is located behind the upper-rear effect unit 3400 and is invisible to the player.

In addition, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is located below the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500, behind the center of the side unit 2200 and the left general winning opening 2001, and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251. Is positioned below the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the first special winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 are visible from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 and the front unit 2000.

Further, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in a lowered position, and is positioned behind the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 so that the upper portion thereof projects into the frame of the center accessory 2500. ing. Since the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 sees this back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 from a diagonally upper position, the numeral decoration above the center of rotation is passed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be seen well.

Further, the back front decorative body 3421 of the back production unit 3400 extends left and right at the upper part of the game area 5a in a front view, and the upper left part from the center in the left-right direction is a transparent game panel 1100 and a center accessory. It can be seen through 2500, and the rest can be seen well through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 is in a state where one petal is directed upward at the center in the left-right direction in front of the back-up front decorative body 3421, and is good from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Can be seen. The back-up/down decorative body unit 3450 having the back-up/rear rotating decoration body 3440 of the back-up effect unit 3400 is in a retracted position, which is behind the back-up front decoration body 3421 in a normal state. It is invisible from the side.

Further, the back-rear left decorative body unit 3520 having the back-rear left rotating decorative body 3510 of the back-rear left rendering unit 3500 is in a retracted position which is behind the back-rear left rendering unit 3700 in a normal state. , It is invisible to the player. Further, the back-rear right decorative body unit 3620 having the back-rear right rotating decorative body 3610 of the back-rear right effect unit 3600 is in a retracted position which is behind the back-rear right effect unit 3800 in a normal state. , It is invisible to the player.

Further, the three back front left decorative body units 3710 of the back front left effect unit 3700 are vertically arranged along the left side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in a front view and are transparent games. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. Of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, the upper first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in a front view. The lower part is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The second back front left decorative body unit 3710B on the inner side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view. In the front view, most of the lower third back front left decorative body unit 3710C is located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500, and the right part is inside the frame of the center accessory 2500. positioned.

In the back front left effect unit 3700, in a normal state, the shutter unit 3730 is closed in each of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, and the back front left decorative body 3713 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3730 is visible.

Further, the three back front right decoration units 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 are vertically arranged along the right side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in a front view, and are transparent games. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. Of the three back front right decorative body units 3810, the upper first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is located on the right side behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in a front view, The left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. In the front view, the second rear front right decorative body unit 3810B on the inner side and the third rear front right decorative body unit 3810C on the lower side have a transparent game panel 1100 and a center on the right side from the left side of the center in the left-right direction. It is located behind the accessory 2500, and the remaining left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500.

In the back front right effect unit 3800, in a normal state, the shutter unit 3830 is closed in each of the three back front right decorative body units 3810, and the back front right decorative body 3813 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3830 is visible.

In the game board 5, the back unit production of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. Unit 3100, back lower left production unit 3200, back lower right production unit 3250, back lower middle production unit 3300, back upper production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700. , And the back front right effect unit 3800 perform a predetermined effect (movable effect or light emission effect).

Specifically, as an effect using the rear-side effect unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 200, by moving the slide guide 3130 downward by the rear-side drive motor 3126, the lock member 3134 is moved. The lock by is released, and the back rear movable decoration body 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearance position. This allows the player to show the effect (movable effect) in which the large back-back movable decorative body 3110 that crosses the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous game state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous to the player occurs. It is possible to make you think that it is, and to raise the expectation for the game.

In the rear-rear effect unit 3100, although not shown, after the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is dropped to the appearance position, the rear-rear drive motor 3126 moves the slide guide 3130 upward to move the rear-rear movable ornament. When the 3110 is returned to the retracted position, the normal/reverse rotation of the rear drive motor 3126 is appropriately changed to move the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 via the slide guide 3130 to the upper and lower sides of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. You may make it reciprocate up and down near the center of the direction. As a result, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down while blocking the vertical center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 and the rear rear The movable decorative body 3110 can be paid attention to, and the movement of the rear movable movable decorative body 3110 can be enjoyed.

As an effect using the lower back middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 201, the lower back middle lifting drive motor 3352 rotates the elevating arm 3357 to move the lower back middle decoration unit 3320. Is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, and at the same time, the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 rotates the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction. As a result, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 moves upward and is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 so as to block a part of the effect image of the effect display device 1600, which is good from the player side. Since it can be visually recognized and rotates, it can give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player.

Since the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with six numeral decorations, by rotating the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310, the impression that the roulette is rotating to the player as much as possible. Can be given. Therefore, when rotating the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect image such as "Soroku", and the number of the number decoration of the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 that has stopped rotating. Depending on, the "piece" may be advanced. As a result, the player is harassed depending on whether or not the rotating lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops rotating at the position of the desired numeral decoration so that the "piece" advances to the desired "box". It can be exciting and entertaining the player. Further, the player can make the player feel as if the expected value is increasing by advancing the "pieces", and can increase the expectation of the game.

As an effect using the lower back left effect unit 3200, the lower right effect unit 3250, the upper effect unit 3400, the rear left effect unit 3500, and the rear right effect unit 3600 in the reverse unit 3000, for example, FIG. As shown, in the back lower left production unit 3200, the back lower left drive motor 3205 rotates the back lower left rotating decoration 3201, and in the back lower right production unit 3250, the back lower right driving motor 3255 rotates the back lower right rotating decoration. Rotate 3251. In the back production unit 3400, the back front rotation drive motor 3425 rotates the back front rotation decoration body 3410, and the back elevation drive motor 3429 moves the back elevation work unit 3450 downward from the retracted position. At the same time as turning to the appearance position, the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454 rotates the back-up rear rotation decorative body 3440. Further, in the rear rear left effect unit 3500, the rear rear left lift drive motor 3554 moves the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 from the retracted position to the slightly upper right first appearance position, and the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 drives the rear rear. The left-hand rotation decorative body 3510 is rotated. Also, in the rear rear right effect unit 3600, the rear rear right lift drive motor 3654 moves the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position to the slightly upper left first appearance position, and the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625 drives the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625. The right rotation decorative body 3610 is rotated.

As a result, the back upper back rotating decoration 3440, the back rear left rotating decoration 3510, and the back right rotating decoration 3610 move to the front of the effect display device 1600 to be visible, and the back lower left rotating decoration. Since the body 3201, the back lower right rotation decoration body 3251, the back upper front rotation decoration body 3410, the back upper back rotation decoration body 3440, the back rear left rotation decoration body 3510, and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 rotate, respectively. By rotating the six ornaments, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game as if something good will happen.

At this time, the back up/down elevating drive motor 3429, the back rear left up/down drive motor 3554, and the back rear right up/down drive motor 3654 are appropriately repeated in the normal/reverse rotation to set the back up/down elevating decoration unit 3450, the back rear left adornment. The body unit 3520 and the back rear right decoration body unit 3620 may be swung, respectively. As a result, the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440, the back-rear left rotating decoration body 3510, and the back-rear right rotating decoration body 3610 rotate while swinging, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It can entertain the player.

Further, at this time, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be rotated. As a result, since the seven ornaments rotate around, it is possible to strongly suggest to the player that an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage (for example, a "big hit" game) occurs. It is possible to raise expectations for the game.

As an effect using the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The left decorative body unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position on the upper right, and the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 rotates the rear rear left rotation decoration 3510. Also, in the back rear right effect unit 3600, the back rear right lifting/lowering drive motor 3654 moves the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position to the upper left second appearance position, and the back rear right rotation driving motor 3625 drives the back rear right. The rotating decorative body 3610 is rotated. As a result, the eyes of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and the two ornaments rotate at a position approximately at the height, and there is something good that surprises the player. It is possible to make you think that it is, and to raise the expectation for the game.

At this time, in the effect display device 1600, the positions of the rear-rear left-handed rotation decoration body 3510 and the rear-rear-right rotation decoration body 3610 at the second appearance position are the concepts of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the pachinko machine 1). You may make it display the effect image which becomes the position of the eyes of the face of a predetermined character along the (world view of the game board 5). As a result, it is possible to show the player an effect in which the eyes of the character are spinning, and entertain the player.

As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 204, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 causes the shutter unit 3730 to operate in the back front left effect unit 3700. The shutter unit 3830 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the back front right drive solenoid 3817 in the back front right effect unit 3800 changes the shutter unit 3830 from the closed state to the open state. As a result, the back front left decorative body 3713 behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front right decorative body 3813 behind the shutter unit 3830 can be visually recognized from the player side, and therefore the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right. The decoration of the ornamental body 3813 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

It should be noted that, as an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, each has three back front left decorative body units 3710 and three back front right decorative body units 3810. The shutter unit 3730 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 may be individually opened and closed respectively, and a combination of the shutter unit 3730 and the shutter unit 3830 that are opened and closed. As a result, a variety of effects can be shown to the player, and the player can be prevented from getting bored.

The back unit production unit 3100, the back lower left production unit 3200, the back lower right production unit 3250, the back lower middle production unit 3300, the back production unit 3400, the back rear left production unit 3500, and the back right production unit 3600 in the back unit 3000. As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, for example, as shown in FIG. 205, all ornaments and the like may be movable. This allows
By moving all the ornaments, it is possible to convince the player that an advantageous game state (for example, a “big hit” game state) will occur, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the advantageous game state. In this case, in the rear rear left effect unit 3500 and the rear rear right effect unit 3600, the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 and the rear rear right decorative unit 3620 are moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. By doing so, contact with the back rear movable decoration body 3110 is avoided.

In the above description, the movement of each ornament is described, but when each ornament is moved, the LED of the decoration substrate provided at the rear is appropriately caused to emit light, so that the player can perform the light emission effect of the ornament. It can be shown and can further attract the player's interest.

In addition, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect and the light emission effect as described above can be appropriately combined and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. With this, it is possible to present the player with various patterns of effects by appropriately combining the light emission effects, the movable effects, the display effects, and the like, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and to use various effects. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

[5-11. Main effects of game board]
Next, main operation effects of the game board 5 of the present embodiment having the above configuration will be described. In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game panel 1100 having the game area 5a on the front side has an opening 1112 penetrating therethrough, and the game area 5a is distributed with a distribution area in which the game balls B can be distributed. A frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, which is formed into a shape along the inner circumference of the opening 1112, is divided into an impossible non-circulation region, and the front end is projected forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112 in this state, the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 becomes the flow area and the inner side becomes the non-flow area, by definition. Then, a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503, which is thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, is extended from the same position as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the non-circulation region side (inside). Together with the peripheral wall portion 2501, the flange portion 2502 that abuts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided from the portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided in the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the distribution area side (outer side). Since nothing is extended to the distribution region side of the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided in the above, it is possible to plant the obstacle nail N at a position as close to the peripheral wall portion 2501 as possible. Therefore, the substantial distribution area can be set to a position in contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501, and the substantial distribution area can be made larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine. That is, even if the non-circulation area (inside the frame of the center accessory 2500) defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is enlarged, the substantial distribution area is not reduced unlike the conventional pachinko machine. .. Therefore, while suppressing the distribution area in which the game ball B is distributed in the game area 5a from being substantially reduced, the non-distribution area defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is enlarged to thereby prevent the distribution. The effect image of the effect display device 1600 as an effect device provided in the rear of the area, the movable body of the effect unit, the decorative body, and the like can be made more visible, and the game balls B in the distribution area and the non-distribution area. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of entertaining any of the above effects.

Further, in the center accessory 2500, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced from the non-circulation region side (inner side) by the support portion 2503, and the peripheral wall portion can be formed by the flange portion 2502 provided at a portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided. Since the portion 2501 can be reinforced from the distribution area side (outside), and the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the flange portion 2502, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is improved. Even if the game ball B in the game area 5a comes into contact with (abuts on) a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be maintained by the support portion 2503 and the like. It is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) from being deformed or damaged.

Further, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by mounting the support portion 2503, the flange portion 2502, and the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 when the game ball B contacts. Can be prevented from being elastically deformed and flipping the game ball B like an elastic body (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a from making a strange movement different from the conventional one by contacting the peripheral wall portion 2501 and giving the player an unpleasant feeling. It is possible to prevent this from happening and to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is transparent, the support part 2503 extending from the peripheral wall part 2501 to the non-circulation region side can be made hard to see, and the support part 2503 (center Since the effect image of the effect display device 1600 as an effect device provided at the rear through the accessory 2500 and the movable body and the decorative object of the effect unit provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen, the non-distribution area. It is possible to increase the range in which the effect images, movable bodies, decorations, etc., that are provided in the rear of the display area can be made larger, and it is possible to make it easier to exert the effect of the effect by the effect device, and to be provided in the rear of the non-distribution area. Since the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the visible range of the movable body, the decorative object, and the like are large, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be obtained. it can.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is made transparent, the transparent portion provides light for illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to reflect, refract, diffuse, and transmit light from the light emitting means (such as the LED and the effect display device 1600), so that the transparent portions such as the support portion 2503 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 are flickered. It is possible to make it look lively, improve appearance, and enhance appeal to the player. At this time, steps or cutouts may be provided in the transparent support portion 2503 to further enhance the diffusion effect.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is made transparent, it is provided in the movable body (for example, the back front left effect unit 3700 or the back rear left effect unit 3500) provided behind the support part 2503. By the light emission from the light emitting means (LED), the above-described effects can be obtained, and the transparent support portion 2503 enables the player to recognize the presence of the movable body.

Further, since the transparent support part 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100 at the same position in the front-back direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall part 2501, the support part 2503 is formed in the game panel. The lens effect of the support unit 2503 can be reduced as compared with the case where the support unit 2503 is extended with the same thickness as 1100, and the support unit 2503 is behind the back front left decorative body 3030 and the rendering device (rendering display device 1600. Etc.), the lens effect of the transparent support part 2503 is further reduced, and a part behind the support part 2503 in the back front left decorative body 3030, the rendering image of the rendering device, the movable body, the decorative body, etc. ) Visibility can be improved, and the front left decoration 3030, the effect image, and the like can be more easily seen.

Further, at least a part of the tip side of the support part 2503 is formed in a shape different from that of the peripheral wall part 2501. Since a line different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be shown by the tip end side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, it becomes difficult to see a single design as compared with the case where the shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501 is seen, and it seems that details are taken into consideration. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a deep design.

Further, since at least a part of the tip end side of the support portion 2503 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the amount of extension from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not constant and different at that portion of the support portion 2503. Therefore, the reinforcing effect of the support portion 2503 on the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be improved by setting the extension amount according to the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 extends from the same position in the front-back direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall part 2501, the support part 2503 is a part of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 for the player. It is possible to make an illusion like that, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the support portion 2503.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and extends from the middle (in the middle) of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the front-rear direction, the rear portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is extended from the end side, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the reinforcing effect of the support portion 2503 on the distal end side of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Therefore, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is sufficiently increased. It is possible to keep it, and it is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) from being deformed or damaged even when the game medium comes into contact therewith.

Further, since the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is shaped so as to follow the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 and the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112, the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 The inner peripheral surface can be hidden, decorated, or made invisible by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, since the outer shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role object 2500 is a shape along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, when the center role object 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall part 2501 is It seems that it protrudes forward from the peripheral edge of the opening 1112, can give a sense of unity to the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) and the game panel 1100, and has a good-looking pachinko inside the game area 5a. The machine 1 can be provided.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 is attached to the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, whether the game panel 1100 is transparent or opaque, it is partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 inside the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. The effect image of the effect display device 1600 provided behind the non-circulation area, the movable body and the decoration of the effect unit, etc. can be favorably visually recognized from the front (player side), and the effect display device 1600. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of sufficiently exerting the effect of production by the above.

Furthermore, since the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is projected more forward than the front surface of the game panel 1100, when the game area 5a is viewed obliquely, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since it appears to protrude, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the existence of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and to easily recognize the distribution area and the non-distribution area partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, a flange portion 2502 extending to the distribution area side (outside) is provided in a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 where the support portion 2503 does not extend, and in a portion where the flange portion 2502 is provided. Does not provide the support part 2503 extending to the non-circulation area side (inside), the support part 2503 disturbs the visibility of the production device (the production display device 1600 or the production unit of the back unit 3000). Instead, the area in which the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the movable body of the effect unit can be seen can be increased, and the effect of the effect of the effect device can be more easily exhibited, and the effect device for the player can be achieved. It is possible to entertain the production by and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the center accessory 2500, since the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be maintained at the same level as that of the conventional product by the support portion 2503 and the flange portion 2502, the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the support portion 2503 are integrally resin-molded to form a metal. It is possible to prevent deformation of the molded product when it is removed from the mold.

Further, since the support part 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100, when the center accessory 2500 is integrally molded with synthetic resin, only the part of the support part 2503 is different from other parts. It is possible to prevent the difference in shrinkage amount from increasing, and it is possible to prevent the center accessory 2500 from being deformed during molding.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a frame-shaped front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and a flat-shaped game panel 1100 that closes the inside of the frame of the front component member 1000 from the rear side. , Rear and rear right/left raising/lowering drive motors 3554 and back/right/right producing unit 3600 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, as functional parts of the rear/left rear producing unit 3500 in the rear unit 3000, respectively. The motor 3654 is arranged so that at least a part thereof is outside the game area 5a in a front view, and between the game panel 1100 and the back rear left up/down drive motor 3554 and the back rear right up/down drive motor 3654, the back rear left. The front front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a so as to cover at least a portion of the lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654 in the game area 5a. Since the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 can cover and hide at least a part of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654, Through the transparent front component member 1000, the game panel 1100, and the game area 5a, it is possible to make the back rear left up/down drive motor 3554 and the back rear right up/down drive motor 3654 invisible to the player, and thus the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 is improved. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the back side left/right lifting drive motor 3554 and the back/right rear lifting/lowering drive motor 3654, and the front back left decoration 3030 and back front right decoration 3040 can be seen, The appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced in appealing power to the player.

Further, since the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the boundary of the game area 5a divided by the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 becomes difficult to understand, and therefore the outer periphery of the game region 5a is not divided. It is possible to give a sense of openness by looking like, and even if the game area 5a is the same size as a conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to make the game area 5a look larger. Therefore, since the game area 5a looks larger than the conventional pachinko machine, a strong impact can be given to the player, the expectation for the game on the pachinko machine 1 can be increased, and the game can be played. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced in appealing power to the player.

In addition, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are arranged to cover at least a portion in front of the functional parts such as the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654 in the game area 5a. Therefore, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 can prevent the functional parts from being seen in the game area 5a, and thus the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved. In addition to the same effects as described above, the functional parts can be made invisible even when viewed obliquely from the center side of the game area 5a.

Further, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 have a continuous decoration over the entire surface, and in front view, the back front extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a Since the decorations of the left decoration 3030 and the front right decoration 3040 are continuous over the entire surface, the continuous decoration can make the boundary of the outer periphery of the game area 5a difficult to understand, giving a feeling of openness to the game. The size of the region 5a can be made larger than the actual size, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the decoration of the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040. It is possible to make the player more prominent and appeal to the player.

Further, since the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are made opaque, the back rear left effect unit 3500 provided on the rear side through the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 and It is possible to prevent the back-rear right effect unit 3600 and the like from being visible, and it is good to see the back-rear left effect unit 3500 and the back-rear right effect unit 3600 etc. from the player side through the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the quality of the pachinko machine 1 and improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, in the front view, at least a part of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654 as functional parts are arranged outside the game area 5a (in the rear back left lift drive motor 3554). Since it is arranged completely (entirely outside the game area 5a), in order to arrange the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654, the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a The rear rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right lift drive motor 3654 can be arranged without increasing the space between them, and the rear rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right lift drive motor 3654 can be arranged. By keeping the balance, it is possible to prevent the space in the game area 5a from becoming small. In other words, since a part of the rear rear right lift drive motor 3654 is arranged in the game area 5a in a front view, the space between the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a should be reduced. Therefore, the space of the game area 5a can be relatively increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that can further exert the above-described operational effects can be provided. Further, by providing a part of the driving source (motor, solenoid, etc.) of the accessory moving in the game area 5a outside the game area 5a, the space in the game area 5a can be increased, and in that case. The range of effects performed in the game area 5a is expanded. All the driving sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) of the accessory moving in the game area 5a may be arranged outside the game area 5a.

Furthermore, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the light of the illumination in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1, the effect display device 1600, etc. It is possible to transmit, reflect, refract, and diffuse the light from, and it is possible to make it look as if the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are emitting light, and the entire pachinko machine 1 You can improve the appearance of. Further, although the opaque decoration seal 3032 and the decoration seal 3042 are provided on the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040, the respective bases 3031 of the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040 are provided. Also, since the base 3041 (which may include the decoration seal 3032 and the decoration seal 3042) is formed of a transparent member, light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is used as the front left decoration 3030 or the back. It is possible to reach the front right decoration 3040 and give an impression that the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 emit light. It can be said that the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040 are arranged at positions where light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 reaches.

Further, since the back-front left decorative body 3030 covers at least a part of the back-rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 as a functional component, it is understood that it is a functional component by covering it to some extent without covering the whole. It will be spicy and can look like a piece of decoration. Therefore, the same effect as the above can be obtained without making the back front left decoration 3030 sized so as to cover the entire back rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554. Therefore, the back front left decoration 3030 can be obtained. It is possible to make the game area 5a look large while reducing the cost required for 3030. It should be noted that the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 cover and hide at least a part of the back rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 and the back rear right up-and-down drive motor 3654, but the part is a pachinko machine. It is preferable that the area is closer to the center of 1 (closer to the boundary line that divides the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a). Further, a predetermined location where the drive source is not located outside the game area 5a (a location such as a lower left location in FIG. 131, that is, a location at a lower left corner of the game board 5) extends from within the gaming area 5a to outside the gaming area 5a. By providing a decorative body, the game area 5a can be made large.

Further, the inside of the frame of the front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a is closed from the rear by a transparent game panel 1100, and the game area 5a is located on the front side of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are provided on the rear side of the game area 5a. Therefore, in front view, the inside and outside of the game area 5a can be decorated from the rear by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. The same effect can be achieved, and the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 do not interfere with the game ball B in the game area 5a, and the game in the game area 5a is smooth. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

Moreover, since the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040 are made to extend to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a front view, the back-front left decoration is inside the door window 101a. It is possible to hide the rear back left production unit 3500, the rear rear right production unit 3600, and the like behind the front 3030 and the front front right decorative body 3040, and improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. Further, since the back front left decoration 3030 is extended to such an extent that the inside of the door window 101a in the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 as a functional component is hidden, the back front left decoration 3030 is used to lift the back front left lift. Even if the drive motor 3554 is not entirely covered, the uncovered portion can be covered with the frame-shaped door frame 3, so that it is possible to prevent the back front left decorative body 3030 from being unnecessarily long. It is possible to reduce the cost of the front left decoration 3030 (pachinko machine 1).

Further, according to the present embodiment, the first front wall 2203 forming the front surface of the two general winning openings 2001 from the right of the side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is inclined toward the game panel 1100. On the other hand, in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the front wall portion 2101 forming the front surface is parallel to the game panel 1100, and the front surface is provided with translucent decoration. Since the sticker is attached, the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 faces forward (toward the player), and the first starting opening 2002 can be made more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be more easily directed to the first starting opening 2002 than to the general winning opening 2001, and the number of game balls B accepted in the first starting opening 2002 is decreased (or the first starting is started). It is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from being concentrated on the general winning opening 2001 rather than the opening 2002, and the lottery of the first special lottery result performed by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the player and suppress a decrease in interest, and to surely recognize the position of the first starting opening 2002 that the player should aim at, and aim the player at the first starting opening 2002. You can entertain the game.

Then, depending on whether or not the game ball B in the game area 5a is received in the first starting opening 2002, the player can be harassed, and when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002, Depending on whether or not the winning (for example, "big hit") in which an advantageous game state occurs due to the lottery of the first special lottery result, the player can be excited and excited, and the expectation for the game can be increased. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. After that, when the winning is drawn by the lottery of the first special lottery result, an advantageous game state in which the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern occurs, so that the player is greatly enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game. At this time, when the game ball B aiming at the first starting opening 2002 is accepted by the general winning opening 2001, the game ball B is paid out as a privilege although the first special lottery result is not drawn. As a result, the player will not be discouraged, and the player can continue to enjoy the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100, and the front wall portion 2101 of the first starting opening 2002 is parallel to the surface of the gaming panel 1100. Since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are greatly different in form (appearance), a seal is attached to the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 and a seal is attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2001. Even if it is not attached, the player does not feel uncomfortable, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 from deteriorating, and entertain the player with the pachinko machine 1 to reduce the excitement. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are formed of transparent members, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 is visually recognized through the transparent member. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002, and fully enjoy the joy of being accepted. This can prevent a decrease in interest. Moreover, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are formed of transparent members, the light of the illumination in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the light emission provided in the pachinko machine 1 are emitted. Since it is possible to reflect, refract, and diffuse light from the means (LED on the decorative substrate), the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 can be made to look gorgeous and look good. Thus, the appealing power to the player can be enhanced.

Further, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100, and in the first starting opening 2002, the received game ball B is placed in the general winning opening. Since the game ball B is guided to the rear later than the game ball B accepted in 2001, the game ball B accepted in the first starting port 2002 in which the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed is made into the general winning a prize port 2001. Since the game ball B can be guided backward at a later timing than the received game ball B, the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 can be shown to the player for a relatively long time. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed, the joy (superior feeling) due to the acceptance of the game ball B in the first starting opening 2002 is given to the general winning. The player can enjoy the game for a longer period of time than when the game ball B is received in the mouth 2001, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is immediately rearward ( Since it can be discharged to the game panel 1100 side) and discharged faster than the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002, it is useless for the game ball B being received in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling for a long time, to direct the player's interest to the next game ball B, and to promote the game quickly and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, in the general winning opening 2001, after inclining the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface with respect to the game panel 1100, a part of the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203. Since it is possible, when the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001, most of the game ball B overlaps with the general winning opening 2001 in a front view. Then, depending on the player, it is possible to give the illusion that the game ball B has been received in the general winning opening 2001, and entertain the player. At this time, since part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001, and it can be considered as an illusion. Therefore, even if the privilege (lottery of the first special lottery result) is not given thereafter, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side, and to the player. As a result, the game can be kept entertaining and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Moreover, since the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the amount of material applied to the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced, and the general winning is achieved. It is possible to omit decoration such as a seal on the front surface of the mouth 2001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost of the general winning opening 2001, and by turning that amount to a production device or the like, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more entertaining to the player.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 of the back lower middle rendering unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, a rotating back lower middle rotation having a plurality of (here, six) stop positions at even positions. The decorative body 3310 is provided with a region detection piece 3325 having a length extending over half of the stop positions, and a plurality of (here, six) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position, and the region detection piece 3325. A plurality of (here, four) sensors including a plurality (here, three) of area specifying sensors 3330 that detect half of the stop positions and one position specifying sensor 3331 that detects the position detection piece 3326 are provided. Since the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 that detect the area detecting piece 3325 are sequentially increased from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease when the back and middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated, the repetition is repeated. Therefore, the current rotation position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped by the combination of the area specifying sensor 3330 detecting the area detecting piece 3325.

More specifically, in the case of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions from the first stop position to the sixth stop position in the rotation direction, three side-by-side stop positions in which the number of the area detection pieces 3325 is half. And the minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 required to detect movement to an arbitrary stop position is three, which is half the number of stop positions. Then, the three area specifying sensors 3330 are set as the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c in the rotation direction, and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is at the first stop position. It is assumed that only the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area detecting piece 3325 at the time of (the position of the decorative numeral “3”). When the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated from this state to the second stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “2”), the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect the area detecting piece 3325. To do. Furthermore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated to the third stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “1”), the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are activated. The area detection piece 3325 is detected.

Furthermore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated to the fourth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "6"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a becomes non-detection, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying are performed. The sensor 3330c detects the area detection piece 3325. Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated to the fifth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "5"), the second area specifying sensor 3330b becomes non-detection, and only the third area specifying sensor 3330c is the area detecting piece. 3325 is detected. Then, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the sixth stop position (the position of the decoration number of "4"), the third area specifying sensor 3330c also becomes non-detection, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 detect the area detecting pieces 3325. Is not detected. Thereafter, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates, it rotates to the first stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “3”), and only the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area detecting piece 3325. In this state, the above-described detection/non-detection of the area specifying sensor 3330 is repeated with the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

As described above, since the area detection piece 3325 having a length extending over half of the stop positions is provided, by combining the detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330, the underside middle rotation decoration is performed. The rotation of the body 3310 can be detected, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 do not become non-detection until the back inside rotating ornamental body 3310 rotates to the next stop position. The current position of the middle-turn ornament 3310 can be roughly grasped.

Since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with a plurality of (here, six) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the area detection pieces 3325 of the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 are detected. After roughly detecting the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position by the detection, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331. It is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions by minimizing the shift of the stop position.

In addition, since the stop position of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the stop position shifts to play. It is possible to prevent a person from feeling uncomfortable (discomfort), entertaining the effect (moving effect) by the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, and suppressing a decrease in interest. The pachinko machine 1 can realize the operation of the movable body (the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310) that does not give the player any discomfort.

Furthermore, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the shift of the stop position can be suppressed, and By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotational speed) of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be further increased as compared with the case where the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. Can be fast. Therefore, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can give a strong impact to the player by strongly rotating, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be rotated. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In addition, by rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction, the rotation surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 faces the player side in the front, and it is freely rotated after rotating. Since it is possible to show the player a roulette-like effect in which the rotation stops at the stop position, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops rotating at the desired stop position. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the movable effect by the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, the stop positions that can be supported by the minimum number of sensors (area specifying sensor 3330) necessary for detecting the movement to the arbitrary stop position. And the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 are the same, and the ability (grasp of stop position) by a plurality of sensors (region specifying sensor 3330 and position specifying sensor 3331) is maximized. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having more stop positions can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, as the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 in the back lower middle effect unit 3300, the one having six stop positions is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may have four to ten stop positions.

Further, in the above embodiment, the movable body having a plurality of stop positions (the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310) has been described as rotating, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body having a plurality of stop positions. As the "circulating", "moving in a straight line", "moving in an arc", "moving in a curved line", etc. may be used.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects in the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control section 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game balls B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game balls B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is housed in the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, and for explanation purposes, the rear surface of the board holder 1200 is viewed when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. The surface opposite to the front side of the main control board 1310 (that is, the rear surface) may be referred to as a “front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310” on which electronic components are mounted. The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but a green coating film (hereinafter, referred to as a green coating film formed by applying a green resist liquid on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface)) It may be simply referred to as "solid green resist".), a green resist layer is formed, and a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data are built-in. Main control MPU which is a microprocessor, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and various solenoids are driven. And a RAM clear switch having a pressing operation unit for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM incorporated in the main control MPU. The main control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud. On the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, in addition to the RAM clear switch, the attributes of the front side electronic component such as the part number of the front side electronic component and a region indicating the position where the front side electronic component is arranged (in addition, The front-side notation part indicating the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component may be green. In contrast, it is a white paint that stands out, and it is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist. The RAM clear switch is exposed from the transparent main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310. Since the main control board 1310 is provided on the rear side of the game board 5, it is arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a first starting opening sensor 3052 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002, a gate sensor 2801 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003, and a second The second starting opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the starting opening 2004, the general winning opening sensor 3051 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and the first big winning opening 2005 The first big winning opening sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B, the second big winning opening sensor 2601 for detecting the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2006, and the game ball B received in the out opening 2010 Out-out sensor 3053, a first sub-out sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011, a second sub-out sensor 3054 for detecting the game ball B in the second sub-out port 2012, And, the detection signals from the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, etc. for detecting the illegal magnetism in the game area 5a are respectively inputted through the main control I/O port.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2418. 2612, or the like, or output a drive signal from the main control I/O port to the function display unit 1400 status display unit, normal symbol display unit, ordinary hold display unit, first special symbol display unit, first special hold number display The drive signal is output to the container, the second special symbol display, the second special reserved number display, the round display, or the like.

In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, the second big winning opening sensor 2601, and the out opening sensor 3053 are not included. While a contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, a contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical is used for the general winning opening sensor 3051, the first sub-out opening sensor 2403, and the second sub-out opening sensor 3054. I am using a switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, and The detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting port sensor 3052, the second starting port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801.

Further, when an advantageous game state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened, and the game ball B is frequently entered. The detection of the game ball B by the first special winning opening sensor 2402 and the second special winning opening sensor 2601 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the first special winning opening sensor 2402 and the second special winning opening sensor 2601. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3051 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3051.

Furthermore, since the game ball B frequently enters the outlet 2010, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used as the outlet sensor 3053. On the other hand, since the game ball B does not frequently enter the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 are mechanical switches having a shorter life than the proximity switch. Is used.

In addition, the main control MPU sends various kinds of information regarding games (game information) and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU sends various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. When the main control MPU receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511, although a detailed description thereof will be given later.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described.). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I/O port and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Discharge control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game balls B is housed in a payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the transparent power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c. When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the surface opposite to the front side of the payout control board 633 facing the rear surface of the power supply board cover 631 (that is, the surface that becomes the rear side) is the "surface of the payout control board 633 (where the electronic part is mounted. Mounting surface)". The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game balls B, etc., has a green coating film (hereinafter simply referred to as "solid-painted") formed by applying a green resist solution to the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) thereof. A green resist layer is formed by means of a "green resist"), and a discharge controller 633a for performing various controls related to the discharge, and a discharge control by a discharge solenoid 542 and a ball feed solenoid 145. A launch control unit 633b for performing ball feeding control, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, and an error release switch having a pressing operation unit for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display. During maintenance, the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the game ball B in the payout device 580 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper plate 201), and the ball removing operation is started. And a switch for removing the ball. On the surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633, in addition to the error canceling switch, the attribute of the surface-side electronic component such as the part number of the surface-side electronic component and the region indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged The front side notation part indicating the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component may be included in green. In contrast, it is a white paint that stands out, and it is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist. The error release switch is exposed from the transparent payout control board box 632 that houses the payout control board 633. Since the error release switch is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, it is arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
Although not shown in detail, the payout control unit 633a that performs various kinds of control related to payouts on the payout control board 633 is a micro in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are incorporated. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various types of information (game information) from the main control board 1310 and various kinds of payout commands in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch pressing operation unit being input from the payout control I/O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 and the ball cutting detection are performed. Detection signals from the sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit and payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. Input to MPU.

Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch that detects opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch that detects opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port. When the payout control MPU detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch, the payout control MPU sends a door frame opening command to that effect to the main control board 1310 or opens the main body frame. When the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is detected based on the detection signal from the switch, a main body frame opening command to that effect is transmitted to the main control board 1310. Upon receiving such a command, the main control board 1310 sends predetermined information (a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame opening command for informing that the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4). (Information for adjusting) is added and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, or predetermined information (command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is sent to the peripheral control board 1510) in the main body frame opening command that notifies the outer frame 2 that the main body frame 4 is opened. Is added to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 which receives such a command controls the light emission mode of the door frame 3 to the notification mode, for example. Based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the body frame opening switch, one of the opening of the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 and the opening of the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 or If both are detected, a frame opening command may be transmitted to the main control board 1310 as a unified command. In this case, the main control board 1310 adds predetermined information (information for adjusting the format of sending a command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510) to the frame opening command and sends it to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 that has received the frame opening command controls the light emission mode of the door frame 3 to the notification mode, for example.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. , The command for outputting to the error LED indicator via the payout control I/O port or transmitting the command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner. Or, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 through the payout control I/O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball ball" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate. When the number "3" is displayed, the fact that the "counting switch error" has occurred (specifically, the payout detection sensor 591 is defective based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591) is notified. , When the number “5” is displayed, the fact that it is a “retry error” (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit) is notified, and the number “6” is displayed. When it is displayed, it means that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number “7” is displayed, the fact that “CR is not connected” (the electric connection is cut off at any position from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit) is notified, When the number "9" is displayed, it is informing that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the game ball B to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 by a serial method, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port to the payout control MPU. Is entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, which signal is the ball lending. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display unit of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Firing controller]
The firing control unit 633b performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 542 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to firing are input, an oscillation circuit to output a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal to this clock signal. A firing timing control circuit which outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing, a firing solenoid drive circuit which outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing And a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , And generates a ball feeding reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

Regarding the relationship of the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not a palm or a finger touches the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's intention is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball B is shot toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

This firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 182, and a launch reference pulse. It is output to the firing solenoid 542 in response to the input. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, so that the game balls stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200. One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. Controlled.

The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various kinds of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off processing even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control substrate 1510 has a green resist layer formed by a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid green resist”). As shown in FIG. 206, a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect that performs drawing control of the effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. And a display control unit 1512.

[6-3a. Peripheral controller]
Although not shown in detail, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. built-in. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. Sending the game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like from the lamp drive board serial I/O port to each decorative board of the game board 5 , Game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to drive motors for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 from the game board decoration drive board serial I/O port to the drive motor of the game board 5 or Door-side drive data for transmitting to the drive solenoid and outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lift drive motor 367, and the like, and each decorative board of the door frame 3. The door side drive emission data, which is composed of a door side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED provided in the frame, is used as a frame decoration drive board serial I/O port. To the door frame 3 side, or control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the display control unit serial I/O port to the effect display control unit 1512. , A control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit 1512 operates based on the operation signal. Watching for activity.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 462 provided in the door frame 3, the body frame 4, and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects tailored to various effects are played from the speaker 464, the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information. Signal, 2.1 ch surround signal, or 4.1 ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). Using WDT together, it diagnoses whether its own system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input/output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting blink command, the game board side lighting blink command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the game board 5 side are output by a plurality of serial input/output ports different from the display command. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

[6-3b. Performance display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls the effect display device 1600 for display. (Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of a screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied. I have it.

The display control MPU has a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on the control data (display command) from the peripheral controller 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. When the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives the execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and its control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM, in time series. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data to the VDP, and then the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs a running signal to that effect to the display control MPU. A line buffer system is adopted for VDP. The “line buffer method” means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is changed to the effect display device 1600. It is a method of outputting to.

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM is large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 is large, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the image RAM having a high access speed and copied, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before expanding the sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600. For example, in the case where various characters (characters) are displayed on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called “sprite”. Thereby, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 with the vertical position (hereinafter, referred to as “the order of sprite superposition”) when the positions arranged on the screen and the sprites overlap each other.

It should be noted that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, one sprite character can be used for expression, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged horizontally 2 x vertically 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 repeats the main scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixel and the main scanning in the direction intersecting with the one direction sequentially from the left to the right when viewed from the front. It is driven by the sub-scan performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially performs one line operation from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. To each pixel. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and when drawing data for the next line is similarly input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, pixels are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game contents]
The game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and 130. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, whereby the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. However, it is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously recorded in one minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls B are brought into contact with the obstacle nails N, so that the game balls The flow velocity of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates by abutting the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in the front view from the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N, The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center role object 2500 enters the warp entrance 2511 opening in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role object 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2512 to the stage 2513.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, and thus the first probability is high. Accepted in the start port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time saving)" A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that causes a "win" is drawn.

The game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 may be received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100.

By the way, when the game ball B flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility of being accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. When the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 within the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center character 2500, the center character 2500 is guided. The plurality of passages 2520 are discharged above the gate portion 2003 through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520 and are implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003. After coming into contact with the obstacle nail N, it passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

The guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 includes a first guide passage 2521 having an inlet opening near the stopper 1006, and an inlet opening with a space leftward from the inlet of the first guide passage 2521. The second guide passage 2522 which is open. As a result, when the game ball B is hit (so-called right-handed) with a strength that abuts on the hitting portion 1006, it enters the first guide passage 2521 and does not abut the hitting portion 1006 (a right-handed hitting). When the game ball B is hit with a strength slightly weaker than that), the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B that has been driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, depending on the driving strength.

In this embodiment, the gaming ball B is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability when the second guide passage 2522 is circulated than the first guide passage 2521. Further, the second guide passage 2522 is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability than the first guide passage 2521.

When the game ball B passes through this gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is carried out on the main control board 1310, and when the drawn ordinary lottery result is "normal win", the first attacker unit. The closed second starting opening 2004 in 2400 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting opening 2004.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0. 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as a normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of this ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the elapse of the variable time.

If the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 after the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the ordinary lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result cannot be started. The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is held until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is finished. Further, the maximum number of holding of the normal lottery result is up to four, and if the number is more than four, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 has a high probability of being highly likely due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. Of the side right middle unit 2700, and sometimes it is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit, or rarely in the second sub-out opening 2012. When the gaming ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a predetermined number of gaming balls B are paid out, like the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out opening 2012, there is no opportunity to be received in the second special winning opening 2006, the second starting opening 2004, or the first big winning opening 2005, and the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. ..

Further, the game ball B passing through the right side of the gate portion 2003 is received in the second sub-out opening 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the general winning opening 2001, the second big winning opening 2006, the second of the side right middle unit 2700. There is no chance of being accepted into the starting opening 2004 or the first special winning opening 2005, and the material is discharged outside the game area 5a.

In this way, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012 on the downstream side of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a, and thus the second sub-out to the player. It is possible to prompt a driving operation such that the game ball B cannot be received at the mouth 2012. In the present embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the second guide passage 2522 has a lower probability of receiving the game ball B in the second sub-out opening 2012 than the first guide passage 2521. The driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second guide passage 2522 can be prompted. That is, rather than "right hitting" in which the game ball B abuts on the hitting portion 1006, a driving operation that requires delicate adjustment in the rotation operation of the handle 182 can be prompted, and a driving operation of the game ball B can be performed. It is possible to entertain the original game of the pachinko machine 1 which is mainly.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. After passing through the left side of the above, it is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500.

At this time, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and "small hit" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted at the second big winning opening 2006 with a high probability. When the game ball B is received in the second special winning opening 2006 while the second special winning opening 2006 is in an open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 allow a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces, or , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201.

The game ball B discharged to the side of the first attacker unit 2400 through the left side of the second special winning opening 2006 is the first shelf portion 2412a, the second starting opening door 2414, and the second shelf portion 2412b, and the upper left. After rolling to the left, it is discharged to the left, and further rolls to the left on the third shelf 2412c, the first special winning opening door 2417, and the fourth shelf 2412d, and into the game area 5a. Is released.

Then, when the game ball B is rolling on the second starting door 2414, the ordinary lottery result selected by the passage of the game ball B at the gate portion 2003 is “ordinary winning”, and the second starting door is When 2414 is retracted, the game ball B is received in the second starting opening 2004. When the game balls B are received in the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time saving)" A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that causes "win" is drawn.

Further, while the game ball B is rolling on the first big winning opening door 2417, the special lottery result (the first lottery result is selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. When the one special lottery result and the second special lottery result) are special lottery results that generate an advantageous game state (for example, "big hit"), the first special winning opening 2005 has a predetermined opening/closing pattern after the elapse of the special variation time. Then, the game ball B is ready to be received. When the game ball B is received in the first special winning opening 2005 while the first special winning opening 2005 is in an open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 allow a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces, or 10 pieces) from the payout device 580. , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, by allowing the first special winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball B while the first special winning opening 2005 can receive the game ball B, a large amount of the game ball B can be paid out, and the player Can entertain.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player on the main control board 1310 (for example, “big hit”, A lottery of special lottery results that generate “middle hit”, “small hit”, “probability change (probability change) hit”, “time shortening (time shortening) hit” is performed. It is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, which is also referred to as a special fluctuation time) Note that the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and is selected by lottery. The special lottery results include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time saving (time saving) hit", " "Probability change short time hit", "Probability no short time hit", "Second big hit", etc.

When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the second special winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). After that, the opening/closing pattern for closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has passed after the first big winning opening 2005 is in the open state in which the game ball B can be received, or the first big winning. If any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B into the winning opening 2005 is satisfied, an opening/closing pattern that makes the game balls B in an unacceptable closed state (one opening/closing pattern is 1 (Called a round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, if "2R jackpot" is 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is 15 rounds, an advantageous gaming state advantageous for the player is generated.

In "big hit", change the probability that special lottery results such as "big hit" will be drawn after the big hit game ("probability change"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. (“Short-time winning”) There is a “hit”.

When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is “second big hit”, after the first special winning opening 2005 makes it possible to receive the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, the advantageous game state is ST (special).・Time) is generated. This ST is to maintain a state of probable variation or shortening during a predetermined number of times of variation.

In the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the special lottery by the receipt of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the result of the special lottery that has been drawn is suggested, the first start port 2002 and When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Pending The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening are set. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special control result is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the LEDs that are turned on after blinking a plurality of LEDs by repeatedly turning on and off.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled to suggest the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 is such that three or more picture strings each consisting of a pattern are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each picture string is changed to display the variably displayed picture string. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective picture strings are stopped and displayed so that the pictures of the three picture strings that are stopped and displayed are a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “miss”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and the respective patterns are stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, "small hit" game, "big hit" game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is (Time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by the lottery. A player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 can be performed. In the player participation type production, the operation ring drive motor 342 can be used to rotate, vibrate, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation button lift drive motor. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by 367 so as to be conspicuous, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the back and rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back. Lower left performance unit 3200, lower back right performance unit 3250, lower back middle performance unit 3300, upper back performance unit 3400, back rear left performance unit 3500, back rear right performance unit 3600, back front left performance unit 3700, and front front. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, a display effect, and the like by appropriately using the right effect unit 3800 and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player with various kinds of effects and reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform an operation to be performed, a correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is requested to be pressed, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[8. Self-supporting member]
Subsequently, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown together with the self-supporting auxiliary member. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted between the lower surface of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 and the set board 8 of the island equipment in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. When it is installed (attached) to the pachinko machine 1, it assists the pachinko machine 1 to stand by and prevents it from falling. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is formed in a block shape. The self-supporting member 7 is formed by using at least one of hard foamed resin, plastic, corrugated paper, wood, pulp mold, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the lower surface of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3. On the other hand, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a mounted portion mounted on the mounting portion of the dish unit 200. In the present embodiment, the dish unit 200 is provided with a groove extending in the front-rear direction as a mounting portion, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a protrusion that is inserted into the groove of the dish unit 200 as a mounted portion. ing. Accordingly, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is slid in the front-back direction with respect to the dish unit 200, and the mounted portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is inserted into the mounting portion of the dish unit 200, whereby the self-supporting auxiliary member is attached to the dish unit 200. 7 can be attached (mounted). Thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility with the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be easily removed by sliding it forward. .. Further, when the pachinko machine 1 attached to the island equipment is removed, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily attached by sliding it in the direction opposite to that when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed.

It should be noted that the mounting (mounting) of the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 and the mounted portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not limited to the above, and may be "by inserting a projection into a hole" or "of nails". It may be "by locking", "by magnetizing by magnet", "by hook-and-loop fastener", "by suction cup", "by peelable adhesive material", or the like. Further, the position at which the mounting portion is provided in the dish unit 200 is not limited to the lower surface of the dish unit 200 as described above, but may be “inside”, “at least one of the left and right side surfaces”, “front surface”, or the like. ..

This self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 after the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, and stored at the game hall side. It is used by mounting it on the unit 200. The self-supporting member 7 may be attached to the dish unit 200 in advance when the pachinko machine 1 is shipped from the manufacturer side to the game hall side, or may be attached at the time of installation work.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the door frame 3 has the plate unit 200, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450 that largely protrude forward, the door frame 3 moves forward. Although it easily falls down, by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the lower mounting portion of the dish unit 200, it is possible to assist the self-supporting of the pachinko machine 1 and prevent it from falling forward. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, by mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the mounting portion of the dish unit 200, the space between the dish unit 200 and the plate 8 of the island facility is set. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from tipping forward by the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 located at, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from tipping. The pachinko machine 1 is easy to install and does not need to be installed.

Further, by mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the mounting portion of the dish unit 200, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from tipping over, so that it is possible to avoid damage to the pachinko machine 1 due to tipping over, and thus the game hall or the manufacturer. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of reducing the burden on the side.

Further, since the mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is provided, by mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, the self-supporting of the pachinko machine 1 is assisted. Since it is possible to prevent it from falling forward, it is possible to make the effect device, the decoration member, and the like provided in the door frame 3 larger or to project further forward, and thus the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to easily configure a pachinko machine whose appearance is significantly different from that of the machine, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 1, the plate unit 200 and the like are largely projected forward in the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 has high appeal.

In the above-described embodiment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be attached to and detached from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 by sliding the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 in the front-rear direction. The frame unit 3 may be attached to and detached from the plate unit 200 by sliding in the left-right direction.

Further, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachably attached to the mounting portion of the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and then the functional member detachably provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202). , The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame top unit 450, etc.). Thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or detached from the island equipment, the functional member removed from the door frame 3 is attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and the pachinko machine is attached. Allow 1 to stand in a stable state. On the other hand, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is attached to the door frame 3 as a functional member, so that a part of the pachinko machine 1 is removed. It can function as a functional member to be configured. Specifically, for example, when the door frame left side unit 400 that bulges forward from the left side of the door window 101a in the door frame 3 is used as the functional member that also serves as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, the door removed from the door frame 3 The frame left side unit 400 can be made to function as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 by being attached to the lower side of the dish unit 200, and can be made to function as a functional member by being removed from the lower side of the dish unit 200 and attached to the left side of the door window 101a. be able to. Therefore, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable, it is not necessary to store the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 separately, and it is time-consuming to manage the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so as not to be lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Alternatively, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be attached to and detached from the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) and then provided on the main body frame 4 in a detachable manner (for example, "a substrate cover covering a substrate", "wiring "Wiring holding member", "protection cover that protects the rear of the effect display device and movable decorative body," "storage tank for storing the game medium", "guidance member for circulating the game medium", etc.) You may make it double. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or detached from the island equipment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the main body frame 4 is attached to the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) to stabilize the pachinko machine 1. To be able to become independent in the state. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the door frame 3 is attached to a predetermined portion of the main body frame 4 to form a part of the pachinko machine 1. It can function as a member. Therefore, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable, it is not necessary to store the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 separately, and it is time-consuming to manage the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so as not to be lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced. When the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is also used as the functional member provided in the main body frame 4, the player touches the removable functional member in a state where the functional member is attached to the main body frame 4. Since this is not possible, it is possible to prevent the functional member from coming off due to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 that does not give the player any discomfort can be provided.

Further, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is also used as a functional member provided in the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 is compared with the case where the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not used as a functional member. It is possible to reduce the number of parts required for the above, and to suppress an increase in cost.

Furthermore, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be provided so as to be accommodated in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3. Accordingly, when it is not necessary to attach the pachinko machine 1 to the island facility to make it stand by itself, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is housed in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 so that the pachinko machine 1 looks good due to the existence of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming worse and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 from interfering with the game. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or detached from the island equipment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 housed in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is taken out so that the pachinko machine 1 can stand by itself. Thus, the installation work and the removal work of the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. Further, in this case, compared to the case where the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detached and separately stored, it is not necessary to store the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and it is troublesome to manage the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so as not to be lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 having the mounted portion attached to the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is assumed that the mounted portion is not included. Is also good.

Further, although the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 that is attachable to and detachable from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is built in the dish unit 200 (door frame 3). Alternatively, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be projected downward so as to be in contact with the setting plate 8 when being installed in the island facility. Accordingly, after the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, it is not necessary to remove the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 and store it separately, and it is possible to reduce the time and labor required for management on the game hall side.

[9. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The decorative body 3111, the decorative sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the movable rear decorative body 3110 in the rear rear effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment are the decorative members of the present invention, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment. Is the decorative plate of the present invention, the light guide radiation plate 3113 in the present embodiment is the radiation plate of the present invention, the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 in the present embodiment is the peripheral wall portion of the present invention, The rear rear decorative substrate 3114 in FIG. 3 corresponds to the decorative substrate of the present invention, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b in the present embodiment correspond to the LED of the present invention, and the first LED 3114a in the present embodiment corresponds to the specific LED of the present invention. ing.

[10. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the rear-rear movable decoration body 3110 of the rear-rear effect unit 3100, on the front side of the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 on which the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b are mounted. Since the decorative body 3111 and the light guide radiating plate 3113 constituting the decorative member are arranged and the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front side of the decorative body 3111, the back and rear decorative substrate 3114 and the metal decorative body are provided. Since the portion excluding the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111, the decoration sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 are located between the portion 3111d and the portion 3111d, static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d is generated. It is possible to prevent linear discharge from the portion 3111d to the rear rear decoration substrate 3114. Further, even if the static electricity of the metal decorative portion 3111d tries to discharge to the rear back decoration substrate 3114, the static electricity cannot pass through the interior of the decorative body 3111, the light guide radiation plate 3113, or the like. Along the front surface of the flange 3113b, which passes through the outer circumference and protrudes rearward from the light guide radiation plate 3113, bypasses the rear end of the flange 3113b and flows to the inside of the flange 3113b (on the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 side). Instead, the creeping distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be sufficiently set by the decorative body 3111, the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the like.

At this time, the outer periphery of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 is formed smaller than a predetermined size with respect to the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111 so as to be surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The static electricity diverted to the inside needs to flow along the rear surface of the light guide/radiation plate 3113 as much as the rear back decoration substrate 3114 is small, and the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is further lengthened. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the discharge to the rear-side decorative substrate 3114. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from being discharged to the back rear decoration substrate 3114, and thus the first LED 3114a mounted on the back rear decoration substrate 3114 by discharge (spark). It is possible to prevent the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the rear and rear decoration substrate 3114 from emitting light and decorate the decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d. Therefore, the player can enjoy the light emitting decoration (light emitting effect) of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In addition, since the copper foil 3114d forming a circuit in the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 is provided inside the outer peripheral edge of the substrate body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL, static electricity is applied from the outer peripheral side of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 to the copper. Even if an attempt is made to discharge to the foil 3114d, the creepage distance EL can be further lengthened by a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the substrate body 3114c to the copper foil 3114d, and the backside decorative substrate 3114 (copper foil 3114d) is discharged. It can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent static electricity from being discharged from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the back and rear decoration substrate 3114, and thus the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the first LEDs 3114a and the first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 due to discharge (spark). It is possible to prevent the second LED 3114b from being damaged, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above.

Further, since the flange portion 3113b that surrounds the outer periphery of the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 is provided on the light guide radiation plate 3113, when the decoration body 3111 is viewed from the front, the flange portion 3113b projects outside the decoration body 3111. Therefore, the appearance of the decorative body 3111 can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, both sides of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 in the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 of the back-and-back rendering unit 3100 are provided with a decorative body 3111, a decorative sheet 3112, and a light guide radiation plate 3113, and a decoration. Since it is covered with the body base 3115, static electricity can be prevented from being discharged from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the rear back decoration substrate 3114. Further, in the rear decorative board 3114, a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b as electronic components are mounted on the front surface of the board body 3114c, and the copper foils 3114d forming the circuit on both sides of the board body 3114c are mounted. The front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is provided on the front side of the rear main body 3114c by a predetermined distance from the outer peripheral edge of the board main body 3114c, and the decorative body 3111, the decorative sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 (light guide radiation plate). 3113a of the main body 3113a) of the backside of the decorative body base 3115, and the cover plate 3115a of the decorative base 3115 covers the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114. The flange portion 3113b that surrounds the outer periphery of the decorative body base 3115 extends rearward, and the flange portion 3115b that surrounds the outer periphery of the back-back decorative substrate 3114 extends frontward from the covering plate portion 3115a of the decorative body base 3115. The route of the creepage distance EL from which the static electricity is discharged from the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the surface opposite to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 to the copper foil 3114d of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is outside the flange portion 3113b. Proceed to the rear side, fold back inside the flange portion 3113b at the tip (rear end) of the flange portion 3113b, proceed forward between the flange portion 3113b and the flange portion 3115b, and at the tip (front end) of the flange portion 3115b. It becomes a meandering route that folds back to the inside of 3115b, and the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the copper foil 3114d of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made sufficiently long, and the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is discharged. It is possible to suppress the risk of being destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from being discharged to the back-rear decoration substrate 3114, so that a plurality of first and second electrodes mounted on the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 are discharged (sparked). It is possible to prevent the one LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, and the like from being damaged, and the decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d is attached to the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the first and second LEDs 3114a of the back and rear decorative substrate 3114. The second LED 3114b can be surely light-emitted and decorated, and the player can enjoy the light-emission decoration (light-emission effect) of the ornament 3111 and the ornament sheet 3112 (back and rear movable ornament 3110) and suppress the deterioration of interest. ..

Further, since the coating film (not shown) is provided on the surface of the substrate body 3114c of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 on which the copper foil 3114d is provided, static electricity is discharged to the copper foil 3114d also by the coating film. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can prevent such a situation and reliably exhibit the above-described effects.

In addition, the leg portion 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the protrusion 3115e of the decorative body base 3115 are brought into contact with the portion of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. In other words, the copper foil 3114d is not provided at the portion of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 where the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the ornament base 3115 contact. Thus, it is possible to prevent static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from being discharged to the copper foil 3114d through a portion of the rear decorative board 3114 where the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decorative body base 3115 contact. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the same effects as the above.

Further, since the copper foil 3114d is not provided on the portion of the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 where the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decoration base 3115 are in contact, vibration of the pachinko machine 1 and movement of the back and rear movable decoration 3110 are prevented. Even if friction is generated between the light guide radiation plate 3113 or the decorative body base 3115 and the back rear decorative substrate 3114 due to the vibration caused by the movement, the copper foil 3114d is not worn or peeled off due to the friction. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a defect in which a circuit connecting the plurality of first LEDs 3114a or the second LEDs 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, or the like is disconnected, or a circuit is short-circuited due to the peeled copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the electronic component 3114e and the like can be made to function reliably, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

In addition, as described above, by covering both sides of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 with the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decorative body base 3115, electrostatic discharge from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is prevented. Therefore, the discharge resistance performance of the coating film can be lowered, the coating film can be made as thin as possible, and the cost of the coating film can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 in the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 of the back-rear effect unit 3100 emit light, the first LED 3114a returns to the back. The light emitted in the direction along the front surface of the rear decoration substrate 3114 faces the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a on the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c in which the first LED 3114a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is housed. The light is incident on the inside of the main body portion 3113a from the existing portion, is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, and is emitted from the front surface of the main body portion 3113a. The decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having a light-transmitting property provided on the front side of the illuminating device are decorated to emit light. At this time, since the decorative body 3111 and the light guide radiation plate 3113 are formed into a flat plate shape, it is possible to reduce the thickness in the front-back direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114. The thickness of the rear movable decoration body 3110 can be reduced. Further, since the leg portion 3113f is projected rearward from the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 so as to be continuous with the portion of the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c to which the light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated. Since the light receiving portion 3113i of the light guide/radiation plate 3113 that receives the light from the first LED 3114a can be widened, more light from the first LED 3114a can be made incident on the inside of the main body portion 3113a and emitted forward. The decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be illuminated and decorated brighter by increasing the emitted light. In the main body portion 3113a of the light guide/radiation plate 3113, since the light in the direction along the front surface of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e, the first LED 3114a is moved forward. The distance from the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a to the front surface portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113 from which the light is radiated forward is longer than that in the case where the light is emitted toward the first LED 3114a. Light can be diffused widely and emitted forward. Therefore, the whole of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be uniformly and brightly illuminated and the appearance of the decorative body 3111 or the like is not impaired, and the effect of the decorative body 3111 or the like can be sufficiently exhibited. be able to. Since the dimension (thickness) in the front-rear direction of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced in this manner, the degree of freedom in arranging the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 in the pachinko machine 1 can be increased. It is possible to place the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 in a portion that is not placed in the pachinko machine of, and since the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 is placed in an unexpected portion, the player's interest is strongly attracted. Thus, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can be easily selected by the player as a pachinko machine to play and which has a high appeal to the player.

In addition, since the plurality of first LEDs 3114a on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 are housed in the first LED housing portion 3113c penetrating the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the first LEDs 3114a The heat can be diffused into the first LED housing portion 3113c, and the temperature rise of the first LED 3114a can be suppressed. Further, since the leg portion 3113f projecting rearward from the main body portion 3113a of the light guide/radiation plate 3113 forms a gap between the main body portion 3113a and the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114, a first gap is formed through the gap. The heat from one LED 3114a can be discharged, and the heat from the first LED 3114a can be suppressed from being accumulated. Therefore, the heat accumulated between the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can reduce the instability and damage of the light emission of the first LED 3114a. The decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (back-rear movable decoration body 3110) can be reliably light-emitted by the first LED 3114a, and the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 can emit light. It is possible to entertain the decoration (light emitting effect) to the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the leg portion 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has an auxiliary reflection portion 3113g capable of reflecting the light from the first LED 3114a forward, on the side opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c, the auxiliary reflection By the portion 3113g, the light incident from the inner surface side of the first LED housing portion 3113c in the leg portion 3113f is radiated from the opposite surface to the outside of the leg portion 3113f (main body portion 3113a), and the light from the first LED 3114a is emitted. Since it is possible to reduce passing through the leg portion 3113f, it is possible to allow more light from the first LED 3114a to be incident on the inside of the main body portion 3113a, and it is possible to reliably obtain the above-described operational effects.

In addition, a copper foil 3114d forming a circuit for causing the plurality of first LEDs 3114a (and the second LEDs 3114b) to emit light is provided on substantially the entire front surface and rear surface of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114. Has excellent thermal conductivity, heat from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused through the copper foil 3114d and can be released from the copper foil 3114d, and heat from the first LED 3114a is less likely to be accumulated. Then, the above-described effects can be surely exhibited.

Further, on the front surface of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114, the copper foil 3114d is not provided, so that the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f recessed rearward on the light emitting surface side of the first LED 3114a is provided, and then the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f is provided. Since the leg portion 3113f forming a part of the light receiving portion 3113i that receives light from the first LED 3114a mounted on the front surface of the substrate body 3114c in the light guide radiation plate 3113 is in contact with the light guide radiation plate 3113, the light guide radiation is It is possible to increase the amount of protrusion of the leg portion 3113f to the rear without increasing the gap between the main body portion 3113a of the plate 3113 and the back rear decorative substrate 3114, and to increase the amount of light from the first LED 3114a. The light can be made incident on the inside of the 3113a, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (the back and rear movable decorative body 3110) can be illuminated and decorated brighter.

Further, since the light reflection assisting region 3114f recessed rearward from the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided, the angle of irradiation from the first LED 3114a to the bottom surface of the light reflection assisting region 3114f is set to the back rear decorative substrate 3114. Since the angle can approach vertically to the front surface, it is possible to easily reflect the light from the first LED 3114a forward by the bottom surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f, and to make the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 brighter. The same effect as the above can be obtained by performing light emission decoration.

Further, since the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f recessed rearward in the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 reflects a part of the light from the first LED 3114a forward, the first LED 3114a on the front surface of the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 is reflected. Compared with the case where a projection for reflection is projected forward on the light emitting surface side of, the shadow of the projection due to the light from the first LED 3114a is cast on the front surface of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114, and the shadowed portion becomes dark. Instead, the entire back and rear movable decoration 3110 can be illuminated and decorated with uniform brightness.

Further, since the light reflection assisting region 3114f of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 is formed by not providing the copper foil 3114d, when forming a circuit for causing the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b to emit light, Since the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f can be formed together, the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f can be formed more easily than in the case where the substrate body 3114c is physically recessed by cutting or pressing. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine 1.

Further, the leg portion 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is brought into contact with the inside of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f formed by not providing the copper foil 3114d, and the leg portion 3113f is made of the copper of the back rear decorative substrate 3114. Since there is no contact with the foil 3114d, even if friction occurs between the leg portion 3113f and the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f due to vibration in the pachinko machine 1, the copper foil 3114d (and the coating film) is worn by the friction. It does not come off or peel off. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a defect such as a disconnection of a circuit for emitting the first LED 3114a or the like, or a short circuit of the circuit due to the peeled copper foil 3114d. Thus, the desired luminescence effect can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, since a white coating film is provided on the front surface and the rear surface of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114, the white light of the coating film reflects the light emitted to the front side of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 forward. Therefore, the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 can be brightened to make the decoration 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 (back-removable decoration 3110) lighter and brighter.

In addition, the white coating film allows the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the circuit pattern, and the like provided on the front surface of the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 to pass through the decoration body 3111, the decoration sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since it can be made invisible from above, it is possible to improve the appearance of the decoration of the back and rear movable decoration body 3110, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of sufficiently exerting the decoration effect.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a flat plate-like shape provided between the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 and the decoration 3111 (decoration sheet 3112) of the back and back movable decoration 3110 of the back and back rendering unit 3100. Since the light guide radiating plate 3113 is provided with the penetrating first LED housing portion 3113c and second LED housing portion 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted. , The first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are inserted into the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d in a bottomed concave shape that does not penetrate the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d. The volume (heat volume) of the space into which is inserted can be increased, and the heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be diffused. At this time, since the adjacent (approaching) first LED housing portions 3113c are connected to each other, the volume (heat volume) of the space into which the first LED 3114a is inserted can be further increased. The heat from the LED 3114a can be easily diffused. Therefore, the heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be made hard to be accumulated, so that the accumulated heat makes the light emission of the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b unstable, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b become unstable. Damage to the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be reliably emitted as intended, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b make it possible to reduce the damage. 3110) can be surely light-emitted and decorated, and the player can enjoy the light-emission decoration (light-emission effect) by the back-back movable decoration 3110 and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, in the first LED housing portion 3113c in which the first LED 3114a that emits light in the direction along the front surface is inserted, the inner surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 that is illuminated with the light from the first LED 3114a is continuous. The leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the main body portion 3113a is brought into contact with the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c of the back and rear decoration substrate 3114, and the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the substrate main body 3114c of the rear and rear decoration substrate 3114c. Since a gap is formed between and, heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be discharged through the gap. This can prevent the heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b from being accumulated, and can reduce the instability and damage of the light emission, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are intended. As described above, it is possible to reliably emit light, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can surely cause the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 to emit light. It is possible to make the player entertain and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the back-rear decoration substrate 3114, the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the decoration 3111 are provided on the back-rear movable decoration 3110, by moving the back-rear movable decoration 3110, wind may be generated. Since the heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b and the electronic component 3114e can be ventilated by ventilating the front side and the rear side of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114, heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. is less likely to be accumulated. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the instability of light emission of the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b and the damage of the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b due to the accumulated heat. It is possible to obtain the action and effect.

Furthermore, since the electronic component 3114e for causing the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b to emit light is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate body 3114c, the heat from the electronic component 3114e affects the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. It is possible to reduce the supply of heat, prevent the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b from being defective due to the heat from the electronic component 3114e, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above.

Further, since the adjacent (approaching) first LED housing portions 3113c are connected to each other, a thin portion is formed between the first LED housing portions 3113c in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is possible to prevent the light guide radiating plate 3113 from being easily damaged.

Further, since the electronic component 3114e is mounted on the rear surface of the board body 3114c, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface of the board body 3114c correspond to the light guide radiation plate 3113, respectively. The rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 (main body portion 3113a) and the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c can be made as close as possible by inserting the first LED housing portion 3113c or the second LED housing portion 3113d. The dimension (thickness) in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 (back rear movable decorative body 3110) can be reduced.

Further, since the electronic component 3114e is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate body 3114c, even if a dark color such as black is used as the electronic component 3114e, the electronic component 3114e can be seen from the front through the decorative body 3111 and the light guide radiation plate 3113. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the decorative body 3111 (the back rear movable decoration body 3110) from being deteriorated, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the back rear movable decoration body 3110 and sufficiently exert the decorative effect. ..

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first decorative protrusions 3111a (metals) that surround the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c in the decorative body 3111 of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 of the rear rear effect unit 3100, respectively. On the rear side of the decorative portion 3111d), the first LED 3114a is mounted on the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 with the first LED housing portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 interposed therebetween, and the metal decorative portion 3111d is visually recognized from the front to the rear. Since it is formed so as to be difficult to perform, it is possible to make the first LED 3114a and the first LED accommodating portion 3113c hard to see from the front by the metal decoration portion 3111d, and the first LED 3114a and the first LED accommodating portion from the front (player side). By viewing the portion 3113c, it is possible to prevent the ornamental body 3111 (movable back and forth ornamental body 3110) from being impaired in decorativeness and being unattractive, and to reliably exert the ornamental effect of the ornamental body 3111. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the decoration of the ornamental body 3111 and prevent the entertainment from being deteriorated.

Further, since the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a shape along the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the ornamental body 3111, even if the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can be seen through the ornamental body 3111, Since the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is along the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c looks like a part of the decoration by the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and to the player. The presence of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can be made difficult to notice, and it is possible to prevent the decorative body 3111 from being impaired in its decorativeness and becoming unattractive, and to ensure the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can exhibit the same effects as the above.

Further, since the outer periphery of the third decorative protrusion 3111c is surrounded by the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d), the metal decorative portion 3111d acts as a frame to make the third decorative protrusion 3111c stand out. be able to. Then, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a are mounted so as to irradiate light to a portion of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 that is behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the first LED 3114a moves to the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the light is emitted into the main body portion 3113a in the direction along the front surface, and the light in the direction along the front surface that is internally radiated by the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e of the main body portion 3113a is emitted forward. The light from the first LED 3114a can be diffused in a region as large as possible in a region behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c in the main body part 3113a and then can be emitted to the front side. A wide range of the decorative protrusion 3111c can be illuminated and decorated with uniform brightness, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c surrounded by the metal decorative portion 3111d in the decorative body 3111 can be made more conspicuous to make the decorative body 3111 The decorative effect can be further exerted, and the player can enjoy the decoration of the decorative body 3111 (back and rear movable decorative body 3110) and suppress the deterioration of interest. At this time, since the light is emitted from the first LED 3114a in the direction along the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the point light source of the first LED 3114a may be seen from the front through the decorative body 3111. Can be reduced. As described above, since the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c of the decorative body 3111 can be uniformly light-emitted, it is possible to entertain the player with the light-emission decoration of the decorative body 3111, and to enjoy the game. Can be suppressed.

In addition, when the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 is light-emitted and decorated by the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, the first rear rear decorative substrate 3114 on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is formed. Since the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward is provided at the portion irradiated with the light from the LED 3114a, the area of the portion irradiated with the light from the first LED 3114a (the light receiving portion 3113i) is widened by the leg portion 3113f. Therefore, more light from the first LED 3114a can be made incident on the inside of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Therefore, since the main body 3113a of the light guide/radiation plate 3113 can emit more light from the first LED 3114a to the front side, the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 can be illuminated and decorated brighter. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by showing the player a luminous decoration having a higher effect of presentation.

Further, in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide/radiation plate 3113, a plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c penetrating in the front-rear direction in a shape along the metal decoration portion 3111d on the rear side of the metal decoration portion 3111d are provided. The brightness of the light emitting decoration can be made different with the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c (metal decoration portion 3111d) as boundaries. More specifically, inside the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, when the light traveling in the direction along the front surface reaches the portion (inner peripheral surface) of the first LED housing portion 3113c penetrating in the front-rear direction, A part of the light is reflected toward the inside of the main body 3113a by the inner peripheral surface, and the rest is radiated to the inside of the first LED housing 3113c. When the light radiated to the inside of the first LED housing portion 3113c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side of the first LED housing portion 3113c, a part of the light is emitted from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the first LED housing portion 3113c. Then, the rest is incident on the inside of the main body 3113a. As a result, when the light in the main body portion 3113a tries to pass through the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, the amount of light is greatly reduced and is guided to the opposite side, and the opposite side of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c becomes dark. .. Therefore, when the first LEDs 3114a are provided on both sides of the first LED housing portion 3113c, if only the first LED 3114a on one side is made to emit light, one side becomes brighter than the first LED housing portion 3113c. And the other side becomes dark, and when only the first LED 3114a on the other side is made to emit light, the other side becomes brighter and one side becomes darker than the first LED housing portion 3113c, and when both the first LEDs 3114a are made to emit light, the first LED housing portion 3113c Both sides become brighter. Since the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided on the rear side of the metal decoration portion 3111d, as described above, by appropriately causing the first LED 3114a to emit light, one side of the metal decoration portion 3111d is used as a boundary. It is possible to brighten only one side, only the other side, or both sides, making it possible to show a variety of luminous effects to the player, making it harder for the player to get bored and less entertaining. Can be suppressed.

Since each of the plurality of third decoration protrusions 3111c is surrounded by the metal decoration portion 3111d (first decoration protrusion 3111a), the first decoration protrusion 3111a is provided between the third decoration protrusions 3111c. The first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide/radiation plate 3113, which is located behind the portion, receives the light from the first LED 3114a for causing the other third decorative protrusion 3111c to emit light. Since it can be made difficult, only the predetermined third decorative protrusion 3111c (the first light diffusing section 3112c and the second light diffusing section 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112) can be illuminated and decorated in a good state. Therefore, the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c can be light-emitted in a predetermined order, or the special third decorative protrusion 3111c can be light-emitted to suggest a predetermined message to the player. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a variety of light emitting effects, which makes it difficult for the player to get tired and suppresses a decrease in interest.

In addition, when the second LED 3114b of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 is made to emit light, the light directly passes through the second LED accommodating portion 3113d that penetrates the light guide radiation plate 3113 and directly to the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 (decorative sheet 3112). Since the light is emitted, the portion of the decorative body 3111 to which the light from the second LED 3114b is emitted can be lightened in a dot shape brighter than the portion to be light-emitted by the first LED 3114a. Therefore, the area where the first LED 3114a emits light in a planar manner and the area where the second LED 3114b emits light in a dot shape can be shown to the player, so that the luminous decoration of the ornamental body 3111 can be sharpened. As a result, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the effect of the light-emitting decoration can be further enhanced, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, as described above, the first LED 3114a and the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can be made difficult to see from the front by the metal decorative portion 3111d, and therefore the front-back direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 Even if the dimension (thickness) is reduced, the decorative property of the decorative body 3111 (and the decorative sheet 3112) is not impaired, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 can be sufficiently exhibited. Therefore, since the dimension (thickness) in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the rear-rear decorative substrate 3114 in the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced, the rear-rear movable decorative body in the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. The degree of freedom in arranging the 3110 can be increased.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the transparent decorative body 3111 of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 of the rear rear effect unit 3100, the first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes most forward and the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Three decoration protrusions each having a curved front surface of a second decoration protrusion 3111b protruding smaller than the protrusion 3111a and a third decoration protrusion 3111c protruding smaller than the second decoration protrusion 3111b. In the portion, the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a by foil stamping, so that the portion where the metal decoration portion 3111d is not provided remains transparent. That is, since the single decorative body 3111 has the metal decorative portion 3111d and the transparent portion (translucent decorative portion), the structure is such that the metal decorative portion and the transparent decorative portion can be assembled as in the conventional case. There is no need, and since there is no assembly structure, it is possible to suppress an increase in the dimension in the front-rear direction, and as a result, it is possible to reduce the thickness in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the ornamental body 3111 (back movable movable ornamental body 3110) in the pachinko machine 1, it becomes possible to arrange the ornamental body 3111 in a portion that is not arranged in the conventional pachinko machine. By arranging the decorative body 3111 in an unexpected portion, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, the player can easily select it as a pachinko machine to play, and the player is appealed to. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having high strength.

Further, the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decoration projection portion 3111a among the three decoration projection portions of the decoration body 3111, and the metal decoration portion is imitated following the front surface of the first decoration projection portion 3111a. Since 3111d is curved, the light inside the pachinko machine 1 and the light inside the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reflected in various directions, and the metal decoration portion 3111d can be glittered. In addition to being able to make it shine, the three-dimensional effect of the metal decoration portion 3111d (first decoration protrusion 3111a) can be emphasized, and the metal decoration portion 3111d having a three-dimensional effect gives a high-class feeling (premium feeling) to the player. Can be strongly attracted.

In addition, when the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on both the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b, a portion having different metallic luster in the front-rear direction can be seen in the decoration of the decorative body 3111. Therefore, a sense of depth can be further increased with respect to the decoration, and the three-dimensional decoration can more easily attract the player's interest.

In addition, the transparent decorative body 3111 has a first decorative projection 3111a, a second decorative projection 3111b, and a third decorative projection 3111c that have different amounts of forward projection, and is provided on the front surface of the first decorative projection 3111a. Since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided, three-dimensional projection can be given to the decoration of the decoration body 3111 by the three decoration protrusions having different projecting amounts. As a result, a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth can be shown to the player, so that the decorative effect does not deteriorate even if the thickness (size in the front-rear direction) of the decorative body 3111 is reduced, and the decorative body 3111 is not affected. The size in the front-back direction can be reduced, the degree of freedom in arranging the ornamental body 3111 can be increased, and the ornamental effect of the ornamental body 3111 can be sufficiently exerted, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power can be provided.

In addition, the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the first decoration projection 3111a that protrudes most forward in the decoration projection of the decoration body 3111, and since the portion of the metal decoration portion 3111d projects most forward, the metal decoration The part 3111d can be made more conspicuous, and the apparent difference between the metal decoration part 3111d and parts other than the metal decoration part 3111d can be made large, and a more three-dimensional effect can be given to the decoration of the decoration body 3111. You can Therefore, since the three-dimensional decoration can be displayed even if the dimension of the decorative body 3111 in the front-rear direction is reduced, the dimension of the decorative body 3111 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and the above-described function and effect can be ensured. It is possible to easily embody the pachinko machine 1 capable of playing.

Further, as described above, since the dimension of the decorative body 3111 in the front-rear direction can be reduced (thickness can be reduced) to increase the degree of freedom of arrangement, the effect member can be provided on the front side or the rear side of the decorative body 3111. Since it can be provided, it is possible to present a variety of effects to the player by providing a large number of effect members, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the second decoration protrusion 3111b and the third decoration protrusion 3111c, which are not provided with the metal decoration portion 3111d, project forward. Due to the lens effect, a sense of depth is given to the decorative pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 show the player a more three-dimensional decorative effect. be able to. Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 is sheet-shaped, even if the decorative sheet 3112 is provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111, it is possible to suppress an increase in the thickness (dimension) in the front-rear direction. Due to this, it is possible to provide the effect member (back and rear movable decorative body 3110) including the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, which are thin in the front-rear direction, and a pachinko machine having the same effects as the above. It can be 1.

In addition, since the decorative sheet 3112 having the auxiliary decorative portions (the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b) is provided on the rear side of the decoration body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b provide the first trimming portion 3112a. It is possible to reduce the visibility of the rear side of the decorative body 3111 through the transparent side surface of the single decorative protrusion 3111a. Therefore, even when the ornamental body 3111 is viewed obliquely from the front, the rear side of the ornamental body 3111 can be made difficult to see by the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b, so that the decoration of the ornamental body 3111 becomes unattractive. This can be avoided, and the decorative effect by the decoration of the decorative body 3111 can be sufficiently exerted.

In addition, since the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first outline portion 3112a and the second outline portion 3112b, the first outline protrusion 3112a and the second outline portion 3112b form the first decorative protrusion. It is possible to make the player illusion that the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the 3111a. In addition, by providing the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decoration sheet 3112 outside the metal decoration portion 3111d in a front view, the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b allow the metal decoration portion to be formed. 3111d can be widely seen. From such a fact, the decoration 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 make it possible to show the player a decoration having a higher decorative effect, and a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of strongly attracting the player's interest. Can be provided.

Furthermore, since the metal decorative portion 3111d in the decorative body 3111 is formed by foil stamping, the metal decorative portion 3111d can be easily formed as compared with the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is immersed in a plating tank or vaporized metal is deposited. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the hot stamping device for stamping the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided with the elastic flat plate-shaped hot plate, the hot plate hits the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111. When contacted, the surface of the hot plate is elastically deformed to have a shape following the front surface of the curved first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the metal foil of the transfer sheet is moved to the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It is possible to transfer (foil-press) in a good state so as to be in close contact with. Further, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by hot stamping using a hot stamping device, the transfer sheet having the metal foil first comes into contact with the front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, so that the transfer sheet is pulled. As a result, wrinkles hardly occur, the metal foil can be transferred cleanly without wrinkles, and a good-looking metal decoration portion 3111d can be obtained.

Further, since the surface of the hot plate facing the decorative body 3111 side is a plane having elasticity, even if the shape of the first decorative protrusion 3111a is different, the transfer sheet is not replaced with the hot plate. The metal foil of can be transferred. Therefore, it is possible to easily deal with a model change, a design change, and the like, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

Further, since the surface of the hot plate facing the decorative body 3111 side has elasticity, the hot plate is moved to the decorative body 3111 side, that is, the hot plate is moved to the first decorative protrusion. The amount (depth) of immersion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a with respect to the hot plate can be changed according to the strength of pressing against the hot plate 3111a, and the hot plate in the first decorative protrusion 3111a (decorative body 3111) can be changed. It is possible to widen or narrow the range of the portion where the abuts. That is, it is possible to freely change the range in which the decorative body 3111 (the decorative protrusion protruding forward) is foil-pressed. Thus, when it is desired to change the range in which the metal decoration 3111d is provided due to a model change or design change, the range of the metal decoration 3111d can be easily changed by changing the relative movement amount of the hot plate. it can.

Further, as described above, the elastic surface of the hot plate can freely change the range in which the decorative body 3111 (the first decorative protrusion 3111a or the like) is foil-stamped. When the metal decoration 3111d is also provided on the decoration protrusion 3111b, the color of the metal decoration 3111d can be made different between the first decoration protrusion 3111a and the second decoration protrusion 3111b. More specifically, in the conventional technique, when it is attempted to form a metal decorative portion of a different color for one member (decorative body), for example, after a metal layer of the first color is formed over the entire surface, a masking treatment is performed. By forming a metal layer of the second color on the entire surface and removing the masking, the color can be made different between the masked portion and the unmasked portion. Alternatively, after forming the metal layer of the first color on the whole, by forming a metal layer of the second color from above, by peeling a part of the metal layer of the second color by laser peeling or the like, The color can be made different between the peeled portion and the non-peeled portion. However, no matter which of the above techniques is used, there is a problem in that it takes time and effort to manufacture the decorative body and the cost increases. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the elastic surface of the hot plate can freely change the range in which the foil is pressed against the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111. Using the transfer sheet having the metal foil of the second color, the hot plate is moved so as to sink to the front surface of the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the metal foil of the first color is transferred to the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the first decorative protrusion 3111b. Transfer to the decorative protrusion 3111a, and then, using a transfer sheet having a second color metal foil, only the first decorative protrusion 3111a is immersed without contacting the front surface of the second decorative protrusion 3111b. As described above, the hot plate is moved to transfer the metal foil of the second color onto the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Thereby, the metal decoration part 3111d of a different color can be easily formed by the first decoration protrusion 3111a and the second decoration protrusion 3111b, the increase in cost can be suppressed, and the decorative property is more excellent. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can be provided with the decorative body 3111 and has a high appealing power to the player.

Further, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by stamping, compared to the case where the metal decoration portion 3111d is left by using laser peeling, peeling left part of the metal foil occurs in a portion other than the metal decoration portion 3111d. Therefore, deterioration of the appearance of the decorative body 3111 can be reduced. More specifically, when laser peeling is used, if the decoration body 3111 to be peeled has irregularities such as the first decorative protrusions 3111a, the focal length of the laser varies depending on the position of the decoration body 3111. Since the difference is different, the metal layer may not be sufficiently peeled off at a portion separated (or approached) by a predetermined distance or more with respect to the focal length, and unpeeled residue may occur, resulting in poor appearance. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided only in a necessary portion by foil stamping, and it is not necessary to peel off the metal foil to form a transparent portion after foil stamping, which is good-looking. The decorative body 3111 can be formed.

In addition, as described above, since the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the degree of freedom in arrangement can be increased. Therefore, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 are not visible to the player from the standby position (retraction). Position) and an appearance position that can be visually recognized from the player side, the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 is provided. Therefore, by moving the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 to the appearance position, the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided. The appearance and appearance of the movable decorative body 3110 (ornamental body 3111) with a high degree of decorativeness, which makes it possible to make the player think that something is good, can be expected. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by increasing the interest rate.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 of the back-and-back performance unit 3100, the flat-plate-shaped light guide radiation plate is added to the flat-plate-shaped decoration body 3111 having the metal decoration portion 3111d on the front surface. 3113 and the rear back decoration substrate 3114 are provided, and a flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer circumference of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is extended rearward from the outer periphery of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the rear side of the rear rear decoration substrate 3114 is Since the flange portion 3115b extends forward from the covering decorative body base 3115 between the flange portion 3113b and the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114, the metal decorative portion 3111d to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 The route of the creepage distance EL goes rearward outside the flange portion 3113b, and folds back to the inside of the flange portion 3113b at the rear end of the flange portion 3113b to advance forward between the flange portion 3113b and the flange portion 3115b. The front end of the portion 3115b becomes a meandering route that folds back toward the inside of the flange portion 3115b, and the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 is sufficiently long (10 mm or more, or at least 10 kV discharge voltage). Can be prevented). At this time, a decorative body 3111 having a metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface, a rear rear decorative substrate 3114 on which a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b for light-emitting decoration of the decorative body 3111 are mounted, Since the decorative body base 3115 covering the rear side of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided in the rear rear movable decorative body 3110, which is likely to generate static electricity by moving in the vertical direction, the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 When the static electricity is easily accumulated and the static electricity is accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d, the accumulated static electricity is discharged at once because of the high conductivity, and the discharge voltage becomes high, so that the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are discharged. However, as described above, since the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made sufficiently long as described above, the metal decorative portion 3111d may be damaged. It is possible to reliably prevent the static electricity accumulated in the backside decoration substrate 3114 from being discharged, and prevent damage to the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the backside decoration substrate 3114. As a result, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having the metal decorative portion 3111d can be surely illuminated and decorated, and the player can perform the luminous decoration of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (back and rear movable decorative body 3110) ( It is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest by entertaining (light emitting effect).

Further, in the ornamental body 3111 of the rear-back movable ornamental body 3110, the metal ornamental portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first ornamental protrusion 3111a protruding forward so as to form a predetermined ornament. Since the metal decoration portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the portion 3111a, the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is set by the length of the first decoration protrusion 3111a in the front-rear direction. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can be made longer and can reliably achieve the above-described operational effects.

Further, since the rear side of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is covered with the decorative body base 3115, static electricity can be prevented from being discharged from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114. At the same time, it is possible to prevent static electricity accumulated in another member (for example, the effect display device 1600) provided behind the decoration base 3115 from being discharged to the back and rear decoration substrate 3114, It is possible to more reliably prevent damage to the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like of the back decoration substrate 3114 due to discharge of static electricity.

Further, since the copper foil 3114d forming the circuit pattern on the rear decorative board 3114 is prevented from coming into contact with (the leg portion 3113f of) the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f, the metal decorative portion The creepage distance EL from 3111d to the copper foil 3114d of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be increased as much as possible, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

Further, since the copper foil 3114d of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 is provided so as not to contact the leg portion 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f, vibration from inside and outside the pachinko machine 1 acts. However, friction does not occur between the leg portion 3113f and the copper foil 3114d, and the friction does not cause the copper foil 3114d to wear to break the circuit. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect such that the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b do not emit light, and it is possible to surely exhibit a desired effect by decorating the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 with light emission.

In addition, the decorative body 3111 includes a metal decorative portion 3111d, and a second decorative protrusion 3111b and a third decorative protrusion 3111c that transmit light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back and rear decorative substrate 3114. Therefore, it is possible to give a high-class feeling to the pachinko machine 1 by the brilliance of the metal of the metal decoration portion 3111d, and to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1, and at the same time, the light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b causes the second decoration protrusion. To provide the pachinko machine 1 which can make the decorative body 3111 (back movable movable decorative body 3110) conspicuous by illuminating the portion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and which can strongly attract the interest of the player. You can

Further, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a protruding forward in the shape of a predetermined decoration, the metal decoration portion 3111d is given a three-dimensional effect. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can make the decorative portion 3111d more conspicuous, can further enhance the sense of quality due to the metal decorative portion 3111d, and can strongly attract the interest of the player.

Further, since the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 doubly surround the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114, the outer periphery of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 is flanged. It can be hidden by 3113b and the flange portion 3115b so as not to be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the back and rear movable decoration body 3110 can be improved.

Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 for diffusing light is provided on the back rear movable decoration body 3110, the light from the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is diffused to the rear side. Since it is possible to irradiate the metal decorative portion 3111d, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111, the entire decorative body 3111 (decorative sheet 3112) is illuminated and decorated with uniform brightness. It is possible to improve the appearance of the light-emitting decoration, and it is possible to further enhance the effect of the light emission effect of the back and rear movable decoration body 3110, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest. ..

In addition, since the flange portion 3113b that surrounds the outer periphery of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is extended rearward from the light guide emission plate 3113 that diffuses the light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b and emits it forward, A part of the light incident on the inside of the light emitting plate 3113 is radiated to the outside from the flange portion 3113b, so that the flange portion 3113b can also be illuminated and decorated, and the flange portion 3113b can be illuminated to decorate the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114. It is possible to make it more difficult to see from the player side, and the flange portion 3113b is also decorated with light emission, which makes it possible to improve the appearance of the light emission decoration of the back and rear movable decoration body 3110, and entertains the player. The decrease can be suppressed.

The back-rear movable decoration body 3160, the back-rear movable decoration body 3170, and the back-rear movable decoration body 3180 can also achieve the same effect as the above.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 in the back-and-back production unit 3100, transparent light guide radiation is provided behind the decorative member including the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. A plate 3113 and a back rear decoration substrate 3114 are provided, and are mounted on the front surface of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 in each of the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c formed on the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The first side-view type LED 3114a is inserted so as to be housed. When the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back-back decorative substrate 3114 are made to emit light, the light from the first LEDs 3114a changes from the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c to the plate surface within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The light is emitted in the direction along the line, is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e formed on the substantially entire rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and is emitted forward from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Become. Then, the light radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 is radiated forward through the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 that form the decorative member, so that the decorative portion 3150 is provided. The decorative member having a light property (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) is light-emitted.

At this time, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a in the direction along the plate surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the decorative body is formed. Since 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 are configured to emit light, the light of the first LED 3114a is emitted from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 as compared with the case where the first LED 3114a is irradiated with light toward the front. It is possible to lengthen the distance until the light is emitted forward, and it is possible to diffuse the light from the first LED 3114a widely and emit it forward from the light guide emission plate 3113. Therefore, when the first LED 3114a is caused to emit light, the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused, and it can be suppressed that the light is emitted in a dot shape. The seat 3112 can be uniformly illuminated to make it look beautiful, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, in the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110, since the back-and-back decoration substrate 3114 is provided behind the flat plate-shaped decoration members (the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112) and the light guide radiation plate 3113, the front-rear dimension is thin. It is possible to secure a space for arranging the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110, and arrange other effect members (back-and-front front rotating decoration body 3410, back-and-back rotating decoration body 3440, etc.). It is also possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can make the player more entertaining by providing various effect members.

Furthermore, the decorative member (back movable movable body 3110) provided with the decorative portion 3150 has relief portions such as the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having a pattern such as the first contour portion 3112a are provided, the embossed portion can give a three-dimensional effect to the embellished portion 3150, and the embossed portion is embossed. A depth effect can be added to the design of the decorative sheet 3112 provided behind by the lens effect. Therefore, the three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth (decoration portion 3150) can be shown to the player by the relief portion of the ornamental body 3111 and the pattern of the ornamental sheet 3112, and thus the thickness of the back and rear movable ornamental body 3110 ( The decorative effect does not decrease even if the dimension in the front-rear direction is made thin, and it is possible to attract or entertain the interest of the player, and it is possible to make the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 thinner. It is possible to reliably obtain the above-described operational effects.

Further, a decorative sheet having a pattern such as the first contour portion 3112a behind the decorative body 3111 having the relief portions such as the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since the 3112 is provided, the decorative body 3111 can be made to appear colored by the color of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 without coloring the transparent decorative body 3111, and the cost of the decorative body 3111 can be reduced. Can be made. Further, by changing the design of the decorative sheet 3112, the decoration (decoration part 3150) of the ornamental body 3111 (back movable movable ornamental body 3110) can be easily changed. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled.

In addition, the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a hologram portion in which a part of the pattern as the decoration portion 3150 is displayed by the light interference fringes, and the first LED 3114a of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is provided. From the other LEDs provided on the pachinko machine 1, light from the effect display device 1600, light in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. are holograms of the first contour portion 3112a. Since the predetermined hologram can be shown by the interference fringes of the light by hitting the part of, the appearance of the decoration portion 3150 can be improved by the hologram, and the hologram can be strongly attracted to the player. This makes it possible to give a stereoscopic effect to a part of the decorative portion 3150 of the back-back movable decoration body 3110, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the thinness even if the back-back movable decoration body 3110 is made thin.

Further, since a part of the pattern in the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 is configured by the hologram, the hologram is the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion. Since it can be seen through the transparent decorative body 3111 having an embossed portion such as 3111c, it is possible to give a feeling of depth to a pattern such as a hologram by the lens effect of the embossed portion, which strongly attracts the interest of the player. The possible decorations 3150 can be shown to the player. Further, since the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has the hologram portion, it is possible to use a printing technique for forming the hologram portion, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

In addition, in the decorative member including the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flat and the outer shape of the decorative sheet 3112 is the same as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The outer peripheral edge of 3111 can be decorated with the design of the decorative sheet 3112, and since there is no frame on the outer periphery of the decoration (decoration portion 3150), a feeling of openness is given to the decoration of the back-back movable decoration body 3110. In addition to being able to do so, the decoration can be made to look larger. Therefore, the decoration of the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 (the pattern of the decoration sheet 3112 or the like) can be made more conspicuous, the decoration effect of the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 can be sufficiently exerted, and the back-and-back movable decoration body can be exhibited. By the decoration of 3110, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 which can entertain the player can be provided.

In addition, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 is flat, the decorative sheet 3112 is in contact with (abutted against) the rear surface of the decorative body 3111. Is not diffusely reflected, and the pattern of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be made more visible through the transparent decorative body 3111, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 can be sufficiently exerted. In addition, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flat, the dimension of the decorative member including the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 in the front-rear direction can be reduced as much as possible. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can reduce the thickness of the rear movable decoration body 3110 and can realize the above-described effects.

Further, the decorative sheet 3112 is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111, and it is possible to decorate up to the outer peripheral edge of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 (the decorative body 3111) by the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112. Therefore, by setting the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 to be a decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110, a large decoration with a sense of unity can be given to the player. As a result, the player can be shown, give a visual impact to the player and draw attention, and a large decoration can be enjoyed, which can suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c in which the first LEDs 3114a of the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 are housed from the rear side, the first LED housing of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is housed. By housing the first LED 3114a from the rear in the portion 3113c, the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made as close to each other as possible, and the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 can be front and rear. The thickness in the direction can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 exhibiting the above-described operational effects can be reliably realized.

Also, the first LED housing portion 3113c of the light guide/radiation plate 3113 houses the first LED 3114a of the back decoration board 3114, and the light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated from the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c to the plate thickness. Therefore, as compared with the case where the light is emitted from the outer peripheral surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, a portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113 (for example, the central portion) where the light from the outer peripheral surface is hard to reach. However, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at the site and irradiating light from the inner surface thereof, the site can be made to emit light brightly, and the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet). 3112) can be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

Furthermore, since the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114 is of the side-view type, it is only necessary to house the first LED 3114a in the first LED housing portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 to emit light. Light can be emitted from the inner surface of the portion 3113c (light receiving portion 3113i) in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described operational effects is reliably realized. be able to.

In addition, since a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide/radiation plate 3113, light can be emitted to almost all of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. Even if the decoration (decoration portion 3150) provided on the sheet 3112 is changed, it is not necessary to change the reflection portion 3113e, and it is possible to easily deal with the change in the decoration of the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can easily respond to model changes, design changes, and the like.

The back and rear movable decorations 3160 and 3170 can also achieve the same effect as the above.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention as shown below. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and to a gaming machine (parrot machine) in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused, It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, as the decoration portion 3150 of the back-back movable decoration body 3110, the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the second decoration protrusion 3111b, the third decoration protrusion 3111c, and the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusion portion 3112c, and the second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decoration sheet 3112 is shown. Not something to do. For example, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 may be a single decorative member, and the decorative portion 3150 may be applied to the decorative member.

It should be noted that a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a receiving area (general winning opening, starting opening, variable winning opening (variable starting opening, large starting opening, which can receive a game medium in a game area where a game medium is driven by a player's operation). It is equipped with a winning opening, a prize winning opening), a V winning opening, etc.), and when a game medium is received in the receiving opening, the player is given a privilege (playout of the playing medium, opening/closing operation of the variable winning opening, etc.). The generation of an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage, etc.) is given, so that the player can enter the game medium so that the game medium can be received at the desired entrance. ing. As a gaming machine of this kind, a decorative member whose surface is metal-plated and a notch that penetrates the front and back is closed by a transparent lens part, and a decorative member provided on the rear side of the decorative member and forward through the lens part A device provided with a decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light is mounted is proposed (for example, JP-A-2015-223485). According to the technique of this document, the appearance of the decorative member can be improved by the brilliance of the metal plating on the decorative member, and the decorative member (lens portion) can be illuminated and decorated by the light emission of the LED. Can be attracted and entertained. By the way, as in the technique of this document, in a decorative member having a metal decorative portion formed by metal plating on the surface, if static electricity is accumulated on the surface of the decorative member, the metal decorative portion has high conductivity. Therefore, the static electricity accumulated on the entire surface is discharged at once, and the discharge (spark) voltage (discharge voltage) becomes high. In the technique of this document, since the decoration substrate is provided on the rear side of the metal-plated decoration member, since the metal plating and the decoration substrate are as close to each other as possible, the decoration member ( Between the metal plating) and the decorative substrate, static electricity accumulated in the metal plating may be discharged to cause sparks. Therefore, since the spark (discharge) is generated between the metal plating and the decorative substrate, the LED mounted on the decorative substrate is damaged, and it becomes impossible to perform the light emission decoration (light emission effect) of the decorative member. As a result, the player may not be able to entertain and the player's interest may be reduced.

[Electrical connection method between main frame and game board 5]
Next, an electrical connection method between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a front perspective view (a) and a rear perspective view (b) of the drawer connector mounted on the relay board provided in the body frame. The drawer connector is a connector that can automatically connect the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 by simply mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4, and is arranged at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the game board 5. A game board side drawer connector (convex type) is provided on the game board side relay board, and a main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) is provided on the main body frame side relay board arranged at a predetermined position on the front surface of the main body frame 4. It is provided.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 (not shown) is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 to play the game board 5 Each terminal of the panel side drawer connector (convex type) and each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 are electrically connected.

For example, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 will be described. The main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is made of non-conductive resin and has a rectangular opening on the front side. At the same time, it has a box-shaped main body DCNa that is long in the left-right direction, and a plate-shaped base body DCNb that is long in the left-right direction is integrally formed on the rear surface side of the box-shaped main body DCNa to form a letter T shape as a whole. There is.

Around the opening DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is extended from the front surface of the opening DCNaa toward the bottom of the box-shaped main body DCNa for a predetermined distance. Inclined portions DCNaaa for guiding toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa are formed respectively. The game board side drawer connector of the game board 5 is provided at the central portion (1 location) of the inner upper surface of the opening DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa and the left and right portions (1 location on the left portion and 1 location on the right portion) of the inner upper surface. The (convex type) is prevented from being turned over in the vertical direction different from the normal direction and inserted into the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is Left and right positions of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the game board 5 when inserted in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN A groove DCNaab that prevents displacement and enhances the fitting between the game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the game board 5 is provided near the front surface of the opening DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa. It is formed toward the bottom of the box-shaped body DCNa.

On the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa, pin-type terminals PN arranged in two rows in the left-right direction are arranged in a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (six pin-type terminals PN are arranged in one row in the left-right direction). .) penetrates the box-shaped main body DCNa and the base body DCNb.

Mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba are formed on the left side and the right side of the base body DCNb, respectively. When mounting the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) in the mounting through holes DCNba and DCNba, first, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is mounted. The rivets (not shown) are respectively inserted from the front of the main frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209), and the end portions are crimped and plastically deformed on the back surface (solder surface). As a result, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is fixed to the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209).

Further, on the back surface of the base body DCNb, when mounting the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209), the main body frame side drawer board is attached to the main body frame side drawer board. A columnar protrusion DCNbb is formed so that the connector (concave type) DCN is mounted in a regular orientation.

The main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) is electrically connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN in addition to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. A small-sized connector of the Inline Package type is mounted and electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via a wiring (harness) not shown. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) Type) and each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN are electrically connected to each other, so that a game board can be played through a small DIP type connector and a wiring (harness) not shown. 5, control signal lines for transmitting various control signals by the main control board 1310 provided in No. 5 and the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4 are formed.

The main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN electrically connects the main control board 1310 included in the game board 5 and the payout control board 633 included in the main body frame 4, and also supplies various power sources from the power supply board 630. It is to be electrically connected to various power supply lines (including ground (GND)) supplied to various boards provided in the game board 5, and another drawing is shown in addition to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. The main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN′ is provided on a main body frame side relay board KB′ (not shown) different from the main body frame side relay board KB. The main body frame side relay board KB′ is a DIP (Dual Inline Package) electrically connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN′ in addition to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN′. A small connector of the type is mounted, and is electrically connected to each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 and various sensors via a wiring (harness) not shown. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, another game board side different from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 electrically connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN The drawer connector (convex type) is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' of the main body frame 4, and each terminal of the other game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame side drawer connector (not shown) By electrically connecting each terminal PN of (concave type) DCN′, a peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 and a door via a DIP type small connector and a wiring (harness) not shown. Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals and detection signals by each decorative substrate, various sensors, various speakers, and the like provided in the frame 3 will be formed. The body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' not shown has the same structure as the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, and the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' not shown. The fixing method to the body frame side relay board KB' (not shown) is the same as the method of fixing the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the body frame side relay board KB (fixing method using rivets). There is.

Further, a method of fixing the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 to the game board side relay board (not shown), Other game board side relay boards (not shown) of other game board side drawer connectors (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' (other game board side relay boards are , Is different from the game board side relay board (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (concave type) of the game board 5 guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4 is mounted. The fixing method to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is the same as the fixing method to the main body frame side relay board KB (fixing method using rivets).

The rivet is used when fixing the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) by using the drawer connector to make the game board 5 the main body. Although the electric connection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 can be automatically performed only by mounting it on the frame 4, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the drawer on the game board side of the game board 5 is attached. Since a large force may be applied from the connector (convex type) to the box-shaped body DCNa of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, this large force causes a pin type in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. This is for preventing the terminals PN of the above from peeling off the soldered surface on the back surface (solder surface) of the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209). In addition, when fixing the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) by using bolts and nuts, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) is illustrated. In the case of fixing to the game board side relay board, there is a disadvantage that the nut may be loosened when the game board 5 is attached to or removed from the main body frame 4.

In the present embodiment, a pin type terminal is used as each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, but if a bellows type using terminals and contacts is used, there are the following problems. For example, when each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is used as a terminal and each terminal of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is used as a contact, the pachinko machine 1 When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 with the power turned on, the contact between the terminal and the contact (specifically, a large current (rush current) flows at the contact for various power supply lines) is welded. Becomes When the game board 5 is forcibly pushed into the main body frame 4 in this welded state to be mounted, the contact of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is bent and broken, and the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 The problem that the contact is peeled off from the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN when it is removed from the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, and the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN cannot be used.

In addition, if the terminals and contacts are welded, various control boards may malfunction or electronic components mounted on various control boards may be damaged due to damage to the connector. The problem that it needs to be provided.

In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned problem does not occur at all by using the pin type of each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. That is, even if the worker accidentally attaches the game board 5 to the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 and the main body The respective terminals PN of the frame-side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the frame 4 are not welded, and it is not necessary to provide a dedicated circuit for preventing the welding.

[Solder short circuit prevention]
Next, solder short circuit prevention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a diagram (a) to (c) for preventing solder bridging of each terminal of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type), which is a DIP type electrically connected to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type). (D)-(f) which prevent the solder bridge of each terminal of the small connector of FIG. Note that, in FIG. 209, various wiring patterns and a substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “Betland”) are omitted for ease of viewing the drawing. Also, in FIG. 209, the arrow shown by the solid line shows the direction in which the solder flows when the substrate is poured into the solder bath, and the arrow shown by the alternate long and short dash line shows the direction in which the substrate is poured into the solder bath.

As described above, the main body frame side relay board KB arranged at a predetermined position on the front surface of the main body frame 4 includes the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and the main body frame side drawer connector ( A small DIP type connector electrically connected to the concave type DCN is mounted. The terminals of this DIP type small-sized connector are pin types arranged in two rows. The body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is a through-hole DCNba, DCNba formed in the base body DCNb of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the same straight line in the left-right direction on the body frame side relay board KB. While the cylindrical protrusion DCNbb is arranged (a predetermined position for the drawer connector), the DIP type small connector is arranged in the vertical direction on the main body frame side relay board KB, that is, the DIP type small connector. The terminals arranged in two rows of the small connector are arranged so as to be rotated by 90 degrees with the terminals PN arranged in two rows of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN (predetermined position for small connector). ..

When the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at a predetermined position for the drawer connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, each of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN The terminal PN is inserted into each through hole KTH1 having a land (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "land KTH1"), and the cylindrical protrusion DCNbb of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is a positioning hole. The body through which the mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and the mounting holes KBa, KBa formed at positions corresponding to the mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba communicate with each other. From the front of the frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, rivets (not shown) are inserted into the mounting through holes DCNba and DCNba, respectively, and the ends are crimped and fixed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. .. When the DIP type small connector is placed at a predetermined position for the small connector on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, each terminal of the DIP type small connector has a through hole KTH2 having a land. (Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as “land KTH2”.).

When the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at a predetermined position for the drawer connector on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, it becomes two stages in the vertical direction and the first stage from the bottom. The six terminals PN in one row and the six terminals PN in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom, are arranged in parallel. On the other hand, when the DIP type small connector is placed in the predetermined position for the small connector on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, it becomes 6 stages in the vertical direction, and the first stage from the bottom. Two terminals PN in one row, two terminals PN in the second row that is the second row from the bottom, two terminals PN in the third row that is the third row from the bottom, and four rows from the bottom Two terminals PN in the fourth row, two terminals PN in the fifth row at the fifth row from the bottom, and two terminals PN in the sixth row at the sixth row from the bottom are arranged in parallel, respectively. Becomes

On the body frame side relay board KB, a body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at a predetermined position for the drawer connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx, and a small DIP type connector is placed at the predetermined position for the small connector. When placed, each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and each terminal of the DIP type small-sized connector project from the back surface (solder surface) KBy. In this state, the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is flown into the solder bath to relay each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and each land KTH1 to the main body frame side. Not only can it be soldered to the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the board KB, but also each terminal of the DIP type small connector and each land KTH2 can be soldered to the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. You can

The direction in which the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is flown into the solder bath is from the bottom of the second row of six terminals PN, which is the second step from the bottom of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. The direction is toward the six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first row, and the two terminals in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom of the DIP type small connector, are the first row from the bottom. The direction is toward the two terminals in the first row. That is, in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first stage from the bottom, are the final stage terminals, and in the DIP type small connector, the first stage from the bottom. The two terminals in the first row are the final-stage terminals.

When the back side (solder side) of the board is poured into the solder bath, the solder bath with the pin type is aligned like each terminal of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN or DIP type small connector When flowing to, there is a possibility that a solder bridge will occur along the flowing direction, and in particular, a solder bridge will occur between the terminal at the final stage and the terminal at the stage before this. Therefore, a solder escape pattern is formed on the terminal at the final stage.

In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as described above, the six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, are the terminals in the final row. Each land KTH1 is connected to each solder escape pattern KNP1 having a rectangular shape whose length is long in the vertical direction and whose width is equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH1 (that is, each of the six terminals PN in the first row). The land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 are respectively formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB.

As described above, in the DIP type small-sized connector, since the two terminals in the first row, which are the first row from the bottom, are the terminals in the final row, the land KTH2 of each of the two terminals PN in the first row and the upper and lower So that the solder escape patterns KNP2 having a rectangular shape whose width is long in the direction and whose size is equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH2 are connected to each other (that is, each land KTH2 of each of the two terminals in the first row and each solder escape pattern). KNP2 are electrically connected to each other) on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB.

As described above, by forming the solder escape pattern on the terminal at the final stage, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of solder bridges at the terminals at the final stage and contribute to the prevention of solder short circuit. May occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as a method of suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, a method of printing horizontal lines on the boundaries of each step by silk printing on the resist (measure 1 by silk printing) A method in which horizontal lines are printed on the boundaries of each step by silk printing and vertical lines are printed on the boundaries of the land and solder escape pattern of each terminal that are adjacent to each other in the left-right direction (measure 2 by silk printing), silk on the resist. A method of enclosing the land and solder escape pattern of each terminal with a predetermined figure by printing and filling the area (measure 3 by silk printing) can be mentioned.

[Countermeasure 1 by silk printing]
First, as a method capable of suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, a method of printing horizontal lines on the boundaries of each step by silk printing on the resist (countermeasure 1 by silk printing) will be described.

In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 209(a), six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, and two terminals in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom, are provided. A horizontal line KSH1 is printed on the boundary between the six terminals PN by silk printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. That is, since the horizontal line KSH1 is printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing, the horizontal line KSH1 is seen from the surface of the resist and the vertical wall like a mountain range. Will be in a continuous state. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is flown into the solder bath, the solder needs to flow over the resist and flow over the horizontal line KSH1 such as a vertical wall like a mountain range. From the second row to the second row of six terminals PN and lands KTH1 and the first row from the bottom to the first row of the six terminals PN and lands KTH1 at the boundary between the horizontal line KSH1 and the vertical direction. When the solder tries to stay on the resist by the wall, a force for separating the solder acts, so that the solder bridge can be suppressed in each terminal PN and the land KTH1 that are vertically adjacent to each other.

In each terminal of the DIP type small-sized connector, as shown in FIG. 209(d), two terminals in the sixth row from the sixth row from the bottom and two terminals from the fifth row in the fifth row from the bottom The horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the boundary of, by silk printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB, and two terminals in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom, and four rows from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk-printing at the boundary between the two terminals of the fourth row as the eyes and the fourth row from the bottom to the fourth row. The horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing at the boundary between the two terminals of the second terminal and the two terminals of the third row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 is silk-printed on the boundary between the two terminals in the third row from the third row and the two terminals in the second row from the bottom to form the horizontal line KSH2 on the back surface of the main body frame side relay board KB ( Solder side) Printed on KBy, the horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the boundary between the two terminals in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom, and the two terminals in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom. Is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. That is, since the horizontal line KSH2 is printed by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB, the horizontal line KSH2 is seen from the resist surface and the vertical wall like a mountain range. Will be in a continuous state. As a result, for example, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is flown into the solder bath, the solder needs to flow over the resist and flow over the horizontal line KSH2 over a vertical wall such as a mountain range. , A horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and lands KTH2 in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom, and the two terminals and lands KTH2 in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom. When the solder tries to stay on the resist by the wall, a force for separating the solder acts, so that the solder bridge can be suppressed in each of the vertically adjacent terminals. A horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and lands KTH2 in the fifth row from the bottom and the two terminals and lands KTH2 in the fourth row from the bottom to the fourth row from the bottom The horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and lands KTH2 in the fourth row and the two terminals and lands KTH2 in the third row from the bottom, and the second row in the third row from the bottom. Horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between one terminal and land KTH2 and two terminals and land KTH2 in the second row from the bottom, and two terminals and land KTH2 in the second row from the bottom. Also, regarding the horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and the land KTH2 in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, the two terminals and the land KTH2 in the sixth row, which are the sixth row from the bottom, and Similarly to the horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the second terminal and the land KTH2 in the fifth row, which is the fifth stage, the horizontal line KSH2 separates the solder by attempting to retain the solder in the resist by a vertical wall such as a mountain range. As a result, a solder bridge can be suppressed in each terminal and land KTH2 that are vertically adjacent to each other.

[Countermeasure 2 by silk printing]
Next, as a method capable of suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, horizontal lines are printed on the boundaries of each step by silk printing on the resist, and vertical lines are formed on the land and solder escape pattern of each terminal adjacent in the left-right direction. A method of printing on each boundary (measure 2 by silk printing) will be described. In addition to the above-described measure 1 by silk printing, the measure 2 by silk printing further prints a vertical line on the land of each terminal adjacent in the left-right direction and the boundary between the solder escape patterns adjacent in the left-right direction by silk-printing. Since this is the method of doing so, the description of measure 1 by silk printing is omitted.

In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, in addition to the horizontal line KSH1 printed by silk printing shown in FIG. 209(a), as shown in FIG. Of the six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the first row, and the six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the second row from the bottom, each terminal PN and land KTH1 that are adjacent in the left-right direction, The vertical line KSV1 is printed on the boundary between the solder escape patterns KNP1 that are adjacent to each other in the left-right direction on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing. That is, since the vertical lines KSV1 are printed by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB, the vertical lines KSV1 look like mountain ranges when viewed from the resist surface. It becomes a state where the vertical walls are connected. Accordingly, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is flown into the solder bath, the solder flows over the resist and can flow along the vertical line KSV1 along a vertical wall such as a mountain range. The solder flowing on a vertical wall such as a mountain range called the vertical line KSV1 tries to stay on the resist by flowing to the left of the vertical wall or the right side of the vertical wall with the vertical wall such as the mountain range like the vertical line KSV1 as a boundary. The solder separating force acts on each of the terminals PN and lands KTH1 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction and the solder escape pattern KNP1 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction to suppress the solder bridge.

In each terminal of the DIP type small-sized connector, in addition to the horizontal line KSH2 printed by silk printing shown in FIG. 209(d), further, as shown in FIG. 209(e), the first line from the bottom is shown. From the two terminals and lands KTH2 in one row to the two terminals and lands KTH2 in the sixth row, which are the sixth row from the bottom, the terminals and lands KTH2 adjacent in the left-right direction and the solder adjacent in the left-right direction A vertical line KSV2 is printed on the boundary between the escape pattern KNP2 and the escape pattern KNP2 by silk printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. That is, since the vertical line KSV2 is printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing, the vertical line KSV2 looks like a mountain range when viewed from the resist surface. The vertical walls are connected. Thereby, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is flown into the solder bath, the solder flows over the resist and can flow along the vertical line KSV2 along a vertical wall such as a mountain range. The solder flowing on the vertical wall such as the mountain range called the vertical line KSV2 tries to stay on the resist by flowing to the left of the vertical wall or the right side of the vertical wall with the vertical wall such as the mountain range such as the vertical line KSV2 as a boundary. As a result, a force that separates the solder acts, so that the solder bridge can be suppressed in each of the terminals and the lands KTH2 that are adjacent in the left-right direction and in the solder escape pattern KNP2 that is adjacent in the left-right direction.

[Countermeasure 3 by silk printing]
Next, as a method that can suppress the occurrence of solder bridges, a method of surrounding the land of each terminal and the solder escape pattern with a predetermined figure by silk printing on the resist and filling the area (measure 3 by silk printing) explain.

In the main body frame side drawer connector (recessed type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 209(c), a land KTH1 into which each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (recessed type) DCN is inserted, and each solder escape pattern KNP1. , Are surrounded by a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction by silk printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB, and in the area KSA1 surrounded by this rectangular shape, each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 Print so that the area excluding is filled. That is, each land KTH1 and each of the lands KTH1 in the area KSA1 surrounded by the rectangular shape by the silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB are surrounded by the rectangular shape. Since the area excluding the solder escape pattern KNP1 is printed so as to be filled, when looking at each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 from the surface of the silk-printed area KSA1, each land KTH2 and each solder The escape pattern KNP1 becomes a recessed region, and when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed region KSA1 becomes a small elevated plateau region. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is flown into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and flow over a small plateau of the silk-printed area KSA1. The amount of solder flowing on the printed area KSA1 can be suppressed, and solder is applied to each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 which are recessed areas formed on a small plateau called silk-printed area KSA1. When flowing, the force that separates the solder acts because the land KTH1 that becomes the depressed region and the solder escape pattern KNP1 cannot pass over the small plateau of the silk-printed region KSA1 and stays there. As a result, the solder bridges can be suppressed in each of the terminals PN and the lands KTH1 that are vertically adjacent to each other and in the solder escape pattern KNP1 that is adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction.

In each terminal of the DIP type small-sized connector, as shown in FIG. 209(f), a land KTH2 into which each terminal of the DIP type small-sized connector is inserted, and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are provided on the main frame side relay board KB. The back surface (solder surface) KBy is surrounded by a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction by silk printing, and the area KSA2 surrounded by this rectangular shape is filled with the area excluding each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2. Print. That is, in the region KSA2 in which each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are enclosed in a rectangular shape by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, each land KTH2 and each land. Since the area other than the solder escape pattern KNP2 is printed so as to be filled, when looking at each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 from the surface of the silk-printed area KSA2, each land KTH2 and each solder The escape pattern KNP2 is a recessed region, and when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed region KSA2 is a small plateau region. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is flown into the solder bath, the solder needs to flow over the resist and flow over a small plateau of the silk-printed area KSA2. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder flowing on the printed area KSA2, and solder is applied to each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 which are recessed areas formed on a small plateau called silk-printed area KSA2. When flowing, the solder separates from the land KTH2, which is a recessed region, and the solder escape pattern KNP2. It is possible to suppress the solder bridge in each of the terminals and the lands KTH2 that are adjacent to each other in the direction and in the solder escape pattern KNP2 that is adjacent to each other in the left-right direction.

The connector on which the measures 1 to 3 by silk printing described above are applied has a solder bridge on the board because the part on which the silk printing is performed is extremely conspicuous as compared with the connector on which measures 1 to 3 by silk printing are not applied. When performing the work of visually confirming whether or not the occurrence has occurred, the operator can mark where on the substrate to look, so that the line of sight can be quickly directed.

[Modification]
In the present embodiment, when the substrate is poured into the solder bath, the measures 1 to 3 by the silk printing described above are performed to prevent the occurrence of the solder bridge and prevent the solder short circuit. Measures 1 to 3 can also be used as a mark indicating which connector is the connector soldered directly to the board by the worker.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the substrate is poured into the solder bath, the above-described measure 3 by silk printing is applied, and the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN has the rectangular shape shown in FIG. 209(c). In the enclosed area KSA1 and each terminal of the DIP type small-sized connector, the area KSA2 enclosed in the rectangular shape shown in FIG. 209(f) prevents the occurrence of solder bridges to prevent solder short circuit. Instead of the rectangular shape, the area surrounded by other shapes may prevent the occurrence of solder bridges to prevent solder short circuit. FIG. 210 is a diagram (a) showing a modified example of FIG. 209(c) and a diagram (b) showing a modified example of FIG. 209(f). Note that, in the reference numerals in FIG. 210, the same components as those in FIG. 209 are designated by the same reference numerals. Further, in FIG. 210, the arrow shown by the solid line shows the direction in which the solder flows when the substrate is poured into the solder bath, and the arrow shown by the alternate long and short dash line shows the direction in which the substrate is poured into the solder bath.

In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 210(a), a land KTH1 into which each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and each solder escape pattern KNP1. , And each land KTH1 and each solder in the area KSA1′ surrounded by silk printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB in a shape about 3 times larger than each shape. Printing is performed so that the area excluding the escape pattern KNP1 is filled. Further, when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA1' becomes a small upland area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is flown into the solder bath, the solder needs to flow over the resist and flow over a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1′. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder flowing on the silk-printed area KSA1′, and to form each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 which are recessed areas formed on a small plateau called silk-printed area KSA1′. When the solder flows in the area, the solder is separated from the land KTH1 which is the recessed area and the solder escape pattern KNP1 because the solder cannot escape from the small plateau of the silk-printed area KSA1'. By applying the force, the solder bridges can be suppressed in each of the terminals PN and the lands KTH1 that are vertically adjacent to each other and in the solder escape pattern KNP1 that is adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction.

In addition, in each terminal of the DIP type small-sized connector, as shown in FIG. 210(b), the land KTH2 into which each terminal of the DIP type small-sized connector is inserted and the respective solder escape patterns KNP2 Enclosed by silk printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB in a shape about three times larger, excluding each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 in the area KSA2′ surrounded by this shape. Area to be printed. Also, when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA2' becomes a small upland area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is flown to the solder bath, the solder needs to flow over the resist and flow over a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2′. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder flowing on the silk-printed area KSA2', and to form each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 which are recessed areas formed on a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2'. When the solder flows in, the solder separates from the land KTH2, which is a recessed area, and the solder escape pattern KNP2, so that the solder separates from the land KSA2′, which is silk-printed, on a small plateau called KSA2′. As a result, the solder bridges can be suppressed in each of the terminals and the lands KTH2 that are vertically adjacent to each other and in the solder escape pattern KNP2 that is adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the terminal of the final stage and the solder escape pattern are connected to each other and formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB, but they are separated by a predetermined distance. You may form it. FIG. 211 is a diagram showing a modified example in which the final-stage terminal and the solder escape pattern are formed with a predetermined distance therebetween.

In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 211(a), the land KTH1 into which the terminal PN of the final stage of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted is long in the vertical direction. A solder escape pattern KNP1′ having a rectangular shape whose width is equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH1 (which may have a square shape whose one side is equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH1) and a predetermined distance ( For example, it is formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB with a distance of ⅓ to ½ of the outer diameter of the land KTH1. Good. The solder escape pattern KNP1' is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or solid ground but is in an insulated state.

In the DIP type small-sized connector, as shown in FIG. 211(a), the land KTH2 into which the terminal of the final stage of the DIP type small-sized connector is inserted and the width in the left-right direction are the outer diameter of the land KTH2. The solder escape pattern KNP2′ having a rectangular shape (one side may have a quadrangular shape having the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) and a predetermined distance (for example, 3 minutes of the outer diameter of the land KTH2). It may be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB so as to be separated from each other by a distance of 1 to 1/2). The solder escape pattern KNP2' is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or solid ground but is in an insulated state.

Also, in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 211(b), the land KTH1 into which the terminal PN of the final stage of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted and the vertical direction. A solder escape pattern KNP1'' having a rectangular shape with a long width equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH1 and a semicircular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH1 (a quadrangular shape with one side equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH1 It may have a semicircular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH1) and a predetermined distance (for example, a length of one third to one half of the outer diameter of the land KTH1). ) May be spaced apart from each other and formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. The solder escape pattern KNP1'' is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or solid ground but is in an insulated state.

In the DIP type small-sized connector, as shown in FIG. 211(b), the land KTH2 into which the terminal of the final stage of the DIP type small-sized connector is inserted and the width of the land KTH2 which is long in the left-right direction are equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH2. A solder escape pattern KNP2″ having a rectangular shape and a semicircular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH2 (having a quadrangular shape with one side being the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2 and having a semicircular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH2 May have a shape) and a predetermined distance (for example, one-third to one-half of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) apart from the back surface of the main body frame-side relay board KB. (Solder surface) It may be formed on the copper foil surface of KBy. This solder escape pattern KNP2'' is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or solid ground but is in an insulated state.

Further, in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 211(c), the land KTH1 into which the terminal PN of the final stage of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted and the vertical direction. Is long and has a rectangular shape whose width is equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH1 and has a triangular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH1. May have a triangular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH1) and a predetermined distance (for example, one-third to one-half of the outer diameter of the land KTH1). Alternatively, they may be formed separately on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. The solder escape pattern KNP1'''' is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or solid ground but is in an insulated state.

In the DIP type small-sized connector, as shown in FIG. 211(c), the land KTH2 into which the terminal of the final stage of the DIP type small-sized connector is inserted and the width of the land KTH2 that is long in the left-right direction are equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH2. Solder escape pattern KNP2′″ having a rectangular shape and a triangular shape on the opposite side to the land KTH2 (having a quadrangular shape with one side being the outer diameter of the land KTH2 and having a triangular shape on the opposite side to the land KTH2 May be separated by a predetermined distance (for example, one-third to one-half of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) from the back surface of the main body frame-side relay board KB ( The solder surface) KBy may be formed on each copper foil surface. The solder escape pattern KNP2'''' is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or solid ground but is in an insulated state.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the land KTH1 (KTH2) through which the terminal at the final stage is inserted is formed by connecting the solder escape pattern KNP1 (KNP2) having a rectangular shape to the land at the terminal at the final stage. The shape of the solder escape pattern on the opposite side may be a semicircular shape (see the semicircular shape in FIG. 211(b)) or a triangular shape (see the triangular shape in FIG. 211(c)).

Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 209, the direction in which the substrate is made to flow into the solder bath (that is, the direction of the one-dot chain line arrow in FIGS. 209(a) to 209(c)) is predetermined. If the board can be made to flow in the direction opposite to this direction in addition to the direction (that is, if the board can be made to flow in the solder bath from both directions), take the above measures 1 to 3 by silk printing. It is also possible to prevent the occurrence of solder bridges and prevent solder short circuits. In this case, a solder escape pattern having a rectangular shape is connected to the land through which the terminal at the final stage is inserted depending on the flow direction. The shape of the solder escape pattern on the opposite side that is not connected to the terminal at the final stage is a semicircular shape (see the semicircular shape in FIG. 211(b)) or a triangular shape (triangular shape in FIG. 211(c)). See also). Further, the terminal at the final stage and the solder escape pattern may be formed so as to be separated by a predetermined distance. The solder escape pattern described above may be formed on both ends of the connector in the direction in which the board is poured into the solder bath. Further, when it is not known from which direction the board should flow when designing the board, the solder escape patterns described above are formed in both directions so that the board may flow from either direction.

By the way, conventionally, various types such as a main control board for controlling a game progress and a game profit, a sub-control board for controlling a performance to be executed as the game progresses, an image control board for controlling display of an image display device, etc. A gaming machine in which a substrate is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, like the gaming machine described in this document, although various types of boards are poured into a solder bath to solder the terminals of components, a problem that solder bridges are formed at adjacent terminals and a short circuit due to solder occurs was there.

[Prevention of peeling by over-resist]
Next, the prevention of peeling due to the over-resist will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, first, the over-resist applied to each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN will be described, and the over-resist applied to the housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector will be described. FIG. 212 is a schematic view (a) of an overresist applied to each terminal of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and a schematic view (b) of a cross section taken along line XX in (a). FIG. 213 is a schematic view (a) of the copper foil surface on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the board on which the surface mounting type connector is mounted, and a schematic view (b) of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board. FIG. 214 is a continuation of FIG. 213, is an enlarged view of the portion A of FIG. 213(b), and is a schematic view (c) of an overresist applied to the housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector, It is the schematic (d) of the cross section of the YY line in c). 212 to 214, various wiring patterns and substrate grounds (GND) (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "Betland") are omitted for clarity of the drawings.

[Overresist applied to each terminal of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type)]
The over resist applied to each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN will be described. As shown in FIGS. 212(a) and 212(b), a through hole KTH1 (hereinafter simply referred to as “land”) having a land is provided. May be referred to as “KTH1”.) through holes are formed in the base material KBo of the main body frame side relay board KB, and the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, The copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB and the land having the outer diameter KTHD1 are formed by removing the copper foil. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. The outer diameter is KTHD1 and the sizes are the same.

Although the resist solution is applied on the copper foil surface of the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB to form the front surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr, the front surface (mounting surface) side A surface (mounting surface) side resist opening portion KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is formed in a region of the resist layer KBxr corresponding to the land KTH1. Although the resist solution is applied on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB to form the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KByr, the back surface (solder surface) A back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KByr having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is formed in a region of the side resist layer KByr corresponding to the land KTH1.

In this embodiment, the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front surface (mounting surface) side resist opening portion KBxra and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the back surface (solder surface) side resist opening portion KByra are the same. A board ground (GND) (that is, solid land) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and a board ground formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. (GND) (that is, solid ground) is electrically connected through a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

As described above, in the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, in the region corresponding to the land KTH1 in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr, the opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1. Since the resist opening KBxra on the surface (mounting surface) side having the above is formed, the outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 toward the center of the land KTH1. Has been applied. As a result, the resist can cover the entire outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame-side relay board KB, and thus high peeling strength can be applied to the land KTH1 from multiple directions. Can be uniform.

Further, in the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB, an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is provided in a region of the back surface (solder surface) resist layer KByr corresponding to the land KTH1. Since the resist opening KByra on the back surface (solder surface) side is formed, the resist is applied to the outer periphery of the land KTH1 from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTH1 of the land KTH1 toward the center of the land KTH1. Has been done. As a result, since the resist can cover the entire outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB, a high peeling strength can be applied to the land KTH1 from multiple directions. Can be uniform.

Although the front and back surfaces of the base material KBo of the main body frame side relay board KB are formed by adhering the copper foil surfaces to each other, the land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface is different from the adhesion between the base material KBo and the copper foil surface. Is stronger with the solder.

By the way, when fixing the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the main body frame side relay board KB, the rivets have been used as described above. This uses the drawer connector, but the electric connection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 can be automatically performed only by mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4, but the game board 5 is the main body. When mounted on the frame 4, a large force may be applied from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 to the box-shaped main body DCNa of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. This is to prevent the pin-type terminals PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN from peeling off the soldered surface on the back surface (solder surface) of the main body frame side relay board KB.

However, by using the drawer connector, an external force is applied to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. Therefore, the copper frame surface of the main body frame side relay board KB (mounting surface) KBx or the main body. The land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBx of the frame-side relay board KB is separated from the base material KBo, or various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface are separated from the base material KBo together with the land KTH1. There is a case to do.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the land KTH1 is further over-resisted on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KBx and the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by applying copper to the land KTH1. By increasing the peeling strength so that the copper foil formed on the foil surface does not peel off from the base material KBo, it is possible to use the drawer connector to attach the game board 5 to the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. Even if external force is applied, the land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface of the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB or the back surface (solder surface) KBx copper foil surface of the main body frame side relay board KB is a base material. It is possible to reliably prevent peeling from the KBo and various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface from peeling from the base material KBo together with the land KTH1.

In addition, the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 to which the over-resist is applied has a region in which each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted into the land KTH1 and soldered. It is larger than the outer diameter of the land without overresist. This is because the joint area when the terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is soldered to the land KTH1 with over-resist is the terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. This is because the contact area is equal to or larger than that in the case where the land is soldered to the land not overcoated. Thereby, the bonding strength to the land KTH1 on which the over-resist is applied can be made higher than the bonding strength to the land on which the over-resist is not applied.

Also, depending on the presence or absence of over-resist, even if the outer diameter of the land through which the terminal is inserted is the same, if the over-resist is not applied, the land having the outer diameter of the normal size and the over-resist It is necessary to prepare a land with an outer diameter larger than the normal size and a land at the board designing stage. However, there is a problem that soldering may fail due to insufficient bonding between the and the land.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of over-resist, for a substrate (for example, the main frame side relay substrate KB) having at least one land to be over-resisted, all lands are The same land as the land to which the over resist is applied is arranged as a land to which the over resist is not applied. As a result, the connection between the terminal and the land is sufficient, and the occurrence of solder defects can be reliably prevented.

It should be noted that, even with respect to the game board side relay board (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is mounted, However, the above-mentioned over-resist is applied. In addition to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, another main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' (not shown) is provided separately from the main body frame side relay board KB'. The main frame-side relay board KB' (not shown) is also provided with the above-mentioned over-resist on the land. Further, another game board side drawer connector (convex type) guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' of the main body frame 4 (this other game board drawer connector (convex type) is a main body frame Side drawer connector (concave type) Different from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 that is electrically connected to the DCN. The other game board side relay board is a game board side relay board (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4 is mounted. The above resist is applied to the land.

In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB are The outer diameter KTHD1 is the same size, but compared with the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, the main body frame side relay board KB The outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy may be increased or decreased. Further, in this embodiment, the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KByra are the same size, but the front surface (mounting surface) The opening diameter KByrD1 of the back surface (solder surface) resist opening KByra may be larger or smaller than the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front surface side resist opening KBxra.

[Modification]
Note that, in the above-described embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of over-resist, with respect to the substrate (for example, the main frame side relay substrate KB) in which at least one land is over-resisted, all lands are Then, the same land as the land to which the over-resist is applied is arranged as a land not to be over-resisted.However, when the over-resist is not applied, a land having an outer diameter of a normal size (that is, the over-resist is applied A land having an outer diameter of a normal size smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the existing land KTH1) may be arranged. That is, the land to which the over-resist is applied and the land having the outer diameter of the normal size when the over-resist is not applied may be mixed. In this case, even if the outer diameters of the lands through which the terminals are inserted are the same depending on the presence or absence of overresist, when overresist is not performed It is necessary to prepare a land having an outer diameter larger than a normal size at the board design stage.

[Overresist on the fixed land of the surface mount type connector]
213(a) and (b), and FIGS. 214(c) and (d) will be described with reference to the over-resist applied to the housing fixing pad KSPF of the surface mounting type connector KCN mounted on the substrate KC. As described above, each terminal (for example, having six terminals) of the surface mount type connector KCN is soldered to have a vertically elongated rectangular pad KSP, various wiring patterns respectively connected to each pad KSP, A long rectangular shape in which the both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left side and the right side) are soldered and fixed to the surface (mounting surface) of the board KC. The housing fixing pad KSPF having a shape is formed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface KCxp of the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, each pad KSP, various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP, each housing fixing Pads KSPF are formed respectively. The housing of the surface mount type connector KCN is made of non-conductive resin. Metal housing fixing portions are provided on both sides (left side and right side) of the surface mount type connector KCN.

The periphery KCxa of each pad KSP and various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP is the substrate ground (GND) (that is, the solid ground) by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. ) Is not electrically connected to but insulated. On the other hand, among the four corners of each housing fixing pad KSPF around each housing fixing pad KSPF, each housing is fixed by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. The pad KSPF is provided with a thermal pattern KCxb that is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) via a cross-shaped pattern. Due to this thermal pattern KCxb, both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left side and the right side) are attached to the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC. It is possible to prevent the heat of melting the solder from being taken from the outer periphery of each housing fixing pad KSPF when soldering to the KSPF. It should be noted that both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left side and the right side) are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC on each housing fixing pad KSPF. The soldering of the surface mount type connector KCN can strengthen the fixing of the surface mount type connector KCN to the board KC as compared with the case where each terminal of the surface mount type connector KCN is simply soldered to the board KC. , Both sides of the case of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal case fixing parts provided on the left side and the right side respectively) are electrically connected to the board ground (GND) of the board KC, and the surface mount is performed. It is also possible to enhance the shielding effect for the signals connected to the terminals of the type connector KCN.

Although the resist solution is applied to form the front surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr on the copper foil surface KCxp of the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the front surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr In the area corresponding to each pad KSP, a pad-side (mounting surface side) side resist opening having the same shape as each pad KSP is formed, and an area corresponding to each housing fixing pad KSPF. On the front surface (mounting surface) resist opening portion KCxra for the case fixing pad, which has an opening rectangular shape smaller than the rectangular shape of each case fixing pad KSPF is formed. Further, a resist solution is applied on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr.

The board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC and the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the board KC. ) Are electrically connected to each other through a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

As described above, in the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, in the region corresponding to the housing fixing pad KSPF in the front surface (mounting surface) resist layer KCxr, an opening rectangle smaller than the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF. Since the front surface (mounting surface) side resist opening portion KCxra for the case fixing pad having a shape is formed, the case fixing pad goes from the rectangular outer periphery of the case fixing pad KSPF toward the inside of the case fixing pad KSPF. An over resist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the KSPF is covered with the resist. As a result, the resist can cover the entire outer peripheral portion of each housing fixing pad KSPF on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, and thus high peeling strength can be obtained in multiple directions with respect to each housing fixing pad KSPF. Can be uniform for loads from.

Although the front and back surfaces of the base material KCo of the substrate KC are formed by adhering the copper foil surfaces to each other, each pad KSP or each casing formed on the copper foil surface is different from the adhesion between the base material KCo and the copper foil surface. The bond between the body fixing pad KSPF and the solder is stronger.

By the way, as the board KC on which the surface mount type connector KCN is mounted, in the present embodiment, for example, a board such as the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 can be cited. Various wirings and harnesses connected to various connectors provided on the boards such as the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are used when removing dust and tobacco tar accumulated on the pachinko machine 1, when performing various inspections, etc. After being removed by an attendant such as a clerk in the game hall, it is connected again after the work. However, staff such as store staff in game halls who perform such work are often unfamiliar with handling boards, and when removing various wiring or harness from the connector or connecting various wiring or harness to the connector. , It may be done by force (that is, with excessive force).

Then, among the plurality of connectors provided on the board KC such as the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, there are a DIP type connector and a surface mount type connector. Therefore, for example, the above-mentioned surface mount type connector KCN is used. When the board is mounted on the board KC and used, when a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall performs the above-described work, the force accompanying insertion/extraction of the harness to/from the surface mount type connector KCN is applied to the surface mount type connector KCN. Because of this large force, the copper foil on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate KC is applied to both sides of the housing of the surface mounting type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left side and the right side respectively). The case fixing pads KSPF formed on the surface KCxp are peeled off from the base material KCo, and along with this, the pads KSP formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC are separated from the base material KCo. In some cases, the wiring patterns may be peeled off or various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface KCxp may be peeled off together with the pads KSP from the base material KCo.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, an over resist is applied to the housing fixing pad KSPF so that the copper foil formed on the copper foil surface KCxp is not separated from the base material KCo. By increasing the peel strength, even if the force associated with the insertion/extraction of the harness to/from the surface mount type connector KCN is applied to the surface mount type connector KCN, it is formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. The case fixing pad KSPF is not peeled from the base material KCo, and accordingly, each pad KSP formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC is peeled from the base material KCo, It is possible to reliably prevent the various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface KCxp from being peeled off from the base material KCo together with the pads KSP.

[Modification]
In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned over-resist is applied to the housing fixing pad KSPF of the board KC on which the surface mounting type connector KCN to which an external force is applied is mounted. In addition to boards such as the control board 633, when a surface mounting type connector into which various wirings and harnesses are inserted and removed is mounted, peripheral control board 1510, power supply board 630, interface board 635, various decorative boards, various relays The above-mentioned over-resist may be applied to the housing fixing pad of the substrate such as the substrate and various driving substrates, or the substrate is provided when the substrate is provided on the movable body that is driven by the drive of the electric drive source. If the wiring or harness that is electrically connected to the board of the movable body is applied to the board of the movable body due to the operation of the body, the housing of the board of the movable body on which the surface mount type connector is mounted is mounted. The above-mentioned over-resist may be applied to the fixed pad, or various types of switches having a pressing operation portion, in the case of a surface mounting type mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board, The above-mentioned over-resist may be applied to the housing fixing pad of the substrate for fixing the switch, or when some external force is applied to the substrate, resistance, capacitor, diode, transistor, IC, etc. The above-mentioned over-resist may be applied to the pads of the substrate to which various terminals of the lead type or surface mount type electronic parts are soldered.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, in the region corresponding to the housing fixing pad KSPF in the front surface (mounting surface) resist layer KCxr, the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF is formed. Since the front surface (mounting surface) resist opening portion KCxra for the case fixing pad having a smaller opening rectangular shape is formed, the case fixing pad KSPF goes from the outer periphery of the rectangular shape toward the inside of the case fixing pad KSPF. An over-resist was applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the housing fixing pad KSPF was covered with a resist, but the housing fixing pad KSPF was not over-resisted and a through hole having a land around the housing fixing pad KSPF. It is also possible to form a plurality of the above and apply an over resist to each land. FIG. 215 is a schematic view (a) of the copper foil surface on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the board on which the surface mounting type connector of the modified example is mounted, and is a schematic view (b) of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board. is there. FIG. 216 is a continuation of FIG. 215 and is an enlarged view of portion B of FIG. 215(b), which is a schematic view (c) of an over-resist applied to the housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector, It is the schematic (d) of the cross section of the ZZ line in c). Note that, in FIGS. 215 and 216, various wiring patterns and substrate grounds (GND) (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “Betland”) are omitted for clarity of the drawings.

A modified example in which the housing fixing pad KSPF is not over-resisted, a plurality of through holes having lands are formed around the housing fixing pad KSPF, and each land is over-resisted will be described. As shown in (b) and FIGS. 216(c) and 216(d), each terminal (for example, having six terminals) of the surface mount type connector KCN has an elongated rectangular shape in the vertical direction to be soldered. The pads KSP, the various wiring patterns respectively connected to the respective pads KSP, and both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left side and the right side respectively) are provided on the surface of the substrate KC ( A housing fixing pad KSPF having a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction and fixed by being soldered to a mounting surface), a plurality of through holes KCTH having lands (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “land KCTH”), The wiring pattern for solid land connection for connecting the housing fixing pad KSPF, the land KCTH, and the solid land is formed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface KCxp of the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. Various wiring patterns connected to the KSP, each housing fixing pad KSPF, each land KCTH, and each wiring pattern for solid land connection are formed. Each land KCTH is formed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC. In this modification, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC have the same size. The wiring pattern for solid land connection which connects the housing fixing pad KSPF, the land KCTH, and the solid land also has a function as a thermal pattern of the housing fixing pad KSPF.

For the right housing fixing pad KSPF, three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, and two rows are arranged so as to be adjacent to the right of the housing fixing pad KSPF. With respect to the left housing fixing pad KSPF, three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, and two rows are arranged so as to be adjacent to the right of the housing fixing pad KSPF.

Although the resist solution is applied to form the front surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr on the copper foil surface KCxp of the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the front surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr A surface (mounting surface) side resist opening portion KCxra having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed in a region corresponding to the land KCTH. Although the resist solution is applied on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC to form the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr, the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr. In the area corresponding to the land KCTH, a back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KCyra having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed. In this modification, the opening diameter of the front surface (mounting surface) side resist opening portion KCxra and the opening diameter of the back surface (solder surface) side resist opening portion KCyra are the same. The board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC and the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the board KC. ) Are electrically connected to each other through a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

As described above, in the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, in the area corresponding to the land KCTH in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr, the surface (mounting surface) having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is mounted. Since the) side resist opening portion KBxra is formed, an over resist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the land KCTH is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the land KCTH toward the center of the land KCTH. In the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC, in the area corresponding to the land KCTH in the back surface (solder surface) resist layer KCyr, the back surface (solder surface) side having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH. Since the resist opening KCyra is formed, an over-resist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the land KCTH is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the land KCTH toward the center of the land KCTH. As a result, the peel strength can be increased so that the copper foil formed on the copper foil surface KCxp is not peeled from the base material KCo by applying the over resist to each land KCTH.

As described above, the right housing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the up-down direction so that they are adjacent to the right side of the right housing fixing pad KSPF. In the left housing fixing pad KSPF, as described above, there are two rows in which the three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, and the left housing fixing pad KSPF. It is arranged so as to be adjacent to the left side of. As a result, even if the casing fixing pad KSPF is not over-resisted, the lands KCTH are over-resisted, so that the casing fixing pad KSPF and the lands KCTH have the above-described solid land connection wiring pattern. By being connected, even if the force accompanying the insertion/extraction of the harness to/from the surface mount type connector KCN is applied to the surface mount type connector KCN, it is formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. When the casing fixing pad KSPF to be peeled off is attempted to be peeled from the base material KCo, the peeling strength by each land KCTH formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC is increased accordingly. This makes it difficult for the case fixing pad KSPF to be peeled off from the base material KCo.

In this modification, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC have the same size. However, compared with the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC, the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the board KC. May be increased or decreased. Further, in this modification, the opening diameter of the front surface (mounting surface) side resist opening portion KBxra and the back surface (solder surface) side resist opening portion KByra have the same size, but the front surface (mounting surface) The opening diameter of the back surface side (solder surface) resist opening portion KByra may be larger or smaller than the opening diameter of the side resist opening portion KBxra.

Further, in this modification, as described above, the right housing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which the three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, and the right housing fixing pad KSPF. Of the housing fixing pad KSPF on the left side, as described above, two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, Although it is arranged so as to be adjacent to the left side of the left housing fixing pad KSPF, instead of or together with this, the right housing fixing pad KSPF has two lands at equal intervals along the vertical direction. Two rows of KCTH may be arranged so as to be adjacent to each other above and/or below the right housing fixing pad KSPF, or on the left housing fixing pad KSPF along the vertical direction. The two lands KCTH may be arranged at equal intervals in two rows such that they are adjacent to each other above and/or below the left housing fixing pad KSPF.

By the way, conventionally, various types such as a main control board for controlling a game progress and a game profit, a sub-control board for controlling a performance to be executed as the game progresses, an image control board for controlling display of an image display device, etc. A game machine in which a substrate is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2). By the way, various game machines such as the game machine described in this document are proposed. The connector provided on the board receives a load due to the insertion and removal of the wiring.For example, when a person unfamiliar with the board removes the wiring from the connector or connects the wiring to the connector with excessive force, However, there is a problem that the copper foil of the substrate is peeled off due to the load on the connector.

[Peripheral control unit configuration]
Next, the overall configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 included in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 217 to 219. 217 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 218 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 219 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500. In FIG. 218, the terminals of various connectors are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the terminals of various connectors are connected to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. Although it is projected from the drawing, it is omitted from the view of the drawing.

As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the peripheral control unit 1500 has a cover body 1501 having a box shape that is open at the rear and is longer in the left-right direction than in the vertical direction, and a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. Peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of the performance based on a command from the main control board 1310, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a peripheral control board 1510 A liquid crystal output substrate 1530 that is electrically connected and a base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 are provided. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted in predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the base body 1502 closes the opening of the cover body 1501. Thus, the peripheral control board box 1505 (sealing board box) is constituted by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

[Cover body]
Peripheral data capable of storing various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the peripheral control board 1510, in various boards mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501. There is a ROM substrate 1520 and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 that can output drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having a region of about ⅔ when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back surface, and is arranged on the left side of the cover body 1501. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are the upper right of the cover body 1501 when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a square shape in the remaining one-third area when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a square shape that is two times larger than the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and is disposed on the lower right side of the cover body 1501.

The board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described later, and the board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described later. Connected to each other. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected, and the same ground is provided. (GND). The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. There is.

The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate and is molded into an opaque black color. When viewed from the front side, the oblong rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm) has an upper side and a left side. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are respectively provided on the lower side and the right side so as to project rearward (on the front side of the pachinko machine 1) to form a box shape having an opening.

The cover flat plate 1501a is for mounting the air-cooling fan FAN at a position slightly above the center of the cover flat plate 1501a and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 mounted on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. On the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed along a plurality of concentric circles whose center points are the centers of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. In addition, in the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a predetermined cylindrical shape is inserted into the through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed in the four corners of the air cooling fan FAN having a square shape. Guide protrusions 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 having a height (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension of the air-cooling fan FAN in the depth direction) are respectively formed so as to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501. By forming the slit holes 1501aaa in the shape of a circular arc, it is possible to prevent illegal acts in which various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are illegally taken out from the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a in the vicinity of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and diagonally. When the air cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa to be mounted, the front surface of the air cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan head screw (not shown) having a seat (a head having a pan head and a flat washer integrated) is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front of the cover plate 1501a toward the rear. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the pan-head screw with a seat, comes into contact with the front surface of the air cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air cooling fan FAN jumps out from the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Can be prevented.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the front surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa ( In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is located at a position higher than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). A wiring lead-out concave portion 1501ab is formed at a position (in which there is a) protruding toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooling fan FAN is mounted and fixed in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN can be drawn out from the wiring drawing-out recess 1501ab.

The cover flat plate 1501a is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side when viewed from the front surface thereof, and the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switches. The position corresponding to 1510d is defined as one closed rectangular region (correctly, a convex region having the volume adjusting switch 1510d and the connector CN1 as the upper part and the connector CN2 to the connector CN7 as the lower part) and a connector recess. 1501ac is directed toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). Are formed so as to project. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjusting hole 1501ac8 are provided at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjusting switch 1510d, respectively. Has been formed. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac substantially occupies the lower right area of the cover flat plate 1501a when viewed from the front. Therefore, as measures against insufficient strength and warpage of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by the increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume adjustment are provided on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. Two reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2, which are long and slender in the vertical direction, are formed so as not to interfere with the hole 1501ac8 and to project forward at a predetermined interval.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. The connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume adjusting hole 1501ac8 are exposed.

When viewed from the front, the cover flat plate 1501a has a position corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side thereof. A position where the connector concave portion 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa as one closed horizontally long rectangular area (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa). And is formed so as to project toward the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad, connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 have connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad. It becomes a state to be exposed from each.

The cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed along the left side of the cover flat plate 1501a at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Compared with the bottom surface of the above-mentioned FAN mounting recess 1501aa, the mounting recess 1501af for mounting the wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that communicates with this wiring drawing opening 1501ae and can close the wiring drawing opening 1501ae. It is formed so as to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501 at a high position (position having a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is located at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and has a predetermined cylindrical height that is inserted into the through hole 1503a (a distance shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503). A protrusion 1501afa having a dimension) is formed so as to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the mounting hole 1501afb1 is provided at a position corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are formed respectively.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front side of the wiring cover body 1503 to the rear side. The wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, a flexible flat cable (FFC (Flexible Flat)) that closes the wiring drawing opening 1501ae and is connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Abbreviation of Cable In the flexible flat cable, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600 are arranged in parallel, and these flat conductors are covered with an insulator. The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects )) from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate and is molded in an opaque black color.

When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left side cover side wall 1501c and project outward in the vertical direction at predetermined center intervals. At the same time, a hinge hooking portion 1501cc that is arranged above the guide portion 1501ca and protrudes outward, and a hinge hooking portion 1501cd that is arranged below the guide portion 1501cb and protrudes outward are respectively formed. A chamfer is formed on the rear surface side of the left ends of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb. On the other hand, L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda that project toward the front are formed on the front surfaces of the left ends of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd. A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea protruding outward is formed at the center of the cover body 1501 on the right side cover side wall 1501e.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the rear surface so that the peripheral control board 1510 is closely arranged on the left side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. Four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed at the positions so as to project from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Around the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1510rf1 having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 is formed. 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) having a circular shape are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are formed. , 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510. Further, these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. Are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 to face the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. The peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a by screwing. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , Are in contact with each other, and lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are respectively in contact with the seat surface of the metal pan head screw. Become. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via a pan head screw made of metal. The lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are electrically connected to each other. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same. Since it is a ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected, and the same ground (GND) is obtained.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 open the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end surface on the side (that is, so as not to project outside from the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 when viewed from the rear surface so that the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. At a position to be formed, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss projecting portions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are diagonally projected from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Has been done. Around the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. 1520 rf 1 to 1520 rf 4 and circular solder copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1520 rb 1 to 1520 rb 4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1520 y side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are formed, respectively. Wiring patterns of 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, respectively. Further, these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed.

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is directed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Insert 1520r1 and 1520r3 into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Then, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a by screwing the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501i1 and 1501i2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. ) And the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are in contact with each other, and lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, The seat surface of the metal pan head screw is in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 via a pan head screw made of metal. The lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are electrically connected to each other. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is the same as the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and they are the same. Since it is a ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan head screw. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected, and the same ground (GND) is obtained.

When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are attached to the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end surface on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the cover flat plate. The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface side of 1501a is arranged on the same plane.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the rear surface so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. At the position, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss projecting portions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed diagonally protruding from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1530rf1 having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is formed. 1530rf4 and soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having a circular shape are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 are formed. , 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Further, these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1530 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is directed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2, 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530. To the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, and insert a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to cover the cover plate. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a by screwing the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of 1501a. In this state, lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. And the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the metal The seat surface of the pan head screw made of steel is in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal pan head screw. The lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are electrically connected to each other. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and is the same. Since it is a ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal pan head screw. (GND) and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are electrically connected, and the same ground (GND) is obtained.

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 open the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Side end surface (that is, so as not to protrude outside the opening side end surfaces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the cover flat plate 1501a. The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface side and the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane. It is supposed to be done.

As described above, in a state where various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various boards (the cover plate 1501a) are fixed. A space having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, a gap (2.3 mm in this embodiment) having the above-described predetermined distance dimension is provided between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Will be formed.

Ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes are formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blade portion, thereby performing peripheral control. By taking in air from the outside of the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (in particular, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501 are provided with a clearance. A gap is formed between the volume adjustment switch 1510d formed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501 while being formed. Further, when the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are formed. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blade portion. In addition to taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az described above, the gaps described above (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connectors formed in the cover body 1501) are also provided. The gaps formed in the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the volume adjustment holes 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is taken in through the two connectors CN8, CN9 provided and the two connector holes 1501ac9, 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501).

The sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is the area of the ventilation holes 1501az formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The above-mentioned gaps (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501) and the volume control switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510. And a gap formed in the volume adjusting hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501. And the area in the gap formed in and). Therefore, when the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blade portion. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 The flow velocity of the air flowing into each can be kept small.

When the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blade portion. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Although the flow velocity of the air flowing into the fan can be suppressed to a small value, when the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, this rotation sucks in air through the blade portion and the surroundings. Air may be sent out to the control IC 1510a. In other words, the air-cooling fan FAN may not be the main purpose of exchanging the air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but may simply cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

[Base body]
The base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate and is molded into an opaque black color. When viewed from the front, the upper side of the horizontally long rectangular base flat plate 1502a, Base side walls 1502b to 1502e are respectively provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side so as to project forward (toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) to form a box shape having an opening. The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is slightly larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Accordingly, when the cover body 1501 is covered with the base body 1502 to close the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are provided inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. When is fitted, it becomes inscribed (surface contact).

When viewed from the front, the base flat plate 1502a has a predetermined distance along the lower side and is located at a position not interfering with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, the peripheral control board). Each terminal of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of 1510 is inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Since it projects from 1510y, the peripheral control board 1510 is warped by the force at the time of inserting a connector for connecting wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7 at a position where it does not interfere with each projecting terminal). Long and narrow disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1-1502a3 are formed in the vertical direction to prevent the electric wiring pattern formed on the control board 1510 from being disconnected.

When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engaging portion 1502ca protruding outward is formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the base body 1502 of the left side base wall 1502c. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions, respectively. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are described above. The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bags 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. By wrapping around, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-shaped groove-shaped bags 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. It is capable of engaging.

Further, at the center of the right side base side wall 1502e, a base side sealing portion 1502ea protruding outward is formed at a position corresponding to the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 included in the game board 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the right side base wall 1502e, respectively.

[Various connectors]
On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501, the peripheral control unit 1511 (excluding the functions of various ROMs) and the effect display control unit 1512 (functions of various ROMs) described above are provided. Function) and a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as “SATA controller”), and various I/O interfaces, etc. Peripheral control IC 1510a integrated on one semiconductor chip, and various programs that can control the progress and demonstration of game performance (demonstration performed in the player waiting state) and various schedule data that regulate the progress of performance A control ROM 1510b (including the function of the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 described above, the function of the display control ROM of the effect display control unit 1512 described above, and the like), and peripheral data provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. A SDRAM 1510c composed of SDRAMs (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2 capable of transferring and storing various kinds of control information (peripheral data) stored in the ROM 1520a, and a slide system capable of adjusting the volume. A volume adjustment switch 1510d, a backup power supply 1510e that can supply power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is cut off, a power supply creation circuit (not shown) that creates various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. I have it. The backup power supply 1510e is housed in a holder (not shown).

The control ROM 1510b included in the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 included in the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. The peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

Various I/O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I/Os and various parallel I/Os. The various serial I/Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

In this embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving a command from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5), various boards provided on the game board 5 side, and various boards provided on the door frame side. The SPI communication or the I2C communication is adopted as a communication method for transmitting control data with respect to (connecting via the corresponding connector among the connector CN3, the connector CN6, and the connector CN7).

In the present embodiment, using SPI communication or I2C communication, an electric drive source provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various motors and various solenoids, which communicate via the connector CN6), a door frame. The drive data is transmitted to a drive control IC that drives an electric drive source (for example, various motors and various solenoids, which communicate with each other through a connector CN3) provided on the 3 side, or the game board 5 side. Light emission data for the LED control IC for the plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN7) included in the LED and the plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN3) included in the door frame 3 side. Or receive signals from various sensors (communicating via connector CN6) provided on the game board 5 side as detection data, or various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (via connector CN3). It is receiving the signal from the communication.) as detection data. In this embodiment, the transfer rate by SPI communication is set to 250 kpbs, and the transfer rate by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

As various parallel I/O, there is GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output, general-purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN included in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1) or provided on the game board 5 side. The signals from various sensors that confirm the operation of the controlled object and the origin position are input to the GPIO (via the connector CN6), or the control signal for the unillustrated controlled object provided on the game board 5 side is transmitted from the GPIO (connector CN6 Output) or a signal from the GPIO to the LED ML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to the connector CN1, SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , Connector CN5 is assigned UART communication, connector CN6 is assigned SPI communication and GPIO (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as SPI communication and a connector in which GPIO coexists), and connector CN7 is SPI communication. Has been assigned.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and has realized a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (supports up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be transferred at high speed.

The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate 3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memories), and can realize high data communication speeds. In the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, a special connector SCN1 for connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the board and a special connector SCN2 for connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the board are further provided. I have it. The surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector SCN3 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510. The surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a special connector SCN4 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 by a plurality of types of video signal systems. The plural types of video signal systems include, for example, the RGB system, the LVDS system, the MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface) system, the eDP (Embedded Display Port) system, and the clockless system, and the present embodiment. In this, four systems (a total of four systems) of the RGB system, one system, the LVDS system, two systems (the first LVDS system, the second LVDS system), and the MIPI system are adopted. Further, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. A peripheral control board that adopts, for example, an eDP method instead of the MIPI method, has one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and one eDP system It is also possible to create 1510.

Further, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, an LEDML1 is provided near the control ROM 1510b, an LEDML2 is provided near the SDRAM 1510c, an LEDML3 is provided near the special connector SCN1, and an LEDML4 is provided near the special connector SCN2. , Are provided. The peripheral control board 1510 is directly supplied with various voltages (DC +37V, DC +12V, and DC +5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The LED ML1 is for confirming (monitoring) the state where DC +5V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state where DC +5V is supplied. The LED ML2 is for confirming (monitoring) the state where DC +12V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state where DC +12V is supplied. The LED ML3 is for confirming (monitoring) the state where DC +37V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state where DC +37V is supplied. The LED ML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surfaces (covers) of the various boards are covered. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) of a predetermined height is formed between the back surface of the flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The space formed in this way can be illuminated brightly by turning on the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510.

Special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, a special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The special connector SCN4 provided includes a connector CN1 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a connector CN8 to the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 from the point of having a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from CN10. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are sockets, respectively, and the plugs of the corresponding connectors are inserted and pushed in the vertical direction with respect to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 so that the sockets and the plugs fit with each other. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 have a structure in which there is no amount of vertical movement when the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are viewed from the front when they are fitted together.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively, and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The special connectors SCN4 provided on the (mounting surface) 1530x are sockets.

The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to push the socket and the plug. Fit together. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front, the socket is in the front-back direction (pachinko). The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing by moving a predetermined distance range toward the back and front of the machine 1. In the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In the above, even if the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is moved from the front side to the maximum extent within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 is the cover plate of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to contact the back surface of the 1501a.

The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to push the socket and the plug together. Mating. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front, the socket is in the front-back direction (pachinko machine 1). The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that is capable of absorbing an error in the front-rear direction that occurs during pushing by moving a predetermined distance range toward the back surface and the front surface). The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a state in which the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front and moves to the maximum within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range, the front surface (top surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 is the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to come into contact with.

Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is used for the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is used for the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can store various control information (peripheral data) that is a control target of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (a function of the image ROM of the above-described effect display control unit 1512, etc.). Including.). As various control information (peripheral data), image data such as a background image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, character images, image data such as design images, various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 Light emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, light off, etc.) of various LEDs and the like that are mounted in a plurality, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, and alarm sound, door frame 3 and game board 5. Examples thereof include drive data for driving and controlling various movable effect bodies provided.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (non-volatile) memory, is cheaper than the NOR flash (non-volatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

As described above, by adopting the NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, it is possible to realize cost reduction, contribute to the suppression of power consumption, and read various stored data at a high transfer rate. it can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. Further, it is necessary to accurately and surely transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to the peripheral control substrate 1510. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected to each other via a wiring (harness) between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510. By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected to the control board 1510 by the board-to-board connector, the influence of noise entering the board-to-board transmission path is reduced.

Although the procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on its surface (mounting surface) 1520x for the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 ( (Mounting surface) It is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a after inserting and pushing into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided for the mounting board 1510x. By using the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, the front-back direction error that occurs when the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 is absorbed. This makes it possible to prevent damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket and to reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

Further, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. is there. Even in such a case, by using the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control substrate 1510. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the plug is connected to the socket, damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided. It can be reliably formed.

The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 from the connector CN10, and thereby the progress of the game effect on the effect display device 1600 (for example, to the player). And an image that tells you that a big jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state, an image that tells you that the jackpot gaming state does not occur, a state that the jackpot gaming state occurs compared to the normal state, although the jackpot gaming state does not occur It is an important board that draws images such as images that convey that you are approaching) and demonstrations (demonstration that is performed while the player is waiting). Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit the drawing data of the image drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are not electrically connected to each other via a wiring (harness), but the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are not connected. By adopting a structure in which the board 1510 and the board 1510 are electrically connected by the board-to-board connector, the influence of noise penetrating the board-to-board transmission path is reduced.

Although a procedure for mounting various boards in the inner space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on its surface (mounting surface) 1530x and a surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting). Since it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a after inserting and pushing in the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface 1510x, By adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the floating mechanism, it is possible to absorb the error in the front-back direction that occurs when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, it is possible to prevent damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket, and to reliably form the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530.

Further, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. is there. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. By absorbing the error in the front-back direction that occurs at the time, damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is surely provided. Can be formed.

When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are separated. Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the same plane, it is said that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the front surface of the peripheral control board 1510. Since the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced as compared with the case where three-dimensional arrangement is performed, for example, a large movable effect unit (a movable effect member is operated on the game board 5). It is possible to contribute to securing a distance dimension in the depth direction for disposing an electric drive source and a drive mechanism capable of performing the above, and various sensors for detecting an origin position and an operating position.

[Assembly method of peripheral control unit]
Here, a method for assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Then, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

Then, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ( The mounting surface 1520x and the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are directed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are provided on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The insertion boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are inserted, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the attachment boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. .. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. The mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in the above are arranged.

Then, insert a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2, 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and screw into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1, 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by the above, and a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form it on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a by screwing the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal (not shown) in the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a pan head screw made of steel and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. In this way, of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is constrained from moving vertically and horizontally by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the cover plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 has a mounting boss for restraining the vertical and horizontal directions, while movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1, 1501an2 formed on the back surface side. The protruding portion is not formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is because the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a so as to constrain the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional error due to such constraint is covered by the peripheral control substrate 1510. When fixing to the back surface side of 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a have the dimensional dimensions. This is because it is possible to absorb it with a sufficient margin.

Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the 1502 are inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

Next, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bags 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. When the cover body 1501 is covered with the base body 1502 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is covered with the cover body 1501, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is made of metal (not shown). The metal one-way screw with the anchor rivet inserted is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet spreads outward at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea, so that the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are formed. The base side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is in a state of being sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted and inscribed (surface contact) inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502, and the base body 1502 is in contact. The front faces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aa3 formed in the above are in contact with the back face (solder face) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, since the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are in a conductive state. In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed by a tool. Therefore, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by looking at the traces of opening and closing, and a deterrent to the unauthorized conduct to the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been increased.

Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN are pulled out from the wiring pull-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal-made pan head screw with a seat (a screw having a shape of a pan head and a flat washer) (not shown) is screwed into the pull-out and mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front of the cover plate 1501a toward the rear.

Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring drawing opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the attachment recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. By inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front side to the rear side of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5, the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front side and the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500). (The engaging portion 1502ca side formed in) is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100, and a metal pan head screw (not shown) is formed in the through holes 1502eb1, 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Is inserted and screwed toward a mounting hole (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100 to be fixed.

In the assembling method described above, in the procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is first placed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 at the predetermined position described above. (The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the rear side.), and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. Surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 after being fixed at the above-described predetermined position on the side (the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back side). The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the (mounting surface) 1520x is inserted into and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to push the peripheral control board 1510 into the predetermined position (the peripheral control board 1510 is a cover). The body 1501 is packed and arranged on the left side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back side). Also in the mounting procedure of such various boards, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, by absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs at the time of pushing in, a plug and a socket are formed. It is possible to prevent damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed in the above, and to reliably form the transmission paths between the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral control substrate 1510, respectively, and at the same time, to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral. It is possible to reliably form the transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board.

By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards having different game specifications, which are mounted on the pachinko machine. In this embodiment, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three parts and attached to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used commonly regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is a peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game specification of the game board. By storing the peripheral data corresponding to, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is a substrate that depends on the game specification of the game board, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is a substrate that depends on the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that is not dependent on the game specifications of the game board and is not dependent on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). Further, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 having the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which the peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the inter-board connector described above. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

As the system of the video signal input to the display device such as the effect display device, for example, as described above, there are plural types of systems such as the RGB system, the LVDS system, the MIPI system, the eDP system, and the clockless system. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these plural types of methods are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be easily replaced according to the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS system systems as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 (for example, the first LVDS system system). Therefore, the liquid crystal output board 1530 adapted to the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 (LVDS method) is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the board-to-board connector described above.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side by metal pan head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and are the same. Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is made to flow to the board ground (grounds (GND) of various boards) to remove the noise. (Hereinafter, it may be described as "noise suppression effect by peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin"). As a result, it is not necessary to provide each of the substrates with a dedicated filter for removing such noise, and it is possible to contribute to the cost reduction of the various substrates.

Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes can cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 by air, and also have a function of confirming the presence or absence of tampering.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 219, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are formed in the peripheral control board 1510. The product number or model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x and the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b can be visually recognized, that is, the angle in multiple directions. In order to be able to confirm the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins, the areas are dispersed and arranged in a region larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. Thereby, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, the LED ML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b is designed to maintain the lighting state in the state where the direct current +5V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, and therefore the direct current +5V is supplied. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the current status, it also has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the status of the IC pin. To be able to contribute to.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa allow the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to be confirmed. A larger area than the shape of the inter-board connector (shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) In addition, the product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the state of the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, Can be visually recognized, that is, in a large area in which the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the state of the IC pins can be substantially confirmed from the angles of the multiple directions, and the respective areas are dispersed. Thus, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be performed in a plurality of circular shapes. This can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az having Further, the LED ML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is designed to maintain the lighting state in the state where the direct current +37V is supplied from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620, and therefore the direct current +37V is maintained. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the supplied state, it has a special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By additionally having a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN3, the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (mounting surface) ) It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN3 provided in the 1520x.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa allow the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to be confirmed. An area larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530). It is arranged so as to be distributed. Accordingly, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is performed by changing the plurality of circular shapes. It can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Further, since the LED ML4 arranged near the special connector SCN2 is adapted to maintain the lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). It has a function, but it illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. By having a function as a spotlight, the board-to-board connector is visually recognized by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of sex.

In addition, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are the product numbers printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. In order that the model and the state of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be visually recognized, that is, the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the state of the IC pins can be confirmed from the angles of the multiple directions, the SDRAMs 1510c1, They are arranged so as to be larger than the shape of 1510c2. Thereby, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, the LED ML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in the lighting state in the state where the direct current +12V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Originally, although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state where DC +12V is supplied, it also has a function as a spotlight of brightly illuminating the SDRAM 1510c, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) And the state of the IC pin can be improved.

Further, among the plurality of blades forming the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades by the inspector rotating the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN). From this, the part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes.

In the present embodiment, the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface-mounting type with a wide angle of about 120 degrees and weak directivity type. Is also suitable for lighting applications. When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surfaces (covers) of the various boards are covered. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) of a predetermined height is formed between the back surface of the flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. By lighting the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as illumination, the space thus formed can be illuminated brightly.

Further, the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 are emitted to the area of the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and its surroundings, which are opposed to the light emitting surfaces of the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Reflecting portions (not shown) for reflecting the reflected light and directing it again to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 are formed. As the reflection portion (not shown), colored paint having gloss such as white or the like may be used, or colored metallic paint having gloss may be attached.

Further, in the vicinity of the game board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged on the side of the game board 5, so that a ball path constituted by them. In the game balls are rubbed against each other to be charged and electrostatically discharged to become a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 in which the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. Further, since the pachinko machines 1 are lined up opposite the island facilities of the game hall in the opposite direction, other pachinko machines may be a noise source and may be affected by noise. In this way, the periphery of the game board 5 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to the influence of noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data are used. A configuration is adopted in which the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground (GND). As a result, noise that enters through the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, the base body 1502, and the like, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and Noise can be removed by flowing the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to a substrate ground (grounds (GND) of various substrates).

[Some foil strip of Beta Grand]
By the way, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, a wiring pattern for transmitting control signals, a wiring pattern for supplying power, and a region other than a region where various land patterns are formed are ground (GND). Is formed as a so-called solid ground (substrate ground) (also referred to as "solid ground"), and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is also a wiring pattern for transmitting control signals and a wiring pattern for supplying power. It is formed as a so-called solid land (substrate ground) (also referred to as "solid earth"), in which the area other than the area where various land patterns are formed is the ground (GND). The solid land (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the solid land (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are the peripheral control board. Holes (copper) penetrating a plurality of through holes (both sides (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of peripheral control board 1510) formed on both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of 1510. The same ground (GND) is formed by being electrically connected by the plated holes).

Further, as described above, the base flat plate 1502a does not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined interval along the lower side when viewed from the front. Positions (that is, the terminals of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the peripheral control board Since it protrudes from the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of 1510, it is surrounded by the force when inserting a connector for connecting wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7 at a position where it does not interfere with each protruding terminal. Elongated disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aaa3 are respectively formed in the vertical direction to prevent the control board 1510 from being warped and the electric wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being disconnected.

When the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled and the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 are sealed, as described above. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and come into inward contact (surface contact), and the disconnection prevention rib portion 1502aa1 formed on the base body 1502. The front surface of 1502aa to 1502aa3 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510.

The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side by metal pan head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and are the same. Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is made to flow to the board ground (grounds (GND) of various boards) to remove the noise. You can do it.

By the way, the front surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aaa3 formed on the base body 1502 are in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. A solid land was formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the contacted portion and the solid land was covered with a resist. In the noise resistance test, the peripheral control at the contacted portion was performed. The bottom surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate 1510 is covered with a resist by forming a solid land, and the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 at the contacted portion is covered with the resist without forming the solid ground. It was found that the noise resistance was higher when the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 in the contacted portion was covered with a resist without forming a solid land. ..

When electromagnetic wave noise enters through the base body 1502, a high voltage is applied to a portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502a3 formed on the base body 1502 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. This causes electromagnetic noise to pass through the resist and enter the solid brand. When electromagnetic wave noise enters through such an unexpected route, an electronic component susceptible to the electromagnetic wave noise and a wiring pattern electrically connected to the electronic component are formed on the base body 1502. If the front surface of each of the parts 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is adjacent to the part in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, it may cause malfunction or damage.

Electromagnetic noise passes through the resist on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 that is in contact with any of the disconnection prevention ribs on the front surface of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502. Since it is not possible to predict whether or not it will invade, it is difficult to dispose an electronic component susceptible to the influence of electromagnetic noise or a wiring pattern electrically connected to this electronic component away from a specific disconnection prevention rib portion.

It should be noted that high voltage is applied to the portion of the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 and the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, and electromagnetic noise passes through the resist to cause a solid image. In order to enter the brand, when the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 and the beta gluant are in contact with each other through the resist, a high voltage due to electromagnetic wave noise invading the base body 1502 is applied to the abutting part. As a result, it is considered that unnecessary loop wirings through which electromagnetic wave noise penetrates from the disconnection prevention rib portion to the solid surface are formed.

Here, the solid surface of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 in the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502a3 formed on the base body 1502 abuts the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. The shape of the ground will be described with reference to FIG. 220. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing the shape of the solid land in the portion where the front surface of the disconnection preventing rib portion formed on the base body is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. 2A is a schematic view of the copper foil surface of FIG. 3A, and is a schematic view of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board.

As described above, the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 have an elongated shape in the up-down direction. As shown in FIG. 220(a), the corresponding positions and their peripheries are, as shown in FIG. 220(a), a vertically long rectangular foil stripping region 1510ya having a horizontal distance dimension dgw and a vertical distance dimension dgh. 1510 yp, respectively. That is, on the lower side of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board, a region in which a part of the solid pattern is removed (removed) is formed.

In these foil stripping regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg0 between the left side and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aa3 is set to be equal to or greater than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aa3. Each is formed. As the distance dimension dg0 between the left side of the foil removal area 1510ya and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3, the distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 in the left-right direction is 1.0. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg0 between the left side of the foil removal region 1510ya and the left side surface of the wire break prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aaa3 is the wire break prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aaa3. The length is 1.5 times the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction.

Further, in these foil stripping regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg1 between the right side and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aa3 is longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aa3. Each is formed. As the length of the distance dimension dg1 between the right side of the foil removal area 1510ya and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3, the distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 in the left-right direction is 1.0. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg1 between the right side of the foil removal region 1510ya and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aa3 is the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aaa3. The length is 1.5 times the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction.

In addition, in these foil removing regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Each is formed. As the length of the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side of the foil removal area 1510ya and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3, the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side of the foil removal area 1510ya and the upper side surface of the wire break prevention ribs 1502aa1-1502aaa3 is the wire break prevention ribs 1502aa1-1502aa3. The length is 1.5 times the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction.

That is, since the foil removal area 1510ya is formed on the copper foil surface 1510yp where the solid land is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, the foil removal area 1510ya is not electrically connected to the solid land. It is an insulated area.

When the resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, as shown in FIG. 220(b), the resist solution is also applied to the foil removal area 1510ya and the resist layer 1510yr. Is formed. The disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 come into contact with the resist layer 1510yr on the foil removal area 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board. In addition, a solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board corresponding to the foil removal area 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board. No foil stripping area of the same shape is formed.

As described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and are provided on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various boards, such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, are fixed by metal pan head screws, they are electrically connected to the grounds (GND) and the same ground (GND). GND). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the noise that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is controlled from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 via the foil removal area 1510ya. The "route through which noise does not escape" that cannot enter the solid ground on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate is formed, and the noise that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is described above. It is possible to remove noise by forming a “route through which noise escapes” that flows to the substrate ground (ground of various substrates (GND)) via the metal pan head screw.

[Reuse of peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that is not dependent on the game specifications of the game board and is not dependent on the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (used again).

As described above, the periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 has a circular copper-shaped soldering copper foil (so-called “the so-called ““mounting surface” 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510). Land”) 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and circular solder copper foil (so-called “land”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and is formed on the peripheral control board 1510. The through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 to mount the mounting boss holes. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. Therefore, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seat surface (the seat surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw.

Thus, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the pan portion (head seat surface) of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. By reusing the peripheral control board 1510, lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed on the rear surface side of the cover plate 1501a by repeatedly screwing and removing the peripheral control board 1510. Of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are rubbed against the mounting surface (boss surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and peeled from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510. The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 are rubbed against the seat surface (head seat surface) of the screw and peeled from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510. If the copper foils of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4y on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the above are exposed, the peripheral control board 1510 can be reused because the copper foil is oxidized and the electrical connectivity is deteriorated. There is a problem that it becomes difficult.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are the front surfaces. Each copper foil is soldered to prevent it from being exposed. This solder electrically connects the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the pan portion (head seat surface) of the metal pan head screw are electrically connected while being covered. It is covered so that it can be connected. This prevents the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 from rubbing against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is possible to prevent the peripheral control board 1510 from being peeled off from the base material, and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are seat surfaces (heads) of the pan of the metal pan head screw. Of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. The copper foil portions of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are not exposed and oxidation can be prevented, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 is It is possible to improve electrical connectivity in a state where the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the solder can be provided. Of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the pan portion (head seat surface) of the metal pan head screw due to the viscosity of It is possible to improve the property.

As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, noise that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 will pass through the metal pan head screw to the board ground (ground of various boards (GND)). By reliably forming the above-mentioned "route through which noise flows" to (1), it is possible to stably maintain the noise countermeasure effect of the peripheral control board box 1505 made of a conductive resin.

In the present embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are set as described above. , The surface of the copper foil is soldered so that it is not exposed. The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seat surfaces of the metal pan head screws as described above, and thus are soldered to the copper foils that are the surfaces of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. If the thickness is not uniform (that is, if there is a portion where the solder is raised), the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw are separated. There is a problem that the contact area is reduced and the electrical connectivity is deteriorated. Further, as described above, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are the same as the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Since the contact is made, if the thickness of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is not made uniform (that is, if there is a portion where the solder rises), the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 Side lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are reduced in contact area, resulting in poor electrical connectivity. There's a problem. If the thickness of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, is not made uniform (that is, if the solder is swelled), the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are formed. When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a pan head screw made of metal into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, The control board 1510 is distorted, which may cause disconnection of various wiring patterns.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided for the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 with which the seat surface of the metal pan head screw abuts. A metal mask is placed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate and a squeegee (such as a spatula) is used to spread the solder paste on the metal mask so that the solder paste is applied through the holes formed in the metal mask. By putting the back surface (solder surface) 1510y in a reflow oven and drying the solder paste by heat, the thickness soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 is made uniform as the thickness of the metal mask. You can Further, the copper that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the foil, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and a squeegee (such as a spatula) is used to spread the solder paste on the metal mask to form the metal mask. By applying from the holes, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is put in a reflow oven and the solder paste is dried by heat, so that the thickness to be soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is adjusted. The plate thickness of the metal mask can be made uniform.

[Modification]
Note that, in the above-described present embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 have their surfaces. The respective copper foils are soldered so as not to be exposed, but the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts on the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. Surface of the peripheral control board 1510 that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of each of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the side of the side and contacts the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. (Mounting surface) The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the 1510x side, may be coated with a resist solution to cover it. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, is also applied when the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. It Even with this configuration, a metal pan head screw is inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 to face the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 were electrically connected via the metal pan head screw. It can be in a state. Further, the copper that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that contacts the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By coating and covering the foil with a resist solution, the thickness of the resist layer applied on the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the resist layers in the portions corresponding to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 have the same thickness, so that the through holes 1510r1 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are formed. When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan head screw into 1510r4 and screwing it toward mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the land 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rf4, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the squeegee (like a spatula) is used to spread the solder paste on the metal mask. It was applied from a hole formed in a metal mask, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 was put in a reflow oven to heat and dry the solder paste. ) May be poured into a solder bath for soldering. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a come into contact with each other. In order to prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity to be deteriorated, soldering should not partly rise on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Must be uniform. FIG. 221 is a view showing the shape of the resist for the land when the peripheral control board is flown into the solder bath.

For example, on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, a resist layer 1510xr formed by coating a part of the resist solution with a resist solution is formed, The peripheral control board 1510 is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, which is the surface of the copper foil, in a region having a predetermined shape. Specifically, as the “predetermined shape”, as shown in FIG. 221(a), a resist is predetermined with respect to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. A shape in which a plurality of circles having a width are concentrically formed (a resist may have a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is concentrically formed). As shown in FIG. 221(b), the resist has a predetermined width. And a shape in which a rectangular shape having a predetermined length is formed into a chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are arranged in an annular shape as the center of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, and as shown in FIG. A shape formed in a lattice formed of lines and horizontal lines (a resist may have a predetermined width and a plurality of vertical lines may be formed with a predetermined distance apart, or a resist may have a predetermined width). 221 may have a shape in which a plurality of horizontal lines are formed with a predetermined distance between them.), as shown in FIG. 221(d), lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance and rise to the right. A shape in which a plurality of lines are formed in an oblique line shape (a line in which the resist has a predetermined width is separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines in the lower right direction are formed in an oblique line shape) may be formed. The shape and the like that have been assembled can be cited.

In this way, a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution to form a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape, and the periphery is formed. Since the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 are soldered to the areas having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is It is possible to suppress the amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 has a predetermined shape by being coated with a resist solution. Of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 as long as they can exert the effect of suppressing the amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil which is the surface thereof. As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into the solder bath for soldering, the solder is not applied to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to make the attachment uniform so that it does not rise in part. The solder thus soldered includes the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the land 1510rf1 to the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 is covered so as to be electrically connectable.

It should be noted that a predetermined pattern formed by such a resist is applied to the land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts on the seat surface (the seat surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. You may perform also with respect to the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1-1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the pan portion (head seat surface) of the metal pan head screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to. When the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath for soldering, a copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution. Then, the resist layers applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may have a uniform thickness.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the metal pan head screw is used when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. However, the metal pan head screw has a flat washer, a spring washer, and a tooth The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a washer (also referred to as a “chrysanthemum washer”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the conductive resin cover 1501, lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover flat plate 1501a. 1510rb1 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 while the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with each other. ~1510rb4 and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw are brought into contact with each other, whereby the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via the metal pan head screw. The lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are electrically connected to each other, and the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected to each other. A metal cover 1501′ may be used instead of the resin cover 1501. In this case, the base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 may be made of a conductive resin, or may be made of a metal instead of being made of a conductive resin. The wiring cover body 1503 that closes the wiring drawing opening 1501ae may be made of a conductive resin or a metal.

An amplifier board having a circuit for amplifying various sounds consumes a large amount of power and generates heat. Therefore, the amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or attached to a metal partial case. When the amplifier board is housed in the metal board box, the air heated by the heat generated by the amplifier board and the heat of the amplifier board itself are efficiently radiated to the outside air by the metal board box. Further, when the amplifier board is attached to the metal partial case, the heat of the amplifier board itself can be efficiently radiated to the outside air by the metal partial case.

The amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or attached to a metal partial case. Noise may enter the partial case. Therefore, like the peripheral control board 1510 described above (that is, the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected), a plurality of amplifier boards are formed. The land and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the plurality of mounting boss holes formed on the back surface side of the metal cover body of the metal substrate box or the metal partial case are in contact with each other. , The plurality of lands formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the amplifier board and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other, and the metal head is connected via the metal pan head screw. The metal cover body or metal partial case of the metal board box is electrically connected to the multiple lands formed on the amplifier board, and the metal cover body or metal cover of the metal board box is made. The partial case and the ground (GND) of the amplifier substrate can be electrically connected. Also, the heat of the amplifier board itself is transferred from the ground (GND) of the amplifier board to the metal cover body of the metal board box or the metal partial case through the metal pan head screw to efficiently dissipate it to the outside air. You can also

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the state in which the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via the metal pan head screw. Therefore, the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected to each other. it can. For example, the plurality of lands of the parent board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the parent board, the plurality of lands of the child board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the child board, and the plurality of lands of the parent board are connected. And a plurality of lands of the child board are screwed at both ends of a metal strut (spacer) respectively, so that electricity is generated through a plurality of lands of the parent board, a plurality of lands of the child board and the metal strut (spacer). Can be connected to each other. Accordingly, the ground (GND) of the parent board and the ground (GND) of the child board can be the same ground (GND) via the metal support (spacer).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated in the peripheral control board box 1505 made of a conductive resin, but the main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are accommodated. If the payout control board box 632 is made of a conductive resin, the main control board box 1320 and the payout control board box 632 need to be transparent according to the rule, and a conductive resin board is used. Although not possible, the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the peripheral control board box while the board box for accommodating the power supply board and the various relay board boxes for accommodating the various relay boards are made of conductive resin. It may be fixed by the same method. By doing so, the same effect as the noise countermeasure effect by the peripheral control board box 1505 made of the conductive resin can be obtained for the board box that houses the power board and the relay board boxes that house the relay boards. it can.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 as shown in FIG. In the state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the rear unit 3000), the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. A board-to-board connector including a special connector SCN1 and a special connector SCN3 included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a board-to-board connector including a special connector SCN2 included in the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 included in the liquid crystal output board 1530. By disposing it near the center of 552, it can be arranged away from the tank rail 553. As described above, the tank rail 553 is a metal powder of the game ball B to the outside through the cutouts 553aa formed in plural on the lower side (lower side of the rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front). Since the board-to-board connector can be dropped, by disposing the board-to-board connector described above away from the tank rail 553, the occurrence of electrical trouble in the board-to-board connector due to the metal powder of the game ball B can be prevented. Can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, the inter-board connector including the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided. The board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN4 provided is a peripheral control unit on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (on the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). With the 1500 attached, as shown in FIG. 217, the upper area of the inter-board connector can be made smaller by arranging it in the vertical direction, so that dust, powder of any metallic property, etc. The area of adhesion can be minimized. When the above-mentioned inter-board connector is arranged long in the left-right direction, the area on the upper side of the inter-board connector becomes large, so that the area to which dust, powder having some metallic property, or the like adheres significantly increases. Become. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 217, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are long in the left-right direction, and the area of the upper surface of each connector is large. Is so large that the area where dust, some metallic powder, or the like adheres is extremely increased. As described above, when viewed from the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac is Due to the protruding wall of the cover flat plate 1501a, even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN9 are inserted, the plugs are hidden and cannot be projected from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Even if dust, powder of some metal, or the like attached to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the flat plate 1501a falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN1 to CN9. There is. In this way, the direction in which the above-mentioned inter-board connector is arranged and the direction in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are arranged so that dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. can be prevented from adhering to each electric terminal. Is selected.

In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with the plugs of the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN3, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN4. However, you may arrange|position so that the direction where information and a signal flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information or signals can be a plug (or socket), and the side that receives information or signals can be a socket (or plug) correspondingly. For example, in the above-described embodiment, since various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data is not transferred. The ROM board 1520 serves as the transmitting side and the peripheral control board 1510 serves as the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket) that serves as a plug, and correspondingly, when the peripheral control board 1510 serves as a socket, a special connector (or a plug) Can be provided with a special connector). Further, in the above-described embodiment, since the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a plurality of types of video signal systems to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 serves as the transmitting side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 serves as the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket) that becomes a plug, and correspondingly, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 becomes a socket, a special connector (or a plug) A special connector).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501. However, the cover side walls 1501b provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501 A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in one of the 1501e except the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side or in combination. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, and a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. .. Even with this configuration, foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B) generated by the game ball B drops toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling on the various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to foreign matter falling from the tank rail 553. The reason for not forming the ventilation holes 1501az on the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation holes 1501az are formed on the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is provided through the ventilation holes 1501az. When foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls inward toward the inside of the device, the peripheral control board box 1505 electrically drops by various foreign substances to the various substrates. This is because there is a high probability that trouble will occur.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501. However, the cover side walls 1501b provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the 1501e except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505 by forming a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. The reason why the vent holes 1501az are not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is, as described above, if the vent holes 1501az are temporarily formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the vent holes 1501az are formed through the vent holes 1501az. A foreign substance (for example, a metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) generated by the game ball B drops into the peripheral control board box 1505 and intrudes into the peripheral control board box 1505 to drop onto the various boards. This is because there is a high probability that electrical troubles due to foreign matter will occur.

[Other measures against noise by peripheral control unit]
In addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 forming the peripheral control board box 1505 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above. At the same time, when various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) by metal pan head screws, respectively. Since it is configured to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various boards to be the same ground (GND), noise entering from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 can be absorbed by the various boards. The noise can be removed by flowing the noise to the ground (GND) (hereinafter, referred to as "configuration of noise countermeasure by peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment"). Another configuration of the present invention in which a noise countermeasure is taken by the peripheral control board box that can remove noise that has entered the peripheral control board box 1505 (hereinafter, referred to as "the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments". 22.) will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 to 241. Note that in FIGS. 222 to 241, the same reference numerals as those of various members given in the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment shown in FIGS. The description is omitted except for a part of the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments.

In the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive carbon-carbon-containing conductive material as described above. In contrast to the resin structure, the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments has a noise countermeasure structure. In addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is transparent. In addition to being made of a non-conductive resin, the peripheral control board box according to the second to fourth embodiments has a noise countermeasure structure in which a metal shield plate is housed in the peripheral control board box. In the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the metallic shield plate is not housed in the peripheral control board box.

222 to 226 show the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, in which the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is covered with a metal shield plate, and Part of the shield plate is in contact with the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 via the conductive elastic member, and FIG. 222 is an exploded front perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment. 223 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment, FIG. 224 is a front view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 225 is an X of FIG. 224 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 226 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X, and FIG. 226 is a view on arrow A of FIG. 224 according to the second embodiment.

FIGS. 227 to 230 show the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, and the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment is further strengthened. A region in which a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the 1510 or the like is exposed and a metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are further in contact with each other via a conductive elastic member, and FIG. FIG. 228 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment, FIG. 228 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 229 is an arrow A of FIG. 224 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 230 is a perspective view, and FIG. 230 is a ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board, which makes good contact between the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board and the conductive elastic member. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a method of taking out the peripheral control board, a schematic view of a copper foil surface of a back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (bare example (a)), a schematic view of a back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (bare example (b )), a schematic view of the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (example (c) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged), and a schematic view of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (land It is an example (d)) in which a plurality of through holes are provided.

231 to 235 show the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, in which the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is covered with the first shield plate made of metal, The back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like is covered with a metal second shield plate, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the like are sandwiched between the metal first shield plate and the metal second shield plate, Part of the first shield plate made of metal and part of the second shield plate made of metal are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 or the like, and FIG. FIG. 232 is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to the fourth embodiment, FIG. 232 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 233 is a peripheral control board or the like according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 234 is a view showing a mounting procedure, and FIG. 234 shows a land (a) showing a land formed around a through hole on a front surface (mounting surface) side of a peripheral control board or the like according to the fourth embodiment, and a foil removal area. FIG. 235 is a diagram (b), and FIG. 235 is a diagram (a) showing a land formed around the through hole on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board or the like according to the fourth embodiment, the land and the screwing designation symbol. FIG. 3B is a diagram illustrating a region where the foil is removed and FIG. Note that, in FIG. 227, the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate that can contact the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 is omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and in FIG. 228, the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 is omitted. The conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate which can be contacted is shown by a two-dot chain line for the sake of easy viewing of the drawing.

FIGS. 236 to 241 show the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, in which the front surface (mounting surface) and the rear surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like are made of metal shield plates. Among various substrates that are not covered at all and are accommodated in the peripheral control substrate box, a region where a part of the ground (GND) of a specific substrate is exposed and the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 are connected via a conductive elastic member. 236 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, FIG. 237 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. The figure which shows a part of rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit which concerns on 5th Embodiment (a), the figure which shows a part of base body which comprises a peripheral control unit so that the state by which the electroconductive elastic member was inserted can be seen. FIG. 239 is a diagram (b) showing a part of a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit taken along the line CL in (a), and FIG. 239 is a continuation of FIG. 238 and the conductive elastic member is made of metal of the effect display device 1600. FIG. 240 is a diagram (c) showing a part of a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit, in which a part of the peripheral control unit is cut out so that the deformed state of being pressed against the back cover can be seen, and FIG. FIG. 241 is an enlarged front view of a cover body that constitutes a peripheral control unit having an opening through which a connector can be inserted and contacted, and FIG. 241 shows a back surface (solder surface) side of a specific board and a conductive material (GND). It is a figure which shows the extraction method of the ground (GND) of the back surface (solder surface) side of a specific board|substrate which makes good contact with an elastic member, The schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific board ( Exposed example (a)), schematic view of back surface (solder surface) of specific board (exposed example (b)), schematic view of copper foil surface of back surface (solder surface) of specific board (through hole having land) It is an example (c)) in which a plurality is arranged, and a schematic view of a back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (an example (d) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged).

[Contrast between Noise Countermeasure Configuration by Peripheral Control Board Box According to First Embodiment and Noise Countermeasure Configuration by Peripheral Control Board Box According to Second Embodiment]
In the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of carbon in polycarbonate as described above. It is configured as a conductive resin containing, and various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are made of metal on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When they are respectively fixed by screws, they are electrically connected to the grounds (GND) of these various substrates to be the same ground (GND).

On the other hand, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, the rear side is opened and a box shape that is longer in the left-right direction than in the vertical direction is formed. A peripheral body control which can control the progress of the production based on a command from the cover body 1501 which is made of the transparent non-conductive resin and which has the main control unit 1300 which controls the progress of the game. A substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, And a metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) penetrating into the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and conductive elasticity attached (bonded) to a predetermined position of the metal shield plate 1540. A member 1545 and a base body 1502 formed of a transparent non-conductive resin that covers the opening of the cover body 1501 are provided. In the internal space of the cover body 1501, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with the metal shield plate 1540. The plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and various substrates, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502, whereby a peripheral control substrate box 1505 (sealed substrate box) is configured by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. ing.

[Cover Body of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Second Embodiment]
When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is aligned with the boss hole 1501ag1 and the attachment boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. To arrange. Then, among the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are defined as the through holes 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, and the metal shield. The through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the plate 1540 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged so as to be aligned with each other and are formed on the peripheral control board 1510. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metallic shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In this state, of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. The lands 1510rf2 and 1510rf3 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. Further, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. The 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above, and is the same. The metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 so that it is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board. It is connected to the ground (GND) of 1530. The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 as described above. Since the metallic shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630.

When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b1a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2, 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwing them toward mounting boss holes 1501ah1, 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metallic shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. In this state, among the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the land 1520rf4 and the rear surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metallic shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. In addition, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf3 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively. In addition to being in contact with each other, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is brought into a state of being electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the peripheral data. It is connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM substrate 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is the same as the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and they are the same. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the shield plate 1540 made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate. It is connected to the ground (GND) of 1530. The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 as described above. Since the metallic shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630.

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the boss hole 1501am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwed toward mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In this state, of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the land 1530rf1 and the rear surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metallic shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. At the same time, the lands 1530rf2 to 1530rf4 come into contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively. In addition, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are in contact with the seat surface of the metal pan head screw. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metallic shield plate 1540 is brought into a state of being electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metallic shield plate 1540 is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and is the same. Of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board by connecting the metal shield plate 1540 to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is connected to the ground (GND) of 1520. The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 as described above. Since the metallic shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630.

By attaching various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 together with the metallic shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the metallic shield plate 1540 is formed. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the cover body 1501 and various substrates, the above-mentioned predetermined distance dimension is provided between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. A gap (2.3 mm) having is formed.

As described above, the sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is the ventilation holes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The area in 1501az and the above-mentioned gap (the gaps formed in the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501), The gap formed in the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided, the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the two connectors formed in the cover body 1501. The area of the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 and the space formed in the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 is smaller than the total of the areas. Therefore, when the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blade portion. , Air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 to the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the metal shield plate 1540 housed in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in via the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to be small.

[Base Body of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Second Embodiment]
The base flat plate 1502a is on the right side when viewed from the front side thereof, and is located at a position corresponding to an L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d formed by bending a metal shield plate 1540 described later, at an L-shaped circuit connecting piece. A rectangular through hole 1502ab which is long in the vertical direction and has a shape slightly larger than the back surface shape of 1540d is formed.

On the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, the area corresponding to the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 has a size smaller than that of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Foil-removing regions NR1, NR2, NR3 each having a large round shape are formed, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the wire break prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aa3 contact the foil-removing regions NR1, NR, NR3, respectively. These foil stripping regions NR1, NR2, NR3 can prevent noise (electromagnetic noise) from entering from the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1-1502aaa3 formed on the base body 1502 so that the ground ( It is isolated from GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the solid ground of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 through the foil stripping regions NR1, NR2, NR3. A route through which noise cannot escape is formed.

[Metal Shield Plate of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Second Embodiment]
A metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front. -Shaped shield flat plate 1540a (thickness: 1.2 mm) is L-shaped bent backward by a predetermined distance dimension (12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in the second embodiment) on the upper left side center and the lower left side center. Mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 are formed respectively.

Further, the metal shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension on the right side upper side and the right side lower side of the oblong rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front (the second embodiment. Then, L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent backward by 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are respectively formed, and at the center of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). Therefore, an L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d bent backward by a predetermined distance dimension (21 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in the second embodiment) is formed between the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from the upper end to the lower end.

Notches are formed around the shield flat plate 1540a so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, respectively, and the shield flat plate 1540a is substantially at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and the wiring drawing recess 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. As a result, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the cover body 1501 and various substrates, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer periphery of the shield flat plate 1540a, respectively, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover flat plate 1501a, and The wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is inserted into the shield flat plate 1540a without coming into contact with the opening 1540aa.

The metal shield plate 1540 is formed by bending so that the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged in the same plane. The back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed to be parallel to each other. In the second embodiment, the distance dimension from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the attachment boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501. As described above, the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 is projected from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. One of the pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed as described above. As described above, the attachment boss hole 1501am1 is projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is one mounting boss hole of the pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed.

Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501. As described above, these mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 extend from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. 2 of the four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed by projecting.

Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, whereby the shield plate 1540 is covered. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the substrate and the various substrates, a distance dimension of a predetermined height (the main dimension between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a) In the second embodiment, a space having a size of 14.8 mm is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is arranged in this space to form two spaces.

These two spaces are the distance dimension of the first predetermined height between the surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 225) having (12 mm in the second embodiment) and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described below and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A second space 1505b (see FIG. 225) having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the second embodiment) is configured.

In the first space 1505a, various electronic components and the like provided in the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c, real-time clock IC not shown, backup power supply 1510e, power generation circuit not shown, resistor not shown, not shown) Capacitors, LEDs ML1 to LEDML4, special connectors SCN1, SCN2, etc.), various electronic parts and the like provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a, resistors (not shown), capacitors (not shown), special connectors SCN3, etc.) and liquid crystal output substrate 1530. While various electronic parts and the like provided therein (a resistor (not shown), a condenser (not shown), a special connector SCN4, etc.) are accommodated, various electronic parts etc. are not accommodated in the second space 1505b at all. This is because it is possible to take measures against noise (electromagnetic wave noise) by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space 1505a, and at the same time, in the second space 1505b. This is for efficiently transmitting the heat generated from various electronic components in the first space 1505a to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540 by not containing the various electronic components generating heat. .. That is, the metal shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat dissipation plate in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise).

Ventilation holes 1540az of the same shape are formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 at positions corresponding to the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. That is, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm, like the ventilation holes 1501az. There is. When the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover body 1501 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. Thus, the air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 to cover the cover. The first space 1505a (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) in the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

[Conductive Elastic Member of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Second Embodiment]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning property (elasticity), and a conductive coating portion 1545a. A foam 1545b having a rectangular shape as a core material coated with the conductive coating portion 1545a and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c attached to the conductive coating portion 1545a are included. Examples of the coating portion 1545a include a polyester woven fabric on which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed, and a polyimide film on which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed. The foam 1545b can be, for example, a polyurethane foam having heat resistance. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be mentioned. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by a peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating portion 1545a is attached (bonded) to another member.

The conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular cross section (rounded shape) having a width of about 5 mm and a height of about 3 mm (see FIG. 226), and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c. Has a rectangular shape (see FIG. 226) having a width of about 2 mm and a height of about 0.035 mm.

[Assembling method of peripheral control board box according to second embodiment]
A method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

Then, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540. Are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are attached to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540b1a formed on the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is aligned with the hole 1501ah2 and the attachment boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. To do.

Subsequently, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. The mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in the above are arranged.

Then, insert a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2, 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and screw into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1, 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by the above, and a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form it on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a by screwing the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metallic shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is removed. It is in a state of being sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

Subsequently, since the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, they are not changed or are finely adjusted. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metallic shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. That is, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, thereby covering the shield plate 1540. The body 1501 and various substrates are sandwiched and fixed.

In this way, of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is constrained from moving vertically and horizontally by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the cover plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 has a mounting boss for restraining the vertical and horizontal directions, while movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1, 1501an2 formed on the back surface side. The protruding portion is not formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is because the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a so as to constrain the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional error due to such constraint is covered by the peripheral control substrate 1510. When fixing to the back surface side of 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are respectively provided with dimensional dimensions. It is possible to absorb it with a sufficient margin.

Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the 1502 are inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

Next, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bags 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Then, the base body 1502 is wrapped around so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through hole 1502ab of the base body 1502 to cover the base body 1502 as it is. The L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d projects from the back surface of the base body 1502 when the body 1501 is covered, and a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted into the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. The metal one-way screw is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet spreads outward at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea, so that the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are formed. The base side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is in a state of being sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and inscribed (surface contact). Further, in this sealed state, the L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 projects from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d from the back surface of the base body 1502. The distance dimension (projection length) to the back surface of the is 2.7 mm.

In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed by a tool. Therefore, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by looking at the traces of opening and closing, and a deterrent to the unauthorized conduct to the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been increased.

Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN are pulled out from the wiring pull-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal-made pan head screw with a seat (a screw having a shape of a pan head and a flat washer) (not shown) is screwed into the pull-out and mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front of the cover plate 1501a toward the rear.

Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring drawing opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the attachment recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. By inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front side to the rear side of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

Then, the peeling paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is provided on the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. The adhesive tape 1545c of 1545 is attached (bonded).

When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner is attached to the attachment portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600, which is the rear side of the game panel 1100 included in the game board 5. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is located on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. And a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 to insert a mounting groove forming a mounting portion formed in the transparent synthetic resin box. It is fixed by screwing it toward a mounting hole that constitutes a mounting portion formed on the back surface side of.

The effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are housed in a frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected, It is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box (protective cover body 1601 described above) having non-conductivity. Further, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 and electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 or the like housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. Therefore, the same ground (GND) is obtained. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, the L-shaped circuit connecting piece of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. 1540d passes through a through-hole (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and as shown in FIG. 226, hits the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 via the conductive elastic member 1545. It comes into contact with them. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed and crushed in the height direction (in the second embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), which may cause a dimensional tolerance or an assembly error. The dimensional deviation can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, the metallic shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected reliably, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is placed. Since the same ground (GND) can be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of 1510 or the like, the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, Peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, various substrates such as liquid crystal output substrate 1530) and peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, various substrates such as liquid crystal output substrate 1530) can do. Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced.

The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment are molded and made of a transparent non-conductive resin, and are provided in the inner space of the cover body 1501. , The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like are attached at predetermined positions together with the metal shield plate 1540, so that the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the various boards. After being fixed, the metal shield plate 1540 is configured to be connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 as described above. Connected to each other. Therefore, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 and the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the effect display device 1600 are transmitted through the metal shield plate 1540 to the substrate. It is possible to form a "route through which noise is removed" by leading to and removing the ground (ground of various substrates (GND)). As a result, it is not necessary to provide each of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic noise), and the cost of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Will be described. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming the presence or absence of fraud.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 224, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are the peripheral control board. The product number or model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided in the 1510, the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b, and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, IC orientation, part number). , The pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, and the silk-screened content on the peripheral control board 1510 are confirmed from multiple angles. In order to be able to do so, it is arranged in a dispersed manner so as to be a region larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence relationship between the control ROM 1510b and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. .. Further, the LED ML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b is designed to maintain the lighting state in the state where the direct current +5V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, and therefore the direct current +5V is supplied. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the status of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a function as a spotlight of brightly illuminating the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the status of the IC pin. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility and the improvement of the visibility of the content silk-screened on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and further provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number or model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively (for example, , The number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board. 1520 and the silk-printed contents of 1520 and 1520 are respectively dispersed and arranged so as to be a large area in which the contents can be substantially confirmed from the angles in multiple directions. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In addition to the correspondence relation with, the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is modified, and the inter-board connector is modified by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, the LED ML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is designed to maintain the lighting state in the state where the direct current +35V is supplied from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620, and therefore the direct current +35V is maintained. As a spotlight that has a function of checking (monitoring) the supplied state, but brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By further having the function of, the visibility of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the state of the IC pin is improved, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. Of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. ..

Further, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 in the liquid crystal output board 1530), and further, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and 1530 are arranged in a dispersed manner so that the silk-printed contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the silk-screened content on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the silk-screened content on the liquid crystal output board 1530. In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. can do. Further, since the LED ML4 arranged near the special connector SCN2 is adapted to maintain the lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although having a function, the peripheral control board 1510 has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates an inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 with the special connector SCN4. Improving the visibility of the silk-screened contents on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and improving the visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , Can contribute to.

Further, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAM 1510c1. The state of the IC pins of the 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. In order to be able to check the state of the IC pins and the silk-screened contents on the peripheral control board 1510 from multiple directions, the areas are dispersed so as to be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. It is arranged. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence relationship between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the alteration of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. You can Further, the LED ML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in the lighting state in the state where the direct current +12V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it originally has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state where DC +12V is supplied, it also has a function as a spotlight of brightly illuminating the SDRAM 1510c, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility, the improvement of the visibility of the state of the IC pin, and the improvement of the visibility of the content silk-screened on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, among the plurality of blades forming the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN, a gap between the blades (specifically, a gap between the blades by the inspector rotating the blade portion of the air cooling fan FAN). From this, the part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes.

As the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, surface-mounted types with a wide angle of about 120 degrees and types with weak directivity are adopted, and thus are used for lighting. Is also suitable. Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, whereby the shield plate 1540 is covered. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed by the substrate and the various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the second embodiment) is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is arranged in this space to form two spaces. .. As described above, the two spaces have the first predetermined height between the front surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 224) having a distance dimension of 12 mm in the second embodiment (see FIG. 224) and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 224) having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the second embodiment). As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a formed in this way can be illuminated brightly by turning on the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 which is also suitable for use as illumination.

Further, since the shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has a glossiness and is a region on the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540, which has gloss and faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Further, it also has a function as a reflection portion that can reflect the light emitted from the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 to the periphery thereof and redirect the light to the peripheral control board 1510. The reflective portions may be further coated with a glossy colored paint.

In addition, in the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, as shown in FIG. 3, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 and are paid out to the side of the game board 5. Since the unit 560 is arranged, the game balls are rubbed against each other in the ball path constituted by these to be charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby becoming a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment that is affected by noise (electromagnetic noise) due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are lined up in the back of the island facility of the game hall. In this way, the periphery of the game board 5 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise (electromagnetic noise). Therefore, in the second embodiment, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are transparently molded as a non-conductive resin, and the inside of the cover body 1501 is formed. In the space, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with the metallic shield plate 1540. A configuration is adopted in which the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates by sandwiching and fixing. Further, in the second embodiment, the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main frame 4 is connected to the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. A configuration is adopted in which the same ground (GND) is formed by electrically connecting to the ground (GND) line.

Thereby, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base. The noise (electromagnetic noise) that has entered from the body 1502 is guided to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the metal shield plate 1540. It can be removed. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base. Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the body 1502 can be guided to the substrate ground (grounds (GND) of various substrates) via the metal shield plate 1540 and removed.

In the second embodiment, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal shield plate 1540. In the state where the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed by the cover body 1501 and the various substrates by being held, between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in the second embodiment) is formed in the space, and two spaces are formed by disposing a metal shield plate 1540 in this space. These two spaces are the distance dimension of the first predetermined height between the front surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. (In the second embodiment, the first space 1505a having 12 mm) and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height between the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. (In the second embodiment, the second space 1505b having 1.6 mm) is provided. In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height is larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. In the case of disposing a large-scale production unit (electric drive source and drive mechanism capable of operating the movable production body, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position) on the game board 5, When the distance dimension has a margin, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as the distance dimension of the same predetermined height, or the second distance dimension may be configured. The distance dimension of the predetermined height may be made larger than the distance dimension of the first predetermined height. Even with this configuration, it is possible to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise by accommodating various electronic components that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic noise) in the first space 1505a, and at the same time, to the second space 1505b. Efficiently transmitting heat generated from various electronic components in the first space 1505a to the second space 1505b through the metal shield plate 1540 by not containing various electronic components generating heat therein. You can

Further, in the second embodiment, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az are formed in the metal shield plate 1540, so that the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is printed. To visually check the part number and model (or management number), the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b, and the silk-screened contents on the peripheral control board 1510 (eg, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.). In addition, the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the states of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing (for example, IC Direction, part number, pin number, etc.), and the part number or model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral data ROM 1520a. The state of the IC pins and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually confirmed. However, the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a may be provided with a rectangular opening at a position corresponding to the metal shield plate 1540. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 so that the periphery thereof can be visually recognized. .. Further, the shape of the inter-board connector (the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be checked so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. It is also possible to form a rectangular opening at the position of the metallic shield plate 1540 corresponding to a larger area than the shape formed by the special connector SCN3), or to provide the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. From the shape of the board-to-board connector (shape formed by the special connector SCN2 of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector with the 1530 can be confirmed. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to the large area.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to flow through the blade portion to the peripheral control unit 1500. By being blown out toward the outside, air is stored from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 into the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in via a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal shield plate 1540, it is possible to suppress the flow velocity of air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 to be small. However, when the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes air to be sucked in through the blade and sent out toward the peripheral control IC 1510a. Good. In other words, the air-cooling fan FAN may not be the main purpose of exchanging the air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but may simply cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Even in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1-1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee (like a spatula) is placed on the metal mask. The solder paste is spread from the holes formed in the metal mask by applying a solder paste), and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is put in a reflow oven to dry the solder paste by heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be poured into a solder bath for soldering. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a come into contact with each other. In order to prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity to be deteriorated, soldering should not partly rise on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Must be uniform.

For example, on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, a resist layer 1510xr formed by coating a part of the resist solution with a resist solution is formed, The peripheral control board 1510 is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, which is the surface of the copper foil, in a region having a predetermined shape. Specifically, as the “predetermined shape”, as shown in FIG. 221(a), the resist is applied to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are concentrically formed (a resist may be a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is concentrically formed). As shown in FIG. A rectangular shape having a predetermined width and a predetermined length is formed into a chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are arranged in an annular shape at the center of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. A shape formed in a lattice shape composed of lines in the horizontal direction and lines in the horizontal direction (the resist may have a predetermined width and a plurality of lines in the vertical direction separated from each other by a predetermined distance dimension may be formed. 221 may have a shape in which only lateral lines having a predetermined width are formed with a predetermined distance dimension therebetween.) As shown in FIG. 221(d), lines having a predetermined width are separated from each other by a predetermined distance. A shape in which a plurality of upward-sloping lines are formed in a slanted shape (a shape in which resist lines having a predetermined width are separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of downward-sloping lines are formed in a slanted shape) are not shown. An example is a collection of small circular shapes.

In this way, a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution to form a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape, and the periphery is formed. Since the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 are soldered to the areas having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is It is possible to suppress the amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 has a predetermined shape by being coated with a resist solution. Of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 as long as they can exert the effect of suppressing the amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil which is the surface thereof. As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into the solder bath for soldering, the solder is not applied to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to make the attachment uniform so that it does not rise in part. The solder thus soldered includes the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the land 1510rf1 to the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 is covered so as to be electrically connectable.

It should be noted that a predetermined pattern formed by such a resist is applied to the land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts on the seat surface (the seat surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. You may perform also with respect to the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1-1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the pan portion (head seat surface) of the metal pan head screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to. When the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath for soldering, a copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution. Then, the resist layers applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may have a uniform thickness.

Further, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan screw is used. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by passing a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as a “wash washer”) through the pan head screw.

In addition, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. And the metal back cover are electrically connected and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are separately molded. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded in the transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison of Noise Countermeasure Configuration by Peripheral Control Board Box According to First Embodiment and Noise Countermeasure Configuration by Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
In the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of carbon in polycarbonate as described above. It is configured as a conductive resin containing, and various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are made of metal on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When they are respectively fixed by screws, they are electrically connected to the grounds (GND) of these various substrates to be the same ground (GND).

On the other hand, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is further strengthened. A structure in which a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the device and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are further in contact with each other via the conductive elastic member is adopted.

[Metal Shield Plate of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
Specifically, the metallic shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar to the metallic shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment in FIG. As shown in FIG. 228, each side of the shield plate 1540a is moved backward as a countermeasure against noise (electromagnetic noise) entering from the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover plate of the cover body 1501. Side walls 1540ae are formed by bending (toward the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). Vent holes 1540az are not formed in these side walls 1540ae at all. In addition, these side walls 1540ae have predetermined end surfaces from the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled. Since they have a distance dimension (for example, 3.9 mm) and are separated from each other, they do not come into contact with each other and do not come into contact with various electronic components mounted on various substrates. The metallic shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment has a shape similar to that of the metallic shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment described above. Detailed description is omitted.

[Base Body of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
The base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment has a shape similar to that of the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, and includes a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output. Conductivity for a substrate that can come into contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 at a position corresponding to a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the various substrates such as the substrate 1530 is exposed. A plurality of insertion openings 1502az each having a square (a shape having a vertical distance dimension and a horizontal distance dimension of about 8 mm) into which the elastic member 1507 is inserted are formed in the base flat plate 1502a. Although these insertion openings 1502az are formed so as to project to the front side and the rear side of the base flat plate 1502a, the front end surface of each insertion opening 1502az has a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like. Each of the insertion ports 1502az is formed of a shield plate which has a predetermined distance dimension (for example, 1.5 mm) and does not come into contact with the back surface (solder surface) of each of the substrates. It is formed so as to be arranged on the same plane as the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of 1540.

There are seven regions ROP in which a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed, and seven insertion openings 1502az are formed in the base flat plate 1502a at positions corresponding to these regions ROP. There is one region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate 1520 is exposed, and one insertion opening 1502az is formed in the base flat plate 1502a at a position corresponding to this region ROP. There are two regions ROP in which a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) is exposed, and two insertion openings 1502az are formed in the base flat plate 1502a at positions corresponding to the regions ROP. That is, on the back surface (solder surface) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, a total of 11 areas ROP exposing a part of the ground (GND) are provided. The base plate 1502a is provided with a total of 11 insertion openings 1502az at positions corresponding to the respective regions ROPs. Further, serial numbers 1 to 11 are formed on the back surface side of the base flat plate 1502a and in the vicinity of the respective insertion openings 1502az. This serial number indicates the order (work procedure) in which the worker of the manufacturer inserts the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate. As described above, the base body 1502 is made of a transparent non-conductive resin, and thus the serial numbers 1 to 11 can be visually recognized from the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. The base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar to the shape of the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. ..

[Conductive Elastic Member for Substrate of Peripheral Control Substrate Box According to Third Embodiment]
In the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, in addition to the conductive elastic member 1545 capable of electrically connecting the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, the periphery is further included. The control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like are provided on a rear surface (solder surface) of a variety of boards such as a region (ROP) where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed and a metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600. It has a conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate that can be electrically connected. The substrate conductive elastic member 1507 is a conductive member having a cushioning property (elasticity), and includes a conductive coating portion 1507a, and a foam 1507b having a rectangular shape as a core material coated with the conductive coating portion 1507a. ,,. Examples of the conductive coating portion 1507a include a polyester woven cloth having a copper and nickel metal coating formed thereon, and a polyimide film having a copper and nickel conductive layer formed thereon. As the foam 1507b, for example, a polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be used.

The conductive elastic member for board 1507 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the front-rear direction (when the conductive elastic member for board 1507 in FIG. 228 is viewed from the right side, the width is about 11 mm, the depth is about 8 mm, and the height is about 8 mm). have. When the board conductive elastic member 1507 is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az of the base body 1502 described above, it is guided by the inner wall of the insertion opening 1502az and the board conductive elastic member 1507 has a cushioning property (elasticity). By pressing the inner wall of the insertion port 1502az, the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate is difficult to be removed from the insertion port 1502az.

[Exposed Area of Part of Ground of Various Substrates of Peripheral Control Substrate Box According to Third Embodiment]
Here, the area ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is exposed will be described. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the region ROP formed in a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 have the same structure. The region ROP formed in a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) will be described. A region ROP formed in a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is, as shown in FIGS. 230(a) and 230(b), the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. In the peripheral control board 1510, part of the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the copper foil surface 1510yp of the board 1510y is exposed in a shape larger than the front surface shape of the board conductive elastic member 1507. A resist solution is applied onto the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1510yr.

It is also possible to employ a method of using through holes without exposing the solid ground as the region ROP. For example, as shown in FIGS. 230(c) and (d), a region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the solid ground on the front surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. A plurality of through holes to be connected are arranged side by side in the vertical direction and a plurality of through holes are formed in the vertical direction, and a land is formed around each through hole on the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. A resist solution can be applied on the foil surface 1510yp to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1510yr.

[Assembly Method of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
The method for assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 is basically the same as the method for assembling the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, and therefore the procedure for inserting the above-described board conductive elastic member 1507 will be described. Before the worker of the manufacturer attaches the peripheral control unit 1500 to the attachment portion formed on the back side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 and on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600. Then, the serial number 1 to the serial number 11 are inserted in order from the longitudinal direction of the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate into the insertion opening 1502az of the base body 1502 described above, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and The work of bringing the part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 into contact with the exposed region ROP is performed.

As described above, the effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are housed in a frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, whereby the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected, It is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. Further, as described above, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600, and electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 or the like housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. The same ground (GND) is formed by connecting the same to.

When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, the L-shaped circuit connecting piece of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. 1540d passes through a through-hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and as shown in FIG. 229, hits the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 via the conductive elastic member 1545. It comes into contact with them. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the third embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), which causes a dimensional tolerance or an assembly error. The dimensional deviation can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, the metallic shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically and reliably connected to each other, and the peripheral control board housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. It can be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510 to form the same ground (GND).

In addition, the conductivity for each substrate, one of which is in contact with the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed. The other of the elastic members 1507 passes through through-holes (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the corresponding transparent synthetic resin box and hits the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. 229. It comes into contact with them. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate is pushed and crushed in the height direction (in the third embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), so that the dimensional tolerance is increased. A dimensional deviation due to an assembly error or the like can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate. As a result, the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate is maintained in a state where an external force is applied in the longitudinal direction, and as a repulsive force, the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate is controlled by the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. , And a contact surface with a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, and a contact surface with a metallic back cover of the performance display device 1600, To maintain the state of good electrical connection, and to connect the ground (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, etc. GND) and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically and reliably connected, and electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 or the like housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. Can be connected to the same ground (GND). Therefore, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 and the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the effect display device 1600 can be further reduced in addition to the metal shield plate 1540. It is possible to form a “route through which noise is removed” that leads to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates (GND)) through the substrate conductive elastic member 1507 and removes it. As a result, it is not necessary to provide each of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic noise), and the cost of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

Even in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 side. The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil as the surface thereof is not exposed, but abut on the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. Mounting surfaces (bosses) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 that are respectively soldered to the copper foils that are the surfaces of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and are formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control substrate 1510 that is in contact with the surface, may be coated with a resist solution and covered. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, is also applied when the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. It Even with this configuration, a metal pan head screw is inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 to face the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 were electrically connected via the metal pan head screw. It can be in a state. Further, the copper that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that contacts the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By coating and covering the foil with a resist solution, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the resist layers in the portions corresponding to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 have the same thickness, so that the through holes 1510r1 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are formed. When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan head screw into 1510r4 and screwing it toward mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

Further, in the third embodiment, when the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to flow through the blade portion to the peripheral control unit 1500. By being blown out toward the outside, air is stored from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 into the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in via a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal shield plate 1540, it is possible to suppress the flow velocity of air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 to be small. However, when the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes air to be sucked in through the blade and sent out toward the peripheral control IC 1510a. Good. In other words, the air-cooling fan FAN may not be the main purpose of exchanging the air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but may simply cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Further, also in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 that contacts the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. With respect to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee (like a spatula) is placed on the metal mask. The solder paste is spread from the holes formed in the metal mask by applying a solder paste), and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is put in a reflow oven to dry the solder paste by heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be poured into the solder bath for soldering. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a come into contact with each other. In order to prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity to be deteriorated, soldering should not partly rise on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Must be uniform.

For example, on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, a resist layer 1510xr formed by coating a part of the resist solution with a resist solution is formed, The peripheral control board 1510 is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, which is the surface of the copper foil, in a region having a predetermined shape. Specifically, as the “predetermined shape”, as shown in FIG. 221(a), the resist is applied to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are concentrically formed (a resist may be a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is concentrically formed). As shown in FIG. A rectangular shape having a predetermined width and a predetermined length is formed into a chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are arranged in an annular shape at the center of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. A shape formed in a lattice shape composed of lines in the horizontal direction and lines in the horizontal direction (the resist may have a predetermined width and a plurality of lines in the vertical direction separated from each other by a predetermined distance dimension may be formed. 221 may have a shape in which only lateral lines having a predetermined width are formed with a predetermined distance dimension therebetween.) As shown in FIG. 221(d), lines having a predetermined width are separated from each other by a predetermined distance. A shape in which a plurality of upward-sloping lines are formed in a slanted shape (a shape in which resist lines having a predetermined width are separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of downward-sloping lines are formed in a slanted shape) are not shown. An example is a collection of small circular shapes.

In this way, a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution to form a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape, and the periphery is formed. Since the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 are soldered to the areas having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is It is possible to suppress the amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 has a predetermined shape by being coated with a resist solution. Of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 as long as they can exert the effect of suppressing the amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil which is the surface thereof. As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into the solder bath for soldering, the solder is not applied to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to make the attachment uniform so that it does not rise in part. The solder thus soldered includes the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the land 1510rf1 to the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 is covered so as to be electrically connectable.

It should be noted that a predetermined pattern formed by such a resist is applied to the land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts on the seat surface (the seat surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. You may perform also with respect to the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1-1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the pan portion (head seat surface) of the metal pan head screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to. When the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath for soldering, a copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution. Then, the resist layers applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may have a uniform thickness.

Also, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the metal pan head screw is used. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by passing a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as a “wash washer”) through the pan head screw.

In addition, in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. And the metal back cover are electrically connected and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are separately molded. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded in the transparent synthetic resin box.

[Contrast between Noise Countermeasure Configuration by Peripheral Control Board Box According to First Embodiment and Noise Countermeasure Configuration by Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
In the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of carbon in polycarbonate as described above. It is configured as a conductive resin containing, and various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are made of metal on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When they are respectively fixed by screws, they are electrically connected to the grounds (GND) of these various substrates to be the same ground (GND).

On the other hand, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 231 and 232, the rear side is opened and a box shape that is longer in the left-right direction than in the vertical direction is formed. A peripheral body control that can control the progress of the effect based on a command from the cover body 1501 that is molded by the transparent non-conductive resin that has and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. A substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, And a metal-made substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield arranged on the surface (mounting surface) side of various boards capable of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 The plate 1540, a conductive elastic member 1545 attached (bonded) to a predetermined position of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board. A metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 disposed on the back surface (solder surface) side of various boards capable of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering various boards such as 1530; A base body 1502 formed of a transparent non-conductive resin for closing the opening of the cover body 1501. In the internal space of the cover body 1501, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are made of a metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal board back surface. A peripheral control board box formed by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by being sandwiched between the (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 and attached at a predetermined position of the cover body 1501 and closing the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502. 1505 (sealed substrate box) is configured.

[Cover Body of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
First, in the peripheral control board box cover body 1502 according to the fourth embodiment, the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board box cover body 1502 according to the first embodiment. Are formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a as mounting boss holes 1501ah3 and 1501ah4, respectively, and at the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment. The difference is that the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 that are formed are respectively formed as mounting boss holes 1501am3 and 1501am4 on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. Further, in the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the backup power supply 1510e that can supply power to the real-time clock IC (not shown) included in the peripheral control board 1510 from a holder (not shown) is also provided. In order to prevent the power supply to the real-time clock IC (not shown) from being cut off, a protrusion preventing portion 1501aw having a cylindrical shape is formed so as to protrude from the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 toward the front side of the backup power supply 1510e. This is different from the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment. The end surface of the pop-out prevention portion 1501aw is arranged so as to be separated from the backup power supply 1510e by a predetermined distance dimension (for example, 1 mm).

Further, when various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to the back surface side of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral A metal pan head screw (not shown) is directly inserted into the through holes (excluding those into which the mounting boss protrusions are inserted) of various boards such as the data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board are fixed on the rear surface side of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment by being screwed into the mounting boss hole formed in the. When mounting various boards such as 1530, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is directly attached to a specific through hole among a plurality of through holes in the various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. After performing the first fixing method of inserting and fixing by screwing into the mounting boss hole formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, various types of peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, liquid crystal output board 1530, etc. The peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are provided with through-holes formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces of the metallic back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 so as to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of the board. , And the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and other various through holes other than the specific through holes in the other substrates, the cover plate 1501 is covered with the base plate 1502 to close the opening of the base plate 1502a. Inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through hole of the mounting boss formed on the front surface side, each through hole formed in the L-shaped mounting piece of the metal board rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like are passed through other through holes in various boards, and are screwed into mounting boss holes formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to be fixed. 2 Perform the fixing method.

In the first fixing method, when the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. Are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the penetrating holes formed on the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c2 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. The hole 1540c2a is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. The holes 1540c1a, the through holes 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, and the attachment boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged to match and The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the control board 1510 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a.

In the first fixing method, when the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. 1540b1a is arrange|positioned so that it may match with the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 formed in the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, the through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 to 1501ah4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

In the first fixing method, when the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. Are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501am1 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. Then, the through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501an1 to 1501an4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral control is performed by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 as specific through holes among the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510 and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. The substrate 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 are in contact with the seat surface of the metal pan head screw.

Then, among the through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 as specific through holes to be formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a by screwing the mounting boss holes 1501ah3 and 1501ah2. As a result, of the lands 1520rb1, 1520rb2, 1520rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the lands 1520rb1, 1520rb4 are in contact with the seat surface of the metal pan head screw, respectively. Becomes Further, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is in a state of being electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and thus is made of metal. The board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the same ground (GND) line is provided. Therefore, the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and thereby the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal The output board 1530 is connected to the ground (GND). Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. Therefore, the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Become.

Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 as specific through holes among the through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to attach the cover plate 1501a on the back surface side. By screwing toward the boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am4, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, of the lands 1530rb1, 1530rb3, 1530rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the lands 1530rb1, 1530rb4 and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Become. Further, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is brought into a state of being electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, thereby making the metal shield. The plate 1540 will be connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the same ground (GND) line is provided. Therefore, the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that the peripheral control board 1510 has the ground (GND) and the peripheral data. It is connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM substrate 1520. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. ..

After the first fixing method, in the second fixing method, a metal plate, which will be described later, is formed so as to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Through holes 1555b1a to 1555b4a respectively formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 of the board rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are provided in various types such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, through holes 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and through holes 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided as corresponding through holes other than the specific through holes in the board. , The opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502, and a metal pan head screw (not shown) is formed in through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 described later, which are formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. Through the through holes 1555b1a to 1555b4a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 of the metallic back side (solder side) shield plate 1555, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and The through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, which correspond to the through holes other than the specific through holes in various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, And through the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively, and screwing into mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

By performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method in order, the peripheral control board 1510 and the rear surface of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are made of metal. The board is sandwiched by the front surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. , And the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 attached to the L shape. The surfaces of the pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 are in contact with each other. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. By being in the state of being connected to, the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, and the metal board back surface (solder surface) The L-shaped attachment pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the side shield plate 1555 are made of metal by being electrically connected to the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. The board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the same ground (GND) line is connected. Therefore, the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 should be connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is connected to the ground (GND) and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the ground (GND). Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. Therefore, the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, and the power supply is reduced. It will be connected to the ground (GND) line of the substrate 630.

Further, by sequentially performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method, the land 1520rb2 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield The surface of the plate 1555 and the surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b3 are in contact with each other. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b3 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1520rb2 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. In this state, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the same ground is provided. Since it is (GND), the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and thus the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. And to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main frame 4. Therefore, the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Become.

Further, by sequentially performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method, the land 1530rb3 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate The surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b4 of 1555 is in contact with. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the metallic substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1530rb3 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As a result, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the same ground (GND) line is provided. Therefore, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data. It is connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM substrate 1520. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. ..

By performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method in order, the conductive elastic member 1545 attached (bonded) to a predetermined position of the metallic substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is made of metal. The back surface (solder surface) of the manufactured board is pressed against the front surface side of the shield plate 1555 to be in contact with the board. As a result, the metallic substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metallic substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected.

By mounting various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 together with the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A gap (2.3 mm) having the above-described predetermined distance dimension is formed between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa.

As described above, the sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is the ventilation holes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The area in 1501az and the above-mentioned gap (the gaps formed in the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501), The gap formed in the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided, the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the two connectors formed in the cover body 1501. The area of the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 and the space formed in the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 is smaller than the total of the areas. Therefore, when the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blade portion. , Air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a metal substrate surface (mounting) which is housed in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to be small when taking in via the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the (surface) side shield plate 1540. You can do it.

[Base Body of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
On the front surface side of the base plate 1502a of the base body 1502, through holes 1502ag1 are formed at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Mounting bosses 1502af1-1502af6 having ˜1502ag6 are formed respectively. A metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into and screwed into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 to fix the base 1502 to the cover body 1501.

On the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, the area corresponding to the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 has a size smaller than that of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Foil-removing regions NR1, NR2, NR3 each having a large round shape are formed, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the wire break prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aa3 contact the foil-removing regions NR1, NR, NR3, respectively. These foil stripping regions NR1, NR2, NR3 can prevent noise (electromagnetic noise) from entering from the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1-1502aaa3 formed on the base body 1502 so that the ground ( It is isolated from GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the solid ground of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 through the foil stripping regions NR1, NR2, NR3. A route through which noise cannot escape is formed.

[Metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate of peripheral control board box according to Fourth Embodiment]
The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like are arranged on the surface (mounting surface) side of various boards that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that enters the various boards. When viewed from the front, the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance between the upper left side center and the lower left side center of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). In the fourth embodiment, L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 that are bent rearward by 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed, respectively.

In addition, the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance on the right side upper side and the right side lower side of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent backward by a dimension (12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in the fourth embodiment) are formed, and a horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: (1.2 mm) in the upper part of the center and above the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 by a predetermined distance dimension (in the fourth embodiment, from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a, an L-shaped circuit bent backward). A connection piece 1540d is formed. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from the upper end to the lower end.

Notches are formed around the shield flat plate 1540a so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, respectively, and the shield flat plate 1540a is substantially at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and the wiring drawing recess 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. As a result, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. In this state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer periphery of the shield flat plate 1540a, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover flat plate 1501a and the wiring pull-out recess 1501ab are located in the opening 1540aa of the shield flat plate 1540a. It will be inserted without contact.

The metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is bent so that the back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged in the same plane. The L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1 and 1540c2 are formed in parallel with the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a. In the fourth embodiment, the distance dimension from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the attachment boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501.

Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501.

In a state where various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Is a space having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the front surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. In the state of being formed, two spaces are formed by arranging the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 in this space.

These two spaces are the distance dimension of the first predetermined height between the surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. (In the fourth embodiment, the first space having 12 mm) and the distance of the second predetermined height between the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. And a second space having a dimension (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment).

In the first space, various electronic components and the like provided in the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c, real-time clock IC not shown, backup power supply 1510e, power generation circuit not shown, resistor not shown, capacitor not shown) , LEDML1 to LEDML4, special connectors SCN1, SCN2, etc.), various electronic parts and the like provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a, resistors (not shown), capacitors (not shown), special connector SCN3, etc.) and liquid crystal output board 1530. While various electronic components and the like (a resistor (not shown), a capacitor (not shown), a special connector SCN4, etc.) are accommodated, various electronic components and the like are not accommodated at all in the second space. This is because it is possible to take measures against noise (electromagnetic wave noise) by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space 1505a, and at the same time, in the second space 1505b. The heat generated from the various electronic components in the first space by not containing the various electronic components generating heat is transmitted to the second space 1505b through the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. This is to communicate efficiently. That is, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat dissipation plate in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise).

The shield flat plate 1540a of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has the same shape at positions corresponding to the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Ventilation holes 1540az are formed. That is, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm, like the ventilation holes 1501az. There is. When the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover body 1501 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. Thus, the air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 to cover the cover. The first space 1505a (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) in the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

In addition, noise that intrudes into the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 from cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501. As a measure against (electromagnetic wave noise), each side of the shield flat plate 1540a is bent backward (toward the surface (mounting surface) side of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530). Side walls 1540ae are formed. Vent holes 1540az are not formed in these side walls 1540ae at all. In addition, these side walls 1540ae have predetermined end surfaces from the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled. Since they have a distance dimension (for example, 3.9 mm) and are separated from each other, they do not come into contact with each other and do not come into contact with various electronic components mounted on various substrates.

In addition, the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has a circular shape through which a protrusion prevention portion 1501aw having a cylindrical shape formed by protruding from the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 is inserted. An opening 1540aw having a is formed.

[Metal board rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate of peripheral control board box according to Fourth Embodiment]
The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like are arranged on the back surface (solder surface) side of various boards that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic noise) that enters the various boards. When viewed from the front side, the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 has an upper left side, a lower left side, an upper right side, and a lower right side of a horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1555a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). L-shaped attachment pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 bent backward by a predetermined distance dimension (2.3 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1555a in the fourth embodiment) are formed on the side. These L-shaped attachment pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 are formed by bending so that their surfaces are arranged on the same plane.

Cutout portions 1555aa1 to 1555aaa are formed on the shield flat plate 1555a so as not to interfere with the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502, respectively. Further, on the shield flat plate 1555a, among the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502, a mounting boss 1502af4 contacting the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, Notches 1555aa5 are formed so as not to interfere with the mounting bosses 1502af5 that come into contact with the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In addition, on the surface side of the shield flat plate 1555a, in order to correspond to the shape of the shield flat plate 1555a, electric power other than the ground (GND) in various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is provided. A transparent insulating sheet (not shown) is attached (bonded) to prevent a short circuit due to a physical connection. Further, the shield flat plate 1555a has no side wall 1540ae formed on the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and no ventilation hole 1540az.

In addition, in the lower region of the cutout portion 1555aa5 on the front surface side of the shield flat plate 1555a, it is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d formed on the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. The conductive elastic member 1545 that is adhered (bonded) is a region that is pressed and brought into contact.

In a state in which a metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is attached to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, By arranging a metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 in the vicinity of the back surface side (solder surface) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Various substrates absorb heat generated from various electronic components and the like, and the absorbed heat is removed from the various substrates from the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, whereby the various substrates can be efficiently cooled. That is, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 has a function as a heat dissipation plate in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise).

When the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the back surface side of the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is in contact with the surface of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502.

[Conductive Elastic Member of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having a cushioning property (elasticity), It is composed of a conductive coating portion 1545a, a foam 1545b having a rectangular shape as a core material coated with the conductive coating portion 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c attached to the conductive coating portion 1545a. Examples of the conductive covering portion 1545a include a polyester woven cloth on which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed, and a polyimide film on which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed. The foam 1545b can be, for example, a polyurethane foam having heat resistance. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be mentioned. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by a peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating portion 1545a is attached (bonded) to another member.

The cross-sectional shape of the conductive elastic member 1545 (round-cut shape) has a rectangular shape with a width of about 5 mm and a height of about 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a width of about 2 mm. , Has a rectangular shape whose height is about 0.035 mm.

[Assembly Method of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
A method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

Then, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, an L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is attached. The through hole 1540c1a formed on the base plate 1501a is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is arranged. The through hole 1540c2a formed on the base plate 1501a is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is arranged. The through hole 1540b1a formed on the base plate 1501a is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is arranged. The through hole 1540b2a formed in the above is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and are formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The through holes 1520r1, 1520r2, 1520r3, 1520r4 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. 1530r2, 1530r3, 1530r4 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501am1, 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 233, a metal pan (not shown) is directly formed from the back surface (solder surface) side of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 by the first fixing method. The screws are inserted and screwed into various mounting boss holes formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to be fixed. According to the first fixing method, a screw fixing instruction mark and a serial number near the screw fixing instruction mark are printed on the rear surface (solder surface) of each substrate as silk printing on the through hole to be fixed. This serial number indicates the order (work procedure) in which the worker of the manufacturer inserts a metal pan head screw (not shown) and screws it in to fix it. The color of the screw fixing instruction mark and the serial number printed in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark as silk printing is the surface (mounting surface) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. ), the area indicating the position (including the designation of the direction) where various electronic components are mounted, and the component number are the same color (here, white) as the color printed by silk printing.

Specifically, in the through hole 1520r1 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH1 surrounding the land 1520rb1 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 with a thick white solid line is silk-printed. The white serial number 1 is surrounded by a rectangular white line in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH1 and is printed by silk printing. Further, in the through hole 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH2 surrounding the land 1520rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 with a thick white solid line is printed by silk printing. In the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH2, a white serial number 2 is surrounded by a rectangular white line and printed as silk printing.

Further, in the through hole 1530r1 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH3 surrounding the land 1530rb1 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 with a solid white thick line is printed by silk printing. In the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH3, a white serial number 3 is surrounded by a rectangular white line and printed as silk printing. Further, in the through hole 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH4 surrounding the land 1530rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 with a solid white thick line is printed by silk printing. A white serial number 4 is printed in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH4 by silk-screen printing surrounded by a rectangular white line.

Further, in the through hole 1510r2 of the peripheral control board 1510, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH5 surrounding the land 1510rb2 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 with a solid white thick line is printed by silk printing. A white serial number 5 is printed in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH5 by silk-screen printing surrounded by a rectangular white line. Further, in the through hole 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH6 surrounding the land 1510rb3 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 with a solid white thick line is printed by silk printing. A white serial number 6 is printed in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH6 by silk-screen printing surrounded by a rectangular white line.

The worker of the manufacturer inserts a metal pan head screw (not shown) in order from serial number 1 to serial number 4 to fix it by screwing it into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. There may be a slight deviation from the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Even in such a case, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to constrain the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional error due to such restraint When fixing the control board 1510 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a are formed. Since they can be absorbed by the respective dimensional allowances, the positions of the peripheral control board 1510 are finely adjusted and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are covered by the cover flat plate 1501a. It can be fitted to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side.

Formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 by the worker of the manufacturer performing work of inserting serial number 1 and serial number 2 in order by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) and fixing. The lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 to be formed are in contact with the seat surface of the metal pan head screw. In addition, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. As a result, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

A worker of the manufacturer inserts a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the serial number 3 and serial number 4 in order, and screwing and fixing the same to form on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 and the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is brought into a state of being electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, thereby making the metal shield. The plate 1540 will be connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

A worker of the manufacturer inserts a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the serial number 5 and up to the serial number 6 in order, and fixes them by screwing them into the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510. The lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 are in contact with the seat surface of the metal pan head screw.

Note that when the manufacturer's worker inserts a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the serial number 1 to serial number 6 in order to fix the screw, the manufacturer's worker serializes the serial number 1 to serial number 6 in order. If a metal pan head screw (not shown) is randomly inserted and a metal pan head screw (not shown) is randomly inserted without fixing the metal pan head screw (not shown), the serial number There may be a mistake in inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the one indicated by the serial number and forgetting to screw in and fix. When such an error occurs, the peripheral control board box 1505 (peripheral control unit 1500) is shipped while the fixing by the metal pan head screw (not shown) is incomplete.

Further, the operator of the manufacturer designates the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the through holes 1510r2 of the peripheral control substrate 1510, which the serial numbers 1 to 6 indicate. Through holes other than 1510r3, that is, through holes 1520r2, 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, through holes 1530r2, 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and through holes 1510r1, 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, or any one or more of them. Even if the base body 1502 is covered on the cover body 1501 after the base body 1502 is fixed by screwing a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through hole of , Of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss corresponding to the incorrectly inserted metal pan head screw Since it necessarily interferes with the head of the pan head screw, a gap is formed between the base body 1502 and the cover body 1501 so that the cover body 1501 cannot be completely closed by the base body 1502.

In this way, of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Subsequently, L of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is covered so as to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The through holes 1555b1a and 1555b2a formed in the character-shaped attachment piece 1555b1 are arranged so as to be aligned with the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the L-shaped attachment of the metallic back side (solder side) shield plate 1555 is performed. The through hole 1555b3a formed in the piece 1555b3 is arranged so as to be aligned with the through hole 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and is formed on the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b4 of the metallic board rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. The through hole 1555b4a is arranged so as to be aligned with the through hole 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In this manner, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is arranged so as to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Then, since holes such as ventilation holes are not formed at all in the shield flat plate 1555a of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, the above-mentioned screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and serial numbers 1 to 1 are formed. The serial number 6 is also covered with the metallic back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, which makes it difficult to visually recognize. In other words, the assembled peripheral control board box 1505 molded as a transparent non-conductive resin is looked at from various angles such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Even if it is included, the various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed by the above-described first fixing method, that is, the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side. The shield plate 1555 keeps the user from seeing, and can improve the security of the peripheral control board box 1505.

Then, the peeling paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member 1545 is formed on the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Attach (adhere) the adhesive tape 1545c.

Subsequently, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engagement portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and formed on the cover body 1501. The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd are inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bags 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502. ..

Next, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bags 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. With the base body 1502 wrapped around so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is covered with the cover body 1501 as it is, a mounting boss formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a by the second fixing method. A metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of 1502af1 to 1502af6 and screwed to fix.

Specifically, by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through hole 1502ag1 of the mounting boss 1502af1 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, an L-shaped shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal board is formed. Through holes 1555b1a formed in the ring-shaped mounting piece 1555b1, through holes 1510r1 of the peripheral control board 1510, and through holes 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. The cover plate 1501a is fixed by being screwed into a mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. Further, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag2 of the mounting boss 1502af2 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a to insert an L-shaped mounting piece of the metallic back side (solder side) shield plate 1555. The through holes 1555b2a formed in 1555b2, the through holes 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the through holes 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c2 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are respectively covered. The flat plate 1501a is fixed by being screwed into a mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 has the L-shape of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the L-shape of the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. It is in a state of being sandwiched by the surfaces of the mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. , And the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 attached to the L shape. The surfaces of the pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 are in contact with each other. That is, the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. By being connected, the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, and the metal board rear surface (solder surface) side The L-shaped attachment pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the shield plate 1555 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so that the board is made of metal. The back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag3 of the mounting boss 1502af3 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, and the L-shaped mounting piece of the metal backside (solder side) shield plate 1555 is attached. The through hole 1555b3a formed in 1555b3 and the through hole 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are respectively passed through and screwed into a mounting boss hole 1501ah1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a for fixing. As a result, the land 1520rb2 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 come into contact with each other. It will be in the state of doing. In other words, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the metallic back side (solder side) shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1520rb2 formed on the back side (solder side) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. As a result, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

Further, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag4 of the mounting boss 1502af4 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a to pass through the through hole 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is fixed by being screwed into the formed mounting boss hole 1501ah4. Further, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag5 of the mounting boss 1502af5 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, and is formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a through the through hole 1530r2 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is fixed by being screwed into the mounting boss hole 1501am3.

Further, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag6 of the mounting boss 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, and the L-shaped mounting piece of the metal board rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is inserted. The through hole 1555b4a formed in 1555b4 and the through hole 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are respectively passed through and screwed into a mounting boss hole 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a for fixing. As a result, the land 1530rb3 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 come into contact with each other. It becomes a state. That is, the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b4 of the metallic back side (solder side) shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1530rb3 formed on the back side (solder side) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

By this second fixing method, when a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted and screwed into the through holes 1502ag1-1502a6 of the mounting bosses 1502af1-1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, the metal substrate surface The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (bonded) to the (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is pressed against and brought into contact with the front surface side of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. As a result, the metallic substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metallic substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the fourth embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), which causes a dimensional tolerance or an assembly error. The dimensional deviation can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, a metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal board back surface (solder surface) that sandwich various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the side shield plate 1555 securely, and the periphery is sandwiched between the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. The control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of various boards and the like, so that the same ground (GND) can be obtained, so that noise (electromagnetic wave) is generated. A strong environment against noise is provided for the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, various boards such as liquid crystal output board 1530) and peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520). , And the periphery of various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced.

Subsequently, a metal one-way screw having a metal anchor rivet (not shown) inserted therein is inserted into the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. Screw in. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet spreads outward at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea, so that the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are formed. The base side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is in a state of being sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and inscribed (surface contact).

In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed by a tool. Therefore, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by looking at the traces of opening and closing, and a deterrent to the unauthorized conduct to the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been increased.

Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN are pulled out from the wiring pull-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal-made pan head screw with a seat (a screw having a shape of a pan head and a flat washer) (not shown) is screwed into the pull-out and mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front of the cover plate 1501a toward the rear.

Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring drawing opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the attachment recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. By inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front side to the rear side of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner is attached to the attachment portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600, which is the rear side of the game panel 1100 included in the game board 5. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is located on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. And a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 to insert a mounting groove forming a mounting portion formed in the transparent synthetic resin box. It is fixed by screwing it toward a mounting hole that constitutes a mounting portion formed on the back surface side of.

The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment are molded and made of a transparent non-conductive resin, and are formed in the inner space of the cover body 1501. , A peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid crystal output board 1530, and other various boards are made of metal. The board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, and the metal board rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. When sandwiched and attached by, the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of various boards. It is configured. The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 as described above. Connected to each other. For this reason, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is shielded from the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal board back surface (solder surface). Via the side shield plate 1555, it can be guided to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) and removed. As a result, it is not necessary to provide each of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic noise), and the cost of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the plurality of shield flat plates 1540a formed on the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. The arrangement of the ventilation holes 1540az having a circular shape will be described. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming the presence or absence of fraud.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The product number or model (or management number) printed on the device, the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b, and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.), Control so that the user can visually recognize, that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pin, and the content silk-screened on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from multiple directions. The ROM 1510b are arranged in a dispersed manner so as to be larger than the shape of the ROM 1510b. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence relationship between the control ROM 1510b and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. .. Further, the LED ML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b is designed to maintain the lighting state in the state where the direct current +5V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, and therefore the direct current +5V is supplied. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the status of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a function as a spotlight of brightly illuminating the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the status of the IC pin. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility and the improvement of the visibility of the content silk-screened on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and further provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number or model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively (for example, , The number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board. 1520 and the silk-printed contents of 1520 and 1520 are respectively dispersed and arranged so as to be a large area in which the contents can be substantially confirmed from the angles in multiple directions. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In addition to the correspondence relation with, the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is modified, and the inter-board connector is modified by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, the LED ML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is designed to maintain the lighting state in the state where the direct current +35V is supplied from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620, and therefore the direct current +35V is maintained. As a spotlight that has a function of checking (monitoring) the supplied state, but brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By further having the function of, the visibility of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the state of the IC pin is improved, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. Of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. ..

Further, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 in the liquid crystal output board 1530), and further, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and 1530 are arranged in a dispersed manner so that the silk-printed contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the silk-screened content on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the silk-screened content on the liquid crystal output board 1530. In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. can do. Further, since the LED ML4 arranged near the special connector SCN2 is adapted to maintain the lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although having a function, the peripheral control board 1510 has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates an inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 with the special connector SCN4. Improving the visibility of the silk-screened contents on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and improving the visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , Can contribute to.

Further, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAM 1510c1. The state of the IC pins of the 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. In order to be able to check the state of the IC pins and the silk-screened contents on the peripheral control board 1510 from multiple directions, the areas are dispersed so as to be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. It is arranged. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence relationship between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the alteration of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. You can Further, the LED ML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in the lighting state in the state where the direct current +12V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it originally has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state where DC +12V is supplied, it also has a function as a spotlight of brightly illuminating the SDRAM 1510c, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility, the improvement of the visibility of the state of the IC pin, and the improvement of the visibility of the content silk-screened on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, among the plurality of blades forming the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN, a gap between the blades (specifically, a gap between the blades by the inspector rotating the blade portion of the air cooling fan FAN). From this, the part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes.

As the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, surface-mounted types with a wide angle of about 120 degrees and types with weak directivity are adopted, and thus are used for lighting. Is also suitable. Various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are provided by a metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. In the state of being sandwiched and attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension of (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) is formed, and a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is arranged in this space so that two spaces are formed. A space is formed. As described above, these two spaces are provided between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. And a first space having a distance dimension of a first predetermined height (12 mm in the fourth embodiment), a surface of a shield plate 1540a of a metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, and a cover plate. And a second space having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the back surface of the 1501a and the back surface. As described above, various electronic components included in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components included in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are housed in the first space. There is. The first space thus formed can be illuminated brightly by turning on the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 which is also suitable for use as illumination.

In addition, since the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has gloss and is a metal board that faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. As a reflection portion that can reflect the light emitted by the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 and redirect it to the peripheral control board 1510 for the area on the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and its periphery. It also has the function of. The reflective portions may be further coated with a glossy colored paint.

In addition, in the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, as shown in FIG. 3, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 and are paid out to the side of the game board 5. Since the unit 560 is arranged, the game balls are rubbed against each other in the ball path constituted by these to be charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby becoming a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment that is affected by noise (electromagnetic noise) due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are lined up in the back of the island facility of the game hall. In this way, the periphery of the game board 5 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise (electromagnetic noise). Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are transparently molded as a non-conductive resin, and the inside of the cover body 1501 is formed. In the space, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are made of metal and are on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the metal, the shield plate 1540, and the back surface (solder surface) of the metal substrate. By being attached while being sandwiched by the shield plates 1555, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. It has adopted a configuration that is electrically connected to. Further, in the fourth embodiment, the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. A configuration is adopted in which the same ground (GND) is formed by electrically connecting to the ground (GND) line.

Thereby, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base. The noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the body 1502 passes through the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 to the peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data. It can be removed by being guided to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base. Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the body 1502 is transmitted through a metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 to a substrate ground (grounds of various substrates). (GND)) and removed.

In the fourth embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are made of metal. In a state of being sandwiched by the back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 and attached at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the cover flat plate 1501a are separated. A space having a distance of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) is formed between the back surface and the back surface, and a metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is formed in this space. Are arranged to form two spaces, and these two spaces are formed between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. The first space having a distance dimension of a first predetermined height (12 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the shield plate 1540a and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a, and the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. A second space having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height is larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. In the case of disposing a large-scale production unit (electric drive source and drive mechanism capable of operating the movable production body, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position) on the game board 5, When the distance dimension has a margin, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as the distance dimension of the same predetermined height, or the second distance dimension may be configured. The distance dimension of the predetermined height may be made larger than the distance dimension of the first predetermined height. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic noise by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic noise) in the first space, and at the same time, in the second space. By not containing various electronic components that generate heat, heat generated by various electronic components in the first space is efficiently transferred to the second space through the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. I can communicate well.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az are formed in the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, so that the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a control. The product number or model (or management number) printed on the surface of the ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b, and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc. ), and the product number and model printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the silk-screen printed on the peripheral control board 1510. The contents (eg, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) can be visually confirmed, and the product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. ), the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.). However, the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a are provided with a rectangular opening at a position corresponding to the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. It can also be configured as follows. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening is provided at the position of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 so that the periphery thereof can be visually recognized. It can also be configured as follows. Further, the shape of the inter-board connector (the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be checked so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 corresponding to a larger area than the shape formed by the special connector SCN3), or in the periphery. The shape of the inter-board connector (special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) can be checked so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be confirmed. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the shield plate 1540 on the front surface (mounting surface) made of metal corresponding to a larger area.

[Around the through holes of various boards of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment]
Here, the periphery of the through holes formed in the various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 has a metal board surface (mounting surface) side as shown in FIG. 234(a). Lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4, which are brought into contact with the back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 and electrically connected, are formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 234(a), the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 around the through hole 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a metal board surface (mounting surface). A land 1520rf4 is formed which is in contact with the rear surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the) side shield plate 1540 and is electrically connected thereto. In addition, as shown in FIG. 234(a), the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 around the through hole 1530r1 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a metal board surface (mounting surface) side. A land 1530rf1 is formed which is in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 and is electrically connected thereto.

These lands 1510rf1, 1510rf4, 1520rf4, 1530rf1 are brought into contact with the back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the metallic board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 to be electrically connected. Therefore, a “route through which noise is removed” is formed in which noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the metallic board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 flows to the board ground (grounds (GND) of various boards). The surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 have mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , 1501am1 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces). Therefore, noise (electromagnetic noise) is generated from the mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah2, 1501am1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. , 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2, and the lands 1510rf1, 1510rf4, 1520rf4, 1530rf1, the intruded noise (electromagnetic wave noise) flows to the substrate ground (grounds of various substrates (GND)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 234(b), a surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2, 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Foil removal regions NR5 and NR6 having a shape of a circle slightly larger than the outer circles of the attachment boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 are formed, and the attachment surfaces (boss faces) of the attachment boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 are foil removal regions NR5. , NR6, respectively. In addition, as shown in FIG. 234(b), the cover plate 1501a is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through holes 1520r1, 1520r2, 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Foil removal regions NR7, NR8, NR9 having a circle shape slightly larger than the outer shape circles of the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4 formed on the back side are formed, and the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4 are mounted. The surface (boss surface) comes into contact with the foil stripping regions NR7, NR8, and NR9, respectively. The front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through holes 1530r2, 1530r3, 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a as shown in FIG. 234(b). The foil removing regions NR10, NR11, NR12 having a shape of a circle slightly larger than the outer shape circles of the mounting boss holes 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4 formed in the mounting boss holes 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4 are formed. The boss surface) comes into contact with the foil removing regions NR10, NR11, NR12, respectively.

These foil removing regions NR5 to NR12 prevent the intrusion of noise (electromagnetic wave noise) from the mounting boss holes 1501ag2, 1501ag3, 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are separated from the grounds (GND) of various boards. In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) from the mounting boss holes 1501ag2, 1501ag3, 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the peripheral control via the foil removal areas NR5 to NR12. A “route through which noise does not escape” that cannot enter the solid land of various substrates such as the substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is formed.

On the other hand, on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. Lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 are formed that are in contact with the surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 and are electrically connected thereto. In addition, as shown in FIG. 235(a), the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through hole 1520r2 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, as shown in FIG. ) Side shield plate 1555 is formed with a land 1520rb2 that is in contact with the surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b3 and is electrically connected. Also, as shown in FIG. 235(a), the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output board 1530 around the through hole 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a metal board back surface (solder surface) side. A land 1530rb3 that is in contact with the surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 and is electrically connected is formed.

These lands 1510rb1, 1510rb4, 1520rb2, 1530rb3 are brought into contact with and electrically connected to the surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1, 1555b2, 1555b3, 1555b4 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. Therefore, a “route through which noise exits” is formed, in which noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the metallic back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 flows to the board ground (ground (GND) of various boards). The rear surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1, 1555b2, 1555b3, 1555b4 of the metallic board rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 has mounting bosses 1502af1, 1502af2, 1502af3 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the 1502af6 are in contact with each other. Therefore, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is generated from the mounting bosses 1502af1, 1502af2, 1502af3, 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a to the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b1 of the metal board rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. Even when invading the 1555b2, 1555b3, 1555b4, and the lands 1510rb1, 1510rb4, 1520rb2, 1530rb3, the intruding noise (electromagnetic noise) flows to the substrate ground (grounds of various substrates (GND)).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 235(b), a metal pan head screw (not shown) is provided on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2, 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. Lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 that are directly inserted and screwed are formed, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 that surround the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 with solid white solid lines are printed as silk printing. The back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is, as shown in FIG. Lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 into which screws are directly inserted and formed are formed, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 surrounding the respective lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 with solid white thick lines are printed by silk printing. On the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output board 1530 around the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530, there is provided a metal pan head screw (not shown) as shown in FIG. 235(b). Lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 that are directly inserted and screwed are formed, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 that surround the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 with solid white solid lines are printed by silk printing.

Even if a metal pan head screw (not shown) is directly inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r2, 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, among the areas of the solid thick white line portions of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5, DTH6. Although the region close to the through holes 1510r2, 1510r3 overlaps the head of the metal pan head screw (not shown), the outer peripheral portion of the region of the solid white solid line portions of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5, DTH6 is the metal pan not shown. By being formed larger than the outline of the screw head, the head of the metal pan head screw (not shown) is conspicuous by the solid thick white lines of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6, and the head of the metal screw (not shown) is made conspicuous. It is possible to contribute to the prevention of the mistake (inadvertent mistake) of inserting the pan head screw and screwing it in and forgetting to fix it. Further, even if a metal pan head screw (not shown) is directly inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the white thick solid line portions of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 Although the area close to the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 side overlaps with the head of a metal pan head screw (not shown), the outer peripheral part of the area of the solid white line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 is made of metal (not shown). By being formed larger than the outline of the head of the pan head screw, the head of the metal pan head screw (not shown) is conspicuous by the solid thick white line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2, and the head of the metal head (not shown) is made conspicuous. It is possible to contribute to the prevention of the mistake (inadvertent mistake) of inserting the pan head screw and forgetting to screw it in and fix it. Further, even if a metal pan head screw (not shown) is directly inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, among the regions of the white thick solid line portions of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4. Although the region near the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 overlaps the head of the metal pan head screw (not shown), the outer peripheral portion of the region of the solid white line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 is the metal pan not shown. By being formed larger than the outline of the screw head, the head of the metal pan head screw (not shown) is made conspicuous by the solid thick white line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3, DTH4, and It is possible to contribute to the prevention of the mistake (inadvertent mistake) of inserting the pan head screw and screwing it in and forgetting to fix it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 235(c), the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through hole 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. The foil removal area NR13 having a circle shape slightly larger than the outer shape circle of the attachment boss 1502af4 is formed, and the attachment surface (boss surface) of the attachment boss 1502af4 contacts the foil removal area NR13. The surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through hole 1530r2 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a as shown in FIG. 235(c). The foil removal area NR14 having a shape of a circle slightly larger than the outer shape circle of the attachment boss 1502af5 is formed, and the attachment surface (boss surface) of the attachment boss 1502af5 abuts on the foil removal area NR14.

These foil stripping regions NR13 and NR14 are connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates so as to prevent noise (electromagnetic noise) from entering from the mounting bosses 1502af4 and 1502af5 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. Is isolated from. In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is transmitted from the mounting bosses 1502af4 and 1502af5 formed on the front surface side of the base plate 1502a to the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the solid ground through the foil stripping regions NR13 and NR14. A "route through which noise cannot escape" is formed that cannot be penetrated.

In this way, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 on which the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 surrounded by solid white solid lines are printed by silk printing, respectively, and the through holes formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed. The holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 and the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are through holes that are directly inserted into and screwed in a metal pan head screw (not shown) to be fixed to the cover body 1501. On the other hand, through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 where the screw fixing instruction mark is not printed at all by silk printing, through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output. The through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 formed in the substrate 1530 are formed by inserting a pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502. When fixing the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by screwing, the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting bosses 1502af1-1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1501 and the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501. It is a through hole that is clamped and fixed together with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of 1501a.

That is, a metal pan head screw is directly inserted into a plurality of through holes provided in various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to be fixed to the cover body 1501. When the through hole and the through hole that is sandwiched and fixed together when the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are fixed are mixed, an operator of the manufacturer silk-screens the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 printed as printing, screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 printed as silk printing on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 printed as silk printing on the peripheral control substrate 1510. By visually observing, through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510, which are through holes that are directly inserted and screwed into the cover body 1501 by screwing in a metal pan head screw, and through holes 1520r1 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. 1520r4, the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the through holes 1510r1 of the peripheral control substrate 1510, which are the through holes that are clamped and fixed together when fixing the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. Since 1510r4, the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be discriminated from each other, a metal pan head screw is directly inserted and screwed into the cover body 1501. Through holes 1510r2, 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510 which are fixed through holes, through holes 1520r1, 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and through holes 1530r1, 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (screw fixing operation) Work) can be performed smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of work efficiency.

In the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected. In addition to being connected, it is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is a metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield. Either one or both of the plate 1540 and the metal-made substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 abut on the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and are not electrically connected. In this case, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and other various boards are electrically floated. Since the electrically floating metal may function as an antenna for picking up noise and serve as a noise source, the electrically floating metal may be used as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like. It is necessary not to make it for various substrates. Therefore, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 are illustrated. In addition to the case where the wiring is not electrically connected, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the above-described metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 may be electrically connected by the wiring not shown. As described above, the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a function of reinforcing the main body frame base unit 300 to provide rigidity, and also functions as a main body frame metal ground. It is electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559 described above through a ground wire. The frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through an island facility ground wire (not shown).

In the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 includes the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. When arranged so as to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as, as described above, holes such as ventilation holes are formed in the shield flat plate 1555a of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. Since it is not formed at all, the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 are also covered with the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, which makes it difficult to see. A plurality of holes may be formed in the shield flat plate 1555a of the substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. By doing this, whether or not the manufacturer's worker has fixed the various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 through the plurality of holes by the first fixing method described above (that is, Whether or not a metal pan head screw is inserted and fixed in the portion where the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 are present can be visually confirmed.

In addition, in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2, 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 has a figure. The screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 surrounding the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 into which the unillustrated metal pan head screws 235(b) are directly inserted and screwed are printed as silk printing, respectively. Also, on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, a metal pan head screw (not shown) shown in FIG. 235(b) is provided. Screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2, which surround the peripheries of the lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 that are directly inserted and screwed in, by white solid lines are printed by silk printing, and through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed. On the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the periphery of the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 into which the metal pan head screws (not shown) shown in FIG. Although the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 surrounded by the solid line are printed by silk printing, the white thick solid line may be replaced with a white thick chain line (one-dot chain line, two-dot chain line).

Further, in the noise countermeasure configuration of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 are printed by silk-screen printing on the peripheral control board 1510, The area indicating the position (including the designation of the orientation) of various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the component number thereof are silk-printed. An area that has the same color as the printed color (white), but indicates the position (including the specified orientation) of the various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of each board, and its component number May be different from the color printed by silk printing. For example, when the area indicating the position (including the designation of the direction) where various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various boards and the component number are printed by silk printing are white. The thread fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 may be yellow or black as a color printed by silk printing so as to have a color different from the white color.

Further, in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the metal board surface (mounting surface). The L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the side shield plate 1540 are in contact with the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2, respectively, and the land 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the metal board surface The land 1530rf1 formed on the front surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is in contact with the rear surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, and the metal substrate. The front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the rear surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 are in contact with each other, but instead of this, the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 The back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 is not brought into contact with the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, and the metal board rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is used. Of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, the rear surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 is formed on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. The land 1520rf4 is not brought into contact with the land 1520rf4, but is brought into contact with the front surface of the metal board rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, and the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is L-shaped. The back surface of the mounting piece 1540b2 should not contact the land 1530rf1 formed on the front surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output board 1530, but contact the front surface of the metal board rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. You may comprise. This is a state where the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected by the above-mentioned conductive elastic member 1545. This is because you can

In the case of such a configuration, the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the metallic board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are provided with the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and It is configured so as not to contact various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In addition, the metal board rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 has penetrating holes formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. Through holes are formed at positions corresponding to the holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, 1540b2a, respectively. Further, the base body 1502 corresponds to the through holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. Through holes are formed at the respective positions. Further, on the back surface side of the cover body 1501, through holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. Screw holes are formed at positions corresponding to 1540b2a, respectively. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the surface of the metal board rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 were in contact with each other. In a state (that is, in a state in which electrical connectivity between the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 can be improved) A screw hole formed on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into each through hole formed in the base body 1502 so as to be sandwiched and fixed between the 1501 and the base body 1502. It can be fixed by screwing each toward.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to pass through the blade portion of the peripheral control unit 1500. By being blown out toward the outside, air is stored from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 into the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. Air that flows into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 at the time of taking in through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. However, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation sucks in air toward the peripheral control IC 1510a. You may make it send out air. In other words, the air-cooling fan FAN may not be the main purpose of exchanging the air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but may simply cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Further, also in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the configuration shown in FIG. 234 in which the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 (FIG. For the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in a), a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Spread the solder paste using a squeegee (like a spatula) on the metal mask to apply it from the holes formed in the metal mask, and put the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 in a reflow oven to heat it. Although the solder paste is dried by the method described above, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be poured into a solder bath for soldering. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. To prevent the contact area from being reduced and the electrical connectivity not to deteriorate, the copper foil on the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 should not be partially soldered. Needs to be uniform.

For example, on the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape by being partially coated with a resist solution is formed, The peripheral control board 1510 is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4, which is the surface of the copper foil, in a region having a predetermined shape. Specifically, as the “predetermined shape”, as shown in FIG. 221(a), the resist is applied to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are concentrically formed (a resist may be a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is concentrically formed). As shown in FIG. A rectangular shape having a predetermined width and a predetermined length is formed in a chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 are arranged in an annular shape at the center of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4. A shape formed in a lattice shape composed of lines in the horizontal direction and lines in the horizontal direction (the resist may have a predetermined width and a plurality of lines in the vertical direction separated from each other by a predetermined distance dimension, or a plurality of resists may be formed). 221 may be formed such that a plurality of lateral lines having a predetermined width are formed with a predetermined distance dimension therebetween.) As illustrated in FIG. 221(d), lines having a predetermined width are separated from each other by a predetermined distance. A plurality of diagonally upward lines are formed in a diagonal shape (a line in which the resist has a predetermined width is separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of diagonally downward lines are formed in a diagonal shape). An example is a collection of small circular shapes.

In this way, a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with the resist solution to form the resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape, and the peripheral area is formed. Since the surface of the control board 1510 (mounting surface) is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) is soldered. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 has a predetermined shape by being coated with a resist solution. Of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 of FIG. 1 as long as they can exert the effect of suppressing the amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil which is the surface). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into the solder bath for soldering, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1, 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. It is possible to make the attachment uniform so that it does not rise partly. The solder thus soldered includes the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the land 1510rf1 of the peripheral control board 1510 surface (mounting surface) 1510x side. , 1510rf4 so as to be electrically connectable.

The predetermined pattern formed by such a resist may be applied to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. When the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated with a resist solution. Then, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 may be made uniform.

Further, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the metal pan head screw is used. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by passing a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as a “wash washer”) through the pan head screw.

In addition, in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. And the metal back cover are electrically connected and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are separately molded. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded in the transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison of Noise Countermeasure Configuration by Peripheral Control Board Box According to First Embodiment and Noise Countermeasure Configuration by Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fifth Embodiment]
In the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of carbon in polycarbonate as described above. It is configured as a conductive resin containing, and various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are made of metal on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When they are respectively fixed by screws, they are electrically connected to the grounds (GND) of these various substrates to be the same ground (GND).

On the other hand, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 236 and 237, a box shape having an opening at the rear and being longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction is formed. A peripheral body control which can control the progress of the production based on a command from the cover body 1501 which is made of the transparent non-conductive resin and which has the main control unit 1300 which controls the progress of the game. The substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the transparent non-conductive material that closes the opening of the cover body 1501. A base body 1502 formed of a flexible resin. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted in predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the base body 1502 closes the opening of the cover body 1501. Thus, the peripheral control board box 1505 (sealing board box) is constituted by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

In addition to the point that the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of transparent non-conductive resin, the noise control configuration of the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is characterized in that the conductive elastic member for substrate 1508 can be fitted to the back surface side of the base flat plate 1502a so that a part of the conductive elastic member for substrate 1508 having the character shape projects from the back surface of the base body 1502. The region ROP exposing a part of the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is provided on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the test pad of the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment in that it is provided on the front surface (mounting surface) side and that the cover body 1501 has an opening for contacting the probe with the test pad. The configuration is different.

[Base Body of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fifth Embodiment]
The base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment is similar in shape to that of the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, and is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. At the position corresponding to the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed, a rectangular conductive board 1508 that can come into contact with the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 is fitted and has a vertically long rectangular shape. The rib portion 1502aw is formed so as to protrude from the front surface of the base flat plate 1502a toward the front with a predetermined distance dimension (a distance dimension that does not contact the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). An insertion opening 1502az having a square shape (one side is 8 mm) is formed in the base flat plate 1502a at the center of the rectangular rib portion 1502aw in the vertical and horizontal directions. The conductive elastic member for a substrate 1508 having a T-shape is a conductive member having a cushioning property (elasticity), and has a conductive covering portion 1508a and a T-shape as a core material covered with the conductive covering portion 1508a. It has a foam body 1508b. Examples of the conductive coating portion 1508a include a polyester woven cloth having a copper and nickel metal coating formed thereon, and a polyimide film having a copper and nickel conductive layer formed thereon. As the foam 1508b, for example, a polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be used. The T-shaped firing body 15808b is a base portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the up-down direction. 8 mm and a height of about 16 mm), a protrusion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the front-rear direction from the center to the rear (when viewed from the right side of the T-shaped firing body 15808b in FIG. 237, the width is about 11. 5 mm, depth is about 8 mm, and height is about 8 mm). After the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the board conductive elastic member 1508 is provided (the assembly method of the peripheral control unit 1500 is the same as the assembly method of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted. ), a base portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the up-down direction of the T-shaped conductive elastic member for substrate 1508 is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az formed in the base body 1502, and is pushed in the up-down direction. As a result, as shown in FIG. 238(a), the protruding portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the front-rear direction of the T-shaped conductive elastic member for substrate 1508 protrudes rearward from the back surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. It will be in the state of doing.

As shown in FIG. 238(b), when the base portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the vertical direction of the T-shaped substrate conductive elastic member 1508 is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az formed in the base body 1502 and is pushed in. ), the front surface of the base portion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the vertical direction is pressed against the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) of the rear surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed and brought into contact. In addition, the upper and lower back surfaces and the lower back surface of the base portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the vertical direction (that is, a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the up and down direction and is not connected to a protrusion that has a rectangular parallelepiped shape in the front-rear direction) The back surface of the base portion having the above is locked to the front surface of the base flat plate 1502a.

As described above, the substrate conductive elastic member 1508 is T-shaped, and the rib portion 1502aw and the insertion opening 1502az are formed in the center of the rib portion 1502aw in the vertical and horizontal directions on the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502. With such a configuration, when the board conductive elastic member 1508 is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az and pushed in, the base conductive portion 1508 of the board conductive elastic member 1508, which has a rectangular parallelepiped shape in the vertical direction, is inserted as described above. The upper back surface side and the lower back surface side (that is, the back surface of the base portion having a vertically long rectangular parallelepiped shape to which the protrusion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped in the front-rear direction is not connected) are locked to the front surface of the base flat plate 1502a, respectively. In this state, the board conductive elastic member 1508 can be made difficult to come off from the insertion opening 1502az, and it is easy to handle.

On the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, the area corresponding to the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 has a size smaller than that of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Foil-removing regions NR1, NR2, NR3 each having a large round shape are formed, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the wire break prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aa3 contact the foil-removing regions NR1, NR, NR3, respectively. These foil stripping regions NR1, NR2, NR3 can prevent noise (electromagnetic noise) from entering from the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1-1502aaa3 formed on the base body 1502 so that the ground ( It is isolated from GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the solid ground of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 through the foil stripping regions NR1, NR2, NR3. A route through which noise cannot escape is formed.

As described above, the effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are housed in a frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, whereby the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected, It is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the front-rear direction of the conductive elastic member for substrate 1508 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. The protruding portion having the shape of is in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and is crushed (in the fifth embodiment, the protruding portion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the front-rear direction of the conductive elastic member for a substrate 1508). When the conductive elastic member 1508 having a T-shape is deformed into an H-shape, the repulsive force is applied to the board. The conductive elastic member 1508 has a contact surface with a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, and a contact surface with a metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. , A state in which electrical connection is good, and a state in which electrical connection is good is maintained, a ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and a metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600, Of the liquid crystal output board 1530 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 (the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM). It is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1520) to be the same ground (GND). As a result, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the peripheral control board via the board conductive elastic member 1508). 1510 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.) and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 or the like housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. Since the same ground (GND) can be electrically connected to the line, an environment that is strong against noise (electromagnetic noise) is created in the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and It can be constructed for the various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530) and the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced.

The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment are molded and made of a transparent non-conductive resin, and are provided in the inner space of the cover body 1501. , The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like are mounted at predetermined positions, respectively, and then the conductive elastic member 1508 having a T shape is formed into a rectangular parallelepiped long in the vertical direction. When the base portion having a shape is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az formed in the base body 1502 and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the attachment portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, The metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 is provided with the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is the peripheral control substrate 1510 or the periphery). It is configured to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the data ROM substrate 1520. The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 as described above. Connected to each other. Therefore, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the effect display device 1600 is guided to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates (GND)) through the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 to be removed. A “route through” can be formed. As a result, it is not necessary to provide each of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic noise), and the cost of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

It should be noted that on the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530() (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530( ), the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. (Not electrically connected to the ground (GND) of FIG. 3) is provided on the surface (mounting surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As shown in FIG. 240, the cover body 1501 has a tip portion (hereinafter, simply referred to as “contact probe”) of a contact probe with respect to a test pad (not shown) provided on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. An opening 1501at is formed in which a "test lead" for checking the continuity of a so-called "tester" may be inserted and brought into contact therewith. By bringing this contact probe into contact with the test pad, the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall. The inspection company can easily perform the inspection work of whether or not it is connected.

[Partially exposed area of the ground of various boards of the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment]
Here, the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed will be described. A region ROP formed in a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is, as shown in FIGS. 241(a) and 241(b), the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A part of the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the copper foil surface 1530yp of 1530y is larger than the front surface shape of the base part having a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the up-down direction of the board conductive elastic member 1508. And the resist solution is placed on the copper foil surface 1530yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be exposed inside the rectangular rib portion 1502aw formed on the surface of the base flat plate 1502a. Is applied to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1530yr.

It is also possible to employ a method of using through holes without exposing the solid ground as the region ROP. For example, as shown in FIGS. 241(c) and 241(d), a region ROP in the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the solid land on the front surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A plurality of through-holes to be connected are arranged in the vertical direction and the left-right direction, respectively, and the copper is formed on the copper foil surface 1530yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so that lands are formed around the through-holes. A resist solution can be applied onto the foil surface 1530yp to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1530yr.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, when the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is rotated by this rotation. When the air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 by being blown out to the outside, a plurality of air flows in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Although the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the formed ventilation holes 1501az can be suppressed to a small value, when the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, this rotation causes the blade portion to move. Alternatively, the air may be sucked in and sent out toward the peripheral control IC 1510a. In other words, the air-cooling fan FAN may not be the main purpose of exchanging the air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but may simply cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Even in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 contacting the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1-1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. With respect to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee (like a spatula) is placed on the metal mask. The solder paste is spread from the holes formed in the metal mask by applying a solder paste), and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is put in a reflow oven to dry the solder paste by heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be poured into a solder bath for soldering. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a come into contact with each other. In order to prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity to be deteriorated, soldering should not partly rise on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Must be uniform.

For example, on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, a resist layer 1510xr formed by coating a part of the resist solution with a resist solution is formed, The peripheral control board 1510 is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, which is the surface of the copper foil, in a region having a predetermined shape. Specifically, as the “predetermined shape”, as shown in FIG. 221(a), the resist is applied to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are concentrically formed (a resist may be a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is concentrically formed). As shown in FIG. A rectangular shape having a predetermined width and a predetermined length is formed into a chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are arranged in an annular shape at the center of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. A shape formed in a lattice shape composed of lines in the horizontal direction and lines in the horizontal direction (the resist may have a predetermined width and a plurality of lines in the vertical direction separated from each other by a predetermined distance dimension may be formed. 221 may have a shape in which only lateral lines having a predetermined width are formed with a predetermined distance dimension therebetween.) As shown in FIG. 221(d), lines having a predetermined width are separated from each other by a predetermined distance. A shape in which a plurality of upward-sloping lines are formed in a slanted shape (a shape in which resist lines having a predetermined width are separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of downward-sloping lines are formed in a slanted shape) are not shown. An example is a collection of small circular shapes.

In this way, a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution to form a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape, and the periphery is formed. Since the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 are soldered to the areas having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is It is possible to suppress the amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 has a predetermined shape by being coated with a resist solution. Of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 as long as they can exert the effect of suppressing the amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil which is the surface thereof. As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into the solder bath for soldering, the solder is not applied to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to make the attachment uniform so that it does not rise in part. The solder thus soldered includes the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the land 1510rf1 to the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 is covered so as to be electrically connectable.

It should be noted that a predetermined pattern formed by such a resist is applied to the land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts on the seat surface (the seat surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. You may perform also with respect to the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1-1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the pan portion (head seat surface) of the metal pan head screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to. When the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath for soldering, a copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution. Then, the resist layers applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may have a uniform thickness.

Further, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the metal pan head screw is used. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by passing a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as a "wash washer") through the pan head screw.

In addition, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. And the metal back cover are electrically connected and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are separately molded. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded in the transparent synthetic resin box.

Incidentally, conventionally, substrates such as a main control board for controlling a game progress and a game profit, a sub-control board for controlling a performance to be executed as the game progresses, and an image control board for controlling display of an image display device and the like. A game machine in which is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, like the gaming machine described in this document, since the gaming machines are installed in multiple rows in the hall, facing the back, the influence of noise generated from the gaming machine facing the back is on the board on which the electronic component is mounted. There is a risk that the board may malfunction due to noise.

In addition, conventionally, a game machine including a ROM that stores image data such as a design, various background images, characters, and characters, a production control board on which a CPU that controls a display device that displays various images, and the like are mounted It has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, the game ball supplied from the island facility in the game hall to the gaming machine is charged with static electricity due to the game balls rubbing against each other when circulating between the island facility in the game hall and the gaming machine. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from.

Further, conventionally, there is a game machine including a ROM on which image data such as a design, various background images, characters, and characters is stored, and a substrate on which electronic components such as a CPU that controls a display device that displays various images are mounted. It has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, some of the boards provided in the gaming machine are housed in the board box, so that it is necessary to perform a work for housing the boards in the board box, and improvement in work efficiency has been demanded.

[How to attach a flexible flat cable]
Next, a flexible flat cable connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 242 to 244. FIG. 242 is a front perspective view of the flexible flat cable, and FIG. 243 is a view (a) showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector on the rear surface side of the effect display device. It is a figure (b) which shows the state electrically connected with the connector of an output board|substrate, It is a partially expanded view of the B section shown in (a), and the C section shown in (b). It is a figure (c) which shows the state electrically connected with each connector through a notch part, and FIG. 244 shows the state where the flexible flat cable is not electrically normally connected with the connector on the back surface side of a performance display device. It is a figure (a) shown, and a figure (b) showing the state where the flexible flat cable is not electrically normally connected with the connector of a liquid crystal output substrate. Note that in FIG. 243(c), the orientation of the connector CN10 shown in FIG. 243(b) is shown as being rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

[Flexible flat cable shape]
The flexible flat cable LFC electrically connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600. In addition, the plurality of flat conductors are covered with an insulator, which is one-third to five times the thickness (diameter) of the ordinary circular electric wiring as compared with the ordinary circular electric wiring. As shown in FIG. 242, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba are provided on the back surface side of the main body LFCa on the upper end side of the strip-like main body LFCa having a predetermined width and a predetermined width. In order to reinforce the electrode LFCba having a rectangular shape longer than the predetermined length of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba which are arranged to be bare and have a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body LFCa and which are exposed. While the reinforcing plate LFCca of the main body LFCca is formed, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb are arranged on the lower surface side of the main body LFCa on the back surface side of the main body LFCa to have a predetermined length and are exposed. The reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb having a rectangular shape longer than the predetermined length of the exposed plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb is formed on the front surface side of the LFCa.

A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa are connected to a connector 1600ca (FIG. 243) of a control substrate 1600c provided on a metallic back cover 1600b that covers the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. (See (a)), the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa are provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530x. Is electrically connected to the connector CN10 provided in the.

The flexible flat cable LFC has a bent portion LFCd that straightens upward to the right by being bent 90 degrees to the left at a portion having a predetermined distance dimension in the vertical direction from the upper end of the main body LFCa (the predetermined distance dimension in the vertical direction is It is the distance dimension from the upper end of the main body LFCa to the center point of the straight line rising to the right. Has a distance dimension 1.5 times larger than that of .), and a bent portion LFCe that is smoothly bent in the front direction and smoothly bent in the right direction is formed to be parallel in the front-rear direction (depth direction). ing.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable to the performance display device]
A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are, as shown in FIG. 243(a), a control substrate 1600c that covers the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. It is electrically connected to the connector 1600ca. The control board 1600c restores drawing data transmitted from the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 to display various images on the liquid crystal panel 1600a and various LEDs constituting the backlight of the liquid crystal panel 1600a ( Alternatively, various electronic components for adjusting the brightness of the cold cathode tube) are mounted.

Since the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not properly inserted into the connector 1600ca, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba and the plurality of flat conductors In some cases, a contact failure may occur between the electrode LFCba of the connector 1600ca and the electrode of the connector 1600ca corresponding to the electrode LFCba of the connector 1600ca. By being inserted obliquely with respect to the one electrode LFCba of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba, the electrode of the connector 1600ca corresponding to the one electrode LFCba, and another electrode adjacent to this electrode, There is a case in which the control board 1600c and various electronic components mounted on the control board 1600c are damaged due to short-circuiting due to the contact with each other.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally provided to the connector 1600ca on the back surface side of the metallic back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. As a mark for insertion, in the left vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, in the left outside of the vicinity corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid line guide line G1L extending linearly in the up-down direction and the right vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid line guide line G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction is engraved on the outer right side). The guide lines G1L and G1R are stamped on the metal back cover 1600b by a press machine in a press working process.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC on the back surface side of the metallic back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600 are normally connected to the connector 1600ca. After being inserted, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC may be detached from the connector 1600ca, or a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In order to prevent the short circuit due to the contact between the flat conductor electrode LFCba and the electrode of the connector 1600ca corresponding to each electrode LFCba, the flexible flat cable LFC is made of a metal backing. As a region to which the fixed seal SFC having a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction and fixed to the back surface side of the lid 1600b is attached, a hook (") is provided at a position slightly outward from positions corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal SFC. Each of the four bracket-shaped guide lines G2, G2, G2, G2 is stamped on the metal back cover 1600b by a press machine in the process of pressing. Since the flexible flat cable LFC is fixed to the back surface side of the metal back cover 1600b by the fixed seal SFC, the posture of the flexible flat cable LFC can be fixed.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable to the LCD output board]
A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 as shown in FIG. 243(b). It is electrically connected. In addition to the connector CN10, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is also mounted with the above-mentioned connectors CN8 and CN9, and a special connector SCN4 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510. The special connector SCN4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into and electrically connected to the special connector SCN2 of the peripheral control board 1510 described above, thereby displaying the effect display device from the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. Drawing data of an image to be drawn on the device is input to the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the special connector SCN2 from the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the flexible flat cable is supplied from the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is input to the control board 1600c through the LFC and the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600.

Since the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not properly inserted into the connector CN10, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb and the plurality of flat conductors In some cases, a contact failure may occur between the electrode of the connector CN10 and the electrode of the connector CN10 corresponding to the electrode CN of the connector CN10. By being inserted obliquely with respect to one electrode LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb, the electrode of the connector CN10 corresponding to the electrode LFCbb of the one and the other electrode adjacent to this electrode, There is a case in which the liquid crystal output board 1530 and various electronic components mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 electrically connected to the liquid crystal output board 1530 are damaged by making contact with each other.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted into the connector CN10 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. So that it serves as a mark for the left and right directions above and below the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, above and below the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). And a position near the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ) Is printed by silk printing with a long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction.

In this embodiment, no through hole is formed in the region where the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC is arranged. This is because even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed by rubbing the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC against the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the flat conductor of the exposed flexible flat cable LFC is exposed. This is to prevent the mold conductor from being short-circuited due to the through hole.

[Relationship between the flexible flat cable reinforcing plate and the connector]
When inserting the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC into the connector 1600ca of the control substrate 1600c that covers the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600, While the electrode LFCba of the mold conductor faces the electrode of the connector 1600ca and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable LFC, the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is on the front side of the flexible flat cable LFC. Become. As a result, the electrodes LFCba of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC normally cover up to the back of the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. In the inserted state, as shown in FIG. 243(c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca are arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap with each other in the front-rear direction. In addition, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC must be inserted into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. That is, when the pushing amount is insufficient, the peripheral portion of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is exposed from the connector 1600ca.

When the flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are inserted into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the flat conductor is used. The electrode LFCbb of the flexible flat cable LFC faces the electrode of the connector CN10 and is the back side of the flexible flat cable LFC, while the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is the front side of the flexible flat cable LFC. Thus, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Then, as shown in FIG. 243(c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10 are arranged in a positional relationship in which they coincide with each other in the front-rear direction and overlap with each other. It should be noted that the electrodes LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not inserted into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, that is, the pushing amount. Is insufficient, the peripheral portion of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is exposed from the connector CN10.

[When the flexible flat cable is not properly connected]
A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not normally inserted into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. 244(a), the left end of the main body LFCa cannot be visually recognized by covering the guide line G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction, and the right end of the main body LFCa is The guide plate G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction is inclined, and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is inclined with respect to the lower end side of the connector 1600ba. A part of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the connector is exposed from the connector 1600ba. In this way, the guide lines G1L and G1R and the reinforcing plate LFCca cause the electrodes LFCba of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC to be located on the upper surface of the rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. It is possible to easily visually judge whether or not the control board 1600c to be covered is normally inserted all the way into the connector 1600ca. Thereby, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, the worker attaches the electrodes LFCba of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC to the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. When the electrode LFCba is inserted into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the connector 1600ca, it can be easily visually determined whether or not the electrode LFCba is normally inserted into the connector 1600ca. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the efficiency of the confirmation work.

Further, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not normally inserted into the connector CN10 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and are obliquely inserted. 244(b), the upper end side of the main body LFCa cannot be seen by covering the guide line G3U extending linearly in the left/right direction, and the lower end side of the main body LFCa is in the left/right direction. The guide line G3L extending linearly with respect to the left side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb (the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb in FIG. 243(c)) is the left end of the connector CN10. The side (the lower side of the connector CN10 in FIG. 243(c)) is inclined, and a part of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is exposed from the connector CN10. As described above, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 by the guide lines G3U and G3L and the reinforcing plate LFCcb. It is possible to easily visually determine whether or not the connector CN10 provided therein is normally inserted all the way to the back. Thereby, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, the worker attaches the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is possible to easily visually determine whether or not the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted all the way into the connector CN10 when it is inserted into the connector CN10 provided in. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the efficiency of the confirmation work.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, the left and right direction is set to the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid guide line G3U extending linearly to the lower part of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the lower end side of the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC; ), a long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction was printed by silk printing, but the rectangular area having the guide line G3U on the upper side and the guide line G3L on the lower side is solid-printed by silk printing. May be. Even with such a configuration, the upper side of the solid-filled rectangular area can function as the guideline G3U, and the lower side of the solid-filled rectangular area can function as the guideline G3L. Furthermore, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed by rubbing the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC with the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed. 1530x is prevented from being peeled off due to peeling off of the silk print in the rectangular area solidly coated, and the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 covered with the resist is not exposed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the exposed flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC from being short-circuited.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the left and right directions are provided in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, in the upper and lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). And a position near the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), a long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction was printed by silk-screen printing, but a rectangular region having the guide line G3U as the upper side and the guide line G3L as the lower side and the liquid crystal corresponding to the region. A foil removal area may be formed on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the output board 1530. Even with this configuration, the upper side of the foil-cut rectangular area can function as the guideline G3U, and the lower side of the foil-cut rectangular area can function as the guideline G3L. Furthermore, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed by rubbing the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC with the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Even if the resist of 1530x is peeled off, the copper foil surface does not exist in the first place, that is, only the non-conductive base material of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, and thus the exposed flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is short-circuited. Can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the left and right directions are provided in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, in the upper and lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). And a position near the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), a long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction was printed by silk printing, but a copper foil in a part of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is printed. The guide lines G3U and G3L may be formed by removing the guide line. Alternatively, when the resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the guide line may be formed by not applying a part of the area with the resist solution. G3U and G3L may be formed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted into the connector CN10 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. After that, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are disengaged from the connector CN10, and the plurality of flat conductor electrodes formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are formed. In order to prevent a short circuit due to the electrode LFCbb of the mold conductor and the electrode of the connector CN10 corresponding to each electrode LFCbb obliquely contacting with another electrode adjacent to each other, the flexible flat cable LFC is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A fixed seal having a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction may be attached to the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x. In this case, on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, as a region to which the fixed seal is attached, at a position slightly apart from the positions corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal toward the outside, for example, a bracket ("). Shape (may be a figure such as a line or a symbol) may be formed by being printed by silk printing respectively, or may be formed in a partial area on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A hook-shaped (“)-shaped (a line, symbol, or other figure may be used) guideline may be formed by removing the copper foil, or the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 may be resisted. When the liquid is applied, a part of the area may not be applied with the resist liquid to form a guide in a bracket (“” shape (a line, a symbol, or the like may be used). The flexible flat cable LFC is a fixed seal. By being fixed to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the posture of the flexible flat cable LFC can be fixed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected using the flexible flat cable LFC. However, in the case where a substrate is provided on a movable body that is driven by electric drive, a flexible flat cable is used as electrical wiring for electrically connecting the substrate and the drive substrate. Good. Since the load is applied to the movable body by the electric wiring accompanying the operation of the movable body, this load may be too large to be ignored. Therefore, by using a flexible flat cable instead of wiring or a harness as the electric wiring, the load on the movable body due to the operation of the movable body due to the operation of the movable body is suppressed, and the overload of the electric drive source is prevented. Can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the left and right directions are provided in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, in the upper and lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). And a position near the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), a long solid line guide line G3L that linearly extends in the left-right direction is printed by silk printing, so that in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, the worker attaches to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. When the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb to be formed are inserted into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, it is visually checked whether or not the electrodes LFCbb are normally inserted into the connector CN10. Although it could be easily determined by the above, for example, a substrate near the standby position (original position) of the movable body is used as an indication of the standby position (original position) of the movable body that is operated by the drive of electric drive. A graphic such as a line or a symbol indicating the standby position (home position) of the movable body may be printed by silk printing. In this way, when a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall performs inspection work on the pachinko machine, it can be used as a mark when manually moving the movable body to the standby position (home position) without turning on the power of the pachinko machine. Can be Even when the pachinko machine is powered on, it can be used to determine whether or not the movable body is displaced from the standby position (home position), so it can be used to check for defects in the movable body. You can also

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a vertical direction is provided in the left vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, in the vicinity of the left outer side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid line G1L extending linearly to the right side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC right outside ), a long solid line guide line G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction is formed on the back surface side of the metallic back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, and the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid line guide line G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction in the upper vicinity (that is, in the upper and lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC), and the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction in the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to (that is, the lower outer side in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). Although it is formed, it may be replaced with a solid line by a one-dot chain line, a two-dot chain line, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a vertical direction is provided in the left vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, in the left outside of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid line G1L extending linearly to the right side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC right outside ), a long solid line guide line G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction is formed on the back surface side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, and corresponds to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid line guide line G1L that extends linearly in the vertical direction near the right side of the position (that is, the inside right side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) and the right end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid line guide line G1R extending linearly in the up-down direction near the left side of the position corresponding to the side (that is, the left inside of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC), and the production display device 1600. It may be formed on the back surface side of the metal back cover 1600b. In this case, the solid line may be replaced by a one-dot chain line, a two-dot chain line, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the left and right directions are provided in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, in the upper and lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid guide line G3U extending linearly to the lower part of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the lower end side of the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC; ) And a long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction are formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, but the vicinity of the lower part of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the flexible flat A long solid line guide line G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the cable LFC) and an upper vicinity of a position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC ( That is, a long solid line guide line G3L linearly extending in the left-right direction may be formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 in the upper and lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In this case, the solid line may be replaced by a one-dot chain line, a two-dot chain line, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a vertical direction is provided in the left vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, in the vicinity of the left outer side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid line G1L extending linearly to the right side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC right outside ), a long solid line guide line G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction is formed on the back surface side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, and corresponds to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid line guide line G1L linearly extending in the vertical direction at a position, and a long solid line guide line G1R linearly extending in the vertical direction at a position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. It may be formed on the back surface side of the metal back cover 1600b. That is, the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G1L are in the positional relationship of overlapping in the front-rear direction, and the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G1R match in the front-rear direction. And the positional relationship will overlap. In this case, the solid line may be replaced by a one-dot chain line, a two-dot chain line, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the left and right directions are provided in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, in the upper and lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid guide line G3U extending linearly to the lower part of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the lower end side of the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC; ), a long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, but extends linearly in the left-right direction at a position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid line guide line G3U and a long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction may be formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 at a position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In other words, the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G3U are aligned in the front-rear direction and overlap with each other, and the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G3L match the front-rear direction. And the positional relationship will overlap. In this case, the solid line may be replaced by a one-dot chain line, a two-dot chain line, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC cover the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600, and the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c. 243(c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca are aligned in the front-rear direction and overlap with each other. As a result, the distance dimension between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca was the same as the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCba was normally inserted to the inside of the connector 1600ca. Further, in a state where the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted to the depth of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As shown in FIG. 243(c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10 are arranged in a positional relationship such that they coincide with each other in the front-rear direction and overlap each other, so that the upper end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb. The distance between the lower end and the lower end side was the same as the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCbb was normally inserted into the connector CN10.

As described above, in the above-described embodiment, the distance dimension between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is the same as the length (insertion length) when the electrode LFCba is normally inserted into the connector 1600ca. , When the distance dimension between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is longer than the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca, in other words, the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In the state where the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the control board 1600c that covers the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600 are normally inserted to the back of the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c, When the lower end side and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca do not match in the front-rear direction and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is arranged in a positional relationship in which the lower end side is parallel and separated from the lower end side of the connector 1600ca, the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is arranged. Whether or not the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the back of the connector 1600ca due to the distance between the side and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca is determined by the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca. It becomes difficult to make a distinction by using it. Similarly, the distance dimension between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb is the same as the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted into the connector CN10, but the upper end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb is the same. When the distance between the lower end side and the lower end side is longer than the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted into the connector CN10, in other words, the electrode LFCbb is formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In a state where the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb are normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10, Does not match in the front-rear direction, and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb is arranged in a positional relationship in which it is spaced parallel to the lower end side of the connector CN10, the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10, Is separated from each other, it becomes difficult to determine whether or not the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted into the back of the connector CN10 by using the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10. ..

Therefore, in such a case, as a guideline indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca in a state where the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca, the guide line is on the extension line of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca. , A solid line extending leftward linearly in the left vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, in the vicinity of the left outer side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). Instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line, a two-dot chain line, or an arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca may be used. The guideline G1L' (this guideline G1L' is described above. It may intersect with the guideline G1L, or may have an L-shape integrally formed with the above-mentioned guideline G1L.) and the right vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, flexible). A solid line (right-dotted line or double-dotted line instead of the solid line) extending linearly in the right direction on the right outer side in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flat cable LFC, or the reinforcing plate LFCca The guideline G1R' (may be an arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side) (this guideline G1R' may intersect with the above-mentioned guideline G1R, or may be an L-shape formed integrally with the above-mentioned guideline G1R). It is also possible that) is engraved on the back surface side of the metallic back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600.

Further, as a guideline indicating the position of the lower end side of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb when the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10, the flexible flat cable is on the extension line of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb. A solid line (instead of the solid line) extending linearly upward in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the LFC (that is, in the upper and lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). , The one-dot chain line, the two-dot chain line, or the arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb may be used.) The guideline G3U′ (this guideline G3U′ intersects with the above-mentioned guideline G3U). It may be L-shaped integrally formed with the above-mentioned guideline G3U, or a rectangular shape having a vertical distance dimension of the guideline G3U′ and a horizontal distance dimension of the above-mentioned guideline G3U ( The inside of the flexible flat cable LFC may be solid-printed.) and a position near a lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A solid line extending downward in a straight line in the vicinity of the lower outer side of the position corresponding to the lower end side (instead of the solid line, may be a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line, and indicates the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb). The guideline G3L' (may be an arrow line) (this guideline G3L' may intersect with the above-mentioned guideline G3L, or may be an L-shape formed integrally with the above-mentioned guideline G3L. A rectangular shape having the vertical distance dimension of the guideline G3L′ and the horizontal distance dimension of the guideline G3L described above (the inside may be solidly printed by silk printing) may be provided. The surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is preferably printed by silk printing.

Instead of silk printing, the guide lines G3U′ and G3L′ can be obtained by removing a part of the copper foil on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 as in the above-described modification. Alternatively, when the resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, guide lines G3U′ and G3L′ are formed by not applying the resist solution to a part of the area. May be. Further, as in the above-described modified example, the copper foil in a part of the area of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is removed, and the vertical distance dimension of the guideline G3L′ and the guideline G3L described above. The guide line G3U, G3L and the guide line G3U', G3L' are respectively formed by forming a rectangular shape having a distance dimension in the left-right direction (the copper foil inside the rectangular shape may be removed). May be.

[Connector connection method]
Next, connect to a connector provided on a relay board that relays various wirings to the peripheral control board 1510, a relay board that relays various wirings to the main control board 1310, and a relay board that relays various wirings to the payout control board 633. Wiring and harness connectors to be described will be described with reference to FIG. 245. FIG. 245 is a diagram (a) showing an arrangement of connectors on the relay board, and a diagram (b) showing a state where wiring and harness connectors are normally connected to the connectors on the relay board. It is a figure (c) which shows the state where the connector of wiring and a harness is not normally connected with respect to.

By the way, if the wiring or harness connector is not properly inserted into the relay board connector, contact failure may occur between the connector electrodes. When inserted into the connector, the adjacent electrodes of the connector come into contact with each other to cause a short circuit, which may damage various electronic components mounted on the relay board or various control boards electrically connected to the relay board.

In the present embodiment, on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD, as shown in FIG. 245(a), the connector SCK on the socket side into which the connector PLG on the plug side of the wiring or the harness KDCBL is inserted is arranged. There is. The socket-side connector SCK is of a right angle type (also referred to as “side type”), and has a box shape in which an opening SCKb is formed on a lower side surface SCKaa of a main body SCKa having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction. Is formed in. The plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG is inserted into the opening SCKb. The lower side surface SCKaa in which the opening of the socket-side connector SCK is formed is arranged on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD with a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. The plug-side connector PLG has a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction and has a size smaller than the opening SCKb with respect to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb having the same distance dimension as the left-right direction of the main body SCKa. A plug portion PLGa having a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction is integrally formed. As described above, the lower side surface SCKaa in which the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK is formed has the predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD and is the surface (mounting surface) of the relay board KD. Although arranged in KDx, in the present embodiment, the predetermined distance dimension dw1 is the distance dimension (thickness) dcw in the vertical direction of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side.

When the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the entire upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa is the socket-side connector. The lower side surface SCKaa where the opening SCKb of the SCK is formed is brought into contact with the lower side surface SCKaa to be in surface contact. In this state, as shown in FIG. 245(b), a surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa of the plug side connector PLG (that is, the main body of the plug side connector PLG). The lower side surface PLGbb of PLGb and the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap with each other in the front-rear direction.

In this way, the socket-side connector SCK is arranged with a vertical distance dimension (thickness) dcw of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG as the predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. Therefore, in the state where the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the main body integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG. A surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of PLGb (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG) and the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are in the front-back direction. Will be placed in an overlapping positional relationship. Thereby, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, when the worker normally inserts the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG to the back of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the operator's finger, A surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa of the plug side connector PLG (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug side connector PLG) and the lower end side of the relay board KD. KDeg (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) and the tactile sense of the hand that they are arranged on the same plane by touching the plug section PLGa of the plug side connector PLG with the opening section of the socket side connector SCK. It is possible to easily determine whether or not the SCKb is properly inserted all the way to the inside, and the staff such as the clerk in the game hall can also check the pachinko machine on the same plane as above. It is possible to easily determine whether or not the plug part PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is normally inserted into the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side by the tactile sensation of being arranged. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the efficiency of the confirmation work.

Note that when the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is not inserted properly into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK but is obliquely inserted, as shown in FIG. 245(c), Of the connector PLG, the surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG) is the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, , And the layout is such that it has a protrusion amount dSP from the relay substrate KD). As a result, a worker in the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer or a staff member such as a game hall clerk who inspects the pachinko machine can operate the main body PLGb of the plug side connector PLG at the lower end of the relay board KD by the protrusion amount dSP. By protruding from the side KDeg, the surface of the operator or the staff of the game hall clerk or the like, which is opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side (that is, , The lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side and the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are touched by a tactile sense of a hand. , It is possible to easily determine that the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is not normally inserted into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK.

[Modification]
In the embodiment described above, the socket-side connector SCK has a vertical distance dimension (thickness) dcw of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG as the predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. And the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK and is integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG. The surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) and the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are front and rear. The parts are arranged so as to overlap each other in conformity with the direction, but the component placement line indicating the component position of the socket side connector SCK is printed by silk printing with a solid line larger than the outer shape of the socket side connector SCK. In addition, the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG in a state where the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK. The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) and the lower side of the component arrangement line indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side are arranged so as to match. May be done. FIG. 246 is a modified example of FIG. 245 and is a diagram (a) showing the arrangement of the connectors on the relay board and the component placement lines, and the wiring and harness connectors are normally connected to the connectors on the relay board. It is a figure (b) which shows a state, and is a figure (c) which shows the state in which the connector of wiring or a harness is not normally connected with respect to the connector of a relay board.

For example, on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD, as shown in FIG. 246(a), the connector SCK on the socket side into which the connector PLG on the plug side of the wiring or harness KDCBL is inserted is arranged. The socket-side connector SCK is formed in a box shape in which an opening SCKb is formed on a lower side surface SCKaa of a main body SCKa having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction. The plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG is inserted into the opening SCKb. The lower side surface SCKaa in which the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK is formed has a first distance dimension dw2 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (for example, the socket-side connector SCK shown in FIG. 245(a) is the relay board). The surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD having a distance dimension from the lower end side KDeg of the KD which is about twice the distance dimension having a predetermined distance dimension dw1 and has at least 5 mm. It is located in.

The reason why the lower side surface SCKaa in which the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK is formed is separated from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD by the first distance dimension dw2 is simply explained. It is necessary to form a so-called "discard board (non-electronic component mountable range)" when mounting components or when pouring the board into the solder bath, and within 3 mm to 5 mm from each edge of the board toward the inside. Electronic components cannot be mounted over the entire range (the range from each edge of the board to its periphery). When mounting electronic parts without forming this discard plate (that is, when mounting electronic parts in the range from each edge of the board to its periphery), grip jigs for fixing the board and board warp prevention Although it is necessary to use a jig, in this case as well, the area of the substrate sandwiched by the gripping jig and the substrate warp prevention jig is about 5 mm inward from the edge of the substrate, and electronic components cannot be arranged. Therefore, in this embodiment, as the first distance dimension dw2 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD, the socket side connector SCK shown in FIG. 245(a) has a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. The distance is about twice as large as the distance, and has at least 5 mm. As a result, when the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the main body PLGb of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is formed. Since the surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) is arranged above the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD, it is arranged inside the relay board KD. Will be done.

Around the socket-side connector SCK, a rectangular component placement line DSLK indicating the component position of the socket-side connector SCK is provided, and at least a lower side surface SCKaa in which an opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK is formed, and a socket The lower side DSLKeg of the component arrangement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the side and the second distance dimension dw3 are printed on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD by silk printing. The plug-side connector PLG has a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction and has a size smaller than the opening SCKb with respect to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb having the same distance dimension as the left-right direction of the main body SCKa. A plug portion PLGa having a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction is integrally formed. Around the socket-side connector SCK, as described above, the rectangular component placement line DSLK indicating the component position of the socket-side connector SCK and at least the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK are formed. The lower side surface SCKaa and the lower side DSLKeg of the component arrangement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the socket side are printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD with the second distance dimension dw3. In the present embodiment, as the second distance dimension dw3, the distance dimension at which the socket-side connector SCK shown in FIG. 245(a) is arranged with a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. The distance dimension is the same (that is, the distance dimension (thickness) dcw in the vertical direction of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side).

When the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the entire upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa is the socket-side connector. The lower side surface SCKaa of the opening portion SCKb of the SCK comes into contact with the surface side contact. In this state, as shown in FIG. 246(b), a surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa of the plug side connector PLG (that is, the main body of the plug side connector PLG). The lower surface PLGbb) of PLGb and the lower side DSLKeg of the component arrangement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the socket side are arranged so as to match each other. As a result, a worker in the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall who performs the inspection work of the pachinko machine inserts the plug portion PLGa of the plug side connector PLG into the opening SCKb of the socket side connector SCK. It is possible to easily visually judge whether or not the insertion has been normally made all the way. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the efficiency of the confirmation work.

When the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is not inserted properly into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK but is inserted obliquely, as shown in FIG. 246(c), Of the connector PLG, the surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug part PLGa (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug side connector PLG) is the component arrangement line of the socket side connector SCK. The arrangement is such that there is a protrusion amount dSP from the lower side of the DSLK and the protrusion. As a result, a worker in the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer or a clerk such as a game hall clerk who performs the inspection work of the pachinko machine can insert the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side into the component arrangement line DSLK by the protrusion amount dSP. By protruding from the lower side DSLKeg, it is possible to easily visually determine that the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is not normally inserted into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK.

By the way, conventionally, various types such as a main control board for controlling a game progress and a game profit, a sub-control board for controlling a performance to be executed as the game progresses, an image control board for controlling display of an image display device, etc. A game machine in which a board is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2). Some connectors provided on the board have wiring inserted and removed, and some have connectors that have one end electrically connected to the wiring.Therefore, for example, the operator of the game machine It was necessary to make an electrical check on the connector during the connection work, and the check work took time.

[Wiring groove]
In the present embodiment, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is viewed from the front side, the left side and the back surface of the game board 5 are separated by a predetermined distance and paid out as described above. The back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the base unit 550 is arranged. Then, a ball guiding unit 570 attached to the rear surface of the backboard left portion 551e is arranged on the upper left rear surface of the game board 5, and is attached to the rear surface of the left backboard portion 551e on the left rear surface center side of the game board 5. The payout device 580 is arranged, and the upper tank ball path unit 600 attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e is arranged below the left rear surface of the game board 5.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the back board left portion 551e is arranged at a predetermined distance from the back of the left back surface of the game board 5, so that the left back surface of the game board 5 and the front surface of the back board left portion 551e are provided. A space is formed. In this space, as shown in FIG. 110 and FIG. 113, a plurality of protective cover bodies 1601 molded by a transparent resin having non-conductivity that covers the display area of the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 is provided. The formed L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a is arranged along the up-down direction of the protective cover body 1601, and various wirings are locked by the L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a.

The game ball B is ground in the island facility of the game hall, rubs against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1, and is charged and electrostatically discharged to emit electromagnetic noise. Therefore, static electricity easily accumulates in the area where the ball tank 552 capable of accumulating the game balls B, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 and the surrounding area. ..

That is, since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper tank ball path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the backboard left portion 551e, the front surface of the backboard left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5 are attached. The space formed (hereinafter, referred to as "wiring routing space") is in an environment susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

In addition, various electric wires that are routed to the wiring routing space include, for example, wiring that transmits a control signal and wiring that supplies various power sources, and a plurality of various electrical wires are mixed in the wiring routing space. The wiring that transmits the control signal is vulnerable to noise and troubles due to electromagnetic noise (for example, normal data is changed to other data and garbled, or it is output even though it is a signal that was not originally output) Signals, etc.) are generated, and are easily affected by electromagnetic noise, whereas wirings for supplying various power sources are strong against noise and less susceptible to electromagnetic noise.

Then, among the various wirings routed in the wiring routing space, it is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise that can avoid troubles due to electromagnetic noise for the wiring that transmits control signals that are easily affected by electromagnetic noise. On the other hand, it is not necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise in the wiring that supplies various power sources that are not easily affected by electromagnetic noise.

Therefore, a configuration in which a wiring groove for routing various wirings is provided on the left rear surface of the game board 5 (hereinafter, referred to as “wiring groove according to first to second embodiments”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 to 252. To do. FIG. 247 is a partial perspective view of the game board from the rear for explaining the area for attaching the wiring groove (a), and a view showing a state in which the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is mounted on the back surface side of the game board (b). 248 is a continuation of FIG. 247 and is a diagram (c) showing a state in which the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back surface side of the game board, and FIG. 249 relates to the first embodiment. FIG. 250 is a perspective view showing a state of various wirings when the wiring board is mounted on the back surface side of the game board and the gaming board is viewed from the back, and FIG. 250 shows the wiring groove according to the first embodiment. FIG. 251 is a perspective view showing a state of various wirings when viewed from the front of the game board in a state where the wiring groove is attached to the back surface side of the game board according to the second embodiment. FIG. 252 is a perspective view showing a state of various wirings when the game board is viewed from the rear in a state where FIG. 252 shows a state in which the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back surface side of the game board. It is a perspective view showing a state of various wiring when the game board is viewed from the front. Note that, in FIGS. 247(b) and 248(c), only the flexible flat cable is shown as the wiring routed to the wiring grooves for the first and second electromagnetic wave noise countermeasures, and other various wirings are omitted for the sake of clarity of the drawing. .. Also, in FIGS. 249 to 252, the game board is omitted for ease of viewing the drawings.

[Area to install wiring groove]
In the embodiment described above, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is viewed from the front side, the left side of the backboard disposed apart from the rear surface of the left side of the game board 5 by a predetermined distance. By the portion 551e, a space is formed between the left rear surface of the game board 5 and the front surface of the backboard left portion 551e. In this space, various wirings which are locked to the L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a formed on the protective cover body 1601 which covers various wirings except the display area of the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 are protected. It is arranged along the vertical direction of 1601. In the wiring groove according to the first and second embodiments, as shown in FIG. 247(a), a mounting boss hole is attached to the protective cover body 1601 instead of the L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a formed on the protective cover body 1601. Two 1601d are formed on the upper side and two on the lower side.

[Wiring Groove According to First Embodiment]
As shown in FIGS. 247(b), 249, and 250, the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is a metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity, and is a thin metal flat plate (plate thickness 2 The left side and the right side of (0. L-shaped attachment pieces 1605b are formed on the upper side and the lower side by bending by press working. L-shaped attachment pieces 1605b are formed by pressing on the upper side and the lower side of the left side wall of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section. And L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed by pressing on the upper side and the lower side of the right side wall of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section. Notches 1605c are formed in the corresponding portions. In addition, a notch hole 1605bb is formed by pressing at the tip of the mounting surface 1605ba of the L-shaped mounting piece 1605b.

The metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to a board ground (GND) via a wire (not shown), and is the same ground (GND) as the ground (board ground (GND)) of each board provided in the game board 5. ). This prevents the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 from being electrically floating with respect to various substrates provided in the game board 5. In other words, the electrically floating metal may function as an antenna for picking up noise and serve as a noise source. Therefore, the electrically floating metal is not formed on various boards provided in the game board 5. ..

The cutout holes 1605bb formed in the mounting surfaces 1605ba of the four L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b in the metal wiring groove 1605 are arranged so as to correspond to the four mounting boss holes 1601d formed in the protective cover body 1601. After inserting the mounting boss holes 1601d into the notch holes 1605bb, respectively (the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) of the mounting boss holes 1601d is the same as or smaller than the plate thickness dimension of the notch hole 1605bb). In the state where a metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed in from the notch hole 1605bb toward the mounting boss hole 1601d and fixed, the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 are formed. An outer space of the groove is formed between the outer surface 1605d of the bottom portion. Further, in a state in which the game board 5 to which the metal wiring groove 1605 is fixed is attached to the main body frame 4, the opening side of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605 is the above-mentioned payout of the payout base unit 550. By being blocked by the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the base 551, a groove inner space is formed in the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605.

In other words, the space between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the front surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550 is defined by the metal wiring groove 1605 by the back surface of the protection cover body 1601 and the metal wiring groove 1605. So that an outer space between the groove and the front surface of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section and an inner space in the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605 can be formed. Is becoming That is, the space outside the groove formed between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the front surface of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 is a space that does not face the source of the electromagnetic noise. On the other hand, in the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605, the space inside the groove is a space facing the source of the electromagnetic noise. The height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) H1 of the groove outer space is larger than the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) H2 of the groove inner space.

Since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the left back plate 551e, they are formed on the front surface of the left back board 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5. The space for wiring, that is, the wiring routing space, is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, but since the metal wiring groove 1605 has conductivity, electromagnetic wave noise is generated from the space inside the groove. The metal wiring groove 1605 can function as a shield member that can prevent entry into the outer space.

Thus, by arranging the wiring for transmitting the control signal, which is easily influenced by the electromagnetic noise, in the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, it is possible to avoid the trouble caused by the electromagnetic noise and to reduce the influence of the electromagnetic noise. Wirings for supplying various power sources that are difficult to receive can be routed to the space inside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605.

For example, in addition to the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a sub effect display device (not shown) capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is attached to the lower side of the game board 5. In this case, the flexible flat cable 1606 (FFC (Flexible Flat Cable), which is an abbreviation of FFC (Flexible Flat Cable) from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The flexible flat cable transmits drawing data (control signal) to a sub effect display device (not shown). The flat conductors are arranged in parallel and the flat conductors are covered with an insulator.)) is three-dimensionally bent by repeating mountain folds and valley folds multiple times. Is an important wiring that transmits drawing data (control signal) to a sub effect display device (not shown) and is displayed on the sub effect display device (not shown) when influenced by electromagnetic noise. Is laid out in the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in order to prevent the trouble that the image is disturbed or an image such as a sandstorm is generated. Further, various wirings for transmitting various control signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, a twisted pair cable for transmitting control signals by the plus side wiring and the minus side wiring, and the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500. The various wirings to which the detection signals from the various sensors input to the 1510 are transmitted are conductors (single wire material or stranded wire material) whose periphery is covered with an insulating material. The regular data output by the control board 1510 is changed to other data and is garbled to be received (input) at the output destination, or output as a signal that is output even though it is not originally output. In order to prevent troubles such as reception (input) or detection signals from various sensors being accurately received (input) to the peripheral control board 1510, the wiring is drawn to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605. To be turned. Twisted pair cables and various wires routed in the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 are routed upward or downward along the space outside the groove.

On the other hand, the wiring that supplies various power sources (including ground (GND)) such as +24V, +12V, and +5V created by the power source board 630 described above is a conductor (single wire or stranded wire). Since the periphery of is covered with an insulating material and the voltage of various power supplies (which may include ground (GND)) is in a stable state, electromagnetic noise is higher than that of the control signal. Even if it is affected by, the fluctuation of the voltage due to this effect is extremely weak and is hardly affected by the electromagnetic noise, so that it can be routed to the groove inner space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605.

Various power supplies from the power supply board 630 are connected to the above-mentioned main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) through the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 by various power supply lines to be electrically connected to the game board. 5 to the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity so that various wirings for supplying various powers from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 are not arranged close to the flexible flat cable 1606. Formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 through the notches 1605c formed on the lower side of the right side wall and the left side wall of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 while being drawn around. The metal wiring groove 1605 is routed upwards along the groove internal space and is routed upward from the upper end of the metal wiring groove 1605 to various substrates provided on the game board 5.

As described above, the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 allows the space through which the wiring is routed (the space around which the wiring is routed), the space outside the channel for routing the wiring that transmits the control signal susceptible to electromagnetic noise, and the electromagnetic noise. Since it can be configured as a two-story structure that is divided into a grooved space for routing wirings for supplying various power sources that are not easily affected, the front surface of the left back plate 551e and the game board 5 described above can be configured. It is possible to improve noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B in the space formed on the left side back surface (wiring routing space).

Here, the flexible flat cable 1606 will be described. In the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data (control signal) are arranged in parallel to a sub effect display device (not shown), and these flat conductors are covered with an insulator. The thickness of the peripheral control unit 1500 is about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal circular electric wiring as compared with the normal circular electric wiring. The output board 1530 is a three-dimensionally bent and folded mountain-fold and valley-fold multiple times toward a sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5, and has a predetermined width. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606ba are arranged in a bare manner on the back surface side of the main body 1606a on the left side of the strip-shaped main body 1606a that is long in the direction, and a predetermined length is provided on the front surface side of the main body 1606a. A reinforcing plate 1606ca is formed to reinforce the electrode 1606ba having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the plurality of exposed flat conductor electrodes 1606ba having a thickness, while the lower end of the main body 1606a is formed. On the side, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606bb having a predetermined length are arranged on the back surface side of the main body 1606a to be exposed, and a plurality of flat flat electrodes having a predetermined thickness are exposed on the front surface side of the main body 1606a. A reinforcing plate 1606cb is formed to reinforce the electrode 1606bb having a rectangular shape longer than the predetermined length of the conductor electrode 1606bb.

The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1606a are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 1606a are metal backs (not shown) that cover an upper surface of the back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. It is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the lid.

A capacitor called a decoupling capacitor such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a power supply bypass capacitor (not shown) is provided between the power source line and the substrate ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to which the flexible flat cable 1606 is electrically connected. Is mounted, and the resistance to electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved by lowering the power supply impedance. In addition, a power line and a board ground (GND) in a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers an upper surface of a back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) to which a flexible flat cable 1606 is electrically connected. Capacitors called decaps such as decoupling capacitors (not shown) and power supply bypass capacitors (not shown) are mounted between the two, and by lowering the power source impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is reduced. It is improving the sex.

The flexible flat cable 1606 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 described above. The protective cover body 1601 which covers except the display area and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 are drawn to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity and guided downward along the space outside the groove. Then, as it is, it is drawn into the board holder 1200 attached to the back surface of the game board 5 and electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover that covers the upper surface of the back surface of the liquid crystal panel in the sub effect display device (not shown). To be done.

As described above, the flexible flat cable 1606 electrically connected to the connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is, as described above, the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display of the game board 5. The protective cover body 1601 that covers the device 1600 excluding the display region is provided between the back surface and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 so as to be drawn to the space outside the groove formed by the conductive metal wiring groove 1605. Further, in the effect display device 1600, as described above, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is covered with the metal back cover. Thereby, the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 is between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 which covers the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 except the display area. It is possible to function as a shield member that can prevent electromagnetic wave noise that invades toward the flexible flat cable 1606 in the area where it passes.

[Modification]
The metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to the board ground (GND) through a wire (not shown), and is the same ground as the board grounds (board ground (GND)) of the game board 5. However, instead of or in addition to this, the bottom of the groove portion 1605a of the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity is pressed by the L-shaped connecting piece toward the protective cover body 1601. By forming the connecting piece opening in the protective cover body 1601, the connecting surface of the L-shaped connecting piece is passed through the connecting piece opening provided in the protective cover body 1601 in the protective cover body 1601. The effect display device 1600 may be in a state of being in contact with and electrically connected to the metal back cover, or a connection provided on the protective cover body 1601 by attaching a conductive elastic member to the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece. The metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the surface of the conductive elastic member (the surface opposite to the surface attached to the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece) contact each other in the protective cover body 1601 through the one opening. May be electrically connected to each other (in other words, the connecting surface of the L-shaped connecting piece is made of metal of the effect display device 1600 in the protective cover body 1601 through the connecting piece opening provided in the protective cover body 1601. It may be in a state of being electrically contacted with the back cover via the conductive elastic member). The conductive elastic member is a conductive member having a cushioning property (elasticity), and has a conductive coating portion, a rectangular-shaped foam as a core material coated with the conductive coating portion, and a conductive coating portion. And a conductive adhesive tape. Examples of the coating portion include a polyester woven fabric on which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed, and a polyimide film on which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed. Examples of the foam include polyurethane foam having heat resistance. As the conductive pressure-sensitive adhesive tape, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive can be mentioned. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape is protected by the peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating is attached (bonded) to the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece.

Also, the wiring for transmitting the control signal output from the above-mentioned main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner when the game board 5 is viewed from the front is outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605. It may be arranged such that it is drawn into the space and then drawn upward along the inside of the space outside the groove. By doing so, it is possible to improve noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B with respect to the wiring to the function display unit 1400.

In addition, the metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to a board ground (GND) through a wire (not shown), and is the same ground as the ground of various boards (board ground (GND)) provided in the game board 5. Although it is (GND), even if the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity is electrically floating with respect to various substrates provided in the game board 5, the noise source functions as an antenna that picks up noise. When there is no possibility of becoming, or when the electromagnetic noise from the noise source is small enough to be ignored, the metal wiring groove 1605 is not electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) through a wiring (not shown). It may be in an electrically floating state.

Further, the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity is formed by pressing a thin metal flat plate that is long in the vertical direction. However, the resin wiring groove 1605 having the same shape as the metal wiring groove 1605 and having non-conductivity is formed. 'May be configured as. In this case, conductive plating (for example, noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating) is applied to the entire front and back surfaces of the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605', and the conductive plated portion is also applied. Is electrically connected to the board ground (GND) through a wiring (not shown), and is the same ground (GND) as the ground of the various boards (board ground (GND)) provided in the game board 5. Even if configured in this manner, the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605 ′ having conductive plating has the same effect as the above-described conductive metal wiring groove 1605 (that is, electromagnetic noise is reduced). It is possible to function as a shield member capable of preventing the intrusion from the space inside the groove toward the space outside the groove.). Even if the conductive wiring groove 1605 ′ made of resin and having non-conductivity is electrically floating with respect to the various boards provided in the game board 5, it functions as an antenna for picking up noise. If there is no danger of becoming a noise source, or if the electromagnetic noise from the noise source is small enough to be ignored, electrically connect the conductive plating to the substrate ground (GND) via a wiring not shown. Instead, it may be in an electrically floating state.

Further, the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity is formed by pressing a thin metal flat plate that is long in the up-down direction. 'May be configured as. Even with this configuration, the conductive resin wiring groove 1605 ″ has the same effect as the above-described conductive metal wiring groove 1605 (that is, electromagnetic noise from the groove inner space to the groove outer space). It is possible to function as a shield member that can prevent the intrusion toward the front).

Further, in the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals are arranged in parallel, but the flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) between the flat conductors. May be arranged, and the flat conductors for transmitting the control signal and the flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) may be alternately arranged. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B for the plurality of flat conductors that transmit the control signal.

Further, in the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting the control signal are arranged in parallel, but a control signal that is particularly vulnerable to the electromagnetic noise (that is, susceptible to the electromagnetic noise) is transmitted. Regarding the flat conductor to be transmitted (hereinafter, referred to as “flat conductor weak against the influence of electromagnetic noise”), it is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) so as to be adjacent to the flat conductor weak against the influence of this electromagnetic noise. The flat conductors that are electrically connected to each other are arranged, and the flat conductors, which are weak against the influence of this electromagnetic noise, are arranged by being sandwiched by the flat conductors that are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND). May be. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, with respect to the flat conductor which is weak to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise.

Further, in the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals are arranged in parallel, but as the plurality of flat conductors, in addition to the flat conductors for transmitting control signals, In the case of including a flat conductor electrically connected to the board ground (GND) and a flat conductor supplying various power sources, the board ground (GND) and the power source are arranged adjacent to each other. In this case, as the power supply, the temperature rises and when it reaches a certain temperature, the resistance rises sharply and suppresses the current. An overcurrent protection circuit that cuts off the circuit when a current is reached (for example, a circuit that has a poly switch as a resettable fuse. This poly switch has a resistance value that rapidly increases from a specific temperature in relation to the element resistance and the element temperature. The main body generates heat, the conductivity lowers due to this heat, and the current is interrupted, and when the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and returns. It is preferable to do so. This is because, as described above, the flexible flat cable 1606 has a thickness which is about one third to one fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal circular electric wiring as compared with the normal circular electric wiring. Since it is thin, a short circuit of the flexible flat cable 1606 can be prevented by an overcurrent protection circuit or an overcurrent protection circuit when an overcurrent flows through a flat conductor that supplies power, so that safety can be secured and damage can be prevented. This is because it can be avoided.

[Wiring Groove According to Second Embodiment]
As shown in FIG. 248(c), FIG. 251, and FIG. 252, the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608, which has a U-shaped cross section that is long in the vertical direction. The groove portion 1608a is formed, and the left and right walls of the groove portion 1608a having the U-shaped cross section are integrally formed with upper and lower attachment pieces 1608b protruding outward. The mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b is formed in the same plane as the bottom outer surface 1608c of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section, and mounting holes 1608bb are formed at the tip of the mounting piece 1608b. Has been done. Further, a wiring insertion notch 1608d is formed in a substantially central portion of the left side wall when the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section is viewed from the opening side. The resin wiring groove 1608 may be formed of a transparent non-conductive resin or a colored non-conductive resin such as black. The resin wiring groove 1608 has a groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section with a thickness of 2.0 mm to 2.6 mm, and the resin wiring groove 1608 has a mounting piece 1608b with a height of 4.0 mm to 5.0 mm. is there.

The mounting holes 1608bb formed in the mounting surfaces 1608ba of the four mounting pieces 1608b in the resin wiring groove 1608 are arranged so as to correspond to the four mounting boss holes 1601d formed in the protective cover body 1601. After each of the mounting boss holes 1601d is inserted, the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) of the mounting boss hole 1601d is smaller than the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) of the mounting piece 1608b. ), a metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed and fixed from the mounting hole 1608bb toward the mounting boss hole 1601d, and the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section of the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the resin wiring groove 1608 is formed. The bottom outer surface 1608c is in contact with the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b is in contact with each other. Further, in a state where the game board 5 to which the resin wiring groove 1608 is fixed is mounted on the main body frame 4, the opening side of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 is the payout of the above-mentioned payout base unit 550. By being blocked by the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the base 551, a groove inner space is formed in the resin wiring groove 1608 having a U-shaped cross section.

The height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) from the mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b in the resin wiring groove 1608 to the opening side surfaces of the left side wall and the right side wall of the groove portion 1608a, and the L-shaped metal wiring groove 1605. The height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) from the attachment surface 1605ba of the attachment piece 1605b to the opening side surface of the left side wall and the right side wall of the groove portion 1608a is the same dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction), It has the same height. The height (distance dimension in the depth direction) H3 of the space inside the groove formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 is the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above. Height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) H1 and height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) H2 of the space inside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above. The length has been added.

Since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the left back plate 551e, they are formed on the front surface of the left back board 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5. The space for wiring, that is, the wiring routing space, is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, and since the resin wiring groove 1608 is non-conductive, the electromagnetic wave noise is generated by the resin wiring groove 1608. The resin wiring groove 1608 cannot function as a shield member that can prevent the resin wiring groove 1608 from entering into the groove inner space.

For example, an unillustrated sub effect display device capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is attached to the lower side of the game board 5 in addition to the effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image. In this case, the flexible flat cable 1609 (FFC (Flexible Flat Cable). Flexible flat cable from the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The flexible flat cable transmits drawing data (control signal) to a sub effect display device not shown. A plurality of flat conductors for are arranged in parallel, and these flat conductors are covered with an insulator.)) is three-dimensionally bent by repeating mountain folds and valley folds multiple times. It has the same shape as the flexible flat cable 1606 in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above, and is important for transmitting drawing data (control signal) to the sub effect display device (not shown). However, if the wiring is affected by electromagnetic noise, a trouble may occur in which the effect image displayed on the sub effect display device (not shown) is disturbed or a sandstorm-like image is generated.

Therefore, a special structure in which a shield wire 1610 woven in a net shape is provided on one of the flat surfaces of the flexible flat cable 1609 and the shield wire 1610 is covered with a transparent resin is adopted. The shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the substrate to which the upper end side of the flexible flat cable 1609 is connected, and the ground (board of the substrate to which the lower end side of the flexible flat cable 1609 is connected. It is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The flexible flat cable 1609 is a wiring insertion notch formed in the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 when the flexible flat cable 1609 is bent three-dimensionally and bent repeatedly to be three-dimensionally formed. Through the portion 1608d, the portion is bent into the groove inner space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 and bent toward the lower end side of the groove inner space, and extends from the lower end side to the groove inner space by a predetermined distance dimension. The portion extending to the portion is formed so that the surface on which the shield wire 1610 is provided faces the opening side of the groove portion 1608a. That is, in the groove space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 and the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 on which the shield wire 1610 is provided. The space formed between them (that is, a small space in which the flexible flat cable 1609 is arranged) is a space that does not face the source of electromagnetic noise, whereas the flexible flat cable 1609 has a shield wire 1610. The space formed from the surface on which is provided to the opening side of the groove portion 1608a faces the generation source side of the electromagnetic noise.

Since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the left back plate 551e, they are formed on the front surface of the left back board 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5. Although the space for wiring, that is, the wiring routing space is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, the flexible flat cable 1609 has a direction in which electromagnetic wave noise enters the surface on which the shield wire 1610 is provided. Are formed so as to face each other.

In addition, the wiring that supplies various power sources (including a ground (GND)) such as +24V, +12V, and +5V created by the power source board 630 described above has a periphery of a conductor (single wire or stranded wire). Since it is covered with an insulating material and the voltage of various power supplies (which may include the ground (GND)) is in a stable state, the influence of electromagnetic noise is greater than that of the control signal. Even if it is received, the fluctuation of the voltage due to this influence is extremely weak and is hardly affected by the electromagnetic wave noise, so that it can be routed to the space inside the groove formed by the resin wiring groove 1608.

Since the flexible flat cable 1609 and various wirings for supplying various power sources coexist in the space inside the groove formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 where the shielded wire 1610 is not provided is The resin wiring groove 1608 is directed to the inner surface 1608e of the bottom portion of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section, and the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610 is directed to the resin wiring groove 1608 having a U-shaped cross section. Face the opening side of 1608a. Then, various power supplies from the power supply board 630 are arranged along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610.

The various power supplies from the power supply board 630 are connected to the above-mentioned main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) through the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 by various power supply lines to be electrically connected to the game board. 5, various wirings for supplying various powers from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 are arranged along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610. The inner space formed by the resin-made wiring groove 1608 from below the resin-made wiring groove 1608 having a U-shaped cross section while being routed toward the non-conductive resin-made wiring groove 1608. And is routed upward along the inside of the groove to be routed from the upper end of the resin wiring groove 1608 to various substrates provided on the game board 5.

As described above, the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 shields the space through which the wiring is routed (the space around the wiring) from the flexible flat cable 1609, which is a wiring that transmits a control signal that is easily affected by electromagnetic noise. The line 1610 is provided, and the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 not provided with the shield line 1610 is directed to the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608, and the shield wire 1610 is provided. A space formed on the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the left rear surface of the game board 5 by directing the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 toward the opening side of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608. It is possible to improve noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B in the (wiring space).

Further, by arranging various power supplies from the power supply board 630 along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shielded wire 1610, a flexible flat wire which is a wiring for transmitting a control signal which is easily affected by electromagnetic noise. The cable 1609 and various wirings for supplying various power sources which are not easily affected by electromagnetic noise can be co-located in the groove space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608.

The resin wiring groove 1608 having non-conductivity which is the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is different from the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity which is the wiring groove according to the second embodiment described above. Various wirings for transmitting various control signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, twisted pair cables for transmitting control signals by the plus side wiring and the minus side wiring, and input to the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The various wirings through which the detection signals from the various sensors are transmitted cannot be routed using the resin wiring groove 1608 itself.

Here, the flexible flat cable 1609 will be described. In the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data (control signals) are arranged in parallel to a sub effect display device (not shown), and these flat conductors are covered with an insulator. In comparison with the normal circular electric wiring, the thickness is about one third to one fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal circular electric wiring, and as described above, it is flexible. The flat cable 1609 has a special structure in which a shield wire 1610 woven in a net shape is provided on one entire surface of both flat surfaces, and the shield wire 1610 is covered with a transparent resin. The flexible flat cable 1609 is three-dimensionally bent from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 toward the sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5 by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba having a predetermined length are exposed on the back side of the main body 1609a on the upper left side of the main body 1609a having a predetermined width and long in the left-right direction. And a reinforcing plate 1609ca for reinforcing the rectangular electrode 1609ba having a predetermined thickness and having a predetermined thickness on the front surface side of the main body 1609a and longer than the predetermined length of the exposed flat conductor electrodes 1609ba. On the other hand, on the lower end side of the main body 1609a, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609bb are arranged on the back surface side of the main body 1609a so as to have a predetermined length and are exposed on the front surface side of the main body 1609a. A reinforcing plate 1609cb is formed to reinforce the electrode 1609bb having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609bb which are thick and are exposed.

The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1609a are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above, and are not shown. While the shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the connector, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes formed on the lower end side of the main body 1609a. 1609bb is electrically connected to a connector of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers the upper back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5, and The shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground of the control board (the board ground (GND)) via the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown).

In addition, a capacitor called a decoupling capacitor such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a power supply bypass capacitor (not shown) is provided between the power supply line in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to which the flexible flat cable 1609 is electrically connected and the substrate ground (GND). Is mounted, and by reducing the power source impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. In addition, a power line and a board ground (GND) in a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers an upper surface of a back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) to which a flexible flat cable 1609 is electrically connected. Capacitors called decaps such as decoupling capacitors (not shown) and power supply bypass capacitors (not shown) are mounted between the two, and by lowering the power source impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is reduced. It is improving the sex.

The flexible flat cable 1609 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 described above. Via the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 which covers except the display area, and a wiring insertion cutout portion 1608d formed in a groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 having non-conductivity, passing through the space. And is guided to the lower side along the groove inner space, and is guided to the lower side along the groove inner space and is then drawn into the substrate holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the game board 5 as it is and the rear surface of the liquid crystal panel in the sub effect display device (not shown). It is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover that covers the upper side.

As described above, the flexible flat cable 1609 electrically connected to the connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is, as described above, the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display of the game board 5. A wiring insertion notch formed in a groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 that passes through between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the device 1600 except for the display area. It can be drawn to the space inside the groove formed in the resin wiring groove 1608 via 1608d. Further, in the effect display device 1600, as described above, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is covered with the metal back cover. Thereby, the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 is between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 which covers the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 except the display area. It is possible to function as a shield member that can prevent electromagnetic noise that invades toward the flexible flat cable 1609 in the area where it passes.

[Modification]
A flexible flat cable 1609 having a shield wire 1610 woven in a net shape over one surface is a three-dimensional structure in which a strip-shaped main body 1606a having a predetermined width and long in the left-right direction is bent by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times. Although the strip-shaped main body 1606a is mountain-folded or valley-folded once, one side face of a short flexible flat cable 1609' may be provided with a shield wire 1610 woven in a net shape. For example, when two substrates are arranged in an environment affected by electromagnetic noise, a short flexible flat cable 1609′ provided with a shield wire 1610 in which one of the two substrates is braided in a mesh shape is provided. By electrically connecting, it is possible to improve noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. The shield wire 1610 has an upper end side of the flexible flat cable 1609′ electrically connected to a ground (substrate ground (GND)) of one of the two substrates and a lower end side of the flexible flat cable 1609′. It is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the other of the two substrates.

The metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 passes between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 except for the display area. In this region, it is possible to function as a shield member that can prevent electromagnetic noise that enters the flexible flat cable 1609. Further, in this region, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shielded wire 1610 is formed so as to face the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, by combining a mountain fold and a valley fold of the flexible flat cable 1609 before and after this area, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 where the shield wire 1610 is not provided in this area serves as the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600. The flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shielded wire 1610 may be formed to face the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 while facing the base body 1502. By doing this, in the area passing between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 which covers the display area 1600 of the game board 5 excluding the display area, the shield wire 1610 is provided. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 that is not provided can prevent electromagnetic noise that intrudes toward the flexible flat cable 1609 by a shield, which is a metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600, and a shield wire 1610 is provided. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 can prevent electromagnetic noise that intrudes toward the flexible flat cable 1609 by a shield wire 1610 and a shield.

Further, the protective cover body 1601 which covers the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 excluding the display area and the resin wiring groove 1608 having non-conductivity are configured separately, but the protective cover body 1601 is If it is made of a resin having non-conductivity, the protective cover body 1601 and the resin wiring groove 1608 may be integrally molded.

A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1609a of the flexible flat cable 1609 are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above. In addition, the shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the connector (not shown), and a plurality of flexible flat cables 1609 are formed on the lower end side of the main body 1609a. The flat conductor electrode 1609bb is electrically connected to a connector of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers an upper surface of the back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in the sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. In addition to being connected, the shielded wire 1610 was electrically connected to the ground of the control board (the board ground (GND)) via the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown). Therefore, for example, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba arranged in parallel, the flat conductors arranged on both end sides may be electrically connected to the shield wire 1610. Even with this configuration, the shielded wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is possible to control the control board through a connector of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers the upper side of the back surface of the liquid crystal panel (not shown) in the sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. It can be electrically connected to a ground (substrate ground (GND)).

Further, in the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals are arranged in parallel, but the flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) between the flat conductors. May be arranged, and the flat conductors for transmitting the control signal and the flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) may be alternately arranged. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B for the plurality of flat conductors that transmit the control signal.

Further, in the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting the control signal are arranged in parallel, but a control signal that is particularly vulnerable to the electromagnetic noise (that is, susceptible to the electromagnetic noise) is transmitted. Regarding the flat conductor to be transmitted (hereinafter, referred to as “flat conductor weak against the influence of electromagnetic noise”), it is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) so as to be adjacent to the flat conductor weak against the influence of this electromagnetic noise. The flat conductors that are electrically connected to each other are arranged, and the flat conductors, which are weak against the influence of this electromagnetic noise, are arranged by being sandwiched by the flat conductors that are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND). May be. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, with respect to the flat conductor which is weak to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise.

Further, in the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals are arranged in parallel, but as the plurality of flat conductors, in addition to the flat conductors for transmitting control signals, In the case of including a flat conductor electrically connected to the board ground (GND) and a flat conductor supplying various power sources, the board ground (GND) and the power source are arranged adjacent to each other. In this case, as the power supply, the temperature rises and when it reaches a certain temperature, the resistance rises sharply and suppresses the current. An overcurrent protection circuit that cuts off the circuit when a current is reached (for example, a circuit that has a poly switch as a resettable fuse. This poly switch has a resistance value that rapidly increases from a specific temperature in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature. The main body generates heat, the conductivity lowers due to this heat, and the current is interrupted, and when the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and returns. It is preferable to do so. As described above, the flexible flat cable 1609 has a thickness that is about one third to one fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal circular electric wiring, as compared with the normal circular electric wiring. Since it is thin, a short circuit of the flexible flat cable 1609 can be prevented by an overcurrent protection circuit or an overcurrent protection circuit when an overcurrent flows in a flat conductor that supplies power, so that safety can be ensured and damage can be prevented. This is because it can be avoided.

[Other decoration devices]
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the back-side effect unit 3400 is provided above the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5. Here, a case in which a light emission effect unit 5000 is provided instead of the back side effect unit 3400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 253 to 259. 253 is a perspective view of the light-emission production unit seen from the front, FIG. 254 is a perspective view of the light-emission production unit seen from the rear, and FIG. 255 is an exploded perspective view of the light-emission production unit seen from the front. Yes, FIG. 256 is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting effect unit as seen from behind, FIG. 257 is a front view showing the positional relationship between the LED bare chip and the light guide plate, and FIG. 258 is arranged on the surface of the light guide plate. FIG. 259 is a front view showing the diffused sheet, and FIG. 259 is a view (a) showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector of the LED substrate, and an enlarged view of the Z part shown in (a). It is a figure (b) which shows the state where insertion into the connector of the LED board of a flexible flat cable is normal, and is an enlarged view of the Z section shown to (a), Comprising: It is a figure (c) which shows an abnormal state where insertion into a connector is insufficient. Note that, in FIGS. 253 to 256 and 259, only the lower end side of the flexible flat cable is shown and other parts are omitted for the sake of easy viewing of the drawings.

[Light emitting effect unit]
As shown in FIGS. 253 to 258, the light emission effect unit 5000 includes a light emission effect main body 5010 having a circular shape, and a T-shaped main body attachment portion 5020 for attaching the light emission effect main body 5010 to the upper portion in the back box 3010. The control signal output from the production drive board 1720 is guided along the back surface side of the main body attachment portion 5020 into the light emission production main body 5010 and is output from the production drive board 1720 in response to the command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. A flexible flat cable 5030 (FFC (Flexible Flat Cable), which is transmitted to the main body 5010. The flexible flat cable is formed by bending a mountain fold and a valley fold a plurality of times repeatedly to form a three-dimensional shape. The conductor is covered with an insulator))). Here, first, the light emission effect main body 5010 will be described, and a method of assembling the main body attachment portion 5020, the flexible flat cable 5030, and the light emission effect unit 5000 will be sequentially described.

[Emitting production main body]
The light emitting effect main body 5010 is made of a decorative body 5040 molded from a circular transparent resin, and a thin circular transparent resin plate that is housed inside the decorative body 5040 and has a notch in the upper part. A diffusion sheet 5050 to be molded, and a conductive sheet which is housed inside the decorative body 5040 in a state of being arranged on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050 and is molded from a circular transparent resin having a notch in a part of the upper side. The light plate 5060, the LED substrate 5070 having a circular shape having a cutout in a part of the upper side thereof, which is housed inside the decorative body 5040 while being arranged on the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, and the rear opening of the decorative body 5040. And a lid 5080 molded of a transparent resin having a circular shape having a notch in a part of the upper side.

[Decorative body]
At the center of the surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 molded with a circular transparent resin, a convex portion 5040a matching the outer shape of the character projects forward, and the character is printed on the entire surface of the convex portion 5040a. There is. Of the surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040, the outer periphery of the convex portion 5040a excluding the entire surface on which the character of the convex portion 5040a is printed and the entire surface 5040x surface of the decorative body 5040 excluding the convex portion 5040a include the world view of the character. A background pattern (not shown) is printed with a design that shows the. Although the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 is printed with characters or a background pattern, the light emission mode of the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 is changed from the front of the light emission effect unit 5000 (that is, the pachinko machine 1 according to the light emission by the LED substrate 5070). The player sitting in front of can easily recognize the change, and can notify the player of a change in the light emission mode of the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040.

On the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040, a member housing recess 5040b for housing the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070, which has a circular shape with a cutout on a part of the upper side, is formed while leaving the upper side thereof. ing. The reverse arrangement preventing piece for preventing the decorative body 5040 from being housed by turning over the front and back surfaces of the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 at the upper left side of the member housing recess 5040b when viewed from behind. 5040c is formed so as to protrude from the inner surface of the bottom of the member accommodating recess 5040b toward the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 with the length of the first distance dimension. Further, a lid body that restricts the positions of the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 and closes the member housing recess 5040b on the upper left, right, and lower sides of the member housing recess 5040b when the decorative body 5040 is viewed from the rear. Mounting boss holes 5040d for fixing 5080 to the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 are formed to project from the inner surface of the bottom of the member housing recess 5040b toward the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 with a length of the first distance dimension. (A total of three mounting boss holes 5040d). Further, mounting boss holes 5040e for fixing the main body mounting portion 5020 are provided on the upper left and right sides on the rear surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 when viewed from the rear, and the second distance dimension from the rear surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 to the rear side. Is formed so as to project (the total of two mounting boss holes 5040e).

[LED board]
The LED substrate 5070 having a circular shape having a cutout in a part of the upper side is provided with a cutout portion 5070a at a position corresponding to the reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decoration body 5040, and the decoration body 5040. Through holes 5070b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member housing recess 5040b.

A plurality of LED bare chips are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. This LED bare chip (also referred to as “LED element”) is an extremely small electronic component that is enclosed in a surface mounting type, a chip-on-board type, a shell type package, or the like. In this embodiment, the LED bare chip encapsulated LED package is not mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, but the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. We adopted a configuration that is directly implemented in.

As a method for electrically connecting the electrode of the LED bare chip to the predetermined electrode on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, wire bonding, flip chip bonding, or the like can be used. In the present embodiment, flip chip bonding is used. It was adopted. In this flip chip bonding, instead of electrically connecting the electrode of the LED bare chip to a predetermined electrode of the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 by using a wire like wire bonding, bumps are applied to the electrode of the LED bare chip. Is formed to electrically connect to a predetermined electrode on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. This connecting portion is reinforced with solder, resin or the like.

On the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, there are provided 5 rows of LED bare chips 5075 arranged in a row in a row with a predetermined distance between them, the first row 5070c1 from the bottom. Six LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction on the fifth row 5070c5 from the bottom, and LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction on the second row 5070c2 from the bottom and the fourth row 5070c4 from the bottom. The LED bare chips 5075 are arranged side by side in a row in the third row 5070c3 from the bottom.

The LED row of the third stage 5070c3 is arranged on the center line of the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 in the left-right direction. The fourth row, which is one step above the LED row of the third row 5070c3, passes through almost the midpoint between this centerline and the upper edge of the LED board 5070 and is on the intermediate lines parallel to the centerline and the upper edge of the LED board 5070. The LED array of 5070c4 is arranged. Then, on an intermediate line that passes through substantially the midpoint of this center line and a straight line that is parallel to this center line and passes through the lowest point of the circumference of the LED substrate 5070 and that is parallel to each of this center line and the above-mentioned straight line. The LED row of the second row 5070c2, which is one row lower than the LED row of the third row 5070c3, is arranged at. One of the LED rows in the fourth row 5070c4 is located on a straight line in the vertical direction passing through the midpoint of the distance dimension between the first LED bare chip 5075 and the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the LED row in the third row 5070c3. While the second LED bare chip 5075 is arranged, the first LED bare chip 5075 of the second row 5070c2 LED row is arranged, and the eight LED bare chips 5075 and the fourth row of the third row 5070c3 LED row are arranged. The seven LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of 5070c4 are arranged so as not to be aligned in a vertical direction, and the eight LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the third row 5070c3 and the seven LED bare chips of the second row 5070c2 are arranged. The two LED bare chips 5075 are arranged so as not to line up in the vertical direction. The seven LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the fourth row 5070c4 and the seven LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the second row 5070c2 are arranged in a line in the vertical direction.

On the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, the LED row of the fifth row 5070c5, which is on the upper side of the LED board 5070 and below the two through holes 5070b, is one row above the LED row of the fourth row 5070c4. And the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 which is one lower than the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 is arranged on the lowermost side of the circumference of the LED substrate 5070 and above one through hole 5070b. Has been done. A straight line in the up-down direction that passes through the midpoint of the distance dimension between the first LED bare chip 5075 and the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left of the LED row of the fourth row 5070c4, and 1 from the left of the LED row of the second row 5070c2. The vertical straight line passing through the midpoint of the distance dimension between the second LED bare chip 5075 and the second LED bare chip 5075 coincides, and on this straight line, the first LED from the left in the LED row of the fifth row 5070c5 The bare chip 5075 is arranged, the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left of the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 is arranged, and the seven LED bare chips 5075 and the fifth row 5070c5 of the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c3 are arranged. The six LED bare chips 5075 of the second row 5070c2 and the six LED bare chips 5075 of the second row 5070c2 and the six LED bare chips 5075 of the first row 5070c1 are arranged so as not to line up in the vertical direction. The LED bare chips 5075 are arranged so as not to line up in the vertical direction. In addition, on the above straight line, the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 and the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 are arranged. In addition, since the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left of the LED row of the third row 5070c3 is also arranged, the six LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the fifth row 5070c5 and the LED row of the third row 5070c3 are arranged. Among them, the second to seventh six LED bare chips 5075 and the six LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 are arranged in a line in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, a connector 5070d that transmits a control signal for controlling a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is mounted. The lower end of the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted into the connector 5070d and electrically connected. The upper end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted into and electrically connected to a connector (not shown) of the performance drive board 1720. The control signal output from the production drive board 1720 is transmitted to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030, and the light emitting mode of the LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is controlled. To be done.

The front surface (mounting surface) 5070x and the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 are coated with a green resist liquid except various lands and through holes. The surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is further printed by white silk printing except for various lands and through holes. In other words, the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is white, while the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070 is green. Different. The reason why the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is white is that the light emitted from the LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is refracted by another member. When returning to the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, the function as a reflection sheet that can efficiently refract the returned light forward again is the surface (mounting surface) of the LED substrate 5070. This is because the 5070x has it.

[Modification]
The LED board 5070 drives a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 when a control signal is input from the production driving board 1720 via the flexible flat cable 5030. Was there. That is, in accordance with a command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect drive board 1720 is controlled by an LED control electronic component (for example, an IC such as an LED driver or a gradation control driver) mounted on itself. The signal was output to the LED substrate 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030. The electronic component for LED control mounted on the effect drive board 1720 may be mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070. Since the connector 5070d is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, an electronic component for LED control having the same height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) as the height of the connector 5070d. Even if this LED controlling electronic component is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, it can be used as it is without changing the dimensions of the decoration body 5040 and the lid body 5080. This can contribute to downsizing of the production drive board 1720. With this configuration, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 outputs a control signal to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030 to drive the LED bare chip 5075. Can also

Further, although flip-chip bonding is adopted as a method for electrically connecting the electrode of the LED bare chip to the predetermined electrode on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, wire bonding may be adopted instead of flip-chip bonding. Good.

[Light guide plate]
The light guide plate 5060 formed of a transparent resin having a circular shape with a notch in a part of the upper side has a notch portion 5060a formed at a position corresponding to the reverse arrangement preventing piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the ornament 5040. In addition, through holes 5060b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040.

The back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is housed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 while being in contact with the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. On the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, there is a notch in the upper part so as to cover the LED bare chip 5075 at a position corresponding to a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. The semi-cylindrical curved surface has a cylindrical shape (hereinafter, referred to as “semi-cylindrical shape”), and the axis of the semi-cylindrical surface is tilted slightly downward with respect to the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 so that the semi-cylindrical curved surface is tilted. Incident recesses 5060c are formed respectively. The bottom of the incident recess 5060c does not penetrate the surface 5070x of the light guide plate 5060 and remains inside the light guide plate 5060. When the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 abuts on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 and is housed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040, the LED bare chip 5075 is arranged on the axis of the semi-cylindrical column. At the same time, the LED bare chip 5075 is sealed in the incident recess 5060c.

On the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, a flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape is formed from the opening side of the incident concave portion 5060c in a section from a center point through which the axis of the semi-cylindrical axis passes to a position of a concentric circle separated by a predetermined distance dimension. A notch is formed in a part of the upper side of the columnar flat surface 5060d, and the columnar flat surface 5060d and the opening side of the incident recess 5060c are similar to each other.

When the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 exceeds a section of a flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape from the center point where the axis of the semi-cylindrical axis passes, a concentric circular prism pattern having a substantially triangular cross section is formed, A prism portion 5060e is formed in which the distance between the prism patterns having a substantially triangular cross section increases as the distance from the center point through which the axis of the semi-cylindrical line passes. The distance dimension in the left-right direction of the prism portion 5060e is the distance dimension of a straight line connecting the center points of the adjacent LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 (hereinafter, “the block reference distance in the left-right direction”). It may be described as "dimension".). On the other hand, the distance dimension in the vertical direction of the prism portion 5060e is one lower than the step of the LED bare chip 5075 sealed in the main entrance recess 5060c from the notch formed in the upper part of the flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape. Is the distance dimension to the prism pattern of the final stage that passes through the center point of the closest LED bare chip arranged in the step (hereinafter, may be referred to as “vertical block reference distance dimension”).

On the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, at a position corresponding to a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, an incident recess 5060c, a cylindrical flat surface 5060d, and a prism portion 5060e. A single prism block 5060f is formed to form a prism surface. The horizontal dimension of the single prism block 5060f becomes the block reference distance dimension in the left-right direction, and the vertical dimension dimension of the single prism block 5060f becomes the block reference distance dimension in the vertical direction. Of the plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x, the one closest to the left and right outer peripheral portions of the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 (LED row in the first row 5070c1 to LED in the fifth row 5070c5). The first LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of each row, the first row of the LED bare chips 5075 from the left side of the first row 5070c1 and the LED row of the fifth cross section, and the left side of the second row 5070c2 and the fourth row 5070c4 of the LED row From the 7th to LED bare chip 5075, and from the left 8th LED bare chip 5075 in the third row of LEDs, the horizontal dimension of the single prism block 5060f is not the horizontal block reference distance dimension. The prism pattern at the final stage is formed to extend to the outer peripheral edge of the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060.

On the other hand, on the front surface 5060x side of the light guide plate 5060, a plurality of single prism blocks 5060f are formed on the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, whereas a flat surface is formed without any processing. ing.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the LED package in which the LED bare chip is encapsulated is not mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, but the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is surfaced in the LED substrate 5070. (Mounting surface) A structure for directly mounting on the 5070x is adopted. Thereby, as the thickness of the light guide plate, compared with the thickness of the light guide plate when the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, the surface mount type, the chip-on-board type, the shell type, etc. Can be reduced by the depth distance dimension of the package, and a larger depth distance dimension of the light emission effect body 5010 of the light emission effect unit 5000 can be ensured to contribute to the three-dimensional modeling of the light emission effect body 5010. be able to. Since the LED bare chip is an extremely delicate electronic component, even if a shock caused by a player hitting the door frame 3 or the like is directly transmitted to the door frame 3, the light emitting effect unit 5000 provided in the game board 5 is not damaged. Since the impact due to the weakening is weakened, there is a low probability that the plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 will be damaged by the impact due to such a dot.

[Modification]
In this embodiment, the LED package in which the LED bare chip is encapsulated is not mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, but the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is on the surface (mounting surface) of the LED substrate 5070. ) The structure of directly mounting on the 5070x is adopted, but as the depth distance dimension of the light emission effect main body 5010 of the light emission effect unit 5000, if there is no hindrance to the three-dimensional modeling of the light emission effect main body 5010, a side type is used instead of the LED bare chip. The LED package having the surface mount type may be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. In this case, the dimensional distance of the single prism block 5060f including the incident recess 5060c, the flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape, and the prism portion 5060e becomes large, and the plate thickness of the light guide plate also becomes large. The light emitting surface of the LED package having the side surface mounting type does not face the diffusion sheet 5050 but faces downward of the incident recess 5060c, and the light emitted from this light emitting surface passes from the prism portion 5060e through the prism portion 5060e. Proceed to the front diffusion sheet 5050.

[Diffusion sheet]
The diffusion sheet 5050, which is formed by processing a thin circular transparent resin plate having a notch in a part of the upper side, is cut at a position corresponding to the reverse placement prevention piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the ornament 5040. The portion 5050a is formed, and the through holes 5050b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. The diffusion sheet 5050 is coated with white paint on its back surface and processed into a satin-finished surface having fine irregularities, and light from a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. Is incident on the light guide plate, the incident light can be diffused.

The back surface 5050y of the diffusion sheet 5050 is housed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 while being in contact with the front surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060 formed of a transparent resin. The back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is housed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 while being in contact with the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. On the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, as described above, the incident recess is formed so as to cover the LED bare chip 5075 at a position corresponding to the plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. 5060c are formed respectively.

On the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, as described above, the LED bare chips 5075 are provided in five rows in the vertical direction in which a predetermined number of LED bare chips 5075 are arranged with a predetermined distance. The LED bare chips 5075 of the row of LED rows are respectively sealed in the incident recesses 5060c formed on the back surface 5060y side of the corresponding light guide plate 5060. When the light-emitting surface of the LED bare chip 5075 emits light, the space of the incident recess 5060c is illuminated brightly, so that the LED of each row of LED columns enclosed in each incident recess 5060c is compared with the area where the incident recess 5060c is not formed. Light from the bare chip 5075 passes through the inside of the light guide plate 5060 formed of a transparent resin, is emitted from the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060, and the brightness of the light emitted from the space of each incident recess 5060c is increased. Then, the region where the space of each incident recess 5060c exists is arranged like a point light source, and it is difficult to uniformly illuminate the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060.

Therefore, on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, five white band areas 5050c1 to 5050c5, which are coated with white paint and have a long band shape in the left-right direction, are formed at positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075 of the LED rows in each stage. At the same time, a diffused region 5050d for diffusing light is formed by spraying white paint in spots on the regions excluding these five regions 5050c1 to 5050c5. The portion coated with this white paint becomes an opaque region in which the rear or the front cannot be visually recognized through the diffusion sheet 5050. No paint is applied to the surface 5050x side of the diffusion sheet 5050.

Specifically, on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, a white band region 5050c1 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 of the LED substrate 5070, and the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 of the LED substrate 5070 is formed. A white band region 5050c2 is formed at a position corresponding to, a white band region 5050c3 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 of the LED substrate 5070, and corresponds to the LED line of the fourth stage 5070c4 of the LED substrate 5070. The white band region 5050c4 is formed at a position corresponding to the above position, and the white band region 5050c5 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 of the LED substrate 5070.

The vertical distance dimension of the white belt areas 5050c1 to 5050c5 has the same distance dimension. For example, the vertical distance dimension of the white belt area 5050c1 is at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1. The distance dimension covers the entire flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape that constitutes the single prism block 5060f of the above-described light guide plate 5060 formed. Also, of the distance dimensions in the left-right direction of the white belt areas 5050c1 to 5050c5, the distance dimensions in the left-right direction of the white belt areas 5050c1 and 5050c5 have the same distance dimension, and for example, in the left-right direction of the white belt area 5050c1. Has a distance dimension that covers the entire flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape that constitutes the single prism block 5060f of the above-described light guide plate 5060 formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1. doing. Further, of the distance dimensions in the left-right direction of the white band areas 5050c1 to 5050c5, the distance dimensions in the left-right direction of the white band areas 5050c2 and 5050c4 have the same distance dimension, and for example, in the left-right direction of the white belt area 5050c2. Is a distance dimension that covers the entire flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape that constitutes the single prism block 5060f of the above-described light guide plate 5060 formed at the position corresponding to the LED row of the second stage 5070c2. doing. Further, among the distance dimensions in the left-right direction of the white band areas 5050c1 to 5050c5, the distance dimension in the left-right direction of the white belt area 5050c3 is formed at the position corresponding to the LED row of the third stage 5070c3. The single prism block 5060f has a distance dimension that covers the entire flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape.

In this way, on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, five white strip areas 5050c1 to 5050c5 having a long strip in the left-right direction, which are coated with white paint, are formed at positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075 of the LED rows in each stage. By doing so, the light emitted from each of the incident recesses 5060c can be refracted by the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 and directed toward the light guide plate 5060. Therefore, the region where the space of each of the incident recesses 5060c exists is like a point light source. The light emitting state can be softened.

Further, as described above, the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is white, so that it is refracted at the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, passes through the light guide plate 5060, and the surface of the LED substrate 5070 ( The light returning toward the mounting surface 5070x can be efficiently refracted forward again.

Further, the light emitted from the prism portion 5060e forming the single prism block 5060f is adapted to be diffused by the diffusion region 5050d. That is, the light emitted from each of the incident recesses 5060c is refracted by the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 toward the light guide plate 5060, and the region in which the space of each of the incident recesses 5060c exists emits light like a point light source. At the same time, the light returning toward the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is refracted by the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the white LED substrate 5070 and efficiently emitted again forward, and this emitted light is a prism. Since the light can be diffused by the diffusion region 5050d through the portion 5060e, it is possible to contribute to the aspect in which the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060 is uniformly illuminated. This can contribute to evenly illuminating the surface (front surface 5060x) of the light guide plate 5060 that faces the diffusion sheet 5050, and is unlikely to give the player a feeling of strangeness due to the light emission effect of the decorative body 5040. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the light emission effect.

[Lid]
The lid 5080 molded with a transparent resin having a circular shape with a cutout in a part of the upper side has a cutout portion 5080a formed at a position corresponding to the reverse placement prevention piece 5040c formed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decoration body 5040. At the same time, through holes 5080b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040.

Further, the lid 5080 is formed with a plurality of ventilation long holes 5080c that are long in the left-right direction aligned in the vertical and horizontal directions, and at the position corresponding to the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface 5070y of the LED board 5070, the flexible flat cable 5030. A wiring opening 5080d through which the wiring passes is formed.

Further, mounting boss holes 5080e for fixing the main body mounting portion 5020 are provided on the left and right sides of the center of the back surface 5080y side of the lid body 5080 when the lid body 5080 is viewed from the rear, and are located at a third distance dimension from the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080 toward the rear. Is formed so as to project (the total of two mounting boss holes 5080e). Note that the outer diameters of the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right sides of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 are the same as the two mounting bosses formed on the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emission effect main body 5010 described above. It is the same as the outer diameter of the hole 5040e.

[Main body mounting part]
The main body mounting portion 5020 having a T-shape for mounting the light-emission production main body 5010 on the upper portion in the back box 3010 has T-shaped groove portions whose side walls are formed rearward except the upper left and right ends of the T-shaped flat plate. And a two metal L-shaped plates 5020b having a symmetrical shape that reinforces the base body 5020a along the side walls of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a excluding the upper side and the lower side. 5020b and a metal plate 5020c that reinforces the base body 5020a along the upper side wall of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a.

At the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a, positions corresponding to the two mounting boss holes 5040e formed on the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emission effect main body 5010, and the light emission effect main body 5010. Through-holes 5020d are formed at positions corresponding to the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right sides of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080. In addition, when the base body 5020a is viewed from the rear, a plurality of metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and a metal plate 5020c for fixing two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b to the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. Mounting boss holes 5020e of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a are formed to project rearward from the bottom inner surface with a length of a fourth distance dimension (a total of 11 mounting bosses). Hole 5020e). The outer diameter of the mounting boss hole 5020e is the outer diameter of the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 described above (upper left and right of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emission effect main body 5010). The outer diameters of the two mounting boss holes 5040e formed in 2) are smaller by about two times.

Two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b attached to the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a include two metal L-shaped plates 5020b formed on the upper left and right sides of the rear surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emission effect main body 5010. Through holes 5020ba are formed at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 5040e and at positions corresponding to the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right sides of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 of the light emission effect main body 5010. At the same time, through holes 5020bb are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed on the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. Further, the metal plate 5020c attached to the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove portion formed in the base body 5020a penetrates into a position corresponding to the plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed on the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove portion. Each hole 5020ca is formed.

Also, when the base body 5020a is viewed from the rear, a flexible flat cable 5030 is provided on the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed on the base body 5020a and the lower side wall of the base body 5020a connected to this bottom. A wiring opening 5020f is formed so as to pass therethrough. Although not shown, a plurality of through holes for attaching the light emission effect main body 5010 to the upper part of the back box 3010 are formed at the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a.

Further, the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c are electrically connected to a board ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown), and grounds of various boards provided in the game board 5. It is the same ground (GND) as the (substrate ground (GND)).

[Flexible flat cable]
The flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting a control signal output from the production drive board 1720 in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The flat conductors are covered with an insulator, which is about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of a normal round electric wire, compared to a normal round electric wire. Although not shown in the figure, it is three-dimensionally formed by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times from the production drive substrate 1720 to the light emission production main body 5010, and is further formed into a main body attachment portion 5020. Along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove portion formed in the base body 5020a of the base body 5020a, between the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c, a mountain fold is made toward the inside of the light emission effect main body 5010, Although it is formed by three-dimensionally bending by repeating valley folds a plurality of times, it is not shown on the upper end side of a strip-shaped main body 5030a having a predetermined width and long in the left-right direction. An electrode of a mold conductor is arranged in a bare shape with a predetermined length, has a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body 5030a, and has a rectangular shape longer than the predetermined length of the exposed plurality of flat conductor electrodes. While a reinforcing plate is formed to reinforce the main body 5030a, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb are arranged on the lower end side of the main body 5030a on the back surface side of the main body 5030a so as to have a predetermined length. A reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb having a rectangular shape longer than the predetermined length of the plurality of exposed flat conductor electrodes 5030bb is formed on the surface side of the main body 5030a. ..

The electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors (not shown) formed on the upper end side of the main body 5030a are electrically connected to the connectors (not shown) provided on the performance drive board 1720, whereas the electrodes are formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a. The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb are electrically connected to the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 of the light emission effect main body 5010.

In addition, between the power supply line in the production drive board 1720 to which the flexible flat cable 5030 is electrically connected and the board ground (GND), a capacitor called a decoupling capacitor such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a power supply bypass capacitor (not shown). Is mounted, and by reducing the power source impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. In addition, a decoupling capacitor (not shown), a power supply bypass capacitor (not shown), or the like is provided between the power line in the LED board 5070 of the light emitting effect main body 5010 to which the flexible flat cable 5030 is electrically connected and the board ground (GND). A capacitor called a bypass capacitor is mounted, and by reducing the power source impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved.

As described above, the flexible flat cable 5030 is three-dimensionally bent and routed inside the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, so that the flexible flat cable 5030 is provided near the back surface of the game panel 1100. There is also a portion where the cable 5030 is routed. As described above, the game ball B is ground in the island facility of the game hall or rubs against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1 to be charged and electrostatically discharged to emit electromagnetic noise. .. Therefore, when the game ball B flows down the game area 5a of the game board 5, the back surface of the game panel 1100 and its vicinity are in an environment that is easily affected by electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. ing. The flexible flat cable 5030 that transmits the control signal to the light-emission production main body 5010 is weak to noise and troubles due to electromagnetic noise (for example, normal data is changed to other data and garbled, or a signal that is not originally output). However, it is likely to be output signals, etc.) but is easily affected by electromagnetic noise, but as described above, near the back surface of the game panel 1100 that is easily affected by electromagnetic noise. There are also parts that are routed around.

Therefore, among the electrodes of the flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 facing the source of the electromagnetic noise in the width direction (hereinafter, may be referred to as “most ends”). The electrodes of the flat conductor of (. As a result, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes, the other electrodes except for the flat conductor electrodes on the outermost sides are connected to the game ball B by the ground (GND) line which is the flat conductor electrodes on the outermost sides. By arranging the ground (GND) line between the source of the electromagnetic noise caused by the electrostatic discharge of 1 and the other electrodes (electrodes including the control signal) excluding the electrodes of the flat conductor on the both ends, Noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved with respect to other electrodes (electrodes including a line for transmitting a control signal) other than the electrodes of the flat conductor on both ends. ..

In addition, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030, the flat conductor electrodes on both sides at the end are both used as a power supply line as a ground (GND) line so that the power supply line is arranged at the end. A power supply line (for example, +5V line) is arranged on the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductors on both sides. Since the power supply line (for example, +5V line) is strong against noise and is not easily influenced by electromagnetic noise, it may be arranged on the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, which are close to the electrodes on both ends. preferable. Among the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductors on both ends, one electrode adjacent to the electrode of one end of the flat conductor and another electrode adjacent to the electrode of the other end of the flat conductor. A power supply line is arranged on one of the electrodes, or on both the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the one endmost flat conductor and the electrode adjacent to the other electrode of the other endmost flat conductor.

Further, of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030, both of the flat conductor electrodes on the outermost ends are used as the ground (GND) line, and the electrodes of the flat conductors on the outermost ends are formed. However, two metal L-shaped plates along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body attachment portion 5020 of the light emission effect main body 5010 in the portion routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100. It is arranged so as to pass between 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c. That is, since the flexible flat cable 503 is shielded by the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c, the portion routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is easily affected by electromagnetic noise, is shielded. It is possible to improve noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

As described above, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors covered with an insulator. The color of this insulator is white, and the entire flexible flat cable 5030 is white. The reason why the white color is adopted is that the flexible flat cable 5030 is routed inside the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, so that it is mounted on various decorative substrates provided in the back unit 3000. By functioning as a reflector that reflects the light emitted by the LED by itself, the light leaking through the rear of the back unit 3000 is suppressed even a little, and it contributes to the reduction of the effect of the light emission effect by the light emitted by the LED. is there.

[Modification]
In order to improve noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, the power source line is connected to the electrodes of the flat conductors on both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030. Although the ground (GND) line is used as the power supply line so as to be arranged, the power supply line (for example, +5V line) may be used as the power supply line so that the power supply line is arranged instead of the ground (GND) line. This is because the power supply line (for example, +5V line) is strong against noise and is not easily affected by electromagnetic noise. In this case, among the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductors on both ends, the electrode adjacent to the electrode of one end of the flat conductor and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the other end of the flat conductor. A ground (GND) line is arranged on one of the two, or both of the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the one endmost flat conductor and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the other endmost flat conductor. ing.

In addition, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030, the flat conductor electrodes on both ends at the end are routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, at a main body attachment portion of the light emission effect main body 5010. Along the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the 5020, the metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b are routed so as to pass between the metal plates 5020c. However, at least one of the electrodes of the flat conductor on the outermost ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 is routed along one metal L-shaped plate 5020b of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b. It may be done. In this way, the flexible flat cable 503 is a metal L-shaped plate in which the portion routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is easily affected by electromagnetic noise, is routed along the metal L-shaped plate 5020b. Shielded by 5020b, it is possible to contribute to improvement of noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

Further, in the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals are arranged in parallel, but the flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) between the flat conductors. May be arranged, and the flat conductors for transmitting the control signal and the flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) may be alternately arranged. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B for the plurality of flat conductors that transmit the control signal.

Further, in the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel, but a control signal that is particularly vulnerable to electromagnetic noise (that is, susceptible to electromagnetic noise) is transmitted. Regarding the flat conductor to be transmitted (hereinafter, referred to as “flat conductor weak against the influence of electromagnetic noise”), it is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) so as to be adjacent to the flat conductor weak against the influence of this electromagnetic noise. The flat conductors that are electrically connected to each other are arranged, and the flat conductors, which are weak against the influence of this electromagnetic noise, are arranged by being sandwiched by the flat conductors that are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND). May be. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, with respect to the flat conductor which is weak to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise.

Further, in the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals are arranged in parallel, but as the plurality of flat conductors, in addition to the flat conductors for transmitting control signals, In the case of including a flat conductor electrically connected to the board ground (GND) and a flat conductor supplying various power sources, the board ground (GND) and the power source are arranged adjacent to each other. In this case, as the power supply, the temperature rises and when it reaches a certain temperature, the resistance rises sharply and suppresses the current. An overcurrent protection circuit that cuts off the circuit when a current is reached (for example, a circuit that has a poly switch as a resettable fuse. This poly switch has a resistance value that rapidly increases from a specific temperature in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature. The main body generates heat, the conductivity lowers due to this heat, and the current is interrupted, and when the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and returns. It is preferable to do so. This is because, as described above, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a thickness that is about one third to one fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal circular electric wiring as compared with the normal circular electric wiring. Since it is thin, a short circuit of the flexible flat cable 5030 can be prevented by an overcurrent protection circuit or an overcurrent protection circuit when an overcurrent flows in a flat conductor that supplies power, so that safety can be ensured and damage can be prevented. This is because it can be avoided.

[Assembly method of luminous production unit]
Next, a method for assembling the light emitting effect unit 5000 will be briefly described. First, the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 are sequentially arranged in accordance with the reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decoration body 5040 and the mounting boss hole 5040d, and finally, the member. A lid 5080 that closes the housing recess 5040b is arranged. In this state, the back surface 5040y of the decoration body 5040 and the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080 are arranged on the same plane to be flush with each other, and the end surface of the reverse placement prevention piece 5040c and the end surface of the mounting boss hole 5040d are covered. The above-described first distance dimension is set in advance so that it does not protrude from the back surface 5080y of the body 5080 and is fitted between the front surface 5080x and the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080. Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed and fixed from the through hole 5080b formed on the back surface 5080y side of the lid body 5080 toward the mounting boss hole 5040d. As a result, the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 are arranged and accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the ornament 5050 when the ornament 5040 is viewed from the front.

Subsequently, the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c are attached to a plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed on the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020. And a metal pan screw (not shown) is screwed and fixed from the through hole 5020bb formed in the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b toward the mounting boss hole 5020e, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is formed. A pan head screw is screwed in from the through hole 5020ca formed in the metal plate 5020c toward the mounting boss hole 5020e to be fixed. The end surfaces of the mounting boss holes 5020e do not protrude from the back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c, and the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the front and back surfaces of the metal plate 5020c. The fourth distance dimension described above is set in advance so that it can be accommodated between and.

Subsequently, the lower end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 through the wiring opening 5080d formed in the lid 5080. Then, the upper end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is passed through the wiring opening 5020f formed in the main body mounting portion 5020. A method of attaching the flexible flat cable 5030 to the LED board 5070 will be described later.

Subsequently, the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020 is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 5040e formed on the back surface 5040y of the decoration body 5040 and the mounting boss hole 5080e formed on the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080. A metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed and fixed from the through hole 5020ba formed in the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b toward the mounting boss holes 5040e and 5080e. As described above, the end surfaces of the mounting boss holes 5040e and 5080e do not project from the back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and are fitted between the front and back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b. The second distance dimension and the third distance dimension are preset.

Subsequently, the flexible flat cable 5030 is provided between the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c along the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020. The light emitting effect unit 5000 is assembled by pulling it around.

Incidentally, conventionally, substrates such as a main control board for controlling a game progress and a game profit, a sub-control board for controlling a performance to be executed as the game progresses, and an image control board for controlling display of an image display device and the like. There is proposed a gaming machine in which is arranged on the back side and various wiring members are laid out (for example, JP-A-2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, the game ball supplied from the island facility in the game hall to the game machine is charged with static electricity due to the game balls rubbing against each other when circulating between the island facility in the game hall and the game machine, and thus can be drawn to the game machine. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball on various wiring.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable to the LED board]

Here, a method of attaching the flexible flat cable 5030 to the LED substrate 5070 will be described with reference to FIG. 259. The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070 and inserted all the way. It is electrically connected.

Since the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not normally inserted into the connector 5070d, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb and the plurality of flat conductors A contact failure may occur between the electrode 5030bb and the electrode of the corresponding connector 5070d.

Therefore, on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, as shown in FIG. 259(a), a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are connected to the connector 5070d. The vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) so as to be a mark to be inserted properly. A long solid line G4U extending linearly in the left-right direction on the upper and outer sides and a lower vicinity of a position corresponding to the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). A long solid line guide line G4L linearly extending in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the corresponding position) and a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030. A solid line guideline G4V extending in a straight line that matches the vertical line of the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb is printed by silk printing.

A through hole is not formed in a region where the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 is arranged. This is because even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed by rubbing the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the flat type of the exposed flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed. This is to prevent the conductor from short-circuiting due to the through hole.

[Relationship between the flexible flat cable reinforcing plate and the connector]
When inserting a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, the flat type is used. The conductor electrode 5030bb faces the electrode of the connector 5070d on the back side of the flexible flat cable 5030, whereas the reinforcing plate 5030ca for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb faces the front side of the flexible flat cable 5030. .. Accordingly, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are normally inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. In the inserted state, as shown in FIG. 259(b), the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb and the guideline G4V are arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap with each other in the vertical direction. It should be noted that a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not inserted into the back of the connector 5070d provided on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, that is, the insertion amount ( 259 (c), the left edge 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb by the insufficient insertion amount SRT is separated from the guideline G4V as shown in FIG. 259(c). As described above, in the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer, the worker attaches the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. When inserted and inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the connector 5070d, it is possible to easily visually determine whether or not the electrode 5030bb is normally inserted into the connector 5070d. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the efficiency of the confirmation work.

It should be noted that the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not properly inserted into the back of the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. In the state in which the main body 5030a is inserted obliquely, the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a cannot be visually recognized by covering the guide line G4U extending linearly in the left-right direction, and the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a extends linearly in the horizontal direction. It is in a state of having an inclination with respect to the guideline G4L. Thus, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 by the guide lines G4U and G4L and the reinforcing plate 5030cb. It is possible to easily visually determine whether or not the inserted connector 5070d is normally inserted all the way. Thereby, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, the worker attaches the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. When inserted into the connector 5070d to be mounted, it is possible to easily visually determine whether or not the electrode 5030bb is normally inserted into the connector 5070d. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the efficiency of the confirmation work.

[Modification]
It is to be noted that the flexible flat cable 5030 linearly extends in the left-right direction in the upper vicinity of a position corresponding to the upper side of the lower end of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, in the upper and lower outside of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guideline G4U and the left and right direction in the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower outer side in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guide line G4L extending linearly in the above was printed by silk printing, but a rectangular area having the guide line G4U as the upper side and the guide line G4L as the lower side may be solidly printed by silk printing. .. Even with this configuration, the upper side of the solid-filled rectangular area can function as the guideline G4U, and the lower side of the solid-filled rectangular area can function as the guideline G4L. Further, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed by rubbing the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 with the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 remains. Exposing the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 covered with the resist by preventing the resist from being peeled off due to the peeling of the silk printing in the solid rectangular area. It is possible to prevent the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 from being short-circuited.

Further, the flexible flat cable 5030 linearly extends in the left-right direction near the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, in the upper and outer sides near the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guideline G4U and the left and right direction in the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower outer side in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guide line G4L extending linearly to the above was printed by silk printing, but the rectangular area having the guide line G4U as the upper side and the guide line G4L as the lower side and the back surface of the LED substrate 5070 corresponding to the inside of the area. A foil removal area may be formed on the copper foil surface of (solder surface) 5070y. Even with this configuration, the upper side of the foil-cut rectangular area can function as the guideline G4U, and the lower side of the foil-cut rectangular area can function as the guideline G4L. Further, when the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 rubs against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed and the resist on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 is removed. Even if peeled off, the copper foil surface does not exist in the first place, that is, only the non-conductive base material of the LED substrate 5070 is exposed, and thus the exposed flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 can be prevented from being short-circuited. it can.

Further, the flexible flat cable 5030 linearly extends in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the upper and outer sides of the vicinity of the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guideline G4U and the left and right direction in the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower outer side in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guide line G4L extending linearly to the above was printed by silk printing, but the guide line G4U can be obtained by removing the copper foil in a part of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. , G4L may be formed, or guidelines G4U, G4L are formed by not applying a part of the area with the resist solution when applying the resist solution to the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. May be.

In addition, after the flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are normally inserted into the connector 5070d on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700, the flexible flat cable A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of 5030 are detached from the connector 5070d, and a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030, The flexible flat cable 5030 is attached to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700 in order to prevent a short circuit due to the electrodes 5030bb and the corresponding electrodes of the connector 5070d being slantedly displaced and contacting other electrodes adjacent to each other. A fixed seal having a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction may be attached. In this case, on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700, as a region to which the fixed seal is attached, at a position slightly outward from a position corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal, for example, a hook (") shape. The guideline (which may be a figure such as a line or a symbol) may be printed by silk printing, or may be formed in a part of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700. The guide line in the shape of "()" (may be a figure such as a line or a symbol) may be formed by removing the mark, or the resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700. In this case, a guide line in a shape of a bracket (“() may be a line, symbol, etc.” may be formed by not coating a part of the area with the resist solution.) The flexible flat cable 5030 is fixed to the LED substrate. By being fixed to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of 50700, the posture of the flexible flat cable 5030 can be fixed.

Further, the flexible flat cable 5030 linearly extends in the left-right direction near the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, in the upper and outer sides near the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guideline G4U and the left and right direction in the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower outer side in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). And a long solid line guide line G4L extending linearly to the left and right sides 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030. The solid line guide line G4V extending in a straight line that matches the straight line is formed on the LED substrate 5070, but instead of the solid line, one-dot chain line or two-dot chain line may be used, and the guide lines G4U and G4L are inserted. The guide line G4V may be an arrow line indicating the direction, or may be an arrow indicating the position of the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb.

[Each decorative board for the door frame]
Next, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 75 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 260 to 264. FIG. 260 is a block diagram illustrating electrical connection of each decorative substrate included in the door frame, FIG. 261 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a decorative substrate including one LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. 262 is an LED. FIG. 263 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative substrate provided with two constant current drive circuits, FIG. 263 is a schematic diagram of an arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuits, and FIG. 264 is an LED non-mounting surface in a D part of FIG. 263. It is the enlarged view seen. Here, the electrical connection between each decorative board and the frame door sub relay board included in the door frame 3 will be described, and an outline of the LED constant current drive circuit, a decorative board including the LED constant current drive circuit, and an LED constant current will be described. A method of arranging the drive circuit will be described.

First, as described above, the door frame 3 surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a so that the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, the plate center upper decoration 312a, the door frame left side decoration 404, the side. A side window decoration portion 410b of the window decoration member 412, a door frame right side decoration body 419, and a door frame top decoration body 453 are arranged, respectively, and a plate upper left decoration body 271, a plate upper right decoration body 276, and a plate. Below the center upper decorative body 312a, the plate lower left decorative body 281, the plate lower right decorative body 286, and the plate central lower decorative body 312b are arranged, respectively.

The plate upper left decorative body 271 is provided with a plate upper left decorative substrate 273 formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate extending in the left-right direction along the plate upper left decorative body 271, and a plurality of plate upper left decorative substrates 273 are mounted on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273. Light-emitting decoration is performed by full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment). The plate upper right decoration body 276 is provided with a plate upper right decoration board 278 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending rightward and leftward along the plate upper right decoration body 276, and a plurality of them are mounted on the plate upper right decoration board 278. It is illuminated and decorated with full-color LEDs (five in this embodiment). The plate center upper decorative body 312a is provided with a plate center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate having a semi-arcuate shape along the plate center upper decorative body 312a at the rear thereof. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 314 are used for light emission decoration.

The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate extending vertically along the door frame left side decoration body 404 at the rear of the door frame left side decoration body 404 and the left side upper decoration board 402a and the left side lower decoration board 402b. A door frame left side decoration board 402 configured of and a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on each of the left side upper decoration board 402a and the left side lower decoration board 402b (in this embodiment, the left side upper decoration board 402a). 5 and 10 on the lower left side decorative substrate 402b). The side window interior decoration portion 410b is provided in a plurality of rows in the up-down direction of the side window interior decoration member 412, and behind it, is a side formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate that extends vertically along the side window interior decoration member 412. The decoration part decoration board 413 in the window is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (12 in this embodiment) mounted on the decoration part decoration board 413 in the side window are used for light emission decoration. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate that extends vertically along the door frame right side decorative body 419 on the rear side thereof. The right side upper decorative board 418a and the right side lower decorative board 418b are formed. A door frame right side decoration board 418 composed of is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on each of the right side upper decoration board 418a and the right side lower decoration board 418b (in this embodiment, the right side upper decoration board 418a). 4 and 10 on the lower right side decorative substrate 418b).

The door frame top decoration body 453 is provided with a door frame top center decoration board 455, which is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate extending left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decoration body 453, behind the door frame top decoration body 453. A door frame top left decoration substrate 456 formed in an elongated strip plate extending left and right along the left side portion of the top decoration body 453 is arranged, and extends left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decoration body 453. A plurality of door frame top right decorative boards 457 formed in the shape of an elongated strip are arranged, and a plurality of them are mounted on each of the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Light emission decoration is performed by full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 11 on the door frame top central decoration substrate 455, 7 on the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and 6 on the door frame top right decoration substrate 457).

The plate lower left decorative body 281 is provided with a plate lower left decorative board 283 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending in the left-right direction along the plate lower left decorative body 281 and mounted on the plate lower left decorative board 283. Light-emitting decoration is performed by full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment). The plate lower right decorative body 286 is provided with a plate lower right decorative substrate 288 formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate extending leftward and rightward along the plate lower right decorative body 286 at the rear of the plate lower right decorative substrate 288. A plurality of full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, six LEDs) are mounted for light emission decoration. The dish center lower decorative body 312b has a plate center lower decorative substrate 316 formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate having a semi-arcuate shape along the plate center lower decorative body 312b. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in the present embodiment) mounted on the 316 are used for light emission decoration.

The effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 53, which is provided in the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3, includes the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 that is formed into a shape in which a ring is divided into front and rear, as described above. The production operation ring decoration substrate 352 includes a front decoration substrate 352a formed in a front side semi-arcuate elongated strip plate shape, and a rear decoration substrate 352b formed in a rear side semi-arcuate elongated strip plate shape. ,,. The rotary operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 53 includes a plurality of full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, nine) mounted on the front decoration board 352a and a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the rear decoration board 352b ( In the present embodiment, 9) are used for light emission decoration.

As described above, each of the decorative substrates included in the door frame 3 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate. Thus, by increasing the vertical and horizontal distances of the game board 5, it is possible to provide a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices, etc. on the game board 5 shown in FIG. A body, a large-sized display device, or the like can be provided.

[Electrical connection between each decorative board and sub relay board for frame door]
The plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the left upper upper decorative substrate 402a, the left lower lower decorative substrate 402b, and the side, which are arranged in various decorative bodies and decorative parts provided in the door frame 3. Window decoration part decorative board 413, upper right side decorative board 418a, lower right side decorative board 418b, door frame top central decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, plate lower left decorative board 283, the lower right dish decorative board 288, the lower central dish decorative board 316, the front decorative board 352a, the rear decorative board 352b, and the like, and the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. Electrical connection with the provided door frame sub-relay board 105 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 260.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 included in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is the door frame side first serial system light emission data that is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a included in the peripheral control board 1510 illustrated in FIG. 217. The SDAT1, the clock signal SCLK1, the light emission data SDAT2, which is the door frame side second serial system, and the clock signal SCLK2 are independently input. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 95 to receive DC +12V, and the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630. ) Electrically connected to the line and grounded to the ground (GND).

[Door frame side first serial system]
40. The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the dish unit relays of the dish unit 200 shown in FIG. It is input to the board 214 and the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG. 38.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12V, and ground (GND) input to the dish unit relay board 214 are the dish lower left decoration board 283, the dish lower right decoration board 288, And input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 54.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12V, and ground (GND) input to the plate lower left decoration board 283 are input to the plate upper left decoration board 273, respectively. In other words, the lower left plate of the plate serves as a bridge substrate for transmitting the first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND) to the upper left plate of the plate 273 on the lower left side of the plate. The decorative substrate 283 and the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are electrically connected to each other. A door frame lower side decorative board 283 serving as a bridge board receives the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12V, and ground (GND) from the dish unit relay board 214, respectively. Not provided is provided with an input connector, and not shown for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12V, and ground (GND) to the plate upper left decoration substrate 273, respectively. An output connector is provided. On the other hand, the plate lower left decoration board 283 is electrically connected to the plate lower left decoration board 283 (that is, the latter and final stages of the plate lower left decoration board 283). The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the direct current +12V, and the ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors, are not provided. ..

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12V, and ground (GND) input to the plate lower right decoration board 288 are input to the plate upper right decoration board 278, respectively. In other words, the dish lower right decoration board 288 serves as a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12V, and ground (GND) to the plate upper right decoration board 278. The lower right decorative substrate 288 and the dish upper right decorative substrate 278 are electrically connected to each other. A door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12V, and ground (GND) from the dish unit relay substrate 214 are input to the dish lower right decoration substrate 288 serving as a bridge substrate. An input connector (not shown) is provided, and a door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12V, and ground (GND) are output to the dish upper right decoration board 278, respectively. No output connector is provided. On the other hand, the dish lower right decoration board 288 is electrically connected to the dish lower right decoration board 288 (that is, the latter and final stages of the dish lower right decoration board 288). Only the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors 288 not shown, are provided. ing.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300, are the decoration board 314 on the plate center and the plate. Inputs are made to the lower central decoration board 316 and the front decoration board 352a of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, respectively.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12V, and ground (GND) input to the front decoration board 352a are input to the rear decoration board 352b, respectively. That is, the front decoration board 352a serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12V, and ground (GND) to the rear decoration board 352b. The rear decoration substrate 352b is electrically connected to the beads. On the front decorative board 352a serving as a bridge board, the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12V, and ground (GND) from the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 are respectively provided. An input connector (not shown) for input is provided, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12V, and ground (GND) are output to the rear decorative substrate 352b, respectively. An output connector (not shown) is provided. On the other hand, the rear decorative board 352b electrically connected to the front decorative board 352a (that is, the latter and final stages of the front decorative board 352a) has an output connector (not shown) of the front decorative board 352a. The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V DC, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the above, are provided only with input connectors (not shown).

Here, for example, the plate lower left decoration board 283 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12V, and ground (GND) are input from the plate unit relay board 214 will be briefly described. Then, the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, a heat distribution circuit 283c, and six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6. The LED constant current driving circuit 283a is a sink type constant current driving circuit 283x capable of flowing a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a maximum current setting capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing to the sdLED1 to sdLED6. It is mainly composed of a circuit 283y. The constant current drive circuit 283x controls to supply a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the dish unit relay board 214. Since the constant current drive circuit 283x is a sink (sink) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x is taken over by the heat distribution circuit 283c, so that the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x can be dispersed.

Further, for example, a brief description will be given of the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12V, and ground (GND) from the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 are input. The plate upper left decoration substrate 273 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat distribution circuit 273c, and six full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current driving circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current driving circuit 283a of the lower left decorative substrate 283, and is a sink type constant current driving circuit 273x capable of flowing a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6. , SuLED1 to suLED6, and a maximum current setting circuit 273y capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing through suLED1 to suLED6. The constant current drive circuit 273x controls to supply a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the plate lower left decoration board 283. Since the constant current drive circuit 273x is a sink (sink) type as described above, it generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x is taken over by the heat distribution circuit 273c, so that the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x can be dispersed.

[Door frame side second serial system]
The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current +12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are decorations on the lower left side of the door frame left side decoration board 402. While being input to the board 402b, the decoration part decoration board 413 in the side window, the right side lower decoration board 418b of the door frame right side decoration board 418, and the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. 73. Have been entered respectively.

The direct current +12V and the ground (GND) input to the lower left side decorative board 402b of the door frame left side decorative board 402 are input to the upper left side decorative board 402a of the door frame left side decorative board 402. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, are the door frame top right decoration board. Has been input to 457.

The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current +12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are input to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top right decorative board 457 serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current +12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top central decorative board 455. Thus, the door frame top right decoration board 457 and the door frame top center decoration board 455 are electrically connected to each other. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457, which serves as a bridge substrate, includes a door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12V, and ground from the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450. Not-shown input connectors for respectively inputting (GND) are provided, and the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current +12V, and ground (GND) are provided at the center of the door frame top. An output connector (not shown) for outputting each to the decorative substrate 455 is provided. Further, the door frame top center decorative board 455 electrically connected to the door frame top right decorative board 457 (that is, the latter stage of the door frame top right decorative board 457) includes the door frame top right decorative board 457 illustrated. A door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current +12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors, are provided, and input connectors (not shown) are provided. , A door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current +12V, and ground (GND) are provided to the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, respectively, and output connectors (not shown) are provided. ..

The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current +12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the door frame top central decorative board 455, are input to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top central decoration board 455 serves as a bridge board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decoration board 456. Thus, the door frame top central decoration board 455 and the door frame top left decoration board 456 are electrically connected in a beaded state. On the other hand, the door frame top left decoration board 456 electrically connected to the door frame top center decoration board 455 (that is, the latter and final stages of the door frame top center decoration board 455) has a door. Door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current +12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors (not shown) of the frame top central decoration board 455, are input respectively. Only the connector for is provided.

Here, for example, of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current +12V, and ground (GND) are input from the door frame sub relay substrate 105. The left side lower decorative substrate 402b will be briefly described. The left side lower decorative substrate 402b includes two LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, a heat distribution circuit 402bc, and ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. ..

The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the plate lower left decoration board 283 and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the plate upper left decoration board 273, and applies a constant current to hdLED1 to hdLED8. It is mainly configured by a sink type constant current drive circuit 402bax capable of performing the above, and a maximum current setting circuit 402bay capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing through the hdLED1 to hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax applies a constant current to eight full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105. Take control.

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the plate lower left decoration board 283, and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the plate upper left decoration board 273. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the sink (sink) type capable of supplying a constant current to the hdLED10 and the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side decorative substrate 402a, the hdLED9, the hdLED10, and the left. It is mainly composed of a maximum current setting circuit 402by capable of setting the maximum current of the currents flowing through the huLED1 to huLED5 of the side decorative substrate 402a. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 and is mounted on the board (left side lower decorative board 402b) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted. The constant current is controlled to flow through the hdLED9, the hdLED10, and the huLED1 to huLED5 of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a.

Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (sink) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the huLED1 to huLED8. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (sink) type as described above, heat is generated by absorbing the constant current flowing through the hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax is handled by the heat distribution circuit 402bc, so that the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed. Further, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be dispersed by the heat distribution circuit 402bc and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a. ing.

As described above, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed only by the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the substrate (left side lower decorative substrate 402b) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is mounted. On the other hand, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx becomes a subsequent substrate in addition to the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the substrate (left side lower decorative substrate 402b) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted. The heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a can disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to flow a constant current to the huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a which is a succeeding substrate across the substrate (left side lower decorative substrate 402b) on which the constant current driving circuit 402bbx is mounted. Has been done. Therefore, the work of electrically connecting the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the left side upper decorative substrate 402a is inevitably involved. A worker who performs this work has his finger touching the connector of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the connector of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, or the left side upper decorative substrate 402a. Since the distributed circuit 402ac is touched, it is necessary to prevent the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the left side upper decorative substrate 402a from being damaged by static electricity. Therefore, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration substrate 402a have the function of distributing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx, It also has a function to prevent damage to electronic components due to.

As described above, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a receives the direct current +12V and the ground (GND) from the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and also has five full color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. Lines for passing current are input respectively. As described above, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a includes the heat distribution circuit 402ac in addition to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. As described above, the heat distribution circuit 402ac has a function of preventing heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bbx and a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

[Light emission data]
Here, the light emission data SDAT1, SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. And key information. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits is to be designated among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The gradation information is information indicating which of the gradation 0 (zero) to the gradation 127 is to be specified.

[Outline of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, an outline of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is the same circuit, and therefore the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided on the dish lower left decorative substrate 283 will be described here. As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a sets a sink (constant) type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of supplying a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 and a maximum current of the current supplied to the sdLED1 to sdLED6. And a maximum current setting circuit 283y capable of

[Constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels and can output current for each channel. In the present embodiment, the output channel LR is provided for an LED element that emits red (R), an LED element that emits green (G), and an LED element that emits blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. , LG, and LB are individually controlled to use three output channels. That is, in the present embodiment, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for up to eight full color LEDs with one constant current drive circuit. You can do it.

The constant current drive circuit 283x includes a linear power supply 283xa, a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current drive unit 283xi. It is mainly composed.

[Linear power supply]
The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit that receives +12V DC from the +12V power supply line and can generate and supply an internal power supply Vreg (DC +5V in this embodiment) to be used in the constant current drive circuit 283x. The internal power supply Vreg generated by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit. The internal power supply Vreg supplies the reset unit 283xb, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi. Is able to work.

The constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the +5V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. 95, and independently creates +DC 5V as the internal power supply Vreg to generate the constant current drive circuit. It is used within 283x. This is because when the +5V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 is used, the +5V power supply line is used by laying out the electric wiring, and therefore the length of the +5V power supply line supplying DC +5V is reduced. It becomes longer and noise easily enters. Then, if external noise is transmitted to the +5V power supply line and DC +5V is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, there is a possibility that the LED may flicker under the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the +5V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 is not necessary for the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the +12V power supply line having extremely high noise resistance compared to the +5V power supply line is used. In the linear power supply 283xa of the current drive circuit 283x, a configuration in which direct current +5V is created as the internal power supply Vreg is adopted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg by using the internal power supply Vreg from the constant current drive circuit 283x to the other substrate without using the internal power supply Vreg. Since it can be made difficult, the internal power supply Vreg can be stabilized. As a result, the internal power supply Vreg is stabilized, which can contribute to preventing flicker of the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 due to external noise. Therefore, it is possible to increase resistance to external noise. Further, the electric wiring for input and the electric wiring for external transmission to the +5V power source line are not required, which can contribute to miniaturization of the connector.

[Reset part]
The reset unit 283xb creates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa and outputs it to the constant current drive circuit 283x to initialize the constant current drive circuit 283x and operate the constant current drive circuit 283x. It is a so-called power-on reset circuit that can be started. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset unit 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi. Then, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi are initialized, and the data line buffer 283xc, The clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi are started.

The constant current drive circuit 283x does not receive the reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 206, for example, and creates a reset signal independently as the internal reset signal RST and uses it in the constant current drive circuit 283x. There is. For example, if a line for transmitting a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter, referred to as “reset signal transmission line”) is used, this reset signal transmission line can be used by drawing an electric wiring. Therefore, the length of the reset signal transmission line for transmitting the reset signal becomes long, and noise easily enters. Then, if the external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the constant current drive circuit 283x may be reset by the influence of the external noise and the LED may be turned off. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the reset signal transmission line is not required in the constant current drive circuit 283x, and the reset unit 283xb of the constant current drive circuit 283x independently creates the reset signal as the internal reset signal RST. did.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external substrate, and the internal reset signal RST is not output from the constant current driving circuit 283x to another substrate, and only in the constant current driving circuit 283x. By using it, it is possible to make it difficult for external noise to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST, and therefore it is possible to stabilize the internal reset signal RST. As a result, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x due to external noise is not reset, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, It is possible to contribute to prevention of unexpected turning off and flickering of the LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it is possible to increase resistance to external noise. Further, the electric wiring for input to the reset signal transmission line and the electric wiring for external transmission are not required, which can contribute to miniaturization of the connector.

[buffer]
The data line buffer 283xc is a line (hereinafter, referred to as “data line”) for transmitting serial data (here, the light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. From the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. The clock line buffer 283xd is a line (hereinafter, referred to as “clock line”) that transmits a clock signal (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. From the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x.

As described above, the data line and the clock line are transmitted across a plurality of boards and relay boards. For this reason, both the data line and the clock line are long, and noise easily enters. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by providing the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd in the constant current drive circuit 283x, noise that has entered the data line or the clock line immediately before being input to the constant current drive circuit 283x is provided. Is so shaped that the waveforms are shaped in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd so as not to be transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and the subsequent substrate.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even when both the data line and the clock line are long, it is possible to form the data line and the clock line resistant to noise. As a result, signal transmission that is resistant to noise can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to increase resistance to external noise.

[Address setting part]
The address setting unit 283xe sets 64 types of addresses as IDs (IDs capable of identifying the individual) of the constant current drive circuit 283x by three ID resistors (not shown) based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa. You can do it.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ID capable of identifying the individual constant current drive circuit 283x is preset by the address setting unit 283xe by the hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). However, it is not set properly by receiving data by software.

[Oscillator, logic processor]
In the logic processing unit 283xg, serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x shaped in the data line buffer 283xc (here, the light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) and the clock line buffer 283xd. A clock signal (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the shaped constant current drive circuit 283x is input. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) based on the address that is its own ID set by the address setting unit 283xe. Sometimes, the gradation information is fetched from this serial data, and the gradation degree in the output channel is set in the PWM unit 283xh based on the signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf so as to be the fetched gradation information. On the other hand, when the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in this serial data is not taken in and is set in the PWM unit 283xh. Control to maintain the current contents.

[PWM part]
The PWM unit 283xh can control the brightness (gradation level) of the LED in each output channel in a total of 128 steps from gradation off to lighting (maximum brightness) from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127. One output channel is gradation-controlled by one PWM gradation control unit (not shown). That is, the PWM unit 283xh includes the PWM gradation control units 1 to PWM gradation control units 24 corresponding to the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 individually (that is, 24 PWM gradation control units). ing. When the gradation level is set, each of the PWM gradation control section 1 to the PWM gradation control section 24 controls the constant current drive section 283xi so that a current having the set gradation level flows.

[Constant current driver]
The constant current driving unit 283xi has one constant (not shown) for one output channel so that the gradation levels are set in the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 included in the PWM unit 283xh described above. A current driver causes a constant current to flow through the LED element that constitutes the full-color LED. That is, the constant current drive unit 283xi includes the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24 individually (that is, 24 constant current drivers) corresponding to the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24.

Each of the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 has one end of a resistor Rr that sets a maximum current flowing through a red (R) emitting LED element that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels LR1 to LR8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). Each of the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 has one end of a resistor Rg that sets a maximum current flowing through a green (G) emitting LED element that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels LG1 to LG8. The resistor Rg is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). Each of the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 has one end of a resistor Rb that sets a maximum current flowing through a blue (B) emitting LED element that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels LB1 to LB8. The resistor Rb is electrically connected and the other end is grounded to the ground (GND).

The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the blue (B) LED element, which form a full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24, respectively. The anode terminal is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line and receives +12V DC.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements that form the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 are output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current driver) via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. 1 to the constant current driver 8) so that the constant currents flowing through the red (R) LED elements that form the full-color LED can be respectively sucked into the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 side. Is becoming The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements that form the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 are output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current driver) via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. 9 to the constant current driver 16), and the constant currents flowing in the green (G) LED elements forming the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 side, respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements forming the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 are output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, the constant current driver) via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. 17 to the constant current driver 24), and the constant currents flowing in the blue (B) LED elements that form the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 side, respectively. ing.

The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 respectively absorb the constant currents flowing in the red (R) LED elements that form the individually set full-color LED, thereby making the red (R) LED elements that form the full-color LED. Can emit light. The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 respectively absorb the constant currents flowing in the green (G) LED elements that configure the individually set full-color LEDs, and thus the green (G) LED elements that configure the full-color LEDs. Can emit light. The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 respectively absorb the constant currents flowing in the blue (B) LED elements that configure the individually set full-color LEDs, and thereby the blue (B) LED elements that configure the full-color LEDs. Can emit light.

As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit can perform the dimming lighting by emitting 24 LED elements, that is, eight full-color LEDs with the constant current set individually, and thus the dimming lighting is performed. Thus, it is possible to turn off, turn on at one gradation, blink at one gradation, and the like.

[Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes a resistor Rr that sets the maximum current to flow in the LED element that emits red (R) that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels LR1 to LR8 described above, and the output channels LG1 to LG1. Resistor Rg that sets the maximum current flowing through the LED element that emits green (G) that constitutes a full-color LED in eight output channels up to LG8 and full-color LEDs in eight output channels up to output channels LB1 to LB8 are configured. It is composed of a resistor Rb that sets a maximum current flowing through an LED element that emits blue (B) light.

As described above, one end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 included in the constant current driver 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 included in the constant current driver 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 provided in the constant current drive unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND). There is.

[Decorative board with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the decorative substrate including the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 261 and 262. Here, a decorative substrate including one LED constant current driving circuit will be described, and a decorative substrate including two LED constant current driving circuits will be described. The LED constant current drive circuits provided on the respective decorative substrates of the door frame 3 are configured as the same circuit. Therefore, in FIGS. 261 and 262, the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals for convenience of description.

[Decorative board with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decoration substrate having one LED constant current drive circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. 261, the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 is an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a heat generator. The distribution circuit 283c is provided.

As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 included in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is the light emission data SDAT1 which is the door frame side first serial system serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a included in the peripheral control board 1510. , The clock signal SCLK1 is input. As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 to receive +12V DC, and electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. It is connected and grounded to the ground (GND).

As described above, the plate lower left decoration board 283 has the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the direct current +12V, and the ground (GND) of the plate unit 200 from the door frame sub-relay board 105. It is input through the dish unit relay board 214. The direct current +12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a and constitutes sdLED1 to sdLED6 which are full-color LEDs, the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and It is also input to the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements that form sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistances sdRr1 to sdRr6 (the constant current described above). It is electrically connected to the drivers 1 to 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that form sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-mentioned constant currents) via the heat dispersion resistors sdRg1 to sdRg6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 9 to the constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that compose the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are output channels LB1 to LB6 (the constant current described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistors sdRb1 to sdRb6, respectively. The driver 17 to the constant current driver 22) are electrically connected. The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a are not connected.

The LED constant current drive circuit 283a starts from the light emission data SDAT1 when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1). Gradation information is captured, and sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled and dimmed to be the captured gradation information.

Since the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is of the sink type as described above, it heats up by absorbing the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) is taken up by the heat dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, sdRb1 to sdRb6, which constitute the heat distribution circuit 283c. As a result, the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more accurately, the constant current drive circuit 283x) can be dispersed.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 is decorated on the upper left side of the dish via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current drive circuit 283x described above). While being input to the board 273, +12V DC and ground (GND) are input to the plate upper left decoration board 273 via the plate lower left decoration board 283. As a result, the noise that has entered the data line and the clock line immediately before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-mentioned constant current drive circuit 283x) is prevented from being transmitted to the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 which is the subsequent substrate. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a can shape the waveform (in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd included in the constant current drive circuit 283x described above).

The direct current +12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, and constitutes the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and It is also input to the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (via the constant currents described above) via the heat dispersion resistors suRr1 to suRr6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the drivers 1 to 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are output channels LG1 to LG6 (the constant current described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistors suRg1 to suRg6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 9 to the constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements forming the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (the above-mentioned constant currents) via the heat dispersion resistors suRb1 to suRb6, respectively. The driver 17 to the constant current driver 22) are electrically connected. The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

The LED constant current drive circuit 273a starts from the light emission data SDAT1 when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1). Gradation information is captured, and the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled and dimmed and turned on so that the captured gradation information is obtained.

Since the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is of the sink type as described above, it heats up by absorbing the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) is responsible for the heat dispersion resistances suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, suRb1 to suRb6, which constitute the heat distribution circuit 273c. As a result, it is possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x).

As a decorative substrate having one LED constant current drive circuit, in addition to the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 and the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate lower right decorative substrate 288, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456. , And the door frame top right decorative substrate 457.

[Decorative board with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. 262, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has LED constant current drive circuits 402ba, 402bb, and 10 full-color LEDs, hdLED1. ~ The hdLED 10 and the heat distribution circuit 402bc are provided.

As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 included in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is the light emission data SDAT2 that is the door frame side second serial system serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a included in the peripheral control board 1510. , The clock signal SCLK2 is input. As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 to receive +12V DC, and electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. It is connected and grounded to the ground (GND).

As described above, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b receives the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub relay substrate 105. There is. The direct current +12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, and the anode terminals of the red (R) LED elements and the anode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that form the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. , And the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements, respectively.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 with respect to a maximum of eight full color LEDs by one constant current drive circuit. It can be controlled. For this reason, among the 10 full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba controls the light emission mode for the eight full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, and the remaining two LEDs. For the hdLED9 and the hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb controls the light emission mode. Further, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a which is a subsequent substrate across the substrate on which the LED constant current driving circuit 402bb is mounted (that is, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). The light emitting modes of the huLED1 to huLED5 are controlled.

Of the 10 full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to sdLED8, are the same as the eight full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8. Through the heat dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, electrically connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 described above), the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are output channels LG1 to LG8 (constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via heat dispersion resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, are connected to the output channel LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via the heat dispersion resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively. To LB8 (constant current driver 17 to constant current driver 24 described above) are electrically connected.

Of the 10 full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, the two full-color LEDs, hdLED9 and hdLED10, are compared with the full-color LEDs, hdLED9 and sdLED10. Through the heat dispersion resistances hdRr9 and hdRr10, the LEDs are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 and LR2 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (constant current driver 1 and constant current driver 2 described above), and full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are connected. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are output channels LG1 and LG2 (constant current driver 9 and constant current driver 10 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via heat dispersion resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10, respectively. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to the full-color LEDs, that is, the hdLED9 and the hdLED10, are connected to the output channel LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistors hdRb9 and hdRb10, respectively. , LB2 (constant current driver 17 and constant current driver 18 described above) are electrically connected.

In addition, for the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left-side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is a substrate subsequent to the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, reds (huLED1 to huLED5 that are full-color LEDs are configured). The cathode terminals of the LED elements of R) are respectively connected to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistances huRr1b to huRr5b of the left side upper decoration substrate 402a and the heat dispersion resistances huRr1a to huRr5a of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (constant current driver 3 to constant current driver 7 described above) of the huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, respectively. Output channels LG3 to LG7 (constant current driver described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat distribution resistances huRg1b to huRg5b on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the heat distribution resistances huRg1a to huRg5a on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. 11-constant current driver 15), the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are respectively the heat-dispersion resistors huRb1b- electrically connected to the output channels LB3 to LB7 (constant current driver 19 to constant current driver 23 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the huRb5b and the heat dispersion resistors huRb1a to huRb5a on the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Has been done. The output channels LR8, LG8, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are not connected.

Based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba outputs the light emission data SDAT2 from the light emission data SDAT2 when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID. Gradation information is taken in, and eight full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, among the ten full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, are individually controlled and dimmed so as to obtain the taken-in gradation information. ..

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a door frame side second serial system (light emission data) that is input via the data line buffer 402baxc and the clock line buffer 402baxd in the constant current drive circuit 402bax that constitutes the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. If the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID based on SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2), gradation information is fetched from this light emission data SDAT2, and the fetched gradation information is set to 10 Of the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, the remaining two full-color LEDs, hdLED9 and hdLED10, are individually controlled to perform dimming and lighting, and the left side, which is the subsequent board to the left-side lower decorative board 402b. The five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the upper decorative substrate 402a are individually controlled to perform dimming lighting.

Since the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (sink) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the eight hdLED1 to hdLED8 out of the ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. To do. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more accurately, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) is taken up by the heat distribution resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, hdRb1 to hdRb8, which constitute the heat distribution circuit 402bc. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more accurately, the constant current drive circuit 402bax).

As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (sink) type, it absorbs the constant current flowing through the two hdLED9 and hdLED10 out of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, and the left side. Heat is generated by absorbing the constant currents flowing through the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a which is a substrate subsequent to the side lower decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (correctly, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is converted into two full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, for two hdLED9 and hdLED10. The heat dissipating resistances hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, and hdRb10, which constitute the heat dispersal circuit 402bc, are responsible for the heat dissipating circuit 402bc, and are mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is the subsequent substrate of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. For huLED1 to huLED5 which are full-color LEDs, the heat distribution circuits huRr1a to hudRr5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, huRb1a to huRb5a, which constitute the heat distribution circuit 402bc in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the left side upper decorative substrate 402a. The heat distribution of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more accurately, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is distributed by the heat dispersion resistances huRr1b to hudRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, huRb1b to huRb5b that compose the heat distribution circuit 402ac in FIG. You can do it.

Further, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration substrate 402a are, as described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (correctly, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx). In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by, it also has the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

As a decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, in addition to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the plate center lower decorative substrate 316, the side window decoration decorative substrate 413, the right side. There is a lower decorative board 418b and a door frame top central decorative board 455.

Further, as a decorative substrate having no LED constant current driving circuit, there is a right upper decorative substrate 418a in addition to the left upper decorative substrate 402a.

[Arrangement method of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 263 and 264. In the present embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is the same circuit as described above. Here, description will be given as an electronic component in which the constant current drive circuit forming the LED constant current drive circuit is integrated on one semiconductor chip. As a type of IC package of the constant current drive circuit, a surface mount type (SMD, height: 0.9 mm) having a square planar shape (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm) is used. ) And so-called VQFN. Of the four sides of the constant current drive circuit, one side is an input side and the remaining three sides are an output side 1 to an output side 3, respectively. Note that in FIG. 264, various electronic components are omitted and some silk printing is omitted for the sake of easy viewing of the drawing.

As described above, each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in an elongated strip plate shape, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. There is. Since the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuits on each of the decorative boards of the door frame 3 is almost the same, here, the left side formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits is formed. The lower decorative substrate 402b and the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semi-arcuate shape will be described.

[Bottom left side decorative board]
As shown in FIG. 263(a), the left side lower decorative substrate 402b includes LED constant current drive circuits 402ba, 402bb, ten full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, and the like. The ten full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb are mounted. It is mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, which is the back side of the pachinko machine 1. A connector LDUCN for connecting electrical wiring to the left side upper decoration substrate 402a is mounted on the upper end side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, and the LED is not mounted on the left side lower decoration substrate 402b. A connector LDLCN for connecting the door frame sub-relay board 105 and electrical wiring is mounted on the lower end side of the surface 402by.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, electrodes (so-called pads) for soldering electronic components such as full-color LEDs, resistors, ICs, connectors, through holes, test pads, A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”) on the entire area excluding lands and the like. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the reflectance of the front side (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is made by the white resist which is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Can be increased.

On the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the positions to arrange the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are shown. The area and the silk screen are not printed at all. Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the board management number of the left side lower decorative board 402b is not formed as a blank character by a white resist.

This is because the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b due to the emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. To prevent that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b from being lowered by the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

The door frame left side decoration 404 shown in FIG. 75 provided on the door frame 3 is attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side inner lens 403, as described above. A left side inner lens 403 is attached to the rear of the door frame left side decorative body 404. As described above, the left-side inner lens 403 is transparent, and is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so as to be able to irregularly refract light. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 arranged at the rear of is difficult to be clearly seen from the player side. A player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face) to change the line of sight depending on the direction of the head (face), and temporarily the left side lower decorative substrate 402b provided in the door frame left side decorative body 404. Even when the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface 402bx, in the first place, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the full color LEDs hdLED1 to Since the part number corresponding to the hdLED10 and the area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed by silk printing at all, it corresponds to the full-color LED which has no relation to the game for the player. It prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged. Therefore, a number identifying the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10) and an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, the full-color LED It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize a certain area (where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged).

The part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and the region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged are completely silk-printed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Not printed. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN, which has no relation to the game to the player, and the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the white resist layer is formed of the solid white resist. Each of the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also referred to as a natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of the same color as). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface (painted in solid). The full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as the white resist that covers the whole (solid coating) are mounted. As described above, in the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b at all. Not not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs, so Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the board management number of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is a foil-cut character (that is, a wiring that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) where a wiring pattern is formed). It is formed as a character formed by patterning and removing the copper foil around it, and the foil-removed character is formed by the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Is covered. The wiring pattern forming the characters without the foil is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. The board management number of the left-side lower decorative board 402b is not the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative board 402b, but the foil removal character (that is, the wiring pattern) on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative board 402b. May be formed as a character formed by a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which is formed and a peripheral copper foil is removed to form a character). Foil-free characters are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (that is, characters are formed by a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, They may be formed as blank characters formed by pulling out the copper foil). Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a solid earth as described later. Therefore, the board management number of the lower left side decorative board 402b is a character without a foil (that is, a character is made with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) where a wiring pattern is formed, and the copper foil around it is removed. Not formed as a blank character) formed on one side or both sides of the solid ground of the LED mounting surface 402bx and the solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 402by. May be.

On the other hand, on the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the maximum current setting circuit 402bay that configure the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba are provided. Areas indicating positions for arranging electronic parts such as resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistances are printed by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk printing, and electronic parts are provided in the vicinity of these areas. Part numbers corresponding to are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, a region showing the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is silk-printed with a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 264(a)) on the lower left side decorative substrate. It is printed on a solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b, and is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax in the vicinity of and above the area LSLKa. (see a)) is printed by silk-colored solid yellow line (or black solid line) on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Then, the areas indicating the positions where the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged are yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd as silk printing (see FIG. 264(a)). Is printed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the maximum current is set in the vicinity of these areas LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd to the right. The resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the circuit 402bay and the corresponding part numbers R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 264(a)) are yellow (or black) as silk printing, and the LED of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is It is printed on a white resist which is solidly coated on the non-mounting surface 402by.

Further, on the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, it corresponds to hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The areas to be silk-screened are yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10 (in FIG. 264(a), only chain lines LSLK4 and LSLK5 corresponding to hdLED4 and hdLED5, which are full-color LEDs, respectively). The part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed in the vicinity of these areas LSLK1 to LSLK10 and are located above or below these areas (in FIG. 264(a), the part numbers are full-color LEDs hdLED4 and hdLED5). Only LED4 and LED5, which are the corresponding part numbers, are respectively shown) are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing.

It is to be noted that, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region showing a position where the connector LDLCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is arranged. Is printed with a yellow chain line (or black chain line) not shown as silk printing, and the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed with yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing near this area. ing.

In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip does not have the white color. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of resin having a color of black, brown, or blue. As described above, since resistors, capacitors, ICs, and other electronic components that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have a reduced reflectance due to the emission of light from a full-color LED, the LED non-mounting surface It is implemented in.

Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b, lighting tests are individually performed on the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b (for example, (For each LED element, the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B) that make up one full-color LED) A plurality of check pins (not shown) can be formed as a test pad (or through hole) that is connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the check pins in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins are the lower left side decorations. On the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the substrate 402b, yellow (or black) not shown is printed as silk printing. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who carries out the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other so as to be electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

In the embodiment, the electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and the connector that does not have white that reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs are LEDs that emit light from full-color LEDs. Since the reflectance on the mounting surface is lowered, it was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all, but the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface by the emission of the full-color LED is the LED mounting surface. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectivity in, the electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and the connector that does not have white color may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface, a region indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is printed by silk-screening with a yellow chain line (or a black chain line) not shown. At the same time, a part number corresponding to the electronic part or the connector is printed in the yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing near this area.

The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a so-called solid earth, which grounds a region other than a land pattern and a wiring pattern of an electronic component or a connector to a ground (GND). The solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the solid ground formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). There is.

As described above, the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is formed in the shape of an elongated strip that extends vertically, so that the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. The width dimension from the left edge 402beg1 to the right edge 402beg2 is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx. Therefore, when the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the land of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx is arranged. Since the distance dimension between the edge of the pattern and the left edge 402beg1 or the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b becomes extremely short, let's extract the wiring pattern from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on that edge. However, it is difficult to pull out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the end side because there is a limitation of the minimum distance dimension in the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the interval between the wiring patterns adjacent to each other. ..

Therefore, in this embodiment, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Adopted the configuration.

In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, the lower right side of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx is the input side when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. By arranging the input terminal on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b closer to the left end side 402beg1 so as to be the terminal on the left side, the input terminal is on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) shown in FIG. ), DC +12V, and ground (GND), and the resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402by are input, and the left lower end side, the upper left end side, and the upper right end side are each mainly from the output side 1 terminal to the output side. The terminals of the output side 1 to the terminals of the output side 3 are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2 shown in FIG. 262. , Clock signal SCLK2) and the like. The terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistance Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402by is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have terminals to which a ground (GND) is input. There is.

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, of the four edge sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx, two edge sides are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition to being able to be arranged as a state, the remaining two end sides can be arranged as being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. As a result, the minimum distance dimension is limited to the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the interval between adjacent wiring patterns from the lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx. Even all wiring patterns can be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region where the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn from the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically.

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, among the eight full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, a group 1 including four full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED4, and four full-color LEDs are provided. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be arranged between the group 2 composed of hdLED5 to hdLED8, the length of the constant current drive circuit 402bax when the wiring pattern is routed from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the group 1 and the group 2 is extended. Can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of routing the wiring patterns to the group 1 and the group 2 from becoming long or short in one group of the group 1 and the group 2, which is long and short. It is possible to improve the efficiency of wiring pattern arrangement and routing in the work.

In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is provided in the central portion in the up-down direction on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (the full-color LED hdLED6 in FIG. 263(a)). The constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be arranged closer to the lower side than the (arranged portion), and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be arranged at the central portion in the vertical direction on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (FIG. 263(a)). Of the full-color LED, which is closer to the upper side than the full-color LED, which is the full-color LED, and can be arranged above the hdLED 8 which is a full-color LED configured in group 2 whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 402bax. .. Accordingly, it is possible to secure a region for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the eight full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and from the constant current drive circuit 402bbx. The two left-side lower decorative substrates are two full-color LEDs, hdLED9, hdLED10, and five left-side upper decorative substrates 402a shown in FIG. 262, which are wiring regions for wiring patterns to huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs. It can be secured in 402b.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay, 402by, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and a capacitor (not shown) are surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and are so-called EIA type 0805 (designated 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length. S: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitors (not shown) are larger than those of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Extremely small. Therefore, unlike the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitors (not shown) have resistors Rr, Rg, Rb whose one end in the longitudinal direction is the left end of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The capacitor (not shown) is arranged so as to be parallel to the 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2, and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor is perpendicular to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Are arranged as follows. In other words, each side of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx arranged such that the side of the land pattern is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left side 402beg1 and the right side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the resistance. Rr, Rg, and Rb are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b so as to be non-parallel to one side of the capacitor (not shown) in the longitudinal direction.

Further, as described above, the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is such that the edge side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is 45 with respect to the left edge side and the right edge side of the decorative board. The door frame top central decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 of the door frame top decoration body 453 are the doors although they are arranged in a tilted state and are almost the same. Unlike the other decorative boards of the frame 3, the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged in the door frame top decorative body 453 in the decorative board. Since the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side is large, the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is set to the door frame top central decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457. Are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper end side and the lower end side. That is, in this embodiment, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate, and the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is not parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate. And are mixed. In the present embodiment, the door frame top central decorative board 455 includes, in addition to the 11 full-color LEDs included therein, another central decorative board on which 5 full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted. LED constant current drive circuit (first LED constant current drive circuit (first constant current drive circuit, first maximum current setting circuit), second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, Second LED constant current drive circuit (here, second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, second maximum current setting circuit)) Not equipped with two heat distribution circuits (first constant current drive circuit is first heat distribution circuit (heat distribution resistance), second constant current drive circuit is second heat distribution circuit (heat distribution resistance)) The door frame top left decorative board 456 directly controls light emission via the, and in addition to the seven full-color LEDs provided in itself, another left-decorative board on which one full-color LED (not shown) is mounted is not shown. 1 LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit, maximum current setting circuit) provided in the above directly controls light emission via one heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance) provided in itself (not shown), and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is a single LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit) equipped with itself, not shown, in addition to the six full color LEDs provided with itself, with another right decoration board on which two not shown full color LEDs are mounted. , The maximum current setting circuit) directly controls light emission via one heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance) provided in itself (not shown). Then, the other central decorative board is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate extending left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the other left decorative board is the left side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. Is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate that extends in the left-right direction along the, and the other right decorative substrate is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate that extends in the left-right direction along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. It is necessary to provide a heat distribution circuit (heat dispersion resistance) on each of the other central decoration board, the other left decoration board, and the other right decoration board. The door frame top central heat dissipation circuit (here, the second heat dissipation circuit (heat dissipation resistance)) provided in the central decorative substrate 455 itself and the heat dissipation circuit of the other central decorative substrate are, as described above, the door frame top. In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the second LED constant current drive circuit (to be exact, the second constant current drive circuit) provided on the central decorative substrate 455 itself, it is possible to prevent damage to electronic components due to static electricity. It also has a function that can be done. Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided in the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and the heat distribution circuit of the other left decoration substrate are the LED constant current drive circuit (exactly In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit, it also has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity. Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided in the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 and the heat distribution circuit of the other right decoration substrate are the LED constant current drive circuit (exactly In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit, it also has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

Further, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and 10 full color LEDs are arranged. When the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is closer to the right end side 402beg2 and along the vertical direction of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. And the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are located closer to the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The configuration is adopted in which it is arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. As described above, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are of a sink (sink) type and generate heat by sucking the constant current flowing through each LED element. Therefore, even in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, by separating the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx and the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, The heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx can be made less susceptible to the ten full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10.

Further, by arranging the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuit One in which the end sides of the land patterns of 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left edge and the right edge of the decorative board (that is, the door frame top central decorative board 455 of the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative) Compared to the board 456 and the door frame top right decoration board 457), the one in which the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right edges of the decoration board is more decorative board. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side can be further shortened. This can contribute to increasing the distance dimension of the game board 5 in the left-right direction.

[Decorative board on the center of the dish]
As shown in FIG. 263(b), the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 includes LED constant current drive circuits 314a and 314b, ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and the like. The ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, which is the upper side of the effect operation unit 300, while the LED constant current drive circuit 314a. , 314b are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, which is the upward side of the effect operation unit 300. In addition, when the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 shown in FIG. 263(b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left (that is, the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is actually arranged along the dish center upper decoration body 312a). In the state), the connector HCN for connecting the operation portion relay board 392 and electric wiring is mounted on the right side of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 along the upper end side 314eg1.

On the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, electrodes (so-called pads) for soldering electronic components such as full-color LEDs, resistors, ICs, connectors, through holes, test pads, A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”) on the entire area excluding lands and the like. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 causes the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to emit light to the front side (that is, the side toward the upper side of the performance operation unit 300). The reflectance of the can be increased.

The part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are shown on the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center. The areas and are not printed at all as silk printing. Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the substrate management number of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is not formed as a blank character by a white resist.

This is because the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. To prevent that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from being lowered by the light emission of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

Further, as described above, the plate center upper decoration body 312a of the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. A dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is attached below (or behind) the dish center upper inner lens 313. As described above, the plate center upper decorative body 312a is formed transparent because the unit front cover 312 is formed transparent. As described above, the plate center upper inner lens 313 is formed to be transparent and lens-cut (formed in a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 arranged below (or behind) the lens 313 is difficult to be clearly seen from the player side. A player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face) to change the line of sight depending on the direction of the head (face), and temporarily, on the plate center on the plate of the unit front cover 312, on the plate center of the decorative body 312a. Even when the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314, in the first place, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 above the plate center, the full-color LED is provided. The part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 that are the above, and the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 that are the full color LEDs are arranged are not printed by silk printing at all, so that the player does not have any relation to the game. It prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged. Therefore, a number that specifies the hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs (that is, a part number corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 that is a full-color LED) or an auxiliary line that indicates the mounting position of the hLED1 to hLED10 that is a full-color LED (that is, in the full-color LED). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize a certain area) where hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged.

It should be noted that on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center, the part number corresponding to the connector HCN and the area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged are completely printed by silk printing. Not printed. This prevents the player from visually recognizing a part number corresponding to the connector HCN which has no relation to the game for the player, and an area indicating a position where the connector HCN is arranged.

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (the color recognized as being the same color as white) in each package, and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of a color recognized as the same as the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface (painted solid). Mounted are hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN which has a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist which covers the whole (filled). Thus, in the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center. Not not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs, so Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the board management number of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is a foil-cut character (that is, a wiring that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) where a wiring pattern is formed). It is formed as a letter formed by patterning and removing the copper foil around it, and is formed by a white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center. Is covered. The wiring pattern forming the characters without the foil is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. The board management number of the plate center upper decorative board 314 is not the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314, but the foil removal character (that is, the wiring pattern) on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314. May be formed as a character formed by a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which is formed and a peripheral copper foil is removed to form a character. Foil-free characters are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (that is, characters are formed by a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, They may be formed as blank characters formed by pulling out the copper foil). Further, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are formed as a solid earth, as described later. For this reason, the board control number of the decorative board 314 on the plate center is a character without a foil (that is, a character is made with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed, and the copper foil around it is removed. Not formed as a blank character) formed on one side or both sides of the solid ground of the LED mounting surface 314x and the solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 314y. It may be.

On the other hand, on the white resist which is solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center, the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the maximum current setting circuit 314ay that configure the LED constant current drive circuit 314a are formed. Areas indicating positions where electronic parts such as resistors Rr, Rb, Rg and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown in the figure as silk printing, and in the vicinity of these areas. The part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

In addition, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, it corresponds to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314. The areas to be printed are printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 not shown as silk printing, respectively, and part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

It is to be noted that, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, a region showing a position where the connector HCN to be mounted on the LED center mounting substrate 314x of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 is arranged. Is printed with a yellow chain line (or black chain line) not shown as silk printing, and the part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed with yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing near this area. ing.

Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the plate center do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has a white color. The package is made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED decreases.

Further, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is individually subjected to a lighting inspection for the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED center mounting board 314x of the dish central upper decorative board 314 (for example, (For each LED element, the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B) that make up one full-color LED) A plurality of check pins (not shown) can be formed as a test pad (or through hole) that is connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the check pins in the vicinity of the check pins are decorated on the plate center. On the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the substrate 314, yellow (or black) not shown is printed as silk printing. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who carries out the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other so as to be electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

The LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are formed as a so-called solid earth, which grounds a region other than a land pattern and a wiring pattern of an electronic component or a connector to a ground (GND). The solid earth formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 and the solid earth formed on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). There is.

In the present embodiment, the electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and the connector that does not have white, which reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs, emits light from the full-color LEDs. Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is lowered, it was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all. However, in the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, the region corresponding to the member arranged in front is mounted on the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface, a region indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is printed by silk-screening with a yellow chain line (or a black chain line) not shown. At the same time, a part number corresponding to the electronic part or the connector is printed in the yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing near this area.

As described above, since the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semi-circular shape, the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 shown in FIG. 263(b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left. When viewed (that is, in the state where the dish center upper decorative board 314 is actually arranged along the dish center upper decorative body 312a), the upper end side 314eg1 to the lower end side 314eg2 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 are. The width dimension up to is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. Therefore, if the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the land of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx is arranged. Since the distance between the edge of the pattern and the upper edge 314eg1 or the lower edge 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 becomes extremely short, the wiring pattern should be drawn from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. However, it is difficult to pull out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the end side because there is a limitation of the minimum distance dimension in the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the interval between the wiring patterns adjacent to each other. ..

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. Adopted the configuration.

In this embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the lower left side of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx is the lower left side. By arranging the upper side 314eg1 of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center so as to be the terminal on the side of the plate, the terminal on the input side is the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) shown in FIG. ), DC +12V, and ground (GND), and the resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by are input, and the upper left end side, the upper right end side, and the lower right end side are mainly the terminals on the output side 1 to the output side. The output side 1 terminal to the output side 3 terminal are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal). SCLK1) etc. are output. The output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistance Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have a terminal to which the ground (GND) is input. There is.

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, of the four end sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, two end sides are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. In addition to being able to be arranged as a state, the remaining two end sides can be arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. As a result, the minimum distance dimension is limited to the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the distance between adjacent wiring patterns from the lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. Even all wiring patterns can be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region in which the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn from the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx in the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semi-arcuate shape.

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, among the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8, there are a group 1 including four full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED4 and four full-color LEDs. Since the constant current drive circuit 314ax can be arranged between the group 2 including the hLED5 to hLED8, the length of the constant current drive circuit 314ax when the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the group 1 and the group 2 is laid out. Can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of routing the wiring patterns to the group 1 and the group 2 from becoming long or short in one group of the group 1 and the group 2, which is long and short. It is possible to improve the efficiency of wiring pattern arrangement and routing in the work.

In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, when the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 shown in FIG. 263(b) is rotated by 90 degrees to the left (that is, the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is placed on the plate center upper portion). In a state in which the constant current drive circuit 314ax is actually arranged along the decorative body 312a), the constant current drive circuit 314ax is a semi-arcuate central portion (the full-color LED of FIG. 263(b)) on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314. It can be arranged closer to the right side than the part where the hLED 6 is arranged), and the constant current drive circuit 314bx is arranged in the semi-arcuate central part on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (FIG. 263(b). ), which is closer to the left side than the part where the hdLED6, which is a full-color LED, is arranged) and to the left of the hLED8, which is a full-color LED configured in group 2 whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 314ax. You can Thereby, the area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8 can be secured in the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, and at the same time from the constant current drive circuit 314bx. An area for routing the wiring pattern to the two full-color LEDs hLED9 and hLED10 can be secured in the dish center upper decorative substrate 314.

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and a capacitor (not shown) are surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and are so-called EIA type 0805 (designated 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length. S: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitors (not shown) are larger than those of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Extremely small. Therefore, unlike the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb and the capacitors (not shown) have resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb whose one end side in the longitudinal direction is the upper end side of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The capacitor (not shown) is arranged so as to be parallel to 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2, and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor is vertical to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. Are arranged as follows. In other words, each side of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx arranged such that the side of the land pattern is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper side 314eg1 and the lower side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 and the resistance. Rr, Rg, and Rb are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 so that the longitudinal ends of the capacitors (not shown) are not parallel to each other.

Further, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, and 10 full color LEDs are arranged. HLED1 to hLED10 are in the shape of a half arc of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314, which is closer to the lower end side 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative board 314 when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314. The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are located closer to the upper end side 314eg1 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. A configuration is adopted in which it is arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the plate center. The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are sink (sink) type as described above, like the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and by sucking the constant current flowing through each LED element, Fever. Therefore, even in the center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semi-circular shape, by separating the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx from the ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, The heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx can be less likely to be affected by the ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

Further, by arranging the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the constant current drive circuit is provided. Those in which the end sides of the land patterns of 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left and right edges of the decorative substrate (that is, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 of the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative) Compared to the board 456 and the door frame top right decoration board 457), the one in which the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right edges of the decoration board is a decoration board. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of can be further shortened. This can contribute to increasing the horizontal distance dimension and the front-back distance dimension of the rendering operation unit 300, so that the large-sized rendering operation unit 300 can be provided in the door frame 3 and the rendering operation unit can be provided. A light emission effect by 300 can be performed.

[Group pad on the bottom of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are, as described above, flat type IC packages. It is a surface mount type having a square shape, and is a so-called VQFN. Here, an IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b will be described with reference to FIG.

The metal pad FP is exposed in the central portion of the bottom surface of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, and a so-called Exposed Pad (hereinafter, referred to as “EPad”) is formed. By soldering this IC package to the substrate, it is possible to improve heat dissipation and bondability.

In the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, in addition to each lead pad, a square EPad land pattern EP is provided. The EPad land pattern EP is electrically connected to the solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the area of the EPad land pattern EP, nine thermal vias TV are arranged in a formation grid pattern. The thermal via TV electrically connects the EPad land pattern EP to the solid earth formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, the wiring pattern from each lead pad cannot be drawn out within the area of the EPad land pattern EP.

As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through each LED element. That is, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax is transferred from the EPad to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b via the EPad land pattern EP. By diffusing, heat can be dissipated in the entire left side lower decorative substrate 402b.

The relationship between the EPad land pattern EP and the nine thermal vias TV will be briefly described. The junction region where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit is soldered to the EPad land pattern EP is a constant current. The number and the size of the diameter of the thermal via TV are selected so that the EPad (metal pad FP) of the drive circuit is 50% or more. As a result, the bonding area where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit and the EPad land pattern EP are soldered is not too large to prevent the occurrence of voids, and the bonding area is not too small and stable. It is possible to obtain the desired bonding strength. Note that the EPad land pattern EP may be formed by dividing it into a grid pattern, but in this case as well, in order to prevent the occurrence of voids and obtain a stable bonding strength, the constant current drive circuit is used as described above. The EPad (metal pad FP) must be soldered to the EPad land pattern EP at a junction area of 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit.

Further, in contrast to the case where the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are arranged. When the edge side of the land pattern is arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left side edge 402beg1 and the right side edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the heat dissipation effect for heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is high. Become. When the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the EPad land pattern EP is also left similarly. When the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged in parallel with the left side edge 402beg1 and the right side edge 402beg2 of the side lower decorative substrate 402b and are inclined by 45 degrees, , EPad land patterns EP are also arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees. When the EPad land pattern EP edge is arranged in parallel to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the EPad land pattern EP edge and the left lower decorative substrate 402b. The distance dimension between the left side edge 402beg1 and the right edge side 402beg2 is shortened, and the distance dimension to the substrate edge side is shortened, in other words, there is less room for heat radiation on the substrate. .. On the other hand, the left edge side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b when the edge pattern EP edge land for EPad is arranged at a 45 degree inclination with respect to the left edge side 402beg1 and the right edge side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Alternatively, the distance dimension to the right edge 402beg2 is a portion where the distance between the apex of the EPad land pattern EP and the substrate edge is short, but the two sides in contact with the apex are not parallel to the substrate edge. Since there is a large room for heat dissipation on the substrate, it can be said that the heat dissipation effect is higher than that in the case where the edge side EP for EPad and the edge side of the substrate are parallel.

As described above, each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in an elongated strip plate shape, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. In the present embodiment, as an example, as described above, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip that extends vertically and includes two LED constant current drive circuits, and a semicircle. Each of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having an arc shape, and the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged, are used to emit the LED of the full-color LED It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the mounting surface from decreasing, and the player can visually recognize the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the position indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which has no relation to the game for the player. It has been described in detail that countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance that can prevent the above are taken.

265 through FIG. 265 with respect to other configurations of the present invention in which countermeasures such as reduction in reflectance are taken (hereinafter, referred to as “configurations for countermeasures such as reduction in reflectance according to the second to fourth embodiments”). This will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 269. FIG. 265 shows a configuration of measures for reducing reflectance etc. according to the second embodiment, FIG. 266 shows a configuration of measures for reducing reflectance etc. according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 267 shows a D′ section of FIG. FIG. 268 is an enlarged view of the D″ portion of FIG. 266 viewed from the LED non-mounting surface, FIG. 268 is a configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance and the like according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 269 is D″ of FIG. 268. It is the enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the part. 265 to 269, those having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 263 and 264 (hereinafter, referred to as “a configuration of measures for reducing reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment”) are performed. The same reference numerals are used. Further, in FIG. 267, various electronic components are omitted and a part of silk printing is omitted for the sake of easy viewing of the drawing. Further, in FIG. 269, various electronic components are omitted for easy viewing of the drawing.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352, the center button decoration board 376, and the outer circumference button decoration board 377 in the effect operation unit 300, and the handle decoration board 184 in the handle unit 180 have the reflection according to the first embodiment described above. A configuration for countermeasures such as a reduction in the rate (the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged can prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LED as well as A measure such as a reduction in reflectance that can prevent the player from visually recognizing a part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has no relation to the game to the player and a region indicating a position where the full-color LED is arranged However, it is also possible to adopt the configuration of measures against the decrease in reflectance and the like according to the second to fourth embodiments described later.

[Comparison between Countermeasure Structure for Reducing Reflectance According to First Embodiment and Countermeasure Structure for Reducing Reflectance According to Second Embodiment]
As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance or the like according to the first embodiment, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED1 are provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The part number corresponding to the hdLED10 and the region indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the maximum current setting circuit that configure the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as 402-bay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk printing, respectively, and in the vicinity of these regions. Part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Further, as described above, a full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left lower lower decorative substrate 402b. Areas corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as silk printing, respectively, and part numbers corresponding to full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are silk printing in the vicinity of these areas. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance or the like according to the first embodiment, as described above, the full-color LED is provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. A part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 and a region indicating a position where hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the maximum current setting circuit that configure the LED constant current drive circuit 314a. The areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the 314ay and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown in the figure as silk printing, and these areas are also formed. Part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are printed in the vicinity in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing. In addition, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, there is a full-color LED mounted on the LED center surface 314x of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314. Areas corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 are printed by yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown) as silk printing, and hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. The part numbers corresponding to are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 265(a), a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the regions indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are printed on the top as silk printing. Specifically, the area indicating the positions of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is silk-printed with solid yellow lines LSLK1 to LSLK10 on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs in the vicinity of these areas LSLK1 to LSLK10, and to the left or above, are yellow as silk printing and are on the lower left side. Each of them is printed on a white resist which is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the decorative substrate 402b.

In addition, on the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is printed by a yellow solid line not shown as silk printing, A part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing near this area.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the white resist layer is formed of the solid white resist. Each of the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also referred to as a natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of the same color as). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface (painted in solid). The full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as the white resist that covers the whole (solid coating) are mounted. As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs, so Not implemented at all.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, a lighting inspection is individually performed on the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b (for example, 1 It is possible to perform each full-color LED for each of the LED elements that emit red (R), the LED elements that emit green (G), and the LED elements that emit blue (B)). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are formed in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. On the white resist which is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of 402b, it is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who carries out the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other so as to be electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

Here, a white resist is used as the solid color of the resist liquid applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and a white resist is applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The reason why yellow is adopted as the silk-printing paint of the part number corresponding to the region where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged and the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are silk-printed above, will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. Therefore, in the combination of white and red, red is noticeable when the background is white, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, the part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 Is printed with a red paint on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b on a white resist which is solid-printed. Areas indicating positions where certain hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, and part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs are conspicuous, whereas a combination of white and yellow (measures such as reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment In the configuration), the yellow color is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, the part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is yellow paint on the left side. When silk-printing on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower decorative substrate 402b, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are silk-printed on the white resist with the yellow paint, are arranged. The part number corresponding to the area indicating the position and the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are inconspicuous. In addition, the region indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are the front-side electronic components to be mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Is a front surface side notation part (may be simply referred to as “notation part”). The front surface side notation part indicates the part number of the front surface side electronic component and the position where the front surface side electronic component is arranged. The attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area shown (In addition, it may include the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component. There is).

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 produces a brilliant light emitting effect by the illumination by the light emitting portions such as the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. Yes, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, electrodes (so-called pads) for soldering electronic components such as full-color LEDs, resistors, ICs, connectors, through holes, and tests. A white resist layer formed of a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”) formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area excluding pads, lands, and the like. Is formed, and further, it is possible to specify a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors on the solid-colored white resist, a region indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, and the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to It is a full-color LED in which the part number corresponding to hdLED10 is printed by silk-printing with yellow paint so that the white resist is silk-printed with yellow paint when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off. In addition to making it possible to make the area indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged and the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, inconspicuous, further, when the full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors are turned on (light emission Area) showing a position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed by silk printing with a solid white resist having a high reflectance and a yellow paint very close to the white reflectance. , The component numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, can maintain a high reflectance of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b.

If yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow color printed by silk printing may become pale yellow or dark yellow due to variations in the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a wide range of yellow (yellow on the bright side and yellow on the dark side). Even if you specify yellow, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 267, as shown in FIG. 267, the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the maximum current of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba are formed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the setting circuit 402bay and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), and these regions are also printed. Part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity. Specifically, for example, a region showing the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is silk-printed with a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 267(a)) on the lower left side decorative substrate. It is printed on a solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b, and is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax in the vicinity of and above the area LSLKa. (see a)) is printed by silk-colored solid yellow line (or black solid line) on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Then, the areas indicating the positions where the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged are yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd as silk printing (see FIG. 267(a)). Is printed on each of the white resists solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the maximum current is set in the vicinity of these areas LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd to the right. The resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the circuit 402bay and the corresponding component numbers R1, R2, R3 (see FIG. 267(a)) are yellow (or black) as silk printing, and the LED of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It is printed on a white resist which is solidly coated on the non-mounting surface 402by.

In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip does not have the white color. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of resin having a color of black, brown, or blue. As described above, since resistors, capacitors, ICs, and other electronic components that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have a reduced reflectance due to the emission of light from a full-color LED, the LED non-mounting surface It is implemented in.

Even in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance or the like according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are white resists with solid white resist. Layers have been formed. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b enhances the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. You can do it.

In addition, in the configuration of measures against the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 265(b), on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, , A part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and a region indicating a position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are printed by silk printing. Specifically, the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged is silk-printed with solid yellow lines HSLK1 to HSLK10 on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. Each of them is printed on the plate center decoration board in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10, and in the right direction, is a full-color LED hLED1 to hLED10 and a corresponding part number LED1 to LED10 in yellow as silk printing. Each of them is printed on a white resist solid-coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of 314.

In addition, on the white resist which is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the center of the plate, a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is printed by silk printing with a solid yellow line (not shown). In the vicinity of this area, a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (the color recognized as being the same color as white) in each package, and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of a color recognized as the same as the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface (painted solid). Mounted are hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN which has a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist which covers the whole (filled). As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs, so Not implemented at all.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, lighting inspection is individually performed on the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED center mounting substrate 314x of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1 It is possible to perform each full-color LED for each of the LED elements that emit red (R), the LED elements that emit green (G), and the LED elements that emit blue (B)). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) that are connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are provided in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. On the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of 314, yellow printing (not shown) is performed as silk printing. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who carries out the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other so as to be electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

Here, a white resist liquid is used as the solid color of the resist liquid coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314, and the white resist solid coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 is used. The reason why yellow is adopted as the silk-screen paint of the part number corresponding to the area where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, which are silk-printed above, and the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is conspicuous when the background is white, and an area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. Is printed with red paint on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the center of the dish, in the case of silk-printing on the white resist that is solidly coated, it is a full-color LED that is silk-printed with the red paint on the white resist. While a region showing the position where a certain hLED1 to hLED10 is arranged and a part number corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs are conspicuous, a combination of white and yellow (a measure such as a reduction in reflectance according to the second embodiment) In the above), the yellow color is not noticeable when the background is white, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged. When silk-printing on a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314, hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs silk-printed on a white resist with yellow paint are arranged. The part numbers corresponding to the region indicating the position and the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are inconspicuous. In addition, the area|region which shows the position which arrange|positions hLED1-hLED10 which is full-color LED, and the part number corresponding to hLED1-hLED10 which is full-color LED are the front surface side electronic parts mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate central decoration board 314. Is a front side notation part (which may be simply referred to as “notation part”), and the front side notation part indicates the part number of the front side electronic component and the position where the front side electronic component is arranged. The attributes of the front side electronic component such as the indicated area (In addition, it may include the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component. There is).

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, since the luminous effect is performed by the illumination by the light emitting portions such as the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. Yes, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center, electrodes (so-called pads) for soldering electronic components such as full-color LEDs, resistors, ICs, connectors, through holes, and tests. A white resist layer formed of a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid-painted white resist") over the entire area excluding pads and lands. Is formed, and further, on the solid-colored white resist, it is possible to specify a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors. A region indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, the full-color LEDs hLED1 to It is a full-color LED in which the part number corresponding to the hLED10 is printed by silk-printing with yellow paint so that the white resist is silk-printed with yellow paint when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off. In addition to making it possible to make the area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged and the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, inconspicuous, further, when a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (emission Area) indicating a position where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed by silk printing with a solid white resist having a high reflectance and a yellow paint very close to the white reflectance. , And the component numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 can be kept high.

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations in the printing machine, or it may appear orange, or silk Since the ink companies that supply printing paint have a wide range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side, yellow due to the dark side), specify yellow as the silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even so, the colors do not become completely the same yellow (it is difficult to make them completely the same yellow), and the color has a wide range in yellow.

On the other hand, on the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the constant current drive circuit 314ax forming the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistance Rr of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid printing with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown, and the electronic components are provided in the vicinity of these areas. Corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

In the second embodiment, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax( integrated on one semiconductor chip ( 314bx) has a package made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED decreases.

Even in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are coated with a white resist to form a white resist. Layers have been formed. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center causes the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to be reflected forward (that is, toward the upper side of the performance operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

As described above, in the configuration of the measure for reducing the reflectance or the like according to the first embodiment, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The part number corresponding to and the area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all by silk printing, and are solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. On the white resist, the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs and the area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. In the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are provided on the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The part number (yellow letters and yellow numbers) and the area (yellow solid line) showing the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are printed as silk printing, respectively, and the decorative board on the center of the dish is printed. On the solid white resist on the LED mounting surface 314x of 314, hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs and corresponding part numbers (yellow letters and numbers) and hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs are arranged. The areas (yellow solid lines) indicating the positions to be printed are different from each other in that they are printed as silk printing.

By the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 can be increased. It is like this. Further, due to the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center, the reflectance of the front of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, the side facing upward of the performance operation unit 300). Can be increased. Therefore, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED and a region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. When printed, the silk-screen printed in black reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED, which causes a problem that the emission of the full-color LED is not efficiently used. Further, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate lower left decoration 281, the plate upper right decoration 276, the plate lower right decoration 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 75). The plate center upper decoration body 312a, the plate center lower decoration body 312b, the door frame left side decoration body 404, the side window interior decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453) are as described above. , The player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face) when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1. In some cases, the player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of the various decorative boards provided. Then, there arises a problem that the player visually recognizes the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has nothing to do with the game, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

Therefore, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment, the area indicating the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which has no relation to the game for the player, is silk-printed. , Auxiliary to indicate the mounting position of the full-color LED on the white resist formed on the LED mounting surface by printing on the white resist that is solid yellow on the LED mounting surface, which is different from black It may be difficult to find a line (that is, a region indicating a position where the full-color LED is arranged) or a number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED).

Further, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are silk-printed, and different from black, it is a light yellow. By printing on a white resist which is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

Even in the configuration of the countermeasures for reducing the reflectance according to the second embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same operational effects as those of the configuration of the countermeasures for reducing the reflectance according to the first embodiment. That is, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the number for specifying the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position for arranging the full-color LED). In addition, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the emission of the full-color LED.

In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed, and different from black It is also possible to add a polarity mark of the full-color LED to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED when printing on a white resist which is solid-painted on the LED mounting surface in yellow.

In the second embodiment, the electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and the connector that does not have white, which reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED, emits light from the full-color LED. The LED mounting surface is not mounted at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, but the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface by the emission of the full-color LED is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface, a region indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is printed by a yellow solid line (not shown) as silk printing, and in the vicinity of this region, Part numbers corresponding to electronic parts and connectors are printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

Further, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment, the area showing the position where the full-color LED is arranged has a shape larger than the outer shape of the full-color LED, and silk-printed on the LED mounting surface with a solid yellow line. Although it was configured by printing on a solid white resist, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged has a shape smaller than the outer shape of the full-color LED (for example, a rectangular shape smaller than the main body of the full-color LED, simply one). It may be configured to have a thick solid line) and to be printed on a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface by a yellow solid line as silk printing. With this configuration, when the full-color LED is mounted on the LED mounting surface, the area showing the position where the full-color LED printed by silk printing is arranged is covered with the full-color LED main body, so that a yellow color surrounding the full-color LED main body is provided. The solid line does not exist, which can contribute to further increasing the reflectance of the LED mounting surface.

[Contrast between Countermeasure Structure for Reducing Reflectance According to First Embodiment and Countermeasure Structure for Reducing Reflectance According to Third Embodiment]
As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance or the like according to the first embodiment, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED1 are provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The part number corresponding to the hdLED10 and the region indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the maximum current setting circuit that configure the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as 402-bay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk printing, respectively, and in the vicinity of these regions. Part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Further, as described above, a full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left lower lower decorative substrate 402b. Areas corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as silk printing, respectively, and part numbers corresponding to full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are silk printing in the vicinity of these areas. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance or the like according to the first embodiment, as described above, the full-color LED is provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. A part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 and a region indicating a position where hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the maximum current setting circuit that configure the LED constant current drive circuit 314a. The areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the 314ay and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown in the figure as silk printing, and these areas are also formed. Part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are printed in the vicinity in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing. In addition, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, there is a full-color LED mounted on the LED center surface 314x of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314. Areas corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 are printed by yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown) as silk printing, and hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. The part numbers corresponding to are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 266(a), the hdLED1 which is a full-color LED is mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. ~ The part number corresponding to hdLED10 is a foil removal character (that is, a removal character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it ( In FIG. 266(c), only the foil-extracted character LED7 is shown as a part number corresponding to hdLED7 which is a full-color LED.)), and an area showing a position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is shown. A foil removal area excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, an area formed by removing a copper foil excluding each terminal and the wiring pattern in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed (Fig. In FIG. 266(c), only the foil removal area LSLK7 is shown as an area corresponding to the hdLED7 which is a full-color LED.)), and is white solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The foil-removed area and the foil-removed character are covered with the resist of FIG. Specifically, the regions showing the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are formed as the foil removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively. Near the areas LSLK1 to LSLK10, LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs, are formed on the left or upper side on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as blank characters. The foil-removed area and the foil-removed character are covered with a white resist which is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The wiring pattern that forms the characters without the foil is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region showing a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed on each terminal (not shown) and a foil stripping region (not shown) excluding a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a wiring pattern is formed. A layer (copper plane) except for each terminal and wiring pattern, which is formed as a region formed by removing the copper foil), and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is not shown in the vicinity of this region. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character that is formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it).

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the white resist layer is formed of the solid white resist. Each of the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also referred to as a natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of the same color as). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface (painted in solid). The full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as the white resist that covers the whole (solid coating) are mounted. Thus, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b at all. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs, so Not implemented at all.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, a lighting inspection is individually performed on the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b (for example, 1 It is possible to perform each full-color LED for each of the LED elements that emit red (R), the LED elements that emit green (G), and the LED elements that emit blue (B)). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as a test pad (or a through hole) connected to a wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is formed in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. That is, it is formed as a character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who carries out the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other so as to be electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 267, as shown in FIG. 267, the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the maximum current of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba are formed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the setting circuit 402bay and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), and these regions are also printed. Part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity. Specifically, for example, a region showing the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is silk-printed with a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 267(a)) on the lower left side decorative substrate. It is printed on a solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b, and is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax in the vicinity of and above the area LSLKa. (see a)) is printed by silk-colored solid yellow line (or black solid line) on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Then, the areas indicating the positions where the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged are yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd as silk printing (see FIG. 267(a)). Is printed on each of the white resists solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the maximum current is set in the vicinity of these areas LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd to the right. The resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the circuit 402bay and the corresponding component numbers R1, R2, R3 (see FIG. 267(a)) are yellow (or black) as silk printing, and the LED of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It is printed on a white resist which is solidly coated on the non-mounting surface 402by.

In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip does not have the white color. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of resin having a color of black, brown, or blue. As described above, since resistors, capacitors, ICs, and other electronic components that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have a reduced reflectance due to the emission of light from a full-color LED, the LED non-mounting surface It is implemented in.

Even in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are white resists which are solid white paints. Layers have been formed. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b enhances the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. You can do it.

In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 266(b), the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 has hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. The corresponding part number is formed as a foil strip character (that is, a blank letter that is formed by making a letter with the wiring pattern that is copper foil on the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed and pulling out the copper foil around it). In addition, the regions showing the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are the terminals (not shown) and the foil-removed region excluding the wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, each terminal in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed). And an area formed by removing the copper foil except for the wiring pattern), and the foil removal area and the foil are formed by a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center. The blank letters and are covered respectively. Specifically, the regions indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are respectively formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate central upper decorative substrate 314 as the foil removing regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, and these foil removing regions are also formed. In the vicinity of the areas HSLK1 to HSLK10, LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs, are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 as blank characters, respectively. The foil-removed region and the foil-removed character are covered with a white resist which is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the central upper decorative substrate 314. The wiring pattern that forms the characters without the foil is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, a region indicating a position where the connector HCN is arranged is formed on each terminal (not shown) and a not-illustrated foil-removed region (not shown) except for a wiring pattern (not shown). A layer (copper plane) excluding the terminals and the wiring pattern, which is formed by removing the copper foil), and the part number corresponding to the connector HCN is not shown in the vicinity of this area. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character that is formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it).

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (the color recognized as being the same color as white) in each package, and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of a color recognized as the same as the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface (painted solid). Mounted are hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN which has a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist which covers the whole (filled). As described above, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs, so Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314, lighting inspection is individually performed on the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED center surface decorative board 314x of the plate central decorative board 314 (for example, 1 It is possible to perform each full-color LED for each of the LED elements that emit red (R), the LED elements that emit green (G), and the LED elements that emit blue (B)). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as a test pad (or a through hole) connected to a wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is formed in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. That is, a character is formed by a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which a wiring pattern is formed, and a blank character is formed by removing the copper foil around it. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who carries out the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other so as to be electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

On the other hand, on the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the constant current drive circuit 314ax forming the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistance Rr of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid printing with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown, and the electronic components are provided in the vicinity of these areas. Corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

In the third embodiment, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax( integrated on one semiconductor chip ( 314bx) has a package made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED decreases.

Even in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reduction in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are white resists that are solid white paints. Layers have been formed. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center causes the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to be reflected forward (that is, toward the upper side of the performance operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

As described above, in the configuration of the measure for reducing the reflectance or the like according to the first embodiment, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The part number corresponding to and the area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all by silk printing, and are solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. On the white resist, the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs and the area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. In the configuration of the countermeasure such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the component numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b with the stripped characters (that is, In the layer (copper plane) in which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are formed with the wiring pattern that is a copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form letters), and full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are formed. The area indicating the position to be arranged is a foil removal area excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed, remove the copper foil except each terminal and the wiring pattern). Area) formed on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the foil-removed area and the foil-removed character are covered with a white resist which is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. On the LED mounting surface 314x of the central upper decorative substrate 314, the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs are foil-cut characters (that is, a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) where a wiring pattern is formed). Is formed as a blank character formed by pulling out the copper foil around it and excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) in a region showing the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged. It is formed as a foil removal area (that is, an area formed by removing the copper foil, excluding the terminals and the wiring pattern in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). Is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of The difference is that the foil-removed area and the foil-removed character are covered with a white resist that is white.

By the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 can be increased. It is like this. Further, due to the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center, the reflectance of the front of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, the side facing upward of the performance operation unit 300). Can be increased. Therefore, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED and a region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. When printed, the silk-screen printed in black reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED, which causes a problem that the emission of the full-color LED is not efficiently used. Further, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate lower left decoration 281, the plate upper right decoration 276, the plate lower right decoration 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 75). The plate center upper decoration body 312a, the plate center lower decoration body 312b, the door frame left side decoration body 404, the side window interior decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453) are as described above. , The player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face) when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1. In some cases, the player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of the various decorative boards provided. Then, there arises a problem that the player visually recognizes the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has nothing to do with the game, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

Therefore, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reduction of reflectance according to the third embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED which has no relation to the game for the player is formed as a foil-cut character, and the player does not have the game at all. A full-color LED is formed by forming a region indicating a position where a full-color LED having no relation is arranged as a foil-extracting region and covering each of the foil-extracting character and the foil-extracting region with a white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface. An LED wiring pattern, a foil removal area indicating a mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, an area indicating a position where the full-color LED is arranged), a number identifying the full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED), Is made of a copper foil to have the same color, and is covered with a white resist formed on the LED mounting surface to show a mounting area of the full-color LED (that is, a position where the full-color LED is arranged). It is difficult to find out the area that indicates the area) or the number that specifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED).

In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reduction in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED which has no relation to the game for the player is formed as a foil-cut character, and the player does not have the game at all. A full-color LED is formed by forming a region indicating a position where a full-color LED having no relation is arranged as a foil-extracting region and covering each of the foil-extracting character and the foil-extracting region with a white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface. It is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the light emission of the LED.

Even in the configuration of the countermeasures for reducing the reflectance according to the third embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same operational effects as those of the configuration of the countermeasures for reducing the reflectance according to the first embodiment. That is, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the number for identifying the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the foil-removed region indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the region indicating the position for arranging the full-color LED). In addition, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the step of silk printing on the LED mounting surface can be omitted. Therefore, the plate cost of silk printing and the number of board manufacturing steps can be reduced to reduce Manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reduction of reflectance according to the third embodiment, in the foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, when the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged is formed as the foil removal area). The polarity mark of the full-color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and the connector that does not have white are such that the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs decreases. The LED mounting surface is not mounted at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, but the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface by the emission of the full-color LED is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, regions showing positions for arranging electronic components and connectors are provided with foil stripping regions (not shown) excluding the terminals (not shown) and wiring patterns (not shown) (that is, a layer on which a wiring pattern is formed (copper plane). ), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as a region formed by removing the copper foil), and a part number corresponding to an electronic component or a connector is formed in the vicinity of this region (not shown). That is, in a layer (copper plane) in which a wiring pattern is formed, a character is formed with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil is extracted to form a character.

In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reduction in reflectance according to the third embodiment, in the foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, when the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged is formed as the foil removal area). Although it was configured to have a shape larger than the outer shape of the full-color LED, the foil-cut area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is formed as the foil-cut area). It may be configured to have a shape smaller than the outer shape of the full-color LED (for example, a square shape smaller than the full-color LED main body). In this case, the blank characters and the foil blank area are not connected and are formed in mutually independent areas. With this configuration, when the full-color LED is mounted on the LED mounting surface, the foil-extracting region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is covered with the full-color LED main body, so that the foil-extracting region surrounding the full-color LED main body exists. It is possible to contribute to further increasing the reflectance of the LED mounting surface.

[Comparison between Countermeasures against Reflection Decrease etc. according to the first embodiment and Countermeasure against Countermeasures against reflectivity decrease according to the Fourth Embodiment]
As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance or the like according to the first embodiment, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED1 are provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The part number corresponding to the hdLED10 and the region indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the maximum current setting circuit that configure the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as 402-bay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk printing, respectively, and in the vicinity of these regions. Part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Further, as described above, a full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left lower lower decorative substrate 402b. Areas corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as silk printing, respectively, and part numbers corresponding to full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are silk printing in the vicinity of these areas. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance or the like according to the first embodiment, as described above, the full-color LED is provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. A part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 and a region indicating a position where hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the maximum current setting circuit that configure the LED constant current drive circuit 314a. The areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the 314ay and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown in the figure as silk printing, and these areas are also formed. Part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are printed in the vicinity in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing. In addition, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, there is a full-color LED mounted on the LED center surface 314x of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314. Areas corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 are printed by yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown) as silk printing, and hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. The part numbers corresponding to are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reduction in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 268(a), the full-color LED hdLED1 is provided on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The white resist removal character using a white resist whose part number corresponding to ~hdLED10 is twice applied (FIG. 268(c) shows only the white resist removal character as the part number corresponding to hdLED7 which is a full-color LED. ), and a region showing the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is a white resist removal region using a double-coated white resist (FIG. 268(c) shows a full-color LED hdLED7). Only the white resist removed region LSLK7 is shown as a region corresponding to. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first of the white resists coated twice, and the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is white resist. It is covered (that is, the white resist liquid is applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as the first time of the double-coated white resist). Then, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an area (position of a predetermined pin number) indicating a position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged as the second time of the double-coated white resist. The white resist removal area LSLK7 as an area corresponding to the full-color LED hdLED7 shown in FIG. 268(c) includes the fifth pin arrangement of the full-color LED hdLED7. A notch portion is formed at a position corresponding to the instructed notch mark.) is masked as the white resist removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, and the left side is near these white resist removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10. Alternatively, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is entirely covered with white resist in a state in which the LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, are masked as white resist removal characters. Is covered. As a result, two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, but the entire surface is covered with the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist is formed. By covering the entire area except the area masked with the resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the areas showing the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are white resist removal areas LSLK1 to LSLK10. In addition to being formed, hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to those, are formed as characters without white resist.

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are the same. Since this is adopted, the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, and through the white resist of the second layer, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b Looking at the base (the copper foil portion and the area excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter), the white layer of the second layer is white in the area where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap. The white resist of the first layer is the second layer in the area where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer do not overlap with each other due to the masking. By being exposed without being covered with the white resist of the eyes, the white resist of the first layer looks light. That is, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removal characters in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. ing.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region showing the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removal region (not shown), and a part corresponding to the connector LDLCN is provided in the vicinity of this region. The numbers are formed as white resist-free characters (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer are the same. Light and shade occur in the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the second layer, and when the underlayer of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the second layer In the area where the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap, the white resist of the second layer looks dark, whereas the masking masked the white resist of the second layer and the first layer. In the area where the white resist of the first layer does not overlap, the white resist of the first layer is not covered with the white resist of the second layer and is exposed, so that the white resist of the first layer looks pale. It will be. As a result, by observing the ground of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b through the second-layer white resist, it is possible to identify the white-resist removal region in the first-layer white resist. Is becoming

Since the white resist is applied twice to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal area in the first layer white resist, and the second resist The refractive index of the light of the white resist of the layer changes. As a result, when the underside of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer white resist, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal area in the first layer white resist are identified. You can do it.

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. Each of the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also referred to as a natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of the same color as). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface (painted in solid). The full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as the white resist that covers the whole (solid coating) are mounted. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b at all. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs, so Not implemented at all.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b (for example, 1 It is possible to perform each full-color LED for each of the LED elements that emit red (R), the LED elements that emit green (G), and the LED elements that emit blue (B)). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as a test pad (or a through hole) connected to a wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is formed in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. Is formed as. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who carries out the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other so as to be electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, as shown in FIG. 269, the constant current drive circuit 402bax that constitutes the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistors Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, A region indicating a position where electronic components such as Rg and various distributed resistors (not shown) are arranged is formed as a white resist removal region using a double-coated white resist like the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition, the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are formed in the vicinity of these regions as white resist-free characters using a double-coated white resist, like the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. .. Specifically, first, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first of the white resists coated twice, and the entire LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is white. It is covered with the resist (that is, the white resist liquid is applied to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as the first time of the double-coated white resist). Then, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is, for example, a second area of the double-coated white resist, and is a region (position of a predetermined pin number) indicating a position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged. 269. The white resist removal region LSLKa as a region corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax shown in FIG. 269 includes the first pin and the 36th pin of the constant current drive circuit 402bax. A notch portion is formed at a position corresponding to the notch mark for instructing the arrangement.) is masked as a white resist removal region LSLKa, and a constant current is provided above these white resist removal region LSLKa and upward. With the IC1 (see FIG. 269(a)), which is a part number corresponding to the drive circuit 402bax, being masked as a white resist removal character, the entire LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is white. Covered by resist. As a result, two layers of white resist are formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, similarly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, but the first layer The entire surface is covered with the white resist, and the entire surface is covered with the exception of the area masked by the white resist of the second layer, so that the masked area is depressed as a concave portion and corresponds to the constant current drive circuit 402bax. The white resist removal area LSLKa is formed as a white resist removal area, and IC1 which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax is formed as a white resist removal character.

The LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a white resist (not shown) showing a region where electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are arranged. The white resist removal characters R1, R2, which are formed as a removed region and have a part number corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, which are not shown, are provided in the vicinity of this region. Part numbers corresponding to electronic parts such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) formed as R3 are formed as white resist-free characters (not shown). On the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region showing the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removal region (not shown), and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is provided in the vicinity of this region. It is formed as a white resist removal character (not shown).

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are the same. Since the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, the LED non-mounting surface of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b passes through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the underlayer 402by (the copper foil portion and the area excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter), the second layer is the second layer in the area where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap. While the white resist of 1st layer looks dark, in the area where the white resist of the 2nd layer and the white resist of the 1st layer do not overlap due to the masking, the 1st layer of the white resist is The white resist of the first layer looks light because it is not covered with the white resist of the second layer and is exposed. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer white resist, the white resist removal characters formed on the first layer white resist can be identified. It is possible to identify the white resist removal area.

Further, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal region in the first layer white resist, The refractive index of light of the second layer of white resist is changed. As a result, when the underlayer of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer white resist, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal area in the first layer white resist are identified. You can do it.

In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip does not have the white color. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of resin having a color of black, brown, or blue. As described above, since resistors, capacitors, ICs, and other electronic components that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have a reduced reflectance due to the emission of light from a full-color LED, the LED non-mounting surface It is implemented in.

Even in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reflectance reduction according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are white resists by solid white coating. Layers have been formed. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b enhances the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. You can do it.

In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 268(b), the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 has hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. The corresponding part number is formed as a white resist removal character using a double-coated white resist, and the region showing the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged uses the double-coated white resist. It is formed as a white resist removal region. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is the first of the white resists coated twice, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is entirely white resist. It is covered (that is, the white resist liquid is applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 as the first of the double-coated white resist). Then, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center is a region (position of a predetermined pin number) indicating a position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged as the second time of the white resist coated twice. For example, a white resist removal area HSLK7 as an area corresponding to the hLED7 that is a full-color LED and a notch mark that indicates the arrangement of the fifth pin of the hLED7 that is a full-color LED is included. The notch is formed at the corresponding position) as the white resist removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, and the hLED1 which is a full color LED on the right side in the vicinity of these white resist removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10. The LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is entirely covered with the white resist in a state where the LED1 to LED10, which are the part numbers corresponding to the ~hLED10, are masked as the characters without the white resist. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the entire surface is covered with the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist is formed. By covering the entire area except the area masked by the resist, the masked area is recessed as a concave portion, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is the white resist removal area HSLK1 to HSLK10. In addition to being formed, hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to those, are formed as white resist-free characters.

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are the same. Since it is adopted, the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, and through the white resist of the second layer, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 Looking at the groundwork, the white resist of the second layer looks dark in the area where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap, whereas the second resist is masked by the second resist. In a region where the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the first layer do not overlap, the white resist of the first layer is not covered with the white resist of the second layer and is exposed, so that the first layer The white resist in the eyes will appear light. That is, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the dish center is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removal characters in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. ing.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate central decoration board 314, a region showing the position where the connector HCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removal region (not shown), and parts corresponding to the connector HCN are provided in the vicinity of this region. The numbers are formed as characters without white resist (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer are the same. Light and shade occur in the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the second layer, and when the underlayer of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the second layer In the region where the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap, the white resist of the second layer looks dark, whereas the masking masked the white resist of the second layer and the first layer. In the area where the white resist of the first layer does not overlap, the white resist of the first layer is not covered by the white resist of the second layer and is exposed, so that the white resist of the first layer looks pale. It will be. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer white resist, it is possible to identify the white resist removal region in the first layer white resist. Is becoming

Since the white resist is applied twice on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal area in the first layer white resist, and the second resist The refractive index of the light of the white resist of the layer changes. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer white resist, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal area in the first layer white resist are identified. You can do it.

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (the color recognized as being the same color as white) in each package, and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of a color recognized as the same as the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface (painted solid). Mounted are hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN which has a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist which covers the whole (filled). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic parts such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs, so Not implemented at all.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, lighting inspection is individually performed on the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED center mounting substrate 314x of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1 It is possible to perform each full-color LED for each of the LED elements that emit red (R), the LED elements that emit green (G), and the LED elements that emit blue (B)). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as a test pad (or a through hole) connected to a wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is formed in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. Is formed as. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who carries out the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other so as to be electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the constant current drive circuit 314ax forming the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, and various dispersed resistors not shown. Areas indicating positions for arranging electronic components such as are formed as white resist removal areas using double-coated white resist like the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, and these areas are also formed. Similar to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, a part number corresponding to an electronic component is formed in the vicinity as a white resist removal character using a double-coated white resist.

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center are the same. Since the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, the LED non-mounting surface of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 passes through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the ground of 314y, the white resist of the second layer looks dark in the area where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap, but it is because the mask is masked. In a region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer do not overlap with each other, the white resist of the first layer is not covered with the white resist of the second layer and is exposed. The white resist of the first layer looks light. As a result, when the underlayer of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer white resist, the white resist removal characters formed on the first layer white resist can be identified. In addition to the above, the white resist removal area can be identified.

Since the white resist is applied twice to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the white resist removal character and the white resist removal area in the first layer white resist, The refractive index of light of the white resist of the second layer changes. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer white resist, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal area in the first layer white resist are identified. You can do it.

Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the plate center do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has a white color. The package is made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED decreases.

Even in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are white resists that are solid white paints. Layers have been formed. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center causes the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to be reflected forward (that is, toward the upper side of the performance operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

As described above, in the configuration of the measure for reducing the reflectance or the like according to the first embodiment, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The part number corresponding to and the area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all by silk printing, and are solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. On the white resist, the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs and the area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. In the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 that is a full-color LED and is white with a double coating. It is formed as a white resist removal character using a resist, and a region indicating a position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is formed as a white resist removal region using a double-coated white resist. On the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are formed as white resist extraction characters using a double-coated white resist. That is, the regions indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are formed as white resist removal regions using a double-coated white resist.

By the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 can be increased. It is like this. Further, due to the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center, the reflectance of the front of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, the side facing upward of the performance operation unit 300). Can be increased. Therefore, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED and a region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. When printed, the silk-screen printed in black reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED, which causes a problem that the emission of the full-color LED is not efficiently used. Further, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate lower left decoration 281, the plate upper right decoration 276, the plate lower right decoration 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 75). The plate center upper decoration body 312a, the plate center lower decoration body 312b, the door frame left side decoration body 404, the side window interior decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453) are as described above. , The player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face) when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1. In some cases, the player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of the various decorative boards provided. Then, there arises a problem that the player visually recognizes the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has nothing to do with the game, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

Therefore, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist removal character using a white resist with a double-coated part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player. In addition to the above, the full-color LED mounting position is formed by forming a region showing the position where the full-color LED has no relation to the game for the player as a white resist removal region using a double-coated white resist. It is difficult to find the white resist removal area (that is, the area where the full-color LED is arranged) indicating that or the number that specifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED). You can

In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the white resist removal character using the white resist with the part number corresponding to the full color LED having no relation to the game for the player and the part number is applied twice. In addition to the above, the region showing the position where the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, is formed as the white resist removal region using the double-coated white resist. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing.

Also in the configuration of the countermeasures for reducing the reflectance and the like according to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same operational effects as the configuration of the countermeasures for the reflectance and the like according to the first embodiment. In other words, a white resist removal area that uses a number that specifies the full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and a double-coated white resist that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the position where the full-color LED is arranged). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the area) and to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

Further, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reflectance reduction according to the fourth embodiment, the step of silk printing can be omitted for each of the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface. By reducing the number of steps, it is possible to contribute to lowering the substrate manufacturing cost.

In the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reduction in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist removal region using a double-coated white resist showing a mounting position of a full-color LED (that is, a position where the full-color LED is arranged is shown. When forming the area, the polarity mark of the full-color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and the connector that does not have white do not emit white light because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface decreases due to the light emission of the full color LED. The LED mounting surface is not mounted at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, but the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface by the emission of the full-color LED is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in that region. In this case, regions showing positions for arranging electronic parts such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface are formed as terminals (not shown) and white resist removal regions (not shown), and in the vicinity of this region. In addition, part numbers corresponding to electronic parts and connectors such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface are formed as white resist removal characters (not shown).

Further, in the fourth embodiment, two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate, but the entire surface is covered with the first layer of white resist, and By covering the entire area except the area masked by the second layer of white resist, the masked area is depressed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED or connector is arranged is formed as the white resist removal area. In addition, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED or the connector is formed as the white resist removal character, but the white resist removal region and the white resist removal character may be formed by using another method. .. For example, after the white resist is solidly coated once or plural times on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate, and before the white resist dries, a region showing the position where the full-color LED or connector is arranged. And a plate showing a part number corresponding to a full-color LED or a connector to form white resist-extracted characters, an LED mounting surface of a decorative substrate, and After the white resist has been solidly coated once or multiple times on the LED non-mounting surface, the area where the full-color LED or connector is to be placed is set as the white resist removal area by laser irradiation after the white resist has dried. In addition to the formation, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED or the connector may be formed as a white resist-free character.

Further, in the configuration of the countermeasures against the decrease in reflectance and the like according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist removal region using a double-coated white resist showing a mounting position of the full color LED (that is, a position where the full color LED is arranged is shown. When forming the area), the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged was configured to have a shape larger than the outer shape of the full-color LED. It may be configured to have a shape smaller than the outer shape (for example, a rectangular shape smaller than the full-color LED main body, or simply one thick line). In this way, when the full-color LED is mounted on the LED mounting surface, the area showing the position where the full-color LED is arranged is covered with the full-color LED main body, and the periphery of the full-color LED main body is also the white layer of the second layer. Since the resist and the white resist of the first layer are overlapped with each other to thicken the white resist of the second layer, the reflectance of the LED mounting surface can be further enhanced.

In the above-described embodiment, the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is substantially the same, and as shown in FIG. 264, the edge side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is , A configuration in which the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2, and a predetermined number of full-color LEDs are divided into a group 1 and a group 2. Although the configuration in which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged between the group 1 and the group 2 is adopted, the present invention can be applied to an elongated plate-shaped decorative substrate provided in the game board 5. Examples of the elongated plate-shaped decorative substrate included in the game board 5 include decorative boards included in various effect units of the game board 5.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 controls the light emission by passing a constant current through the eight full-color LEDs, but is not limited to the full-color LEDs, and white LEDs of a single color such as red, green, yellow, orange, blue, and green may be used. A monochromatic LED can also be used. In this case, one LED constant current drive circuit can control the emission of up to 24 single-color LEDs.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, DC +12V supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, but the LED constant current drive circuit The internal power supply Vreg (DC +5V) created by the linear power supply provided in the constant current drive circuit (the linear power supply 283xa provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a shown in FIG. 261) is the current allowable range of the linear power supply. It may be used as a voltage for lighting the LED. For example, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current drive circuit described above, at most one single color LED (for example, When the LEDs other than the red LED are electrically connected, the internal power source Vreg (DC +5V) created by the linear power source is input to the anode terminal of the single color LED, and The cathode terminal is configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat distribution resistor of the heat distribution circuit described above. Further, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current drive circuit described above, at most two single color LEDs (for example, When the red LEDs are electrically connected in series, the internal power supply Vreg (DC +5V) created by the linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of the first-stage LED, and the cathode terminal of the last-stage LED is It can be configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat distribution resistor of the heat distribution circuit described above. The decorative board thus configured can be applied to the decorative board provided in the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the DC +12V supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, and the output channel of the constant current drive circuit is input. Of the LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8, the cathode terminal of the LED element forming one full color LED for one output channel is electrically connected via the heat dispersion resistance of the heat dispersion resistance circuit described above. However, a plurality of full-color LEDs may be electrically connected in series to one output channel. In this case, the number of full-color LEDs is 2 to 3. When it is necessary to further increase the number of full-color LEDs for one output channel, the power supply board 630 supplies (outputs) the direct current +12 V supplied (output) from the power supply board 630. DC +35V may be used as the voltage for lighting the LED. The decorative board thus configured can be applied to the decorative board provided in the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame top central decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 of the door frame top decoration body 453 are the door frame top center decoration board 455 and the door. In the state where the frame top left decorative board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged on the door frame top decorative body 453, the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side of the decorative board is large. Although the edge sides of the land pattern are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper and lower edges of the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, One of the frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit for any two decorative boards. The sides may be arranged so as to be non-parallel to the upper end side and the lower end side of the decorative substrate. The door frame top right decoration board 457 directly controls the light emission of another right decoration board on which, for example, two full-color LEDs are mounted, in addition to the full-color LED included in itself, by the LED constant current drive circuit included in itself. Alternatively, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 may be directly provided with the LED constant current drive circuit provided with the other left decorative substrate on which one full color LED is mounted in addition to the full-color LED provided with itself. The light emission may be controlled.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, and the like are provided on the door frame 3. The LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of various decorative substrates included in each of the decorative bodies described above are solidly coated with a white resist, but instead of this, they may be printed by white silk printing. In this case, after the entire LED mounting surface and LED non-mounting surface of various decorative boards are printed by white silk printing, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are silk-printed. It will be printed in yellow (or black), respectively.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, and the like of various decorative substrates included in each decorative body provided on the door frame 3 are provided. On the LED non-mounting surface, the area corresponding to the full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface of each decorative board was printed by the yellow chain line (or the black chain line) by silk printing, but the mounting position of the full-color LED Of the full-color LED by adding the polarity mark of the full-color LED to the auxiliary line (that is, when the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed and printed with the yellow chain line (or the black chain line)). It may be configured to clearly indicate the mounting direction.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, each decorative substrate included in the game board 5 shown in FIGS. 107 to 205 (for example, the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 included in the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 and the rear lower left effect unit 3200). Lower left decorative substrate 3203, lower lower right decorative substrate 3253 included in lower lower right rendering unit 3250, first lower intermediate decorative substrate 3322 and second lower intermediate decorative substrate 3329 included in lower intermediate decorative body unit 3320, upper rear Back front decorative board 3422 and back back rear decorative board 3452 of back up/down decorative body unit 3450 provided in rendering unit 3400, back back left decorative board 3522, back right decoration unit 3620 provided in back rear left decoration unit 3520 The back-rear right decorative board 3622, the back-front left decorative board 3714 provided in the back-front left decorative body unit 3710, and the back-front right decorative board 3814 provided in the back-front right decorative body unit 3810) include front (front) and back ( A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution on the back surface (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). Position of the full-color LED and the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which makes it possible to identify multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) on the white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate. Is printed by silk printing with a yellow paint, and the configuration of measures against the decrease in reflectance according to the above-described second embodiment (a part number corresponding to a full-color LED and a full-color LED is arranged). By the area indicating the position to be turned on, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being lowered by the emission of the full-color LED, and the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the full-color LED which have no relation to the game for the player. 107-205. However, the configuration is the same as that in which measures are taken such as a decrease in reflectance that can prevent the player from visually recognizing the area where the LEDs are arranged. When mounting electronic components such as ICs, resistors, and capacitors on the rear surface (rear surface) of each decorative board provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 107, each decorative board provided in the game board 5 shown in FIGS. On the white resist that is solidly painted on the back surface (back surface), areas indicating the positions where electronic components are to be placed are printed by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk printing, and in the vicinity of these areas. Is compatible with electronic parts The component numbers may be printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing, respectively, or a modified example of the configuration of the measure for reducing the reflectance or the like according to the second embodiment described above may be adopted. .. Further, for each of the decorative substrates provided in the game board 5 shown in FIGS. 107 to 205, the above-described configuration (including modified examples) of the countermeasures such as the reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment, the third embodiment. Either the configuration of the countermeasures for reducing the reflectance according to the embodiment (including the modified example) or the configuration of the countermeasures for reducing the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment (including the modified example) is adopted. May be.

Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with various substrates which are supplied from a power source from a power source substrate and can control the illumination (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-192989 (FIG. 8)). By the way, in the game machine, a line for transmitting a power source and a line for transmitting a control signal are routed to various boards, and the length of the line becomes long, so that various boards may be affected by external noise and malfunction. was there.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine including a front frame configured to cover a window opening the game board back and forth with a transparent protection plate (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-192989 (paragraph [0014]. , And Fig. 1)). By increasing the size of the game area formed on the game board, the thickness of the left and right sides of the front frame is reduced, and the decorative substrate accommodated in the left and right sides is also strip-shaped. Further, by providing the display device and the movable body on the game board, the area occupied by the display device and the movable body in the game board becomes large, and the decorative substrate provided on the game board also becomes a strip plate. However, when the light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided on the strip-shaped decorative substrate, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a region for drawing out the wiring from the light emitting control means to the light emitting means.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine that is provided in a standby position below the display screen of the effect display device and that includes a movable accessory device that operates during effect (for example, JP-A-2005-058064). Publication (paragraph [0040], FIG. 4, FIG. 8, and FIG. 9)). In the movable accessory device, a decorative substrate on which a light emitting means facing the back surface of the light emitting portion (lens) on the design surface is mounted is attached. However, there is a risk that the player may visually recognize through the light emitting section, a number for identifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative substrate and an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, which has no relation to the game.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine to which a decorative board on which a light emitting means is mounted is attached (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-154676 (paragraph [0019], FIG. 5)). The player is provided with a variety of effects using the light emitting effect by the light emitting means. However, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected on the mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the reflectance is reduced by the number for identifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative substrate and the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means. It was difficult to make the substrate a bright light emitting surface.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a decorative substrate on which electronic components such as a light emitting body (light emitting means) facing the back surface of a light emitting portion (lens) are mounted is provided on a frame side or a game board side (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2005-058064 (paragraph [0011], paragraph [0040], FIG.1, FIG.2, FIG.4, FIG.8, and FIG. 9). However, there is a possibility that the player may visually recognize an auxiliary symbol, which has no relation to the game, with the electronic component mounted on the decorative substrate through the light emitting unit.

[Silk printing with light-colored paint on a white coating film formed on the surface of each decorative board provided on the game board and door frame]
107- Each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 205 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “each decorative board provided in the game board 5”) and measures for reducing the reflectance according to the second embodiment described above. The respective decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3 adopting the above configuration will be described.

[Silk printing with a light-colored paint on the white coating film formed on the surface of each decorative board provided in the game board]
First, as each of the decorative substrates provided in the game board 5 shown in FIGS. 107 to 205, for example, the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 provided in the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 shown in FIG. 145 and the lower back left effect shown in FIG. 159. The lower back left decorative substrate 3203 included in the unit 3200, the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 included in the lower lower right rendering unit 3250 shown in FIG. 159, and the lower back middle decorative body included in the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 shown in FIG. 165. Decorative substrate 3322 and second lower back decorative substrate 3329, rear front front decorative substrate 3422 provided in back production unit 3400 shown in FIG. 171, and back up and down decorative body unit provided in back production unit 3400 shown in FIG. 173. 3450 rear rear decorative board 3452, rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 shown in FIG. 181, rear rear left decorative board 3522, rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 shown in FIG. 188 rear right decorative board 3622 , The back-front left decorative board 3714 provided in the back-front left decorative body unit 3710 shown in FIG. 193, the back-front right decorative board 3814 provided in the back-front right decorative body unit 3810 shown in FIG. 197, and the like. , A white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (rear surface) (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”) to provide a white resist. A full-color that allows a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) to be specified on a white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the game board 5 while the layers are formed. The part number corresponding to the LED, the notation portion such as the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged, and the like are printed with yellow paint by silk printing. That is, each of the decorative boards provided in the game board 5 has the same configuration as the countermeasure for the reduction in reflectance according to the second embodiment described above, and the reduction in reflectance according to the second embodiment described above. Due to the effect of the configuration of the countermeasure, that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being reduced by the emission of the full-color LED. At the same time, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game to the player, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged. (Measures such as reduction of reflectance are taken).

Here, a member disposed in front of the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 will be briefly described. The front surface (front surface) of the rear rear decorative board 3114 included in the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 is illustrated in FIG. As shown in 145, a light guide and radiation plate 3113 in the form of a transparent flat plate, a sheet-like decorative sheet 3112 having a light-transmitting portion (region) and a transparent portion (region), and transparent. They are arranged in the order of the flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111, and are covered by the game board side transparent member such as the light guide radiation plate 3113, the sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and the decorative body 3111. As shown in FIG. 159, the front (front) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 provided in the lower back left rendering unit 3200 is, as shown in FIG. 159, toward the front, a transparent lower back decorative body 3202 and a transparent lower back left rotation. The decorations 3201 are arranged in this order, and are covered by the game board side transparent members such as the lower back left decoration 3202 and the lower lower left rotation decoration 3201. As shown in FIG. 159, the front surface (front surface) of the lower back right decoration substrate 3253 provided in the lower back right effect unit 3250 is, as shown in FIG. 159, forward transparent back lower right decoration 3252 and transparent lower back right rotation. The decorations 3251 are arranged in this order, and are covered by the game board side transparent member such as the lower back right decorative body 3252 and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 165, the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 provided in the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is, as shown in FIG. 165, a transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321, and They are arranged in the order of the transparent underside middle rotating decorative body 3310, and are covered by the game board side transparent member such as the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 and the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310. As shown in FIG. 165, as shown in FIG. 165, a transparent lower back middle decorating body 3328 is arranged on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle decorating body 3329. It is covered by the game board side transparent member such as. As shown in FIG. 171, the front surface (front surface) of the back-side front decoration substrate 3422 provided in the back-side effect unit 3400 is, as shown in FIG. 171, a transparent back-side front decoration body 3421 or a transparent back-side front decoration body. 3421 and transparent front-up front rotating decorations 3410 are arranged in this order, and are covered by the game board side transparent members such as back-up front decorations 3421 and back-up front rotating decorations 3410. As shown in FIG. 173, as shown in FIG. 173, the front surface (front surface) of the back-up/back decoration substrate 3452 of the back-up/down decoration unit 3450 provided in the back-up effect unit 3400 is transparent toward the front, as shown in FIG. Then, they are arranged in the order of the transparent back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440, and are covered by the game board side transparent members such as the back-up rear decorative body 3451 and the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 181, the front surface (front surface) of the rear back left decoration substrate 3522 provided in the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 is, as shown in FIG. The rear left rotating decorative body 3510 is arranged in this order, and is covered by the game board side transparent member such as the back rear left decorative body 3521 and the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510. As shown in FIG. 188, the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear right decoration board 3622 provided in the back-rear right decoration unit 3620 is, as shown in FIG. The rotating decorations 3610 are arranged in this order, and are covered by the game board side transparent members such as the back rear right decorations 3621 and the back right rotating decorations 3610. As shown in FIG. 193, the front surface (front surface) of the back-front left decoration substrate 3714 provided in the back-front left decoration body unit 3710 is, as shown in FIG. The support member 3712, the shutter unit 3730, and the frame-shaped front cover 3711 are arranged in this order, and are covered by the game board side transparent member such as the back front left decoration body 3713. As shown in FIG. 197, the front surface (front surface) of the back-front right decoration substrate 3814 provided in the back-front right decoration body unit 3810 is, as shown in FIG. The support member 3812, the shutter unit 3830, and the frame-shaped front cover 3811 are arranged in this order, and are covered by the game board side transparent member such as the back front right decoration 3813.

In this way, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 is covered with the game board side transparent member. As described above, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are mounted. ing. That is, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film, which is covered by the game board side transparent member.

In the pachinko machine 1, since light emission is performed brilliantly by the electric decoration by the light emitting portions such as the LEDs mounted on each decorative board, a plurality of front boards (front surfaces) mounted on the decorative boards included in the game board 5 are mounted. LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor light emission) have various light emission modes depending on whether they are turned on (emitted) or turned off. Therefore, in the state where the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the player can visually recognize the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 through the transparent member on the game board side, and the player is playing a gambling game. There is a possibility that the interest may be reduced, and it is inefficient that the effect member including the decorative substrate on which the LED that goes out is mounted cannot contribute to the progress of the effect.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, each decoration provided on the game board 5 in a state where a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of each decoration board provided on the game board 5 are turned off. The white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate makes the game board side transparent member look like a white member. As a result, when a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 effectively reflects outside light. Since it can be emitted, the concept of pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, the world of pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) The view is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, since the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 is covered by the game board side transparent member, a plurality of LEDs (which are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 ( As if the game board side transparent member is a white member due to the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 in the state where the multi-colored full color LED) is off. You can see it. As a result, even when each of the decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 can effectively reflect and emit the external light, the external light of various colors can be emitted from the game board side transparent member. It is difficult for the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) to be collapsed by emitting it to the outside. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Further, as described above, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the game board 5 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film, which is covered by the game board side transparent member. Among the game board side transparent members, a decorative sheet 3112, a lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, a lower back left decorative body 3202, a lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, a lower back right decorative body 3252, a lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, Back front front decoration 3410, back front decoration 3421, back back rotation decoration 3440, back rear decoration 3451, back left rotation decoration 3510, back left decoration 3521, back right rotation decoration As described above, the body 3610 and the back right decoration body 3621 are formed transparent and have a plurality of minute irregularities capable of disturbing light. In one petal of a cherry blossom, the petals are According to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) so that the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center to the periphery. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed. In other words, among the transparent members on the game board side, a decorative sheet 3112, a lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, a lower back left decorative body 3202, a lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, a lower back right decorative body 3252, a lower back middle rotating decorative. Body 3310, back-up front rotating decoration body 3410, back-up front decoration body 3421, back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440, back-up rear decoration body 3451, back-rear left rotating decoration body 3510, back-rear left decoration body 3521, back-rear The right rotation decorative body 3610 and the back rear right decorative body 3621 are transparent and have a shaded area having a pink color. As a result, when the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 becomes a white background. , A shaded area having a pink color rises from this white background, and the decorative sheet 3112, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, the lower back left decorative body 3202, the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, the lower back right decorative body 3252, the lower back Middle rotation decorative body 3310, back front rotation decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back top rear rotation decoration 3440, back top rear decoration 3451, back left rotation decoration 3510, back rear left decoration 3521 It is possible to provide the player with a three-dimensional modeling beauty by the back-and-back right rotating decoration body 3610 and the back-and-right right decoration body 3621.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the metal decoration portion (gold material) such as the metal decoration portion 3111d, the metal decoration portion 3310a, the metal decoration portion 3711a, and the metal decoration portion 3811a is formed by hot stamping a gold metal foil. In contrast to being formed by foil stamping, a white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate arranged behind each decorative body on which such a metal decorative portion (gold material) is formed. On the upper surface, a notation portion on the front surface side that enables specification of a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is printed by yellow printing by silk printing. The gold color is a color like gold, and is a color that shines yellow like gold. Therefore, the yellow color of the front side notation part is similar to the gold color of the metal decoration part 3111d. In the gaming machine, as the golden material, in addition to the obstacle nail N using brass and the metal decoration portion formed by the foil stamping by the hot stamping described above, for example, silver plating and yellow material (for example, transparent material). Examples thereof include a yellow resin having a light property, a member on which a yellow printed matter is mounted, a golden printed matter, and the like.

[Example of arranging a gold material (metal decoration part) in front of a decorative sheet having a transparent area and the like arranged in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate and surrounding the transparent area with the gold material (metal decoration part) ]
In addition, as the respective decorative substrates included in the game board 5, for example, a rear-rear decorative substrate 3114 included in the rear-removable decorative member 3110, a lower-rear first decorative substrate 3322 and a lower-rear intermediate first included in the lower-rear intermediate decorative unit 3320 (2) As described above, the front surface (front surface) of the decoration board 3329, the back-front left decoration board 3714 provided in the back-front left decoration body unit 3710, and the back-front right decoration board 3814 provided in the back-front right decoration body unit 3810 is white A white resist layer is formed by the white coating film formed by applying the resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). On the white resist, a surface-side notation portion that enables identification of a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, and a metal decoration portion having a metallic luster is arranged in the vicinity. As described above, the front-side notation portion is capable of identifying the front-side electronic component mounted on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5, and the part number of the front-side electronic component. , Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, It may include the model of the front-side electronic component).

For example, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 included in the back rear movable decorative body 3110 will be described. The front surface (front surface) of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 included in the back rear movable decorative body 3110 faces forward as shown in FIG. The transparent light guide/radiation plate 3113, a sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112 having a light-transmitting portion (region) and a transparent portion (region), and a transparent flat-plate ornamental body 3111 are arranged in this order. And, it is covered with the game board side transparent member such as the light guide radiation plate 3113, the sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and the decorative body 3111. The decorative body 3111 is entirely colorless and transparent except for the metallic decorative portion 3111d having metallic luster. The metal decoration portion 3111d has a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment), and multicolor emission is printed by silk printing on a white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114. Since the surface-side notation part that enables identification of a possible full-color LED has a yellow color, the color (yellow) that the surface-side notation part has is similar to the color (gold color) that the metal decoration part 3111d has. There is.

It should be noted that a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is not mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 corresponding to the metal decorative portion 3111d of the transparent flat plate-shaped decoration 3111 provided in the back-rear movable decoration 3110. On the other hand, a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 corresponding to the transparent region of the transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 excluding the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114.

When the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114 is transparent except for the metallic decorative portion 3111d having metallic luster in the decorative body 3111. The white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 serves as a white background, although it can be visually recognized through the area marked with, and thus the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Due to the attractiveness, the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. As a result, the eye is attracted to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111, so that the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made difficult to visually recognize. Since it is possible, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 and the metallic decorative portion 3111d having metallic luster in the decorative body 3111 are used. Although it can be seen through the except transparent region, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the rear/rear decoration substrate 3114 serves as a white background, so that the color of the metal decoration portion 3111d ( Due to the attractiveness of the gold color, the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. As a result, even when the back decoration board 3114 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eye is attracted to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration body 3111, Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 can be made difficult to see, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) The view is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Further, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is printed by silk printing on the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114. Although the surface-side notation portion having a yellow color that can be specified can be visually recognized through the transparent region of the decorative body 3111 excluding the metallic decorative portion 3111d having a metallic luster, the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) serves as a white background, the decorative film 3111 is provided from the front surface (front surface) of the rear/rear decoration substrate 3114 by the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Since the line of sight is naturally guided to the formed (formed) metal decoration part 3111d, even if the front side notation part is printed by silk printing in yellow similar to the color (gold color) of the metal decoration part 3111d, this yellow The existence of silk printing can be obscured.

Further, through holes, lands, and the like are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114. Since the through-holes, lands, etc. are exposed from the white coating film because the copper foil is exposed, the front surface of the rear-rear decorative substrate 3114 is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3111d. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the (surface) to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration body 3111, the eye is attracted to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration body 3111. Since it is difficult to understand the existence of through holes, lands, etc., when performing the work of drawing the wiring pattern of the back and rear decoration substrate 3114, the positions, sizes, and numbers of the through holes and lands are restricted. This is not necessary, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the wiring pattern of the rear back decoration substrate 3114, and it is possible to contribute to shortening the time required for the work of the artwork.

[Example of placing a gold-colored material (metal decoration part) in front of a transparent lens placed in front of a substrate printed in yellow silk]
The back lower middle first decorative board 3322 and the back lower middle second decorative board 3329 included in the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 will be described. As shown in FIG. 165, as shown in FIG. 165, the transparent inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 and the transparent lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 are arranged in this order. , And the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the like are covered with a game board side transparent member. As shown in FIG. 165, as shown in FIG. 165, a transparent lower back middle decorating body 3328 is arranged on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle decorating substrate 3329. It is covered by the game board side transparent member such as. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is entirely transparent except for the metallic decorative portion 3310a having metallic luster. The metal decoration portion 3310a has a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment), and is a white color solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the back lower middle second decorative substrate 3329. Since the surface-side notation part that enables identification of the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors printed by silk printing on the resist has a yellow color, the color (yellow) that the surface-side notation part has is the metal decoration part 3310a. It is a color similar to the color that it has (gold).

It should be noted that a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is not mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 corresponding to the metal decorative portion 3310a of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, while the metal decorative portion is not mounted. A full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 corresponding to the transparent region of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 excluding 3310a.

When the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the first lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 has the metallic luster of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. Although visible through the transparent region excluding the metal decorative portion 3310a, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 serves as a white background, Due to the attractiveness due to the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a, the line of sight from the front surface (front surface) of the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 to the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the back lower central rotating decoration body 3310 Will be naturally guided. As a result, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the first lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 is attracted by the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. Can be difficult to see. Further, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the second underside second decorative substrate 3329 is visually recognized through the transparent underside intermediate decorative body 3328. However, since the back under-center rotating decorative body 3310 in which the metal decorative portion 3310a having metallic luster is provided (formed) in front of the under-under-center decorative body 3328 is arranged, Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3329 becomes a white background, the front surface (front surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 under the back surface is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a. From (), the line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. As a result, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the second lower back middle decorative substrate 3329 is attracted to the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. Can be difficult to see. For this reason, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 is coated with the metallic luster of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. The white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back first decorative substrate 3322 becomes a white background, although it is visible through the transparent region except the metal decorative portion 3310a. Then, due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a, from the front surface (front surface) of the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 to the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. The line of sight will be guided naturally. As a result, even when the first lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the metal decoration portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is formed. By attracting the eyes, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322. Further, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the second underside second decorative substrate 3329 is visually recognized through the transparent underside intermediate decorative body 3328. However, since the back under-center rotating decorative body 3310 in which the metal decorative portion 3310a having metallic luster is provided (formed) in front of the under-under-center decorative body 3328 is arranged, Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3329 becomes a white background, the front surface (front surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 under the back surface is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a. From (), the line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. As a result, even when the second lower back middle decorative substrate 3329 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the metal decoration portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is formed. By attracting the eyes, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329. For this reason, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Further, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the multi-color emitting capable of being printed by silk printing on the white resist which is solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322 is possible. Although the front surface notation part having a yellow color that allows the full-color LED to be identified can be visually recognized through the transparent region of the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 excluding the metal decorative part 3310a having a metallic luster, Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decoration substrate 3322 serves as a white background, the first decoration in the lower back middle decoration is attractive due to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3310a. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3322 to the metal decoration portion 3310a provided (formed) on the back-and-bottom center rotating decoration body 3310, the front surface side notation portion has the color (gold color) of the metal decoration portion 3310a. ) Is similar to the yellow) and is printed by silk printing, the existence of this yellow silk printing can be obscured. In addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the multiple-color emission is possible, which is printed by silk printing on the white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329. Although the front surface notation part having a yellow color that allows the full-color LED to be identified can be visually recognized through the transparent inner back decoration 3328, a metallic decoration having a metallic luster in front of the inner back decoration 3328. Since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 on which the 3310a is provided (formed) is disposed, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the second lower back middle decorative substrate 3329 becomes a white background. Then, due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a, the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) from the front surface (front surface) of the second lower intermediate decorative substrate 3329 to the lower intermediate rotating decorative body 3310 is formed. Since the line of sight is naturally guided, even if the surface side notation part is printed by silk printing in yellow similar to the color (gold color) of the metal decoration part 3310a, the existence of this yellow silk printing may be difficult to understand. You can do it.

In addition, through holes, lands, and the like are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322. Since the through-holes, lands, etc. are exposed from the white coating film because the copper foil is exposed, the first decorative substrate in the lower back is attractive due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the 3322 to the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, the line of sight is provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310. ) Since the presence of through holes, lands, etc. can be obscured by attracting eyes to the metal decorative portion 3310a, when performing the work of the artwork for drawing the wiring pattern of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322. , The position, size, and number of through holes and lands are not constrained, and the degree of freedom in arranging the wiring pattern of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322 can be increased, and the time required for artwork work can be increased. It can also contribute to shortening. In addition, through holes, lands, etc. are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329. The through holes, lands, etc. are conspicuous from the white coating film because the copper foil is exposed, but the second decorative substrate in the back underside is attractive due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the 3329 to the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, the line of sight is provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310. ) Since the presence of through holes, lands, etc. can be obscured by attracting eyes to the metal decorative portion 3310a, when performing the work of the artwork for drawing the wiring pattern of the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329. , The position, size, and number of through holes and lands are not required, and the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern of the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329 can be increased, and the time required for the work of the artwork can be increased. It can also contribute to shortening.

[Example of arranging a gold material (metal decoration part) in front of a transparent decoration body arranged in front of a substrate printed in yellow silk and surrounding the transparent decoration body with a gold material (metal decoration part)]
The back-front left decorative board 3714 provided in the back-front left decorative body unit 3710 will be described. The front surface (front surface) of the back-front left decorative board 3714 provided in the back-front left decorative body unit 3710 is, as shown in FIG. A transparent plate-shaped back front left decorative body 3713, a frame-shaped shutter support member 3712, a shutter unit 3730, and a frame-shaped front cover 3711 are arranged in this order, and a game board such as the back front left decorative body 3713 is provided. It is covered by the side transparent member. On the front surface of the frame-shaped front cover 3711, a metal decorative portion 3711a having a metallic luster is formed. The metal decorative portion 3711a has a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment), and is a multicolor printed by silk printing on a white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. Since the front-side notation portion that enables the specification of the full-color LED that can emit light has a yellow color, the color (yellow) that the front-side notation portion has is similar to the color (gold color) that the metal decoration portion 3711a has. ing.

In addition, on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 corresponding to the metal decoration portion 3711a of the back front left decoration body unit 3710, a full color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is not mounted, while the metal decoration portion 3711a is provided. A full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back-front left decorative substrate 3714 corresponding to the area inside the frame-shaped front cover 3711 that has been removed.

In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the shutter unit 3730, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is visible from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the back-front left decoration body 3713 is formed transparent, and therefore the back-front left decoration body 3713 is arranged behind the back-front left decoration body 3713. The white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3714 can be visually recognized through the front left decorative body 3713, the frame of the shutter support member 3712, and the frame of the shutter unit 3730. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3714 serves as a white background, the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3711a causes the front surface (front surface) of the left front decorative substrate 3714 The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711. As a result, the eye is attracted to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711, so that the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is hard to be visually recognized. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, in the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the shutter unit 3730, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is visible from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the back-front left decoration body 3713 is formed transparent, and therefore the back-front left decoration body 3713 is arranged behind the back-front left decoration body 3713. The white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3714 can be visually recognized through the front left decorative body 3713, the frame of the shutter support member 3712, and the frame of the shutter unit 3730. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3714 serves as a white background, the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3711a causes the front surface (front surface) of the left front decorative substrate 3714 The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711. As a result, even when the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eye is attracted to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be made difficult to see, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) The world view of is difficult to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Further, in the open state where the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the shutter unit 3730, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is solidly coated. A front side notation part having a yellow color that enables specification of a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors printed by silk-screen printing on a white resist is provided in the frame of the front left decoration body 3713, the shutter support member 3712, and the shutter unit. Although visible through the inside of the frame of 3730, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 serves as a white background, and thus the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3711a. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back-front left decorative substrate 3714 to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711 by the attractiveness due to Even if a yellow color similar to the color (gold color) is printed by silk printing, it is possible to make the existence of this yellow silk printing difficult to understand.

Further, through holes, lands, and the like are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. The through holes, lands, and the like are conspicuous from the white coating film because the copper foil is exposed, but due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3711a, the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711, the eye is attracted to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the existence of through holes, lands, etc. Therefore, when performing the work of drawing the wiring pattern of the back front left decorative substrate 3714, the positions, sizes, and numbers of the through holes and lands can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern of the back left front decorative substrate 3714 and to contribute to shortening the time required for the work of the artwork.

[Example of arranging a gold material (metal decoration part) in front of a transparent decoration body arranged in front of a substrate printed in yellow silk and surrounding the transparent decoration body with a gold material (metal decoration part)]
The back-front right decorative board 3814 included in the back-front right decorative body unit 3810 will be described. A front surface (front surface) of the back-front right decorative board 3814 included in the back-front right decorative body unit 3810 is, as shown in FIG. A transparent plate-shaped rear front right decorative body 3813, a frame-shaped shutter support member 3812, a shutter unit 3830, and a frame-shaped front cover 3811 are arranged in this order, and a game board such as the back front right decorative body 3813. It is covered by the side transparent member. On the front surface of the frame-shaped front cover 3811, a metal decorative portion 3811a having a metallic luster is formed. The metal decoration portion 3811a has a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment), and is a multicolor printed by silk printing on a white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decoration substrate 3814. Since the front-side notation portion that enables identification of the full-color LED that can emit light has a yellow color, the color (yellow) that the front-side notation portion has is similar to the color (gold color) that the metal decorative portion 3811a has. ing.

In addition, on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decoration substrate 3814 corresponding to the metal decoration portion 3811a of the back front right decoration unit 3810, a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is not mounted, while the metal decoration portion 3811a is provided. A full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back-front right decorative substrate 3814 that corresponds to the area inside the frame-shaped front cover 3811 that has been removed.

In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the shutter unit 3830, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is visible from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the back-front right decoration 3813 is formed transparent, so that the back-front right decoration 3813 is arranged behind the back-front right decoration 3813. Although the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3814 can be visually recognized through the back front right decoration 3813, the shutter support member 3812, and the shutter unit 3830, the back front right Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3814 becomes a white background, the attractiveness due to the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3811a causes the front front surface (front surface) of the right front decorative substrate 3814 The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811. As a result, eyes are attracted to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811 to make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, in the open state where the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the shutter unit 3830, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 becomes visible from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the back-front right decoration 3813 is formed transparent, so that the back-front right decoration 3813 is arranged behind the back-front right decoration 3813. Although the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3814 can be visually recognized through the back front right decoration 3813, the shutter support member 3812, and the shutter unit 3830, the back front right Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3814 becomes a white background, the attractiveness due to the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3811a causes the front front surface (front surface) of the right front decorative substrate 3814 The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811. Thereby, even when the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eyes are attracted to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 can be made difficult to see, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) The world view of is difficult to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Further, in the open state where the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the shutter unit 3830, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is solidly coated. A front surface notation portion having a yellow color that enables identification of a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors printed by silk-screen printing on a white resist is provided in the frame of the back front right decoration 3813, the shutter support member 3812, and the shutter unit. Although visible through the inside of the frame of 3830, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-front right decorative substrate 3814 becomes a white background, and thus the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3811a. The visual line is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back-front right decorative substrate 3814 to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811 by the attractiveness of the back front right decorative substrate 3814. Even if a yellow color similar to the color (gold color) is printed by silk printing, it is possible to make the existence of this yellow silk printing difficult to understand.

Further, through holes, lands, etc. are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-front right decorative substrate 3814. The through-holes, lands, etc. are conspicuous from the white coating film because the copper foil is exposed, but the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3811a attracts the back front right decorative substrate 3814. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811, the eye is attracted to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the existence of through holes, lands, etc. Therefore, when performing the work of drawing the wiring pattern of the back-front right decorative substrate 3814, the positions, sizes, and numbers of the through holes and lands. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the wiring pattern of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 and to contribute to shortening the time required for the work of the artwork.

[Example of arranging a transparent ornament placed in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate between the gold material (metal decoration part) and the gold material (metal decoration part)]
Further, in the game area 5a of the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 111, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 of the lower back middle effect unit 3300 shown in FIG. 163 is at the standby position (original position). , The back side production unit 3400 shown in FIG. 171 is arranged on the upper side thereof, the back front left decorative body unit 3710 of the back front left production unit 3700 shown in FIG. 193 is arranged on the left side thereof, and the right side thereof. The back-front right decorative body unit 3810 of the back-front right rendering unit 3800 shown in FIG. 197 is arranged, the back-bottom left rendering unit 3200 shown in FIG. 159 is arranged at the lower left side thereof, and the bottom-right side thereof is shown in FIG. 159. The lower back right effect unit 3250 shown is arranged.

The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 arranged below the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the back front left decorative body unit 3710 arranged on the left side of the game area 5a of the game board 5. The front cover 3711 and the front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 arranged on the right side of the game area 5a of the game board 5 are provided (formed) with metal decoration portions 3310a, 3711a, 3811a, and are predetermined. All have a golden color.

On the other hand, the back front decorative body 3421 and the back front rotating decoration 3410 of the back production unit 3400 arranged above the game area 5a of the game board 5 are transparently formed, and the back front decoration The front side notation has a yellow color so that a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors can be specified by silk-screen printing on a white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3422. The color (yellow) that the part has is arranged on the right side of the back side rendering unit 3400 and the metal decoration part 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decoration body unit 3710 which is arranged on the left side of the back side rendering unit 3400. The metal decoration portion 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 has a color similar to the gold color. In other words, the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 having the front surface notation portion of yellow similar to gold is the metal decoration portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decoration body unit 3710 and the front cover of the back front right decoration body unit 3810. Since the metal decoration portion 3811a of 3811 is disposed in a mixed manner (the metal decoration portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decoration body unit 3710 and the metal decoration portion 3811a of the front cover 3781 of the back front right decoration body unit 3810). When the color (yellow) of the front side notation is visible through the back front decorative body 3421, or the back front front decorative body 3421 and the back front rotating decorative body 3410. However, the attractiveness of the metallic decorative portions 3711a and 3811a having a gold color makes it difficult to understand the existence of the front-back decorative substrate 3422 and the existence of the front-side notation portion.

Also, the lower back left decorative body 3202 and the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 of the lower back left effect unit 3200 arranged on the lower left side of the game area 5a of the game board 5 are transparently formed, and the lower back left decorative substrate. The surface-side notation part that enables identification of the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors by silk-screen printing on the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the 3203 has a yellow color. Has a color (yellow) on the upper left side of the lower back left effect unit 3200, and on the lower right of the lower left effect unit 3200 and the metal decoration part 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the rear front left decorative unit 3710. The metal decoration portion 3310a of the inside-under-the-back rotating decorative body 3310 of the inside-under-the-back inside decorative body unit 3320 and the metal decoration portion 3310 have a color similar to the gold color. In other words, the back lower left decorative substrate 3203 having a yellow-side surface notation similar to gold is the metal decorative portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 and the back lower of the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320. Since it is arranged so as to be mixed with the metal decoration portion 3310a of the middle-turn decoration 3310a (the metal decoration portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back-front left decoration body unit 3710 and the back middle-rotation decoration of the back-side middle decoration body unit 3320). In the case where the color (yellow) of the front side notation is visible through the back lower left decoration 3202 and the back lower left rotating decoration 3201 because it is arranged in the vicinity of the metal decoration 3310a of the body 3310). Even if there is, the presence of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the presence of the front side notation portion can be made difficult to understand by the attractiveness of the metallic decoration parts 3711a and 3310a having a gold color.

In addition, the lower back right decoration body 3252 and the lower back right rotation decoration body 3251 of the lower back right effect unit 3250 arranged on the lower right side of the game area 5a of the game board 5 are transparently formed, and the lower back right decoration is formed. The front side notation has a yellow color so that the front side (front surface) of the substrate 3253 can specify a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors printed by silk printing on a white resist that is solidly coated. The color (yellow) of the part is on the lower right of the lower back left effect unit 3200 and the metal decoration part 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the rear front right decorative body unit 3810 arranged on the upper right of the lower back right effect unit 3250. The color is similar to the gold color of the metal decoration portion 3310a of the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310 of the arranged lower back middle rotating body unit 3320. In other words, the back lower right decorative substrate 3253 having a yellow-side front surface notation similar to gold is the metal decoration 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 and the back lower of the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320. Since the metal decoration portion 3310a of the middle rotation decoration body 3310 is disposed in a mixed manner (the metal decoration portion 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the back front right decoration body unit 3810 and the back bottom middle rotation decoration of the back bottom middle decoration body unit 3320). Since the color (yellow) of the front side notation is visible through the back lower right decoration 3252 and the back lower right rotating decoration 3251 (because it is arranged near the metal decoration 3310a of the body 3310). Even if there is, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the existence of the lower back right decoration substrate 3253 and the existence of the front side notation part by the attractiveness of the metallic decoration parts 3811a and 3310a having a gold color.

[Example of placing an obstacle nail near a transparent ornament placed in front of a substrate printed in yellow silk]
As described above, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 has a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and an outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface. The front component member 1000 is formed transparent together with the game panel 1100 as described above. As a result, it is possible to visually recognize the presence of various members disposed behind the game panel 1100 from the front of the front component member 1000 (that is, the front of the game board 5) through the game panel 1100 (hereinafter, It may be described as "transparent game panel 1100").

Further, in the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, as described above, the center accessory 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, the starting opening unit 2100 is formed of a transparent member, and the side unit 2200 is transparent. The side upper left unit 2300 is transparent, and the unit base 2411, the front cover 2412, and the rear cover 2413 of the first attacker unit 2400 are transparent. For this reason, for example, as shown in FIG. 111, the existence of the lower back left effect unit 3200, the lower right effect unit 3250, and the lower middle effect unit 3300 arranged behind the game panel 1100 is transparent to the game panel. It can be seen through various transparent members of 1100 and the front unit 2000.

For example, in the lower back left production unit 3200, a transparent lower back left decorative ornament 3201 and a lower rear left ornament 3202 are arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100. The lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is arranged in the rear. On the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203, a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors are mounted. In this way, behind the transparent game panel 1100, the lower back left rotation decoration 3201, the lower back left decoration 3202, and the transparent lower back decoration 3203 are arranged in this order. On the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203, a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). A white resist layer is formed. On the front surface (front surface) of the lower left rear decorative substrate 3203, on the white resist solidly coated, the part number of the front side electronic components such as a plurality of full-color LEDs and the surface such as a region indicating the position where the front side electronic components are arranged. The attributes of the side electronic component (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component may be included). The surface-side notation portion is printed in yellow (a color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N (brass is used in this embodiment)) by silk printing.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstruction nails N (brass is used in this embodiment) having contact with the game balls and having a predetermined gauge arrangement and having a gold color are provided on a transparent game panel 1100. Being planted, it is possible to utilize the attractiveness of the plurality of obstacle nails N having a golden color. That is, since a plurality of obstruction nails N having a golden color are planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, they are arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100 by the attractiveness of the plurality of obstruction nails N having a gold color. Even if the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative board 3203 can be visually recognized through the transparent lower back left decorative material 3201 and the lower back left decorative material 3202, the lower back left decorative board 3203 This contributes to making it difficult to understand the presence of a yellow (color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N) surface side marking portion printed by silk printing on the white resist which is solidly coated.

As with the lower back left effect unit 3200, the lower right effect unit 3250 also contributes to making the presence of the front side notation difficult to understand. That is, since a plurality of obstruction nails N having a golden color are planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, they are arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100 by the attractiveness of the plurality of obstruction nails N having a gold color. To visually recognize the front surface (front surface) of the lower back right decorative board 3253 of the lower back right rendering unit 3250 through the transparent lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 and the lower back right decorative body 3252 of the transparent lower back rendering unit 3250. Even if possible, yellow (color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N) printed by silk printing on the white resist solidly painted on the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 of the lower back right effect unit 3250. ) Contributes to making it difficult to understand the presence of the notation on the front side.

In addition, similarly to the back lower left effect unit 3200, the fact that the back lower middle effect unit 3300 also contributes to making it difficult to understand the presence of the front side notation part. That is, since a plurality of obstruction nails N having a golden color are planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, they are arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100 by the attractiveness of the plurality of obstruction nails N having a gold color. The front (front surface) of the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 of the back lower middle rendering unit 3300 is passed through the transparent lower back rotating medium 3310 and the inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 of the back lower middle rendering unit 3300. Even if it is visible, or through the transparent underbody decorations 3310 and underneath medium decorations 3328 of the underside middle effect unit 3300 arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100. Even if the front surface (front surface) of the back under middle second decorative substrate 3329 of the under under middle effect unit 3300 can be visually recognized, the under under first decorative substrate 3322 and under back of the under lower right effect unit 3250 To obscure the presence of a yellow (color similar to the gold color of a plurality of obstruction nails N) surface side marking portion printed by silk printing on a white resist solidly coated on the middle second decorative substrate 3329. Have contributed.

In addition, for example, in the state where a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative board 3203 of the lower back left effect unit 3200 are turned off, the surface of the lower back left decorative board 3203 The front side notation formed in a yellow color similar to gold is formed on the white coating film formed on the back side, the back bottom left decoration body 3202 of the back bottom left production unit 3200, and the back bottom left rotation decoration body 3201 which are transparent decorations. Although visible through the body and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 serves as a white background, so that the front of the surface of the lower lower left decorative substrate 3203 is seen. The line of sight is naturally guided from the surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 to the golden nail N by the attractiveness of the golden nail N planted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 arranged in Becomes Accordingly, even when the back lower left decorative substrate 3203 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the surface of the back lower left decorative substrate 3203 is attracted by the obstruction nail N having a gold color. Since the white coating film formed on the can be made difficult to see, the world view of the gaming machine is not easily destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

As with the lower back left effect unit 3200, the lower right effect unit 3250 is also capable of suppressing a decrease in decorativeness. That is, when a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back lower right decoration board 3253 of the back lower right effect unit 3250 are turned off, they are formed on the front surface of the back lower right decoration board 3253. The front side notation portion formed in a yellow color similar to gold is formed on the white coating film, which is a transparent decoration body such as a lower back right decoration body 3252 and a lower back right rotation decoration body 3251 of the lower back right performance unit 3250, Then, although it is visible through the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 becomes a white background, and thus is arranged in front of the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253. The visual line is naturally guided from the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 to the golden nail N by the attractiveness of the golden nail N planted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100. .. Accordingly, even when the back lower right decorative substrate 3253 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eyes are attracted to the obstruction nail N having a gold color, and the surface of the back lower right decorative substrate 3253 is attracted. Since the white coating film formed on the can be made difficult to see, the world view of the gaming machine is not easily destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Further, similarly to the lower back left effect unit 3200, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the decorativeness of the lower back middle effect unit 3300 as well. That is, in the state in which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back under middle first decorative board 3322 of the under under middle effect unit 3300 are turned off, the back under middle first decorative board 3322 is provided. The front side notation formed in a yellow color similar to gold on the white coating film formed on the surface of is called the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 of the lower back left rendering unit 3200, and the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. Although visible through the transparent decorative body and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the first lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 becomes a white background, and thus the first lower back middle. Due to the attractiveness of the obstruction nail N having a golden color, which is planted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 arranged in front of the surface of the ornamental board 3322, the obstruction nail N having a golden color from the surface of the first underneath first ornamental board 3322 is attracted. The line of sight will be naturally guided to. In addition, in the state in which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the second lower back middle decoration board 3329 of the lower back middle decoration board 3300 are turned off, the second lower back middle decoration board 3329 is provided. The front side notation part formed in yellow similar to gold is formed on the white coating film formed on the surface of the underside of the underside middle decoration 3328 of the underside left production unit 3200, and the underside center rotating decoration 3310 is transparent. Although it is visible through the transparent decoration panel and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating formed on the surface of the second underside second decorative substrate 3329 serves as a white background, so that the second underside second decorative From the surface of the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329 to the obstruction nail N having a golden color by the attractiveness of the obstruction nail N having a golden color which is planted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 arranged in front of the surface of the substrate 3329. The line of sight will be guided naturally. Thereby, even when the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the back lower middle second decorative substrate 3329 are used as a kind of decoration which can be visually recognized by the player, the eye is attracted to the obstacle nail N having a gold color. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the surfaces of the backside-under-first decoration substrate 3322 and the backside-under-second decoration substrate 3329. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Although a plurality of obstruction nails N having a gold color were planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, instead of this, a cell sheet having a predetermined shape is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and this cell The sheet has a portion designed in a golden color (the same color as the golden colors of the plurality of obstacle nails N or a color close to this golden color). For example, due to the attractiveness of the portion designed in the golden color, the sheet is designed in this golden color. The lower back left decorative board in the lower back left rendering unit 3200 is passed through the transparent lower back left decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202 in the lower back left rendering unit 3200 that is arranged behind the shaded portion. Even when the front surface (front surface) of 3203 can be visually recognized, yellow (cell sheet) printed by silk printing on the white resist solidly coated on the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 in the lower back left production unit 3200. This contributes to making it difficult to understand the presence of the surface-side notation portion of a color similar to the gold color of the portion designed in (1). When a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 of the lower back left rendering unit 3200 are turned off, they are formed on the surface of the lower left decorative substrate 3203. A front side notation formed in a yellow color similar to gold on the white coating is a transparent decorative body called a lower back left decorative body 3202 of a lower back left production unit 3200, and a lower lower left rotation decorative body 3201 and a transparent body. Although it is visible through the game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 becomes a white background, and thus is arranged in front of the surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203. The line of sight is naturally guided from the surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 to the gold-designed portion of the cell sheet by the attractiveness of the gold-designed portion of the cell sheet attached to the surface of the transparent game panel 1100. Becomes Thereby, even when the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eyes are attracted to the gold-designed portion of the cell sheet, and the lower lower left decorative substrate Since it is possible to make the white coating film formed on the surface of the 3203 difficult to see, the world view of the game machine is not easily lost. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Further, similar to the lower back left effect unit 3200, a cell sheet having a predetermined shape is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the cell sheet has a gold color (the same color as the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N, or this). There is a part designed in a color close to gold, and the lower back right effect unit 3250 placed behind this part designed in gold is also less decorative because of the attractiveness of the part designed in gold. The point that can be suppressed is established. That is, when a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back lower right decoration board 3253 of the back lower right effect unit 3250 are turned off, the light is formed on the front surface of the back lower right decoration board 3253. The front side notation portion formed in a yellow color similar to gold is formed on the white coating film, which is a transparent decoration body such as a lower back right decoration body 3252 of a lower back right production unit 3250 and a lower back right rotation decoration body 3251. Then, though visible through the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 becomes a white background, and thus is arranged in front of the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253. The visual line is naturally guided from the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 to the gold-designed portion of the cell sheet by the attractiveness of the gold-designed portion of the cell sheet attached to the surface of the transparent game panel 1100. The Rukoto. As a result, even when the back lower right decorative substrate 3253 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eyes are attracted to the gold-designed portion of the cell sheet, and the back lower right decorative substrate 3253 is attracted. Since the white coating film formed on the surface of the 3253 can be made difficult to see, the world view of the game machine is not easily lost. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Further, similar to the lower back left effect unit 3200, a cell sheet having a predetermined shape is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and this cell sheet has a gold color (the same color as the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N, or this). There is a portion designed in a color close to gold), and due to the attractiveness of this gold-designed portion, the decorativeness of the back-under-center production unit 3300 placed behind this gold-designed portion also deteriorates. The point that can be suppressed is established. That is, in a state in which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back under middle first decorative board 3322 of the under back middle effect unit 3300 are turned off, the under under middle first decorative board 3322 is provided. The front side notation formed in a yellow color similar to gold on the white coating film formed on the surface of is called the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 of the lower back left rendering unit 3200, and the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. Although visible through the transparent decorative body and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the first lower back first decorative substrate 3322 serves as a white background, and thus the first lower back first. Obstacle nail having a gold color from the surface of the first underneath first decorative board 3322 due to the attractiveness of the gold-designed portion of the cell sheet attached to the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 arranged in front of the surface of the decorative board 3322. The gaze is naturally guided to N. In addition, in the state in which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the second lower back middle decoration board 3329 of the lower back middle decoration board 3300 are turned off, the second lower back middle decoration board 3329 is provided. The front side notation part formed in yellow similar to gold is formed on the white coating film formed on the surface of the underside of the underside middle decoration 3328 of the underside left production unit 3200, and the underside center rotating decoration 3310 is transparent. Although it is visible through the transparent decoration panel and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating formed on the surface of the second underside second decorative substrate 3329 serves as a white background, so that the second underside second decorative Due to the attractiveness of the gold-designed portion of the cell sheet attached to the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 disposed in front of the surface of the substrate 3329, the obstacle nail N having the gold color from the surface of the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329 is attracted. The line of sight will be naturally guided to. As a result, even when the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the back lower middle second decorative substrate 3329 are used as a kind of decoration which is visible to the player, the eyes are visible on the gold-designed portion of the cell sheet. Since the white coating film formed on the surfaces of the lower-back middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the lower-back middle second decorative substrate 3329 can be made difficult to be visually recognized, the world view of the gaming machine is not easily destroyed. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

[Silk printing with a light-colored paint on the white coating film formed on the surface of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame]
On the other hand, each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 that employs the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment described above (hereinafter, may be referred to as “various decorative substrates included in the door frame 3”). For example, for example, the handle decoration board 184 included in the handle unit 180 illustrated in FIG. 38, the plate upper left decoration board 273 included in the plate upper left decoration unit 270 illustrated in FIGS. 49 and 50, and the plate upper right illustrated in FIGS. 49 and 50. The plate upper right decoration substrate 278 provided in the decoration unit 275, the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 provided in the plate lower left decoration unit 280 shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, and the plate right lower plate decoration plate 285 shown in FIGS. 49 and 50 Lower decorative board 288, the center of the dish included in the effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 54. Upper decorative board 314, the center of the dish included in the effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 54. Lower decorative board 316, effect operation ring decorative board 352 included in effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 54, central button decorative board 376 included in effect operation button unit 360 of effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 60, and shown in FIG. 67. Outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in effect operation button unit 360 of effect operation unit 300, door frame left side decoration board 402 provided in door frame left side unit 400 shown in FIG. 67, door frame right side unit shown in FIG. Decorating board 413 in the side window decoration part provided in 410, door frame right side decoration board 418 provided in the door frame right side unit 410 shown in FIG. 70, door frame top central decoration provided in the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. There are the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 provided in the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. 74, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 provided in the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. 74, and the like. , A white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (rear surface) (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”) to provide a white resist. A full-color that allows a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) to be specified on a white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 while the layer is formed. Since the notation parts such as the part number corresponding to the LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are printed by silk printing with yellow paint, the reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment described above. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LED due to the effect of the configuration of the countermeasures, that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged. At the same time, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game to the player, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged. (Measures such as reduction of reflectance are taken).

Here, the members arranged in front of the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 will be briefly described. The front surface (front surface) of the handle decorative substrate 184 included in the handle unit 180 is As shown in FIG. 38, the transparent inner lens 185a and the transparent handle cover 185 are arranged in this order toward the front, and are covered by the door frame side transparent member such as the inner lens 185a and the handle cover 185. ing. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front surface (front surface) of the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 provided in the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is, as shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. They are arranged in the order of 271 and are covered by the door frame side transparent member such as the dish upper left inner lens 272 and the dish upper left decoration 271. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front surface (front surface) of the plate upper right decoration substrate 278 provided in the plate upper right decoration unit 275 is, as shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, a transparent plate upper right inner lens 277 and a transparent plate upper right decoration They are arranged in the order of 276, and are covered by the plate upper right inner lens 277 and the door frame side transparent member such as the plate upper right decoration 276. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front surface (front surface) of the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 included in the plate lower left decoration unit 280 is, as shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. They are arranged in the order 281 and are covered by the door left side inner lens 282, the door left side decorative member 281 and other door frame side transparent members. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front surface (front surface) of the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 provided in the plate lower right decoration unit 285 is, as shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, a transparent plate lower right inner lens 287 and a transparent plate. The lower right decorative body 286 is arranged in this order, and is covered with the door lower side inner lens 287, the plate lower right decorative body 286, and other transparent members on the door frame side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54, the upper surface (front surface) of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 provided in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 has a transparent plate center upper inner lens 313 and a transparent plate center. The upper decoration body 312a is arranged in this order, and is covered by the plate center upper inner lens 313, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and other transparent members on the door frame side. As shown in FIG. 54, the upper surface (front surface) of the plate center lower decoration substrate 316 provided in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 has a transparent plate center lower inner lens 315 and a transparent plate center lower decoration. They are arranged in the order of the body 312b, and are covered with the door frame side transparent member such as the dish center lower inner lens 315 and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As shown in FIG. 54, the upper surface (front surface) of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided in the effect operation unit 300 includes a transparent decoration substrate cover 353, a transparent ring mounting base 331, and a transparent rotation operation unit 302 in this order. And is covered with a door frame side transparent member such as the decorative substrate cover 353, the ring mounting base 331, and the rotation operation unit 302. As shown in FIG. 60, a transparent central button cover 375 is disposed on the upper surface (front surface) of the central button decoration board 376 provided in the rendering operation button unit 360 of the rendering operation unit 300, and the door frame of the central button cover 375 or the like. It is covered by the side transparent member. As shown in FIG. 60, the upper surface (front surface) of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300 has a transparent outer peripheral substrate cover 378, a transparent outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379, and a transparent outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379. The outer peripheral button cover 380 is arranged in this order, and is covered by the door frame side transparent member such as the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380.

Further, the front surface (front surface) of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 provided in the door frame left side unit 400 is, as shown in FIG. 67, a transparent left side inner lens 403 and a transparent door frame toward the front. The left side decorations 404 are arranged in this order, and are covered with the left side inner lens 403 and the door frame side transparent member such as the door frame left side decoration 404. 70. As shown in FIG. 70, the front surface (front surface) of the decoration portion decoration substrate 413 provided in the door frame right side unit 410 is, as shown in FIG. 70, a transparent inner inner lens 414 and a transparent side window decoration. The portions 410b are arranged in this order, and are covered by the inner inner lens 414 and the door frame side transparent member such as the side window interior decoration portion 410b. As shown in FIG. 70, the front surface (front surface) of the door frame right side decoration substrate 418 provided in the door frame right side unit 410 is, as shown in FIG. 70, toward the front, the transparent right side inner lens 415 and the transparent door frame right side. The decorations 419 are arranged in this order, and are covered by the door frame side transparent member such as the right side inner lens 415 and the door frame right side decoration 419.

As shown in FIG. 74, the front surface (front surface) of the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 provided in the door frame top unit 450 is, as shown in FIG. The decorations 453 are arranged in this order, and are covered with the top center inner lens 458 and the door frame side transparent member such as the door frame top decoration 453. As shown in FIG. 74, the front surface (front surface) of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 included in the door frame top unit 450 is, as shown in FIG. They are arranged in the order of 453, and are covered by the door frame side transparent member such as the top left inner lens 459 and the door frame top decoration 453. As shown in FIG. 74, the front surface (front surface) of the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 provided in the door frame top unit 450 is, as shown in FIG. They are arranged in the order of 453, and are covered by the door frame side transparent member such as the top right inner lens 460 and the door frame top decoration 453.

In this way, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is covered with the door frame side transparent member. As described above, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are mounted. ing. That is, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film, which is covered with the door frame side transparent member.

In the pachinko machine 1, since a luminous effect is brilliantly produced by the illumination by the light-emitting portions such as the LEDs mounted on each decorative board, a plurality of decorative boards mounted on the door frame 3 are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board. LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor light emission) have various light emission modes depending on whether they are turned on (emitted) or turned off. Therefore, in the state where the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the player can visually recognize the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 through the transparent member on the door frame side, and the player is a play game. There is a possibility that the interest may be reduced, and it is inefficient that the effect member including the decorative substrate on which the LED that goes out is mounted cannot contribute to the progress of the effect.

Therefore, in each of the decorative boards included in the door frame 3 that employs the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reduction in reflectance according to the second embodiment, it is mounted on the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative board included in the door frame 3. The door frame side is transparent by the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 in the state where the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off. The member is made to appear as if it is a white member. As a result, even if the light-emission effect by the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor light emission) is not progressing, it is formed on the front surface (front surface) or top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3. Since the white coating that effectively reflects external light and emits it, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be achieved by emitting external light of various colors from the transparent member on the door frame side to the outside ( That is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, in each of the decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3 that employs the configuration of the countermeasure for reducing the reflectance according to the second embodiment, the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 is a door. Since it is covered with the frame-side transparent member, a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) mounted on the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 are turned off. In this state, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 makes the door frame-side transparent member look like a white member. As a result, when each of the decoration boards provided in the door frame 3 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the light emission effect by the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) is not in progress. However, since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 can effectively reflect and emit external light, various colors can be emitted. By emitting outside light from the transparent member on the door frame side to the outside, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Further, as described above, the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 that employs the configuration of the countermeasure for reducing the reflectance according to the second embodiment is coated with the white resist solution. Then, a white coating film is formed and covered with the door frame side transparent member. Among the transparent members on the door frame side, the handle cover 185, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, the plate lower left decoration 281, the plate lower right decoration 286, the plate upper center decoration 312a, and the plate lower center decoration 312b. The rotation operation unit 302, the center button cover 375, the outer peripheral button cover 380, the door frame left side decoration body 404, the side window interior decoration unit 410b, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453 have been described above. So that it is transparent. On the other hand, among the game board side transparent members that cover the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the above-mentioned game board 5, the decorative sheet 3112, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, the back Lower left decorative body 3202, lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, lower back right decorative body 3252, lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, rear upper front rotating decorative body 3410, rear upper front decorative body 3421, rear upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back-up rear decorative body 3451, the back-back left rotating decoration body 3510, the back-back left decorative body 3521, the back-back right rotating decoration body 3610, and the back-back right decoration body 3621 are the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The difference is that a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) along the concept (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed.

To briefly describe this, the pachinko machine 1 can provide the player with a different world view by changing the game board. In order to suppress the manufacturing cost of various substrates provided in the door frame and the game board, the resist liquid applied to various substrates is generally unified into inexpensive green. However, when providing a glittering effect to the player by the cooperation of the light-emitting effect by the game board and the light-emitting effect by the door frame, the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame when the plurality of LEDs are turned off. If the green color of the resist solution applied to () is visually recognized as it is, the world view of the game board may not be met and the world view of the game board may be disturbed, and the amusement of the game may be reduced by the player.

Therefore, in each of the decorative boards included in the door frame 3 that employs the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reduction in reflectance according to the second embodiment, it is mounted on the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative board included in the door frame 3. The door frame side is transparent by the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 in the state where the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off. The member is made to appear as if it is a white member. As a result, when the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are turned off, various white coating films formed on the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 are changed. By using a white background that is easy to be dyed in various colors, it is possible to easily dye the world view of the game board and prevent the world view of the game board from being easily destroyed. In other words, even if the game board is replaced with respect to the door frame 3 installed in the game hall, it is mounted on the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 as described above. The door frame side transparent member formed on the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 is a white member when a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off. By making it look as if it were present, it is possible to prevent it from disagreeing with the world view of the replaced game board.

In addition, as described above, the white resist solution is applied to the front surface (front surface) or top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 that employs the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment. A white resist layer is formed by the white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed and covered with the door frame side transparent member. Among the door frame side transparent members, for example, a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player are formed transparently, and a production operation unit. The surface of the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided in 300, the central button decoration substrate 376 provided in the production operation button unit 360 of the production operation unit 300, the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 provided in the production operation button unit 360 of the production operation unit 300, etc. Through the corresponding transparent member on the side of the door frame. The reflectance is higher as it is closer to white, whereas it is lower as it is closer to black. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. Therefore, in the combination of white and yellow (the configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not noticeable when the background is white, and when the front side notation part is yellow, the yellow surface side is different from the white resist. The notation part is inconspicuous. In addition, as described above, the front surface side notation portion makes it possible to identify the front surface side electronic component mounted on the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3, and the front surface side Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the part number of the electronic component, the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged (in addition, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction of the front-side electronic component) (Mounting direction), the model of the front side electronic component may be included.

On the other hand, as described above, the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630 or the main control board 1310 is a green coating film formed by applying the green resist solution (hereinafter, simply referred to as “solid green color”). Of the front side electronic component such as a part number of the front side electronic component, a region indicating a position where the front side electronic component is arranged, and the like (further, The front side notation part showing the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component may be white. It is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist with a paint. The power supply board 630 is housed in a transparent power supply board cover 631, and a power switch 630 a for turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is provided and exposed from the transparent power supply board cover 631. The main control board 1310 is housed in a transparent main control board box 1320, and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM is provided and exposed from the transparent main control board box 1320. Since the power switch 630a is arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, it is arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it, and the RAM clear switch is arranged on the rear side of the game board 5, so that the game is played. It is located in a position where it is difficult for the person to see it.

The reflectance is higher as it is closer to white, whereas it is lower as it is closer to black. Therefore, when the background is a color closer to black than white, white is conspicuous, and in the combination of green and white, white is conspicuous when the background is green, and the surface side notation part is white. In some cases, the green notation part is conspicuous with respect to the green resist. That is, the white front surface notation part (the white back surface notation part for the green resist) is conspicuous with respect to the green resist solidly coated on the front surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630 and the main control board 1310. ..

In other words, since the power switch 630a and the RAM clear switch are arranged at positions that are difficult for the player to visually recognize, the white color of the paint printed by silk printing is easy to visually recognize with respect to the green color of the resist liquid. Also, it is not necessary for the player to visually recognize front side notation parts such as electronic part numbers having no relation to the game by the player through the transparent power board cover 631 and the transparent main control board box 1320. On the other hand, a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player are arranged at positions that are easily visible to the player, and the resist liquid Since the yellow color of the paint printed by silk printing is not easy to see in contrast to the white color of the above, the rotary operation part where the surface side notation part such as the electronic part number that has no relation to the game for the player is transparent It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize through 302 and the transparent pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, the effect operation ring decoration board 352 included in the effect operation unit 300, the central button decoration board 376 included in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 included in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300. Even when a decorative substrate such as is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. Is placed at a position where the player can easily see it, and the yellow color of the paint printed by silk printing is not easy to see with respect to the white color of the resist liquid. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the front-side notation part such as an electronic part number without a mark through the transparent rotation operation part 302 and the transparent pressing operation part 303. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

[White coating formed on the surface of each decorative board provided on the game board and door frame]
By the way, the pachinko machine 1 accidentally becomes an obstacle nail with another game ball when the game ball shot toward the game area 5a of the game board 5 flows down while the player is playing the game. It may become clogged. When the player successively hits the game balls toward the game area 5a in this state, the game balls are further stacked on the jammed game balls, and the game balls are gathered in a grape shape. In order to eliminate the state where the game balls are gathered in a grape shape, the player calls an attendant such as a clerk in the game hall to remove the game balls gathered in the grape shape. A clerk such as a clerk of the game hall called by the player opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. At this time, when the pachinko machine 1 detects the opening, each of the decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is opened. In addition to controlling all the mounted LEDs to be turned off, each movable body provided in the game board 5 is controlled to be maintained in the position at the time of opening regardless of whether it is operating or not. Control of the game board at time. With or instead of controlling the game board at the time of opening, a specific LED (for example, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469) among a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board provided in the door frame 3 is used. When the door frame 3 is provided with a movable body, the movable body is maintained at the open position regardless of whether it is operating or not. "Control of the door frame at the time of opening" is performed so that the control is performed as follows.

Further, when the game balls are packed in the game ball supply nose of the island facility in the game hall, the game balls from the island facility in the game hall are not supplied to the pachinko machine 1, and the game balls cannot be paid out to the player. When a ball clogging occurs in the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, etc. shown in FIG. 77 and the game ball is no longer paid out to the player, the player can A staff member such as a store clerk will be called to clear the ball clogging. A clerk such as a clerk of the game hall called by the player opens the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. At this time, when the pachinko machine 1 detects the opening, each of the decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is opened. As described above, the control is performed to turn off all the plurality of mounted LEDs, and the movable bodies included in the game board 5 are controlled to be maintained in the positions at the time of opening regardless of whether they are operating. Perform "control of game board when opened". In addition to or instead of controlling the game board at the time of opening, a specific LED (for example, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469) among a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board provided in the door frame 3 is used. When the door frame 3 is provided with a movable body, the movable body is maintained at the open position regardless of whether it is operating or not. The above-mentioned "control of the door frame at the time of opening" is performed so that the control is performed as described above.

When the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 (that is, the front frame is opened), control and/or opening of the game board at the time of opening At the time of controlling the door frame at the time, a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board provided on the game board 5 and/or a specific LED among the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board provided on the door frame 3 ( For example, since all the LEDs except the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 are turned off, when the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the player can make various decorations on the game board 5. The front surface (front surface) of the board becomes visible through the game board side transparent member, and/or a specific LED (for example, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469) is mounted. The front surface (front surface) of each of the other decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 excluding the decorative board provided in the door frame 3 can be visually recognized through the door frame side transparent member, so that the player can enjoy the entertainment game. When the door frame 3 is opened to the body frame 4 or the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 (that is, the front frame is opened). Also, in the state where the production is proceeding according to the schedule data, the player cannot see the state in which the production is progressing at all, but the player is provided by the production member including the decorative substrate on which the LED to be turned off is mounted. Cannot convey the concept of pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) and cannot experience the world view of pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) There is also the possibility of creating a period for the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the decorations provided on the front surface (front surface) of each decoration board provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 that adopts the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment. A plurality of LEDs (full-color capable of multicolor light emission) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the board (hereinafter, may be referred to as "front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the game board 5 and the door frame 3") The game board side transparent member and the door frame side transparent member are white members due to the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each of the decorative boards provided in the game board 5 and the door frame 3 in a state where the LED) is off. It looks as if it were. As a result, when a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each of the decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 prevents external light. Since it can be effectively reflected and emitted, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, by emitting outside light of various colors from the game board side transparent member and the door frame side transparent member to the outside) The pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) world view can be transmitted to the player so that the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) world view can be experienced.

Although the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off when the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on, as described above, the gaming board 5 and the door frame 3 are provided. Formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 in a state where a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board are turned off. The white coating film allows the game board side transparent member and the door frame side transparent member to appear as if they were white members. As a result, when a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each of the decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 prevents external light. Since it can be effectively reflected and emitted, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, by emitting outside light of various colors from the game board side transparent member and the door frame side transparent member to the outside) The pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) world view can be transmitted to the player so that the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) world view can be experienced.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 that adopts the configuration of the countermeasure for reducing the reflectance according to the second embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as “door frame 3 May be referred to as "the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in.") Among the door frame side transparent members that cover the white coating film formed on the handle cover 185 and the plate upper left decoration 271. , Plate upper right decoration 276, plate lower left decoration 281, plate lower right decoration 286, plate center upper decoration 312a, plate center lower decoration 312b, rotation operation unit 302, central button cover 375, outer peripheral button cover 380, door The frame left side decorative body 404, the side window interior decorative portion 410b, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 are formed transparent, while each decorative board provided in the game board 5 Of the game board side transparent member covering the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the game board, a decorative sheet 3112, a lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, a lower back left decorative body 3202, a lower back rotating right decorative body 3251, a back side Lower right decorative body 3252, lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, rear upper front rotating decorative body 3410, rear upper front decorative body 3421, rear upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, rear upper rear decorative body 3451, rear rear left rotating decorative body 3510, the back rear left decoration 3521, the back right rotation decoration 3610, and the back right decoration 3621 are concepts of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). It is different in that a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in the present embodiment) along the line are printed. However, among the door frame side transparent members, the handle cover 185, the plate upper left decoration 271, Plate upper right decoration 276, plate lower left decoration 281, plate lower right decoration 286, plate upper center decoration 312a, plate lower center decoration 312b, rotation operation unit 302, central button cover 375, outer peripheral button cover 380, door frame The left side decoration 404, the side window decoration 410b, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453 have the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5). A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (in the present embodiment, pink) according to the world view ()) may be applied by printing.

That is, among the door frame side transparent members that cover the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3, the handle cover 185, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration. Body 276, plate left lower decoration 281, plate right lower decoration 286, plate center upper decoration 312a, plate center lower decoration 312b, rotation operation unit 302, central button cover 375, outer peripheral button cover 380, door frame left side decoration A game that covers the body 404, the side window decoration part 410b, the door frame right side decoration body 419, the door frame top decoration body 453, and the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the game board 5. Among the board-side transparent members, a decorative sheet 3112, a lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, a lower back left decorative body 3202, a lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, a lower back right decorative body 3252, a lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, a back Upper front rotating decorative body 3410, back upper front decorative body 3421, rear upper rear rotating decoration 3440, rear upper rear decorative body 3451, rear rear left rotating decorative body 3510, rear rear left decorative body 3521, rear rear right rotating decorative body The same predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)), and 3610 and the back right decorative body 3621. ), a plurality of dots may be applied by printing. By doing this, by making the connection between the door frame 3 and the game board 5 one, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) concept (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) can be improved. Can be expressed. In other words, the color related to the door frame side transparent member and the game board side transparent member (associative color) along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). ) (E.g. gradient colors, sea, sky, universe colors, flora and fauna colors, vehicles, robot colors, sports colors, flame colors, rain, snow colors, Christmas, New Year, summer vacation, winter vacation, spring vacation) , A beach, a hot spring, a color related to a ski resort, or the like, or the same color is provided so that the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are connected to each other, and the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, , The world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) world view can be more expressed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 that employs the configuration of the measure for reducing the reflectance according to the second embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as “door frame 3 May be referred to as "the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in".) A door frame side transparent member (for example, a handle cover 185, a plate upper left decoration 271) that covers a white coating film formed. , Plate upper right decoration 276, plate lower left decoration 281, plate lower right decoration 286, plate center upper decoration 312a, plate lower center decoration 312b, rotation operation unit 302, central button cover 375, outer peripheral button cover 380, door The frame left side decorative body 404, the side window interior decorative portion 410b, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are formed transparent, but with respect to the contour portion of the door frame side transparent member. A metallic decorative part with a metallic luster (gold) or a metallic decorative part with a metallic luster (gold) with a flat or three-dimensional design on the surface of the door frame side transparent member (form) Yes). In this way, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 is attached to the door frame side transparent member. Although it can be seen through, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 serves as a white background, so that the color of the metal decorative portion ( The line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) or top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 to the metallic decorative portion provided (formed) on the door frame side transparent member by the attractiveness of the gold color. Becomes As a result, the white is formed on the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 by attracting the eye to the metal decoration portion provided (formed) on the door frame side transparent member. It is possible to make the coating film less visible. For this reason, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 that employs the configuration of the measure for reducing the reflectance according to the second embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as “door frame 3 May be referred to as "the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in".) A door frame side transparent member (for example, a handle cover 185, a plate upper left decoration 271) that covers a white coating film formed. , Plate upper right decoration 276, plate lower left decoration 281, plate lower right decoration 286, plate center upper decoration 312a, plate lower center decoration 312b, rotation operation unit 302, central button cover 375, outer peripheral button cover 380, door The frame left side decorative body 404, the side window interior decorative portion 410b, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are formed transparent, but with respect to the contour portion of the door frame side transparent member. A metallic decorative part with a metallic luster (gold) or a metallic decorative part with a metallic luster (gold) with a flat or three-dimensional design on the surface of the door frame side transparent member (form) Yes). In this way, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 is attached to the door frame side transparent member. Although it can be seen through, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 serves as a white background, so that the color of the metal decorative portion ( The line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) or top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 to the metallic decorative portion provided (formed) on the door frame side transparent member by the attractiveness of the gold color. Becomes As a result, even when each of the decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eye is attracted to the metal decorative portion provided (formed) on the door frame side transparent member. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3. For this reason, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

When the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, silk-screen printing is performed on the white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3. Although the front surface notation portion having a yellow color that enables the specification of a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors can be visually recognized through the transparent member on the door frame side, the front surface (front surface) or the top surface of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 is visible. Since the white coating film formed on the (surface) becomes a white background, the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 by the attractiveness of the color (gold color) of the metal decorative portion. Since the line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decoration part provided (formed) on the door frame side transparent member, the front side notation part is printed by silk printing in yellow similar to the color (gold color) of the metal decoration part. However, it is possible to obscure the existence of this yellow silk printing.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d (the decoration provided (arranged) in front of the decorative body 3111) in the decorative body 3111 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 shown in FIGS. 149(a) and 149(b). Including the hologram portion in the first contour portion 3112a of the sheet 3112.), the metal decoration portion 3310a of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 shown in FIG. 163, and the front cover of the back front left decoration body unit 3710 shown in FIG. The metal decoration part 3711a in 3711, the metal decoration part such as the metal decoration part 3811a in the front cover 3811 of the front front right decoration body unit 3810 shown in FIG. Although it is configured to have, the metal decoration portion in each ornament provided in the game board 5 may be configured to have an opaque gold color as a predetermined color, or may be semitransparent as a predetermined color ( It may be configured to have a gold color (having a light-transmitting property), or may be a mixture of a predetermined color having an opaque gold color and a semi-transparent (having a light-transmitting) gold color. May be. The same applies to the modified examples described below, and the metal decorative portion is configured to have all gold as the predetermined color, but the metal decorative portion in each decorative body provided in the game board 5 or the door frame 3 has a predetermined color. The colors may be all opaque gold, or the predetermined colors may be all semi-transparent (transparent) gold, or the predetermined colors may be opaque. It may be configured such that a gold-colored material and a semi-transparent (light-transmitting) gold-colored material are mixed.

[A modification in which a gold material (metal decoration part) is arranged in front of a decoration sheet having a transparent area and the like arranged in front of a substrate printed in yellow silk and the transparent area is surrounded by the gold material (metal decoration part). Example 1]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, as each of the decorative substrates included in the game board 5, for example, a back-rear decorative substrate 3114 included in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 will be described. As shown in FIG. 145, the front surface (front surface) of the sheet has a light guide radiation plate 3113 in the form of a transparent flat plate, a sheet having a light-transmitting portion (region) and a transparent portion (region) toward the front. -Shaped decorative sheet 3112 and transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 are arranged in this order, and are covered by the game board side transparent member such as the light guide radiation plate 3113, the sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and the decorative body 3111. The decorative body 3111 is entirely colorless and transparent except for the metallic decorative portion 3111d having metallic luster. The metal decoration portion 3111d has a predetermined color (gold color in this embodiment). As described above, the white coating film formed by applying the white resist solution on the front surface (front surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). A white resist layer is formed on the surface of the solid white resist, and the front surface notation that enables the specification of a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors printed on the solid-colored white resist by silk printing has a yellow color. Have Therefore, the color (yellow) of the front surface notation portion is similar to the color (gold color) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Therefore, by further forming a metal decorative portion 3111d having a metallic luster on the outer peripheral portion of the decorative body 3111, the entire body except the metallic decorative portion 3111d having a metallic luster is formed to be colorless and transparent. It may be configured to surround the area.

In this case, a metal decorative portion 3111d having a metallic luster is formed on the outer peripheral portion of the decorative body 3111 so as to surround a region in which the entire body excluding the metal decorative portion 3111d is colorless and transparent. The size and arrangement of the metal decorative portion 3111d (shaded portion shown in FIG. 149) and other members related to these metal decorative portions 3111d may be appropriately changed.

Even with this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 has the metallic luster of the decorative body 3111. Although it is visible through the transparent region except the metal decoration portion 3111d, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 serves as a white background, so that the metal decoration Due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the portion 3111d, the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. As a result, the eye is attracted to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111, so that the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made difficult to visually recognize. Since it is possible, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Even with such a configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is provided with a metallic luster of the decorative body 3111. Although it can be seen through the transparent region except the metal decoration part 3111d having a white background, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 becomes a white background. Due to the attractiveness due to the color (gold color) of the metal decorative portion 3111d, the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. Become. As a result, even when the back decoration board 3114 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eye is attracted to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration body 3111, Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 can be made difficult to see, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) The view is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Even with such a configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, silk-screen printing is performed on the white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114. The surface-side notation part having a yellow color that enables specification of a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors can be visually recognized through a transparent region of the ornamental body 3111 excluding the metallic ornamental part 3111d having metallic luster. However, since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 becomes a white background, the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 (because of the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d ( Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the (surface) to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111, the surface-side notation portion is silk-printed in yellow similar to the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3111d. Even if printed, the presence of this yellow silk print can be obscured.

[Deformation in which a gold material (metal decoration part) is placed in front of a decorative sheet having a transparent area and the like arranged in front of a substrate printed in yellow silk and the transparent area is surrounded by the gold material (metal decoration part). Example 2]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, as each of the decorative substrates included in the game board 5, for example, a back-rear decorative substrate 3114 included in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 will be described. As shown in FIG. 145, the front surface (front surface) of the sheet has a light guide radiation plate 3113 in the form of a transparent flat plate, a sheet having a light-transmitting portion (region) and a transparent portion (region) toward the front. -Shaped decorative sheet 3112 and transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 are arranged in this order, and are covered by the game board side transparent member such as the light guide radiation plate 3113, the sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and the decorative body 3111. The decorative body 3111 is entirely colorless and transparent except for the metallic decorative portion 3111d having metallic luster. The metal decoration portion 3111d has a predetermined color (gold color in this embodiment). As described above, the white coating film formed by applying the white resist solution on the front surface (front surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). A white resist layer is formed on the surface of the solid white resist, and the front surface notation that enables the specification of a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors printed on the solid-colored white resist by silk printing has a yellow color. Have Therefore, the color (yellow) of the front surface notation portion is similar to the color (gold color) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Therefore, in addition to the front surface notation portion, for example, a white solid-painted front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is surrounded by a thick solid line or a graphic having another shape so as to surround the metal decoration portion 3111d. It may be configured to be printed in yellow by silk printing on the resist.

In this case, a thick solid line or a figure having another shape is printed in yellow by silk printing on a white resist which is solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 so as to surround the metal decoration portion 3111d. As described above, the size and arrangement of the metal decorative portion 3111d (shaded portion shown in FIGS. 147 to 149) and the other members related to these metal decorative portions 3111d may be appropriately changed.

Even with this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 has the metallic luster of the decorative body 3111. Although it is visible through the transparent region except the metal decoration portion 3111d, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 serves as a white background, so that the metal decoration Due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the portion 3111d, the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. As a result, the eye is attracted to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111, so that the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made difficult to visually recognize. Since it is possible, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Even with such a configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is provided with a metallic luster of the decorative body 3111. Although it can be seen through the transparent region except the metal decoration part 3111d having a white background, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 becomes a white background. Due to the attractiveness due to the color (gold color) of the metal decorative portion 3111d, the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. Become. As a result, even when the back decoration board 3114 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eye is attracted to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration body 3111, Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 can be made difficult to see, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) The view is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Even with such a configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, silk-screen printing is performed on the white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114. In addition to the yellow-colored surface-side marking portion that enables the specification of a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors, a thick solid line or another shape is excluded from the decorative body 3111 except for the metallic decorative portion 3111d having metallic luster. Although visible through the transparent region, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 serves as a white background, so that the metal decorative portion 3111d has a color (gold color). The line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111 due to the attractiveness due to ). Even if a solid line or a figure having another shape is printed by silk printing in yellow similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d, the existence of this yellow silk printing can be made difficult to understand.

[Modification in which a gold material (metal decorative portion) is arranged at the joint of the transparent member on the transparent frame side, which is arranged in front of the substrate silk-printed in yellow]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (surface) of each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 that employs the configuration of the measure for reducing the reflectance according to the second embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as “door frame 3 May be referred to as "the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in".) A door frame side transparent member (for example, a plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration) that covers the white coating film formed. Body 276, plate left lower decoration 281, plate right lower decoration 286, plate center upper decoration 312a, plate center lower decoration 312b, door frame left side decoration 404, door frame right side decoration 419, and door frame top Although the decoration body 453 is formed transparent, a joint between the left side of the door frame top decoration body 453 and the upper side of the door frame left side decoration body 404 (the left side of the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame left side). Under the door frame left side decorative body 404, a metallic decorative portion (gold color) having metallic luster is provided (formed) in a portion designed so that the upper side of the decorative body 404 seems to be connected. Metal luster at the joint between the side and the left side of the plate upper left decorative body 271 (the portion designed so that the lower side of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the left side of the plate upper left decorative body 271 are connected) A metal decoration portion (gold color) having a is provided (formed), and a joint between the right side of the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate center upper left of the decorative body 312a (the right side of the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate center upper A metal decorative portion (gold color) having a metallic luster is provided (formed) on a portion designed so that the left side of the decorative body 312a seems to be connected to the right side of the decorative body 312a on the plate center. Metal with metallic luster at the joint with the left side of the plate upper right decoration 276 (the part designed so that the right side of the plate center upper decoration 312a and the left side of the plate upper right decoration 276 are connected) A decorative portion (gold color) is provided (formed), and a joint between the right side of the plate upper right decorative body 276 and the lower side of the door frame right side decorative body 419 (the right side of the plate upper right decorative body 276 and the door frame right side decoration) An upper portion of the door frame right side decoration body 419 is provided (formed) by providing (forming) a metal decoration portion (gold color) having a metallic luster in a portion designed so that the lower side of the body 419 seems to be connected. To the right side of the door frame top decoration body 453 (the portion designed to appear as if the upper side of the door frame right side decoration body 419 and the right side of the door frame top decoration body 453 are connected) has a metallic luster You may make it provide (form) the metal decoration part (gold color) which has. In addition, a joint between the right side of the plate left lower decoration 281 and the left side of the plate center lower decoration 312b (the right side of the plate left lower decoration 281 and the left side of the plate center lower decoration 312b are designed to appear to be connected to each other. The metal decoration portion (gold color) having a metallic luster is provided (formed) on the portion (the part to be formed), and the joint between the right side of the plate lower center decoration body 312b and the left side of the plate lower right decoration body 286 (lower plate center). A metallic decorative portion (gold color) having metallic luster is provided (formed) on the right side of the decorative body 312b and the left side of the plate lower right decorative body 286 which are designed so as to be connected to each other. Good. In this way, a metal decorative portion (gold color) having metallic luster is provided as a joint of the door frame side transparent members (a part designed so that adjacent door frame side transparent members seem to be connected). By (forming), this joint can be blindfolded.

[Modification in which a gold material (glossy sheet member) is arranged in front of a transparent game panel board arranged in front of a board printed in yellow silk]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the center accessory 2500 projects from the outer periphery of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as the center frame) and is in contact with the front surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Although the portion 2502 was provided, a gloss sheet member having a glitter glittering in a particle shape (gold or a mixture of gold colors) was provided on the front surface of the flange portion 2502, and the rear of the gloss sheet member was provided. Therefore, a decorative substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors are mounted may be arranged on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate is arranged in parallel with the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. In the positional relationship between the decorative substrate and the glossy sheet member, when the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is viewed from the front, the glossy sheet member may be arranged so as to cover all or part of the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate. The decoration substrate may be arranged close to the vertical direction or the left-right direction without covering the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate at all, or may have a distance dimension of about 5 mm to 10 mm in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. They may be arranged separately. A white resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). A part number corresponding to the full-color LED and a position showing the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which enables the specification of a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) on the solid white resist that is formed. The markings on the front side are printed with yellow paint by silk printing. Further, in the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstruction nails N that are in contact with the game balls and have a gold color are arranged in a predetermined gauge arrangement. In this way, in front of the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate, a glossy sheet member having a glitter that glitters in particles (gold or a mixture of gold colors) and a plurality of obstacle nails N having gold are arranged. Therefore, the presence of the decorative substrate is made difficult to understand by the luster sheet member having glitter that glitters in particles (gold or a mixture of gold) and the attractiveness of the plurality of obstacle nails N having gold. Even if the color (yellow) of the front side notation is visible through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, it can be silk-printed on the white resist solidly coated on the decorative substrate. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the presence of the yellow-colored surface (a color similar to the gold color of the glossy sheet member or the obstacle nail N) that is printed.

[Modification in which a gold material (metal decorative part) is arranged in front of a transparent game panel board arranged in front of a board printed in yellow silk]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, a decorative substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors are mounted is arranged on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 and the decorative substrate are arranged. You may arrange|position the inner lens formed in three dimensions by the transparent member between and. The surface of the inner lens is designed such that a lens cut is performed on a part of a specific area or on the whole surface (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. As a result, it is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate arranged behind the inner lens. The front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate is arranged in parallel with the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Regarding the positional relationship between the decorative substrate and the inner lens, the inner lens may be arranged so as to cover all or part of the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate when the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is viewed from the front. A white resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). A part number corresponding to the full-color LED and a position showing the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which enables the specification of a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) on the solid white resist that is formed. The markings on the front side are printed with yellow paint by silk printing. Further, in the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstruction nails N that are in contact with the game balls and have a gold color are arranged in a predetermined gauge arrangement. Although a plurality of obstruction nails N having a gold color are arranged in front of the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate, yellow (obstruction nail N which is printed on the white resist solidly applied to the decorative substrate by silk printing). Has no relation to the surface-side notation part of a color similar to that of gold) in terms of decoration. The presence of the decorative substrate can be made indistinct by the attractiveness of the plurality of obstruction nails N having a golden color, and the presence of the color (yellow) of the front surface notation portion is determined by the area where the lens is cut on the inner lens. It can be confusing.

[Modification 1 in which a gold material (metal decoration part) is arranged in front of a transparent member arranged in front of the substrate printed in yellow silk and the transparent region is surrounded by the gold material (metal decoration part).
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the logo decoration body having the logo (logo decoration movable body) may be provided on the game board 5 so as to operate. The logo decoration body is configured by arranging a transparent inner lens behind a transparent front decoration body, arranging a decoration substrate behind the inner lens, and arranging a base member and the like behind the decoration substrate. is there. The front decorative body has a logo area (for example, an area of a character portion "ABC") formed transparent, and the other area except the logo area is formed as a metal decorative portion (gold color) having a metallic luster. There is. That is, the logo area is surrounded by the metallic decorative portion (gold color) having metallic luster. The surface of the inner lens is designed such that a lens cut is performed on a part of a specific area or on the whole surface (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. As a result, it is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate arranged behind the inner lens. A white resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). A part number corresponding to the full-color LED and a position showing the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which enables the specification of a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) on the solid white resist that is formed. The markings on the front side are printed with yellow paint by silk printing. The metallic attractive part of the metallic decorative part with metallic luster makes it difficult to understand the presence of the decorative substrate, and the presence of the color (yellow) of the front side notation part is lens-cut on the inner lens. It can be made difficult to understand by the area.

[Modification 2 in which a gold material (metal decoration part) is arranged in front of a transparent member arranged in front of a substrate printed in yellow silk and the transparent region is surrounded by the gold material (metal decoration part)]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game board 5 may be provided so that a graphic decoration body (graphic decoration movable body) having a predetermined graphic operates. The figure decoration body is configured by arranging a transparent inner lens behind a transparent front decoration body, arranging a decoration substrate behind the inner lens, and arranging a base member and the like behind the decoration substrate. is there. The front decorative body has a metallic decorative portion (gold color) having metallic luster on the outer peripheral portion thereof, and a metallic decorative portion having metallic luster on the outer peripheral portion of one region (for example, the central portion). (Gold) is formed. Then, in this one area (for example, the central portion), in addition to the figure area (for example, the eyelid portion of the eyeball of the human body, the mouth portion of the human body, the ear portion of the human body), letters, numbers, figures, and symbols. Etc., which are a proper combination of these letters, numbers, figures, symbols, etc.) are formed as a metallic decorative portion (gold color) having metallic luster. Further, the front decorative body has a metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral portion of one region (for example, the central portion) from the inside of the metallic decorative portion (gold color) having metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral portion. A region extending to the outside of the metal decoration portion (gold color) is transparently formed. In addition, the front decorative body has a metallic luster in one area (for example, the central portion) from the inside of the metallic decorative portion (gold color) having metallic luster that is formed on the outer peripheral portion of the one area (for example, the central portion). An area extending to the outside of the outer peripheral portion of the area where the graphic area is formed is transparently formed as a metal decoration portion (gold color). The surface of the inner lens is designed such that a lens cut is performed on a part of a specific area or on the whole surface (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. As a result, it is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate arranged behind the inner lens. A white resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). A part number corresponding to the full-color LED and a position showing the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which enables the specification of a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) on the solid white resist that is formed. The markings on the front side are printed with yellow paint by silk printing.

That is, the front decorative body has a metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral portion of one region (for example, the central portion) from the inside of the metallic decorative portion (gold color) having metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral portion. The area extending to the outside of the metal decoration part (gold color) is transparently formed, and the metal decoration part (gold color) with a metallic luster is formed on the outer peripheral part of one area (for example, the central part). Since the area extending from the inner side to the outer side of the outer peripheral portion of the area where the graphic area is formed as the metallic decorative portion (gold color) having a metallic luster in one area (for example, the central portion) is formed transparently, The transparent area is surrounded by a metallic decorative portion (gold color) having metallic luster. In this way, the presence of the decorative substrate can be made difficult to understand due to the attractiveness of the metallic color of the metallic decorative portion having metallic luster, and the presence of the color (yellow) of the front surface notation portion can be used as the inner lens. The cut areas can make it difficult to see.

[Modification in which a gold material (metal decoration part) is arranged in front of a transparent member arranged in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate to surround the gold material (metal decoration part)]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game board 5 may be provided so that a graphic decoration body (graphic decoration movable body) having a predetermined graphic operates. The figure decoration body is configured by arranging a transparent inner lens behind a transparent front decoration body, arranging a decoration substrate behind the inner lens, and arranging a base member and the like behind the decoration substrate. is there. The front decorative body has a graphic area (for example, the eyelid portion of the eyeball of the human body, the mouth portion of the human body, the ear portion of the human body, and a hexagon or octagon) in one area (for example, the central portion). It is formed as a metallic decorative portion (gold color) having metallic luster, and an area surrounding this partial area is transparently formed. That is, the metallic decorative portion (gold color) having metallic luster is surrounded by the transparent region. When the front decorative body is formed as a graphic area in one area (for example, the central portion) and is formed as an eyelid among the eyeballs of the human body, a metal decorative portion (gold color) having metallic luster is provided on the upper and lower eyelids. It becomes the eyelid, and the upper eyelid opens from the lower eyelid, and this open portion and the other area excluding the upper eyelid and the lower eyelid are transparently formed. That is, the upper eyelid and the lower eyelid, which are metallic ornaments (gold) having metallic luster, are surrounded by the transparent region. Further, when the front decorative body is formed as a graphic area in one area (for example, the central portion) and is formed as a human body mouth, the metal decorative portion (gold color) having metallic luster becomes the upper lip and the lower lip, Is opened from the lower lip, and the open portion and the other area excluding the upper lip and the lower lip are formed transparent. That is, the upper lip and the lower lip, which are metallic decorative portions (gold) having metallic luster, are surrounded by transparent regions. Further, when the front decoration is formed as a figure area in one area (for example, a central portion) as a human ear, a hexagon, or an octagon, a metal decoration portion (gold color) having a metallic luster is formed on the ear. (The inner region of the ear may be formed transparent, may be formed to be translucent in a predetermined color (red, blue, black) or may be formed opaque), Hexagonal outer peripheral portion (hexagonal inner region may be formed transparent, may be formed to be transparent with a predetermined color (red, blue, black) or may be formed opaque. .), the outer peripheral portion of the octagon (the inner area of the octagon may be formed transparent, may be formed to be translucent by a predetermined color (red, blue, black) or may be formed opaque). , And other regions except the ears, hexagons, and octagons of the human body are transparently formed. In other words, the human ear, the hexagons, and the octagons, which are metallic ornaments (gold) having metallic luster, are surrounded by the transparent regions. The surface of the inner lens is designed such that a lens cut is performed on a part of a specific area or on the whole surface (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. As a result, it is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate arranged behind the inner lens. A white resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). A part number corresponding to the full-color LED and a position showing the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which enables the specification of a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) on the solid white resist that is formed. The markings on the front side are printed with yellow paint by silk printing. In other words, since the metallic decorative part with metallic luster (gold color) is surrounded by the transparent area, the metallic decorative part with metallic luster (gold color) is solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate. The white resist is surrounded by the white color. As described above, the presence of the decorative substrate can be made difficult to understand due to the attractiveness of the metallic decorative portion having metallic luster due to the gold color, and the presence of the color (yellow) of the front side notation portion can be used as the inner lens. The cut areas can make them less visible.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the lower back middle effect unit 3300 shown in FIG. 163 is arranged at the standby position (original position). As shown in FIG. 201, in a state where the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, the area where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is arranged at the standby position (original position) of the decorative substrate is The absence of the existence makes it impossible to perform the light emission effect in this area. Therefore, in the state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is arranged at the standby position (original position), in the state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is arranged at the standby position (original position), You may arrange|position the front surface (front surface) of the decoration substrate toward the front of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) behind the back-bottom middle rotating decoration body 3310 so as not to interfere. A white resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid white resist”). A part number corresponding to the full-color LED and a position showing the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which enables the specification of a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) on a solid white resist that is formed. The surface notation part such as is printed by silk printing with yellow paint. When the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 exists in the standby position (home position), the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate is covered with the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, and thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, I do not know the existence of the decorative substrate.

However, as the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, the decoration substrate arranged behind the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 gradually appears and can be visually recognized. Therefore, control is performed so that the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate emit light during the period from the time when the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 starts moving to the raised position to the time when it returns to the standby position (original position) again. To be done. As a result, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board emit light, so that it is possible to know the presence of the yellow front side notation portion printed by silk printing on the white resist solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative board. Can be difficult. In addition, the yellow front side notation portion printed by silk printing on the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate is a metal of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 of the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320. The color is similar to the gold color of the decorative portion 3310a, and even if the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate is the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. Since it can be placed in the vicinity of the metal decoration part 3310a, the attractiveness of the metal decoration part 3310a having a gold color makes it possible to start moving the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 to the raised position to visually recognize the decoration substrate. Even if it is in such a state, a yellow (color similar to the gold color of the metal decorative portion 3310a) surface-printed on the white resist solidly coated on the decorative substrate is printed. The existence can be obscured. Further, in the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstruction nails N that are in contact with the game balls and have a gold color are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, so that the plurality of obstruction nails N that have a gold color are attractive. Even if the decorative substrate is made visible by the movement of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 to the raised position, printing is performed by silk printing on the white resist solidly coated on the decorative substrate. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the presence of a yellow (color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstruction nails N) front surface notation part.

[Avoid concentration of layout of front side display part printed by silk printing]
Next, the avoidance of concentration of arrangement of the front side display portion printed by silk printing will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 270. FIG. 270 shows a method of arranging the front surface display portion capable of identifying the LEDs corresponding to the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate, and in the case of the central arrangement (part 1) (a), FIG. 3 is a schematic view showing a case (1) (b) of distributed arrangement, respectively. Note that the pads, through holes, lands, etc. are omitted in FIGS. 270(a) to 270(d). Further, the decorative boards KC of FIGS. 270(a) to (d) are the decorative boards provided in the game board 5 and the door frame 3 that adopts the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment described above. It is shown as an example of each of the decorative substrates provided.

The front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC is white due to a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). Corresponds to full-color LED that allows multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) to be specified on the white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface KCx of the decorative substrate KC while the resist layer is formed. When the part number, the attribute of the electronic part such as the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged (in addition, the shape of the electronic part, the size of the electronic part, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic part, and the model of the electronic part are included) The front notation part indicating () is printed with silk paint by yellow paint.

First, consider a case where four full-color LEDs are arranged close to each other on the front (front) KCx of the decorative substrate KC. Four full-color LEDs are arranged on the front (front) KCx of the decorative substrate KC. The areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions and the four full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 are printed by yellow printing by silk printing, for example, as shown in FIG. 270(a), In the case of the centralized arrangement in which the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full color LEDs are concentrated in the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full color LEDs are arranged, FIG. ), the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are distributed without being concentrated outside the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged. Consider the case of placement and the case.

It should be noted that in the case of the concentrated arrangement, the positions (areas) KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC and the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KC in the distributed arrangement. ) It is assumed that the positions where the regions KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged in KCx are arranged are the same.

In both the centralized arrangement and the distributed arrangement, the regions KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs, and other electronic parts (resistors, capacitors, In addition to the IC, the connector may be included.) and are printed by silk printing with yellow paint. Therefore, the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KC in the areas printed by silk printing with yellow paint, respectively. ) The ratio to KCx (hereinafter, referred to as “yellow occupancy”) is the same.

In addition, areas other than the areas printed by silk-screen printing with yellow paint (that is, the white resist solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC are printed by silk-screen printing with yellow paint. The ratio of the decorative substrate KC to the front surface (front surface) KCx (hereinafter, referred to as “white occupancy ratio”) in the area (excluding the shaded area) is larger than the yellow occupancy ratio. As described above, the white occupancy rate in which white occupies the surface of the decorative substrate KC by the white coating film formed by applying the white resist solution, the white occupancy is due to the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4, etc. ) Since it is larger than the yellow occupancy that occupies KCx, it is printed by silk printing even when the decorative substrate KC (white coating film) is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player. Compared to the yellow color of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4, etc., the white color of the white coating film, which is one of the decorations visible to the player, is more visible to the player's eyes, making it difficult to notice the existence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 etc. Can contribute to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

In the case of the concentrated arrangement, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full color LEDs are arranged in a concentrated manner in a region surrounding all the regions KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full color LEDs are arranged. Specifically, in the case of the concentrated arrangement, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED 1 is arranged below the area KCp1 indicating the position where the full-color LED 1 is arranged, and below the area KCp2 indicating the position where the full-color LED 2 is arranged. The part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is arranged, the part number KCn3 corresponding to the full-color LED 3 is arranged above the region KCp3 showing the position where the full-color LED 3 is arranged, and above the region KCp4 showing the position where the full-color LED 4 is arranged. The part number KCn4 corresponding to the full-color LED 4 is arranged at.

In this way, when the component numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are locally concentrated in the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged, Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, even if the yellow coating has a high reflectance, a reflectance-reduced region in which the reflectance efficiency is lowered is formed. Further, since the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full color LEDs are locally concentrated in the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged, the part number KCn1 to The presence of KCn4 stands out.

That is, in the case of the concentrated arrangement, the white coating film, which is one of the decorations visible to the player, is white in a local area that is an area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged. Compared with this, the yellow of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 often enters the eyes of the player, and it is easy to notice the existence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4. Therefore, the decorative property may be deteriorated.

On the other hand, in the case of the distributed arrangement, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full color LEDs are dispersed without being concentrated outside the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full color LEDs are arranged. Have been placed. Specifically, in the case of the distributed arrangement, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED 1 is arranged at the upper left of the area KCp1 showing the position where the full-color LED 1 is arranged, and the upper right of the area KCp2 showing the position where the full-color LED 2 is arranged. The part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is arranged on one side, and the part number KCn3 corresponding to the full-color LED 3 is arranged on the lower left of the area KCp3 indicating the position where the full-color LED 3 is arranged, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED 4 is arranged. A part number KCn4 corresponding to the full-color LED 4 is arranged on the lower right side of the KCp4.

As described above, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full color LEDs are not locally arranged at all in the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full color LEDs 1 to 4 are arranged, and the full color LED 1 ~ Part numbers corresponding to four full-color LEDs when the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to four full-color LEDs are dispersedly arranged outside the region enclosing all the regions KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the LED4 is arranged Since the above-described reflectance lowering region formed by arranging KCn1 to KCn4 in a concentrated manner is not formed at all, the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, but the yellow part number KCn1 The high reflectance due to KCn4 can be maintained. In addition, since the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full color LEDs are arranged in a distributed manner outside the region surrounding all the regions KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged, the presence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 Is not noticeable.

In other words, in the local area, which is the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged, the yellow occupancy rate is higher in the case of using the concentrated arrangement than in the case of using the distributed arrangement. (In the area of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 respectively printed by silk printing with yellow paint, the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC is higher than the local area) Compared with the case where the centralized arrangement is adopted, the occupancy rate of the yellow is higher (the local area of the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative board KC in the areas of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 printed by silk printing with yellow paint. To the ratio) becomes low. In this way, in the local area, which is the area that surrounds all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged, it is better to adopt the case of distributed arrangement than the yellow part numbers KCn1 to KCn4. The white color of the white coating film, which is one of the decorations that can be visually recognized by the player, often enters the eyes of the player and makes it difficult to notice the existence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Even if the case of distributed arrangement is adopted, four full color LEDs correspond to the other electronic components in the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged. There may be a case where any one or two of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 must be arranged, but in this case as well, in the case of the central arrangement, the yellow occupation ratio ( The front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC in the areas of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 respectively printed by silk printing with the yellow paint becomes high in proportion to the local area.

In the case of distributed arrangement, the following rules may be set as the arrangement method of the component numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the full-color LEDs. For example, as shown in FIG. 270(b), for example, one of the four full-color LEDs (one other full-color LED may be used) may be selected as a reference, and the width of the selected one full-color LED may be selected. Use dimensions and height dimensions. When the part number KCn3 corresponding to the full-color LED 3 having the width dimension Nw and the height dimension Nh is selected as a reference, the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED 4 are arranged are the regions KCp 1 to KCp 4 which indicate the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED 4 are arranged. First, the full-color LED 3 is arranged so as to be outside the surrounding area, and then the full-color LED 1 is arranged above the full-color LED 3 with a first distance Ph which is a predetermined multiple of the height dimension Nh of the full-color LED 3 from each other. The LED 4 is arranged to the right of the full-color LED 3 with a second distance Pw that is a predetermined multiple of the width dimension Nw of the full-color LED 3, and the full-color LED 2 is a first distance that is a predetermined number of the height dimension Nh of the full-color LED 3. Ph and the width dimension Nw of the full-color LED 3 are separated by a second distance Pw, which is a predetermined multiple of the width dimension Nw, and are arranged above and to the right of the full-color LED 3. It should be noted that the positions where the LEDs 1, LED 2, and LED 4 are arranged may be the same values obtained by multiplying the above-mentioned predetermined number of times, or the values may be changed individually, and the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to 4 are arranged are It may be selected so as to be outside the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged.

Next, considering a case where two full-color LEDs are arranged close to each other on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decoration substrate KC, two front-side (front surface) KCx of the decoration substrate KC have two adjacent full-color LEDs. The areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the parts are arranged and the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two adjacent full-color LEDs are respectively printed by yellow printing by silk printing, and for example, FIG. 270(c). As shown in FIG. 2, the two full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are arranged above the areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged, that is, the areas KCp1 to KCp2 and the parts In the case of the concentrated arrangement in which the numbers KCn1 and KCn2 are arranged in a concentrated manner in the vicinity, and as shown in FIG. Now, let us consider the case of the distributed arrangement in which the two full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are arranged separately.

In addition, in the case of the concentrated arrangement, the positions (areas) where the two full-color LEDs are arranged on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC are arranged, and in the case of the distributed arrangement, the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KC. ) It is premised that the positions where the regions KCp1 and KCp2 indicating the positions where the two full-color LEDs are arranged in KCx are the same.

In both the centralized arrangement and the distributed arrangement, the regions KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two full-color LEDs are arranged, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs, and other electronic parts (resistors, capacitors, In addition to the IC, it may include a connector.) and are printed by silk printing with yellow paint. Therefore, the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KC in the areas printed by silk printing with yellow paint, respectively. ) The ratio to KCx (hereinafter, referred to as “yellow occupancy”) is the same.

In addition, areas other than the areas printed by silk-screen printing with yellow paint (that is, the white resist solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC are printed by silk-screen printing with yellow paint. The ratio of the decorative substrate KC to the front surface (front surface) KCx (hereinafter, referred to as “white occupancy ratio”) in the area (excluding the shaded area) is larger than the yellow occupancy ratio. In this way, the white occupancy rate in which white occupies the surface of the decorative substrate KC by the white coating film formed by applying the white resist solution is as follows. ) Since it is larger than the yellow occupancy that occupies KCx, it is printed by silk printing even when the decorative substrate KC (white coating film) is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player. Compared with the yellow color of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2, etc., the white color of the white coating film, which is one of the decorations visible to the player, is often included in the player's eyes, making it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2. Can contribute to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

In the case of the concentrated arrangement, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full color LEDs are respectively arranged above the regions KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full color LEDs are arranged, that is, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn1. KCn2 is concentrated and arranged. Specifically, in the case of the concentrated arrangement, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full color LED 1 is arranged above the area KCp1 indicating the position where the full color LED 1 is arranged, and the position where the full color LED 2 adjacent to the full color LED 1 is arranged is set. A part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is arranged above and near the area KCp2 shown.

In this way, when the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full color LEDs are respectively arranged on the upper side in the vicinity of the regions KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full color LEDs are arranged, the parts corresponding to the two full color LEDs are arranged. Since the numbers KCn1 and KCn2 are locally concentrated, the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, but even if the reflectance is high, the reflection efficiency is reduced. A rate decreasing area will be formed.

That is, in the case of the concentrated arrangement, the white coating film, which is a kind of decoration visible to the player, is provided in the local area above the areas KCp1 and KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full-color LEDs 1 to LED2 are arranged. Compared to white, yellow of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 is more visible to the player's eyes, and it is easier to notice the existence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2. Therefore, the decorative property may be deteriorated.

On the other hand, in the case of the distributed arrangement, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full color LEDs are dispersed at positions apart from the areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full color LEDs are arranged. It is arranged. Specifically, in the case of the distributed arrangement, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full color LED 1 is arranged at the lower left of the region KCp1 indicating the position where the full color LED 1 is arranged, and the position where the full color LED 1 and the adjacent full color LED 2 are arranged is set. A part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is arranged on the lower right of the area KCp2 shown.

In this way, if the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full color LEDs are arranged in a dispersed manner at positions apart from the regions KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full color LEDs are arranged, two full color LEDs are obtained. Although the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are not locally concentrated and arranged at all, and the above-described reflectance-reduced area is not formed at all, the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film. It is possible to maintain a high reflectance due to the yellow part numbers KCn1 to KCn2. Further, since the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full color LEDs are respectively arranged in a dispersed manner at positions distant from the regions KCp1 to KCp2 indicating positions where two adjacent full color LEDs are arranged, the part numbers KCn1 to The presence of KCn2 is inconspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

In the case of distributed arrangement, the following rules may be set as the arrangement method of the component numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LEDs. For example, as shown in FIG. 270(d), for example, one full-color LED (or another electronic component may be used) of the two full-color LEDs is selected as a reference, and the width of the selected one full-color LED is selected. Use dimensions and height dimensions. When the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED 1 having the width dimension Nw and the height dimension Nh is selected as a reference, the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED2 are arranged are the regions KCp1 to KCp2 which indicate the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED2 are arranged. Arranged so that the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are dispersed so as to be outside the all-enclosing region, that is, at positions distant from the regions KCp1 to KCp2 that indicate positions where two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged. First, the component number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED 1 is arranged, and then the component number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is multiplied by a predetermined distance for the left-right direction by a second distance Pw′ (first The two distances Pw′ correspond to the full-color LED 1 by at least the width dimension Nw of the full-color LED 1 being equal to or more than the width dimension Nw so that the minimum character string length of the full-color LED 1 is separated. It is arranged on the right side of the full-color LED 1 apart from the part number KCn1. The part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is arranged at another position along the up-down direction of the full-color LED 2 arranged to the right of the full-color LED 1 (for example, a region showing a position where the full-color LED 1 and the adjacent full-color LED 2 are arranged). In the case where the part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is arranged on the upper right of KCp2), the second distance Ph' (the second distance Ph' is at least a multiple of the height dimension Nh of the full-color LED 1 by a predetermined number in the vertical direction). , And the height dimension Nh of the full-color LED 1 is equal to or greater than the minimum character string height of the full-color LED 1).) The full-color LED 1 and the corresponding part number KCn1 are separated from each other. Place it. It should be noted that the above-mentioned predetermined multiple times for the left-right direction and the above-mentioned predetermined multiple times for the up-down direction may be the same value, or the values may be changed individually, and two adjacent full-color LEDs 1 may be used. -Parts numbers KCn1 and KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs may be selected to be distributed and arranged at positions apart from the positions where the LEDs 2 are arranged.

In the case of distributed arrangement, as a method of arranging the component numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LEDs, for example, two full-color LEDs are arranged close to each other on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC. Of the two full-color LEDs, for one full-color LED, another full-color LED is arranged at any one of the upper right, lower right, upper left, and lower left of the one full-color LED, according to the above-mentioned rules, One of the full-color LEDs is selected as a reference (other electronic components may be used), and the width and height of the selected one full-color LED are used. Since the two full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 can be arranged apart from each other by the above-described second distance Pw′ and/or second distance Ph′, the positions where the two full-color LEDs are arranged can be changed. Part numbers KCn1 and KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs can be dispersedly arranged at positions apart from the illustrated regions KCp1 and KCp2.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine including a decorative substrate on which a light emitting means is mounted has been proposed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). A decorative member for covering the decorative substrate was arranged in front of the light emitting means provided in the gaming machine. By the way, if the decoration member is made of a transparent material, the color of the resist liquid applied to the surface of the decoration substrate is visually recognized as it is when the light emitting means is turned off, and the world view of the game machine is disturbed. There was a risk that the interest in playing games would decline.

In addition, conventionally, a game machine including a board provided with an operation unit has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-205304 (paragraphs [0106] to [0112] and FIG. 9)). This substrate was housed in the housing member. By the way, when the accommodating member is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material, the electronic component number formed on the surface of the substrate on which the operation portion is provided is visible through the accommodating member. However, since the electronic part number has nothing to do with the game for the player, there is a risk that the electronic part number is visually recognized through the accommodating member and the world view of the gaming machine is disturbed, so that the fun of the gambling game is reduced. there were.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine provided with a board on which a part number and the like are printed by silk printing (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-141683 (paragraph [0047], paragraph [0048], and FIG. 3)). .. Some substrates have a high reflectance and high decorativeness by being coated with a resist liquid of a predetermined color. However, if a substrate is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by the player, silk printing can also be visually recognized by the player, and there is a possibility that the decorativeness is deteriorated.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the light emitting effect unit 5000 of FIG. 255 is provided as a decorative member. This light emitting effect unit 5000 is provided with the LED substrate 5070 of FIG. 255 as a substrate, the light guide plate 5060 of FIG. 255 as a light guide member, the diffusion sheet 5050 of FIG. 255 as a transparent member, and the decoration body 5040 of FIG. 255 as a decoration body. .. The LED substrate 5070 is mounted with the LED bare chip 5075 of FIG. 255 as a light emitting means. The light guide plate 5060 is arranged in front of the LED substrate 5070 and is capable of emitting the light emitted by the LED bare chip 5075 to the front. The diffusion sheet 5050 is arranged in front of the light guide plate 5060. The decorative body 5040 is arranged in front of the diffusion sheet 5050. In the diffusion sheet 5050, five white strip regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 having a long strip in the left-right direction, which are coated with white paint on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050 of FIG. 258 as opaque regions at least at positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075. Are formed.

Thus, the light emitted by the LED bare chip 5075, which is the light emitting means, is emitted to the diffusion sheet 5050, which is a transparent member, through the light guide plate 5060, which is a light guide member, but to the diffusion sheet 5050, which is a transparent member. Is formed on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050 which is an opaque area at a position corresponding to the LED bare chip 5075 which is a light emitting means and which has five white belt areas 5050c1 to 5050c5 which are long strips applied in the left-right direction and which are coated with white paint. Therefore, the position where the LED bare chip 5075, which is the light emitting means, is mounted is coated with white paint on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, which is an opaque region which is not bright and does not shine in the decorative body 5040 which is a decorative body like a point light source. It is designed to be softened by five white strip regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 each having a long strip shape in the left-right direction. This can contribute to evenly illuminating the surface 5060x that is the surface of the light guide plate 5060 that is the light guide member that faces the diffusion sheet 5050 that is a transparent member. It is difficult to give a sense of incongruity to the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the light emission effect.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, it is possible to play a game, and the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 of FIG. 249 as the conductive member and the conductive wiring member of FIG. 249 as the first wiring member. The wiring provided in the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 and the wiring drawn in the space inside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in FIG. 249 as the second wiring member. .. The metal wiring groove 1605 has conductivity, and the wiring routed to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 is weak against the influence of electromagnetic wave noise. The wiring routed to the space inside the groove formed by is stronger against the influence of electromagnetic noise than the wiring routed to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605.

A metal wiring groove 1605 is formed on the inner surface of the bottom of the metal wiring groove 1605 shown in FIG. 249 having a U-shaped cross section, which is one surface of the metal wiring groove 1605 facing the source of electromagnetic noise. The wiring to be routed is arranged in the groove inner space having the U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 of FIG. 250, which is the other surface of the conductive member that does not face the source of the electromagnetic noise. On the bottom outer surface 1605d of the groove portion 1605a, the wiring routed to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 is arranged.

As described above, the metal wiring groove 1605, which is the second wiring member, is more resistant to the influence of electromagnetic noise than the wiring routed to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, which is the first wiring member. The wiring routed to the groove inner space is formed on the inner surface of the bottom of the groove portion 1605a having the U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605, which is one surface of the metal wiring groove 1605 facing the source of the electromagnetic noise. By the metal wiring groove 1605 which is the first wiring member which is arranged and is weaker in the influence of electromagnetic noise than the wiring which is laid out in the groove space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 which is the second wiring member. The wiring routed to the space outside the groove formed is the bottom surface of the groove portion 1605a having the U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 which is the other surface of the metal wiring groove 1605 which does not face the source of the electromagnetic noise. By being arranged on the outer surface 1605d, the wiring routed to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 which is the first wiring member and the second wiring member in the space affected by the electromagnetic noise. It is possible to mix and arrange the wiring routed in the groove space formed by a certain metal wiring groove 1605. Therefore, the noise resistance due to electromagnetic noise can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be played, and the flexible flat cable 5030 of FIG. 254 is provided as a planar wiring member. The flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel as a plurality of conductors including a ground wire which is a power supply wire and a control wire and covered with an insulating material. As the conductors at the end in the width direction of the flexible flat cable 5030 facing the source of electromagnetic noise, the flat conductors at both ends are arranged as ground lines which are power lines. In other words, among the plurality of flat conductors including the ground line which is the power line and the control line, the ground line which is the power line is arranged between the generation source of the electromagnetic noise and the control line.

As described above, in the flexible flat cable 5030 that is a planar wiring member, a plurality of flat conductors that are a plurality of conductors including a ground wire that is a power supply wire and a control wire are arranged in parallel, and a power supply. Among the plurality of flat conductors including the ground line which is the line and the control line, the ground line which is the power line is arranged between the source of the electromagnetic noise and the control line. Noise resistance due to electromagnetic wave noise can be improved with respect to the flat conductors that are the other conductors except the flat conductors on both ends as the conductors on the extreme end side. Therefore, the noise resistance due to electromagnetic noise can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be played, and the sound of the door frame 3 in FIG. 10 as the front frame and the door frame top unit 450 in FIG. 73 as the light emitting device. It has a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 469. The door frame 3 is provided so as to be openable and closable, and a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 of the door frame top unit 450 are provided on the upper front surface as predetermined positions of the door frame 3. It is provided. The door frame top unit 450 can emit light toward the front of the door frame 3 and can emit light toward the rear of the door frame 3.

Specifically, the pair of top-side speakers 464 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of speaker brackets 463 in the door frame top unit 450 respectively include a diaphragm and a vibrating portion such as a center cap made of a resin having a light-transmitting property. (For example, polypropylene having milky white color) and a cylindrical shape having a through hole through which a magnetic circuit part such as a magnet and a yoke penetrates in the front and back, and a vibrating part and a magnetic circuit part are casings. It is held by the body. A plurality of openings are formed in the casing in the circumferential direction. The through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in a cylindrical shape is covered by the center cap arranged in the front, while the rear is open. On the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, sound is attached to a mounting portion formed on four board mounting bending plates (not shown) that extend rearward from the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 by a predetermined distance dimension (about 18 mm in this embodiment). The decorative substrate 469 is attached. When the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464. The acoustic decoration substrate 469 is arranged so as to face the rear surface thereof, and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 covers the rear of the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464.

When a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, the light is emitted from the translucent center cap through the through holes of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the columnar shape of the top side speaker 464. Is emitted and the light is emitted from the light-transmitting diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing, so that the topside speaker 464 can be illuminated. Is becoming Further, when a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, the LEDs are reflected on the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke forming the magnetic circuit section formed in a cylindrical shape) and reflected from the top. The space between the back surface of the side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is repeatedly reversed, and the light is emitted rearward from the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 toward the rear.

As described above, the speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protruding portions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The door frame top base 451 is larger than the outer circumference of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 so that the acoustic decoration substrate 469 attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 at a position corresponding to the position where the left and right speaker brackets 463 are attached is exposed. Through holes 451ba each having a shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed. When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, the LEDs radiate rearward of the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, and then to the acoustic decoration substrate 469. Through the gap between the outer periphery of the door frame top base 451 and the inner periphery of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451 and is emitted to the rear of the door frame top base 451.

As described above, the door frame top base 451 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a. The door frame base 101 has a shape larger than or the same as the outer circumference of the through hole 451b at a position corresponding to the left and right through holes 451b formed in the door frame top base 451 and also has a through hole 101k penetrating back and forth. Are formed respectively. As a result, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emits light, the LEDs are emitted to the rear of the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 toward the rear, and the sound decoration The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 passes through a gap formed by the outer circumference of the substrate 469 and the inner circumference of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451, and through the through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. To the rear of.

In this way, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 of the door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 can emit light toward the front of the door frame 3 and the door frame 3 Of the door frame top unit 450 from the direction facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the direction facing the rear side of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is opened. It is possible to visually recognize the notification mode by the light emission of the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. As a result, in the game hall, an acoustic decoration board of the door frame top unit 450 is provided to an attendant such as a clerk in the game hall passing through the aisle side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the aisle side facing the rear side of the door frame 3. It is possible to convey a notification mode by a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the 469. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened, it is possible to visually recognize the notification mode of the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 from the front surface side and the rear surface side of the door frame 3.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, it is possible to play a game, and the front frame is the door frame 3 of FIG. 10, the front frame light emitting means is the speaker bracket 463 of FIG. 73, the top. It has a speaker illumination unit composed of a side speaker 464, an acoustic decoration substrate 469, and a transparent plate. The door frame 3 is provided so as to be openable and closable, and the speaker illumination unit is provided on the door frame 3 and is capable of emitting light in a manner different from the normal time when the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal or defective. When the door frame 3 is in the open state, it is provided on the door frame 3 so that it can be seen not only from the front of the door frame 3 but also from the rear of the door frame 3 that light is emitted in a manner different from the normal state. ing.

Specifically, the pair of top-side speakers 464 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of speaker brackets 463 in the door frame top unit 450 respectively include a diaphragm and a vibrating portion such as a center cap made of a resin having a light-transmitting property. (For example, polypropylene having milky white color) and a cylindrical shape having a through hole through which a magnetic circuit part such as a magnet and a yoke penetrates in the front and back, and a vibrating part and a magnetic circuit part are casings. It is held by the body. A plurality of openings are formed in the casing in the circumferential direction. The through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in a cylindrical shape is covered by the center cap arranged in the front, while the rear is open. On the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, sound is attached to a mounting portion formed on four board mounting bending plates (not shown) that extend rearward from the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 by a predetermined distance dimension (about 18 mm in this embodiment). The decorative substrate 469 is attached. In this way, the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463, and the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the transparent plate are attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, so that the speaker illumination unit is assembled. In other words, the speaker illumination unit is composed of the speaker bracket 463, the top side speaker 464, the acoustic decoration substrate 469, and the transparent plate. When the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464. The acoustic decoration substrate 469 is arranged so as to face the rear surface thereof, and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 covers the rear of the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464.

When a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, the light is emitted from the translucent center cap through the through holes of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the columnar shape of the top side speaker 464. Is emitted and the light is emitted from the light-transmitting diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing, so that the topside speaker 464 can be illuminated. Is becoming Further, when a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, the LEDs are reflected on the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke forming the magnetic circuit section formed in a cylindrical shape) and reflected from the top. The space between the back surface of the side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is repeatedly reversed, and the light is emitted rearward from the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 toward the rear.

The peripheral control board 1510 causes an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, occurrence of ball clogging in the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the dispensing device 580, etc., detection of fraudulent activity, opening of the door frame 3, main body). (Opening of the frame 4, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or defect (defective operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), detection of original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (standby position), etc.)) (hereinafter, "There is a case where an abnormality or a defect has occurred.") is generated, the light emission data serving as a notification mode as a mode different from the normal time described above is mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal. Output to an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown). In addition, in the light emission mode of the effect mode (normal time), there are various light emission modes in which lighting, extinction, blinking, gradation lighting, etc. are combined, whereas in the notification mode (mode different from normal time), it is predetermined. The color (red in the present embodiment) is a light emission mode in which the color is turned on with maximum brightness.

In the conventional gaming machine, when the door frame 3, which is the front frame, is in the open state, the light emission that informs the outside of the occurrence of abnormality or malfunction can be visually recognized from the direction (front side) facing the front side of the door frame 3. However, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to visually recognize the light emission that informs the outside of the occurrence of an abnormality or a defect from the direction (rear side) facing the rear surface side of the door frame 3. In this respect, in the present embodiment, when the door frame 3 is opened, the occurrence of an abnormality or a defect is exposed to the outside from both the direction facing the front surface side of the door frame 3 and the direction facing the rear surface side of the door frame 3. The light emission to be notified can be visually recognized (that is, the occurrence of the abnormality or the defect can be notified to the outside in a new mode in which both the front side of the door frame 3 and the rear side of the door frame 3 are viewed. ). As a result, in the game hall, both the aisle side that faces the front side of the door frame 3 and the aisle side that faces the rear side of the door frame 3 cause abnormalities and troubles to the staff such as the clerk in the game hall. It can be transmitted quickly, and the work efficiency of the game hall can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the lottery is performed based on the result of the starting condition, the variable display of the symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery, and the predetermined display is performed as the result of the variable display of the symbol. It is a gaming machine that gives a specific gaming profit to a player by deriving a hit variation result, and is provided with a gaming board equipped with a symbol display device for performing variable display of the symbols, and the gaming board. A frame body, a front frame that is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the frame body, a detection unit that detects an open/closed state of the front frame, and an open state of the front frame that is provided on the front frame and is detected. Based on the above, the front frame light emitting means capable of emitting light in a special mode different from the normal time is provided.

Specifically, for example, as a starting condition, the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 of FIG. 111, and in the main control board 1310 of FIG. 206, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player ( For example, a lottery of special lottery results that causes "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability change (probable change) hit", "time shortening (time saving) hit" is performed. Based on the result of the lottery, the main control board 1310 outputs a control signal to the function display unit 1400 of FIG. 111, and uses a plurality of LEDs based on this control signal to perform variable display of symbols. As a result of the special lottery result that is the variation display of the symbols, a predetermined winning variation result is derived and an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability" It is possible to add "per fluctuation (probability change)" and "per time reduction (time reduction)". A game board 5 provided with a function display unit 1400 for displaying variable display of symbols, a main body frame 4 of FIG. 10 as a frame body on which the game board 5 of FIG. 111 is provided, and a main body frame 4 which can be opened and closed. 10 as a front frame, a door frame opening switch for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 as detection means for detecting the open/closed state of the door frame 3, and a door frame 3 provided on the door frame 3. Based on the detection of the open state of the door frame 3, the speaker bracket 463, the top side speaker 464, and the acoustic decoration substrate 469 of FIG. 73 as a front frame light emitting means capable of emitting light in a notification mode as a special mode different from the normal state. , And a speaker illumination unit composed of a transparent plate. In addition, in the light emission mode of the effect mode (normal time), there are various light emission modes in which lighting, extinction, blinking, gradation lighting, etc. are combined, whereas in the notification mode (mode different from normal time), it is predetermined. The color (red in the present embodiment) is a light emission mode in which the color is turned on with maximum brightness.

Further, the front frame light emitting means includes a light emitting board having a light emitting section mounted on a board surface facing the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitting board emits light in the special mode by the mounted light emitting section. At least part of the periphery of the light-emitting substrate so that the light-emitting portion can emit light in the special mode not only from the front of the front frame but also from the rear of the front frame. The light emitting portion is arranged to leak light.

Specifically, for example, the speaker bracket 463 that is the front frame light emitting means, the top side speaker 464, the acoustic decoration substrate 469, and the speaker illumination unit including the transparent plate are substrates facing the front side of the pachinko machine 1. The surface is composed of an acoustic decoration substrate 469 as a light emitting substrate on which a plurality of LEDs 469a are mounted as a light emitting portion. The acoustic decoration substrate 469 has a plurality of mounted LEDs 469a when the LEDs 469a emit light in a notification mode as a special mode. From at least a part around the acoustic decoration substrate 469 so that the fact that the LED 469a of the above is emitting light in the notification mode is visible not only from the front of the door frame 3 as the front frame but also from the rear of the door frame 3 as the front frame. The plurality of LEDs 469a are arranged to leak light.

Further, the front frame light emitting means, when the open state of the front frame is not detected, performs predetermined performance light emission based on a variation pattern set when the symbol is variably displayed. At a position corresponding to the rear of the front door light emitting means when the front frame is in a closed state, a light reflecting portion (white printing portion, metal member) capable of reflecting light leakage of the light emitting portion forward is provided. ..

Specifically, for example, in a speaker illumination unit including a speaker bracket 463, which is a front frame light emitting means, a top side speaker 464, an acoustic decoration substrate 469, and a transparent plate, the door frame 3 as a front frame has an open state. When not detected (when the payout control MPU detects opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch, it sends a door frame opening command to that effect to the main control board 1310. However, when the main control board 1310 does not receive this door frame opening command), the main control board 1310 outputs a control signal to the function display unit 1400, and the symbols are changed using a plurality of LEDs based on this control signal. The main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a command corresponding to the variation pattern that is set and displayed when the pattern is variably displayed. Based on this command, the peripheral control board 1510 causes a predetermined effect light emission (normally). (Time) is output to the LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal, based on the clock signal to turn on, turn off, blink, and turn on the gradation. A variety of light emitting modes are performed by combining the above, etc., and mounted on the acoustic decoration substrate 469 as a light emitting portion at a position corresponding to the rear of the speaker lighting unit when the door frame 3 is closed as a front frame. 10 as a light reflection part capable of reflecting the leaked light of the plurality of LEDs 469a to the front side (a white printed part having a high emissivity white or a color close to white) and a metal stopper FT (metal luster). Is provided.

In addition, the covering portion constituting the back surface side of the light emitting substrate is a transparent member, and the light leakage of the light emitting portion is visible through the transparent member from the rear of the front frame.

Specifically, the speaker illumination unit is composed of a speaker bracket 463, a top side speaker 464, an acoustic decoration substrate 469, and a transparent plate, and is transparent as a covering portion that constitutes the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 that is a light emitting substrate. The plate is a transparent member, and through this transparent plate, which is a transparent member, the light leakage of the plurality of LEDs 469a of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is visible from the rear of the door frame 3.

Further, a plurality of light emitting substrates that constitute the front frame light emitting means are provided, and at least one of the plurality of light emitting substrates is provided on the open end side of the front frame.

Specifically, the acoustic decoration substrate 469, which is a light emitting substrate that constitutes a speaker illumination unit that includes a speaker bracket 463, a top side speaker 464, an acoustic decoration substrate 469, and a transparent plate as the front frame light emitting means, is the pachinko machine 1. Are provided on the upper left side and the upper right side of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front, and a plurality of them are provided, and the acoustic decoration boards 469 arranged on the upper left side of the door frame 3 and the upper right side of the door frame 3 are arranged. At least one of the acoustic decoration board 469 and the acoustic decoration board 469 arranged on the upper right side of the door frame 3 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front is provided on the open end side of the door frame 3. Thereby, even when the door frame 3 is slightly opened, the light emission on the back side of the door frame 3 can be easily recognized.

Further, a plurality of the light emitting substrates that constitute the front frame light emitting means are provided, and the light reflecting portion is provided corresponding to the plurality of light emitting substrates.

Specifically, the acoustic decoration board 469 is a pachinko machine 1 as a light emitting board that constitutes a speaker lighting unit including a speaker bracket 463, a top side speaker 464, a sound decoration board 469, and a transparent plate as a front frame light emitting means. Are provided on the upper left side and the upper right side of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front, and a plurality of the reflection sheets 1000a of FIG. 10 are provided as the light reflecting portions (white with high emissivity or white printing having a color close to white). 10), the reflection sheet 1000a is arranged in the upper left region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to the left side of the sound decoration substrate 469 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, and the reflection sheet 1000a of FIG. The metal stopper FT arranged in the upper right area of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 has a metal stopper FT at a position corresponding to the sound decoration board 469 on the right side when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. 5 is arranged in the upper right region of the front component member 1000.

Further, the light reflecting portion is a white printing portion provided on the game board and provided outside a game area of the game board.

Specifically, the reflection sheet 1000a of FIG. 10 (a white printing portion having a high emissivity white or a color close to white) is provided on the game board 5 as a light reflecting portion, and is outside the game area 5a of the game board 5. Is a white printing unit provided in the.

The white printed portion has a larger area than the light emitting substrate. Specifically, the surface area of the reflection sheet 1000a is larger than the area on the front surface (front surface) or the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on the left side when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front.

The light reflecting portion is a metal member provided on the frame body. Specifically, the metal stopper FT arranged as the light reflecting portion in the upper right side region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 of FIG. 10 is made of metal (metal member) and has gloss. ..

[Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 137 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 271 to 276. FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the main control side power-on process of FIG. 271, and FIG. 273 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt process. 274 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change processing, FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing an example of the error display processing, and FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing an example of the set value confirmation display processing. First, we will explain various random numbers used for game control, and then move the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on process, main control side timer interrupt process, setting change process, error display process, set value confirmation The display process will be described.

[Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number used to determine whether to generate a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and an initial value for hit determination used to determine the initial value of this special random number A random number for determination, a random number for reach determination to be used for determining whether or not to reach (out of reach) when the jackpot gaming state is not generated, and the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400. Random display pattern random numbers used to determine the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is displayed in a variable on the symbol display, and the first special symbol display and the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 when the big hit game state is generated. A random number for design to be used for determination of big hit symbols and small hit symbols (determination of hit type) derived and displayed on the symbol display device, and a random number for initial value determination for big hit symbols to be used for determining the initial value of this symbol random number Etc. are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a normal symbol used to determine whether to open or close the movable piece that allows the game ball to be received in the second starting port 2004, and this regular symbol determination Normal symbol for determining the initial value of the random number for use in determining the initial value of the random number, and a normal symbol for use in determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 Random numbers for variable display patterns are prepared.

Among various random numbers used for such game control, special random numbers are updated by hardware, while other various random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, the hard random number circuit with a built-in main control first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value at a high speed in advance based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU. After extracting the other values in the specified numerical range one after another and extracting all the values in the specified numerical range, one value in the specified numerical range is extracted again and the main control is performed. Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another based on the clock signal input to the MPU. Such a high-speed lottery is repeated by the hard random number circuit with built-in main control, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the hard random number circuit with built-in main control at the time of acquiring the value from the hard random number circuit with built-in main control as a special random number. It is supposed to do.

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by one and the count is incremented. This counter usually counts up from the initial value determination random number for design symbol determination to the maximum value, and then counts from the minimum value to the initial value determination random number for determination symbol normal value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called an “initial value updating type counter”. The normal symbol per determination determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is randomly selected from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the normal symbol per determination random number.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, and in various kinds of data stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by considering the information as a numerical value and calculating the sum is the same as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the power-down process (power-off) on the main control side. When clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, normally, the random number for determining initial value for symbol determination is from the non-volatile RAM that the main control MPU contains. The ID code is taken out, and an initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that normally updates the random number for symbol determination based on the taken out ID code is executed. It is a mechanism to be set. In other words, the normal symbol per-judgment initial value determination random number is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. Thus, the value set in the initial value determination random number for normal symbol per determination is derived by using the ID code, in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU by the manufacturer of the main control MPU. The first security measure that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used when the ID code is stored, and the initial value derivation process is performed when clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area. By executing the second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code by executing it and the two-step security measure, the analysis is prevented.

Here, the advantage of using the extracted ID code from the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU and using the extracted ID code as the normal per symbol determination initial value determination random number will be described. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain a game ball paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles the ID code stored in advance in a non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for determination of the normal symbol and the normal determination value for the symbol coincide with each other, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is added, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU' provided in the other game board 5'. In other words, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hitting judgment random number and the normal symbol hitting judgment value match is completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless on the other game board 5′, that is, the other pachinko machine 1′, and thus is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary blackout is generated at each of the obtained predetermined intervals and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 at each of the predetermined intervals, the movable piece is opened/closed to allow the game ball to be received in the second starting opening 2004. Cannot be generated.

[Processing at power-on of main control side]
First, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning from this routine after ending the subroutine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU, as shown in FIGS. 271 and 272, main control side power-on processing is performed. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10). By setting the RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

Subsequent to step S10, the main control MPU performs a power failure clearing process (step S12). In this power outage clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not the power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit is input. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops. Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time when the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). Has been done.

Subsequent to step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch is operated (step S14). In this determination, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear is to be performed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is performed and it is determined that the RAM clear switch is operated. In addition, since it is an extremely short time within the period from the start of the main control-side power-on process, which is the present routine, to the determination of step S14, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is actually pressed. The person who performs the operation turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch.

When it is determined in step S14 that the RAM clear switch is operated, the main control MPU sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 1 (step S16A). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S14 that the RAM clear switch is not operated, the main control MPU sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU is in a state capable of executing the RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, game information relating to games such as probability variation, unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls). Is a flag indicating whether or not to erase various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, etc., and is set to a value of 1 when the various information is erased and a value of 0 when the various information is not erased. .. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S16A and step S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Subsequent to step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) and then the first ON operation is performed to set the setting key switch. 1311a is turned on by the setting key and the setting key is turned on by the setting key switch 1311a. The main control MPU determines that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. It is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, while the main frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b. And/or by determining that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on by the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied.

In the determination of step S18, when the main control MPU determines that the preset setting change permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to the value 1 (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, when the main control MPU determines that the preset setting change permission condition is not satisfied, it sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to the value 0 (step S20B). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is a current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (a setting value dedicated area in a specific area, which will be described later) of the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU. Is a flag indicating whether or not to permit the setting change of the set value 1 to the set value 6 when the first ON operation is performed, and the setting change of the set value is performed. The value is set to 1 when it is permitted, and the value is set to 0 when it is not permitted to change the setting value. The value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG set in step S20A and step S20B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time standby processing, the system waits until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the standby time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. At the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510. ) Is ready to receive various commands from.

Subsequent to step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut down, or when the power is interrupted or momentarily stopped, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as the power failure notification. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. When it is determined in step S24 that the power outage notification signal is input, the main control MPU returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power outage notification signal continues to be input. A detailed description will be given later of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed after the wait time waiting process in step S22.

When it is determined in step S24 that the power outage advance signal has not been input, the main control MPU determines whether the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S25). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the setting change of the setting value is permitted and a value of 0 when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted.

In the determination of step S25, the main control MPU determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 0 when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has the value 0, that is, when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted. It is determined (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when erasing various information and a value 0 when not erasing various information. In the determination of step S26, the main control MPU calculates the checksum when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that various information is not erased (step S28). This checksum regards various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculates the sum thereof.

Subsequent to step S28, the main control MPU sets the calculated checksum value (sum value) to the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off processing (power-off) described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). When determining in step S30 that the two match, the main control MPU determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores various information, a checksum value (sum value), and game backup information such as the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off processing to be described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been done, and is set to a value 1 when the main control side power-off process is normally completed, and a value 0 when the main control side power-off process is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , Will be described later in detail.

In the determination of step S30, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When it is (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the power-off process on the main control side has not been normally terminated, error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. By this endless loop, the state in which the error display processing is finished is maintained, the game cannot be progressed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. In this error display process, a detailed description will be given later, but when it is determined that the contents of the main control internal RAM are abnormal, or when the main control side power-off process is not normally completed when the power is turned off. If the determination is made, it is determined that the contents stored in the RAM with built-in main control are abnormal (or untrustworthy), and an error display indicating that is displayed. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

It should be noted that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is at the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The main control side power-on process, which is this routine, is started again by turning on the pachinko machine 1 after turning the clockwise 60 degrees and performing the first ON operation. The main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b in the determination of step S18 described above, and sets by the signal of the setting key ON. By determining that the key switch 1311a is turned on, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and in step S20A described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to the value 1 Therefore, in the determination in step S25 described above, it is determined that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, that is, it is determined that the setting change of the setting value is permitted, and the setting change of step S37 described below is performed. Subsequent to the processing, in the processing of step S38 which will be described later, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can be advanced by clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area ( Hereinafter, it will be referred to as "first RAM error canceling method".

As a method different from this first RAM error canceling method, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while depressing the pressing operation section of the RAM clear switch. The main control side power-on process is started. The main control MPU determines in step S14 described above that the RAM clear switch is operated, and sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. In the determination of S26, it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1, that is, it is determined that various information is to be erased, and in the process of step S38 described later, a specific region is excluded from the entire region of the main control internal RAM. By clearing the RAM error, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can be advanced (hereinafter, referred to as "second RAM error canceling method").

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU determines in the determination of step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU: When the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control-side power-off processing has not been normally terminated, an error display in step S33 is displayed and the main control internal RAM is displayed. When notifying that there is an abnormality (or cannot be trusted) in the contents stored in, there are two releasing methods, a first RAM error releasing method and a second RAM error releasing method. Can be done by. As a result, when it is not necessary to change the setting of the set value at all, the RAM error can be canceled by performing the second RAM error canceling method using the RAM clear switch.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the main-control-side power-off processing has been normally completed, the main-control MPU incorporates the main control as the power recovery. The work area of the RAM is set (step S34). In this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU will proceed with the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power recovery" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after being turned off, the state in which power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure, and fraudulent means (for example, fraudulent person A state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) to reset the main control MPU itself, and then returned is also included.

Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed by performing various processes thereafter, so that the main control side power-off process, which will be described later, is normally terminated and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, all areas of the main control internal RAM are cleared except for a specific area.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S25, the main control MPU performs the setting change process when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting change is permitted. Perform (step S37). In the setting change process, which will be described in detail later, each time the pressing operation unit of the setting change button of the setting change board 1311 is pressed based on the detection signal from the setting change button of the setting change board 1311. , The setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is operated from the first ON operation to the second ON operation, the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a The changed set value is determined based on the above, and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM incorporated in the main control MPU.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when the main control MPU determines to erase various information, the main control internal RAM Of all areas except for the specific area are cleared (step S38). Here, the main control MPU writes the value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (area excluding the specific area of the entire main control built-in RAM). In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, and when the setting change process is completed, the main control internal RAM is always The specified area of the main control built-in RAM (the area excluding the specified area of the main control built-in RAM) is cleared except for the specified area. Here, the “specific area” is an area for exclusive use of setting values in which setting values are stored, and an out port 2010, a first sub-out port 2011, and a second sub-out port provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5. It is composed of an out-ball counting-dedicated area for storing the counting result (total number) of the number of gaming balls collected by 2012. The set value dedicated area stores a set value that is changed in a setting change process described later, and the out ball counting dedicated area is an out port 2010, a first sub-out port 2011 and a first sub out port 2011 which are counted in a ball number counting process described later. The counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the second sub-out port 2012 is stored.

The main control MPU may read and set a predetermined value as an initial value from the main control built-in ROM. The main control MPU uses the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch to instruct RAM clear. When erasing various information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power supply When the disconnection process is not normally completed, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU is taken out, and the counter for updating the normal symbol per determination random number based on the taken out ID code. Perform the initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range, and then use this fixed value to determine the initial value for the ordinary symbol per determination to be used to determine the initial value of the above random number for ordinary symbol per determination Set to a random number.

Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the ROM with built-in main control and setting this initial information in the work area of the RAM with built-in main control. As a result, the game backup information is initialized and, for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0. Further, the main control MPU will proceed with the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter, referred to as “the dock dock timer control register incorporated in the main control MPU to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT, which monitors whether or not the operation (system) of the main control MPU is normally operating. WDT control register") to set the timer setting value to start the main control built-in WDT and reset the main control MPU. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the main control built-in WDT starts timing, and the watchdog timer clear register (in the main control MPU) is built in until the time measured reaches the time set by the timer setting value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the WDT with built-in main control is activated and clocking is started, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register before the time counted reaches the time set by the timer set value, The timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and the timekeeping is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and restarting the time measurement again. Can be monitored.

Subsequent to step S41, the main control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Subsequent to step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU (for example, serial input/output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 633, serial input/output ports (reception channel and transmission channel for the peripheral control board 1510). ), the communication serial speed prescaler and the presence/absence of parity are set, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and set transmission permission.

Subsequent to step S44, the main control MPU performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in a gaming machine testing facility, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control MPU sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, of various random numbers related to the game, a special random number used for determining whether or not to generate the jackpot game state, a random number is stored in the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU to be updated by hardware. Settings such as latching and acquisition are made, and the hard random number setting register is set to activate the hard random number circuit with built-in control. When the hard random number circuit with built-in main control is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU, and predetermined. When all the values within the specified numerical range have been extracted, one value within the specified numerical range is extracted again, and the predetermined numerical range is determined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Other values in are extracted one after another without duplication. When the main control MPU acquires a random number (random number value) from the main random number circuit with built-in main control, it outputs a latch signal to the random number circuit with built-in main control, and the main control built-in hardware when this latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets the acquired random number value as a special random number.

Subsequent to step S48, the main control MPU sets the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. A power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command that are classified as Remember. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on state command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command will be transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later. It should be noted that a detailed description will be given later of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50.

Subsequent to step S50, the main control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Subsequent to step S52, the main control MPU determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input (step S54). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage becomes the power failure warning voltage or less, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power failure warning. It The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

In the determination of step S54, when the main control MPU determines that the power failure advance notice signal is not input, the main control MPU performs the non-winning random number updating process (step S56). In this non-win/win random number updating process, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, the small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. As described above, in the non-winning random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the winning/judging determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. In addition, the random number per normal symbol, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number updating process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU determines whether or not the power outage notice signal is input. Then, step S54 to step S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, in the determination of step S54, when the main control MPU determines that the power outage notice signal is input, the main control MPU sets the interrupt prohibition (step S58). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control internal RAM is prevented, and rewriting of various information including the game information and other information described above is protected.

Following step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting the power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same processing as the processing that started the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clearing processing in step S12 is performed.

Subsequent to step S60, the main control MPU outputs drive signals output to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the starting opening solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, the second attacker solenoid 2612, the base monitor, and the like. It stops (step S62).

Subsequent to step S62, the main control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum regards the game information in the work area of the main control internal RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, and calculates the total thereof.

Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Subsequent to step S66, the main control MPU sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). Since the setting of the RAM access prohibition makes it impossible to access the main control internal RAM, it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control internal RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, the time count by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is restarted. As a result, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Then, the main control MPU performs the main control side power-on process again. The process of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

As described above, the main control MPU undergoes a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit when affected by electrical noise. In this case, the main control MPU cannot perform the determination in step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power-off process. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU is reset without executing the main control-side power-off process, and again executes the main control-side power-on process. .. In other words, since the main control power-off process is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control power-off process immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored. When the power is shut off, the checksum value (sum value) stored by executing the power-off process on the main control side and the checksum value calculated in step S28 when a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is applied and the system is restarted The checksum (sum value) error of the main control internal RAM does not always coincide with the value (sum value), and a specific area of all areas of the main control internal RAM is excluded in the process of step S38. It will be completely erased.

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power restoration.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off processing is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraud.

When the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in the determination of step S25, that is, when the setting change of the setting value is permitted, the setting change process of step S37 is performed. In the process of step S38, it is completely erased (cleared) except the specific region in the entire region of the main control built-in RAM, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1). At this time, that is, when it is determined that various kinds of information are to be erased, in the process of step S38, the main control internal RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for the specific region. In this way, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be precise, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch), the set value is changed and determined. When performing a setting change that can be performed (when the main control MPU performs the setting change process), the main control MPU always clears a predetermined area of the main control internal RAM. This is because when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, probability variation (probability change)). If it is, etc.), it is necessary to erase (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information before the next business starts, so a clerk such as a game hall clerk presses the RAM clear switch. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the operation portion. In addition, when the setting value is changed and decided, when the setting change process is performed (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value obtained before the setting change process is performed It is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information including various information such as game information from the main control built-in RAM. Since it is an important key that allows confirmation of the set value, etc., only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, are allowed to carry it, and it is limited to a few people. Even if the change is not decided, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, the staff such as a clerk in the game hall needs to erase the RAM when the game backup information needs to be erased (cleared). The game backup information can be erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation section of the clear switch.

Here, description will be made on the point that the presence/absence of a power failure advance notice signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal is not determined in step S24, that is, when the wait time waiting process in step S22 is performed and the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined and the subsequent process is performed Described below are the problems.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, is charged with electric charge in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when the power supply from the island facility in the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is adapted to be applied as +5V DC for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure. In other words, even when the power from the island facility in the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5 V, so that the island in the game hall is The main control side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply to the equipment is cut off. This is an island facility in the game hall due to a power outage or momentary interruption when the player is playing a game, that is, while performing main control side main processing or main control side timer interrupt processing described later. When the power supply from the power supply is shut off, the main power supply side power-off processing can be surely completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 at the time of power recovery, the waiting time until the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted) (boot timer: in the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds is set.) If a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs immediately before the standby time is reached, the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. Although the charged electric charge is applied as DC +5 V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated by performing the timer interrupt process, the main control side power off process in the main control side power on process may not be completed. For this reason, the value when the checksum is calculated based on the content of the RAM with built-in main control is not stored, and the power-on process on the main control side is started again when power is restored.

Then, at the time of power recovery this time, the main control side power-on process is started, the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and then, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM If the value calculated as the checksum based on the contents of the above is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs in step S30, the checksum value should match. Instead, in step S38, the entire main control RAM is cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM even if the staff such as the game hall clerk operates the RAM clear switch without the intention of the staff such as the game hall clerk to indicate the intention. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information will be erased (cleared).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power cut notice signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24 again, the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure advance notice signal continues to be input. This prevents the game from proceeding. Although the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time waiting process in step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the main value as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

As described above, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, the step When the pachinko machine 1 is powered off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22 (when determined by the determination of step S24), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination of step S24, the game cannot be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter). Can be prevented from being updated, and fluctuations do not occur in the checksum calculation result. As a result, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, when restarted, determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the calculated and stored checksum value of step S64. Therefore, the game information immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure that is stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is performing the game while the pachinko machine is in progress. Even if the power supply to 1 is cut off, the power supply by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is supplied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, so that the game information according to the progress of this game and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) The main control board includes the main control side power-off process performed by the processes of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processes for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) Since the main control MPU of 1310 can be completed, when the main control MPU of the main control MPU is restarted, the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process are performed. Since the result (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) is determined to match, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and retained in the main control internal RAM is held. Is never initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure.

Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal is input, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM are reset. While the main control side power-off processing can be restarted without updating at all, while immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure advance notice signal has not been input, As described above, it is possible to surely complete the power-off processing on the main control side within the "power supply securing period during an instantaneous power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms due to hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power from the island facility in the game hall is cut off. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, in the case where the main control-side power-off process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power interruption or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22. In step S24, it is determined whether or not the power outage notice signal is input. When the power outage notice signal is input, the process returns to the determination in step S24 again, and as long as the power outage notice signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is made. By repeating the above, the game cannot be progressed.

Such software prevents the game from progressing, so that steps after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission is performed in step S52). The contents of the main control internal RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) are set by blocking the progress to the control flow of setting and starting the main control timer interrupt processing described later). It is possible to avoid updating various information) including the information indicating the value of the counter for). When the power from the island facility in the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or momentary power failure, the contents of the main control internal RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) Various information including information indicating the counter value) is covered by software so that it is not changed at all, and the contents of main control internal RAM (game information, and By dividing the other information (for example, various information including the information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter) which is covered by hardware so that it is not changed at all, , It is possible to reliably prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) from being changed. You can do it.

Next, description will be made on the point that the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34, the fact that the power is turned on (power recovery) is performed. In order to convey, a power-on status command classified into power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize number information output judgment counter notification command are created and main control is included as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. The power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2415 and information indicating the driving states of the first attacker solenoid 2418 and the second attacker solenoid 2612. .. Here, first, the power-on main control return destination command includes information indicating the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2415 and information indicating the driving states of the first attacker solenoid 2418 and the second attacker solenoid 2612. If not, that is, the problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command transmitted by the power-on main control return destination command at power-on in step S50 is not performed will be described.

For example, the main control board 1310 drives the first attacker solenoid 2418 while the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Then, when the first special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member or when the second attacker solenoid 2612 is driven to open the second special winning opening 2006 by the opening/closing member, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Then, when power is restored, the main control board 1310 causes the power failure or power failure based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control RAM in step S34. By being restored to the game state immediately before the occurrence of, the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started to be driven, and the first special winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member or the second attacker solenoid 2612 is driven. The state where the second special winning opening 2006 is closed by the opening/closing member is changed to the state where it is opened.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Then, when power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the shortened state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit game state as a game state, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the main control board 1310 to be restored. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed and returned in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state, the jackpot gaming state. It is not possible to display which round of the round. That is, for example, a game ball enters the first big winning opening 2005, is detected by the first big winning opening sensor 2402, and the big winning opening 1 count that conveys the number of balls of the game balls entered in the first big winning opening 2005 Even if the main control board 1310 transmits the display command to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the display command, the peripheral control board 1510 enters the first big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number of balls of the played game balls can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is impossible to display at all which round (that is, how many rounds) of the big hit game state.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving of the first attacker solenoid 2418 and ends the first special winning opening 2005 when the fourth big round (fourth round) of the big hit game state is finished. Mainly, a special winning opening 1 closing display command for instructing to shift from the opened state to the closed state (that is, the closing of the first special winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 between the rounds) is displayed. When transmitting from the control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the big hit game state of the fifth round (fifth round), the driving of the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started to make the first big winning opening. A special winning opening opening fifth display command for instructing that the state of 2005 is changed from being closed by the opening/closing member to being opened (that is, opening of the fifth round of the first special winning opening 2005). It is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen for starting 5 rounds of the big hit game state from the screen corresponding to the above-described probability and time saving state and displays the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

In addition, for example, a screen informing that a game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 is advantageous to the player (for example, the player is notified that the movable piece is open). Screen is transmitted to the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the peripheral control board 1510, the main control board 1310 drives the starting opening solenoid 2415 to open the movable piece to open the second starting opening. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs in the state where 2004 is opened, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the main control internal RAM in the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area, the game state immediately before the power failure or the power failure occurs is restored, so that the driving of the starting opening solenoid 2415 is started and the movable piece is closed. (2) The state where the starting port 2004 is closed is entered.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Then, when power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state and the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004, and the game state is advantageous to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of the power recovery. Even if it can be displayed and returned to the display area of the effect display device 1600, a game state in which a game ball can be received in the second start opening 2004 is entered, and a game state advantageous to the player is displayed. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the transmitted screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure occurred, and at the time of power restoration, the game ball was received at the second start opening 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. It may be forgotten that it is a possible game state, and in such a case, it is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 as the game state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, since the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the power is restored, the game There was also a problem that the player would not know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the above-described two examples, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure cannot be promptly restored after the power restoration. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine mistakenly thinks that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state, and fails when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs after that. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power restoration, power restoration is also performed when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored). In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on state. A main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above example, in the four rounds of the big hit game state, When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, as a destination of the main control board 1310, the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started to drive and the first special winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member. Since it is possible to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the state is to be changed to the open state, the peripheral control board 1510 specifies a screen that indicates that it is four rounds of the big hit game state (that is, what round is it?). Although it is not possible to display the screen indicating) on the display area of the effect display device 1600, in the big hit game state, the driving of the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started and the first special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member. A screen that tells you that you are in a state that you are in a state (for example, a big hit. The big winning opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the big winning opening.) A screen) can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to instruct a player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine to play a game ball into the first special winning opening 2005 after power restoration. Further, for example, in the above-described example, in the game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004, which is advantageous to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then When power is restored to the screen, a screen notifying that the main control board 1310 is in a state where the starting opening solenoid 2415 is started to open the movable piece to open the second starting opening 2004 as a return destination ( For example, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the message "The game is such that the movable piece is open. Please enter the game ball into the second starting opening." It is possible to instruct the player, who is displayed in the display area and is seated in front of the pachinko machine, to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 after the power is restored.

This allows the main control board 1310 side to finely instruct the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine mistakenly thinks that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a lumpy state, a so-called frozen state, when the power is restored after a momentary power failure or power failure, and it is mistaken for it. It can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspecting step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum in step S28 is checked. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control internal RAM is calculated in step S28, In the comparison judgment, the checksum values cannot match, and in step S38, the checksum values must be cleared except for the specific area in the entire main control RAM.

As a result, when the reservation of the command to be transmitted at power-on is set in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information By creating an output judgment counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball Only three commands, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. In the main control timer interrupt processing described below, these commands are first sent a power-on state command, then a power-on main control return destination command, and then a power-on main prize ball count. The information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 sends a power-on state command as the first command. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command operates the RAM clear switch to operate the RAM clear switch at the time of power-on (including power-on, power recovery when power failure or momentary power failure occurs). The information indicating that when clearing is performed, and at the time of power-on (including power-on and power-recovery when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). Indicates the pachinko machine model code and information that indicates which state (probability or time saving state) to return from among the probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non-time saving state, or high probability non-time saving state It consists of information and. Here, there will be described a problem when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

The model code of the pachinko machine is, for the pachinko machine 1 (to be precise, the main control board 1310), when the so-called Max type, Middle type, and Sweet Digi type are created, which work is the copyright for? What kind of game specifications (for example, if the probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It is possible to specify whether the game specification (so-called ST machine) or the like) in which the probability variation occurs in the state)).

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works may be mixed. Then, the worker on the production line is the main copyright holder for which of the copyrights of the plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, comic E, and comic F). It is unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyright of the work of movie D). Although the main control board 1310 is flowing to the manufacturing line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 may be used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing to the production line.

For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line is It is not possible to confirm which product copyright the manufactured main control board 1310 belongs to, and which model type (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type) is selected for the same product copyright. It is also not possible to confirm whether the game specification is a type or not, and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine in which if a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next big hit game state occurs).

As a result, in the production line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1, when the main control boards 1310 are mixed when the main control boards 1310 are mixed, the main control boards for the copyrights of the plurality of kinds of works are mixed. 1310 is mixed and sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, the time when power is restored and power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). In order to transmit a power-on status command including information indicating the power-on status to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on status A main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

As a result, the operator of the manufacturing line of the maker who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection step, which is the inspection step of the manufacturing line, so that the inspection device is controlled by the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, configuring the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, described above, Max type indicating the model type, middle type, And, a series code to specify which type is the sweet digital type, a copyright code to specify the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, if probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, a game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.) that the probability fluctuation occurs in the state where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited, Based on the above, by visually observing detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the copyright of the main control board 1310 belongs to, and also to confirm the copyright of the same work. Whether it is a model type (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type), and what kind of game specification (if probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next big hit game state occurs) It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine).

As a result, in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. By visually checking the inspection monitor, the operator can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification. Can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent the production efficiency of the game board 5 from decreasing due to the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 271 and 272.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 273 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine, the first register bank to the second register bank used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process is changed to the second register bank. Switch the register bank to the register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, is started, it is not necessary to save each register to the stack.

Subsequent to step S100, the main control MPU performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 are turned on according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on in accordance with the normal symbol and the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal electric accessory control process described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmits. Performing time management such as ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 normally receives various commands is input. .. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes the value 0, the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes the value 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. Note that these various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU, for example, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3051, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3052, the detection from the second starting opening sensor 2401. A signal, a detection signal from the first special winning opening sensor 2402, a detection signal from the second special winning opening sensor 2601, an out opening sensor 3053, a detection signal from the first sub-out opening sensor 2403, and a second sub-out opening sensor 3054, Detection signals from the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, operation signals from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signals from the door frame opening switch 4a, detection signals from the main frame opening switch 4b, setting key switch 1311a , A signal from the setting switch button, and a payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 which informs that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later. It is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, when the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3052 and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2401 are read, the corresponding starting port winning commands classified as other are transmitted as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Stored in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starting mouth sensor 3052, the corresponding starting mouth winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, and from the second starting mouth sensor 2401. When there is a detection signal of, the corresponding start opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, when the switch input process is started in a state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those subjected to the empty terminal process). First, it is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has passed, it is read again as the second time. Then, the result read in the second time is compared with the result read in the first time. It is determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is treated as if there is no game ball entered or if the input is ignored.

As described above, in the switch input process, the state of being input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including the state where the empty terminal process is performed) is repeated for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by performing a total of two readings, ie, two readings for comparison and two readings for the second to fourth times. Therefore, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3051, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3052, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first A detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2402, a detection signal from the second special winning opening sensor 2601, a detection signal from the out opening sensor 3053, the first sub-out opening sensor 2403, and the second sub-out opening sensor 3054, a magnetic sensor 2404. 2602, 3055 detection signals, RAM clear switch operation signal (RAM clear signal), door frame opening switch 4a detection signal, body frame opening switch 4b detection signal, setting key switch 1311a signal, setting It is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 which informs that the payout control board 633 normally receives the signal from the switching button and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later.

Subsequent to step S104, the main control MPU performs an input terminal failure monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal failure monitoring process, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU that have been subjected to the vacant terminal process is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, information obtained in the switch input process of step S104 as to whether or not the logical state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is applied is LOW among the input terminals of various input ports. Based on. When the main control MPU determines that the logic state of the input terminal for which the empty terminal process has been performed is not LOW, it is divided into a notification display notifying that a defect has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU. The defective command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control RAM.

Subsequent to step S105, the main control MPU performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In the winning random number updating process, the above-described symbol random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number, which is updated in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 272, And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These big hit symbol initial value determination random numbers and small hit symbol initial value determination random numbers are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing, respectively, to further enhance randomness. .. On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to the winning determination (hit determination), each counter counts up only every time the winning random number updating process is performed. In addition, the above-mentioned normal symbol per determination random number, the normal symbol per determination initial value determination random number is also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number for determining the normal symbol is an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value. The range from the maximum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing the value by one each time this main control side timer interrupt process is performed. Ordinary symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up toward the maximum value, then from the minimum value normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up. Normally, when the counter has finished counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for random symbol determination, the random number update initial value determination random number is updated by this random number updating process. The normal symbol per determination determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is randomly selected from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the normal symbol per determination random number.

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not included in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 272. The winning random number updating process and the winning random number updating process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated. However, each time an interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven, and When the number of times the non-winning random number updating process of step S56 is executed by randomly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer of is generated, a big hit symbol initial value determining random number , And the small hit symbol initial value determining random number may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56.

Subsequent to step S106, the main control MPU performs a sphere counting process (step S107). In this sphere counting process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the detection signal from the outlet sensor 3053 is input to the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5. When the game ball collected by the provided outlet 2010 is detected by the outlet sensor 3053, the value 1 is added to the value of the collected ball counter that counts the number of balls of the game ball collected by the outlet 2010. First, the game balls collected by the first sub-out port 2011 provided in the game area 5a defined by the detection signal from the first sub-out port sensor 2403 are input (incremented). When the sub-out opening sensor 2403 detects, a value 1 is added (incremented) to the value of the collection ball counter that counts the number of balls of the game balls collected by the first sub-out opening 2011, and the calculation is performed. When the detection signal from the second sub-out opening sensor 3054 is input and the second sub-out opening sensor 3054 detects the game ball collected by the second sub-out opening 2012 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 Performs the operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the value of the collected ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected by the second sub-out port 2012. In other words, in the ball counting process, the out-mouth sensor 3053 detects the game ball collected by the out-mouth 2010, the first sub-out sensor 2403 detects the game ball collected by the first sub-out 2011, and When the second sub-out opening sensor 3054 detects the game ball collected by the second sub-out opening 2012, the value 3 is added to the value of the collected-ball counter. The main control MPU uses the value of the collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the count result (total number) of the number of gaming balls collected by the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012, and performs the main control. It is stored in the out-ball counting dedicated area in the specific area of the built-in RAM, and the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. Further, the main control MPU, when the value of the collected ball counter is divisible by 10, that is, the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012 reaches 10 balls. For each time, a sphere collection command to that effect is created and stored as transmission information in the output information storage area. Note that the main control MPU, when the value of the collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value 65535), and is further incremented by 1 to the value of the collected ball counter, the collected ball. The value of the counter overflows to a value of 0, and calculation is performed to add from this value of 0.

Subsequent to step S107, the main control MPU performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main pay serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the first big winning opening 2005, a command for creating a prize ball for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is 10 balls. Since it has reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to notify that effect, stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633. When the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 A command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

Further, in the prize ball control processing of step S108, when the input information is read from the input information storage area described above and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls based on the input information. In order to notify that fact, a main prize ball number information output command that is divided into other areas is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is obtained by reading the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and based on this input information, that is, the general winning opening 2001, the gate section 2003, Based on the game balls that have entered the various starting holes 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the first big winning hole 2005, and the like (hereinafter, referred to as "various winning holes provided in the game board 5"). Then, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is counted, and in the prize ball control processing of step S108, it is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. There is. In the prize ball control processing of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter. The input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on the input information, and the value indicating the added number is 10 When the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball has reached 10 balls, the main prize ball number information output command is created to inform that fact, and as the transmission information. The value is stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the number of exceeded balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM described above as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) divided into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, the information that notifies the payout control board 633 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as output information. Further, the main control MPU shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a command of 2 bytes (16 bits) (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, And frame state 2 command)), and is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Following step S110, the main control MPU performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent activity detection processing, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is confirmed. When it is determined that a fraudulent act due to radio wave irradiation (hereinafter, referred to as “radio wave irradiation goto”) is performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter is incremented by 1. The value of the radio wave goto counter is incremented every time it is determined that the radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process. When the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms which is the interrupt cycle in which the misconduct detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). The radio wave irradiation goto notification command divided into a notification display for notifying that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Further, in the fraudulent activity detection process of step S112, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signals from the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, and 3055 are input, the fraudulent activity using a magnet (hereinafter, "Magnet Goto") is performed, and the value of the magnet Goto counter is incremented by 1. The value of the magnet goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that the radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, is included in the game backup information, and is initialized when the RAM is cleared. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms which is the interrupt cycle in which the injustice detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). ), a magnet goto notification command divided into a notification display for notifying that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the magnet goto by such a mechanism, it is possible for a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall to find the magnet goto at an early stage. Is becoming

Further, in the fraudulent activity detection process of step S112, for example, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when not in the jackpot gaming state, detection from the first special winning opening sensor 2402 or the second special winning opening sensor 2601. When a signal is input (when a game ball enters the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006) or the like, the special winning opening abnormal winning occurs and is classified into an alarm display as an abnormal state. A winning anomaly display command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when a radio wave irradiation goto and/or a magnet goto is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value 1 as detection of a fraud, while the radio wave irradiation goto and magnet are detected. When the goto is not detected, the value of 0 is set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG, which indicates that the fraud has not been detected. The fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. Further, when the occurrence of an abnormal winning of the special winning opening is detected, the value 1 may be set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of the fraud.

Following step S112, the main control MPU performs a firing permission signal setting process (step S113). In this firing permission signal setting process, the logic of the firing permission signal that notifies the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the firing of the game ball B is permitted is set. Specifically, the main control MPU determines, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG described above, that the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is 0, that is, that the fraud has not been detected. Occasionally, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing permission logic and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above, while the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, fraud When it is determined that the firing permission signal is detected, the firing permission logic is set to the inverted firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. The main control MPU reads the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a is input to open the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. When the door frame opening switch 4a detects that the main frame opening switch 4a is opened, the main frame opening switch 4b detects that the main frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 by inputting a detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b. In this case, the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. The logic of the firing permission signal is, as an initial value (default), that the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process which is the main routine after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after power restoration) It is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the firing permission logic is set until the start.

Following step S113, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing (step S114). In this special design and special electric auditors product control processing, the latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is It is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the control MPU, and the acquired random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU) and the big hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match (big hit. Whether or not to generate a game state (called "special lottery")), or take out the value of the counter that updates the symbol random number, and is stored in advance in the main control ROM according to the big hit type or the small hit type. It is determined (whether the hit type is determined) whether or not any of the hit type determination values that match.

When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first starting mouth sensor 3052, various commands related to special figure 1 tuning effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second starting mouth sensor 2401. If it is due to the above, various commands related to special figure 2 tuning effect are created, stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above. Then, according to the variable display pattern of the determined special symbol, the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is turned on to turn on the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as big hit related commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command, big winning opening 1 closing display command, big A winning hole 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or, for example, driving to the first attacker solenoid 2418 to open/close the opening/closing member. When the number of times (round) the signal output is set and stored in the output information storage area as the output information or the first special winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two times, the function display unit 1400 is rounded. The output of the lighting signal to the two-round display lamp is set so as to light the two-round display lamp of the display unit, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the round is 15 times, the function display unit 1400 Set the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp so that the 15-round display lamp of the round display is turned on, store it in the output information storage area as output information, and turn on/off the occurrence of time saving in a predetermined color. The output of a lighting signal to the status display of the function display unit 1400 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Subsequent to step S114, the main control MPU performs normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the normal winning a prize winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening award process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on the result of this determination, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter for updating the random number for determining the normal symbol is extracted and the main control is incorporated as the normal winning award winning information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

The normal winning opening prize information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd partitions (4 partitions), and the normal winning opening is the 0th partition, the 1st partition, the 2nd partition, and the 3rd partition in this order. Winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th partition to the second partition of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening The winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this normal winning award winning information is set, the ordinary winning award winning information storage of the first section of the ordinary winning award winning information is stored in the 0th section of the ordinary winning award winning information storage, the second of the ordinary winning award winning information storage. The normal winning opening prize information of the section is stored in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the ordinary winning opening prize information of the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. The third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage that has been shifted becomes an empty area. For example, when the normal prize opening prize information is stored in the first to second sections of the normal prize opening prize information storage, the normal prize opening prize information in the first section of the normal prize opening prize information storage is the normal prize winning. In the 0th section of the ordinary winning award information storage, the ordinary winning award winning information of the second section of the ordinary winning award winning information storage is shifted to the first section of the award winning oral award information storing respectively, and the first winning award winning information storing section is stored. The second section and the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage are empty areas. Here, when the normal winning award winning information is stored in the first to third sections of the normal winning award winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning award winning information is set as a reserved ball, and the normal of the function display unit 1400 is normal. The output of the lighting signal of the normal hold indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal winning opening winning information so as to turn on the hold indicator, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Following the normal winning award winning process, the normal winning award winning information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number per ordinary symbol is determined from the read ordinary winning award winning information to perform the main control. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "ordinary lottery"). Whether or not the movable piece is opened/closed is determined based on the result of this determination (the result of the ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the movable piece is in the open operation state, and the game ball becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004, which is a game state advantageous to the player. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above as transmission information is stored. While storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400 is set to light the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variable display pattern of the normal pattern, and the output information Is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit determination coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, various commands related to the normal electric role effect are created and transmitted. The information is stored in the transmission information storage area as information, and the output of the drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2415 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as the output information. When the value of the random number for symbol hit determination does not match the normal symbol hit determination value prestored in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variable display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above. , Create various commands related to general figure synchronization effect, store them in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information, and turn on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to be stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. In this example, the winning probability of the normal lottery (probability of being a normal win) is 1/2.

Following step S116, the main control MPU performs a set value confirmation display process (step S117). In the setting value confirmation display process, a detailed description thereof will be given later, but for reading the input information from the input information storage area described above and detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the input information. The detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is in the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a rotates. Position key), the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the first ON operation by turning 60 degrees clockwise, and the setting key switch 1311a outputs a setting key ON signal. It is determined that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the frame 2 and that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the signal of the setting key ON, and thus the predetermined set value display permission condition is set. On the other hand, it is determined that the main frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b, and/or the setting key is turned on by the signal of the setting key ON. By determining that the switch 1311a has not been turned on, it is determined that the preset set value display permission condition is not satisfied. In the set value confirmation display process, when the set value display permission condition is satisfied, a lighting signal for displaying the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM on the set display 1310g. Output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when the set value display permission condition is satisfied, the processing ends and the routine returns.

Subsequent to step S117, the main control MPU performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control MPU, for example, when the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information, the main control MPU issues a main payout ACK signal. A movable piece for outputting to or outputting a drive signal to the first attacker solenoid 2418 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the first big winning opening 2005 when in the big hit game state, and opening and closing the second starting opening 2004. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2415 that performs the opening/closing operation of, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as an information output signal, a time saving information output signal, a starting mouth winning information output signal, etc. are output to the payout control board 633, or a firing permission logic or a firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic). The emission permission signal set to is output to the payout control board 633, and the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 is displayed. It outputs a display signal to the base monitor, and outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the transmission information is read from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data. This transmission information is classified into various commands classified in special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands classified in special figure 2 tuning effect related, and jackpot related, which are created by the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine. Various commands to be performed (for example, the special winning opening 1 corresponding to the special winning opening count command based on the detection signal from the first special winning opening sensor 2402 when the game ball that entered the first special winning opening 2005 is detected) (Count display command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as general figure synchronization performance related, various commands classified as ordinary electric role performance related, various commands classified as notification display, status display Various commands that are classified, various commands that are related to test, and various commands that are classified into other commands (for example, the main control board 1310 is a prize ball based on a game ball that has entered various prize holes provided on the game board 5). Whenever the number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is transmitted as a main prize ball number information to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. Main award sphere number information output command, etc.) and various commands classified into a specific history (for example, the number of game spheres collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 is 10). Every time it reaches, a ball collection command to notify that, a setting change command to notify that the setting value has been changed, and contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). ), an error display command for notifying the user, an ON operation command for a setting key for notifying a setting value stored in a setting value dedicated area, which will be described later, in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, etc.) are stored. One packet of the main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes various commands as main circumference serial data. As described above, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, as DC +5 V when a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs. The main circumference serial transmission port built in the main control MPU must at least transfer the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register as main circumference serial data. You can do it. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or when the power is restored and power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the power is transmitted at step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 272. In the reserved setting of the command, in order to notify that the power is restored, the power-on status command that is classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter Since a notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command is configured as the main serial data in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The information is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and then to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the status, mode, and sum value that compose the main control return destination command at power-on, and then the power-on main prize ball number information. The output determination counter notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read from the game backup information and set according to the various information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. There are also cases where various commands are stored. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on state command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command will be transmitted.

It should be noted that, when a ball collection command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the player that the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 reaches 10 balls, the periphery is The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the control board 1510 counts the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 for each received ball collection command, and is not shown. Updated with the ball collection information (counted value (that is, the total number of game balls collected at the out-port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC. Information associated with date and time) is updated. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is shut off after the business hours of the game hall have ended without receiving the ball collection command, as a result, the last counted value (that is, the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011). And ball collection information in which the total number of balls of the game balls collected at the second sub-out port 2012 and the updated date and time are associated with each other is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the start of the game hall business, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 operates the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball collection information is created again from the start date, and the ball collection information is stored and held as the ball collection history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). As the counted value stored and held as the sphere recovery information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on the day may be used, or from the value 0 (zero) on the day. Both the counted value and the total sum of the counted values so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT is cleared in step S122 by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU. This clears the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT. Then, the main control built-in WDT is restarted, so that the main control built-in WDT is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

As described above, the main control board 1310 backs up the above-mentioned backup for storing the game information based on the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off while the game is progressing. It can be completed by executing the process, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off as the destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 based on the game information for which the backup process is executed. When the power supply is turned on, the main control return destination command for instructing the drive state of the starting opening solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418 which are the electric drive sources by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to output. That is, the main control board 1310 uses the main control built-in RAM of step S34 in the same process shown in FIG. 271 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on of step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM when setting the work area, the power-on status command classified as power-on is transmitted to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery). A power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, main-cycle serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the status command, the mode, and the sum value that constitute the power-on status command, and then the main control return destination at power-on. The status, the mode, and the sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of composing the command, the status, the mode, and the sum value, and then the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on is composed. In this order, the information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery, the return destination of the progress of the game display area of the effect display device 1600. The effect can be displayed in. As a result, when a player is playing a momentary power outage or power outage and then recovers power, the game state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage should be promptly restored after power recovery. In addition to being able to perform, the destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 for notification, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed because he/she sees it. Therefore, by returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player is out of order.

Further, in the main control board inspecting step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the power-on process shown on the main control side, all the areas of the main control internal RAM must be cleared except for the specific area. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 272, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified as power-on. When the power is turned on, a power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. A state in which only three commands, a state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the main control board inspection process is performed in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes a power-on state command as main circumference serial data. It is sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value that make up the main control return destination command at power-on, and then the main prize ball number information output at power-on. The determination counter notification command is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, that is, the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, which is included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , A series code for identifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type indicating the model type, a copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (For example, if a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (ST Based on the game specification code for specifying (machine) etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[Setting change processing]
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 274 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When the set value is acquired, it may be read out or may be taken out. When the set value is taken out, the taken out set value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is to calculate the sum of various types of information stored in the RAM with built-in main control as numerical values. This is the same process as the calculation of.

Following step S202, the main control MPU stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control-side power-off processing (main-power-off) in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 272. It is determined whether or not the check sum value (sum value) matches (step S204). When determining in step S204 that the two match, the main control MPU determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 271, respectively. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG contains various types of information, a checksum value (sum value), and game backup information such as the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control side power-down processing, which will be described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it is stored and held in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main control side power-off process is not normally completed. To be done.

In the determination of step S204, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When it is (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main-control-side power-off process has not been normally terminated, it is determined whether the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). .. Here, the “normal range” is a value whose setting value can be changed. In the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value are set. Values up to 6 are preset. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the content of the main control internal RAM by advancing the flowchart to the determination of step S208, or when it is determined that the main control-side power-off processing has not been normally completed when the power is turned off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or untrustworthy). Therefore, in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU determines that the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM acquired in step S200 are in the normal range, that is, set value 1 to set value 6 It is determined whether or not any of the values is set, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S208 that the main control MPU does not fall within the normal range, the main control MPU sets the initial setting value 1 to the setting value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination in step S208, the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM acquired in step S200 is one of the setting values 1 to 6 which is the normal range. Although it is determined whether or not the value is the value, the main control MPU determines that the checksum value (sum value) does not match in the determination in step S204 without performing the determination in step S208. When it does, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), that is, the main control side power-off process is not normally terminated. In some cases, the process may proceed to step S210, and the initial setting value 1 may be set for the setting value acquired in step S200.

In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, determines that the main-control-side power-off process has been normally completed, or determines in step S208. When the MPU determines that it is within the normal range or following step S210, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Subsequent to step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). ..

Following step S214, the main control MPU determines whether or not the setting switch button has been operated (step S216). In this determination, the detection signal from the setting switch button is read, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the setting switch button is input. The main control MPU determines that the setting switch button is being operated when the detection signal from the setting switch button is being input, while the setting switch button is being operated when the detection signal from the setting switch button is not being input. Determine not.

When it is determined in step S216 that the setting switch button is operated, the main control MPU updates the setting value by adding (incrementing) 1 to the setting value (step S218). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM is fetched and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. The value 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set in.

Following step S218, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g to update the setting value updated for the setting display 1310g. Is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the setting switching button has not been operated, the main control MPU determines whether the decision key has been operated (step S222). ). In this determination, the main control MPU sets the setting key switch 1311a in the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder, and sets the setting key switch 1311a in the counterclockwise direction from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is ON. The key cylinder is rotated by 120 degrees (that is, the initial position which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). Setting key switch by turning 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position) and turning it off, and further turning 60 degrees counterclockwise) 1311a is turned on based on the enter key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the enter key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the enter key has been operated. When the enter key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the enter key is not operated.

In the determination of step S222, when the main control MPU determines that the enter key has not been operated, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S216 again and determines whether or not the setting switching button has been operated. In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the setting switching button is operated, the main control MPU performs the processing of steps S218 and S220 again, performs the determination of step S222, and does not operate the enter key. When it is determined that the setting switch button is operated until the determination key is operated and the setting switch button is operated, the setting value is incremented by 1 and updated every time the setting display button 1310g is operated. When the setting switch button is not operated, the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored before the determination key is operated in the determination of step S222, the set value updated immediately before the power failure or the momentary power failure occurs is the main control. Since it is not stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the internal RAM, it is discarded and the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the main control MPU stores the updated set value in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM (step S224). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM is fetched and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. Since the set value set in the above is updated, the updated set value is returned to the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM. After the processing of step S224 is completed, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored, the updated setting value when the Enter key is operated before the power failure or the momentary power failure is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Is stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of.

Following step S224, the main control MPU determines whether or not the setting key has been turned off (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and turns the setting key switch 1311a to the initial position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder (that is, the setting key). When the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to turn the switch 1311a back to the OFF position of the setting key cylinder, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Is performed based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, while the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input. Sometimes it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

When determining in step S226 that the setting key has not been operated to OFF, the main control MPU returns to the determination in step S226 again and repeats the determination in step S226 until the setting key is operated to OFF.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S226 that the setting key has been turned off, the main control MPU stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU sets a value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S232). As described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG stores the current setting value (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is in the first ON state) stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM. It is a flag indicating whether or not to permit setting change of the set value 1 to set value 6 at the time of operation, and when permitting to perform setting change of the set value A value of 1 is set, and a value of 0 is set when it is not permitted to change the setting value. In the process of step S232, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to the value 0, and thereafter, the setting change of the setting value is not permitted.

Subsequent to step S232, the main control MPU determines whether or not the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The “normal range” is the same as the one determined in step S208, and as described above, in the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value are set. Values up to 6 are preset. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU normally checks the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM in step S224 in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value. It is determined whether or not the value is one of the set values 1 to 6 which is the range, and when it is determined to be in the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

When it is determined in step S233 that the main control MPU is within the normal range, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S234), and subsequently creates a setting change command to set transmission information (step S236). Subsequently, a peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data is performed (step S238), and this routine is ended. The serial communication initial setting of step S234 is the same as the serial communication initial setting of step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 272, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmitting process of step S238 is the same as that of FIG. This is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 is performed before the serial communication initial setting in step S44. Although it is transmitted as peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510, this is prioritized before the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 272. This is to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed by a setting change command. Note that the setting change command is a command that conveys the changed setting value and the completion of setting value storage. Upon receiving the setting change command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 updates the set value history information (information that associates the set value with the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). To do.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, it performs error display processing (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. By this endless loop, the state in which the error display processing is finished is maintained, the game cannot be progressed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. In this error display process, a detailed description will be given later, but when it is determined that the contents of the main control internal RAM are abnormal, or when the main control side power-off process is not normally completed when the power is turned off. If the determination is made, it is determined that the contents stored in the RAM with built-in main control are abnormal (or untrustworthy), and an error display indicating that is displayed. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

[Set value confirmation display processing]
Next, the set value confirmation display process will be described. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU determines whether the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value 0, as shown in FIG. 275 (step S350). The confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the set value stored in the dedicated set value area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM. When the set value is confirmed and displayed, the value is 1, When the value is not displayed for confirmation, the value is set to 0.

In the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has the value 0, that is, when the set value is not confirmed and displayed, the main control MPU determines whether the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on. It is determined (step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, the main frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is detected. The signal and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder moves clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by setting the setting key switch 1311a by rotating the setting key switch 1311a by rotating the setting key switch 1311a by the first turning ON operation by 60 degrees. Is determined to be open, and the setting key switch 1311a is determined to be ON by the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the preset set value display permission condition is satisfied. On the other hand, it is determined by the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and/or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. Since it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied.

In the determination of step S352, when the main control MPU determines that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU directly terminates this routine, while the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the set value is to be confirmed and displayed, the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S354), and then the current installation value is acquired (step S356). Here, the main control MPU acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU determines whether or not the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The “normal range” is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. 178. As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, and the setting value 2 are set. The values up to the value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are preset. In the determination of step S357, the main control MPU, in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value, the main control MPU acquires the set value acquired in step S356 (that is, the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM). (Setting value stored in) is any one of setting value 1 to setting value 6 within the normal range, and when it is determined to be within the normal range, the setting value is used as it is. To do.

When it is determined in step S357 that the main control MPU is within the normal range, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display device 1310g to output the setting display device 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310 g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU creates an ON operation command for the setting key and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, and sets the ON operation command for the setting key (step S360). ), and ends this routine. The ON operation command of the setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The setting key ON operation command indicates that the set value confirmation display processing of this routine has been started (that is, the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM is confirmed). It is a command to convey.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ON operation history information of the setting key (the set value is confirmed and stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is confirmed. Information that associates the purpose and the date and time) is updated.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the above-mentioned ball collection history information, set value history information, error display history information, and setting key ON operation history information. The predetermined specific history information display permission condition that the specific history information such as is permitted to be displayed is satisfied. In the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510, a person who confirms the specific history information in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied is operated by the person who rotates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. By performing the above, the control is performed to switch from the image displayed so far to the specific history information display image for selectively displaying the specific history information and display it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not value 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting value is being confirmed and displayed, the main control MPU performs the setting key OFF operation. It is determined whether or not (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU reads the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning off the setting key 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a performs an OFF signal. When the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. On the other hand, when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the setting key is not turned OFF.

In the determination of step S362, when the main control MPU determines that the setting key has not been operated to OFF, it ends this routine as it is, whereas when it determines that the setting key has been operated to OFF, it does not display the set value for confirmation. A value 0 is set to the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped. Then, the acquired setting value is hidden on the setting display 1310g (step S366), and subsequently, an OFF operation command for the setting key is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. The OFF operation command of the setting key is set (step S368), and this routine is finished. This setting key OFF operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The setting key OFF operation command indicates that the set value confirmation display processing of this routine has been completed (that is, the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM has been confirmed) Is a command to convey.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the OFF operation command for the setting key, the predetermined specific history information display permission condition described above is not established. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 is performing control to display the above-described specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. Up to the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is switched back to the original control.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S357 that the main control MPU is not within the normal range, the main control MPU sets the interrupt non-permission (step S370). By this setting, the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 273, which is repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

Following step S370, the main control MPU performs an error display process (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop that continues to clear the main control built-in WDT (step S374). This infinite loop causes the main control built-in WDT to continue to be cleared, but this cannot be stopped once the main control built-in WDT is started. Therefore, by continuing to clear the main control built-in WDT, By setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the control MPU, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is restarted, so that the main control built-in WDT performs the main control. The MPU is not forced to reset. Also, due to this endless loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, the game cannot be progressed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and the power is turned on again. In this error display process, a detailed description will be given later, but when it is determined that the contents of the main control internal RAM are abnormal, or when the main control side power-off process is not normally completed when the power is turned off. If the determination is made, it is determined that the contents stored in the RAM with built-in main control are abnormal (or untrustworthy), and an error display indicating that is displayed. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

[Error display processing]
Next, the error display process will be described. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 271, and is performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 271 (FIG. 274). The process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 275) is the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 275.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 276 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal notifies the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 of launching the game ball B, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, the launch is started. While the logic is set to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the firing permission logic, it can be transmitted that the firing is stopped (non-permission). ..

The error display processing of this routine is one of the processing performed in step S33 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 271 or the processing performed in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. (Specifically, when started as the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 274), the main control MPU causes the interrupt of step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 272. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 273 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the same process cannot be performed. Since the launch permission signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with the reset function, the reset function is provided when the power is restored. The main control output circuit is reset and its logic is the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) which is the inversion of the firing permission logic.

Therefore, the error display processing which is the present routine of the processing performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 271 or the processing performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 274), the main control MPU, in step S400, recovers the power and then displays an error message that is the present routine. Even after the processing is started, in order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being launched, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) and its predetermined output port. Output to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with the reset function.

When the error display process of this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 of the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 275, the main control MPU causes the main control MPU of step S357 of the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 275. In the judgment, it is judged that there is an abnormality in the content of the main control built-in RAM. Although the main control MPU has already made the interrupt permission setting of step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 272, it is already shown in FIG. 275 before the error display process of this routine is started. Since the interrupt non-permission setting is made in step S370 in the set value confirmation display process, when the error display process which is the present routine is completed, as described above, the infinite loop is entered. Therefore, the main control side shown in FIG. The timer interrupt process cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the process cannot be performed.

Therefore, when the error display process which is the present routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 275, the main control MPU causes an abnormality in the contents of the main control internal RAM in step S400. In order to surely prevent the game ball B from being fired in a certain state, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) and reset from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. It outputs to the firing control part 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g is output to the setting display 1310g to display an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all of the various display devices of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and subsequently sets in step S406. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting transmission information (error display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data is performed (step S410), and this routine ends.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 274 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 272. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S410 includes the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S238 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 274 and the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 273. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120. The error display process of this routine is performed in step S33 of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 271, and is performed in step S37 of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 271 (FIG. 274). When the processing is started and ended as the processing performed in step S240 in the setting change processing illustrated in FIG. 270) and the processing performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display processing illustrated in FIG. 275, as described above, the endless loop is entered. By this endless loop, the state in which the error display process is finished is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, serial communication initialization is performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410 is used as the peripheral control board as the peripheral data. 1510.

The error display command is a command for notifying that the contents stored in the main control RAM are abnormal (or untrustworthy). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the error display history information stored in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is stored (information relating the error display command and the received date and time). ) Is updated.

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, a blue background image “RAM error has occurred. Please call a staff member” in the display area of the effect display device 1600. While performing the control to display the message image of white characters, the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." is adjusted by rotating the volume control switch on the peripheral control board 1510. The volume is controlled not to depend on the volume, but forcibly set to the maximum volume, and control is performed through various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, body frame speaker 622, etc.). The process of issuing the RAM error notification by the error display command has the highest priority, and when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command after receiving the command to notify another error, the RAM is notified. Error notification is given the highest priority.

[Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 277 to 280. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit power-on process, FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 277, and FIG. 279 is a payout control unit following FIG. 278. FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described.

[Processing at power-on of payout controller]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, the payout control unit power-on process is performed as shown in FIGS. 277 to 279. .. When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of interrupts of the payout control MPU. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

Subsequent to step S500, the payout control MPU performs input/output setting (input/output setting of I/O) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Subsequent to step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. .. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time when the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, the power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 of step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 has been operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and is determined not to instruct to perform the RAM clear when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW while it is determined that the RAM clear switch is not operated, the RAM clear is determined to be an instruction to perform the RAM clear. It is determined that the switch is operated.

When it is determined in step S512 that the payout control MPU is operating the RAM clear switch, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU is in a state capable of executing the RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) incorporated in the payout control MPU for a predetermined time after the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S512, when it is determined that the RAM clear switch is not operated, the payout control MPU sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (e.g., prize ball information storage area). The number of prize balls stock PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area, and the logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. PRDY signal output setting information, etc.) indicating whether or not the payout information relating to the payout is to be erased, and is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU makes a setting for permitting access to the payout control internal RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read.

Subsequent to step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when exiting the subroutine and returning to this routine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the stack pointer is set to the initial address, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from the initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

Subsequent to step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not erased (step S524). This checksum regards the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total thereof.

Subsequent to step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power shutdown process (power shutdown) described later. (Step S526). When it is determined in step S526 that the payout control MPUs match each other, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored and held in the payout control internal RAM in the power-off process of the payout control unit described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is normally completed, and is set to a value 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed.

In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has normally ended, the payout control MPU determines that the power is restored and the payout control internal RAM is present. The work area of is set (step S530). With this setting, the value 0 is set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, and the power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the payout control built-in ROM) built in the payout control MPU, and this power recovery time is read. Information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Thereby, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, a prize stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the sphere stock number PBS, the actual sphere count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the like, Information used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time and the like stored in the time management information storage area. It should be noted that the term "power recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned off and the state in which the power is turned on, but also the state in which the power is restored after a power failure or an instantaneous power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined to delete the payout information, or in the determination of step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, when the payout control flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has not been normally terminated, the entire area of the payout control internal RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets a work area of the payout control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Subsequent to step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set at step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting the value A, the value B and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in order.

Subsequent to step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S540). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage becomes the power failure warning voltage or less, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. To be done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

When it is determined in step S540 that the power outage notification signal is not input, the payout control MPU determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and has a value 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Is set.

In the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU returns to step S540 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, and the payout control MPU inputs the power failure notice signal. It is determined whether it has been done.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 2 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has the value 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B set after the value A set in step S539 is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Subsequent to step S546, the payout control MPU performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control internal RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the payout control MPU based on this various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command or self-check command) are normally received, and drive control of the payout motor 584 is performed. Various information such as driving information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display are stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Alternatively, the payout motor 584 outputs the number of balls actually paid out of the game balls to the external terminal board 558 as an award ball number information output signal (in the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually pays out the 10 game balls). Each time it is output, the prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558.

Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output the prize ball number information is provided, and the prize ball number information output determination counter is actually the payout motor 584. The number of game balls paid out to is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. By a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring, the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is updated.

In a process (program) not shown for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, a prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM is used. Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of step S550 described later, the value is added with the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and stored and updated.

In the port output processing of step S548, the value of the award ball number information output determination counter is read from the award ball information storage area, and when the value of the read award ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10, ( That is, when the payout motor 584 has actually paid out the number of game balls of 10 balls, an award ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter.), and a display signal is output to the error LED display.

Subsequent to step S548, the payout control MPU performs a port input process (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. For example, a RAM clear switch operation signal (RAM clear signal), a blade rotation detection sensor 590 detection signal, a payout detection sensor 591 detection signal, a full tank detection sensor 154 detection signal, a CR unit BRQ signal, The BRDY signal, the CR connection signal, and the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 indicating that the various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later have been normally received by the main control board 1310 are read and input as input information. Store in the information storage area.

Subsequent to step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer updating process, when it is determined whether or not a ball gami state is caused by the payout blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the ball gami determination time set as the determination condition, The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the lower bowl 202 is full with the game balls stored. When determining whether or not the number of balls of the game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the full tank determination time and the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574. In addition to performing time management such as the out-of-ball determination time set as the determination condition, the number of balls in the game ball received and paid out by the ball storage portion 589b of the payout blade 589, and the payout detection sensor 591 actually. When determining whether to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not paying out game balls that are inconsistent due to mismatch with the number of balls detected in Performs time management of the inconsistency counter reset determination time set as the condition. For example, when the ball-game determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, so the ball-game determination time is subtracted by 2 ms each time this timer updating process is performed, and the subtraction result is the value. When it becomes 0, the ball-game determination time is accurately measured. The various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

Subsequent to step S552, the payout control MPU performs a CR communication process (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, it is checked whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in various information storage areas, as described above. Etc. (eg, prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of PRDY signal output setting information in which the signal logic state is set.

By this processing, for example, even after an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure. Thereby, even when the payout device 580 is executing the payout operation of the game balls, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power restoration. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication processing, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit, while paying out the game balls to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202, the power is stopped instantaneously or the power is cut off, and the CR unit is discharged. Even if it is not possible to continue paying out game balls, the exchange of various signals with the game ball is stopped, and when the power is restored, the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. The value is restored to the value of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, or the like, which is stored as the payout backup information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, so that the instantaneous value is restored. Immediately before the stop or power failure, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be continued after the power is restored, and the game balls can be continuously paid out. ing.

As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or stop even when the power is restored or stopped. Therefore, various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit do not change due to the influence of the momentary power failure or stop. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530. When the PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal which informs that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, for example, the PRDY signal is payout controlled. Output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU to the CR unit. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area, which is included in the payout backup information and is stored in the payout control built-in RAM, is included in the payout backup information in, for example, the retry operation monitoring process that is performed as one process of the main operation setting process. It is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH based on the above, and when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal operation. That is, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1, and the payout ball game operation determination setting process is performed. As the setting of the error status output to the CR unit, for example, when the communication with the CR unit is not made, the PRDY signal is output as the logic state (LOW) of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. The setting information is set and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logical state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt from the power recovery, and the PRDY signal is output to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. To the CR unit. Thus, for example, immediately before the momentary power failure, when the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the state is restored at the time of power restoration, so it is extremely early after power restoration. At the stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, and the payout device 580 is provided to the CR unit. It is possible to inform that the payout operation of the game ball by is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the useless ball rental request signal BRDY from being output from the CR unit at an extremely early stage after power recovery.

In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control internal RAM, and based on the CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, the pachinko machine. 1 is turned on, and when the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected to each other, in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible, the PRDY When the logic state of the signal is set to HI and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, while the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, and the payout control MPU. To the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control internal RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored in the payout control board 633. A CR connection signal indicating whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Subsequent to step S554, the payout control MPU performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing (step S556). In the full tank and out-of-ball check processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the game ball in which the lower plate 202 described above is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether the tank is full or not, and the number of balls of the game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 described above is determined by the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 to be a predetermined number or more. Or not. For example, the determination whether or not the lower plate 202 is full with the stored game balls is performed by using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms from the full tank detection sensor 154 in the current full tank and out-of-ball check processing. The detection signal is ON, and when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is switched from OFF to ON. When the transition is made, the timing of the full tank determination time described above is started in the timer updating process of step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the full tank determination time comes, is the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing? Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the lower bowl 202 is full in the stored game balls is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area. To do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the tank table 202 stores the full tank information indicating that the game ball stored in the lower plate 202 is not full in the state information storage area.

To determine whether or not the number of balls of the game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the timer interruption period of 2 ms is used to check whether the tank is full or out of ball this time. When the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is ON, and when the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection signal from the out-of-sphere detection sensor 574 is When the state is changed from OFF to ON, the time counting of the out-of-ball determination time described above is started in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the out-of-ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the out-of-ball determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is ON, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and the ball is cut off. While the information is stored in the status information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not more than the predetermined number. The out-of-ball information that indicates that is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command receiving process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the various commands are not normally received, the connection abnormality is transmitted to inform that the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is abnormal (various command signals are abnormal). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

Subsequent to step S560, the payout control MPU performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, ball rental, ball removal and ball gamming are performed, retry operations are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls stock) is monitored. ..

Subsequent to step S562, the payout control MPU performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various information is read from the above-mentioned status information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as LED display information. To do. For example, when the above-mentioned ball cutout information is read out from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on the ball cutout information, it corresponds. Display data (display value 1 (numeral "1") in this embodiment) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission processing, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) that are classified into state display are created based on this various information. Then, the data is transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of balls of the game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or more than the predetermined number, the frame state 1 A command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is set to be cleared.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL and determines in step S540 whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and this power failure warning is notified. If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, step S544. In step S546, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, port output processing is performed in step S548, port input processing is performed in step S550, and step S552 In step S554, the CR communication process is performed, in step S556, the full tank and out-of-ball check process is performed, in step S558, the command reception process is performed, in step S560, the command analysis process is performed, and in step S562. The main operation setting process is performed, the LED display data creation process is performed in step S564, the command transmission process is performed in step S566, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. To do. The process of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main process".

The processing content of the payout control unit main processing varies depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU varies. Therefore, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal indicating that the various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received in the port output processing of step S548. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so that the other processing that fluctuates can be sufficiently performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the payout control MPU has received the power outage notice signal, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt prohibition (step S570). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the above-mentioned payout information is protected.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game balls is stopped.

Subsequent to step S574, the payout control MPU sets the watchdog timer for clearing (step S576). The clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

Subsequent to step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information of the work area of the payout control internal RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG value calculated in step S524, is calculated as a numerical value, and the total is calculated.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets a value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Subsequent to step S580, the payout control MPU sets a prohibition setting for access to the payout control internal RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and thereafter the payout control unit power-on process is performed again. The processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, and the payout control unit power-on processing is performed by subsequent power restoration.

In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to an illegal act.

[Payout controller timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. The payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 277 to 279.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to disabled and switches (saves) the register, as shown in FIG. 280 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register will not be overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main processing.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms. Each is set.

Subsequent to step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout controller, the value of the auxiliary register is prevented from being overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing.

Subsequent to step S594, the payout control MPU sets interruption permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 281 to 285. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral controller power-on process, FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral controller V blank interrupt process, and FIG. 283 is an example of the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 285 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure advance signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described, and then the peripheral controller V blank interrupt process, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral controller power failure notice signal interrupt process. .. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure advance notice signal interrupt process is set to the highest priority as the interrupt process, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 has the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, and the like integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[Peripheral controller power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral controller power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an initialization process (step S1000). In this initialization processing, processing for initializing the peripheral control IC itself, hot start/cold start determination processing, processing for setting a wait timer after reset, processing for transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC is extremely short. Can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process to be described later, a command related to game effect control output from the main control board 1310. Various commands such as commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the like can be received.

Subsequent to step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after the current time information acquisition process is performed so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later. Is set to 0 when not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG receives a V blank signal from the VDP of the peripheral control IC, which indicates that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be received. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later and is executed as a result of this. In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG and then outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the CPU returns to step S1006 again and determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. It is repeatedly determined whether or not. By repeating such a determination, a standby state is entered until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Also, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so as not to reset the CPU of the peripheral control IC after determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1. ing.

In the determination of step S1006, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC has a value of 1 for the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is to be executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG. The value 1 is set (step S1008). The steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Subsequent to step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. Also, the value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the pressure detection provided in the effect operation unit 300 in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. The rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 based on the detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382 (hereinafter, referred to as “various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300”) and Various information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and pressing operation. Based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC in which the operation history information of the unit 303 is set), the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence or absence of an operation of the pressing operation unit 303 are monitored, and the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation Whether or not to reflect the operation state of the operation unit 303 in the game effect is appropriately determined. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the effect operation unit information acquisition processing, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is adjusted according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the generation schedule data. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness is reflected in real time, and the effect proceeds with the adjusted volume and the brightness.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light, based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value, Are set respectively. While the production is in progress, a lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to perform the first operation. When one brightness specification value ranging from the brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value which is the maximum brightness is set, the above-mentioned floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to have the set brightness specification value. The key information can be updated.

Here, the specified brightness value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value that compose the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the brightness specification value, one brightness specification value may be set in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (extinction) to the 31st brightness specification value that is the maximum brightness. It is a possible value, and a normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance in correspondence with the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value. The player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set the first brightness specified value to the maximum brightness of the 31st brightness. It is possible to set one luminance specified value up to the specified value.

For example, when a player (or a clerk such as a clerk in a game hall) rotationally operates the rotary operation unit 302 in a clockwise direction, the current brightness is temporarily set to the minimum brightness (light out), and the 0th (zero) brightness is designated. When the brightness is set to the first brightness specified value which is the next highest brightness level, the predetermined mathematical expression (for example, linear equation) is used from the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value which is the maximum brightness. The brightness of the LED used as the indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as the direct light are changed to be higher along a tone curve or a tone curve like a spline curve, while the rotation operation unit 302 is reversed. When rotating clockwise, and when the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, linearly) from the 31st brightness specified value which is the maximum brightness to the 1st brightness specified value. Along with a different tone curve or a tone curve like a spline curve, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed so as to be lowered. When a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) rotationally operates the rotation operation unit 302 to select a desired brightness and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is prepared in advance that the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) can set the brightness while the production is in progress. At this time, the player (or the clerk in the game hall) Staff member) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. Further, when a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the production of the effect, the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator showing the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually show as an image what the desired brightness of the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) is. You can do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th brightness designation value is set as an initial value (default).

The normal pallet value is set by the brightness information of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side or the door frame side, which are directly illuminated with light, as the gradation information described above. is there. As for the normal pallet value, one of 17 steps is selected from the minimum pallet value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum pallet value (100%), which is the maximum value, in steps of 5%. In a range of 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which are specified values, a palette value corresponding to one brightness specification is a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve). , Or a tone curve like a spline curve).

The minimum pallet value (20%) is the maximum pallet value corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which are the above-mentioned luminance designation values. It is a value of 20% with respect to (100%), and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) written in parentheses is the 0th (zero) luminance specified value which is the above-mentioned luminance specified value. It is a value for the maximum pallet value (100%) corresponding to one brightness designation in the range of 32 steps up to the 31st brightness designation value.

In the present embodiment, as the normal pallet value, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance for various decorative boards provided on the game board side that is irradiated as direct light and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. Of the various decorative boards which are set as the above-mentioned gradation information and which are provided as direct light on the game board side, a palette is provided for a specific decorative board (LED which is felt dazzling by the player) not shown. A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special pallet value is set as the gradation information, which is the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. The special pallet value is different from the normal pallet value in only one step, and is one of the 32 step ranges from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value which are the above-mentioned brightness specified values. The palette value corresponding to the brightness designation is set as the above-mentioned gradation information according to a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as the direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is set using the special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as the direct light. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits the indirect light for the first brightness specification value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (off). The lowest possible brightness is set to a value substantially equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value. Among them, the palette value corresponding to one luminance designated value is set according to a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

As described above, in the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the LED used as the indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the designated brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. The brightness of the LED used as direct light when the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to set the brightness of the While being set according to the normal pallet value corresponding to the designated value, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. The value is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the brightness designation value by the operation of 303. As a result, when the player operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to set the brightness of the LED used as the direct light to be dazzling and to reduce the brightness, the brightness is changed to the direct light. Set the brightness of the LED to be used to the minimum brightness (that is, the first brightness specification value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (light off)) Then, the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is also set to the smallest brightness (that is, the first brightness specification value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (light off)). Also, since the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is set to a value substantially equal to the eighteenth brightness designation value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), The minimum brightness that allows the light guide plate to visually recognize the state of emitting light by indirect light is set.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emitting mode individually adjusts the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side with respect to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if you do not set, set the light emission mode according to the flow of production, and the flow of production by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side or various decorative boards provided on the door frame side Then, the normal pallet value is set to a small pallet value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker luminance can produce more effect), and By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) for the decorative substrate, it is possible to extremely easily change the balance of the entire light emitting mode. That is, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness designation value to the 31st brightness. Even if one brightness specified value up to the brightness specified value is set, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the one brightness specified value is set for a specific decorative substrate. Since the maximum pallet value (100%) corresponding to one specified brightness value is set for each of the other decorative substrates, the relationship of the light emitting modes set (bright or dark) is set. It is possible to adjust the brightness extremely easily without breaking the above relationship.

Further, although the indirect light from the light guide plate is difficult to adjust the brightness as compared with the direct light, a special pallet value different from the normal pallet value (that is, independent of the normal pallet value) is used for the LED used as the indirect light. The brightness can be set by. As a result, the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is managed by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as the direct light is normally managed by the palette value. And the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted respectively.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads the image data from the SDRAM based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and generates one screen on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC. The drawing data for one minute (one frame) is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeds the VDP drawing capability of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. This makes it possible to prevent the processing time from being delayed, but although so-called frame drop occurs, the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame are generated by the sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to the production of effect sounds such as music and sound effects that are matched with various effects from various speakers (hereinafter, referred to as “various speakers”) such as the speaker 622.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and outputs it to various speakers from the set output channel in the sound data creation process described later. .. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects tailored to various effects are played from various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which of the screen data from the first screen data to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC among the time-sequentially arranged screen data forming the screen generation schedule data To update the pointer.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is used to instruct which light emission data from the first light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data is to be output. Update.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the sound command data for instructing the sound data of the effect sound such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in time series to configure the sound generation schedule data, The pointer is updated in order to instruct which sound command data is output from the head sound command data to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and the solenoids arranged in time series which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, the number of the drive data from the head drive data to the output target is set. Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which form the electric drive source schedule data, is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt, which is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive sources such as the motor and solenoid are driven in accordance with the drive data designated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time the own processing is executed. In other words, the drive data designated by the pointer updated in the motor/solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if the other drive data is instructed from the drive data to be instructed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data originally instructed in the scheduler update process.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in peripheral control command reception interrupt processing, which will be described later, and the received various commands are analyzed and used for various effect settings. A random number (for example, a random number used for an effect related to hold prefetching) is updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In this received command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyze the various commands that have been performed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, and the like from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands. (Extracted) Set in RAM of peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the above-mentioned brightness specified value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. And, respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) the light emission mode generation schedule data from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs the lamp pallet setting process. By executing, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to reach the maximum brightness from the above-described first brightness designation value. When one brightness specified value up to the 31st brightness specified value is set, the gradation information described above may be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to be the set brightness specified value. You can do it.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, the start mouth winning command for instructing the start of the start mouth winning effect, the normal pattern A normal pattern storage command for identifying the number of holdings (0 to 4), a variation pattern for instructing the start of a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative symbol in the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of a special symbol. Command, a symbol storage command that is output when the number of starting pending changes is changed, and it is analyzed whether or not it is a special winning opening 1 count display command that is output each time a game ball is received in the first special winning opening 2005, and now, Recognize which gaming state you are in.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the received command analysis process, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. It analyzes various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands classified as special figure 2 tuning effect related, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, Fig. Various commands related to tuning performance, various commands related to normal electric role performance, various commands classified to notification display, various commands classified to status display, various commands classified to test, and There are various other commands. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to a notice or the like based on the received command, and based on the lottery result, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical The drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

In the peripheral control ROM, various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511 and the peripheral control unit 1511, various data, various control data, and various schedule data are stored in advance. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, and sounds for generating effect sounds such as music and sound effects. There are generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and the like. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by time-series arrangement of light emission mode data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels of the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC and a plurality of tracks of the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC. , And a track number for instructing which track the sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 includes various commands classified into notification display, an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order from the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the other abnormalities are automatically notified. It is supposed to do. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored simultaneously without losing the information that one abnormality has occurred after another abnormality has occurred and before the abnormality has been resolved. You can

Subsequent to step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update processing, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, is updated, and is the calendar information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on this updated time information. The date is updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer is selected from the peripheral control ROM among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data. Read out (extracted) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads out image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and draws (displays) on the effect display device 1600. Drawing data for one minute (one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the sound command data pointed to by the pointer is selected from among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates the sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , Set the output channel to use according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, every time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is determined based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. Has been identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the sound volume corresponds to the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the output set in this sound data creation process. Outputs sound data from each channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects tailored to various effects can be played from various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is changed by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value to obtain a value of 0 to 0. The value is converted to a value of 1023 in 1024 steps. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 toward the board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 are controlled. Music and sound effects come to play from. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch. It is like this.

It should be noted that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC have a sound effect such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included.

Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-described substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the rotation of the volume adjustment switch. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display. For a certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the vessel (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) (in this example, the peripheral control unit) 0.5 seconds have elapsed after receiving the variation pattern command and after the variation display of the decorative pattern has started, or 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the decorative display was confirmed and displayed after the stop display command was received by the peripheral control unit. Except the above), it can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), Special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) in the fixed period when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (in this example the surroundings 0.5 seconds after the variation pattern command is received by the control unit and 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the variation display of the decorative pattern is started, or 0.5 seconds after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed. (Until the second elapses), the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation processing is operated by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the push operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. The voltage is converted into seven levels of volume 0 to 6, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is used to operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by setting the board volume by adding or subtracting the predetermined value accordingly.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC includes a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, it is amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low tone of the main body frame 4, and the amplified effect sound is serialized. And output as audio data.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the top central speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side. The volume that flows from the top-side speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. The volume control switch, which is set as a sub-volume value for adjusting, is combined with the adjusted board volume, and the combined volume of the effect sound is actually the center of the top of the door frame 3 side. The master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4 is amplified, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data, which is used as a notification sound. On the other hand, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch set as the sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used. The total volume of the notification sound is synthesized without depending on the above, and the synthesized volume of the notification sound is actually used for the lower central body of the main frame 4 and the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side. It is amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the frame speaker 622, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, when the effect sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4, a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a pachinko machine is generated. To briefly explain the control of sending the alarm sound to notify the clerk of the hall of the cheating against 1, the first step is to forcibly set the sub-volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated to mute, and the effect sound The sound data of the built-in track, the sub-volume value set to mute it, the sound data of the track that contains the notification sound, and the sub-volume value that sets the volume of the notification sound to the maximum volume are synthesized. The volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually the volume that flows from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4. To the master volume value, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. That is, in reality, only the maximum volume notification sound flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, it does not flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4, but the effect sound is the above-mentioned. The progress is made according to the generated sound generation schedule data.

In the present embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 only for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After this predetermined period of time, the volume of the effect sound that has been proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data that has been compulsorily set to mute up to the sub-volume that is adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch The volume value is set again (at this time, when the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the sub-value of the adjusted effect sound is adjusted. (Set to the volume value), and the sound comes from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4.

In this way, when the effect sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4, the malfunction or pachinko machine of the pachinko machine 1 is generated. When a notification sound is played to notify a clerk of the hall of an illegal act on the machine 1, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is emitted from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame. Although it is played from the low-frequency main body frame speaker 622 of FIG. 4, the muffled effect sound progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, so that the notification sound has passed the predetermined period and the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side. When the 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4 stop flowing, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the place where the notification sound started to flow, but the notification sound starts to flow for a predetermined period. The flow starts again from the point where it progressed according to the sound generation schedule data until the point of time when it passed.

In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the peripheral volume by the program from the mute to the maximum volume. The sound source of the IC can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, the sound produced by various speakers such as music and sound effects is reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 does. When a malfunction occurs or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the staff member such as the clerk in the game hall from easily becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the cheating of the player by the notification sound.

Subsequent to step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up in the regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Copy to the regular processing backup area and back up.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Subsequent to step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 to the regular processing in-progress flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit regular processing (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is set to the value 0 for initialization, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1, steps S1008 to step S1008-step The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. In this way, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processes of steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

In this peripheral control unit steady process, first, in step S1008, it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, and the value is set to 1 in the steady process flag SP-FLG. .., and step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, when the value 0 is set in the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing, the processing is completed. Become. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be received is transmitted from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later and is executed in response to the input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to about 30 fps per second as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is about 33. It is 0.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be received is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 282 (step S1045). As described above, the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control steady processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control power-on processing of FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, the CPU does not change the state. Exit the routine. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC detects the V blank signal detection flag VB. -The value 1 is set to FLG (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, and the peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady process is not executed.

In the present embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. When it is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process currently being executed is performed as the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the peripheral control unit steady process is started from the beginning by forcibly canceling the process midway, for the purpose of preventing this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) of FIG. 281. 281 is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is the present routine, by setting the value 1 to the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG, and the peripheral control of FIG. The peripheral control unit, which is the routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed by setting the value 0 in the steady process flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process). By notifying the V blank signal interrupt process, whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady process. It is determined whether or not the execution has been completed. In other words, this is a measure in the case where the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, and so-called processing is dropped.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady process this time, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, it is determined in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. Then, a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time, which has been omitted, is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller power-on process (peripheral controller steady process) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but when there is the peripheral control unit steady process of this time that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. Instead, it is only executed 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is dropped, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is consistent. It doesn't collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is omitted, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

[Peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 281, will be described. .. When the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 283 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to about 30 fps per second as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is about 33. It is 0.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second,..., And the 32 1 ms timer interrupts sequentially. Will occur.

In the determination of step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. When the determination is made, this routine is finished as it is. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has the peripheral control unit V as the priority order of the interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first generation of the 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1100 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, it adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 281. This means that the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor/solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that form the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Drives an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid according to the drive data to be updated, updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in time series, and updates the pointer every time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed. To do. Thereby, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5 or the like) ) Is driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Subsequent to step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a movable body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors included in the various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input, so that history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, original Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC, based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the original position (standby position) of various movable bodies provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5. The moving position is grasped by setting or acquiring the moving position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input to thereby obtain history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, the rotation operation unit. Rotation (rotation direction) history information of 302, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. From the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence/absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the volume of effect sound output from the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. Can be adjusted, and the brightness of various LEDs mounted on a plurality of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 can be adjusted.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110), and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up in the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are stored in the SDRAM. Backup is performed by copying to the provided backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set in different areas, and the SDRAM is The 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the above and the regular processing backup area provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 are executed as the effect progresses within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 281, various processes related to the effects of step S1014 to step S1032 are executed as the effect progresses within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will occur. After the start of the 1ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the occurrence of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is newly generated by the 1ms timer interrupt process. The 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is output even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, It is possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[Peripheral control command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as a trigger to send the main peripheral serial data to the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC for 1 byte (8 bits). ) Information is loaded into the receiving buffer, and when this loading is completed, an interrupt is triggered by this, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is allocated as the 1st byte, the mode is allocated as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 284 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

In the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs 1-byte (8-bit) information when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that it is within the receivable period, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, Step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is fetched from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, is fetched from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data is set. The value is 2 when taken out from the receive buffer, and the value 3 is taken out when the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data is taken out from the receive buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status, which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-cycle serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-cycle serial data, are sequentially output from the reception buffer. It is determined whether it has been taken out.

In the determination of step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is not 3, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the mode is the second byte of the main cycle serial data after the status of the first byte of the main cycle serial data. If it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, is not sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the period in which the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3, the CPU of the peripheral control IC detects the second byte of the main-cycle serial data after the status which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data. When it is determined that the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data in a certain mode is sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). This calculation regards the status, which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main-cycle serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, as numerical values, and sums them (sum value ) Is calculated.

Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data of the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island facility in the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge causes noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a vulnerable environment.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are regarded as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the main-circulation serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise and is changed to different main-circulation serial data. Can be judged.

In the determination of step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC matches the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202, with the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined that the received status is allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), and ends this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that 1 byte (8 bits) of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the period over which the information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination of step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the sum value that is the third byte of the main-cycle serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202. Then, when it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 does not match, the routine is finished as it is.

[Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power outage notification signal interrupt processing executed when the power outage notification signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 will be described. When this peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in FIG. 285 to determine whether the power failure warning signal is input. It is determined (step S1302). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure advance notice signal has not been input, the CPU directly ends this routine.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure notice signal is input, it determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. When it is determined in step S1304 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC has not elapsed 2 macroseconds, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure notice signal is input, and the power failure notice signal is not input. When it is determined that this routine is finished as it is, when it is determined that the power failure advance notice signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure advance notice signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power failure advance notice interrupt processing, which is this routine, has been started.

In the determination of step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the peripheral control unit power outage notice signal interrupt process of this routine is started and the power outage notice signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds, the CPU performs the power saving process. Perform (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially executing turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, turning off various LEDs, and the like. By suppressing the electric power of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is a time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Subsequent to step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a command reception standby process (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, at least for a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control IC can receive the command being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Subsequent to step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing of the command (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied to the regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup.

Subsequent to step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input (step S1312). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure advance notice signal is input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage notification signal is not input, or following step S1314, the CPU returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power outage notification signal is input. Determine whether. That is, it will continue to infinitely determine whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. By continuing the determination infinitely in this way, the CPU of the peripheral control IC cannot output the clear signal to the external WDT when it is determined in step S1312 that the power failure advance notice signal is not input, While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure notice signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the WDT clear process in step S1314, CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 281 is restarted.

In this way, when the power failure warning signal continues to be input in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. It doesn't take it. On the other hand, if the power failure warning signal is not continuously input in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. Is becoming As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage notice signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise, and the noise occurs for a period of more than 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, If the power failure warning signal is not continuously input in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 286, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first uses the first starting opening sensor 3052. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first starting opening 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and is stored in the RAM first. A first starting opening passage process such as storing in one special symbol reserved storage area is executed (step S232). In addition, on condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the above random number. A second starting opening passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is controlled is set (step S235), and if the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S235A) is executed. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is 15R jackpot, 15R A process for controlling the opening and closing of the first special winning opening 2005 is executed according to the big hit game state. Also, when it becomes a mode that suggests "5R jackpot", when it becomes a mode that suggests "2R jackpot" by executing the process of controlling the opening and closing of the first special winning opening 2005 according to the 5R jackpot gaming state. Then, the process of controlling the opening and closing of the first special winning opening 2005 according to the 2R big hit game state is executed.

In the big hit control process (step S235A), after performing the opening control of the first big winning opening 2005, each process of setting the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating that it is in a time saving state, and the result of the lottery process when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state is a mode that suggests "2R jackpot" 2R jackpot game Set when ending the state, when ending the 5R jackpot gaming state based on the fact that it has become a mode that suggests "5R jackpot", when ending the 15R jackpot gaming state during the time saving state and the non-time saving state .. Then, the time saving flag is a big hit next time, or when the count value of the time saving number counter becomes “0”, a first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 297 described later or a second special symbol stop not shown. Reset by processing.

Further, the time saving counter is a counter showing the remaining number of times of the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuation of the time saving state, and is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In this case, when the jackpot gaming state is ended, the number of times the short-timed state is continued is set. Then, the hour/hour counter is counted down each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed until the counter value becomes "0", but it becomes the next big hit before the counter value becomes "0". Sometimes, it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 297 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown (return the counter value to "0").

If the big hit execution flag is not set, on condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random number stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is "0". (Step S237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S238), and the second special symbol reserve storage area is stored. On condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S237), the second special symbol including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S239). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passage process (step S232).

Now, in the process of step S231, if it is determined that the first starting opening sensor 3052 is in the ON state and the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002, as shown in FIG. 287. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special reserved number counter indicating the number of the first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area from the main control built-in RAM, Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first number of reserved storages is "4" which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S242). In the processing of this step S242, when it is determined that the first number of held storages is not the maximum value, the following step S243-, in order to newly hold the variable display control of the first special symbol. The process of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, as the processing of step S244, each random number acquired in step S241 is a first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. To store.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number obtained in step S241. Whether or not to be a big hit, if it is a big hit type of big hit, if not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or the type type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing the production pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information such as the variation pattern type) before the variation display corresponding to the start winning is started (step S245), the process is ended.

However, in the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first number of reserved storages is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the first reserved memory number changes based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is stored as the first reserved memory. While updating to correspond to the number, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) a command for instructing the first reserved memory number (first reserved number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 stored command 0 to 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 4). It is like this.

FIG. 288 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the production pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S241, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation. Whether or not it is a big hit by comparing with a random number, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600. The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified pre-determination information (whether or not it is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or is executed. Type of game effect), the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories (the value of the reserved number counter) stored in association with the acquired special random number. Set the pre-determination command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the fact that the first special random number has been acquired, and the first reserved storage number (second The value of the one special reserved number counter), and the first special symbol preliminary determination command according to it is set (step S262).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a preliminary determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to be stored corresponding to the first start opening 2002 in which the start winning is generated. In addition to the number of reserved memory to be held, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated start winning is to be a big hit, if it is a big hit, the kind of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the effect display device 1600 Peripheral control mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before executing the reach effect as the game effect to be executed or before displaying variable display according to the starting winning prize, such as pre-determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed. IC can be grasped.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary judgment command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing advance determination information regarding variable display of the first special symbol.

The first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control IC stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command in the first (first) storage area. Store in order from the area. Then, when the preliminary judgment command is received when the preliminary judgment information is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, the preliminary judgment information notified to the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area Is stored, and when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, in advance stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the received first variation pattern command. Discard the determination information and move the pre-determination information stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4) storage area (in the reserved storage area). Shift stored pre-determination information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so that the order in which the suspension of the variable display start occurs can be specified and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

In this way, at the time when the variable display control is put on hold, even though the variable display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (holding state), the jackpot expectation (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained. ), this can be preceded, for example, at a predetermined timing such as a new output of the hold display or a shift display of the hold display according to the hold exhaustion. ..

FIG. 289 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage process (step S234).

Now, in the process of step S233, if it is determined that the second starting opening sensor 2401 is in the on state and the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004, as shown in FIG. 289. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reserved memory number reaches its maximum value (upper limit value). ) Is “1” or not (step S252). In the processing of this step S252, when it is determined that the second number of reserved storages is not the maximum value, the following step S253-, in order to newly hold the variable display control of the second special symbol. The processing of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number acquired in step S251 is a second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. To store.

However, in the process of step S252, when it is determined that the number of second reserved storages is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

In addition, when the number of second reserved memory changes based on the fact that a game ball enters the second starting opening 2004, the second reserved memory stores the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400. While updating to correspond to the number, the command for instructing the second reserved memory number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) (second reserved number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 stored command 0 to 1)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 1). It is like this.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the number of first reserved memories based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 is set to "4", while the game ball to the second starting opening 2004. The upper limit of the number of second reserved memories based on that the player has entered is set to "1". The second starting opening 2004 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the time saving state, and the variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than in the normal state, so Even if the upper limit is set to "1", the period during which the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed continues for a long time, or the period in which the second reserved memory number is the upper limit continues for a second start opening 2004 Even if a game ball enters the ball, it is suppressed that the player cannot get a chance to win the big hit, which is a disadvantage to the player.

FIG. 290 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process process (step S238). The first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process process are similar program modules, and random numbers used for determination. Since the tables are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, depending on the first special symbol process flag described above, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process or the like for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Symbol normal processing (step S280)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which the determination process of the variation control stop state of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol fluctuation control stops )
3. A variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and a variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. Variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which lottery process for
4. First special symbol variation process to wait until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S283)
5. The mode at the time of fluctuation control of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol as described above (step S284)

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on process (see FIG. 271).

FIG. 291 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 291, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, step S301. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, then as the process of step S302, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) is read from the same RAM. .. Then, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reserve number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reserve storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stored in each storage area. Shifting operation is performed in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode for random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserved storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with the occurrence of a start winning in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)-th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the condition for starting the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

Then, after that, as a process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for winning the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) (step S306), this process ends.

FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a hit determination table and a special random number shown in FIG. 185(A) (first special random number read in step S302 when the first special symbol normal process is executed, When the two special symbol normal process is executed, it is compared with the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process) (step S311).

The hit determination table shown in FIG. 293(A) is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, one kind of the first special random number coincides with the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit is won, and three kinds of different big hit judgment values The first special random numbers are respectively matched so that the first special random number coincides with the big hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won, and the 315 kinds of first special random numbers coincide with the loss judgment value indicating that the above-mentioned trouble has occurred. Associated (big hit probability; 1 in 319, small hit probability; 3 in 319). Further, in the second special symbol process process in this example, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, with one type of second special random number is a big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won. Matching and different from the big hit judgment value 144 kinds of second special random numbers match the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won, and 174 kinds of second special random numbers are the above-mentioned deviation judgment The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the values (big hit probability; 1/319, small hit probability; 144/319). That is, the determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of being determined as a small hit compared to the determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. In the case where the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the second starting port 2004 is executed, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the first starting port 2002 is executed. This is more advantageous for the player.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the hit determination table and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special symbol read in the second special symbol normal process) As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that the big hit (step S312), a big hit flag indicating that the variation is a big hit is set (step S313), and the hit determination process is ended.

The result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S314), a small hit flag indicating that the variation is a small hit is set (step S315), and the hit determination process is ended.

On the other hand, when neither the big hit nor the small hit is won, that is, when it is determined that the hit is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316).

A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and a reach determination table at the time saving state used when the gaming state is at the time saving state, and a non-time saving used when the gaming state is at the non-time saving state And a reach determination table for the state. Then, in the reach determination table in the time saving state, the reach determination values are matched so that one type of reach random number reaches the reach determination value, and 71 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that the reach does not reach. Random numbers are associated with each.

Further, in the reach determination table in the non-time saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time saving state match the reach determination value indicating that the reach random number is reached, The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers coincide with the reach determination values indicating that the reach random numbers are not reached. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as a result of the comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316), when it is determined that there is reach loss (step S317), the fluctuation is The reach flag indicating that the reach is reached is set, and the process ends (step S318).

FIG. 294 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 294, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The determination of the lottery processing result is performed by determining whether the big hit flag is set (step S321) or whether the small hit flag is set (step S324).

The main control MPU, if the big hit flag is set in step S321, compare the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing with the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 293(B). By determining the type of big hit by, the mode at the time of variation control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of big hit (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S322).

In particular,
1. It is closed after opening the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the first big winning opening sensor 2402 that 10 game balls have been won in the first big winning opening 2005. By repeating the opening and closing pattern to be performed 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball can enter the first big winning opening 2005 (easy) and is controlled to a 15R big hit game state, and after the big hit game state ends, a special symbol (first special Until the variable display of the symbol, the second special symbol is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened than usual, and a high probability time saving state in which the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual 15R sure change big hit to control 2. After opening the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have been won in the first big winning opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2005 is closed. By opening and closing the pattern 5 times (5 rounds), the game ball can enter the first big winning opening 2005 (easy) and is controlled in the 5R big hit game state, and after the end of the big hit game state a special symbol (first special symbol) , 2nd special symbol) until the variable display is executed 77 times, 5R short-time big hit to shorten the execution period of the variable display than usual,
3. After opening the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have been won in the first big winning opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2005 is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern twice (two rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 2R jackpot gaming state in which it can (easily) enter the first big winning opening 2005, and is controlled to the time saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot gaming state. If there is a big hit game state after the end of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) variable display 77 times before it is a big hit until it is a big time control to be finished, 2R 2R big hit to control to the normal state after the end of the big hit game state if it is controlled to the non-time saving state before the start of the big hit game state,
One of the three types of big hits is decided.

In addition, the mode at the time of variation control stop of the second special symbol (stop symbol of the second special symbol) is
In particular,
1. It is closed after the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the second big winning opening sensor 2601 that 10 game balls have been won in the second big winning opening 2006. By controlling the opening and closing pattern to be repeated 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball can enter the second big winning opening 2006 (easy) and is controlled to the 15R big hit game state, and after the big hit game state is finished, a special symbol (first special Until the variable display of the symbol, the second special symbol is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened than usual, and a high probability time saving state in which the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual 15R sure change big hit to control 2. After opening the second special winning opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601 that 10 game balls have been won in the second special winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2006 is closed. By opening and closing the pattern 5 times (5 rounds), the game ball can enter the second big winning opening 2006 (easy), and is controlled to the 5R big hit game state, and after the end of the big hit game state a special symbol (first special symbol) , 2nd special symbol) until the variable display is executed 77 times, 5R short-time big hit to shorten the execution period of the variable display than usual,
3. After opening the second special winning opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601 that 10 game balls have been won in the second special winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2006 is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern twice (two rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 2R jackpot gaming state in which it can (easily) enter the second big winning opening 2006, and is controlled to the time saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot gaming state. If there is a big hit game state after the end of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) variable display 77 times before it is a big hit until it is a big time control to be finished, 2R 2R big hit to control to the normal state after the end of the big hit game state if it is controlled to the non-time saving state before the start of the big hit game state,
One of the three types of big hits is decided.

In the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number, 8 judgment values are distributed when the 15R certainty variation jackpot, 100 judgment values are distributed when the 5R hour short jackpot, and 2R jackpot. In this case, 92 judgment values are distributed. That is, when a lottery result that is a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 15% big hit with a probability of 4%, a 5R big hit with a probability of 50%, and a 2R big hit with a probability of 46%. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 92 determination values are distributed when the 15R probability variation jackpot is obtained, and 100 determination values are distributed when the 5R time-shortening jackpot is distributed and 2R. Eight judgment values are distributed in the case of a big hit. That is, when a lottery result that is a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 46% probability of 15R probability variation big hit, a 50% probability of 5R big hit, and a 4% probability of 2R big hit. .. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number compared to the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number, the probability of being determined as a 15R probability variable jackpot is high. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the second starting opening 2004 is executed rather than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the first starting opening 2002, The player is in an advantageous state.

Further, when the type of big hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of big hit is determined as the mode at the time of stopping the first special symbol. Specifically, when it is determined to be a 2R jackpot, it is decided to be a 2R jackpot design as a jackpot design, when it is decided to be a 5R jackpot it is decided to be a 5R jackpot design as a jackpot design, and when it is decided to be a 15R jackpot As a design, it is determined to be a 15R jackpot design.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, if the small hit flag is set (step S324), read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process. The type of small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number and the small hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 293(C), and when the variation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of big hit is stopped. The mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

In particular,
1. The opening/closing pattern for closing the second big winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it is executed twice to control the gaming ball into a small hitting game state in which it can enter (easy) the second big winning opening 2006. First small hit 2. The opening and closing pattern for closing the second big winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then executing it 9 times is controlled to a small hitting game state in which the game ball can enter the second big winning opening 2006 (easy). Either one of the two types of small hits will be decided.

In the small hit symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number, 200 determination values are distributed when the first small hit occurs. That is, when a lottery result of a small win is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 100% probability that the first small win is won and the second small win is not won. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 20 judgment values are distributed when the first small hit occurs, and 180 judgment values are distributed when the second small hit occurs. ing. That is, when a lottery result of a small win is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 10% probability of the first small win and a 90% probability of the second small win.

Further, when the type of small hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of small hit is determined as the mode at the time of stopping the first special symbol. Specifically, when the first small hit is decided, the first small hit symbol is decided as the small hit symbol, and when the second small hit is decided, the second small hit symbol is decided as the small hit symbol. ..

When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines a deviating symbol (step S327). Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S328, the lottery result (type of big hit, small hit, out of reach, out of contact) The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the instruction (may be an instruction of the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S328). ). Then, after that, as the process of step S329, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed and left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → middle) Stop display in the order of decorative designs (note that the left, middle, and right decorative designs may be displayed in sync with the same design in a variable manner and stopped at the same time). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 specifies the small hit or the 2R big hit from the received determination result notification command as the mode (stop pattern) when the variation of the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped. Is a small hit design ("final decisive battle"), and if 5R hour/short/big hit is specified, the 5R hour/hour/big hit pattern (the left, middle and right decorative symbols are the same among the symbols "0" to "9") If the 15R probability variation big hit is specified, the 15R probability variation big hit symbol (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same odd symbol among the symbols “0” to “9”) Combination). In addition, when the reach out is specified, a detached pattern accompanied by a reach (a combination of the same symbols whose left and right decorative symbols are "0" to "9" and different inside decorative symbols; reach loss) If it is determined to be a pattern, and if the deviation is specified, it is determined as a deviation pattern without a reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative patterns among the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are different patterns), and the fluctuation When the variable time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop design is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the big hit game state can be controlled to the time saving state until it is executed up to 77 times, but the time saving state The time saving state may be terminated based on the fact that a predetermined number of big hits occur after the shift control is performed. Specifically, it is controlled to a time saving state after the big hit game state, and if a predetermined number of times (for example, two times) of big hits occur thereafter, without controlling to the time saving state after the predetermined number of big hit game states are finished. The normal state may be controlled. Further, even if the number of occurrences of the big hit is less than a predetermined number, it may be controlled to the non-time saving state during the big hit game state, and the time saving state may be controlled again after the big hit game state.

FIG. 295 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 295, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the big hit flag is set If it is done (step S341), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the kind of big hit decided at step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S342), and the small hit flag. If is set and entered (step S343), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of small hit according to the type of small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S344). If the reach flag is set (step S345), a variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) is selected (step S346), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, the normal In the case of a loss (a loss when the reach effect is not executed), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S348), and the variation pattern table is started around The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (step S349). Further, the main control MPU sets, in the fluctuation timer, the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 only for the fluctuation time determined in this way.

The variation pattern table of this example is provided in plural types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the design random number (first design random number, second design random number). Further, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. The variable random numbers are stored so as to be associated with each other. Then, the main control MPU, of the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and the pattern random number, the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process By comparing, by acquiring the variation time information associated with the read variable random number from this table, the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of the reach of this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of the reach production to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach production is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, among the reach effects, the super-reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and when the super-reach effect is executed, the expectation of the player for the jackpot gaming state is increased.

When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, next, as a process of step S351, it is determined whether or not the count value of the time saving counter is set to "0". To do. Then, if this counter value is not "0", after the time saving counter is counted down (step S352), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short time counter is "0" (step S353). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving end flag indicating that the time saving control is ended is set (step S354).

If it is determined in the processing of step S351 that the count value of the hour/hour counter is "0", and if it is determined in the processing of step S353 that the hour/hour counter is not "0", then Then, the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is ended.

In this example, in the variation pattern table at the time of deviation, during the time saving state, the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), In the non-time saving state, the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the variation pattern of the special symbol is set. .. That is, in the variation pattern at the time of out of time selected in the time saving state, as compared with the variation pattern at the time of out of time selected in the non-time saving state, the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is extremely short, The variable time information of the special symbol is set.

FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 296, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, step S371. As the process, the change timer for which the change time is set according to the change pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the change pattern is decremented by 1. When it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the variation time selected by the lottery has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S284), this process is ended.

FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 297, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, step S381. As the process, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative design corresponding to the stop design of the first special design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385). With this, when the variable display of the predetermined number of times (77 times in this example) of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed, the time saving control (control of the time saving state) is ended and the non-time saving control (Normal state control) is started.

When the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is to be started (step S387), and the jackpot game The waiting time until the start (time for displaying the start of the big hit game) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process of setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of big hit to a big hit number counter indicating the number of remaining rounds is also executed. The big hit count counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the big hit control process described later, and when the big hit count counter reaches “0”, it is determined that the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified number of rounds. And control to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, until the big hit number counter reaches "0", the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S401) and the special winning opening opening processing (step S402) are repeatedly executed to make a big winning. When the round is finished in the mouth opening process (step S402), the jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 and becomes "0". Then, the process shifts to the big winning mouth opening post-process (step S403) to finish the jackpot game. Control to be executed.

Then, the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed is set (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a big hit start command (15R sure change big hit start command, 5R time short hit big hit start command, 2R big hit start command) corresponding to the type of big hit (15R sure change big hit, 2R big hit big hit, 2R big hit) is set. As a result, the effect display of the big hit game according to the kind of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process, the big hit start command (15R sure change big hit start command, 5R time short hit) according to the type of big hit (15R probability big hit, 5R time short hit, 2R big hit) Start command, 2R jackpot start command) are set.

In addition, the big hit execution flag which shows that the big hit game is being executed, when the big hit game is finished, specifically, after the big winning opening opening process (step S403) of the big hit control process (step S235A), The opening/closing control of the first special winning opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after opening the first special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or after 10 game balls are won in the first special winning opening 2005) Opening/closing control for repeating the opening/closing pattern to be closed when detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2402 twice, five times, or fifteen times) and opening/closing control of the second special winning opening 2006 (for example, the first big winning opening 2005 After opening for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601 that 10 game balls have entered the first special winning opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern is closed twice. Times, or open/close control repeated 15 times) is finished (all rounds that can be executed in the big hit game) are reset. While the big hit execution flag is reset, the big hit control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S114), while the first of the function display unit 1400 is executed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

If the big hit flag is not set (step S386), and the small hit flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit game is started. The small hit start command is set (step S391), and the waiting time until the start of the small hit game (the time for displaying that the small hit game is started) is set in the interval timer (step S392). Then, a small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S393). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of small hit. In step S391, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command) corresponding to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit) is set. Thereby, the effect of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit instructed by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process, the small hit start command (first small hit start command, the first small hit start command, the first small hit, the second small hit) 2 small hit start command) is set.

In addition, the small hitting execution flag which indicates that the small hitting game is being executed, when the small hitting game is finished, specifically, the small hitting medium processing (step S411) of the small hitting control processing (step S236A) described later. ) Open/close control of the second special winning opening 2006 according to the type of small hit (for example, opening/closing control in which the opening/closing pattern of opening the second special winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it is repeated twice or nine times) Will be reset when is finished. While the small hit execution flag is reset, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S114), while the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

Also, if the small hit flag is not set, that is, if it becomes a loss, set the interval timer to the standby time (time to display the stop symbol of the special symbol) until the next variable display of the special symbol is started. (Step S394), the process proceeds to step S395.

When the processing of steps S386 to S394 is executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. Then (step S395), this processing ends.

FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S235A). In the big hit control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the big hit process flag.

1. Based on the fact that the special display (first special design, second special design) variable display stop mode becomes a big hit design, the notification to the player such as a transition to the big hit game state is given to the peripheral control board. Preparatory processing for opening the special winning opening that waits until it is performed by 1510 or waits until the next round starts (step S401)
2. Based on the fact that the mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped becomes a big hit symbol, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be in an open state, or the next round is started. The first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to an open state, and the first big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or after the first big winning opening 2005 has 10 game balls. When it is detected that the first big winning opening sensor 2402 has won a prize, or after the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or at the second big winning opening 2006, there are 10 game balls. Processing for opening the special winning opening which is closed when the second special winning opening sensor 2601 detects that a prize has been won (step S402)
3. After all the rounds are finished, a big winning opening opening post-processing is performed to wait until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot gaming state is over (step S403).

The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S401) should be performed in the processing of step S42. In the processing for opening the special winning opening (step S402), at the start of a round for controlling the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 to be in an open state, a big hit round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is issued. At the end of the round of setting and controlling the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 to a closed state, a big hit round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The big hit round start command and the big hit round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and a big hit game effect is displayed according to the number of rounds designated by the big hit round start command and the big hit round end command. It is executed by the device 1600, a lamp/LED, a speaker and the like.

[Inner lens]
In the conventional pachinko machine 1, a mounting surface of a substrate on which electronic components such as LEDs are mounted is provided so as to face the player, and light emission decoration is performed. In addition, the mounting surface of the substrate on which electronic components such as LEDs are mounted is covered with a transparent ornament, and the LEDs and the like mounted on the substrate are caused to emit light in various colors so that the ornament is colored or The light emission of the LED or the like can be visually confirmed through the.

In addition, the substrate of the conventional pachinko machine 1 is solidly coated with a green resist, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline line on which the electronic parts are arranged, etc. , Is printed in close proximity to an electronic component such as an LED by white or black silk. The information formed on these substrates is difficult for the player to see when the LED emits light, but visible for the player when the LED is off.

It should be noted that in recent years, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a unified design as a whole, and the images of the effect display device 1600 are fused to express the world view of characters and animations. The designability of is a very important factor. However, in the conventional pachinko machine 1, information unrelated to the game, such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline line on which the electronic parts are arranged, etc., written on the board is displayed when the LED is turned off. By being visually recognized, the view of the world of the pachinko machine 1 may be lost, the designability may be deteriorated, and the interest in the game may be deteriorated.

To solve such a problem, the LED is mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the board, and the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline of the electronic parts, etc. are arranged on the back surface of the board. Information is printed on white or black silk to make it difficult for the player to see the information, or a predetermined color (white in this example, but green or green) on the surface of the board on which the LED is mounted (LED mounting surface). After applying a paint (resist, silk, etc.) of black or purple (other colors may be used), the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic parts are arranged according to the unevenness and the light reflection state. A measure is taken to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize such information by double-coating the paint of the same color excluding the information portion so that the information such as the outline can be recognized.

However, when information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline line on which the electronic parts are arranged is silk-printed on the back surface different from the mounting surface of the LED, when performing maintenance and inspection. The LEDs and the like must be specified by alternately comparing the front surface and the back surface of the substrate, which reduces the workability, and the fact that the LEDs and information related to the LEDs are not provided on the same surface It becomes difficult to understand the correspondence between the information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic parts. There is a drawback that mistakes such as mistaken identification occur. Further, when information such as the number of pins of a connector, the orientation of an IC, a part number, a pin number, and a contour line on which electronic parts are arranged is visually recognizable depending on the unevenness and the reflection state of light, a part showing the information. Since the (region) and the other part (region) have the same color, it is difficult to identify, and the workability at the time of maintenance and inspection is disadvantageously lowered.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outer shape on which electronic parts are arranged are printed on the board while suppressing a decrease in workability when performing maintenance and inspection. It is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing information unrelated to the game such as lines. The details will be described below. As information unrelated to the game written on the board, any one of the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline line on which the electronic parts are arranged, etc. is the surface of the board (LED. The following inventions can be applied as long as they are described in (Mounting surface).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the inner lens is arranged between the decorative body that covers the front of the LED and the substrate on which the LED is mounted. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38, the front surface (front surface) of the handle decoration substrate 184 provided in the handle unit 180 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon is covered with a transparent handle cover 185. 49 and 50, a transparent inner lens 185a is disposed between the handle decoration board 184 and the handle decoration board 184. As shown in FIGS. Is covered with a plate upper left decoration 271, and a transparent plate upper left inner lens 272 is arranged between the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 to prepare the plate upper right decoration unit 275. The front surface (front surface) of the dish upper right decoration board 278 on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered with the dish upper right decoration body 276, and a transparent plate is provided between the plate upper right decoration body 276 and the dish upper right decoration board 278. The front surface (front surface) of the plate lower left decoration board 283 in which the upper right inner lens 277 is arranged and which is provided in the plate lower left decoration unit 280 and in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered with the plate lower left decoration body 281. A transparent plate lower left inner lens 282 is arranged between the body 281 and the plate lower left decoration substrate 283, and the front surface of the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 provided in the plate lower right decoration unit 285 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs ( The surface) is covered with a dish lower right decoration body 286, and a transparent dish lower right inner lens 287 is arranged between the dish lower right decoration body 286 and the dish lower right decoration substrate 288.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, the upper surface (front surface) of the plate center upper decorative board 314 on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted in the performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 300 is the plate center. A transparent plate center upper inner lens 313 is provided between the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center upper decoration substrate 314, and is covered by the upper decoration body 312a, and the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 is provided. The upper surface (front surface) of the dish lower central decoration substrate 316 provided with the plurality of LEDs mounted thereon is covered with the dish lower central ornamental body 312b, and the plate lower central ornamental body 312b and the plate lower central ornamental substrate 316 are combined. A transparent inner lower lens 315 is provided between them, and the upper surface (front surface) of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted and which is included in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300 is the outer peripheral button. Covered by the cover 380, a transparent outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379 is provided between the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, the front surface (front surface) of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402, which is provided in the door frame left side unit 400 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, has a transparent door frame left side decoration body 404. 70. The transparent left side inner lens 403 is disposed between the door frame left side decoration body 404 and the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 and is provided in the door frame right side unit 410 as shown in FIG. The front surface (front surface) of the decorative portion decorative substrate 413 inside the side window in which the plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered by the transparent door frame right side decorative body 419. A transparent right side inner lens 415 is arranged between the decorative portion decoration substrate 413 and a door frame top central decoration substrate 455 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted in the door frame top unit 450, and a door frame top left decoration. The front surface (front surface) of the board 456 and the door frame top right decoration board 457 is covered with a transparent door frame top decoration body 453, and the door frame top decoration body 453, the door frame top central decoration board 455, and the door frame top left decoration body 453. A transparent top center inner lens 458, a top left inner lens 459, and a top right inner lens 460 are arranged between the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the front surface of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, has a front side of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310. A transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 is disposed between the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the underside first rotating decorative substrate 3322. As shown in FIGS. 193 and 194, the back front left The front surface of the back-front left decorative substrate 3714, which is provided in the decorative body unit 3710 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, is covered with a front cover 3711, and between the front cover 3711 and the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322. A transparent front left decorative body 3713 functioning as an inner lens is arranged, and as shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, a rear front right decorative body unit 3810 is provided with a plurality of LEDs. The front surface of the back-front right decorative substrate 3814 is covered by a front cover 3811, and a transparent plate-shaped back-front right decorative member 3813 functioning as an inner lens is provided between the front cover 3811 and the back-front right decorative substrate 3814. It is arranged.

The inner lens has a three-dimensionally uneven surface so as to make the refractive index nonuniform and diffuse the light from the LED irregularly, and is provided behind the ornament at a predetermined interval. (Provided separately from the decorative body). Then, when recognizing information unrelated to the game such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline line on which the electronic parts are arranged on the mounting surface of the board through the inner lens, Can be visually recognized in a distorted state (a state in which the information is out of focus, a state in which the information is distorted to the extent that it cannot be recognized as characters or information) due to a surface formed in a three-dimensional pattern. This allows the player to recognize information unrelated to the game, such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline line on which the electronic parts are arranged, on the mounting surface of the board as information. Since it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the world view of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the design, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game. In addition, the surface of the inner lens is not limited to a three-dimensionally uneven surface, but instead of or in addition to this, the inner lens has a non-uniform thickness to make the refractive index non-uniform or the light from the LED. May be diffused irregularly. Also in this case, it is irrelevant to the game such as the number of pins of the connector marked on the mounting surface of the board, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the external line on which the electronic parts are arranged, which are visually recognized through the inner lens. The information becomes visible when it is distorted (out of focus).

The inner lens of this example is made of a colorless and transparent resin, and transmits the light of the LED. It should be noted that the material is not limited to a colorless and transparent material as long as it is formed of a light-transmissive material (resin or the like), and a colored and transparent material that is colored so that it can be seen through. In addition, the surface of the inner lens of this example is three-dimensionally formed by forming a plurality of small surfaces with different angles like a diamond cut.Although the inner lens is made of a colorless transparent resin, the surface refraction It has the appearance of being cloudy in places due to uneven rates.

Further, the decorative body of the present example (handle cover 185, plate upper left decorative body 271, plate upper right decorative body 276, plate lower left decorative body 281, plate lower right decorative body 286, plate center upper decorative body 312a, plate center lower decorative body 312b. The outer peripheral button cover 380, the door frame left side decoration body 404, the door frame right side decoration body 419, the door frame top decoration body 453, the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310, the front cover 3711, and the front cover 3811) are formed of transparent members. It has a relatively smooth surface. In addition to the inner lens, the front and back surfaces of the decorative body may be three-dimensionally formed in a concavo-convex shape. In this case, the decorative body and the inner lens are combined to form the number of pins of the connector on the board and the orientation of the IC. It is possible to reliably prevent the player from visually recognizing information such as the component number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic component. Further, in this case, the degree of unevenness of the surface of the decorative body arranged on the side closer to the player may be made weaker than the degree of unevenness of the surface of the inner lens. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transparency of the decoration body arranged on the side closer to the player from being lowered, and to make the inner lens look like the cloudiness due to the transparency decrease through the decoration body. You can realize a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since white is used as the resist of the substrate on which the LED is mounted, it is likely to be opaque provided between the mounting surface of the substrate and the decorative body. The inner lens, which has a good appearance, is compatible with the white resist and does not give a feeling of strangeness. That is, the design of the pachinko machine 1 is not deteriorated.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, white is used as the resist on the surface of the substrate on which the LED is mounted, and the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic parts are arranged on the LED mounting surface. Information such as outlines to be printed is printed on yellow silk. Here, in general, yellow and white have the closest reflectance and brightness as compared with other colors, and since there is little visual difference (contrast), it is recommended that you print on silk other than white or yellow. In comparison, even when the board is directly visually recognized, it is difficult to identify information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic component. White may be used as a resist only on the LED mounting surface (front surface), and various information may be printed using yellow silk. On the LED non-mounting surface (back surface), a color other than white (for example, green) may be used as a resist. Or black), or various kinds of information may be printed using silk of a color other than yellow (for example, white or black).

On the other hand, at the time of maintenance and inspection, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic parts should be written in a color different from the color of the resist on the board. So, in addition to being able to easily identify these information and understand its contents, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic parts are arranged. Since it is written in the vicinity of the LED, the correspondence between the LED and information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic component can be clarified. ..

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an IC, a resistor, a capacitor, a connector, etc. are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface). That is, only LEDs are mounted on the surface of the substrate (LED mounting surface). As a result, by mounting the LED so that the emitted light is directed to the player, the IC, which is easily seen by the player due to color, shape, size, etc., on the surface side of the substrate which is easily seen by the player. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the IC, the resistor, the capacitor, the connector, etc. by mounting the resistor, the capacitor, the connector, etc. on the back surface side of the substrate that is difficult for the player to see. Further, when a connector or the like formed in the same white color as the resist on the LED mounting surface is used, it may be mounted on the LED mounting surface.

Further, the degree of unevenness of the surface of the inner lens may be changed according to the distance between the inner lens and the substrate. Specifically, when the distance between the inner lens and the substrate is short (for example, less than 1 cm), the degree of stereoscopic formation of the inner lens is increased, and when the distance between the inner lens and the substrate is long (for example, 1 cm or more). May reduce the degree of stereoscopic formation of the inner lens. As a result, optimal obscuration is performed according to the distance from the board, and the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outer shape on which electronic parts are arranged are printed on the mounting surface of the board through the inner lens. It is possible to prevent the lines and the like from being visually recognized, and to prevent the player from recognizing information unrelated to the game as information, preventing the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing, and reducing the design. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game by suppressing it. As a method of changing the degree of three-dimensional formation, the degree of three-dimensional formation can be strengthened by deepening the unevenness of the substrate surface, or the degree of three-dimensional formation can be weakened by making the unevenness of the substrate surface shallow, and For example, it is possible to increase the degree of unevenness by reducing the shaping (surfaces with different angles), or weaken the degree of unevenness by increasing the modeling (surfaces with different angles) of the substrate surface.

Further, the inner lens is not limited to one that makes it difficult to visually recognize the information written on the substrate, and is not limited to the one that makes all the information written on the substrate difficult to see. Some of the information may be visible to the extent that it can be recognized as information (to the extent that it can be recognized as lines or characters), or some information about all or part of the information written on the board. Can be recognized, but it is difficult to recognize the recorded information to the extent that it is difficult to recognize the information as information (to the extent that lines and characters can be visually recognized in an unclear state). It may be a thing, and the fact that some information is written on all or part of the information written on the board is also difficult to recognize to the extent that it is difficult to recognize (to the extent that lines and characters cannot be seen at all). It may be

Further, in the above-mentioned example, the resin molding member whose surface is three-dimensionally formed in an uneven shape is used as the inner lens, but instead of the resin molding member or in addition to the resin molding member, all the information written on the substrate or A light-transmitting sheet may be used to obscure a part of the information or make it difficult to recognize that some information is written on all or part of the information written on the substrate. For example, a thin-walled circular shape provided between an LED board 5070 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted in the light emission effect unit 5000 shown in FIG. 255 and a decorative body 5040 covering the surface of the LED board 5070 are provided. A sheet similar to the diffusion sheet 5050 which is processed and molded from the transparent resin plate may be used, or a sheet such as a frosted glass-like translucent sheet or a crystal-like translucent sheet which reduces the transparency. May be used. In this case, the space between the mounting surface of the substrate on which the LED is mounted and the decorative body can be made narrower than that using a three-dimensionally formed member, which increases the degree of freedom in design.

Further, in the above example, the decorative body and the inner lens are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative body itself may be used as the inner lens. As a result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the design of the pachinko machine 1 at low cost.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a light emitting member such as an LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is provided except when the game production is not executed, such as a period in which the customer is in a waiting state and performing a demonstration by the production display device 1600. Among them, a plurality of light emitting members (LEDs provided on the door frame 3 in this example, the back front left decoration board 3714 of the back front left decoration substrate 3714, which are provided at positions that are always visible to the player. Mounted on the LED, LED mounted on the back front decoration board 3422 of the back production unit 3400, LED mounted on the back front right decoration board 3814 of the back front right decoration body unit 3810, bottom back right For each of the LEDs mounted on the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 of the rendering unit 3250, the LED mounted on the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 of the lower lower left rendering unit 3200, etc. It is set to be higher than the rate of being turned off. Accordingly, the period during which the light is turned on can be made longer than the period during which the substrate is turned off, and in the lighted state, it is possible to make it difficult for each substrate to be visually recognized by the light emitted from the LED. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize information unrelated to the game, such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic parts on which the electronic parts are arranged. Further, since information unrelated to the game can be made hard to be visually recognized by the player, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being disturbed, prevent the deterioration of the design, and suppress the deterioration of the entertainment of the game. become.

[Occupation of the board mounted on the movable decoration]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621 are displayed behind the effect display device 1600. The player can also visually recognize information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic component on the board provided with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. I am trying to make it difficult. The details will be described below.

As described above, the back rear movable decoration body 3110, the back top rear rotation decoration body 3440, the back rear left decoration body 3521, and the back rear right decoration body 3621 are difficult for the player to visually recognize in normal times (when not driven). It is housed in the position (standby position) and moves to a position (driving position) visible to the player in front of the effect display device 1600 at the time of effect (during driving) and becomes visible to the player.

Therefore, normally (when not driven), the rear rear decorative substrate 3114, which is provided behind the rear movable movable body 3110 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the rear rear rotating decorative body 3440 is disposed rearward. A back-up rear decorative board 3452 provided with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, a back-rear decoration board 3522 provided behind the back-left decorative body 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and The number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, and the pin number, which are provided on the rear rear right decorative board 3622 provided behind the rear rear right decorative body 3621 and in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, It is difficult for the player to visually recognize information such as the outline of the electronic components.

On the other hand, at the time of execution of an effect in which the rear back movable decoration body 3110, the rear upper rear rotation decoration body 3440, the rear rear left decoration body 3521, and the rear rear right decoration body 3621 are exposed in front of the effect display device 1600 (when driving). The rear rear movable decoration 3110, the rear upper rear rotation decoration 3440, the rear rear left decoration 3521, and the rear rear right decoration 3621 are visible to the player from a standby position that is difficult for the player to recognize. By moving to the position, the back-rear decoration substrate 3114, which is provided behind the back-removable decorative body 3110 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, is provided behind the back-rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the front surface. Rear decorative board 3452 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, rear rear decorative board 3522 provided on the rear of rear rear left decoration body 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and rear right decoration The number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic parts, which are provided on the rear of the body 3621 and on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622, are arranged. There is a risk that the player may visually recognize information such as the contour line to be displayed.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 299(A), a rear rear movable decoration body 3110, a rear upper rear rotation decoration body 3440, a rear rear left decoration body 3521, and a rear rear right decoration body 3621 are displayed for presentation. When it is exposed to the front of the device 1600, a back-rear decoration board 3114 provided behind the back-removable decoration body 3110, a back-rear decoration board 3452 provided behind the back-rear rotation decoration body 3440, and a back-rear left The LED mounted on each of the rear-rear left decorative board 3522 provided behind the decorative body 3521 and the rear-rear right decorative board 3622 provided behind the rear-rear right decorative body 3621 is controlled to emit light to visually recognize each board. Make it hard to be done.

That is, after the display effect is started on the effect display device 1600, the back rear drive motor 3126 is driven to expose the back rear movable decoration body 3110, and the back rear rotation drive motor 3454 is driven to rotate the back rear rotation. The decorative body 3440 is exposed, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 is driven to expose the back rear left decoration body 3521, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 is driven to display the back rear right decoration body 3621. When it is exposed, the rear back movable motor 3126, the rear upper rear rotational drive motor 3454, the rear rear left rotational drive motor 3525, and the rear rear right rotational drive motor 3625 are driven in synchronization with the rear rear movable ornament 3110. Back decorative board 3114 provided behind, back rear decorative board 3452 provided behind back upper rotating decoration 3440, back left decorative board 3522 provided behind back left decorative body 3521, and back The LEDs mounted on each of the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the rear right decorative body 3621 are controlled to emit light, and the movable decorative bodies (back rear movable decorative body 3110, rear upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, rear rear left) are controlled. Timing at which the movable decorative body has finished moving from the drive position to the standby position after the end of the movable effect and the light emission effect by the decorative body 3521 and the rear rear right decorative body 3621 (back rear drive motor 3126, rear upper rear rotation drive motor 3454) , Rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 and back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 (timing to stop driving), rear rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind rear rear movable decoration body 3110, rear upper rear rotation decoration body 3440 A back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 provided behind, a back-rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the back-rear decorative body 3521, and a back-rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the back-rear decorative body 3621, respectively. The LED mounted on is turned off.

As a result, the rear rear movable decorative body 3110, the rear rear upper rotating decorative body 3440, the rear rear left decorative body 3521, and the rear rear right decorative body 3621 are displayed with the LEDs mounted thereon controlled to emit light. Since it is exposed in front of the device 1600, it is possible to make it difficult for each board to be visually recognized by the light emitted from these LEDs. The number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, and the part number printed on each board , It becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the information such as the pin number and the outline of the electronic component, so that it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being destroyed and prevent the deterioration of the design. It will be possible to prevent a decline in the interest in playing games. That is, in a situation in which the player can easily see the board, the LED mounted on each board is controlled to emit light so that the board is difficult for the player to see.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic parts arranged on each board is written near the LEDs. Then, in order to cause the LED to emit light in the vicinity of these pieces of information, the number of pins of the connector on the board, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline line on which the electronic parts are arranged, etc. are determined by the light emitted from the LED. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the area where the information is written. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the light source (LED) is arranged in the vicinity of the information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline line on which the electronic parts are arranged to emit light. By doing so, it is possible to make these pieces of information less visible.

Note that the timing at which the LEDs are controlled to emit light is not limited to that described above, and as shown in FIG. 299(B), at least the back rear movable decoration body 3110, the back top rear rotation decoration body 3440, and the back rear left decoration body are included. Provided behind the rear back movable decoration body 3110 when the 3521 and the rear rear right decoration body 3621 have finished moving to the drive position in front of the effect display device 1600, that is, when the movement reaches the drive position and stops moving. Rear decorative board 3114, rear rear decorative board 3452 provided behind rear upper rotating decoration 3440, rear left decorative board 3522 provided behind rear left decorative body 3521, and right rear decorative body 3522 The back and rear movable decoration body is controlled when the LEDs mounted on each of the rear rear right decoration substrates 3622 provided behind the 3621 are controlled to emit light, and when the movable effect is finished and the movement from the drive position to the standby position is started. 3110 rear rear decoration substrate 3114, rear rear rotation decorative body 3440 rear rear decoration substrate 3452, rear rear left decoration substrate 3521 rear rear left decoration substrate 3522, and The LEDs mounted on each of the rear-rear right decoration boards 3622 provided behind the rear-rear right decoration body 3621 may be turned off.

That is, after the display effect is started on the effect display device 1600, the back rear drive motor 3126 is driven to expose the back rear movable decoration body 3110, and the back rear rotation drive motor 3454 is driven to rotate the back rear rotation. The decorative body 3440 is exposed, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 is driven to expose the back rear left decoration body 3521, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 is driven to display the back rear right decoration body 3621. When the rear rear movable decoration 3110, the rear upper rear rotation decoration 3440, the rear rear left decoration 3521, and the rear rear right decoration 3621 are exposed to the driving position when they are exposed, Rear rear decoration provided behind the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 at the timing of stopping the driving of the drive motor 3126, the rear rear rear rotation drive motor 3454, the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525, and the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625. Substrate 3114, back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 provided behind back-up rear rotating ornamental body 3440, back-rear left ornamental substrate 3522 provided behind rear-rear left ornamental body 3521, and back-rear right ornamental body 3621 The timing at which the LEDs mounted on each of the rear rear right decoration boards 3622 provided are controlled to emit light and the movement is completed and the movement from the drive position to the standby position is started (rear rear drive motor 3126, rear rear rear rotation drive motor). 3454, a back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, and a back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 (timing to start driving), a back rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the back rear movable decoration body 3110, a back rear rotation decoration body A back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 provided behind the 3440, a back-rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the back-rear left ornamental body 3521, and a back-rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the back-rear right ornamental body 3621. The LEDs mounted on each may be turned off.

As a result, when the player is exposed to the drive position in front of the effect display device 1600 and is most likely to be visually recognized by the player (back rear drive motor 3126, back rear rear rotation drive motor 3454, rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525). And when the driving of the back-rear right rotation drive motor 3625 is stopped), the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 and the back-up rear decoration provided behind the back-rear rotation decoration body 3440. The LEDs mounted on each of the board 3452, the back rear left decoration board 3522 provided behind the back rear left decoration 3521, and the back rear right decoration board 3622 provided behind the back rear right decoration 3621 are caused to emit light. It is possible to make each substrate less visible. When the LED is off, the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the back-removable decoration 3110, the back-rear decoration substrate 3452 provided behind the back-rear rotating decoration 3440, and the back-rear The rear rear left decorative board 3522 provided behind the left decorative body 3521 and the rear rear right decorative board 3622 provided behind the rear rear right decorative body 3621 are displayed in a position visible to the player in a state where they are easily visible. However, since the back rear movable decoration body 3110, the back top rear rotation decoration body 3440, the back rear left decoration body 3521, and the back rear right decoration body 3621 are moving, the player stares at each board. Since it is difficult to do so, even if each LED is turned off, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic parts arranged on each board can It is difficult for the player to see it.

Note that a back-rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the back-rear movable decoration 3110, a back-up rear decoration substrate 3452 provided behind the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440, and a back provided behind the back-rear left decoration 3521. The timing of causing the LEDs mounted on each of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 and the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the rear rear right decorative body 3621 to emit light is not limited to the above, and the rear rear movable On the way of moving the decorative body 3110, the back-and-back rear rotating decoration body 3440, the back-and-back left decoration body 3521, and the back-and-back right decoration body 3621 from the standby position to the driving position, for example, the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 and the back-and-back rotating decoration. Each LED may be caused to emit light at the timing when the body 3440, the back rear left decoration 3521, and the back rear right decoration 3621 are actually visible to the player, or just before reaching the drive position. , Back rear movable decoration 3110, back top rear rotation decoration 3440, back rear left decoration 3521, and back rear right decoration 3621, the effect of causing each LED to emit light at the timing of starting movement, and the back rear movable decoration 3110, the rear upper rear decorative body 3440, the rear rear left decorative body 3521, and the rear rear right decorative body 3621 reach the drive position, and each LED is made to emit light at the timing of stopping the drive of each motor. In other words, one or two or more of the plurality of timings may be combined and executed.

Further, in this example, the state in which the LED is emitting light indicates a state in which the light emission is controlled in a predetermined emission pattern, and is not limited to the state in which the LED continues to be illuminated, but at least the illuminated state and the extinguished state. It also includes a blinking state that is controlled once or more. In any case, since it is possible to make the player feel the light emission of the LED dazzling, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the board, and the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, and the pin number printed on each board. It is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the outline of the electronic components and the like, and prevent the pachinko machine 1 from losing its view of the world, and to prevent deterioration of the design. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the game due to the decline.

Further, a back rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the back rear movable ornament 3110, a back upper rear decorative substrate 3452 provided behind the back rear rotating ornament 3440, and a back provided behind the back left decorative body 3521. When the LEDs mounted on each of the rear left decorative board 3522 and the rear rear right decorative board 3622 provided behind the rear rear right decorative body 3621 are caused to emit light, high brightness (in this example, the maximum brightness that can be set is set). The value (100%) may be half or more (85% or more in this example) of the settable brightness range (70 to 100% in this example), or higher than the backlight of the effect display device 1600. Light may be emitted). As a result, the LEDs are caused to emit light with higher brightness at a position closer to the player than the effect display device 1600, and thus it is possible to make the player feel the light from these LEDs dazzling and make it difficult for each substrate to be visually recognized. In addition, since the player who is paying attention to the effect display performed on the effect display device 1600 is irradiated with light stronger than the backlight of the effect display device 1600, a game accustomed to the brightness of the effect display device 1600. The probability that a person feels dazzling is increased, and the effect of making each substrate less visible is enhanced.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the back-rear decoration board 3114 provided behind the back-rear movable decoration 3110, the back-rear decoration board 3452 provided behind the back-rear rotating decoration 3440, and the back-rear Each of the rear back left decoration substrate 3522 provided behind the left decoration body 3521 and the rear rear right decoration board 3622 provided behind the rear back right decoration body 3621 adopts white as a resist of the LED mounting surface (front surface). At the same time, the information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic component arranged on the LED mounting surface is similar to white, and the reflectance and brightness are close to each other, and the visual difference It is printed on yellow silk with low contrast. As a result, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic part are arranged even when the board is visually recognized, as compared with the case of printing with a silk color other than white or yellow. It becomes difficult to identify information such as the outline. It should be noted that, when the present technical idea is exposed to the front of the effect display device 1600 and is in the most visible state, the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 and the back-and-back rear rotating decorative body are provided. Of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 provided behind the 3440, the back-rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the back-rear left decorative body 3521, and the back-rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the back-back right decorative body 3621. In order to make each board hard to be visible by making the LED mounted on each LED emit light, in addition to the technique, white is adopted as a resist on the LED mounting surface (front surface), and yellow silk is mounted on the LED mounting surface. Although it is possible to increase the effect by printing various kinds of information with, the technique is not essential for solving the problem.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, in the game effect performed on the effect display device 1600, the big hit expectation degree (the possibility of a big hit) of the change display being executed and the change display (holding display) being performed in the future is suggested. The expectation suggestion production is performed. In this expectation suggestion effect, the big hit expectation degree is suggested based on the type of image such as a character displayed on the effect display device 1600, color, pattern, and the like. For example, when displaying the same character, the jackpot expectation degree suggested as the color of the character is suggested in the order of white <blue <yellow <green <red <gold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a back-rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the back-removable decoration 3110, a back-rear decoration substrate 3452 provided behind the back-rear rotating decoration 3440, and a back-rear left decoration 3521. On the LED mounting surface of the rear back left decorative substrate 3522 provided on the rear side of the back and the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided on the rear of the rear right decorative body 3621, the direction of the IC, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, As the color of the silk that prints information such as the outline of the electronic components, the yellow color used to suggest the jackpot expectation is adopted. Therefore, it is irrelevant to the game printed on these back side movable decorations 3110, back side back rotation decorations 3440, back side left decorations 3521, and back side right decorations 3621 when they are visibly exposed. Although it prevents the player from clearly distinguishing that the information is written, even if it is recognized that there is something yellow, it suggests the jackpot expectation and plays it. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize that irrelevant information is written.

In addition, among the colors used to suggest the jackpot expectation, yellow, which indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, has the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic parts arranged on the LED mounting surface. Since it is used as the color of the silk that prints information such as outlines, it can make the player who thinks of the big hit expectation degree think that the big hit expectation degree is high, and suppresses the decline in the entertainment appeal it can. In addition, since yellow, which is used as the color of silk, is a color that is very similar to that of gold, which has a very high expected jackpot expectation (70% expectation of a jackpot), it is a back provided behind the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back. Of the rear decorative substrate 3114, the rear upper rear decorative substrate 3452 provided behind the rear upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the rear rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the rear rear left decorative body 3521, and the rear rear right decorative body 3621. A player who just glances at the rear right decoration board 3622 provided at the rear may mistakenly recognize that it is gold, and it is very likely that he will be a big hit when he recognizes that there is something like gold. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game of the player who recognizes that it is suggested to be high. In addition, as shown in FIG. 149, the back-back movable decorative body 3110 has a transparent portion (for example, a portion of the decorative body 3111 excluding the metal decorative portion 3111d) and an opaque portion (metal decorative portion 3111d). Is formed with a gold-colored metal decoration portion 3111d. Then, when the back rear movable decoration body 3110 is visibly exposed, it can be recognized that the player who glanced at the metal decoration portion 3111d suggested that the jackpot expectation is very high. Note that the metal decoration portion 3111d is not limited to the same color as the gold color having a high jackpot expectation degree among the colors suggesting the jackpot expectation degree, but is similar to the gold color and is similar to the gold color or similar to the gold color. May be formed in a different color (for example, yellow) or the like, or a back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the back-removable decorative body 3110 and a back surface provided behind the back-rear rotating ornament 3440. Silk printed on the LED mounting surface of the rear decorative substrate 3452, the rear rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the rear rear left decorative body 3521, and the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided rearward of the rear rear right decorative body 3621. In addition to the above-mentioned yellow as the color of the above, among the colors that suggest the jackpot expectation degree, the same color as the gold with a high jackpot expectation degree, a color similar to the degree that it is recognized as the same as the gold color, and a color similar to the gold color Etc. may be used.

In addition, as described above, the back rear movable decoration body 3110, the back top rear rotation decoration body 3440, the back rear left decoration body 3521, and the back rear right decoration body 3621 are provided in the effect display device 1600 from a standby position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. It is designed to move to a drive position visible to the player in front, and during this movement, a back-rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the back-removable decoration 3110 and a back-rear rotating decoration 3440 behind. Gaze at the back-up rear decorative board 3452, the back-back left decorative board 3522 provided behind the back-back left decorative body 3521, and the back-back right decorative board 3622 provided behind the back-back right decorative body 3621. Therefore, it is difficult for a player who just glanced at these boards to write information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic parts. It is difficult to recognize, and it is easy to recall the suggestion of the jackpot expectation. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement of the game due to a decrease in designability.

Further, a back-rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, a back-up rear decoration board 3452 provided behind the back-rear rotation decoration body 3440, and a back behind the back-rear left decoration body 3521. A member similar to the above inner lens may be provided in front of each of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 and the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the rear rear right decorative body 3621. As a result, even if these boards are visually recognized when the LED emits light, information unrelated to the game written on the boards can be prevented from being recognized as information by the player, so that the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to prevent the world view from collapsing and prevent the deterioration of the design, and to prevent the deterioration of the entertainment appeal.

In addition, in the above-described example, the movable decorative body on which the board on which the LED is mounted is mounted (the rear rear movable decorative body 3110, the rear upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the rear rear left decorative body 3521, and the rear rear right decorative body 3621). The case has been described in which the player is moved from the standby position, which is difficult for the player to see, to the drive position, which is visible to the player. However, by moving the movable ornament, the ornament on which the board on which the LED board is mounted is mounted is played. The present technical idea can be applied even if the state is changed so that it is difficult for the player to see it and the player can see it. For example, the rear back movable decorative body 3110, which is covered by the front front decorative body 3421 and is difficult to be visually recognized by the player under normal circumstances, is moved rearward by moving the front front decorative body 3421 to the ascending position and the descending position. Movable from the state where it is difficult for the player to see the front of the ornamental body 3110 to see it behind the movable ornamental body 3110 which is open to the front so that the player can see it (exposed state). Even when the light emitting effect and the movable effect are performed by the decorative body 3110, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, and the part number described on the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the rear rear movable decorative body 3110. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize information such as the pin number and the outline of the electronic component.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 300, after the display effect is started by the effect display device 1600, when the motor is driven to move the front back decoration 3421 from the raised position to the lowered position, the back front The LED mounted on the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is controlled to emit light in accordance with the timing of driving the motor that moves the decoration 3421, and the back-removable decoration 3110 emits light. After the end of the movable effect, the back rear movable decoration 3110 is matched with the timing when the back front decorative body 3421 has finished moving from the lowered position to the raised position (the timing at which the motor that moves the front back decorative body 3421 is stopped). The LED mounted on the back rear decorative substrate 3114 provided at the rear of the LED may be turned off.

This allows the player to view the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 from a state in which it is difficult for the player to see the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in a state where the LEDs mounted on the back-rear decorative board 3114 provided behind the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 are controlled to emit light. Change to a visible state (visible to the player in a state in which the LEDs mounted on the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the rear-rear movable decoration 3110 are controlled to emit light). Therefore, the rear rear decoration substrate 3114 can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the light emission of the LED mounted on the rear rear decoration substrate 3114, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, which are described on the rear rear decoration substrate 3114, Since it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the information such as the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic component, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being lost and prevent the design from being deteriorated. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the interest in playing games.

The timing for controlling the light emission of the LED mounted on the rear back decoration substrate 3114 is not limited to the above-described timing, and the rear front decoration body 3421 is moved from the raised position to the lowered position, for example, the rear back movable. It may be the timing when the decorative body 3110 is actually visible to the player, the timing immediately before the back front decorative body 3421 reaches the lowered position, or the like. The back front decorative body 3421 reaches the lowered position. It may be timing. That is, since it is unlikely that the player is distracted by the movement of the front back decoration 3421 during the movement of the front back decoration 3421 and pays attention to the back rear movable decoration 3110, The LED mounted on the back rear decorative substrate 3114 may be controlled to emit light at a timing when it is in a state of being easily noticed.

Further, it is difficult for a player to visually recognize a front movable decorative body that can be moved to a predetermined standby position and a driving position, and a front movable decorative body that is provided behind the front movable decorative body in the standby position and that moves the front movable decorative body to the drive position. When a rear movable decorative body that changes from a state to a state visible to the player and is operable in a predetermined manner (rotation, vibration, etc.) is provided, the rear movable decorative body is predetermined. The information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic parts arranged on the board provided on the back side of the rear movable decorative body can be obtained by operating in the form of You may make it hard to be visually recognized by the player.

For example, the back front decorative body 3421 is configured to be movable between a raised position and a lowered position, and the back front rotating decorative body 3410 is located behind the back front decorative body 3421 in the raised position in a state where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. In the case of providing the above, after the display effect is started by the effect display device 1600, when the motor is driven to move the back upper front decorative body 3421 from the raised position to the lower position, the back upper front decorative body 3421 is provided. The front back rotation drive motor 3425 is driven to rotate the back front rotation decorative body 3410 in accordance with the timing of driving the motor for moving the, and after the back front rotation decorative body 3410 completes the light emission effect and the movable effect, The front back rotation drive motor 3425 is stopped at the timing when the back front decoration 3421 has finished moving from the lowered position to the raised position (the timing at which the motor for moving the front front decoration 3421 is stopped). May be.

As a result, the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 is changed from a state in which the player cannot visually recognize the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 to a state in which the player can see the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410. It becomes difficult to stare at the back front decorative substrate 3422 provided behind the front rotating decorative body 3410, and the number of pins of the connector described on the back front decorative substrate 3422, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the electronic component It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from losing its view of the world by making it difficult for the player to visually recognize information such as the outline of the pachinko machine. become able to.

In the present example, the state in which the movable decorative body (in this example, the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410) is operating means that the drive control is performed in a predetermined operation mode. The present invention is not limited to a state of continuously moving without stopping, and also includes an intermittent operation state in which at least a moving state and a stopped state are controlled once or more.

Further, the timing of operating the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 is not limited to the above-described one, and the back-front rotating decorative body 3410 may be moved during the movement from the raised position to the lowered position. The timing may be the timing when it is actually visible to the player, the timing immediately before the back front decorative body 3421 reaches the lowered position, or the timing when the back front decorative body 3421 reaches the lowered position. Good. That is, since the player is distracted by the movement of the front back decoration 3421 during the movement of the front back decoration 3421 and is less likely to pay attention to the back front rotation ornament 3410, the back front decoration 3421 is not likely to occur. May be moved at a timing when the front and back front rotating decorative body 3410 is easily noticed.

[Observation assistance by surrounding light emitting means]

Next, an example of making information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline line on which the electronic parts are arranged on the board on which the LEDs are mounted hard to be visually recognized by the player A modified example will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined LED is turned off under a specific condition. In this case, since the LED is turned off, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic number printed on the substrate on which the LED is mounted are visually recognized. There is a possibility that the player visually recognizes the information such as the outline of the parts arranged. In this example, even if a predetermined LED is turned off under a specific condition, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the information written on the board on which the LED is mounted. The details will be described below.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when a specific reach effect is executed in the display effect executed by the effect display device 1600, the LED provided around the effect display device 1600 is turned off. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lower back middle lifting drive motor 3352 is used to rotate the lifting arm 3357 to move the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 from the lowered position to the raised position, the back upper back rotation is performed. When moving the decorative body 3440 to the appearance position below the back-up front decoration body 3421, the back-rear left rotating decoration body 3510 is moved to the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the right of the back-front left effect unit 3700. In the case of moving, the back-and-right rotation decorative body 3610 is moved to the first appearance position or the second-appearance position on the left side of the back-and-front right effect unit 3800, and the back-and-back drive motor 3126 moves the slide guide 3130 downward. When the lock by the lock member 3134 is released by moving and the back rear movable decoration 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearance position, it is mounted on the back front left decoration substrate 3714 of the back front left decoration unit 3710. An LED (LED arranged in the area A in FIG. 301), an LED mounted on the back front decorative substrate 3422 of the back production unit 3400 (LED arranged in the area B in FIG. 301), The LED mounted on the back-front right decoration board 3814 of the back-front right decoration unit 3810 (the LED arranged in the area C in FIG. 301) and the back-bottom right decoration board 3253 of the back-bottom right effect unit 3250. LED (LED arranged in the area D in FIG. 301) and LED mounted on the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 of the lower left left rendering unit 3200 (LED arranged in the area D in FIG. 301). ), and turn off.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a movable decorative body (a back lower middle decorative body unit 3320, a back upper rear rotating decoration body 3440, a back rear left rotating decoration body 3510, a back rear right rotation) is provided in front of the effect display device 1600. When performing the effect of exposing the decorative body 3610 and the back and rear movable decorative body 3110), the LED provided around the effect display device 1600 is turned off to expose the effect display device 1600 in front. It does not interfere with the visual confirmation of the effect executed by the movable decorative body. In addition, when the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is not moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the LED mounted on the lower back first decoration board 3322 provided in the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is turned off. (LED arranged in the area D in FIG. 301) may be used.

Moreover, when turning off the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600, the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decoration board 402 and the door frame right side decoration board 418). , The door frame top central decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, the door frame top right decoration board 457, the plate upper left decoration board 273, the plate upper right decoration board 278, and the plate center upper decoration board 314 are also controlled to emit light. Control may be performed). That is, in a situation where the LED provided around the effect display device 1600 is turned off and the board on which the LED is mounted is easily visible, the door frame right provided so as to surround the game area 5a of the game board 5 The LED mounted on the door frame right side decoration board 418 of the side unit 410, the LED mounted on the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame top of the door frame top unit 450 The central mounting board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the LEDs mounted on the door frame top right decoration board 457 are controlled to emit light.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame top unit 450 of the door frame 3 are located in front of the pachinko machine 1 (on the player side) with respect to the game board 5. It is provided so as to project. That is, the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light at a position closer to the player than the game board 5.

Therefore, when the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600 are turned off, the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame top unit 450 of the door frame 3 are provided. By controlling the light emission of the LED, it is possible to control the light emission around the game board 5 at a position closer to the player than the game board 5, so that the light emission of the LED can be felt dazzling, or the position close to the player can be normal. It is possible to prevent the player's attention from the game board 5 toward the door frame 3 and to stare in the direction of the pachinko machine 1 by performing the light emission control that is more emphasized.

As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the board on which the LED provided around the effect display device 1600 is mounted, and the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, and the pin number on each board, Since it becomes possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize information such as the outline of the electronic component, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing and prevent the design from deteriorating. It becomes possible to prevent a decline in the interest in playing games.

In addition, as a light emission mode at the time of controlling the light emission of the LED provided in the door frame 3, for example, the LED is kept on for a certain period of time, the blinking state in which the LED is turned on and off at least once. Which is higher than normal (maximum value of luminance that can be set (100%) in this example, and more than half of the luminance range that can be set (70 to 100% in this example) (85% or more in this example)) The brightness may be higher than that of the backlight of the effect display device 1600) (not only the one that keeps lighting for a certain period but also the blinking state and the flash), etc. Is mentioned. In any case, the light emitted from the LED provided on the door frame 3 is made to be dazzling, or the LED provided on the door frame 3 is emphasized more than usual to control the light emission, thereby paying attention to the player. To prevent the player from staring in the direction of the pachinko machine 1 by directing it toward the door frame 3 around the game board 5, or by making the difference in light and dark clearer than other areas. Since it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the board on which the LED mounted on the game board 5 is mounted. As a result, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic parts arranged on the board mounted with the LEDs provided on the game board 5 is displayed by the player. It is difficult to visually recognize the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being disturbed and prevent the deterioration of the designability. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the entertainment appeal associated with the deterioration of the designability.

Further, under a specific condition, the LED mounted on the back front left decoration board 3714 of the back front left decoration unit 3710, the LED mounted on the back front decoration board 3422 of the back production unit 3400, and the back The LED mounted on the back front right decoration substrate 3814 of the front right decoration unit 3810, the LED mounted on the back lower right decoration board 3253 of the back lower right rendering unit 3250, and the back of the back lower left rendering unit 3200 Even when the LED mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 3203 is turned off, the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is on. Therefore, by the light from the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the light from the LED provided on the door frame 3, the back front left decoration board 3714 of the back front left decoration body unit 3710 and the back front front of the back effect production unit 3400. A decoration board 3422, a back front right decoration board 3814 of a back front right decoration unit 3810, a back bottom right decoration board 3253 of a back bottom right rendering unit 3250, and a back bottom left decoration board 3203 of a back bottom left rendering unit 3200. Since light can be emitted from the periphery of these substrates by sandwiching between them, it is possible to generate light and dark between the region where the substrate is arranged and the periphery of the substrate. It can be difficult to see.

In addition, the back front left decoration board 3714 of the back front left decoration body unit 3710 in which LEDs are mounted on the front surface, the back front front decoration board 3422 of the back production unit 3400, and the back front right of the back front right decoration body unit 3810 A member similar to the above-mentioned inner lens is provided in front of each of the decorative substrate 3814, the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 of the lower back right rendering unit 3250, and the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 of the lower back left rendering unit 3200. You may do it. As a result, even if these boards are visually recognized when the mounted LEDs are turned off, it is possible to prevent the information irrelevant to the game written on the boards from being recognized as information by the player. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from losing its view of the world, and to prevent the deterioration of the design, and to prevent the deterioration of the entertainment appeal.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 on which LEDs are mounted, the back front front decorative board 3422 of the back production unit 3400, and the back Each of the back front right decorative board 3814 of the front right decorative body unit 3810, the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right rendering unit 3250, and the back lower left decorative board 3203 of the back lower left rendering unit 3200 is an LED. White is used as the resist on the mounting surface (front surface), and information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic component is reflected on the LED mounting surface in white. It is printed on yellow silk, which has a close ratio and lightness and little visual difference (contrast). As a result, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic part are arranged even when the board is visually recognized, as compared with the case of printing with a silk color other than white or yellow. It becomes difficult to identify information such as the outline. It should be noted that the present technical idea makes it difficult to visually recognize each substrate by controlling the light emission around the substrate on which the LED is mounted in a predetermined mode when the LED is turned off. Although it is possible to enhance the effect by adopting white as the resist on the mounting surface (front surface) and by printing various information on the LED mounting surface with yellow silk, these techniques are required to solve the problems. It is not mandatory.

In addition, as a specific condition, a movable decorative body (a lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, a rear upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, a rear rear left rotating decorative body 3510, a rear rear right rotating decorative body 3610, Also, the case of performing the effect of exposing the back and rear movable decorative body 3110) has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is mounted on the back front left decorative substrate 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710. LED mounted on the back front decoration board 3422 of the back effect unit 3400, LED mounted on the back front right decoration board 3814 of the back right decoration unit 3810, and back lower right effect unit 3250 LED mounted on the lower back right decorative board 3253, LED mounted on the lower back left decorative board 3203 of the lower back left effect unit 3200, movable decorative body (back lower middle decorative body unit 3320, rear upper back rotating decoration) A plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5, such as the LEDs provided on the body 3440, the back rear left rotation decoration body 3510, the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610, and the back rear movable decoration body 3110) are turned off. On the other hand, when the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light (the light is not turned off), for example, when a door opening error is detected when the opening of the door frame 3 is detected. The present technical idea can be applied to the above. Also, even under specific conditions, the light emitting members (lamps, LEDs, etc.) provided on the game board 5 should not be turned off for those that display important information related to the game, such as the function display unit 1400. Good.

[Occupation of the board mounted on the production operation unit]
Next, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic parts, which are provided on the effect operation unit 300 and on which the LEDs are mounted on the surface, are described on the effect operation ring decoration board 352. An example will be described in which the information such as the contour line displayed is made hard to be visually recognized by the player. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the LED mounted on the production operation ring decoration board 352 is turned off (not limited to turning off, the brightness may be lowered than usual). .. In this case, since the LED is turned off, the production operation ring decoration board 352 is visually recognized, so that the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, and the pin number on the production operation ring decoration board 352 are indicated. The player may visually recognize the information such as the outline of the electronic components. In this example, even when the LED mounted on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is turned off based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, or is in the standby lighting state in which the brightness is lower than usual, The information written on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is made difficult for the player to visually recognize. The details will be described below.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when performing the player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300, the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300. An LED mounted on the surface of a central button decoration board 376 and an outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided inside, and an LED mounted on the surface of a production operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the production operation ring 330, The center button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decoration lens 379, the outer peripheral button cover 380, and the rotary operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330 are light-emitted and decorated.

Then, when the player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 is finished, the central button decoration provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300. The LED mounted on the surface of the board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are turned off.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when performing the player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300, the effect operation unit 300 is controlled to emit light. Then, the central button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decoration lens 379, the outer peripheral button cover 380, and the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330 are light-emitted and decorated, whereby the player performs the operation operation. The rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the unit 300 are focused on to prompt these operations.

On the other hand, in the normal time when the player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 is not performed, the center provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300. The LED mounted on the surface of the button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are turned off.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, since the player participation type effect is not performed, the central button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 are provided on the surface. When the production operation unit 300 is operated at a normal time when the mounted LED and the LED mounted on the surface of the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided below the production operation ring 330 are turned off, The center of the effect operation button unit 360 is controlled by controlling the LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the central button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 for a fixed period of time. The button cover 375, the outer peripheral decoration lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are decorated with light.

Accordingly, the central button decoration board 376 and the outer circumference button decoration board 377 can be made hard to be visually recognized by the light emitted from the LED, and the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, etc. Since information such as pin numbers and outlines on which electronic parts are arranged is hard to be visually recognized by the player, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being disturbed and prevent deterioration of the design. Can be suppressed. In this way, during the normal time when the player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation part 301 in the effect operation unit 300 is not performed, the effect operation part 301 is operated and the player effects. When attention is paid to the operation unit 301, the LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the central button decoration board 376 and the peripheral button decoration board 377 are controlled to emit light, and the central button cover 375 and the peripheral decoration lens of the effect operation button unit 360 are controlled. By illuminating and decorating 379, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the central button decoration board 376 and the peripheral button decoration board 377 by the light emitted from the central button cover 375 and the peripheral decoration lens 379 and the LED which are illuminated. Become.

It should be noted that when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during normal operation, the LEDs mounted on the surface of the central button decoration board 376 are controlled to emit light for a certain period of time to cause the central button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360 to emit light. Control to decorate, control the LEDs mounted on the surface of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 to emit light for a certain period of time to control the outer peripheral decoration lens 379 to emit light, and perform a production operation provided below the production operation ring 330. Any one of or a combination of two or more of controlling the LEDs mounted on the surface of the ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light for a certain period of time to control the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to emit light (all). May be executed). Further, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated again before the elapse of a certain period, these LEDs may be turned off when the certain period has elapsed from the operation. That is, these LEDs may be turned off when the period during which the effect operation unit 301 is not operated reaches a certain period after the effect operation unit 301 is operated.

Moreover, you may make it differ in the LED which carries out light emission control according to the site|part of the production|operation production unit 300 operated normally, for example, when the press operation part 303 is operated, the production operation button unit of the production|operation production unit 300. The central button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decoration lens 379, by controlling the light emission of the LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the central button decoration substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 provided in 360 for a certain period. Also, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is decorated with light, and when the rotary operation unit 302 is operated, the LEDs mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are displayed for a certain period. The light emission control may be performed so that the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is illuminated. As a result, it is possible to control the light emission of the LED provided in the part that the player is paying attention to, and it is possible to prevent the board on which the LED is mounted from being visually recognized.

Further, in the above-described example, it is mounted on the surface of the central button decoration board 376 and the outer circumference button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 at the normal time when the player participation type effect is not performed. Although the LED and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are shown to be turned off, the present invention is not limited to turning off the LED, and is a player participation type effect. In the production-time light emission mode for urging the operation of the production operation unit 301, and in the standby-time light emission mode in which the luminance is lower than in the production-time lighting state (including not only the lighting state but also the light-off state). The present technical idea can be applied as long as the light emission is controlled by switching.

In addition, the LED mounted on the surface of the central button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 because the player participation type effect is not performed, and the effect. When the production operation unit 300 is operated during normal operation in which the LEDs mounted on the surface of the production operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the operation ring 330 are controlled to emit light in the standby emission mode, In addition to or in addition to the processing for controlling the light emission by switching from the standby light emission mode to the production light emission mode, in addition to the processing, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is drive-controlled to vibrate the pressing operation unit 303 for a certain period ( Alternatively, the operation ring drive motor 342 may be drive-controlled to rotate or vibrate (rotate left and right alternately) the rotation operation unit 302 for a certain period.

That is, the central button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 are based on the operation of the effect operation unit 300 during the normal time when the player participation type effect is not performed. The board 377 is moved (vibrated in this example) so that it is difficult to stare, and the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is operated so as to overlap the front of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 to block the field of view (the book). In the example, it may be rotated or vibrated). As a result, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the electronic components described on the mounting surface of the central button decoration board 376, the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are arranged. Since it is difficult for the player to visually recognize information such as the outline of the pachinko machine, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being disturbed and prevent the design from being deteriorated.

In this example, the effect operation ring including the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided inside and the rotation operation section 302 that constitutes the surface of the effect operation ring 330 and covers the front of the effect operation ring decoration board 352. Although the rotation operation unit 302 is operated in front of the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 in 330, a decorative body provided separately from the production operation ring 330 is provided in front of the production operation ring decoration substrate 352. The operation operation ring decoration board 352 may be operated (vibrated, reciprocating, etc.) so as to at least partially overlap the operation operation ring decoration board 352 so that the visual recognition of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 may be blocked. Only the central button cover 375 and the peripheral button cover 380 that cover the surfaces of the central button decoration substrate 376 and the peripheral button decoration substrate 377 are vibrated without moving the central button decoration substrate 376 and the peripheral button decoration substrate 377 provided in the 360. This may make it difficult to visually recognize the central button decoration board 376 and the peripheral button decoration board 377.

In addition, the center button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360 is displaced from the normal (non-operation) reference position (origin) by the press detection sensor 381 based on the operation of the press operation unit 303. When it is detected that the central button cover 375 is returned to the reference position (origin) (origin return operation), the raising/lowering detection sensor 382 may be operated by pulling the effect operation button unit 360. When it is detected that the effect operation button unit 360 is displaced from the normal (non-movable) lowered position, the operation (origin return operation) of returning the effect operation button unit 360 to the reference position (origin) is performed. Alternatively, the raising/lowering detection sensor 382 may detect that the effect operation button unit 360 is in a halfway position which is neither a normal (non-movable) lowered position nor a movable raised position. In such a case, an operation of returning the effect operation button unit 360 to the reference point (origin) (origin return operation) may be performed.

In this case, since the central button decoration board 376 and the outer circumference button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 move with the origin returning operation, it becomes difficult to stare at the surfaces of these boards. In addition to the case where the effect operation button unit 360 is operated, the above-described movable decorative body (back rear movable decoration body 3110, back top rear rotation decoration body 3440, back rear left decoration body 3521, back rear right decoration body 3621). When the movable ornament is returned from the standby position (origin), the movable ornament may be returned to the standby position (origin) (origin return operation). Even during operation, the substrates mounted on the movable decorative body move, which makes it difficult to stare at the surfaces of these substrates.

It should be noted that any of the above-described movable decorative bodies (back lower middle decorative body unit 3320, rear upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, rear rear left rotating decorative body 3510, rear rear right rotating decorative body 3610, and rear rear movable decorative body 3110) may be used. Even when it is detected that it is displaced from the standby position or the drive position due to the influence, the operation of returning to the standby position (origin return operation) may be performed. Lower middle decorative body unit 3320, rear upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, rear rear left rotating decorative body 3510, rear rear right rotating decorative body 3610, and rear rear movable decorative body 3110) are moved and mounted on the surface of the substrate. Can be difficult to stare at. That is, in the movable decorations such as the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440, the back-left rotating decoration 3510, the back-right rotating decoration 3610, and the back-rear moving decoration 3110, which are difficult to see from the player, the standby In a state in which the player may visually recognize the surface of the board mounted in the state of being displaced from the position, it is difficult to stare at the surface of the board by moving the board by operating this movable decorative body. At the same time, it may be moved to the standby position to change the state where the surface of the substrate is visible from the state where it is difficult to see.

In the player participation type effect described above, the operations of the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation section 301 are enabled over a predetermined period of the game effect, and the rotation operation section 302 or the pressing operation of the effect operation section 301 is performed. When the operation unit 303 is operated, the display content of the game effect executed on the effect display device 1600 is changed according to the operation. That is, the player comes to pay attention to the effect operation unit 301 by executing the player participation type effect. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, before the start of the period (operation valid period) during which the operations of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 are valid in the player participation type effect, the effect is produced. The LED mounted on the surface of the central button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the operation unit 300, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330. The LEDs mounted on the surface are controlled to emit light in a light emission mode during production, and the central button cover 375 of the production operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decoration lens 379, the outer peripheral button cover 380, and the rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation ring 330 are controlled. By illuminating and decorating, the central button decoration substrate 376, the peripheral button decoration substrate 377, and the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are made difficult to be visually recognized.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 302, a central button provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 at the timing of starting the player participation type effect before the operation of the effect operation unit 301 becomes effective. The LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and the LEDs mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are controlled to emit light. The center button cover 375 of the operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decoration lens 379, the outer peripheral button cover 380, and the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 are decorated with light emission, and the rotary operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 are operated. When a period during which the operation is valid (operation valid period) has elapsed, these LEDs are turned off. As a result, before the player recognizes that the player participation type effect is started and pays attention to the effect operation unit 301, the central button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decoration lens 379, the outer peripheral button cover 380, Also, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission, and the central button decoration substrate 376, the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377, and the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are suppressed from being visually recognized, and these substrates are provided. It is possible to suppress the visual recognition of information unrelated to the game, such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outer shape line on which the electronic parts are arranged.

Note that the LED light emission mode may be changed before the operation valid period starts and during the operation valid period. For example, a color that emits light depending on the light emission mode before the operation valid period starts and the light emission mode during the operation valid period. Alternatively, it may be possible to determine whether or not the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is effective by changing the LED or the brightness of the LED. That is, the LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the central button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 at the timing of starting the player participation type effect, and the effect operation ring. The LED mounted on the surface of the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided below 330 is controlled to emit light in the first production light emission mode, and during the operation effective period, the first production light emission mode is changed to the second production time. The light emission may be controlled by switching to the light emission mode. Further, at the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed, the light emission control is performed by switching from the second effect light emission mode to the first effect light emission mode, and the light emission control is performed after the game effect is switched from the first effect light emission mode to the standby light emission mode. You may do so.

Further, when the player participation type effect is started, a display for urging the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this example, an image similar to the effect operation unit 301 is displayed, and "Press a button!" is displayed to prompt the player to press the effect operation unit 301. In addition, you may make it perform the expectation suggestion production which suggests a big hit expectation degree by changing the aspect (color and pattern in this example) of the image of the production operation part 301 displayed on the production display device 1600. .. As described above, in the present example, the big hit expectation degree suggested in the order of white <blue <yellow <green <red <gold is set to be high, and the aspect of the image of the effect operation unit 301 is set to one of these. You may make it suggest a big hit expectation degree by setting it as a color.

Further, the LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the central button decoration board 376 and the peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and the effect operation ring decoration provided below the effect operation ring 330. When the LED mounted on the surface of the substrate 352 is controlled to emit light in the second effect light emission mode, the image is the same as the image of the effect operation unit 301 displayed on the effect display device 1600 (not limited to perfect match, but substantially the same). The light emission may be controlled by colors (including the same one). As a result, the effect operation unit 301 can be illuminated and decorated in association with the expectation suggesting effect executed on the effect display device 1600, and the sense of presence is enhanced. When the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is illuminated and decorated before the timing of displaying the image of the effect operation unit 301 on the effect display device 1600, the image of the effect display unit 301 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Up to the timing at which the effect operation unit 301 is illuminated and decorated with a normal (lowest big hit expectation color) emission color (white in this example) and the image of the effect operation unit 301 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or the timing. After a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, several seconds), the color may be changed to the same color as the image of the effect operation unit 301 displayed on the effect display device 1600 to perform light emission decoration.

[Lamp/LED brightness adjustment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the LED provided on the door frame 3 (at least the door frame left side decoration substrate in this example) is operated by rotating the rotary operation section 302 of the effect operation section 301 in the effect operation unit 300. 402, a door frame right side decorative substrate 418, a door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, and a plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decoration board 278, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface of the plate center decoration board 314 may be adjusted in brightness.), and the LEDs provided on the game board 5 (at least in this example). A plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame left side decoration board 402, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, the door frame top right decoration board 457, It is possible to adjust the brightness of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface of the back-rear decoration board 3114, the back-rear decoration board 3452, the back-rear left decoration board 3522, and the back-rear right decoration board 3622 which are mounted on the movable decoration body. It is also possible to adjust the brightness of a plurality of LEDs as a backlight of the effect display device 1600. However, the LEDs (for example, in the function display unit 1400) provided in the display device that displays important information related to the game. It is desirable that the brightness of the provided LED) is not adjustable.) and the brightness of the LED can be adjusted in steps of 5% over a range of 70% to 100%.

Specifically, when the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise, the brightness of the LED provided on the door frame 3 and the LED provided on the game board 5 is improved, and the rotary operation unit 302 is operated. When rotated counterclockwise, the brightness of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the LEDs provided on the game board 5 is reduced.

Further, when operating the rotating operation unit 302 to adjust the brightness, a barometer according to the current brightness is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for a certain period of time, and the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise. When operated, the scale of the barometer is increased until the brightness reaches 100%, and when the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise, the scale of the barometer is decreased until the brightness reaches 70%. As described above, when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness, the display operation unit 300 is provided in the effect operation button unit 360 by directing attention to the display content of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to prevent the central button decoration board 376, the outer peripheral button decoration board 37, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 from being visually recognized, and the connectors described on these boards. Since it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the information such as the number of pins, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline line on which the electronic parts are arranged, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being destroyed and to improve the design. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the entertainment appeal.

Further, as described above, since the player participation type effect is not performed, it is mounted on the surface of the central button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300. When the LED and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are turned off during normal operation, when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated, the central button decoration board is operated. LEDs mounted on the surface of 376, LEDs mounted on the surface of outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and LEDs mounted on the surface of performance operation ring decoration board 352 provided below performance operation ring 330. , Are controlled to emit light for a certain period of time to cause the central button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decoration lens 379, and the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to emit light. Then, when the period during which the effect operation unit 301 is not operated reaches a certain period, the display of the barometer of the effect display device 1600 disappears and the LED of the effect operation unit 300 is turned off.

In this way, by controlling the light emission of the LEDs provided in the effect operation unit 300 while operating the rotation operation unit 302 to adjust the brightness, the central button decoration board 376 on which these LEDs are mounted, The surfaces of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the light emitted from the LEDs.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the central button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and below the effect operation ring 330. With respect to the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided in, the brightness cannot be adjusted. That is, the brightness of the LEDs provided in the effect operation unit 300, which is provided at a position close to the player and is easily noticed, is controlled so that the light emission is controlled with the brightness set in advance. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 300 is light-emitted and decorated in the above-described effect light emitting mode, it is always mounted on the surface of the central button decoration board 376, the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and the operation operation ring decoration board 352 with a certain brightness or more. It is possible to cause the LED to emit light, and the player emits light from the LED in a situation where the player pays attention to the effect operation unit 300 (a situation in which the effect operation unit 301 is operated such as player participation type effect or volume adjustment is performed). The central button decoration board 376, the outer circumference button decoration board 377, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the emitted light, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, and the parts described on these boards can be reduced. Since information such as numbers, pin numbers, and outlines on which electronic components are arranged is hard to be visually recognized by the player, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being disturbed and prevent deterioration in design. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in playing games.

In addition, as described above, white is used as the resist on the mounting surface of the central button decoration board 376, the peripheral button decoration board 377, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the number of pins of the connector is yellow silk on the mounting surface. Information such as the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic component is printed. As described above, in this example, since the information is printed on the mounting surface of the board by the yellow silk, which has a small visual difference (contrast) with respect to white, when the LED is turned on as well as when the LED is turned off. Even this information is difficult to identify.

It should be noted that the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is performed for a certain period (for example, before and after the special symbol that is variably displayed is stopped for a certain period from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on until the peripheral control MPU is activated). It may be always executable except for one or both of a certain period of time), or a specific condition such as a period during which a demonstration is performed by the performance display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. It may be executable only when is satisfied. Further, the result of the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 may be immediately reflected, or the result of the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 depending on the situation (whether or not the variable display is being performed). May be reflected immediately and the result of the brightness adjustment may be reflected at a timing later than the operation timing of the rotation operation unit 302.

In this example, the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be executed even when the door frame 3 is open. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened, the LED mounted on the back front left decoration board 3714 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 and the LED mounted on the back front decoration board 3422 of the back production unit 3400 are mounted. LED, LED mounted on the back-front right decoration board 3814 of the back-front right decoration unit 3810, LED mounted on the back-bottom right decoration board 3253 of the back-bottom right effect unit 3250, and back-bottom left effect unit 3200 LED mounted on the lower back left decorative substrate 3203, movable decorative body (back lower middle decorative body unit 3320, rear upper rear rotating decoration 3440, rear rear left rotating decoration 3510, rear rear right rotating decoration 3610, and The LEDs provided on the game board 5 such as the LEDs provided on the back rear movable decoration body 3110) are turned off (the lighting disabled state), and the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (this example). Then, at least the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, and the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, The plate upper right decorative substrate 278 and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 may be controlled to emit light. That is, when the rotary operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness with the door frame 3 opened, the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 are turned off. However, it is not possible to judge the brightness based on the light emitting states of the plurality of LEDs.

On the other hand, in the state where the door frame 3 is not opened (the door frame 3 is closed), the LED mounted on the back front left decoration board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710, the back production unit 3400. LED mounted on the back upper front decorative board 3422, LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, mounted on the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right effect unit 3250 LED, LED mounted on the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 of the lower back left effect unit 3200, movable decorative body (back lower middle decorative body unit 3320, rear upper rear rotating decoration 3440, rear rear left rotating decoration) There is no control to turn off a plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5, such as the LEDs provided on the body 3510, the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610, and the back back movable decoration body 3110 (lighting). Possible state). Therefore, in the state where the door frame 3 is closed, when the brightness is adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302, the brightness can be determined by the light emitting state of the LED provided on the game board 5.

Further, as described above, the back-front left decorative substrate 3714, the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, the back-front right decorative substrate 3814, the back-bottom right decorative substrate 3253, the back-bottom left decorative substrate 3203, the back-back decorative substrate 3114, the back-up rear Also for the decoration board 3452, the back-rear left decoration board 3522, and the back-rear right decoration board 3622, white is used as the resist for the mounting surface, and the mounting surface is made of yellow silk with the number of pins of the connector, the IC direction, and the parts. Information such as numbers, pin numbers, and outlines on which electronic parts are arranged is printed. Therefore, even when the door frame 3 is opened and the LEDs mounted on these boards are in the unlightable state, it is possible to make it difficult to identify these pieces of information.

[Backside emission of pachinko machines]
Conventionally, the back side of a pachinko machine is only mounted with a control board and the like, and is not a part to be recognized by the player, so no special measures have been taken except for fraudulent measures. In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment employs a novel configuration that has never existed in the past so that various work efficiencies for the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. This will be described below with reference to FIGS. 303 to 308.

FIG. 303 is a side view schematically showing the light from the light-emitting ornament at the standby position when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side, and FIG. 304 is at the appearance position when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side. FIG. 305 is a side view schematically showing light from a light emitting decoration, FIG. 305 is a view showing a back rear decorative substrate provided with a plurality of holes, and FIG. 306 is a light emitting region on the back side of a pachinko machine. FIG. 307 is a front view showing the gaming board, and FIG. 307 is a perspective view showing the light emitting area on the side surface of the game board seen from the left front side; and FIG. 308 is a perspective view showing the light emitting area on the side surface side of the game board seen from the left back side. Is.

(About the light from the luminous decoration)
The game board 5 of the present example is provided with an effect display device 1600 having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image, and is visually recognized from the front side to surround the display area of the effect display device 1600. Is provided with a plurality of light emitting decorations. Further, the back unit 3000 is provided with a back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape whose front is open and which has a square opening 3010a on the back wall. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, whereas the various units having the light-emitting decorations are located inside the back box 3010 and in front of the effect display device 1600. It is installed.

As the light emitting decorative body of this example, there are provided a back front rotating decoration 3410, a back front decorative body 3421, a back rear decorative body 3451, a back rear movable decoration 3110, and the like. Regarding the LED mounted in, there are a case where it emits light as a part of the effect when the symbol is variably displayed, and a case where it emits light as a decoration of the game board 5 when the symbol is not variably displayed.

First, the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421 will be described with reference to FIGS. 303 and 304. As described in detail above, when viewed from the front side of the game board 5, the back front decoration 3421 of the back production unit 3400 is provided above the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the back front decoration is provided. At the position on the front side of the center of the body 3421, a back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 is attached. More specifically, the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom, and is composed of a non-light-transmitting portion and a light-transmitting lens portion. In addition, the back front ornamental body 3421 has two cherry blossoms having the same size as the back front revolution ornamental body 3410 at the center in the left-right direction, and the rear petals of the front petals are overlapped with each other. It is formed in such a shape that it is rotated so as to be located between them, and there is almost no non-light-transmitting portion, and almost the entire lens portion is a light-transmitting lens portion. The “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a lens cut shape that bends light, and makes the light-emitting decoration more visible when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 303, a back front decorative substrate 3422 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is attached to the rear side of the back front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back front decorative body 3421. The back upper front decorative substrate 3422 extends left and right over substantially the entire length in the left and right direction of the back upper front decorative body 3421. Then, the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 causes the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface to emit light, so that light directed forward from the plurality of LEDs is a lens of the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421. After reaching the portion, the lens portions of the back-up front decorative body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421 can be illuminated and decorated.

Further, a top-view type LED is mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 (the surface portion facing the player facing the front side). The top-view type LED can emit light toward the front side (player side) of the back-side front decorative substrate 3422. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portions of the back front rotating ornament 3410 and the back front ornament 3421 located in front, and the back front rotating ornament 3410 and the back front ornament The lens portion of 3421 can be brightly illuminated and decorated.

Further, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the surface portion of the front surface of the front-back decorative substrate 3422 excluding the plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounted components. The coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portions of the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421, and the lens portions of the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421. Can be brightly illuminated and decorated. In addition, the back front decorative board 3422 is a player whose front surface is behind the back front decorative board 3422 through the lens portions of the back front rotating decoration 3410 and the back front decoration 3421, especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state. It may be visible from the side. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 with a coating film made of white solder resist, even through the lens parts of the back-up front rotating decoration 3410 and the back-up front decoration 3421, The player can only recognize the lens portion as white, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the back front decorative substrate 3422 being visible.

In addition, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the rear surface (the rear surface facing the back surface of the game machine) of the rear upper front decorative substrate 3422 of this example. As a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, a top-view type LED is mounted, which is behind the back front front decorative substrate 3422 (on the side opposite to the player side. In other words, pachinko). It is possible to irradiate light toward the rear side of the machine 1.

Further, the back-side front decorative substrate 3422 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface portion excluding the mounted LEDs and other mounted components not only on the front surface but also on the rear surface. doing. As described above, the coating film made of the white solder resist can reflect light with high reflectance. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the light toward the rear of the back-side front decorative substrate 3422.

As shown in FIG. 303, in the state where the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, the back-up rear rotating decoration is placed behind the left side portion of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 in the left-right direction. Since the body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are located, light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 is transmitted to the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451. Will be irradiated toward. A part of such light is reflected by the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451, and the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 (back-up front rotating decoration 3410 and back-up front decorative body 3421). And a state in which light leaks out from the gap between the back-up rear decorative body 3440 and the back-up decorative body 3451, and the leaked light (light leakage) can be visually recognized by the player. Become. In this way, not only the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421 emit light, but also the light leaks from the rear surface side of the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-side front decorative body 3421. Therefore, it is possible to execute a light emission effect that gives the player a sense of depth.

Further, when the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440 and the back The rear decorative body 3451 is not located. Further, in the state where the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is in the retracted position, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is not positioned behind the upper portion in the up-down direction of the back-up front decoration substrate 3422. Further, the effect display device 1600 is not located behind the upper part in the up-down direction of the back-side front decorative substrate 3422. From this, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the front back decorative board 3422 is generated by the back rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear decorative body 3451, and the back movable movable decoration 3110. Without being blocked by the effect display device 1600, the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 are directly illuminated. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion can allow light to pass therethrough with a high transmittance. Therefore, a part of the light from the LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back front decorative board 3422 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and is further transparent on the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to make the light emitting region L1 near the site bright and visible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 304, in the state in which the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are in the appearance position, the back-up is placed behind all the parts in the left-right direction of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422. The rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the rear rear decorative body 3451 are not located. Further, in the state in which the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is in the appearance position, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is not positioned behind the upper portion in the up-down direction of the front-rear front decoration substrate 3422. Further, the effect display device 1600 is not located behind the upper part in the up-down direction of the back-side front decorative substrate 3422. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 is the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440 and the back-up rear decoration 3451, the back-back movable decoration 3110, and the effect display device. Irradiation is directed to the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back front decorative substrate 3422 without being blocked by 1600. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion can allow light to pass therethrough with a high transmittance. Therefore, a part of the light from the LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back front decorative board 3422 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and is further transparent on the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to make the light emitting region L1 near the site bright and visible.

Next, the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 will be described with reference to FIGS. 303 and 304. As described above in detail, the back-up rear decorative body 3451 of the back-up elevator decoration unit 3450 is provided behind the back-side front decorative body 3421, and is located at the position on the front side of the back-up rear decorative body 3451. The rear rotating decorative body 3440 is attached. More specifically, the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom, and is composed of a non-translucent portion and a translucent lens portion. In addition, the back-up rear decorative body 3451 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back-up rear rotating ornamental body 3440, which are stacked in front and back so that the rear petals are located between the front petals. It is formed into a shape that has been rotated to the left, and there is almost no non-translucent part, and almost the entire part is a translucent lens part. The “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a lens cut shape that bends light, and makes the light-emitting decoration more visible when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 303, a rear back decorative board 3452 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is attached to the rear side of the rear rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the rear rear decoration body 3451. The back rear decorative board 3452 causes a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface to emit light, so that light traveling forward from the plurality of LEDs is reflected on the lens portions of the back rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back rear decorative body 3451. As a result, the lens portions of the back-up rear decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 can be illuminated and decorated.

Further, the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 can be moved from the retracted position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. In a state in which the back-up rear decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, they are located behind the back-up front decorative body 3421 and are invisible to the player. At this time, while the tank rail 553 is located behind the upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the rear rear decorative body 3451, the rear rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the rear rear decorative body 3451 are provided. The effect display device 1600 is located behind the lower part of the. Further, in a state in which the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are moved to the appearance position, they are located in front of the effect display device 1600 and are visible to the player.

In addition, a top-view type LED is mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface (the surface portion facing the front facing the player) of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452. The top-view type LED can emit light toward the front side (player side) of the rear upper rear decorative substrate 3452. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portions of the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 located in the front, and the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3440 can be efficiently irradiated. The lens portion of 3451 can be brightly illuminated and decorated.

In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the surface portion of the front surface of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 excluding the plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounted components. The coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portions of the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 with each other, and the lens portions of the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 can be efficiently irradiated. Can be brightly illuminated and decorated. In addition, the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 is passed through the lens portions of the back-up rear rotating decorative member 3440 and the back-up rear decorative member 3451, particularly when the LED is in a non-light emitting state, and the front face of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 is a player. It may be visible from the side. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 with a coating film made of white solder resist, even through the lens portions of the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451, It is possible for the player to recognize the lens portion as white, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the rear upper rear decorative substrate 3452 being visible.

As shown in FIG. 303, when the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 are in the retracted position, in front of the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451, The rotating decorative body 3410 and the back front decorative body 3421 are located. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-up rear decorative board 3452 is reflected by the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decoration body 3421, and then the back-up rear decoration board 3452. It is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located at the rear of the. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion can allow light to pass therethrough with a high transmittance. Therefore, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3452 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and is further transparent on the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to make the light emitting region L1 near the portion visible visually.

In addition, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface of the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3452 (the rear surface facing the rear surface of the gaming machine) of this example. As a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the rear back decorative board 3452, a top-view type LED is mounted, and the rear rear decorative board 3452 is rearward (opposite to the player side. In other words, pachinko. It is possible to irradiate light toward the rear side of the machine 1.

Further, not only the front surface but also the rear surface of the rear upper decorative substrate 3452 is a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface portion excluding the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface and other mounting components. have. As described above, the coating film made of the white solder resist can reflect light with high reflectance. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the light toward the rear of the rear-side rear decorative substrate 3452.

As shown in FIG. 303, in the state in which the rear back rotating decorative body 3440 and the rear rear decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position regardless of whether the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position. The rear back movable ornamental body 3110 is not located behind the upper portion in the vertical direction of the decorative substrate 3452. Moreover, the effect display device 1600 is not located behind the upper part in the up-down direction of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-and-back decorative board 3452 is not blocked by the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 and the effect display device 1600, and the light of the back-and-back decorative board 3452 is not detected. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located at the rear are directly irradiated. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion can allow light to pass therethrough with a high transmittance. Therefore, the lights from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3452 pass through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 can be viewed brightly.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 304, in the state in which the rear back rear decorative body 3440 and the rear rear decorative body 3451 are in the appearance position, since they are located in front of the effect display device 1600, the rear rear decorative substrate 3452 is Light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface is not emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553. Therefore, in the state in which the back-up rear decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are in the appearance position, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up rear decorative board 3452 are controlled so as not to emit light. ..

Next, the back rear movable ornament 3110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 303 and 304. Although described in detail above, behind the rear upper rear decorative body 3451 is provided a rear rear movable decorative body 3110 of the rear rear effect unit 3100. More specifically, the back-back movable decorative body 3110 extends in the left-right direction and has a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 having a decoration that forms a part of the decorative portion 3150 by relief-shaped relief. A translucent sheet-like decorative sheet 3112 provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 and having a decoration (pattern) forming the rest of the decorative portion 3150, and provided on the rear side of the decorative sheet 3112. A transparent flat plate-shaped light guide radiation plate 3113, and a back and rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113 and having a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface thereof. There is. The back-rear decoration substrate 3114 causes the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface to emit light, so that the forward light from the plurality of LEDs reaches the decoration body 3111, and the decoration body 3111 (rear The movable decoration body 3110) can be light-emitted.

As shown in FIG. 304, the back rear movable decoration body 3110 can be moved from the retracted position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. When the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is in the retracted position, it is located behind the back-up front decoration 3421 and is invisible to the player. At this time, the tank rail 553 is located behind the upper rear movable decorative body 3110, whereas the effect display device 1600 is located behind the lower rear movable decorative body 3110. .. Further, in the state where the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the appearance position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600 and is visible to the player.

In addition, on the front surface (the surface portion facing the front facing the player) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114, a plurality of side-view type first LEDs 3114a and a plurality of top-view type second LEDs 3114b are provided as a plurality of LEDs. Has been implemented. The side-view type first LED 3114a can emit light toward the front (player side) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114, while the top-view-type second LED 3114b can emit light. Light can be emitted to the side of 3114. In addition, a transparent flat light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided on the back rear movable decoration body 3110, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 emit light toward the light guide radiation plate 3113. By irradiating, the light guide radiating plate 3113 emits light toward the front, and the decorative body 3111 can be uniformly irradiated with light, and the decorative body 3111 (the back and rear movable decorative body 3110) can be irradiated. ) Is easily visible and can be decorated with light emission.

In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on a surface portion of the front surface of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 excluding the plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounted components. The coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, the decorative body 3111 can be efficiently irradiated with light, and the decorative body 3111 (back-side movable decorative body 3110) can be brightly illuminated and decorated. Further, in the back-rear decoration board 3114, the front surface of the back-rear decoration board 3114 may be visible from the player side through the decoration body 3111 of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state. is there. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 with a coating film made of white solder resist, the player-side decorative body 3111 can be seen through the decorative body 3111 of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110. Can be recognized as white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114 being visible.

As shown in FIG. 303, when the back rear movable decoration 3110 is in the retracted position, in front of the back rear movable decoration 3110, the back front front rotating decoration 3410 and the back front decoration 3421, and the back rear The decorative body 3451 is located. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is reflected by the back front rotation decorative body 3410, the back front decoration 3421, and the back rear decoration 3451. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back-and-back movable decoration 3110 are irradiated. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion can allow light to pass therethrough with a high transmittance. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 can be viewed brightly.

Further, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114 is diffused by the light guide radiation plate 3113 and emitted toward the front of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Irradiation is also performed from the top, bottom, left and right ends of the radiation plate 3113 to the side of the light guide radiation plate 3113. That is, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration board 3114 passes through the light-guide radiation plate 3113 from the upper, lower, left, and right ends of the light-guide radiation plate 3113, and the back-rear decoration board 3114 ( The light is emitted toward the side surface of the back box 3010 located on the side of the light guide radiation plate 3113). The back box 3010 partially uses a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with a high transmittance. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 emits light near the transparent portion on the side surface of the back box 3010 on the side of the pachinko machine 1 via the light guide radiation plate 3113. The region L2 and the light emitting region L3 can be visually recognized brightly.

Further, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 is emitted from the upper, lower, left, and right ends of the light guide radiation plate 3113. A part of the light emitted from the back side is emitted toward the upper and rear sides of the back-back decorative substrate 3114. In the state where the rear back movable decoration body 3110 is in the retracted position, the effect display device 1600 is not located above and behind the rear rear decoration substrate 3114. That is, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-back decorative substrate 3114 is blocked by the effect display device 1600 from the upper end of the light guide radiation plate 3113 via the light guide radiation plate 3113. Instead, it is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located on the upper rear side of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 (light guide radiation plate 3113). The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion can allow light to pass therethrough with a high transmittance. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and is further emitted near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The region L1 can be viewed brightly.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 303, in the state in which the rear back movable ornament 3110 is in the appearance position, since it is positioned in front of the effect display device 1600, a plurality of back rear movable ornaments 3110 mounted on the front surface are arranged. The light from the LED is not emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553.

In this example, a transparent flat light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided in the back rear movable decoration body 3110, and light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is guided. Although it is diffused in the light radiation plate 3113, the light guide radiation plate 3113 may be omitted. In such a case, the front side of the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 may be irradiated with light toward the sides of the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 or toward the upper and rear sides of the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 so that the side-view type first An LED 3114a is preferably provided. Also by this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration board 3114 is emitted toward the side surface of the back box 3010 located on the side of the back-rear decoration board 3114, and the pachinko machine 1 is operated. The light emitting region L2 and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the side surface of the back box 3010 on the side of the can be visually recognized brightly. Also, light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration board 3114 is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located above and behind the back-rear decoration board 3114, and the back box 3010. After passing through the transparent part, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized brightly.

The back box 3010 of this example is partially provided with a transparent portion, but instead of the transparent portion, a penetration portion may be provided in the back box 3010. Even in such a case, the light from the LED of the light emitting decoration can pass through the penetrating portion of the back box 3010. For example, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-side front decorative substrate 3422 passes through the bright portion of the back box 3010, and further on the tank rail 553 in the rear of the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion can be visually recognized brightly.

In addition, the back box 3010 of this example is provided with a transparent portion that is a transparent portion and a non-translucent portion. However, regarding the non-transparent portion, the rear surface side (the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 1) is provided. It is possible to reflect light with higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.) by providing white printing or white painting, or mirror surface printing or mirror surface processing on the side that becomes I have to. As a result, the light directed to the non-light-transmitting portion can be efficiently reflected on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be viewed brightly.

In addition, regarding the above-described light-emitting decoration body, light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of various decorative boards is not only emitted toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1, but also the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Although it is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located at, it is mounted on the front surface of a decorative substrate (such as a decorative substrate of a light-emitting decorative body other than the above-described light-emitting decorative body) that should be specialized for production. The light from the plurality of LEDs is configured not to be emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, for a decorative substrate that should be specialized for production, the mounting surface is formed of a coating film made of green or black solder resist or enclosed in a box to diffuse the light from the LED. The light emitted from the LED is clearly visible.

As another example, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 may be provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. Such another example will be described with reference to FIG. 305. As shown in FIG. 305, light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is radiated toward a decorative body 3111 located in front of the back rear decoration substrate 3452. A part of the light emitted toward the decorative body 3111 is reflected and goes toward the rear of the decorative body 3111. When a plurality of holes are provided in the back rear decorative substrate 3114, the reflected light of the light emitted toward the decorative body 3111 passes through the plurality of holes and goes to the rear of the back rear decorative substrate 3114. It becomes possible. Although the decoration base 3115 is attached to the rear side of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 so as to cover the rear side of the back rear decoration substrate 3114, a plurality of holes are formed in the back rear decoration substrate 3114. Holes are provided at the corresponding positions. As a result, light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is partially reflected by the decorative body 3111 and passes through a plurality of holes provided in the back-rear decoration substrate 3114. Thus, the light can be efficiently emitted toward the rear of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114. That is, light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is partially reflected by the decorative body 3111 and passes through the plurality of holes provided in the back-rear decoration substrate 3114. The rear case 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind (upper and rear) the rear decorative board 3114 are irradiated, pass through the transparent portion of the rear case 3010, and further, the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the transparent part can be visually recognized brightly.

In the above description, the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. It is preferable that the LED is formed smaller than the existing LED. For example, when the size of the hole provided in the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is large, the light from the rear of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 (eg, the light emitted from the effect display device 1600) is the back rear decoration substrate 3114. Although it is easy to enter through the hole provided in 3114, there is a possibility that even when the LED mounted on the front surface of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114 is turned off, it may appear as if it was turned on. By reducing the size of the holes provided in the rear decoration substrate 3114, such an adverse effect can be reduced.

Similarly, the back-rear decoration board 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, but the number of these holes is as small as possible, for example, it is mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration board 3114. It is preferable to form less than the number of LEDs. For example, when the number of holes provided in the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is increased, the light from the rear of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 (for example, the light emitted from the effect display device 1600) is changed to the back rear decoration substrate 3114. Although it is easy to enter through the hole provided in 3114, there is a possibility that even when the LED mounted on the front surface of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114 is turned off, it may appear as if it was turned on. By reducing the number of holes provided in the rear decoration substrate 3114, such an adverse effect can be reduced.

Although a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided in the back-back decorative substrate 3114 in the above, similarly, a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction are also formed in the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452. Holes may be provided. Also by this, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 is reflected on the back front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back front decorative body 3421, and Through the plurality of holes provided in the front decorative substrate 3422, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the light toward the rear of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422. In addition, light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-up rear decorative board 3452 is partially reflected by the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451, so that the back-up rear decoration body 3452 is illuminated. Through the plurality of holes provided in the substrate 3452, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the light toward the rear of the rear-side rear decorative substrate 3452. That is, light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 or the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 becomes part of the reflected light, and the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3422 are provided. It is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the 3452, passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 is set. It can be seen brightly.

Next, the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right decorative body 3813 are not shown in FIGS. 303 and 304, but will be described below. As described above in detail, when viewed from the front side of the game board 5, the back front left decoration body 3713 of the back front left decoration body unit 3710 is provided on the left side of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the effect display is performed. On the right side of the display area of the device 1600, the back-front right decoration 3813 of the back-front right decoration unit 3810 is provided. More specifically, the back front left decoration 3713 and the back front right decoration 3813 are provided with characters, items, logos, and other patterns according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and the non-translucent part and the transparent part. It is composed of an optical lens part. The “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a lens cut shape that bends light, and makes the light-emitting decoration more visible when viewed from the front.

On the rear side of the back front left decoration body 3713, a back front left decoration board 3714 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is attached. Then, the back-front left decoration substrate 3714 causes the LEDs mounted on the front surface to emit light, whereby light directed forward from the LEDs reaches the lens portion of the back-front left decoration body 3713, and the back-front left. The lens portion of the decoration body 3713 can be light-emitted. Further, the back front left decorative board 3714 may be visible from the player side to the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 through the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713, especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state. There is. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the back-front left decorative substrate 3714 with a coating film made of white solder resist, the lens portion is visible from the player side even through the lens portion of the back-front left decorative body 3713. It can be recognized as white, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 being visible.

In addition, a side-view type LED is mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface (the surface portion facing the player facing the front side) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. In the side-view type LED, light is reflected on the front surface of the back-front left decoration substrate 3714, and light can be emitted toward the front of the back-front left decoration substrate 3714 (on the player side). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portion of the back front left decoration body 3713 located in the front with light, and the lens portion of the back front left decoration body 3713 can be brightly illuminated and decorated.

In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on a surface portion of the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 excluding the plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounted components. The coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portion of the back front left decoration body 3713 with light, and the lens portion of the back front left decoration body 3713 can be brightly illuminated and decorated.

In the above description, the back-view left decorative substrate 3714 is provided with the side-view type LEDs facing leftward so that light is emitted toward the left side of the back-front left decorative substrate 3714. That is, on the left side of the back front left decorative board 3714, the left side of the back box 3010 on the side closer to the back rear decorative board 3114 is located on the left side of the back box 3010. Is provided facing the left side surface of the back box 3010. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-front left decorative board 3714 is emitted toward the left side surface of the back box 3010 located on the left side of the back-front left decorative board 3714. Becomes The back box 3010 partially uses a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with a high transmittance. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 307, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-front left decorative substrate 3714 emits light in the vicinity of the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 behind the pachinko machine 1. L2 can be visually recognized brightly.

Note that the back-front right decorative body 3813 has the same configuration as the back-front left decorative body 3713, and light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-front right decorative substrate 3814 is the same as the back-front right decorative substrate 3814. It is configured to irradiate toward the right side surface of the back box 3010 located on the right side of the. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 308, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-front right decorative substrate 3814 is transparent to the light-emitting region L3 on the right side of the back box 3010 behind the pachinko machine 1. The vicinity can be seen brightly.

Next, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 303 and 304. As described above in detail, when viewed from the front side of the game board 5, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the lower back middle effect unit 3300 is provided in the lower center of the display area of the effect display device 1600. More specifically, the back under-center rotating decorative body 3310 has six numeral decorations formed in a relief pattern of "1" to "6" on the entire surface, and is arranged in a clockwise direction centered on the center with 60 degrees. It is arranged on the circumference at every angle and is composed of a non-light-transmitting portion and a light-transmitting lens portion. The “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a lens cut shape that bends light, and makes the light-emitting decoration more visible when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 303, on the rear side of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310, a first lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is attached. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that light directed forward from the plurality of LEDs reaches a lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, The lens portion of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be decorated with light emission.

As shown in FIG. 304, the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 can be moved from the retracted position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. In the state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the retracted position, it is located behind the game panel 1100 forming the game area 5a and is visible to the player. At this time, the back box 3010 and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are located behind the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. Further, in the state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has moved to the appearance position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600 and is visible to the player.

Further, a top-view type LED is mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player) of the first lower decorative substrate 3322. The top view type LED is capable of irradiating light toward the front side (player side) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 located in front with light, and the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be brightly illuminated and decorated.

In addition, a coating film made of white solder resist is formed on the front surface of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322 excluding the mounted LEDs and other mounted components. There is. The coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 with light, and the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be brightly illuminated and decorated. In addition, the back side middle first decoration board 3322 can be seen from the player side by the front side of the back side middle decoration board 3322 through the lens portion of the back side middle rotation decoration body 3310, especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state. There is a possibility that it will be possible. In this respect, by providing the front surface of the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 with a coating film made of a white solder resist, even from the player side even through the lens portion of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. The lens portion can be recognized only in white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the fact that the front surface of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322 is visible.

In addition, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the lower surface of the rear surface (the rear surface facing the rear surface of the game machine) of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322 of this example. Top-view type LEDs are mounted as the LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and are behind the first lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 (on the side opposite to the player side). In other words, it is possible to irradiate the light toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 1).

As shown in FIG. 303, in the state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the retracted position, the back box 3010 and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are located behind the first lower back middle decorative board 3322. ing. The back box 3010 partially uses a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with a high transmittance. However, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is located behind the back box 3010, and light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the lower back first decorative board 3322 is behind it. Although the light is emitted so as to brighten the vicinity of the light emitting region L4 near the transparent portion of the back box 3010, the light is blocked by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 304, in the state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the appearance position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600. For this reason, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is at the appearance position, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the first lower back first decorative substrate 3322 are controlled so as not to emit light.

From the above, as the light emitting decoration for brightening the back side and the side of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the game board 5, the back-up front rotating decoration 3410, the back-up front decoration 3421, the back-up rear decoration 3451, a back and rear movable decoration body 3110 are provided, three back front left decoration body units 3710 are provided on the left side of the game board 5, and three back front right decoration bodies are provided on the right side of the game board 5. A unit 3810 is provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 306, the light emitting decoration provided on the upper portion of the game board 5 brightens the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 307. The light-emitting decoration provided on the left side of the game board 5 makes the light emitting area L2 near the transparent portion of the right side surface (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1) of the back box 3010 visible when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the rear. As shown in FIG. 308, the light-emitting decoration provided on the right side of the game board 5 is near the transparent portion of the left side surface (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) of the back box 3010 when the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from the rear. The light emitting region L3 of is brightened.

(About the advantage of providing a light emitting area on the back side of the pachinko machine)
Generally, the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility provided in a game hall. Specifically, a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in line on one side of the island equipment, or a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in line on both sides of the island equipment. It is done. Then, in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, the inside thereof is blocked and it is dark. By the way, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, control members such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, wirings connecting the control members, a supply mechanism of the game ball B used in the game, etc. are arranged. In some cases, maintenance may be required at a predetermined position on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. For example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side on both sides of the island equipment, the pachinko machines 1 on one side of the island equipment are opened and the pachinko machines 1 on the other side are opened. Although it is possible to maintain the back surface, since the inside of the island facility is dark, the visibility of the location to be maintained is poor, and visual work on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is difficult. Further, the pachinko machine 1 can open and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 with one side as an axis, and for the pachinko machine 1 requiring maintenance, the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Can be opened to maintain the back surface of the pachinko machine 1. However, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, light from the outside (light of the hole) is emitted to a portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that is far from the open axis of the main body frame 4. While it is easy to reach and can be viewed brightly, light from the outside (light from the hall) is hard to reach the part of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 close to the open axis of the body frame 4, I can't see it brightly. That is, when the location to be maintained is a portion close to the open axis of the main body frame 4, the visibility of the location to be maintained is poor, and visual work on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is difficult.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in addition to the plurality of light-emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1 for decoration purposes, the back side and side surfaces are also used for other purposes. It is configured to brighten for the purpose of. Specifically, the light from the LEDs mounted on the light-emitting decoration is directed not only to the front side of the pachinko machine 1 but also to the back side and side surfaces thereof, and the light passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010. The light-emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 and the light-emitting area L2 and the light-emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1 are made bright by being configured to pass through. be able to. For example, with respect to the light irradiating the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553, the light can pass through the transparent parts of the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 to further brighten the back of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment, the inside is closed and dark, but by making the back of the pachinko machine 1 bright, the inside of the island equipment can be made bright. Thereby, when the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the visibility of the portion to be maintained becomes good, and the efficiency of the visual work on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In this example, the plurality of light-emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 also have a role of brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and a role of brightening the back side and side sides of the pachinko machine 1. It is configured to do. For example, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to brighten the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 by providing an LED that can emit light toward the rear side, but if an LED dedicated to maintenance is provided, The number of parts will increase and the cost will increase. In this regard, the plurality of light-emitting decorations that brighten the front side of the pachinko machine 1 also serve to brighten the back side and side surfaces of the pachinko machine 1, thereby suppressing an increase in cost. it can.

In addition, in this example, the light from the LEDs of the plurality of light emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 is configured to brighten the back surface and the side surface of the pachinko machine 1. Since it is not desirable to directly look at the LED light source during maintenance on the back surface or the side surface, with respect to the light from the LED that makes the back surface or the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 brighter, the LED light source is It is configured to be indirect light that is not viewed directly. For example, the back-up front decorative body 3421 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back surface of the back-up front decoration substrate 3422, and enables light emission toward the rear (back surface side) of the pachinko machine 1. However, when viewed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, when viewing the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553), the LED is provided with a cover body so that the LED light source is not directly viewed, The light from the LED is configured to be indirect light. Accordingly, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, it is possible to prevent the light from the LED that makes the back side of the pachinko machine 1 brighter from hindering the work.

(Regarding the characteristic structure of the light-emitting ornament of this example)
The light-emitting decoration of this example has been devised in various ways so that not only the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is brightened for the purpose of decoration, but also the back side and the side of the pachinko machine 1 are brightened for purposes other than decoration. Although described in detail above, the following configurations can be given as specific configurations.

First, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 and enables light emission toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1. In the state where the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is in the retracted position, the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410, the back-up front decoration body 3421, and the back-rear decoration body 3451 are located in front of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110. There is. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is reflected by the back front rotation decorative body 3410, the back front decoration 3421, and the back rear decoration 3451. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 are indirectly irradiated with the light. As a result, the lights from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 decorate the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 with light emission and brighten the front side of the pachinko machine 1. After passing through 3010, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened.

The back-rear movable decoration body 3110 of this example receives light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 to perform light emission decoration. The upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the rear upper front decorative body 3421, and the rear upper rear decorative body 3451 have larger areas than the rear rear movable decorative body 3110. From this, when the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 is reflected on the back-and-front rotating decorative body 3410, the back-and-front decorative body 3421, and the back-and-back decorative body 3451. In addition, it will be diffused in a wider area than the back-back movable decorative body 3110. Thereby, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be widened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be efficiently brightened.

In the above description, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the rear surface of the front back decorative body 3421 and the rear surface of the back rear decorative body 3451. The coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 is reflected at a high reflectance on the rear surface of the front front decoration body 3421 and the rear surface of the rear rear decoration body 3451. Thus, the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 are efficiently irradiated. Thereby, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be efficiently brightened.

Next, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 and enables light emission toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1. However, as described as another example, by providing a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction in the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114, the reflected light of the light emitted toward the decorative body 3111 of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 can be changed. It is possible to pass through the plurality of holes and go to the rear of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114. That is, light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is partially reflected by the decorative body 3111 and passes through a plurality of holes provided in the back-rear decoration substrate 3114. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind (upper and rear) the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 are irradiated. As a result, the lights from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 decorate the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 with light emission and brighten the front side of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to play a role of brightening the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 by passing through the transparent portion of 3010 and brightening the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1.

Next, the back-up front decorative body 3421 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back surface of the back-up front decoration substrate 3422, and enables light emission toward the rear (back surface side) of the pachinko machine 1. There is. Behind the front back decorative body 3421, a rear back rotating decorative body 3440 and a back rear decorative body 3451, a portion where the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is located at the retracted position, and a back rear rotating decorative body 3440 and a back-up rear decorative body 3451, and a portion where the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is not located. Of these, the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back-up rear decorative body 3451, and the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 located at the retracted position are mounted on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422. The light from the plurality of LEDs is reflected by the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 and the back-side movable decoration body 3110 located at the rear, and is directed to the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1. Will be irradiated. On the other hand, regarding the portion where the back-and-back-revolving decorative body 3440 and the back-and-back rear decorative body 3451 and the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 are not located, the back box 3010 and the tank rail which are located behind the back-and-back front decorative substrate 3422 are provided. It will be directly irradiated toward 553. As a result, light from the LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-side front decorative substrate 3422 has the role of brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and also passes through the back box 3010 to allow the pachinko machine 1 to operate. It can play a role of brightening the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 on the rear side and brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

Next, as the light emitting decoration, a back-up front rotating decoration 3410, a back-up front decoration 3421, a back-up rear decoration 3451, and a back-back movable decoration 3110 are provided on the upper part of the game board 5. On the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided, and on the right side of the game board 5, three back front right decorative body units 3810 are provided, and they are provided separately from each other. Has been. Then, the luminous decoration provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the luminous area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, and the luminous decoration provided on the left side of the game board 5 is By visually observing the pachinko machine 1 from the rear, the light emitting area L2 near the transparent portion of the right side surface (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1) of the back box 3010 is brightened, and the light emitting decoration provided on the right side of the game board 5 is , The pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from the rear side, and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion of the left side surface (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) of the back box 3010 is brightened, and a plurality of areas on the back side and the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1 are displayed. It makes it possible to brighten.

Further, the light-emitting decoration includes an LED that can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1 and an LED that can emit light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. Is provided. For an LED that can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1, the light is reflected by a member located in front of it, and the LED is directed toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. The indirect light can make the back side of the pachinko machine 1 brighter. On the other hand, for the LED capable of emitting light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened by its direct light. At this time, of the back side of the pachinko machine 1, an LED that can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1 is used, and a region that can be brightened by the indirect light and the pachinko machine 1 are used. It is also possible to use an LED capable of emitting light toward the rear side (back side) and to separate the area that can be brightened by the direct light.

In the above, as the area that can be brightened by the direct light from the LED, a portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 where a worker such as a hall manager can work can be targeted. Are suitable. As will be described in detail later, examples of sites where a worker such as a hall manager can perform work include an operation unit 640a and a detachable unit of the back cover 640. The operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 are provided at positions where direct light from the LEDs can be received, so that the direct light from the LEDs can be received and can be viewed brighter than the indirect light. it can. Thereby, when performing work on various boards such as the main control board 1310 attached to the game board 5, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4, but the back cover 640 By brightly visually recognizing the operation unit 640a and the attachment/detachment unit, the operator can easily confirm the object to be operated, facilitate the attachment/detachment of the back cover 640 to/from the main body frame 4, and perform the inspection work by the hall manager. Can be facilitated.

In addition, when the light such as the above is directly irradiated from the LED to the site where the worker such as the hall administrator can perform the work, the substrate on which the LED is mounted is It is preferable that the mounting surface has a dark color (for example, green or black). When a dark-colored mounting surface is used, it is difficult for light to be reflected by the dark-colored mounting surface, so the direct light from the LED does not diffuse so much, and it is possible to pinpoint the point where the direct light from the LED is irradiated. It becomes possible to emit light. Accordingly, for example, when the operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 are provided at a position where the direct light from the LED can be received, the direct light from the LED is received by pinpoint, The operating portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 can be clearly recognized due to the difference in brightness from the peripheral portion.

(Regarding the light amount adjustment of the light emitting area provided on the back side of the pachinko machine)
It should be noted that there are various hall environments in which the island equipment is provided, and for example, it is conceivable that the inside of the island equipment is separately lighted regardless of the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example has a configuration for making the back side bright, but there is a possibility that it is not necessary to make the back side bright. In addition, although the inside of the island facility is dark, as the gaming machines provided in the island facility, if the number of pachinko machines 1 whose back side is brightened is small, only the back side is brightened with normal brightness. Then, there is a possibility that the inside of the island facility may not be bright enough. Therefore, an example in which the brightness on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted according to the hall environment will be described below.

The light-emitting ornament of this example includes an LED capable of emitting light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1 and an LED capable of emitting toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. , Are provided, the light amount adjustment operation is performed for these LEDs using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300, so that the light amount is gradually changed. It is possible to adjust. For example, it is possible to adjust the step of the light quantity of the LED as 1 (minimum light quantity)→2→3→4→5 (maximum light quantity), and the light quantity of the LED increases as the step increases. .. That is, regarding the LED of the light emitting decoration, the light is directed toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1 to make the back side of the pachinko machine 1 brighter, but the light amount of the LED can be adjusted. Thus, the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed. For example, when the island facility is in a bright hall environment, an operator such as a hall administrator may adjust the light amount of the LED to be small so that the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is darkened. When the inside of the island facility is a dark hall environment, a worker such as a hall manager may make the back side of the pachinko machine 1 bright by adjusting the light amount of the LED to increase. In this way, by making it possible to adjust the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 according to the hall environment, when the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the visibility of the place to be maintained becomes good, The efficiency of visual work on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In the above description, the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed by making it possible to adjust the light amount of the LED of the light emitting decoration, and the degree of freedom in the visual recognition mode with respect to the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. However, with regard to all the light emitting decorations provided on the front surface side of the game board 5, if the light intensity of the LEDs is collectively adjusted, for example, when the light intensity of the LEDs of all the light emitting ornaments is reduced. The front side of the pachinko machine 1 becomes too dark, and there is a possibility that the original effect of using the light emitting decoration (customer attraction, etc.) may be lost while the worker is working during the hall operation. Further, even when the worker reduces the light intensity of the LED of the light emitting decoration and neglects to return the light intensity of the LED after the work is completed, the original effect of using the light emitting decoration deteriorates. There is a possibility that it will end up. In this regard, in this example, among the light emitting decorative bodies provided on the front surface side of the game board 5, the back-up front rotating decoration 3410, the back-up front decoration 3421, the back-up rear decoration 3451, and the back Regarding the rear movable decoration body 3110 and the like, since it also has a role of making the back side of the pachinko machine 1 brighter as described above, it is an object of adjustment of the light quantity of the LED by the light quantity adjustment operation. Of these, the front surface of the game board 5 Among the light emitting decorations provided on the side, for the light emitting decoration having the first big winning opening decoration substrate 2420 for light emitting decoration of the first big winning opening 2005, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 It is a light-emitting decorative body that does not have a role of brightening the light, and that is brightened with an emphasis on the purpose of attracting customers. That is, among the light emitting decorations for decoration purposes, at least the light emitting decoration having a role of brightening the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is a target for adjusting the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjusting operation. With this, even if the light amount of the LED of the light emitting decoration is adjusted, and, for example, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is darkened, the brightness of the light emitting decoration provided on the front side of the game board 5 for the purpose of attracting customers is increased. It is possible to maintain a good customer-destination purpose without making the area dark.

The operation of adjusting the light amount of the LED of the light-emitting decoration can be performed either in the standby state in which the symbols are not variably displayed or in the variably display in which the symbols are variably displayed. In addition, in this example, the player can perform the light amount adjustment operation using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300, but in addition to this, On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, an operation section may be separately provided so that the hall manager can perform a light amount adjustment operation. At this time, the object for adjusting the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjusting operation for the operation unit for the hall manager is the same as the object for adjusting the light amount for the LED by the light amount adjusting operation for the operation unit for the player. In addition, even if the light amount adjustment operation for the operation unit for the player is adjusted to the minimum light amount, the light amount cannot be set to zero and the LED cannot be completely turned off. Regarding the light amount adjusting operation, when the light amount is adjusted to the minimum value, the light amount may be set to zero and the LED may be completely turned off.

(About the visibility of the wiring provided on the side of the pachinko machine)
Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (the back side of the back box 3010), various substrates and wirings for connecting the various substrates are provided. Since the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a configuration that uses the light from the light emitting decoration provided on the game board 5 to make the back side brighter, the wiring exposed to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 It is easy to check the state from the outside, but it is difficult to check the state from the outside for the wiring that is not exposed outside the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, an example in which it is possible to easily confirm the state from the outside of the wiring not exposed outside the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

In this example, as a light emitting decoration for brightening the back side and the side of the pachinko machine 1, three back front left decoration units 3710 are provided on the left side of the game board 5, and on the right side of the game board 5, Three back front right decoration units 3810 are provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 307, the luminous decoration provided on the left side of the game board 5 is a transparent portion of the right side surface of the back box 3010 (right side surface of the pachinko machine 1) when the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from the rear side. Brightening the light emitting area L2 in the vicinity, and as shown in FIG. 308, the light emitting decoration provided on the right side of the game board 5 allows the pachinko machine 1 to be visually recognized from the rear side, and the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the pachinko machine 1). The light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side) is brightened.

Further, on the back surface of the back box 3010, a decorative board provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000, a production drive board 1720 for driving a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc. are attached in accordance with a command from the peripheral control board 1510. Has been. The effect drive board 1720 is electrically connected to the decoration board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, and the like by a plurality of wirings, and these wirings are along the left side surface and the right side surface inside the back box 3010. I arranged it like this. In this regard, the light emitting decoration provided on the left side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from the rear side, and the light emitting area L2 near the transparent portion on the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1). Since the light is emitted so as to be bright, it is possible to satisfactorily visually recognize the state of the wiring along the right side surface inside the back box 3010. Similarly, the light emitting decoration provided on the right side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from the rear side, and displays the light emitting area L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (left side surface of the pachinko machine 1). Since the light is emitted to make it brighter, it is possible to satisfactorily visually recognize the state of the wiring along the left side surface inside the back box 3010. For example, when the decorative substrate, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, etc. do not operate normally, the wiring along the left side surface or the right side surface inside the back box 3010 is disconnected or disconnected from the connection terminal. However, by irradiating light so that the left side surface and the right side surface are brightened, the visibility of the wiring from the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1 becomes good, and the wiring state confirmation work can be performed. The efficiency can be improved.

Further, in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, of the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from the rear side, and the pachinko machine 1 which is a part far from the open axis of the main body frame 4 is shown. Light from the outside (light from the hall) can easily reach the left side surface of the body and can be viewed brightly, while the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1 which is a portion close to the open axis of the main body frame 4. However, it is difficult for the light from the outside (light from the hall) to reach, and it is not possible to see it brightly. For this reason, in the case where it is not provided with a structure for brightening the back side or the side surface like the conventional gaming machine, the wiring is arranged near the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1 which is a portion close to the open axis of the main body frame 4. It has become particularly difficult to check the state of the wiring when it becomes necessary to do so. In this regard, in this example, light is emitted so as to brighten the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the right side surface of the back box 3010, and regarding wiring that needs to be arranged near the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1, The inner side of the back box 3010 is arranged along the right side surface. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the wiring along the right side inside the back box 3010 cannot be visually recognized.

In this example, as the wiring along the side surface inside the back box 3010, the wiring that connects the production drive board 1720 to the decoration board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, and the like is given, but other than that. Further, for example, the wiring may be connected to the main control board 1310. The main control board 1310 is for controlling the progress of the game, and for example, outputs information about the game to the outside (hall computer) via the external terminal board 558 connected to the main control board 1310 by wiring. I am trying. At this time, if the wiring for connecting the main control board 1310 and the external terminal board 558 is tampered with, the information on the game cannot be properly grasped outside (hall computer), and the pachinko machine 1 There is a situation in which fraud is likely to occur. In other words, among the various wirings, the wirings connected to the main control board 1310 can be said to be highly important wirings for playing the game. In this respect, by irradiating light so that the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is brightened, the visibility of the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 becomes good, and it is possible to prevent such wiring from being fraudulent. Can be prevented.

Regarding the wiring along the left side surface and the right side surface inside the back box 3010, a plurality of wires are bundled by a hook portion integrally formed on the back box 3010 and a bundling wire. These hooks and bundling wires are formed of a translucent member, and are provided at positions where they can be visually recognized through the transparent parts on the left side surface and the right side surface of the back box 3010. Thus, light is emitted to brighten the light emitting area L2 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 and the light emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (left side of the pachinko machine 1). At this time, it is possible to make the hook portion and the bundled wires themselves bright and to visually recognize the condition of the wiring. Further, when irradiating light so as to brighten the light emitting area L2 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 and the light emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1). In addition, it is possible to prevent the brightness of such a light emitting region from decreasing without hindering the progress of light.

Further, regarding the wiring along the left side surface and the right side surface inside the back box 3010, a plurality of wirings are provided so that the transparent portions on the left side surface and the right side surface of the back box 3010 are not blocked by a plurality of wirings. Wirings are provided on the left side surface or the right side surface of the back box 3010 so as to be overlapped or bundled in the vertical direction. For example, when a plurality of wirings are provided so as to be parallel to the left side surface and the right side surface of the back box 3010, the transparent portions on the left side surface and the right side surface of the back box 3010 are blocked, and the left side of the back box 3010 is blocked. It is difficult to maintain the brightness of the light emitting area L2 near the transparent part of the surface and the light emitting area L3 near the transparent part of the left side surface (left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) of the back box 3010. Since a plurality of wirings are provided so as not to block the transparent portions on the left side surface and the right side surface, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

(Regarding change in visual recognition mode of light emitting area when state changes)
When a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in the island equipment and the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened for maintenance, the other pachinko machines 1 on the back side of the island equipment are Even if an abnormality occurs due to this, it is difficult to notice the occurrence of the abnormality because the front side of the pachinko machine 1 in which the abnormality has occurred cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, an example in which the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be recognized even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

In this example, as the light emitting decoration, the back-up front rotating decoration 3410, the back-up front decoration 3421, the back-up rear decoration 3451, and the back-rear movable decoration 3110 are provided in the upper part of the game board 5. Three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided on the left side of the game board 5, and three back front right decorative body units 3810 are provided on the right side of the game board 5. In addition, regarding these luminous decorations, if something abnormal such as detecting fraud due to magnets or vibration occurs and it becomes impossible to play games, until the abnormality is resolved, the luminous decoration The LED provided on the body is controlled to blink. Then, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, as a light emitting area that can be brightened by the light emitting ornament, a light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, a right side surface of the back box 3010 (a right side surface of the pachinko machine 1). ), a light emitting region L2 near the transparent part, and a light emitting region L3 near the transparent part on the left side surface (left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) of the back box 3010 are provided, and the LED provided on the light emitting decoration is controlled to blink. At this time, these light emitting areas are set to blink. As a result, in the state where a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in the island equipment, even if the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is performed, the other pachinko machines 1 on the back side of the island equipment are When an abnormality occurs, the blinking of the light emitting area that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration of the other pachinko machine 1 makes it possible to recognize the occurrence of the abnormality through the inside of the island facility. Become. In other words, even when the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed, an abnormality with respect to another pachinko machine 1 on the same island facility can be detected early through the inside of the island facility, and by extension, It is possible to prevent fraud on the other pachinko machine 1.

As for the LED of the light emitting decoration, the light amount adjustment operation using the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 is performed to adjust the light amount stepwise. It is possible. For example, it is possible to adjust the step of the light quantity of the LED as 1 (minimum light quantity)→2→3→4→5 (maximum light quantity), and the light quantity of the LED increases as the step increases. .. Further, as described in detail above, regarding the LED of the light emitting decoration, the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed by making the light amount of the LED adjustable. However, when it is configured such that the LED of the light emitting decoration that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to blink with a controlled light amount when an abnormality such as detection of irregularities due to a magnet or vibration occurs, When the adjusted amount of light is made dark, the occurrence of an abnormality may not be noticed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, when the operator reduces the light intensity of the LED of the light-emitting decoration and neglects to return the light intensity of the LED after the work is completed, the light intensity of the LED is low and the pachinko machine 1 from the back side. Then, sometimes I did not notice the occurrence of abnormality. In this respect, in the present example, during a period in which some kind of abnormality occurs such as detection of fraud caused by a magnet or vibration, and the game cannot be played, the light amount of the LED of the light-emitting decorative body that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1 The adjustment is disabled, and the LED is controlled to blink with a predetermined light amount (for example, step 5 which is the upper limit light amount of the light amount that can be adjusted under normal conditions). Accordingly, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, when the light emitting area that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration blinks, the light emitting area does not become too dark. In other words, even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to detect the abnormality without noticing the occurrence of the abnormality, and it is possible to detect fraud on other pachinko machines 1. Can be prevented.

Similarly, regarding the light emitting decoration, when the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 3, the LEDs provided on the light emitting decoration are controlled to blink until the body frame 4 is closed. I have to. Then, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, as a light emitting area that can be brightened by the light emitting ornament, a light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, a right side surface of the back box 3010 (a right side surface of the pachinko machine 1). ), a light emitting region L2 near the transparent part, and a light emitting region L3 near the transparent part on the left side surface (left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) of the back box 3010 are provided, and the LED provided on the light emitting decoration is controlled to blink. At this time, these light emitting areas are set to blink. For example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in the island facility and the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened for maintenance, the main body of another pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility is opened. Even if a fraudulent person opens the frame 4 illegally, it is difficult to notice the illegal opening because the front side of the pachinko machine 1 that has been illegally opened cannot be visually recognized. However, in this example, when a fraudulent person illegally opens the body frame 4 of another pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility, it is possible to make it brighter by the luminous decoration of the other pachinko machine 1. By blinking the light emitting area, it becomes possible to recognize an unauthorized opening action through the inside of the island facility. In other words, even if the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed, the act of illegally opening the pachinko machine 1 to another pachinko machine 1 on the same island facility is discovered through the inside of the island facility. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraud on the other pachinko machine 1.

Regarding the light-emitting ornament, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 3, not only until the main body frame 4 is closed, but also after a predetermined time elapses after the main body frame 4 is closed. Until then, the blinking control of the LED provided on the light-emitting ornament may be continued. With this, when a fraudulently opens the body frame 4 of another pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility, even if the opening is short, the light emission decoration of the other pachinko machine 1 Blinking of the light emitting area that can be brightened by the body will continue for a certain period of time, and it is possible to prevent the situation of overlooking an illegally opened action via the inside of the island facility as much as possible.

In addition, regarding the light emitting decoration, when the state shifts to the standby state in which the design change is not performed, the light amount of the LED provided on the light emitting decoration is changed until the pattern change is started and the standby state ends. I am trying to control the decrease. Then, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, as a light emitting area that can be brightened by the light emitting ornament, a light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, a right side surface of the back box 3010 (a right side surface of the pachinko machine 1). ) The light emitting area L2 near the transparent area and the light emitting area L3 near the transparent area on the left side surface (left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) of the back box 3010 are provided to reduce the light amount of the LED provided on the light emitting decoration. It was decided that these light emitting regions would become dark when controlled. For example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed on the island equipment and the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened for maintenance, the front side of the other pachinko machines 1 on the back side of the island equipment Since the side is not visible, it is difficult to know whether the pachinko machine 1 is playing a game. However, in this example, when the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility shifts to the standby state, the light emitting area that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration of the other pachinko machine 1 is darkened. Through the inside of the island equipment, it becomes possible to know whether or not a game is being played. In other words, even if the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened for maintenance, it is possible to know whether another pachinko machine 1 on the same island facility is playing a game through the inside of the island facility. It is possible to judge whether or not it is necessary to strengthen the monitoring so that fraud is not performed during the standby state.

(Regarding change in visual recognition mode of light emitting area during operation of light emitting ornament)
Further, when the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 is undergoing maintenance, the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is invisible, so that the pachinko machine 1 is movable on the front side. It's difficult to see if your body works properly. Therefore, an example in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the movable body operates normally even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

In this example, as a light emitting decoration that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the game board 5, a back-up front rotating decoration 3410, a back-up front decoration 3421, a back-up rear rotating decoration 3440, and a back-up. The rear decorative body 3451 and the back rear movable decorative body 3110 are provided, and the light emitting decorative body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. doing. Among them, the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440, the back-up rear decoration body 3451, and the back-side movable decoration body 3110 can be moved from the retracted position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. .. Then, in a state in which the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back-up rear decorative body 3451, and the back-back movable decorative body 3110 have moved to the appearance positions, the light from the LEDs of these light emitting decorative bodies is transparent to the tank rail 553. The light emitting region L1 in the vicinity of the region was prevented from reaching the region. In particular, the light from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the back rear decorative body 3451 is prevented from reaching the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. On the other hand, with respect to the light from the LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440, the back-up rear decoration body 3451, and the back-back movable decoration body 3110 move to the appearance position. As a result, the light is not located behind the front-rear decoration substrate 3422, light is not blocked, and the light reaches the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. That is, of the plurality of light emitting decorations, when the light emitting decoration that can operate is operated, the brightness in the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 changes, and the light is visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light emitting region L1. Thereby, even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to grasp whether or not the light emitting decoration body is operating by changing the visual aspect of the light emitting area L1.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, among the plurality of light emitting decorations, an operable light emitting decoration is initially operated. Specifically, the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440, the back-up rear decoration 3451, and the back-back movable decoration 3110 move from the retracted position to the appearance position, and then move from the appearance position to the retracted position. Repeatedly, the operation of confirming that these luminous ornaments can be moved to the appearance position is performed. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and operate the power switch of the power board provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. At times, it was not possible to directly visually confirm from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 whether or not the initial operation of the light-emitting decoration body was normally performed, and it was particularly difficult to confirm the operation. In this respect, in this example, the brightness of the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is changed in accordance with the operation of the light emitting ornament, and the light emitting area L1 is set even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. By visually observing the change in the visual recognition mode, it is possible to confirm that the initial operation of the light-emitting decorative body is normally performed. As a result, although the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized when the power switch is operated, when the initial operation of the light emitting decoration is performed, the visibility mode of the light emitting area L1 is changed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It is only necessary to confirm whether or not this is done, and it is possible to improve the efficiency of the visual work for the initial operation of the light emitting decoration.

It should be noted that among the plurality of light emitting decorations, the brightness in the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is configured to change when the light emitting decoration that can operate is operated. It is preferable that the light emitting decoration is configured so that the change in brightness becomes large between the retracted position and the appearance position. For example, an LED that emits light toward the light emitting region L1 is mounted on the rear surface of the front back decorative board 3422, but the back rear rotating decorative body 3440 is located behind the front front decorative board 3422. Also, when the back-up rear decorative body 3451 and the back-back movable decorative body 3110 move to the appearance position, the LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 may be controlled to be turned off. The LED itself may not be mounted on the rear surface of the upper front decorative substrate 3422. With such a configuration, when the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440 and the back-up rear decoration 3451 located behind the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 and the back-back movable decoration 3110 move to the appearance position, Light from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the front decorative substrate 3422 does not reach the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, and the brightness of the light emitting region L1 can be reduced. As a result, there is a large change in brightness in the light emitting area L1 between the state in which the light emitting decoration is in the retracted position and the state in which the light emitting decoration is in the appearance position, and whether the light emitting decoration is operating from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. You can easily figure out how.

(About the light from the back side of the performance display device)
Further, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example has a configuration in which light from the light emitting decoration provided on the game board 5 is used to brighten the back surface side. In the area behind the device 1600, the light from the LED of the light emitting decoration is blocked by the effect display device 1600, and it is not possible to brighten the portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to be brightened only by using the light emitting decoration. There is a nature. For example, in the area behind the effect display device 1600, if the area where the hall manager needs to work is dark, it becomes difficult to work on that area. Therefore, an example in which it is possible to make a predetermined portion bright even in the area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 behind the effect display device 1600 will be described below.

First, the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 309. FIG. 309 is a diagram showing an opening provided on the back surface side of the effect display device. As shown in FIG. 309, the effect display device 1600 is provided so as to close a box-shaped box body 1611 (metal frame) having openings in the front and back and an opening on the front side of the box body 1611, and displays a predetermined image. And a transparent light guide plate 1613 provided behind the liquid crystal panel 1612 and capable of radiating light toward the liquid crystal panel 1612, and below the light guide plate 1613. , A light emitting substrate 1615 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the light guide plate 1613 are mounted, and a light emitting substrate 1615 provided behind the light guide plate 1613 so as to close an opening on the rear side of the box 1611. A metal back panel 1614 (metal back cover) capable of blocking light from the light plate 1613 to the rear is provided. Although not shown, the effect display device 1600 includes a panel drive substrate that drives the liquid crystal panel 1612.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted side by side on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 can emit light toward the light guide plate 1613 located above the light emitting substrate 1615. In addition, the light guide plate 1613 can receive light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 and can surface-emit the front side of the light guide plate 1613, and can be positioned in front of the light guide plate 1613. Light can be emitted toward the liquid crystal panel 1612 that operates. Therefore, the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be efficiently irradiated with light, and a predetermined image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be viewed brightly.

In addition, the light emitting substrate 1615 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface excluding the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface and other mounting components. The coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with high reflectance. Therefore, the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be efficiently irradiated with light, and a predetermined image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be viewed brightly.

Further, on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615, a connector 1615a for electrically connecting to the production drive board 1720 is mounted. The connector 1615a is an opaque member. The connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615 has a terminal surface facing rearward, and by connecting with a connector on the wiring side where the wires from the production drive board 1720 are bundled, the connector 1615a and the production are produced. The driving substrate 1720 can be electrically connected. Thereby, the production driving board 1720 can control whether or not the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615 are turned on, brightness adjustment, and the like.

The light guide plate 1613 is configured such that the front surface side of the light guide plate 1613 strongly emits light by receiving light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615, but only on the front side of the light guide plate 1613. On the other hand, the rear surface and the side surface of the light guide plate 1613 are also configured to emit light weakly. As described above, the light emitting substrate 1615 has the coating film made of the white solder resist on the surface excluding the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface and other mounting components, The light emission is strong not only on the front side of the light plate 1613 but also on the rear surface side and the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613.

The back panel 1614 is configured to block the light from the light guide plate 1613 that emits light by receiving light from the plurality of LEDs, while the back panel 1614 does not receive the light from the light guide plate 1613. A plurality of openings that can pass through are intentionally provided at predetermined positions. Thereby, the light from the rear surface side or the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 which receives and emits light from the plurality of LEDs is emitted rearward (rearward of the effect display device 1600) from the plurality of openings. It is possible.

Specifically, when viewed from the rear of the effect display device 1600, the opening A of the back panel 1614 is provided in the lower left portion of the back panel 1614, and the two openings B are provided on the right side of the back panel 1614 and slightly toward the center. The opening C is provided on the right side portion along the right end of the back panel 1614, and the opening D is provided on the upper side portion along the upper end of the back panel 1614.

First, the opening A of the back panel 1614 is provided at a position corresponding to the rear of the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615. Further, the opening A is an opening that is slightly larger than the connector 1615a. As a result, the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615 can be seen through the opening A. Then, since the light from the rear surface or the side surface of the light guide plate 1613 which receives the light from the plurality of LEDs and emits light is emitted from the opening A, the light emitting region L5 around the connector 1615a is brightened. Can be seen. Thus, the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615 needs to be connected to the connector 1615a on the wiring side where the wires from the production drive board 1720 are bundled, but the light emitting area L5 around the connector 1615a. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not the connector is properly connected to the wiring side connector by visually recognizing brightly, and it is possible to facilitate the inspection work by the hall manager.

By the way, although a plurality of LEDs are provided on the light emitting substrate 1615, the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615 can be visually recognized from the opening A, whereas all of the plurality of LEDs can be visually recognized. It is configured to be impossible. That is, of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615, even the LED closest to the opening A is not provided at a position visible from the opening A. For example, when light from some LEDs of the plurality of LEDs is directly irradiated through the opening A, when performing work on the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615, Direct light from the LED enters the eyes of the operator, making it difficult to perform the work. On the other hand, since the light from the plurality of LEDs is indirectly emitted through the opening A, it becomes difficult to work on the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615. It can be prevented. Similarly, the openings B to D of the back panel 1614 are configured such that none of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615 can be seen through the openings B to D.

The opening B of the back panel 1614 is provided on the right side of the back panel 1614 when viewed from the rear of the effect display device 1600, at a position slightly closer to the center than the opening C and vertically spaced apart from each other. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces the front. However, with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, the rear side of the game board 5 is shown. A back cover 640 is provided so as to cover the. The back cover 640 can be opened and closed centering on the left side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Then, on the right side of the back cover 640, two operation parts 640a are provided which are vertically separated so that a worker can operate them, while the main body frame 4 corresponds to each of the two operation parts 640a. At the position where the two operation parts 640a can be attached/detached, two attachment/detachment parts are provided. By attaching/detaching the operation part 640a to/from the attachment/detachment part, the back cover 640 is attached to the main body frame 4. Can be opened and closed. The back cover 640 (the operation portion 640a thereof) and the detachable portion are both transparent or translucent members.

Then, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 are provided at positions corresponding to the rear of the opening B of the back panel 1614 (rear of the effect display device 1600). ing. That is, since the light from the rear surface or the side surface of the light guide plate 1613 which receives and emits light from the plurality of LEDs is emitted from the opening B, the operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 are attached. Is provided at a position capable of receiving such light. As a result, the operating portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 can receive the light from the opening B and brightly recognize the light emitting region L6 near the operating portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640. When performing work on various boards such as the main control board 1310 attached to the game board 5, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4, but the operation unit 640a of the back cover 640. By brightly visually recognizing the light emitting region L6 near the attaching/detaching portion, the operator can easily confirm the object to be operated, and it is easy to attach/detach the back cover 640 to/from the body frame 4, and the hall manager The inspection work can be facilitated.

Further, the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 positioned on the right side of the outer frame 2 as an axis when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 1. That is, the operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 are provided at positions close to the open axis of the main body frame 4. A plurality of pachinko machines 1 are provided side by side on the game island, and the interior of the game island is dark in a closed space. Then, in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the light from the outside (light of the hole) reaches the part of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that is far from the open axis of the main body frame 4. While it is easy and bright, it is possible to see brightly because it is hard for external light (hole light) to reach the part of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 near the open axis of the main frame 4. Can not do it. In this respect, the operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 are located on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 near the opening axis of the body frame 4, and the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. However, light from the outside (light from the hole) is hard to reach, but by receiving light from the opening B, the light emitting region L6 near the operation portion 640a of the back cover 640 and the detachable portion can be visually recognized brightly. You can

The opening C of the back panel 1614 is provided on the right side portion along the right end of the back panel 1614 when viewed from behind the effect display device 1600. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces the front, but in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it is behind the opening C. A payout unit 560 is provided at the position. The payout unit 560 guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering downward direction, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 for the door frame 3 side Or a lower full tank ball path unit 610 that guides to the substrate unit 620 side, but behind the opening C, the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit. 600 is located. Note that at least the ball guiding unit 570, the dispensing device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 of the dispensing unit 560 are transparent members.

Since the light from the rear surface side or the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 that receives and emits light from the plurality of LEDs is emitted from the opening C, the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560, The light emitting region L7 near the dispensing device 580 and the upper tank full ball path unit 600 can be visually recognized brightly. As a result, in the payout unit 560, there is a possibility that a ball jam will occur when guiding the game ball B downward from the tank rail 553, but by making the light emitting area L7 near the payout unit 560 visible brightly, the game It is possible to easily check whether or not there is a ball clogging in the passage for guiding the ball B, and when the ball clogging occurs, the ball clogging can be easily removed. The work can be facilitated.

The opening D of the back panel 1614 is provided in the upper portion along the upper end of the back panel 1614 when viewed from the rear of the effect display device 1600. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces the front. A tank rail 553 is provided at the position. Note that the tank rail 553 uses a transparent member and can transmit light with high transmittance. Then, since the light from the rear surface side or the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 which receives and emits light from the plurality of LEDs is emitted from the opening D, the light emitting region near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. L1 can be visually recognized brightly.

As described above in detail, the light-emitting decoration provided on the game board 5 is abnormal when some abnormalities such as detection of fraud caused by a magnet or vibration occur and it becomes impossible to play the game. Until the problem is solved, the LED provided on the light emitting decoration is controlled to blink. That is, of the back side of the pachinko machine 1, as the light emitting area that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1). ) The light emitting area L2 near the transparent portion and the light emitting area L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface (left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) of the back box 3010 are provided, and the LED provided on the light emitting decoration is controlled to blink. As a result, these light emitting areas are supposed to blink.

In addition, when some kind of abnormality occurs such as detecting fraud caused by magnets or vibrations, and it becomes impossible to play a game, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the outer frame 3 is It may be necessary to open the main body frame 4 and perform maintenance on members provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. For example, in order to perform maintenance on various substrates arranged inside the back cover 640, it is necessary to operate the operation unit 640 a of the back cover 640 to open the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4. In some cases, ball clogging may occur in the dispensing unit 560, and it may be necessary to remove the ball clogging. However, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the LED provided on the light emitting substrate 1615 of the effect display device 1600 is controlled to blink, similarly to the LED provided on the light emitting decoration, so that maintenance can be performed. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the work target. In this respect, in the present example, even if the production display device 1600 is in a situation in which a game cannot be played due to some abnormality such as detection of fraud caused by a magnet or vibration, The LED provided on the light emitting substrate 1615 is not controlled to blink, but is always controlled to be lit as in the normal state. In other words, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, as a light emitting area that can be brightened by receiving light from the opening of the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600, the surrounding area of the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615. A light emitting area L5, a light emitting area L6 near the operation portion 640a of the back cover 640 and the attaching/detaching portion, a light emitting area L7 near the dispensing unit 560, and a light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 are provided. The LEDs provided on the light emitting substrate 1615 of the ideograph device 1660 are controlled to be constantly lit in the same manner as in the normal state, so that the visibility of these light emitting regions does not change. With this, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the LED provided on the light-emitting decoration is controlled to blink, but for the places where maintenance is highly required, the constant lighting control is performed as in the normal time. By providing such a light emitting region, the visibility is good without any change, and the efficiency of the maintenance work at the time of an abnormality on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

(Regarding the visibility of the gap between the control boards provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1)
Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (the back side of the back box 3010), various substrates and wirings for connecting the various substrates are provided. The pachinko machine 1 of this example is provided with a light-emitting ornament provided on the game board 5 and a light from the opening of the back panel 1614 in the effect display device 1600 to make the back side brighter. If all areas on the back side of the machine 1 are configured to be bright, it becomes easier for the hall manager to perform maintenance work in the island facility, while the various boards provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 This makes it easier for fraudsters to commit fraud. Therefore, an example in which a fraudulent person is less likely to cheat on various substrates provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 while making the back side of the pachinko machine 1 brighter will be described below. ..

As shown in FIG. 306, as a light emitting decoration for brightening the back side and the side of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the game board 5, a back-up front rotating decoration 3410, a back-up front decoration 3421, a back-up rear A decorative body 3451 and a back rear movable decorative body 3110 are provided, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided on the left side of the game board 5, and three back front right are provided on the right side of the game board 5. A decorative body unit 3810 is provided. Then, the light emitting decoration provided on the upper portion of the game board 5 brightens the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, and the light emitting decoration provided on the left side of the game board 5 is By observing the pachinko machine 1 from the rear side, the light emitting area L2 near the transparent portion of the right side surface of the back box 3010 (right side surface of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened, and the light emitting decoration provided on the right side of the game board 5 is By visually observing the pachinko machine 1 from the rear side, the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) of the back box 3010 is brightened.

Further, as a characteristic configuration for making the back side of the pachinko machine 1 brighter, an opening of the back panel 1614 in the effect display device 1600 can be cited. Specifically, the opening A is provided on the lower left side of the back panel 1614, the opening B is provided on the right side of the back panel 1614, slightly toward the center, and the opening C is provided on the right side of the back panel 1614. The opening D is provided above the back panel 1614. Then, the light from the opening A of the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600 brightens the light emitting region L5 around the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615, and the light from the opening B operates the back cover 640. The light emitting area L6 near the portion 640a and the detachable portion is brightened, the light from the opening C brightens the light emitting area L7 near the dispensing unit 560, and the light from the opening D is near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. The light emitting region L1 is brightened. Note that the light from the opening A of the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600 brightens the light emitting region L6 around the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615, but the main control is provided behind the opening A. Since the main control board 1310 of the unit 1300 is located, the light from the opening A is blocked by the main control board 1310, making it difficult to visually recognize the light emitting region L6 from the rear of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the panel relay board 1710 of the drive board unit 1700, which are attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Each of the production driving boards 1720 is provided with a pilot lamp at a position visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The pilot lamp is a member for notifying whether or not each board is operating normally by means of the light emitting mode of the LED. Then, the light from the pilot lamp of the peripheral control board 1510 brightens the light emitting area L8 near the pilot lamp, and the light from the pilot lamp of the performance driving board 1720 brightens the light emitting area L9 near the pilot lamp. However, the light from the pilot lamp of the main control board 1310 brightens the light emitting region L10 near the pilot lamp. That is, these configurations can also be mentioned as a configuration for making the back side of the pachinko machine 1 brighter.

The above-mentioned light emitting area is provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the drive board unit 1700. The panel relay board 1710 and the performance drive board 1720 are provided around the control board group. That is, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, except the control board group attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the light emitting area is configured to be bright. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment, the interior of the island equipment is blocked and dark, but by making the back of the pachinko machine 1 brighter, the interior of the island equipment can be made brighter.

On the other hand, of the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the panel relay board 1710 of the drive board unit 1700 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The light emitting area is not provided in the area where the control board group including the effect drive board 1720 is provided. That is, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, a gap between the control boards that form the control board group (a gap between the main control board 1310, the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720, the peripheral control board 1510, and the panel). The gap between the relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720) is darkened. The panel relay board 1710 is a board that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. The panel relay board 1710 is connected to the main control board 1310 by wiring and is also connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by wiring. Then, such wirings are arranged in the gaps between the control boards forming the control board group. Of these, in particular, the main control board 1310 is for controlling the progress of the game, so if an illegal act is made to the wiring connected to the main control board 1310, a cheating person may gain a profit. There is a problem that an unjust situation will occur. In this respect, while making the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 brighter, by making the gap between the control boards that form the control board group darker, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the wiring arranged in the gap. It is possible to prevent fraud on the wiring or the like connected to the control board 1310.

(About the visibility of the structure against metal powder)
Next, an electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portions 553aa formed in plural in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553. ) Will be described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 310. FIG. 310 is an enlarged schematic view showing a part of the cross section taken along the line CC of FIG. 99(a), and shows an outline of the configuration of measures against metal powder.

The game balls B flowing from the ball tank 552 to the tank rails 553 are separated from the game balls B by the abrasion such as the game balls B colliding with each other, rubbing against each other, and the metal balls fall off. Therefore, when the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B is attached to the main guide portion 553a, the flow of the game ball B in the downstream direction is blocked, and the game ball B is smoothly moved toward the downstream side. It becomes difficult to supply the game ball B to the payout device 580 and the payout of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is stopped.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 306, in this example, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a so that the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Has been done. Thereby, for example, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide part 553a by naturally falling from the main guide part 553a to the outside through the cutout part 553aa. The metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B adhering to the main guide portion 553a due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guide portion 553a falls to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa. By doing so, the metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a, and a cotton swab is inserted into the cutout portion 553aa by a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall, which is caused by the abrasion of the game ball B attached to the main guiding portion 553a. The metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a by performing the work of removing the metal powder.

By the way, the metal powder (foreign matter) of the game ball B falling from the plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged below the tank rail 553. Then, an electrical trouble may occur, causing a problem in the peripheral control unit 1500, a malfunction, or the like. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 includes ICs such as a peripheral control IC, a ROM, and an SDRAM described later, and the peripheral data ROM board described below includes an IC such as a peripheral data ROM. As the pin spacing of these ICs becomes smaller, the pin spacing of various connectors 1615a and special connectors 1615a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 becomes narrower, and the number of connectors 1615a on the peripheral control board 1510 increases, so that various connectors 1615a Since the gap between the two is narrowed and the gap between the connector 1615a and the special connector 1615a is also narrowed, it is necessary to take measures against an electrical trouble caused by a foreign substance falling from the tank rail.

First, as shown in FIG. 310, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 are behind the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). As compared to the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface, the rearward displacement (in the present embodiment, about ½ of the diameter of the game ball B). They are arranged with the distance dimension of.

As described above, the cross-sectional shape in the front-back direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 on which the tank rail 553 is arranged is from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed in a staircase shape in which a plurality of bends are made downward. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 310, the first eaves portion 551da extended to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 is configured such that the lower end portion of the top plate portion is substantially flush with the rear surface of the tank rail 553. .. Further, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper end portion of the back cover 640 is in contact with the rear surface of the first eaves portion 551da in surface contact.

As a result, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa can be received and attached at the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. There is. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa by the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a covers the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the base body 1502. It is suppressed that the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa enters the inside of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the game is stopped. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

Although described in detail above, as shown in FIG. 306, in this example, as the light emitting decoration that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the game board 5, the back-up front rotating decoration 3410 and the back-up front decoration are provided. A body 3421, a back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440, a back-up rear decoration body 3451, and a back-back movable decoration body 3110 are provided, and the light-emitting decoration body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 is at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is brightened. That is, since the light from the LEDs of these light emitting decorations is irradiated toward the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B is the tank rail 553. When the tank rail 553, which is a transparent member, is visually recognized from the back of the pachinko machine 1 when it is attached to the main guiding portion 553a of the pachinko machine 1, the metal powder floats up like a black dot, and the visibility with respect to the metal powder is good. It has become a thing. With this, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the metal powder is attached to the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553, and the work for removing the metal powder from the cutout portion 553aa of the main guide portion 553a can be efficiently performed. It can be carried out.

The light emitting region L1 also includes the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a located below the main guiding portion 553a. The first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a and the back cover 630 are transparent members. That is, since the light from the LED of the light emitting decoration provided on the upper portion of the game board 5 is irradiated toward the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a in the light emitting region L1, the cutout portion 553aa is formed. When the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guide portion 553a is attached to the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a located below, a transparent member from the rear of the pachinko machine 1 When the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a is visually recognized, the metal powder floats up like a black dot, and the visibility with respect to the metal powder is good. Thereby, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the metal powder is attached to the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a, and also for the work of removing the metal powder from the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. , Can be done efficiently.

Regarding the above, even when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the closed pachinko machine 1 is provided. Is bright, so by opening the main frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility, in the closed pachinko machine 1, the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B is changed to the tank rail 553. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is attached to the main guiding portion 553a of the above and the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. In addition, the light from the LEDs of the back-up front rotating decoration 3410 and the back-up front decoration 3421, the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440, the back-up rear decoration 3451, and the back-rear movable decoration 3110 of the pachinko machine 1 is the tank. Although the light is emitted toward the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the rail 553, it is not desirable that the LED light source is directly viewed during the maintenance of the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is not desired. With respect to the light from the LED that is made to be bright, the light source of the LED is configured as indirect light that is not directly viewed.

In addition, after confirming the adhesion of the metal powder, when removing the metal powder from the main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a, the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 is used. The light-emitting decorations that brighten the light-emitting region L1 in the vicinity of the transparent part (back front front decoration 3410 and back front decoration 3421, back rear rotation decoration 3440, back rear decoration 3451, back rear movable) It is also conceivable that the light from the decorative body 3110) interferes with the work of removing it. Therefore, after confirming the adhesion of the metal powder by opening the main body frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1, when the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 whose metal powder is to be removed is opened, Of the tank rail 553 in which the light-emitting region L1 near the transparent portion is brightened (the front-up front rotating decoration 3410 and the back-up front decoration 3421, the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440, and the back-up rear decoration 3451). It is also possible to turn off the LED of the back and rear movable decoration body 3110) so that the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is not illuminated. In addition, not only the light-emitting decoration that brightens the light-emitting region L1 but also the LED light that may hinder the work of removing the metal powder may be turned off. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light from the LED that makes the back side of the pachinko machine 1 brighter from hindering the work of removing the metal powder.

However, depending on the hall environment, the hall itself may be dark, and it may be preferable that the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is bright when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained such as removal of metal powder. Therefore, in a state where the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened, a light-emitting decorative body (a front-up front rotating decorative body 3410 A light emission start switch capable of starting the light emission of the LEDs of the back-up front decoration 3421, the back-up rear rotation decoration 3440, the back-up rear decoration 3451, and the back-rear movable decoration 3110 may be provided. Such a light emission start switch is provided at a position that can be operated only when the body frame 4 is open. With this, in the state where the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened, the hall manager can freely control whether or not to start the light emission of the LED that makes the back side of the pachinko machine 1 brighter, and adjust to the hall environment. be able to.

Further, the tank rail 553 is molded from a transparent material (polycarbonate resin or the like), and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clogging (ball clogging) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be increased. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movable performance unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, the gear, the belt, etc. can be confirmed with the game board 5 still attached to the main body frame 4. It is possible to achieve the same operational effect as the operational effect.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, further, in the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the contact portion with the first eaves portion 551da so that the back cover 640 covers at least a part of the rear side of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The metal powder of the game ball B attached to the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a by being dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa is attached to the top plate portion. When the metal powder falls from the first eaves portion 551da of the 551a, the metal powder is on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (on the rear side of the rear effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the base body 1502, and the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a covers the peripheral control unit 1500. It is possible to suppress the entry into the body 1501 and suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and the back cover 640 are the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. Is prevented from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eaves or a cover that can be used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, since the first eaves portion 551da is provided below the cutout portion 553aa, the main cutout portion 553aa is used not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened. The metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the guide portion 553a to the outside can be received and attached at the first eaves portion 551da, and the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa. The metal powder falls toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa is peripheral control unit. It is possible to suppress the entry into the cover body 1501 of 1500, and to suppress the occurrence of electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

In the example described above, the upper end of the back cover 640 is in contact with the rear surface of the first eaves portion 551da when assembled to the main body frame 4, but the upper end of the back cover 640 and the first eaves portion 551da are in contact with each other. You may make it arrange|position separately from the part 551da. That is, the back cover 640 and the first eaves portion 551da cooperate with each other, and the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa enters the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The arrangement of the back cover 640 and the first eaves portion 551da is not limited as long as the entry is suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the attached effect display device 1600 is displaced in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 (in this embodiment, about 2 minutes of the diameter of the game ball B). Due to the arrangement which is displaced by the distance dimension of 1) (that is, the peripheral control unit 1500 is not arranged directly below the cutout portion 553aa), the game ball B from the tank rail 553 is moved. It is effective for metal powder measures that can prevent electrical troubles due to metal powder.

Further, the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface (cover flat plate described later) of the cover body 1501, while the upper side, the left side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later), Since it is not provided on each of the cover side walls provided on the lower side and the right side, temporarily, the metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (the cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later). Even so, it is possible to make it difficult to enter the inside of the cover body 1501.

In addition, among the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover plate of the cover body 1501, respectively, one or a combination thereof is provided except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. A plurality of 1501az may be formed. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, and a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. .. Even with this configuration, foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B) generated by the game ball B drops toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling on the various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to foreign matter falling from the tank rail 553. The reason for not forming the ventilation holes 1501az on the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation holes 1501az are formed on the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is provided through the ventilation holes 1501az. When foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls inward toward the inside of the device, the peripheral control board box 1505 electrically drops by various foreign substances to the various substrates. This is because there is a high probability that trouble will occur.

Further, when the ventilation holes 1501 are not provided on the upper surface of the cover body 1501, the heat radiation function is supplemented by increasing the number of ventilation holes 1501 provided on the other surface or expanding the area of the ventilation holes 1501. May be. This can contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505 and suppress the occurrence of electrical trouble such as thermal runaway.

Further, the upper surface of the cover body 1501 attached to the pachinko machine 1 is substantially horizontal. Therefore, when the metal powder of the game ball B is dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa and adheres to the upper surface of the cover body 1501, the metal powder may be retained on the upper surface of the cover body 1501. it can. This can prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from entering the inside of the cover body 1501. In addition, if the metal powder of the game ball B is not dropped toward the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501, a part or all of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 may be inclined.

Moreover, you may make it attach the 1st eaves member 551a arrange|positioned under the tank rail 553 to the top plate part 551a as another member (another structural component).

In addition, when the upper and rear portions of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are covered by the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a and/or the back cover 640, or in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553. When the plurality of cutout portions 553aa and the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are arranged to be displaced in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of cutout portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a. When the probability that the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside goes to the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is low, one of the upper surfaces of the cover body 1501 attached to the pachinko machine 1 Ventilation holes 1501az may be provided in a portion (for example, a corner portion of the cover body 1501 and most of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 are closed, but ventilation holes 1501az are formed in a part of the top surface).

Further, the present technical idea is not limited to completely preventing the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. In comparison with a conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to suppress the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. For example, a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 attached to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a corner of the cover body 1501 and most of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 is closed, but a ventilation hole 1501az is formed in part). Those provided with ventilation holes 1501az are also included in the present technical idea.

A plurality of slit holes are formed in the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. In addition, the cover body 1501 has seven connector holes along the lower side thereof, seven connector holes, which will be described later, provided in the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 and a position corresponding to the volume adjustment switch, and Volume adjusting holes are formed, and two connector holes are formed at positions corresponding to two connectors provided on a liquid crystal output board, which will be described later. When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501 are formed with a gap to form these gaps. The seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are respectively exposed through the seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole formed on the cover body 1501. The volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from the volume control hole. Further, when a liquid crystal output substrate to be described later is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output substrate and two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501 form a gap, Two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output substrate are exposed through these two connector holes.

The cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is configured such that a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover body 1501 from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, and a shield plate accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. A plurality of ventilation holes 1540az are formed in 1540 to take in the above-mentioned clearances (seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501). The volume control switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the clearance provided in the volume control hole formed in the cover body 1501, and the two connectors provided in the liquid crystal output board and the two connectors provided in the cover body 1501. It will be taken in through the hole and the gap formed in).

By the way, when the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 takes in the air outside the peripheral control unit 1500, a heavy powder called the metal powder of the game ball B is influenced by the flow of air and moves toward the inner space of the cover body 1501. The probability of being sucked in is increased, and due to an electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by the sucked metal powder, various electronic components provided on various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 that are mounted inside the cover body 1501. And so on.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), the game ball is formed by forming the first eaves portion 551da along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500. It can be configured to have a function as an eaves for preventing heavy powder called B metal powder from being sucked into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 from the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501. A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be given later.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 is formed with a plurality of cutout portions 553aa so that the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. However, one notch, hole, or groove may be formed in the ball passage along which the game ball B rolls, similar to the notch 553aa. Specifically, in the ball guiding unit 570 having a single guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, the metal powder of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a is guided from the guide passage 570a. Notches, holes, or grooves that can be removed to the outside can be formed on the rear surface of the guiding unit base 571 of the guiding unit 570. Below the ball guiding unit 570, a payout device 580, a board unit 620 and the like are arranged. The payout device 580 has a board and the like on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted, and the board unit 620 is a power supply board 630. , A payout control board 633, an interface board 635, and the like, and various boards are arranged. Therefore, when forming a notch, hole, or groove on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571, a game ball that falls through the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571. It is necessary to prevent the metal powder of B from adhering to various substrates arranged below the induction unit 570. Therefore, an eave-shaped member can be formed so as to project rearward along the upper side of the dispensing device rear lid 582 of the dispensing device 580, and a cutout portion formed on the rear surface of the guiding unit base 571. The positions of the holes, the grooves, and the positions of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580 is mounted can be staggered, or both can be adopted. Can also Further, an eaves-shaped member is formed to project rearward along the upper side of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, and the like. The position of the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the guiding unit base 571 and the positions of the power supply board cover 631, the payout control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636 can be configured. It is possible to configure by staggering, or both can be employed.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention as shown below. And the design can be changed.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine is illustrated as a game machine, but it is also applicable to other game machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrange ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums using game medals ( It is also applicable to a slot machine that rotates a spinning drum or reel). Here, the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 311 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

As shown in FIG. 311, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body (box) 6004. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body portion (box) 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). With this hinge as the center of rotation, a key is inserted into the key hole 6005 of the metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turned clockwise, so that the front door (front frame) 6002 is main body. It can be opened from a portion (box) 6004.

The metal locking device is attached to the cylinder mounting frame of the metal door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002, and cooperates with the lock unit (not shown) to form a main body (box) 6004. It is used for locking and closing the front door (front frame) 6002. The metal locking device is attached to the metal cylinder cylinder body (not shown) extending in the front-rear direction, the metal keyhole 6005 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body, and the rear side of the cylinder body. And a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) that is inserted into the keyhole 6005 and rotates together with the rotation of a regular metal key. The cylinder body of the locking device made of metal penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit from the rear side, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end toward the front at positions facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmission member is formed such that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box) 6004, the metal transmission cylinder of the metal locking unit (not shown) is inserted from the rear. By inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder into the pair of notches, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the keyhole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder and rotated. When the rotation transmission member of the metal locking device and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit are in contact with each other in the state where the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body part (box body) 6004, it is made of metal. The locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

The door frame reinforcing unit has a function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to give rigidity and also functions as a door frame metal ground, and a main body part (not shown) via a door frame metal ground wire. The box 6004 is electrically connected to a ground substrate provided inside. That is, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as a frame gland on the door frame side. This grounding board (not shown) is capable of once collecting electromagnetic noise generated at various places and grounding (grounding) it to the island facility of the game hall. It is electrically connected to the equipment ground.

An open switch (not shown) capable of detecting the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004 is arranged on the main body (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. There is. This opening switch detects opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004 due to the input of an electric signal by the opening/closing operation of the metal locking device. The opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 is detected with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 independently of the opening/closing operation by the metal locking device. Further, the release switch is not arranged near the metal locking device and is located below the metal locking device so as not to be affected by electromagnetic noise that has penetrated into the metal locking device. An opening switch is arranged on the portion (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. In this way, even if electromagnetic wave noise penetrates into the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch is not affected by the electromagnetic wave noise.

The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative parts. Some of the various decorative portions are not plated with decoration at all, and some are coated with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is a noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating and has conductivity, so electromagnetic noise may enter. Among various decorative portions, those having decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit forming the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown). (Various decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcing unit via wiring not shown, while the conductive member is directly attached to the metal door frame reinforcing unit. Some are electrically connected). Thus, by transmitting the electromagnetic noise that has entered the various decorative portions to the metal door frame reinforcing unit, it is possible to prevent the various decorative substrates included in the various decorative portions from entering the board ground. Also, of the various decorative parts, electromagnetic noise that has entered the ones with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), and the door frame metal ground wire is connected. Through the main body (box) 6004 to the ground substrate provided inside, and from the ground substrate through the island equipment ground wire to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall, is removed from the slot machine 6000. That is, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side as described above.

It should be noted that an electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a charge eliminating portion at a predetermined position on the front surface of the front door (front frame) 6002, or when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body portion (box body) 6004, An electrostatic elimination pad may be provided as a charge eliminating portion at a portion that is an open side that is opposite to a side (closed side) where the hinge is arranged. The static electricity removal pad can remove noise (electromagnetic noise) generated by electrostatic discharge.

The front door (front frame) 6002 is for decorating the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and is provided with various decorative portions. Some of these various decorative portions may not be subjected to decorative plating at all, Some of them have decorative plating on their entire surface. Of the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring not shown. , And the ground board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 was electrically connected to the ground of the island facility in the game hall through the island facility ground line, but the door frame metal ground line was used. A metal door frame reinforcing unit and a power supply board are electrically connected to a terminal of a power supply board of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004 without electrically connecting to the ground board. May be electrically connected. The power board is supplied with 24V AC from the island facility in the game hall. This AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral). The L terminal of the power supply board to which L (live) is input is connected to the non-ground side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) that transiently protects against an excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board. Although this surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has a high resistance value and almost no current flows, if an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, the resistance value instantly decreases and a current flows, and when the excessive voltage disappears. , And has the ability to return to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). Thereby, the electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcing unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply substrate to the ground side (earth) from the N terminal of the power supply substrate by the surge protection element (surge absorber) and is removed from the slot machine 6000. ..

The upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is provided with a game panel 6006, and the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is formed with a protrusion protruding forward from the game panel 6006. The medal slot 6008, the bet buttons 6010 and 6012, the starting lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 on this protrusion. A storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged in the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a saucer 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. These bet buttons 6010 and 6012, the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, and the storage settlement button 6022 are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. Has been done. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004.

In the main control board box 1320, a setting change board 1311 on which a setting key switch 1311a capable of changing a set value is mounted is housed together with the main control board 1310. That is, since the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004, the setting key switch is set. 1311a is arranged inside the main body (box) 6004. The setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body part (box) 6004. It may be attached and fixed to the casing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the portion (box) 6004. Further, on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, in addition to the setting key switch 1311a, a setting switching button for selecting and switching a setting value, a 7-segment LED display unit with a decimal point (so-called dot) The setting display 1310g configured by, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z described above may be mounted.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at a substantially central position of the game panel 6006. Through the display window, three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 and a production device (not shown) are installed. You can see through. The three variable rotary bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side attachment member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004. On the other hand, the production device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002.

On these variable rotators, a light-transmissive pattern band, in which a plurality of types of patterns (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as pattern information, is attached to each tubular frame. ing. Such a tubular variable rotating body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotating body are connected to each other. These stepping motors are drive-controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shaft of the stepping motor, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously changed from the above-mentioned display window from top to bottom. It looks like.

The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect bodies (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500, based on various commands from the main control board 1310, performs operation control of a plurality of movable effect bodies, drawing control of the effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, and the like. The progress of the production is controlled by performing various controls. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

The main control board 1310, as a game medium, a predetermined number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008, and the variable display of the symbol information is started based on the operation of the start lever 6014. The left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right The variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the lapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as a game medium to the tray 6026.

In the fusion game machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes a ball slot 6008′, and the main control board 1310 inserts a predetermined number of game balls into the ball slot 6008′ as a game medium to operate the start lever 6014. The variable display of the symbol information is started based on this, and the variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (big hit game state) on the condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls as a game medium to the tray 6026.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Gaming area 3000 Back unit 3100 Back unit 3100 Back production unit 3110 Back movable decoration body 3111 Decoration body (decoration member, decoration plate body)
3111a First decorative protrusion 3111d Metal decorative portion 3112 Decorative sheet (decorative member, decorative plate)
3113 Light guide radiation plate (decorative member, radiation plate)
3113a Body part 3113b Flange part (peripheral wall part)
3113c 1st LED accommodating part 3113d 2nd LED accommodating part 3113e Reflecting part 3114 Rear back decorative substrate (decorative substrate)
3114a First LED (LED, specific LED)
3114b Second LED (LED)
3114c Substrate body 3114d Copper foil 3114e Electronic component 3115 Decorative body base 3115a Cover plate part 3115b Flange part EL Creepage distance SL Predetermined distance

Claims (2)

A gaming machine having a gaming board for playing a game ,
A main body frame provided with the game board,
A front frame rotatably and axially supported by the body frame ;
A plurality of light emitting elements, which are provided on the front frame and can emit light in connection with the game, and which can emit light in a manner different from the normal state when an abnormality or malfunction occurs in the gaming machine, are mounted on the front mounting surface. And a front frame light emitting means including a front frame light emitting substrate ,
On the front mounting surface of the front frame light emitting substrate, a white coating film, and a notation portion formed in yellow on the white coating film and capable of specifying each of the plurality of light emitting elements, are formed,
When the front frame is in the open state, the front frame light emitting means allows the user to visually recognize that the front frame emits light in a manner different from the normal state not only from the front of the front frame but also from the rear of the front frame. A game machine provided on the front frame. The game board has a white area part in part
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein: